Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

1985-2014 Nemetschek Vectorworks, Incorporated. All The following are copyrights or trademarks of their
Rights Reserved. respective companies or organizations:
Nemetschek Vectorworks, Inc., hereafter referred to as Macintosh, QuickDraw 3D, QuickTime, and Quartz 2D
Nemetschek Vectorworks, and its licensors retain all are registered trademarks of Apple, Inc.
ownership rights to the MiniCAD Vectorworks iOS is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., and
computer program and all other computer programs as is used under license by Apple, Inc.
well as documentation offered by Nemetschek
Vectorworks. Use of Nemetschek Vectorworks software is Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the
governed by the license agreement accompanying your Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
original media. The source code for such software is a countries.
confidential trade secret of Nemetschek Vectorworks. You Android is a trademark of Google, Inc.
may not attempt to decipher, decompile, develop or
Amazon, Kindle, Kindle Fire, the Amazon Kindle logo
otherwise reverse engineer Nemetschek Vectorworks
and the Kindle Fire logo are trademarks of Amazon.com,
software. Information necessary to achieve
Inc. or its affiliates.
interoperability with this software may be furnished upon
request. FileMaker is a trademark of FileMaker, Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
The Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide was written Adobe, Adobe PDF Library, Adobe AIR, and the Adobe
and illustrated by Alexandra Duffy, Teresa Heaps, Kristin logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Bailey, and Susan Collins. PDFNet SDK is copyright PDFTron Systems,
This manual, as well as the software described in it, is 2001-2009, and distributed by Nemetschek Vectorworks
furnished under license and may only be used or copied in under license. All Rights Reserved.
accordance with the terms of such license. The PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application
information in this manual is furnished for informational or in the user documentation may not match
use only, is subject to change without notice, and should PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current
not be construed as a commitment by Nemetschek PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
Vectorworks. Nemetschek Vectorworks assumes no PANTONE and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies property of Pantone, Inc. Pantone, Inc., 2010.
that may appear in this manual.
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this software which are licensed to Nemetschek Vectorworks
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval to distribute for use only in combination with Vectorworks
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, Architect and Vectorworks Designer. PANTONE Color
electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without Data and/or software shall not be copied onto another disk
the express prior written permission of Nemetschek or into memory unless as part of the execution of the
Vectorworks. Permission is typically granted to reproduce Vectorworks Design Series products.
materials for personal use, but under no circumstances
CINEMA 4D is a registered trademark of MAXON
may it be used for commercial purposes or for financial
Computer GmbH, MAXON Computer Inc. and MAXON
gain. To obtain permission, contact Nemetschek
Computer Ltd.
Vectorworks (email [email protected]) or an
authorized Vectorworks distributor if not in the USA. Times and Helvetica are trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG
and/or its subsidiaries.
Existing artwork or images that you may desire to scan or
copy may be protected under copyright law. The ITC Zapf Dingbats is a registered trademark of
unauthorized incorporation of such artwork into your International Typeface Corporation.
work may be a violation of the rights of the author or Google Earth is a registered trademark of Google, Inc.
illustrator. Please be sure to obtain any permission
required from such authors. SketchUp and 3D Warehouse are trademarks of Trimble
Navigation Limited.
Vectorworks, Renderworks, and MiniCAD are registered
trademarks of Nemetschek Vectorworks, Inc. AutoCAD, FBX, and 3ds Max are registered trademarks
SmartCursor, and VectorScript are trademarks of of Autodesk, Inc.
Nemetschek Vectorworks, Inc.; X-ray Select (patent Parasolid is a registered trademark of Siemens Product
pending) Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
The Heliodon tool and Existing Tree tool were developed The Benjamin Moore paint color palettes supplied with
by Julian Carr, OzCAD, Sydney, Australia. certain Vectorworks Design Series products are based on
The television, video screen, LED screen, blended screen, color values supplied by Benjamin Moore & Co.
blended projector, speaker, and speaker array were created The Sherwin-Williams paint color palettes supplied with
by C. Andrew Dunning, Landru Design, Nashville, TN. certain Vectorworks Design Series products are based on
The Lighting Symbol Maintenance and Lighting color values supplied by The Sherwin-Williams
Inventory Setup commands, and the Lighting Pipe, Company.
Lighting Pipe Ladder, and Instrument Summary tools The Pittsburgh Paints paint color palette supplied with
were developed by Joshua Benghiat Lighting Design, certain Vectorworks Design Series products is based on
www.BenghiatLighting.com color values supplied by PPG Industries.
The www.caddetails.com library contains architecture and The Landmark plant database was created using public
landscape architecture symbols provided by CADdetails domain data. Nemetschek Vectorworks assumes no
Ltd. responsibility for inaccuracies, omissions, or errors in this
The Xfrog Plant Images library contains plant images by data.
Xfrog. Lightwright is a trademark of John McKernon.
The Kohler plumbing fixture libraries supplied with High End Systems' lighting symbols provided by, and
certain Vectorworks Design Series products are based on used with the permission of, High End Systems, Inc. High
geometry from the Kohler Company. End Systems is a registered servicemark of High End
The Marvin door and window libraries supplied with Systems, Inc., a division of Barco N.V.
certain Vectorworks Design Series products are based on Clay Paky lighting symbols are based on geometry
geometry from the Marvin Company. provided by Clay Paky S.P.A.
The Loewen door and window libraries supplied with Coemar lighting symbols are based on geometry provided
certain Vectorworks Design Series products are based on by Coemar manufacturing.
geometry from the Loewen Company. Martin lighting symbols are based on geometry
The Weather Shield door and window libraries supplied provided by Martin Professionals A/S.
with certain Vectorworks Design Series products are Selecon lighting symbols are based on geometry provided
based on geometry from Weather Shield Mfg. Inc. by Selecon, a division of Philips Global Entertainment
The AGA/Rayburn appliance library supplied with certain Lighting Group.
Vectorworks Design Series products are based on Vari-Lite lighting symbols are based on geometry
geometry from AGA Foodservices Group Plc. provided by Vari-Lite Corporation, a division of Philips
The Copper Beech Millwork molding profiles supplied Global Entertainment Lighting Group.
with certain Vectorworks Design Series products are Color Kinetics lighting symbols are based on geometry
based on geometry from Copper Beech Millwork, an provided by Color Kinetics, a division of Philips Solid
Amherst Woodworking and Supply, Inc., Company. State Lighting Solutions.
The Sub-Zero and Wolf appliance libraries supplied with James Thomas Lighting Symbols and Truss Symbols are
certain Vectorworks Design Series products are based on based on geometry provided by James Thomas
geometry from the Sub-Zero Freezer Company, Inc., and Engineering, Ltd.
the Wolf Appliance Company, Inc.
ADB lighting symbols are based on geometry provided by
The Knoll furniture library supplied with certain ADB-TTV Lighting Technologies.
Vectorworks Design Series products is based on geometry
supplied by the Knoll Furniture company. For more DTS lighting symbols are based on geometry provided by
information on their products, see www.knoll.com DTS, The Lighting Company.
The Herman Miller (HMI) furniture libraries supplied JB lighting symbols are based on geometry provided by
with certain Vectorworks Design Series products are JB Lighting.
based on geometry from Herman Miller, Inc. Eurotruss truss symbols are based on geometry provided
The Unilock hatch library supplied with certain by Eurotruss.
Vectorworks Design Series products is based on geometry Atlas Sound speaker symbols are based on geometry
from Unilock. provided by Atlas Sound Lp.
EAW Sound speaker symbols are based on geometry Contributions
provided by EAW sound, a division of LOUD Contributions were provided by Robert Anderson, Kevin
Technologies Inc. Linzey, Tom Urie, and Eric Gilbey.
d&b audiotechnik speaker symbols are based on Evanston Green Townhomes file used as the basis for
geometry provided by d&b audiotechnik GmbH. illustrations 2008 Nathan Kipnis Architects, Inc.
Meyer Sound speaker symbols are based on geometry Special thanks to Norm Harris (Marvin Windows and
provided by Meyer Sound Laboratories, Inc. Doors).
Rosco gobo textures and color information provided by Registration and Updates
and used with the permission of Rosco Laboratories, Inc. If you have not already done so, please register your copy
Rosco is a registered trademark of Rosco Laboratories, of the Vectorworks software with Nemetschek
Inc. Vectorworks at http://register.nemetschek.net.
Apollo gobo textures and color information provided by If you would like to receive automatic notification of
and used with the permission of Apollo Design Vectorworks software updates, you can select to
Technology, Inc. Apollo is a registered trademark of automatically check for updates on a weekly or monthly
Apollo Design Technology, Inc. basis from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences
GAM gobo textures and color information provided by (See Session Preferences on page 20 in the Vectorworks
and used with the permission of GAM the Great American Fundamentals Users Guide.)
Market, Inc. GAM is a registered trademark of GAM, Inc. Vectorworks License Agreement
GOBOLAND gobo textures provided by and used with The license agreement binding the use of this software can
permission of GOBOLAND. GOBOLAND is a registered be found in the Vectorworks ReleaseNotes directory or by
trademark. clicking License in the About Vectorworks dialog box.
GoboMan gobo textures and color information provided
by, and used with the permission of, GoboMan.
LEE gobo textures and color information provided by and
used with the permission of LEE Filters USA.
Rosco, Apollo, GAM, GOBOLAND, GoboMan, and LEE
images and color information are copyrighted. All rights
reserved. Their resale, redistribution, or use in derivative
works is prohibited.
Thomas Register is a trademark of, and PartSpec is a
registered trademark of Thomas Publishing Corp.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies or
organizations.
For Defense Agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use,
reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights of Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at 252.227-7013.
For civilian agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use,
reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the commercial
Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19.
Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. The contractor/manufacturer is
Nemetschek Vectorworks, Incorporated, 7150 Riverwood
Drive, Columbia, MD, 21046, USA.
Table of Contents
Preface .................................................................................................................................................. i
New Vectorworks Design Series Features .................................................................................................................. i
Learning Vectorworks .................................................................................................................................................xi
Technical Support and Training.................................................................................................................................xii

1 Setting up the Project ....................................................................................................................... 1

Document Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 2
Setting Up the Building Structure with Stories ............................................................................................................ 4
Creating Standard Viewports...................................................................................................................................... 9
Standard Naming...................................................................................................................................................... 11
Vectorworks Architect and Landmark Classes ......................................................................................................... 15
Mapping Classes and Layers ................................................................................................................................... 16
Spotlight Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Project Setup for Mechanical Design........................................................................................................................ 25
Records and Schedules............................................................................................................................................ 26
Working with Project Preference Sets ...................................................................................................................... 35
Creating Schedules Automatically ............................................................................................................................ 37
Sharing Custom Content Using Workgroup Folders................................................................................................. 37

2 Space Planning and Programming................................................................................................ 41

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................... 41
Space Planning......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Programming Studies ............................................................................................................................................... 90

3 Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls....................................................................................... 97

Creating Slabs .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark......................................................................................... 114
Creating Wall Features ........................................................................................................................................... 130

4 Creating the Building Shell .......................................................................................................... 135

Creating Structural Shapes in Vectorworks Design Series..................................................................................... 135
Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect...................................................................................... 139
Adding Roof Accessories........................................................................................................................................ 146
Framing................................................................................................................................................................... 150
Inserting Ceiling Grid Objects ................................................................................................................................. 172
ii | Table of Contents

5 Adding Design Series Windows and Doors................................................................................ 175

Inserting Windows .................................................................................................................................................. 175
Inserting Window Walls .......................................................................................................................................... 197
Inserting Doors ....................................................................................................................................................... 198
Creating a Window or Door Symbol ....................................................................................................................... 222

6 Adding Design Series Stairs ........................................................................................................ 225

Inserting Stairs........................................................................................................................................................ 225
Inserting Escalators ................................................................................................................................................ 270
Inserting Ramps...................................................................................................................................................... 272
Inserting Handrails.................................................................................................................................................. 273

7 Adding MEP Information to the Design ...................................................................................... 275

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................. 275
Plumbing and Piping Objects.................................................................................................................................. 275
HVAC...................................................................................................................................................................... 275
Electrical and Communication Circuiting ................................................................................................................ 276
Sizing Calculators ................................................................................................................................................... 281
Panel Scheduling and Diagramming ...................................................................................................................... 285

8 Site Modeling................................................................................................................................. 289

Sitework Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 289
Site Model Source Data.......................................................................................................................................... 289
Creating the Site Model .......................................................................................................................................... 295
Setting Site Model Properties ................................................................................................................................. 301

9 Modifying the Site Model.............................................................................................................. 309

Site Model Modification Overview........................................................................................................................... 309
Drawing Property Lines .......................................................................................................................................... 350
Analyzing the Site Model ........................................................................................................................................ 354
Obtaining Site Model Data...................................................................................................................................... 358

10 Planting and Irrigation Design ................................................................................................... 375

Planting and Irrigation Overview............................................................................................................................. 375
Creating Plant Definitions ....................................................................................................................................... 375
Adding Plants to the Design ................................................................................................................................... 385
 Table of Contents | iii

Editing Plants.......................................................................................................................................................... 395

The Plant Database ................................................................................................................................................ 400
Documenting Existing Trees................................................................................................................................... 413
Plant Graphics ........................................................................................................................................................ 428
Irrigation.................................................................................................................................................................. 435

11 Creating the Lighting Design ..................................................................................................... 439

Lighting Design Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 439
Light Plot Structure ................................................................................................................................................. 439
Creating Lighting Positions ..................................................................................................................................... 440
Inserting Lighting Positions..................................................................................................................................... 450
Setting Up Instrument Label Legends .................................................................................................................... 451
Adding Lighting Instruments ................................................................................................................................... 457
Editing Lighting Instruments ................................................................................................................................... 459
Inserting Multi-circuit Instruments ........................................................................................................................... 473
Ganging Instruments .............................................................................................................................................. 474
Adding Accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 475
Focusing Instruments ............................................................................................................................................. 477
Obtaining Photometric Data.................................................................................................................................... 480

12 Stage Objects and Paperwork ................................................................................................... 485

Stage Objects and Paperwork Overview ................................................................................................................ 485
Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot ................................................................................................................. 485
Lighting Symbol Maintenance................................................................................................................................. 522
Lighting Inventory Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 524
Creating Instrument Summaries ............................................................................................................................. 524
Generating Paperwork............................................................................................................................................ 533
Reviewing Generated Paperwork ........................................................................................................................... 538
Creating Hanging Cards ......................................................................................................................................... 539

13 Visualizing the Lighting Design................................................................................................. 541

Overview of Visualizing the Lighting Design........................................................................................................... 541
Inserting Gobo Projections ..................................................................................................................................... 541
Showing Gobo Projections ..................................................................................................................................... 544
Managing Scenes ................................................................................................................................................... 545
iv | Table of Contents

Animating Scenes................................................................................................................................................... 546

Creating Plot and Model Views............................................................................................................................... 547
Event Planning........................................................................................................................................................ 549

14 Annotation and Detailing............................................................................................................ 561

Annotation and Detailing Overview......................................................................................................................... 561
Creating Sheet Borders .......................................................................................................................................... 561
Using the ID Label Tool .......................................................................................................................................... 566
Creating Detail Drawings ........................................................................................................................................ 572
Using the Parking Area Tools ................................................................................................................................. 581
Dimensioning Exterior Walls................................................................................................................................... 587
Sheet List Indexing ................................................................................................................................................. 589
Using Notation Objects ........................................................................................................................................... 591

15 Drawing Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 599

The Navigation Palette ........................................................................................................................................... 599
Setting Global and Default Attributes...................................................................................................................... 606
Creating Custom Modification Scripts..................................................................................................................... 606
Modifying Objects by Record Value........................................................................................................................ 608
Selecting Similar Objects........................................................................................................................................ 613
Exporting Custom Resources ................................................................................................................................. 616
Inserting Images in Worksheets ............................................................................................................................. 617
GIS and Georeferencing......................................................................................................................................... 620

16 Managing Project Information ................................................................................................... 635

Error/Revision Management Using Redlines.......................................................................................................... 635
Notes Management ................................................................................................................................................ 641
The Issue Manager................................................................................................................................................. 664

17 Drawing Enhancements ............................................................................................................. 669

Creating Stipple Objects ......................................................................................................................................... 669
Sketch Rendering ................................................................................................................................................... 672
Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object ............................................................................................... 680
Creating Chain Extrude Objects ............................................................................................................................. 689
Creating a Seating Layout ...................................................................................................................................... 692
Creating Objects from Shapes................................................................................................................................ 696
 Table of Contents | v

Creating Similar Objects ......................................................................................................................................... 699

Creating a Human Figure ....................................................................................................................................... 700
Inserting Cabinets................................................................................................................................................... 704
Unfolding Surfaces ................................................................................................................................................. 710
Creating a Surface Array ........................................................................................................................................ 710
Creating Auto Hybrid Objects ................................................................................................................................. 715

18 Creating Drawing Views ............................................................................................................. 721

Overview................................................................................................................................................................. 721
Rotating the Plan .................................................................................................................................................... 721
Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports ................................................................................................ 723
Creating Section Views........................................................................................................................................... 740
Creating Detail Viewports ....................................................................................................................................... 762
Creating Multiple Viewports Simultaneously........................................................................................................... 769

19 Importing and Exporting Files ................................................................................................... 773

Overview of Importing and Exporting...................................................................................................................... 773
Drag and Drop Importing ........................................................................................................................................ 773
PDF Interoperability ................................................................................................................................................ 774
IFC Format Interoperability ..................................................................................................................................... 779
Importing in SketchUp Format ................................................................................................................................ 794
Importing and Exporting in 3ds Format................................................................................................................... 797
Exporting in KML Format ........................................................................................................................................ 800
Importing in Shapefile Format................................................................................................................................. 802
Exporting in Shapefile Format ................................................................................................................................ 803
World File Support .................................................................................................................................................. 804
Exporting in gbXML Format .................................................................................................................................... 805
Exporting for DOE-2 Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 806
Vectorworks Spotlight Export and Import ............................................................................................................... 808
Importing in PartSpec Format................................................................................................................................. 813
Referencing Imported Images ................................................................................................................................ 815

20 Design and Drafting Utilities ...................................................................................................... 817

Creating 3D Objects from 2D Objects .................................................................................................................... 817
Spring Calculator .................................................................................................................................................... 818
vi | Table of Contents

Belt Length Calculator ............................................................................................................................................ 820

Chain Length Calculator ......................................................................................................................................... 821
Control Values for Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 823
Shaft Analysis ......................................................................................................................................................... 825
Centroid ................................................................................................................................................................. 826
Conversion Factors................................................................................................................................................. 826
Solution of Triangles ............................................................................................................................................... 827
3D Properties.......................................................................................................................................................... 828
Simple Beam .......................................................................................................................................................... 830
Simple Beam Analysis ............................................................................................................................................ 834
Simple Beam Calculator ......................................................................................................................................... 835
Cam Design ............................................................................................................................................................ 837
Geneva Mechanism................................................................................................................................................ 843
Keyways ................................................................................................................................................................. 845
Screw Threads........................................................................................................................................................ 845
Shaft Break 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 847
Section Note ........................................................................................................................................................... 847
Material Note .......................................................................................................................................................... 848
Center Line Marker ................................................................................................................................................. 849
Creating Detail Bubbles .......................................................................................................................................... 849
Creating a Bill of Materials...................................................................................................................................... 851
Creating a Parts List ............................................................................................................................................... 852
Dimensioning and Tolerancing ............................................................................................................................... 853
Welding and Surface Texture Symbols .................................................................................................................. 858

21 Fasteners ..................................................................................................................................... 873

Inserting Fastener Objects Using the Fastener Tool .............................................................................................. 873
Fastener Object Thread Styles ............................................................................................................................... 882
Bolts........................................................................................................................................................................ 882
Nuts ........................................................................................................................................................................ 893
Screws .................................................................................................................................................................... 898
Clevis Pins ............................................................................................................................................................. 903
Cotter Pins .............................................................................................................................................................. 904
Dowel Pins.............................................................................................................................................................. 905
Parallel Pins............................................................................................................................................................ 905
 Table of Contents | vii

Taper Pins .............................................................................................................................................................. 906

Retaining Rings and Washers ................................................................................................................................ 907
Rivets...................................................................................................................................................................... 909

22 Machine Components................................................................................................................. 913

Gears ...................................................................................................................................................................... 913
Pulleys .................................................................................................................................................................... 923
Sprockets................................................................................................................................................................ 925
Roller Chains .......................................................................................................................................................... 928
Shafts...................................................................................................................................................................... 931
Keys........................................................................................................................................................................ 939
Woodruff Keys ........................................................................................................................................................ 940
Ball Bearings........................................................................................................................................................... 940
Roller Bearings ....................................................................................................................................................... 942
Needle Bearings ..................................................................................................................................................... 946
Thrust Bearings ...................................................................................................................................................... 947
Flanged Bearings.................................................................................................................................................... 948
Pillow Block Bearings ............................................................................................................................................. 952
Bearing Lock Nut .................................................................................................................................................... 954
Belleville Springs .................................................................................................................................................... 955
Compression Springs ............................................................................................................................................. 956
Die Springs ............................................................................................................................................................. 959
Extension Springs................................................................................................................................................... 960
Torsion Springs....................................................................................................................................................... 963

A Advanced Topics .......................................................................................................................... 967

Creating Custom ID Label Symbols........................................................................................................................ 967
Creating a Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Design Series ................................................................................ 972
Notes Manager Database Format .......................................................................................................................... 973
Migrating from Previous Versions........................................................................................................................... 975
Importing Manual Sketches .................................................................................................................................... 975
Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols ..................................................................................... 976
Creating Custom Path Objects ............................................................................................................................... 981
Plant ID Codes........................................................................................................................................................ 983
Plant Database Field Mapping................................................................................................................................ 984
viii | Table of Contents

Instrument and Accessory Specifications ............................................................................................................... 985

Seating Layout Specifications................................................................................................................................. 990
Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors ........................................................................................................... 991
Exchanging Data with Older Versions of Lightwright.............................................................................................. 993
Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects ....................................................................................................... 998
Adding User-defined Information to Commands................................................................................................... 1000
Simple Beam and Spring Calculator Examples .................................................................................................... 1003

B Standards .................................................................................................................................... 1009

Layer, Class, and Viewport Standards ................................................................................................................. 1009
Auto-classing Objects ........................................................................................................................................... 1013
Class Standards ................................................................................................................................................... 1015
Project Preference Sets........................................................................................................................................ 1017
Reserved Names .................................................................................................................................................. 1018

C Database Connectivity ............................................................................................................... 1019

ODBC Workflow.................................................................................................................................................... 1019
Database-Vectorworks Communication ............................................................................................................... 1019
Database Setup .................................................................................................................................................... 1020
Database Connection ........................................................................................................................................... 1020
Record Format Database Connection .................................................................................................................. 1023
Object Database Connection................................................................................................................................ 1026
Automating Database Connection Workflows ...................................................................................................... 1031
Specifying Update Settings................................................................................................................................... 1035
ODBC Driver Information...................................................................................................................................... 1037

Index............................................................................................................................................... 1039
Preface
Welcome to Vectorworks Design Series software, a complete design and production management system for
architects, landscape architects, lighting designers, and mechanical engineers. Vectorworks Design Series software
includes the following products: Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Designer. Some features in the Vectorworks
Design Series software expand upon core Vectorworks Fundamentals or Renderworks product functionality; in those
instances, a cross-reference is provided to the associated documentation.
The Vectorworks Designer product includes the combined feature set of the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, and
Spotlight products. Therefore, it is not necessary to document each individual feature as belonging to the Vectorworks
Designer product. The Designer workspace contains a major subset of the entire combined feature set; the remaining
items can be added to the workspace using the Workspace Editor (see Using the Workspace Editor on page 869 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

New Vectorworks Design Series Features

This release includes many new features and significant enhancements to the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, and
Spotlight products, as described in the following sections.
The following table contains a list of new and improved features for the release of the Vectorworks 2014 software, and
indicates the section where the functionality is documented and the product to which the feature applies.

Feature Purpose Location Product

Context-sensitive help and The Vectorworks help system, keyboard Not applicable Architect,
PDF files shortcut file, and PDF files have been Landmark,
updated to reflect version 2014 functionality Spotlight
Space object performance Space objects are now regenerated much Space Properties on Architect
enhancement more quickly after editing; Vectorworks page 44
only regenerates the space components that
are changing and only recalculates the
bounds of the space if necessary
Allow setting default classes The 2D Attributes pane of the Space Space Settings 2D Architect
for new spaces Settings dialog box now has options to set Attributes Pane on
the default classes for the entire space object page 57
and the 2D boundary. Previously, new
spaces were placed in the None class, and
2D boundaries were placed in the active
class.
Added a note on the Space The Space Settings dialog box is used to set Space Settings 2D Architect
Settings dialog box about most of the default parameters for new Attributes Pane on
where to set default space objects. A new note on the 2D page 57
attributes for spaces Attributes pane reminds users to set the fill
and pen styles for spaces from the
Attributes palette.
ii | Preface

Feature Purpose Location Product

Modify the Eyedropper In the Advanced Settings pane of the Space Space Settings Architect
Transfer Properties for Settings dialog box, the Eyedropper Advanced Settings
spaces Transfer Properties control which attributes Pane on page 64
are copied from one space to another with
the Pick Up Attributes and Apply Attributes
modes of the Space tool.
Space Label properties were added
The Attributes properties were
renamed and reorganized, and an overall
space object class was added
If the 2D Boundary Attributes group is
selected, and the option Make picked up
attributes the default is selected, the fill
and pen styles picked up from a space are
set as the default for new objects in the
Attributes palette
More consistent editing and Improvements were made to space object Editing Lists of Space Architect
loading of room finish, processing to make the space text files Names and Occupant
occupancy organization, and follow the same rules as the files for Organizations on
space name text files resources, such as symbols and hatches. page 68, Creating,
This makes it easier to customize your own Editing, and Deleting
text files, but harder to accidentally override Room Finishes on
default content or workgroup text files: page 76
Text files are distinguished from one
another by file name instead of by the
first line within the file
You can rename room finish files from
within the Vectorworks application
From within the Vectorworks application,
you can only edit text files that are in
your user folder
Reinstate workflow to You can once again use the Object Info Converting Space Architect
switch from manual to palette to change space boundaries directly Boundary Associations
auto-bound space from Manual mode to Auto-Boundary mode on page 89
without picking the surrounding walls
Moving or duplicating Its easier than ever to change the building Moving Connected Architect,
connected walls shell, now that connections between Walls on page 122 Landmark,
T-joined walls and L-joined walls are Spotlight
maintained if they are moved using the
Move or Nudge command, or moved and/or
duplicated using the Duplicate Array
command or the Move by Points tool
Fit walls to site model Vectorworks now makes it easy to conform Fitting Walls to Architect,
objects the bottoms of walls to the shape of the Defined Geometry on Landmark
underlying site model objects page 128
 Preface | iii

Feature Purpose Location Product

Shaped windows The Window tool now offers a variety of Window Settings Architect,
fixed-glass shaped window options, General Pane on Landmark
including circle, oval, half circle, half oval, page 177
diamond, hexagon (flat top), hexagon (flat
side), and octagon. The Vectorworks
window schedule includes window shape
for reporting purposes.
Hinge direction marker A new option in window settings and door Window Settings 3D Architect,
option for doors and settings makes it easier to choose which Visualization Pane on Landmark
windows way the hinge direction marker points, to page 179 and Door
comply with standard practice in different Settings 3D
countries Visualization Pane on
page 203
Vision panels for doors You can now add vision panels to solid and Door Settings Leaf Architect,
panel leaf doors Pane on page 208 Landmark
Door kick plates A new door setting allows you to specify Door Settings Kick Architect,
kick plates Plates Pane on Landmark
page 215
Stair tool modes order The Stair tools Pick Up and Apply modes Creating a Stair on Architect
changed were re-ordered to be consistent with the page 225
Eyedropper tool and to display the modes
in the order in which they will be used
Improved arrow direction New options in the Stair Settings dialog box 2D Graphics Tab on Architect
and walk line options in the offer greater control over display details. page 235
Stair Settings dialog box Independently specify the arrow direction
for each section of walk line (above and
below the break, as well as the displays
on the lower and upper floors)
Specify whether the walk line ends at the
last tread before the break or directly at
the break
Third stringer option in Stair The Stair Settings dialog box now includes Construction Tab on Architect
Settings dialog box an option for a third stringer (carriage) page 241
underneath to support wider stairs
Opacity attribute in 2D Opacity and opacity by class are now Graphic Attributes Architect
views of stairs editable attributes of all stair components Tab on page 248
that are displayed in Top/Plan view
Edit site model contour label Site model contour labels can be Editing Contour Architect,
position repositioned, added, and deleted with the Labels on page 304 Landmark
Reshape tool
New options for the Send to The command includes new options for Sending Objects to the Architect,
Surface command retaining wall site modifiers and for pad Site Model Surface on Landmark
with retaining edge modifiers; the edges can page 306
be sent to the surface and fit to the surface,
or the pad can be sent to the surface
iv | Preface

Feature Purpose Location Product

Site modifier area and In the Object Info palette, site modifiers Creating a Pad on Architect,
volume display now include area and volume data for the page 309, Creating a Landmark
area of the site model located under the site Pad with a Retaining
modifier Edge on page 311,
Creating Grade Limits
on page 313, Creating
a Spoil Pile Area on
page 316, and Creating
a Texture Bed on
page 317
Massing model floor Floor usage data can be specified for each Creating a Massing Architect,
improvements floor of a massing model, and reported in Model on page 319 Landmark
worksheets. Also, the NumFloors
parameter has been renamed for clarity.
Stake object improvements Improvements to the stake object include a Inserting Stake Architect,
new circle-with-cross mark style, automatic Objects on page 368 Landmark
incrementing of label ID numbers, and three and Converting 3D
changes that offer greater control of Loci to Stake Objects
coordinate point labels: on page 371
a new EN (Easting-Northing) option
an option to show the stake objects
elevation below the other coordinates
controls that will let you determine the
precision with which coordinate units and
elevation units will each be displayed
Plant definition access The Edit Plant Definition dialog box can Creating Plant Landmark
improvement now be accessed directly from every pane in Definitions on
the Plant Settings dialog box page 375
Plant and massing model You can now apply a document-wide Plan Shadows Architect,
shadow improvements shadow style to all plants and massing Preferences on page 35 Landmark
models in a drawing, but still create custom in the Vectorworks
shadow settings for an individual plant Fundamentals Users
object as needed. The shadow angle setting Guide; Plant Definition
function has also been made more precise. - Render Pane on
page 380 and Creating
a Massing Model on
page 319 in this guide
Custom plant tag edit Custom plant tags can now be created by Plant Settings - Tag Landmark
selecting predefined tag field values and Pane on page 392
text delimiters
New lighting position Two new types of lighting pipe objects can Placing Lighting Pipe Spotlight
objects be inserted with the Lighting Pipe and Objects on page 441
Lighting Pipe Ladder tools. Once and Placing Lighting
configured, these objects can be converted Pipe Ladders on
to lighting position symbols. page 443
 Preface | v

Feature Purpose Location Product

Lighting position height Lighting positions converted from symbols Inserting Lighting Spotlight
automatically assigned when or plug-in objects now automatically Positions on page 450
converting from symbol or assume the Z height value of the original
plug-in object objects
Change label legend A lighting instruments label legend Editing Label Spotlight
reference symbol reference symbol can now be changed from Legends on page 454
the Label Legend Manager
New Locate Label Legend Spotlight users can now quickly identify Editing Label Spotlight
in Resource Browser and access the label legend associated with Legends on page 454
context menu command each lighting instrument by selecting
Locate Label Legend in Resource
Browser from the context menu
Create a new label legend A new label legend can be created based on Creating a Label Spotlight
from an existing one an existing label legend applied to a Legend from an
selected lighting instrument Existing Instrument on
page 457
Lighting device Several improvements have been made to Lighting Instrument Spotlight
improvements the Spotlight lighting device: Properties on page 459
label legends can now be selected from a and Spotlight Setup
list in the Object Info palette on page 18
a new option draws the light beam
vertically when possible
color combinations are now possible
when setting the device color
additional record formats specified in the
preferences allow default data to be
included at instrument insertion or
replacement
Select focused lighting A new context menu feature provides a Changing Instrument Spotlight
devices method to easily select all lighting devices Properties on page 462
assigned to a specific focus point
Two-fer by dimmer and Lighting instruments can now be ganged by Ganging Instruments Spotlight
channel both dimmer and channel on page 474
Automatic association for Now you can select a lighting instrument to Creating an Spotlight
Convert to Accessory associate with the accessory when Accessory on page 476
command converting a symbol into an accessory
vi | Preface

Feature Purpose Location Product

New and improved Spotlight The previous lighting position summary Creating Instrument Spotlight
functionality and key to instrumentation objects have Summaries on
been replaced by the Instrument page 524, Lighting
Summary tool, which places flexible, Symbol Maintenance
customizable, and formatted summaries on page 522, Lighting
with either global or filtered information. Inventory Setup on
A new Lighting Symbol Maintenance page 524, and
command allows all lighting device Instrument
symbol data to be edited and updated Numbering on
from one location. page 467

A new Lighting Inventory Setup

command specifies quantities for use in
instrument summaries.
The Auto Number Positions command
replaces the Toggle Auto Numbering
command, with improved functionality.
Improved localizable The event planning suite commands offer Creating a Lectern on Spotlight
defaults for event planning more contextually logical default settings, page 553 and Creating
commands and now all event planning dialog boxes Event Seating on
with a texture parameter provide access to page 556
the current files content
New focal point placement The Create Event Seating command Creating Event Spotlight
option for Create Event provides a new option to manually place the Seating on page 556
Seating command focal point for the event seating
Aisle spaces for accessible The Parking Spaces tool now includes Creating Parking Architect,
parking spaces options for creating aisles adjacent to Spaces on page 585 Landmark,
accessible parking spaces and for adding an Spotlight
accessibility symbol to parking spaces
Elevation Benchmark tool The Elevation Benchmark tool offers two Elevation Benchmark Architect,
improvements new ways to use the Z value to calculate the on page 592 Landmark,
elevation value. The tool also now works in Spotlight
3D.
Convert 2D polygons/ 2D polygons or polylines with attached Modifying Objects by Architect,
polylines by record elevation record data can be automatically Record Value on Landmark,
converted to 3D contours at the proper page 608 Spotlight
elevation. This makes it much easier to use
imported source polygons as the basis of a
site model.
Select Similar tool plane The Select Similar Preferences dialog box Selecting Similar Architect,
filter now allows you to select items on the same Objects on page 613 Landmark,
plane as the next item clicked Spotlight
New option to disable the In a GIS workflow, correct values from Entering Architect,
location adjustment for projected data can now be obtained by Georeferencing Landmark
georeferenced data turning off origin offset values Information for the
Document on page 620
 Preface | vii

Feature Purpose Location Product

Circle bubble style for Keynote legends can now be given a circle Placing Keynotes on Architect,
keynote legends bubble style page 641 Landmark,
Spotlight
Keynote legend renumbering New options in the keynote legend keep Deleting Keynotes on Architect,
improvements placeholders in the legend when keynotes page 643 Landmark,
are deleted, preventing undesirable Spotlight
renumbering of keynotes. The placeholders
can easily be removed if needed.
Seating layout and event Seating layout improvements include a new Editing the Seating Architect,
seating improvements Focus Front feature that snaps the seats to Layout on page 693 Spotlight
face front and center, the ability to separate
labels into different classes for better
control over visibility and graphic
attributes, and increased control over the
number of seats in each seating area for
easy compliance with code and life safety
regulations
2D display options for auto The 2D view of auto hybrid objects can now Creating Auto Hybrid Architect,
hybrid object be refined using options for smoothing Objects on page 715 Landmark,
angles, generating intersecting lines, and Spotlight
showing a dashed hidden line for geometry
below or above the cut plane
Auto hybrid selection and The Create Auto Hybrid command now Creating Auto Hybrid Architect,
performance improvements automatically combines the many individual Objects on page 715 Landmark,
polygons that comprise an objects fill into a Spotlight
single polygon to reduce file size and
improve performance including selection
behavior
New Rotated Top/Plan view When a rotated top/plan view has been Rotating the Plan on Architect,
option in Current View list created, you can now return to it easily from page 721 in this guide, Landmark,
any other view with a new option in the Using Standard Views Spotlight
Current View list and a new change to the on page 549, and The
0 shortcut. It is also easier to select a view View Bar on page 6 in
based on the working plane rather than the the Vectorworks
active layer plane with new alert messages. Fundamentals Users
Guide
viii | Preface

Feature Purpose Location Product

Create and edit section You can now create a section viewport from Creating Section Architect,
viewports using a clip cube any of the vertical sides of a clip cube, and Views on page 740; Landmark,
also use a clip cube while editing any Editing a Design Layer Spotlight
section viewport Displayed in a Design
Layer Viewport on
page 732; and Editing
a Design Layer
Displayed in a Sheet
Layer Viewport on
page 743 in the
Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users
Guide
Option to flatten design layer For a section viewport on a design layer, the Creating a Section Architect,
section viewports Display Flattened option always displays a Viewport on a Design Landmark,
flattened section view of the viewport, Layer on page 747 Spotlight
similar to a section viewport on a sheet
layer; this can be useful as a snappable
background for creating section drawings or
details
Viewport marker settings Two new dialog boxes were added to allow Creating a Section Architect,
users to set default properties for all section Viewport on a Design Landmark,
lines associated with section viewports, and Layer on page 747; Spotlight
for all detail callouts associated with detail Section Lines and
viewports Section-Elevation
Markers on page 755;
Creating Detail
Viewports on
page 762; Properties of
Detail Callouts on
page 768
Recalculate worksheets A new option in the Export PDF dialog box Exporting PDF Files Architect,
before exporting to PDF helps keep output up to date by on page 776 Landmark,
automatically recalculating worksheets Spotlight
before exporting
IFC zones IFC data can be attached to IFC zones with Assigning IFC Data to Architect,
the new IFC Zones command Space Zones on Landmark
page 784
 Preface | ix

Feature Purpose Location Product

IFC worksheet functionality A new IFC_ENTITY search criterion and a Creating IFC Architect
new GetIfcProperty worksheet function Schedules on page 789,
allow you to examine the IFC data in a file. Retrieving Object
In addition, new default schedules that use Attributes in a
these features can be accessed with the VA Worksheet on page 836
Create Schedule command. in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users
Guide, Worksheet
Functions on page 837
in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users
Guide
IfcXML format import and Vectorworks Architect now supports the Importing IFC Files Architect
export import and export of .ifcxml files as an on page 790, Exporting
alternative to IFC format import and export IFC Projects on
page 790
IFC entity optimization IFC file importing is re-engineered to Importing IFC Files Architect
reduce file size and improve performance. on page 790 and
Additionally, the Edit IFC Entity Assigning IFC Data to
command can now also be accessed by Objects on page 782
selecting Edit from the context menu.
New option to export from You can now export all visible objects in all Exporting in 3ds Architect,
all visible layers in Export layers of a Vectorworks file simply by Format on page 798 Landmark,
3DS command selecting a new option on the Export 3DS Spotlight
Options dialog box
Export shapefile New options let you build more Exporting in Shapefile Landmark
improvements sophisticated exports, including objects in Format on page 803
multiple classes and/or layers and additional
object data in a single export
New Publish command This new command replaces the Export Exporting PDF Files Architect,
PDF (Batch) and Batch Print commands on page 776 and Batch Landmark,
in the Vectorworks Design Series. The new Publishing on page 806 Spotlight
command allows you to publish to multiple in the Vectorworks
formats with a single batch job (and is Fundamentals Users
documented primarily in the Vectorworks Guide
Fundamentals Users Guide for ease of use).
Support for detail bubbles in The Align/Distribute Leader Lines Creating Detail Architect,
the Align/Distribute command now works for Detail Bubble Bubbles on page 849 in Landmark,
Leader Lines command objects this guide; Aligning Spotlight
and Distributing Leader
Lines on page 283 in
the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users
Guide
x | Preface

Feature Purpose Location Product

Database support for SQLite Vectorworks software can now connect to Database Connection Architect,
the open source, free database file format on page 1020 Landmark,
from SQLite. This avoids the need for Spotlight
ODBC drivers and administration.
Product changes for some Certain commands have been made Replacing Objects with Architect,
commands and functionality available in more products: Symbols on page 624, Landmark,
Replace with Symbol is now available to IFC Format Spotlight
Vectorworks Architect and Spotlight Interoperability on
users page 779,
IFC is supported in Vectorworks Dimensioning Exterior
Landmark Walls on page 587, and
Dimension Exterior Walls can now be Creating Schedules
used by Landmark and Spotlight users Automatically on
Choose Schedule is available in page 37
Spotlight
Change order and layout of The order and layout of the attributes Space Settings 2D Architect,
attribute controls for stair, controls for space, stair, and grade objects Attributes Pane on Landmark
space and grade have been changed for greater consistency page 57, Graphic
with attribute controls in other parts of the Attributes Tab on
Vectorworks program page 248, and
Specifying Global
Grade Object
Preferences on
page 361
Changed keyboard shortcut The Toggle Auto Numbering command PDF available from the Spotlight
shortcut has changed Help system Table of
Contents and Creating
or Editing a Workspace
on page 869 in the
Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users
Guide
Increased level of precision The precision of the Beam Angle 2 and Not applicable Spotlight
for secondary angle fields in Field Angle 2 fields in the Light Info record
light info records allows increased precision values to be
entered, which better supports manufacturer
data
Improvements to the Additional data is now exchanged between Not applicable Spotlight
Lightwright data exchange Vectorworks Spotlight software and the
Lightwright program:
Instrument rotation and class information
is now exported from the Vectorworks
Spotlight program
The location of lighting instruments is
now exported to Lightwright in
millimeters rather than document units
 Preface | xi

Learning Vectorworks
There are a number of ways to learn how to use the Vectorworks program, including training CDs, both online help and
PDF versions of the user guides, and both online and classroom training.

Users Guides
This guide is the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide, which describes the features in the Vectorworks
Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, and Designer products. It is designed for users who have purchased one or more
Vectorworks Design Series products.
The Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide is a comprehensive reference for all users describing the core tools,
commands, and features in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product. The guide also describes the presentation
capabilities of the Renderworks product, for users who purchased it.
The following table describes the conventions used in the guides. All instructions in the guides are based on
click-click drawing.

Convention Meaning
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Architect and Designer
products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Landmark and Designer
products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Spotlight and Designer
products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, and
Designer products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Architect, Spotlight, and
Designer products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Landmark, Spotlight, and
Designer products only

Indicates functionality that exists in all of the Vectorworks Design Series products as
well as Designer
Indicates functionality that exists in the Renderworks product only

(Macintosh) Macintosh-specific instruction

(Windows) Windows-specific instruction
Enter (Windows)/return To reduce unnecessary wordiness, both operating system terms will not be used; we
(Macintosh) and have standardized upon Enter and Backspace. The meaning should be evident
Backspace (Windows)/ for users of either operating system.
delete (Macintosh)
bold text Indicates a specific button, command, class, or explicitly named item
blue indented text Indicates a note, tip, or warning
click Click the mouse button and release. Left button always implied in Windows.
double-click Click two times quickly on the mouse button and release
xii | Preface

Convention Meaning
right-click Click with the right mouse button and release; on the Macintosh, hold down the Ctrl
key and click the mouse
Key and mouse Hold down the key(s) and click; in this example, hold down the Shift key and click
combination, as in
Shift-click
Key combination, as in Hold down the key(s) and press the specified letter or number key; in this example,
Alt+Shift+D hold down both the Alt and Shift keys, and press the D key
click-click Click the mouse button once and release. Move the cursor to the desired location and
click again. This is the default drawing preference at installation. See Edit
Preferences on page 17 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide to change
the drawing preference to click-drag.
click-drag Click once with the mouse button and do not release. Drag (move) the cursor to a
desired location and then release.
select Click on an object with the mouse, or click-drag over an object with marquee
selection, to highlight it. The object is highlighted, and/or handles display on the
object to indicate that it is currently active. This term also refers to executing menu
commands.
Context menu A menu command accessed by a Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows)

Vectorworks Help System

The help system allows quick access to comprehensive reference information about the Vectorworks program.
Commands, tools, and dialog boxes are linked to the appropriate help topic, providing instant information.
The help system also offers links to related topics, allows full text searches, and contains an index and table of contents
to topics across all products.
The Vectorworks help system includes the following volumes:
Welcome: Instructions for using the help system
Vectorworks Fundamentals: Context-sensitive online version of the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Vectorworks Design Series: Context-sensitive online version of the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
PDF Files: Provides links to complete user guide PDFs and other helpful files
To access the help system, select Help > Vectorworks Help from within the program. In the help system Table of
Contents, open the Welcome book for complete instructions on how to use the system.

Technical Support and Training

There are a variety of technical support and training options available to you to ensure your success with the
Vectorworks product and to support your business needs.
The Help menu has links to the Getting Started Guides, Vectorworks Knowledgebase Search, Vectorworks Cloud
Services, and Vectorworks Service Select websites (Internet access required).

Technical Support
Technical support is available for registered users in several ways. International users should contact their local reseller
for details concerning technical support; for reseller information, see www.vectorworks.net/international
United States users can contact Technical Support using the following methods:
 Preface | xiii

Call 443.542.0411
Send an email to [email protected]
Visit the technical support knowledgebase at kbase.vectorworks.net
When you contact Technical Support, provide a brief description of the problem that includes specific details about
what actions were taken prior to the problems occurrence. The more information you can give your support specialist,
the easier it will be to solve your problem quickly.
When you contact Technical Support by phone, please have access to your computer and be ready to tell the specialist:
Vectorworks software serial number
Vectorworks software version number
Operating system
Type of computer being used
Amount of RAM installed in the computer
List of any recent changes to the computers setup (such as new fonts, software, or hardware)

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a problem prior to calling Technical Support will also aid in a speedy resolution. Basic
troubleshooting tips include:
Test to see if the problem occurs in a new, blank file
Test to see if the problem occurs system wide (especially print and font problems)
Copy and paste part of the document to a new file to see if the problem persists
Run the computer in Safe Mode (Windows) to see if there is a system conflict
Check the community message board to see if the problem has already been reported or resolved -
techboard.vectorworks.net

Training
For details about training options, visit www.vectorworks.net/training
Tutorial manuals
One-on one online training
Customized onsite training
Hands-on classroom training
To contact a training specialist, call 1.877.202.8871 (in the United States) or send an email to
[email protected]

Other Resources
The following additional resources are available to Nemetschek Vectorworks users:
Documentation updates through the online help Auto Update Content or Check for Updates features
Vectorworks community board - techboard.vectorworks.net
Vectorworks YouTube channel - www.youtube.com/vectorworks
Independent local user groups - www.vectorworks.net/community/usergroups.php
Planet Vectorworks, our company news site - planet.vectorworks.net
Various social media sites, such as Facebook, Twitter, Delicious, LinkedIn, and Flickr
LISTSERV user lists - www.vectorworks.net/community/mailinglists.php

Vectorworks Service Select

Vectorworks Service Select is a software service agreement that allows subscribers to purchase Vectorworks software
at a fraction of the cost of a new license. In addition to providing the most cost-effective way of owning Vectorworks
software, Vectorworks Service Select provides benefits such as additional brand name and generic libraries available
only to subscribers, learning resources, preferred support status, and predictability for your budget. Support and
xiv | Preface

training resources include phone support and exclusive video libraries with tech tips and tutorials. When you are in an
active Vectorworks Service Select agreement, youll receive upgrades to your Vectorworks software and incremental
product enhancements. Youll be the first to know of new releases and always have access to the latest Vectorworks
products. To learn more about Vectorworks Service Select, visit http://serviceselect.vectorworks.net/learn-more.

Vectorworks Cloud Services

Discover the freedom to share files and make design decisions from any location with Vectorworks Cloud Services, a
member benefit for Vectorworks Service Select subscribers. With these powerful desktop and mobile applications,
changes to your Vectorworks files are automatically synchronized to your private cloud storage, allowing you to
browse and share your latest designs from any web-enabled device. Vectorworks Cloud Services also saves time by
providing a cloud-based workflow for creating presentations, shifting calculations needed to generate sections,
elevations, renderings, and BIM data from the desktop to the cloud. Plus, you can store your files in the cloud and
access them anytime and anywhere with up to 5GB of free storage. Accessibility options including a desktop
application and the Vectorworks Nomad iOS, Android, and Kindle Fire apps allow you to view, mark up, share,
and synchronize Vectorworks files across devices. Learn more about Vectorworks Cloud Services at
http://www.vectorworks.net/cloudservices and check its availability in your location by visiting:
http://serviceselect.vectorworks.net/learn-more

Knowledgebase
One of the primary technical support resources available to you is our Knowledgebase. This resource provides answers
to the most common technical questions, as well as video tutorials and tech tips, all in a central location. Use the search
box to find specific information or browse by categories. Youll also see information organized by the most popular
articles, recent entries, and more. Access our Knowledgebase at http://kbase.vectorworks.net

Getting Started Guides

These videos and printed guides will provide you with a strong base as you learn to use Vectorworks software to
design, communicate, and document your ideas. There is one guide per product, but we encourage you review each of
them, especially Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks, because they contain tips that can be applied to almost
any design field. View an introduction and learn more about these resources by visiting: http://www.vectorworks.net/
training/getting-started-guides
Setting up the Project 1
In the Vectorworks Architect product, set up the stories, layers, classes, and viewports in the project according to
various pre-defined standards, or create custom standards. Pre-formatted schedules can be added to report defined data
from the architectural elements that will be added to the project. The Vectorworks Landmark product can be set up with
automatically created viewports and use naming standards. The Vectorworks Spotlight product has its own automatic
setup features.
Set up the project file to create the necessary structure based either on standards in the Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark products or on custom file setup requirements.
The standards for the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products are centered around the concept of design layers
(for modeling and drafting), classes, and viewports on sheet layers (for final project presentation and printing). In the
Architect product, stories provide an additional element of building structure.
For the Vectorworks Architect product, United Kingdom project standards are available through the Organization
dialog box for classes, layers, sheet layers, viewports, and saved views. However, only classes, layers, and sheet
layers can be imported from another document.

Stories
Buildings in the Vectorworks Architect product are composed of stories, which contain and control the elevation of
associated model layers (slabs, finish floors, ceilings, and any other model layers required) and the building elements
associated with those layers. Slabs, walls, spaces, stairs, window walls, escalators, columns, and pilasters are building
elements that can be constrained by layers at their top and bottom boundaries. In turn, the model layer elevations are
controlled by their associated stories. A building structured in this way can be easily modified and managed as design
ideas are developed and then finalized.

Layers, Classes, and Viewports

The standards for the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products take advantage of layer and class characteristics.

Class Characteristics
Drawing objects are assigned to classes; a class is an attribute of an object. Classes apply to the entire file and control
the visibility of objects. The currently active class is visible; but classes can be set to be visible, invisible, or grayed
when they are inactive. Complex objects, such as symbols or plug-in objects, may contain more than one class;
different parts of the object can be hidden or shown. Classes can also be used to assign graphical attributes and textures
to objects.
Many plug-in objects that are included with Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products are set with pre-assigned
classes. The appropriate classes are created at setup and by certain other commands (see Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark Classes on page 15). The use of automatic classing is determined with the Standard Naming setup
command. For more information, see Importing Drawing Structure from Standards or Other Files on page 94 and
Managing Classes on page 106 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Layer and Viewport Characteristics

A layer is a named container that holds items. There are two types of layers: design layers and sheet layers. Design
layers are used for drawing and modeling the elements of a project. Sheet layers are created for the presentation of a
finalized project, and can contain viewports, title blocks, notes, and other annotations. A viewport, located on a sheet or
design layer, is a particular combination of visible, grayed, and/or hidden design layers and classes.
Layers have certain characteristics that are used when drawing and structuring files:
Design layers can automatically set default elevation values for objects they contain. They create natural structural
divisions within a project for objects on different floors or different vertical locations within a floor.
2 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Design layers can be visible, invisible, or grayed. Sheet layers are always set to Active Only.
Design layers, as well as viewports, can be displayed at different drawing scales, for the display of all aspects of a
project plan from the site model to details.
Design layers, as well as viewports, can have different 3D views. A building can be viewed in Plan view in one
viewport and in an elevation or perspective view in another.
Layers can be contained in different files and shared using workgroup referencing.
Projects set up according to standards contain both design layers and sheet layers with viewports. An architectural
project file contains, at a minimum, stories with design layers for every level, as well as a number of viewports on sheet
layers.
A typical Vectorworks Landmark product standard file setup includes landscape site plans composed of shared model
information on four layers:
Mod-Site-Arch contains any buildings or other improvements
Mod-Site-Civil contains topographic and survey information
Mod-Site-DTMData contains the site model output
Mod-Site-Landscape contains tree and planting data
When a file is set up with the Create Standard Viewports command, the appropriate classes and layers are created
automatically. The number and types of layers and classes created depend on the setup selections. In the Vectorworks
Architect product, design layers are created by stories, and begin with Mod- (model layers, since this is where the
model is designed). The Create Standard Viewports command creates the appropriate viewports and sheet layers for
the viewports (beginning with Sheet-), along with the appropriate classes if they are not already in the file.
The Standard Naming command establishes or changes the naming conventions used for these classes, design layers,
sheet layers, and viewports or saved views.
Set up a new, blank file with standards, and then save as a template for future use.
If an existing file already contains a set of custom standards (included as a series of worksheets), the Import
LayerMap.G dialog box opens when selecting Create Standard Viewports. Select whether to use the custom or
standard setup. See Using the Layermap Worksheet on page 1009 for more information.

Document Setup
Use the Document Setup command to set up a files basic characteristics (units, scale, drawing area, and grid) as well
as define the sheet border and title block settings.
To set up a file with the Document Setup command:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Setup.
2. The Document Setup dialog box opens. Set the parameters for the drawing. See Setting Up the Drawing on
page 73 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on units, scale, drawing grids, and
print area.
 Document Setup | 3

Parameter Description
Units, Scale and Grids
Drawing Units Click Change to open the Units dialog box; specify the global unit settings
for the project
Layer Scale Click Change to open the Layer Scale dialog box. Specify the default layer
scale for the project. This scale will be used for all floor design layers
(Mod-Floor-#) and associated design layers such as Mod-Slab.
Drawing Area Click Change to open the Page Setup dialog box; specify the drawings
printable area
Drawing Grids Click Change to open the SmartCursor Settings dialog box; specify the
reference and snap grid settings
Georeferencing If this document will use georeferencing, click Change to open the
Document Georeferencing dialog box. Specify the default georeferencing
information for all design layers; see GIS and Georeferencing on page 620.
Sheet Border/Title If not created during setup, sheet borders and title blocks can be added
Block manually with the Sheet Border tool (see Creating Sheet Borders on
page 561)
Sheet Border Select the sheet border to automatically include as the file is set up, or leave
the default selection of None to create no sheet border
Title Block Select the title block from either the default content or the current files
content to automatically include as the file is set up (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide), or leave the
default selection of None to create no title block
Use Border Settings
As preferences Saves the sheet border and title block selections and applies them to the sheet
layers when the Create Standard Viewports command is selected
To create a border Places the specified sheet border and title block on the selected layer
now on layer immediately
4 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

3. Click OK.
To use the Issue Manager (see The Issue Manager on page 664), select one of the predefined sheet border styles.
Select the Document Setup command again to re-adjust a sheet border if the paper size has changed.

Setting Up the Building Structure with Stories

Stories define absolute elevations for a building level and allow architects to manage layers and the objects they
contain by defining them as belonging to a building story. The layers in a story have a Z height relative to the story; the
story controls their absolute elevation, and if the story elevation changes, the layers and certain objects automatically
change their elevation or boundaries along with the story.
A layer in a story can have a level type, which gives that layer the ability to act as a top or bottom constraint for a
bounded object. These bounded objects can be defined at their boundaries by the layers that make up a story, such as
a slab or a ceiling. For example, an exterior wall can extend from the top of the slab on one story to the top of a slab on
the story above it. Slabs, walls, spaces, stairs, window walls, escalators, columns, and pilasters can be set according to
a top and bottom boundary layer, the location of these boundaries is controlled by the elevation of the layer plane and
ultimately by the story elevation. Both walls and slabs can have their dynamic height information set and saved in a
wall or slab style, so they can automatically take on their defined height condition. This method of using bounded
objects allows flexibility and accuracy when defining a model, from the early to the final stages of design.
A story layer does not have to have a level type; if it does not, it simply will not show up in the list of bounding planes
for objects, but will still have its elevation defined in relation to (and move with) its story.
Begin project setup by creating the stories and their associated layers. Stories are created and managed from the
Organization dialog box; either pre-defined standards or custom standards can be used. As the stories are added, their
associated design layers are also created according to set layer level types. Finally, associate the applicable objects to
the layer level type at the objects top and bottom boundaries, creating a cohesive model that is structured and
controlled by its building stories.

Default Story Layers

Stories contain layers with names and parameters defined by standards. You can select the automatically-defined layers
when creating a story, or create customized layers by defining the default story layers before creating the stories.
When a story layer has a level type, it can be used as a potential boundary for objects in its story (such as walls, slabs,
and so on) or for the story above or below it. Certain projects may require custom level types, which can also be set up
ahead of time.
To create or edit default story layers:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box. Click the Stories tab.
The functionality of the Organization dialog box is described in Organizing the Drawing on page 89 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Click Default Story Layers.
The Default Story Layers dialog box opens, listing the currently defined default layers.
 Setting Up the Building Structure with Stories | 5

3. Click New to create a new default story layer, or Edit to modify the currently selected default layer.
The New Default Story Layer or Edit Default Story Layer dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Name Specifies the name of the default story layer. This name is used with a
story-specific prefix or suffix to create the actual layer name.
Scale Click Scale to set the scale to use for the default layer; see Design Layer
Scale on page 73 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Elevation Sets the elevation of the layer, relative to the story.
The layer plane on one story cannot overlap with the layer on another story;
therefore, the highest layer in a story cannot overlap with the lowest layer in the
story above, and the lowest layer in a story must be higher than the highest
story in the story below.
Layer Wall Height Sets the default height for walls and columns that belong to the layer; the
objects settings must define its top height by the layer wall height
Level Type Select the level type if desired, or select New Level Type to create a new kind
of level

4. By default, several level types are available, such as slab, finish floor, and ceiling; both default story layers and
level types are default content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). To
create a new level type, select New Level Type from the Level Type list.
The New Level Type dialog box opens. Enter the name of the new type of layer level.

5. Click OK to return to the New/Edit Default Story Layer dialog box.

6 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

6. Once the default story layer has been defined or modified, click OK to return to the Default Story Layers dialog
box.
7. Once the default story layers in the list have been defined or modified, click OK to return to the Organization
dialog box.
Stories can now be created. They will use the default information specified to create the layers associated with the
stories.

Managing Level Types

Available story level types can be managed from the Organization dialog box.
To manage available level types:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box. Click the Design Layers tab.
2. Click Level Types.
The Level Types dialog box opens. Specify the level types that are available by default when creating stories.

Parameter Description
Level Type Name Lists the current default level types
New Opens the New Level Type dialog box, to create a new level type
Edit Opens the Edit Level Type dialog box, to edit the name of the level type
Delete Deletes the currently selected level type

3. Click OK.

Creating and Managing Stories

Project setup in the Vectorworks Architect product begins with creating stories and specifying their associated design
layers. The Stories tab of the Organization dialog box allows stories to be created and managed. Stories can also be
created when creating or editing design layers with options that display only when the Vectorworks Architect product is
installed. See Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To create and manage stories from the Organization dialog box:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box. Click the Stories tab.
The functionality of the Organization dialog box is described in Organizing the Drawing on page 89 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Visibilities view displays a list of story names. From the top of the dialog box, select Details view.
3. On the left, the stories are listed, along with their prefix or suffix and elevation. On the right, an interactive
diagram displays the stories and associated layers that make up the building model.
 Setting Up the Building Structure with Stories | 7

Summary story: non selected

Expanded story: Indicates story

selected in list on left

Scale figure

Story indicator line

Story marker (imperial or metric)

Parameter Description
Story Name list Lists the stories in the building model, along with each storys suffix designation and
elevation. The story order cannot be changed; stories are always listed in elevation order.
New Creates a new story and specifies the associated layer(s), prefix or suffix, and elevation
Edit Edits the selected storys name, suffix, or elevation
Delete Deletes the selected story or stories; when prompted, select whether to delete all layers
associated with the story or stories
Default Story Layers Opens the Default Story Layers dialog box, for defining or editing the defined layer
defaults; see Default Story Layers on page 4

4. Click New to create a new story, or Edit to modify the currently selected story.
The New Story or Edit Story dialog box opens. Specify the name, prefix or suffix, elevation, and the associated
layer(s).

Parameter Description
Name Specifies the name of the story
Layer Name Suffix/Prefix Specifies the prefix or suffix to append to each design layer name, to distinguish the
layers from other design layers; the design layer name can be changed later if needed
8 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Story Elevation Sets the story elevation; a default value is suggested, based on the elevation of other
stories. The layer plane on one story cannot overlap with the layer on another story;
therefore, the highest layer in a story cannot overlap with the lowest layer in the story
above, and the lowest layer in a story must be higher than the highest story in the story
below.
Layer List Lists the available layers to create and associate with the story; select a layer by
clicking in the first column. Layers to be created are indicated with a check mark.
Only one layer of a given type can be associated with a story; the available layers are
determined by the default story layers.
When a story layer has a level type, it appears as a potential boundary for objects in its
story, or the story above or below it. Selecting level types for the story is optional;
however, level types are necessary when setting up a model with bounded objects.
Edit Default Story Layers Opens the Default Story Layers dialog box, for editing or adding to the layers
available in the story; see Default Story Layers on page 4

5. If changing the elevation of a story from the Edit Story dialog box, the Change Story Elevation dialog box opens
to determine how to adjust the story and the stories around it. If not changing the story elevation, proceed to
Step 7.

Parameter Description
Move this Story and all Changes the elevation of the story, and adjusts all stories above it, including
Stories above it associated layers and layer-defined objects
Move this Story only Changes the elevation of the current story and its associated layers and objects
only; other stories remain at their set elevation
Move this Story and all Changes the elevation of the story, and adjusts all stories below it, including
Stories below it associated layers and layer-defined objects
Move all Stories Changes the elevation of the story, and adjusts all stories above it and below it,
including associated layers and layer-defined objects

6. Click OK to return to the Edit Story dialog box.

7. When the story settings have been made, click OK to return to the Organization dialog box.
The stories, once set up with associated layers and layer-defined objects, define the building model. On the Design
Layers tab of the Organization dialog box, listed layers display their story, level type, elevation, and default wall
height.
 Creating Standard Viewports | 9

Creating Standard Viewports

Viewports are created on sheet layers, and display a specific portion of a drawing with a combination of visible, grayed,
and/or hidden design layers and classes. Viewports can be cropped, rotated, and annotated, and the sheet layer print
settings can be saved. Several viewports can be included on one sheet layer. For the Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark products, the Create Standard Viewports command creates standards-compliant viewports and their
associated sheet layers, with the layer and class visibilities of a standard drawing. See Presenting Drawings with Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 734 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
If desired, views corresponding to the viewports can also be created. This allows easy navigation through the different
drawing views (with set layer and class visibilities) during the design process.
Viewports are created in five categories. The available viewport types are:
Site Plan Drawings
Project Plan Drawings
Floor Plan Drawings
Auxiliary Plan Drawings
Notation Drawings
Select the Create Standard Viewports command again to make changes to the project settings at any time. The
column on the right shows the current viewports when the command is run again.

Setting Standard Viewport Preferences

The default viewport scale and sheet border settings can be set prior to adding standard viewports to a project.
To set viewport preferences:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Create Standard Viewports.
The Create Standard Viewports dialog box opens.
2. Click Preferences.
The Create Viewport Preferences dialog box opens. The preferences apply as viewports are added to the list for
inclusion in the project

3. Set the default scale for each type of viewport and select a sheet border and, if desired, title block to add
automatically to each sheet layer. The scale settings affect only the viewport scale, not the layer scale of any model
layers. See Creating Sheet Borders on page 561 for more information on sheet borders.
4. Click OK to return to the Create Standard Viewports dialog box.
10 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Creating Standard Viewports

To create standard viewports:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Create Standard Viewports.
The Create Standard Viewports dialog box opens. Select a drawing category from the Type of Drawing list. The
available drawing types display in the Drawing Types list on the left, with a short description beneath. Select the
viewport to be created in the Drawing Types list and then click Add to move it to the Viewports to Be Created
list on the right.
For auxiliary view viewports (sections and elevations), types with a -Man suffix (such as Sections-Man) typically
indicate that the elements of the section or elevation are to be drawn manually on, for instance, Mod-Section or
Mod-Elevation layers, which are created along with the viewports. The visibility of all other layers is set to
Invisible for these viewports. Types with a -VP suffix (such as Sections-VP) are for creating a view or a section
viewport of the model from existing Mod- layers. No new layers are created and the visibility of all existing Mod-
layers is set to Visible for these viewports.

Parameter Description
Type of Drawing Lists the categories of viewport types
Drawing Types Lists the available viewport types in the selected Type of Drawing category
Description of Drawing Type Provides a description of the Type of Drawing category
Viewports to be Created Lists the viewports that will be created, along with the specified scale, sheet border
and sheet layer parameters
Add > Adds the selected viewport types from the Drawing Types list to the Viewports to
be Created list, including them in the drawing setup
< Remove Removes the selected viewport from the Viewports to be Created list
<< Remove All Removes all viewports from the Viewports to be Created list
Preferences Specifies the scale and sheet border parameter preferences when adding viewports
to the Viewports to be Created list
 Standard Naming | 11

Parameter Description
Sheet Options
Create All Stories For Floor Plan drawings, creates the selected viewport for each story; deselect to
(Vectorworks Architect specify an individual story based on its Suffix instead
required)
Suffix For Floor Plan, Auxiliary or Notation drawings, specify the individual story by its
suffix to create the viewport
Use sheet border on Places the sheet border specified in Create Viewport Preferences on the sheet layer
selected sheet when the viewport is added to the drawing
Use Vectorworks uniform Uses the Vectorworks uniform sheet numbers and sheet type designators
drawing numbering system
Use automatic drawing Matches the sheet number and title to the sheet border title block
coordination
Viewport Options Select a viewport from the Drawing Types list to set its parameters before adding
it to the Viewports to be Created list. Alternatively, select a viewport in the
Viewports to be Created list to set or change its options.
On Sheet Layer Select a sheet layer where the viewport will be placed. A default sheet layer name
is provided, but a different sheet layer can be selected. Alternatively, a new sheet
layer name can be created, by selecting New Sheet Layer and providing the sheet
layer name.
Viewport parameters Sets the viewport scale, view, projection, perspective, and rendering as described
in Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer on page 735 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Create corresponding view For each viewport in the Viewports to be Created list, creates a corresponding
for each viewport view with the same name. It is useful during the design process to navigate among
the different project views, where the proper layer and class visibilities have
already been set.

2. Once the list of viewports is ready, click OK. Any sheet layers specified that do not already exist in the drawing
are created along with the listed viewports (and views if the Create Corresponding View option was selected).
In a new drawing, the viewports display with a red X, indicating that they are currently empty. As the drawing is
developed on the design layers, the viewports will display the contents appropriately. Depending on the rendering
mode specified, some viewports may require updating with the Update Selected Viewports command.

Standard Naming
The Standard Naming command controls the layer, class, and viewport names used in a project. These names can be
changed to a user-defined system other than the default VWArch naming system. Standards can be mapped for
office-wide use or to convert an existing file to the office standard. This command can also be used to assign specific
attributes to classes in standards, and to change the names of layers, viewports/views and classes in the current
standard. The command does not create new layers, classes, or viewports/views.
If classes, layers, and viewports/views have not been set up according to VWArch standards, their names may not
match the example layer and class names presented here.
To set the standard naming of layers, classes, and views:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Standard Naming.
12 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

The Standard Naming dialog box opens. Select a naming standard for the file, and choose whether auto-classing
should be enabled for objects.

Parameter Description
Active Standard Select the naming standard to apply to classes, design layers, sheet layers, viewports, and
saved views
Details Opens the Standard Naming Details dialog box; to edit the names for a custom standard (User
1, User 2, and User 3), the standard must be selected as the Active Standard first
Enable Enables Auto-classing for the file and automatically places auto-classing objects into
Auto-classing pre-assigned classes; see Automatically Created Classes on page 15. If objects were
already present in the drawing when auto-classing is enabled, choose whether existing
objects should be auto-classed when exiting this dialog box.

2. Click Details to edit custom class, layer, and viewport/view names.

The Standard Naming Details dialog box opens, displaying class names on the Classes tab. Select the Design
Layers tab to display design layer names, and the Sheet Layers, VP, Saved Views tab to display the names for
viewports and their associated sheet layers, or for saved views.
Using the reference list, verify the mapping of standard names. Custom naming can be specified for custom active
standards by entering a new name for each layer, class, or viewport/view. If desired, class attributes can also be
specified for each standard or custom class name. See The Attributes Palette on page 501 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Standard Naming | 13

Parameter Description
Reference Standard Select a reference naming standard from the list; the relevant class, layer, or
viewport/view names are displayed below. Each active entry in the list is
mapped to its corresponding reference list entry.
User 1, User 2, and User 3 are custom standards. More custom standards can
be defined (see Creating Additional Custom Standards on page 13).
Active Standard Displays the overall naming standard currently in effect for the file (selected
in the initial Standard Naming dialog box)
Reference Standard List Lists the reference standard names for the class, design layer, viewport/sheet
layer, or saved view
Active Standard List Lists the standard name currently in effect and mapped to the reference
standard for the class, design layer, or viewport/sheet layer, or saved view
Description of class/layer/view Describes the currently selected class, layer, viewport/sheet layer, or saved
view in the list
Edit Class/Layer/View Name When a custom active standard is selected (User 1, User 2 or User 3), enter
the custom name for the currently selected class, layer, or viewport/view
Class Attributes (Classes tab only) Sets the attributes of a selected class in the Active Standard list
Lines Select the line class attributes
Pen Color Choose a pen color from the color box
Line Weight Select the line weight
Line Style Select the line style
Fills Select the fill style class attributes
Fill Pattern Select the fill pattern
Fill Fore Color Choose a fill foreground color from the color box
Fill Back Color Choose a fill background from the color box
Use at Creation Applies the class attributes as the classed item is created

3. When the desired class attributes have been specified, and, for custom standards, the standard names have been
established, click OK.
4. In the Standard Naming dialog box, click OK. If custom viewports exist in the drawing, you are prompted to run
the Create Standard Viewports command again to update the viewports/views with the new naming standard,
and update any new class attributes. If auto-classing was selected and objects had already been placed in the
drawing, select whether to auto-class those existing objects.

Creating Additional Custom Standards

A custom naming standard can be created rather than using the VWArch or AIA/NCS standard. Although three layer,
class, and viewport/view standards are available from within the Standard Naming dialog box (User 1, User 2 and User
3), up to ninety-nine can be created for layers, classes, and viewport/views by editing the ClassNameStds,
LayerNameStds, and ViewNameStds worksheets. See Using Worksheets on page 814 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
14 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

To create a custom naming standard by worksheet:

1. In a new file, select File > Document Settings > Standard Naming.
The Standard Naming dialog box opens.
2. Without making any changes, click OK.
Three worksheets are created in the file, and are visible in the Resource Browser: ClassNameStds,
LayerNameStds, and ViewNameStds.
3. Select one of the worksheets from the Resource Browser. From the Resources menu, select Open.
The worksheet opens for editing.

ClassNameStds Worksheet

4. Highlight column D (User 1) and from the Worksheet menu select Insert > Columns. A new column is added in
front of the selected one.
New columns must be inserted after the AIA/NCS column and before the Description or Pen Color column.
5. Enter a name in cell D1 for the new standard.
6. Enter a new standard name for each cell below D1.
Cells left blank in the ClassNameStds worksheet will be assigned to the None class. Cells left blank in the
LayerNameStds worksheet will be assigned to the Layer-None layer. Blank cells are not permitted in the
ViewNameStds worksheet; if a worksheet with blank viewport/view names is attempted for use in Standard
Naming, an error message is displayed.
7. The new standard is displayed in the Standard Naming dialog box.
To use these changes in other files, either save the file as a template to be used as the basis for new drawings, or
import each worksheet into the other file before running the Standard Naming command.

Coarse and Fine Custom Standards

When creating custom standard naming, naming standards may contain fewer standard names (coarser) or additional
standard names (finer).
A coarser custom standard names two or more of the standard class, layer, or view names with the same user-defined
name. Except for auto-classing, this is an irreversible process.
For example, the classes Area-Main, Area-Patterns, and Area-Spec can be combined into a single class called Areas.
All objects assigned to the original three classes are reassigned to Areas.
When custom standard naming changes are complete, additional information displays to confirm any actions to be
taken, such as merging changed class names to eliminate duplicates.
A finer standard maps a single class, layer, or view name to multiple names. Mapping is required to define the
standard naming change, and the Standard Naming - Mapping dialog box opens automatically.
 Vectorworks Architect and Landmark Classes | 15

For example, an A-FP# layer AIA standard corresponds to two layer standards in the Vectorworks Architect product:
Mod-Floor-# and Mod-Slab-#. If switching from the AIA standard to the VWArch standard, select the A-FP# layer
from the list on the left and indicate the mapping for objects currently on the A-FP# layer by selecting the mapping
layer on the right.
All objects assigned to the A-FP# layer are assigned to the Mod-Floor-# layer. Unmapped layers are not created.

Vectorworks Architect and Landmark Classes

Automatically Created Classes

Several classes are created automatically by features in the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products, regardless
of whether standards have been established at setup. See Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
NonPlot (Vectorworks Architect): This class is created as part of doors and windows. The loci that define the
window and door edges are created in this class, which is normally set to Invisible so that the loci are hidden.
Redlines (Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, Spotlight): This class is created by the Redline tool. All redline
objects are placed in this class, which allows all redlines in the file to be shown or hidden. This class is toggled to
visible and invisible by the Show or Hide Redlines command.
Guides (Vectorworks Architect and Landmark): This class is created and used by selecting Modify > Guides >
Make Guide.
The Wall Framer command (Vectorworks Architect) creates the following classes: Framer-Block, Framer-Sole
Plate, Framer-Header, Framer-Stud, Framer-Sill, and Framer-Top Plate.
Site-DTM-Modifier (Vectorworks Landmark): This class is created by the Pad, Texture Bed, Grader, and
Boundary objects. The Landscape Walls and Roadway objects include pad and fence objects if the Use Site
Modifiers check box is selected on the Object Info palette. This class is toggled to visible and invisible by the
Show or Hide Site Modifiers command.
Irrigation-SprayPat (Vectorworks Landmark): This class is created by using the Irrigation Head and Drip Emitter
objects. This class is toggled to visible and invisible by the Show or Hide Spray Pattern command.

Object Auto-classing
Auto-classing is the automatic assignment of certain objects to a default class. Many plug-in objects in the libraries
provided have been pre-assigned to the proper class according to the drawing standard for the Vectorworks Architect
and Landmark products (VWArch). For a list of auto-classing objects, see Auto-classing Objects on page 1013.
If the Use Auto-classing check box is selected in Standard Naming (see Standard Naming on page 11), then these
plug-in objects will be automatically placed in the designated class as they are added to the drawing. The objects class
is created automatically if it does not yet exist.
If a file has not been structured according to setup standards, or the Use Auto-classing check box is not selected, the
objects are placed in the active class. The objects, upon regeneration, are assigned to the proper class if the file is later
set up. Any symbol, when created, can be set to default to a class from the Symbol Insertion Options dialog box.
If you use a naming standard other than VWArch, the default class of the object libraries must be reset.
Save a backup version of the object libraries before editing them. See Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
To set the default class of all the symbols in a library file:
1. Select File > Open.
16 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

The standard Open dialog box opens.

2. Select the Libraries folder, and then click Open.
3. Select the first object library file to convert, and then click Open.
The selected file opens in the drawing window.
4. Select Tools > Utilities > Set Default Symbol Class.
A warning dialog box opens. Click Yes to acknowledge converting all symbol definitions in the file to the new
default class name.
The Enter String dialog box opens.
5. Enter the default class name for the symbols, and then click OK.
Ensure that the name is spelled correctly to match the desired custom class standard. This command can be
undone if necessary. If the name matches an existing name in the file other than a class, an alert dialog box opens.
6. Select File > Save to save the changes.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each object library.
Any time that symbols are used from this file, they will take on the specified class as their default class.
The command does not distinguish between one symbol definition and another. All symbol definitions in the file
will take on the new class name. For that reason, to use on custom libraries, run the command on a copy of the file.

Mapping Classes and Layers

The Class and Layer Mapping command maps any set of layers and/or classes in a drawing into a new layer and/or
class. The file structure can be simplified, condensed, and/or renamed. Use this feature, for example, when a consultant
is using .DWG or .DXF files. Complex, multi-classed files imported from .DWG can be condensed or renamed, and
empty classes deleted in a single operation. Mapping can be saved so the next time a file is received from that
consultant, the file can be re-mapped in a single step. This same procedure can be revised for the process of providing
files to consultants using a different file structure or drawing standard. See Managing Layers on page 94 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Managing Classes on page 106 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
To modify layers and classes:
1. Select Tools > Class and Layer Mapping.
The Class Mapping dialog box opens. Modify the existing classes, and then click Go To Layers to open the Layer
Mapping dialog box. The Layer Mapping dialog box is identical in layout to the Class Mapping dialog box.
 Mapping Classes and Layers | 17

Parameter Description
Existing Classes/Layers Lists the existing classes or layers in the file; layers or classes that are not moved to
the Proposed or Merged list are deleted
Proposed Classes/Layers Lists the proposed layers or classes to be created in the file; layers or classes that
remain in this list are deleted when the layers and classes are modified
Add > Adds a layer or class from the list of existing layers or classes to the Proposed list
Merge > Adds a layer or class to the Merged list; layers or classes in this list will be merged
with the layer or class that is selected in the Proposed list
< Remove Removes the selected item from the Proposed list
New Creates a new class or layer in the Proposed list
Rename Renames the selected proposed layer or class
Merged Items Lists layers or classes to merge with the selected layer or class in the Proposed list.
The merge occurs when the next action is performed in the dialog box, so that layers
and classes are merged on an ongoing basis. Selecting a proposed layer or class lists
its merged items again so that changes can be made, if desired.
Remove Removes the selected item from the Merged list
Load Opens a previously saved mapping file
Save Saves the layer or class mapping as a file; layer and class mapping settings are saved
separately. This saves time when making the same modifications to several drawings
that are set up similarly.
Reset All Moves all proposed and merged items back to the Existing list
Delete empty class/layer in Deletes all layers and classes that have no items associated with them
proposed drawing
Go To Layers/Go To Classes Toggles between the Class Mapping and Layer Mapping dialog boxes

When selecting existing and proposed classes and layers, press and hold the Shift key to select multiple,
contiguous items or press and hold the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) to select
non-contiguous items.
18 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

2. Click OK.
The drawing is updated, using the new layer and class mapping. Layers and classes not moved to the Proposed or
Merged list are deleted from the file, along with any objects in those layers or classes.

Spotlight Setup

Lighting Device Setup

The options on the Lighting Device tab enable automatic positioning behavior, assign classes, and specify attributes of
the lighting devices in the file. The parameters selected can have a powerful global effect on all the devices, both
existing and new.
Lighting devices can be automatically associated with a lighting position, both at insertion and when an existing device
is moved on the light plot. At various times during the design work, particularly in the later stages, devices may need to
be moved slightly, but they should not be accidentally associated with a different nearby lighting position. The
auto-positioning option provides the necessary control over the automatic association of devices to lighting positions.
Class and color assignments for lighting devices allow the designer to:
Assign the lighting devices to a specific class, or to one or more classes determined by a lighting device parameter
Control the color of lighting devices, or parts of lighting devices, by gel color or from the Attributes palette
Control the wireframe light beams for lighting devices by class
Control the label legend container appearance by class
Control the appearance and visibility of lighting devices in viewports, when using viewport overrides

Beam

Labels

Lighting device
symbol geometry

Container shapes

The Object Info palette display of lighting device parameters can also be set from this tab.
To specify lighting device preferences:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Spotlight Preferences.
The Spotlight Preferences dialog box opens. Click the Lighting Device tab.
 Spotlight Setup | 19

Parameter Description
Enable Lighting Device Toggles the option to automatically associate lighting devices with nearby lighting
Auto Positioning positions. When enabled, the device automatically associates with the closest lighting
position within the Pick radius. When disabled, the lighting device is assigned to a
lighting position at insertion, but if moved later, the devices associated position remains
unchanged.
If devices are still being added to a complex light plot, enable auto positioning, but
decrease the radius value so that existing devices can be moved without losing their
pipe association. When devices are only being repositioned, disable the
auto-positioning option.
Pick radius When auto positioning is enabled, specifies the radius for automatic association
Automatically assign Sets class options for lighting devices; select the option to enable automatic classing
the classes of all options or deselect the option to turn off automatic class assignment
lighting devices
Use existing document Places all lighting devices in the selected class; select the class from the current list of
class classes or select New to create a new class
Use value of the field Places all lighting devices into a class that is determined by the value of a lighting device
parameter; select one of the lighting device parameters from the list. For example, the
value of the field User Field 2 could determine the class of each lighting device; lighting
devices whose User Field 2 value is set to FOH will automatically be placed into a
class together for automated appearance and visibility control. If the value of a particular
field is not set (blank) for a lighting device, the device remains in the current class.
20 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Class name Specifies class naming options when the lighting device classes are determined by field
value name; select a Prefix or Suffix and then enter the prefix or suffix name. Using a
dash will nest the classes.
For example, using a prefix of Fixtures- means that when a lighting device contains a
value of Rental for User Field 2, the device is placed in a class named Fixtures-Rental.
Modify lighting device Sets color options for the lighting device; select the option to enable automatic color
color options, or deselect the option to turn off automatic color control (the symbol specifies
the lighting device color)
Lighting device color set The Attributes palette controls the color of the lighting device geometry. Attributes can
by: Lighting device be set directly from the palette for selected lighting devices or controlled by class (see
Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Lighting device color set The color specified in the lighting devices Color parameter also controls the appearance
by: Color field of the lighting device geometry
Use color field for the Applies the Color parameter value to the fill color of the lighting device
fill color
Use color field for the Applies the Color parameter value to the pen color of the lighting device
pen color
Modify only geometry in Modifies the color of lighting device components within the selected class; select <All>
the class to modify all the geometry, select the class from the current list of classes, or select New
to create a new class
Label legend container Controls the appearance of the label legend container(s)
Use symbol attributes: uses the container symbol definition to specify the attributes
Use label attributes: matches the attributes of the container to the attributes of the label
legend text within the container
Use lighting device attributes: matches the attributes of the container to the attributes
of the lighting device
Beam class Controls the class of the wireframe representation of the light beam; select a class for the
beam, or select New to create a new class. Alternatively, select <Lighting device Class>,
which places the beam attributes in the same class as the lighting device object.
 Spotlight Setup | 21

Parameter Description
Additional Default Opens the Additional Default Records dialog box, to select additional records with
Records default data for lighting devices.

Only applicable records display for selection. Select one or more record formats from
those present in the file; a check mark in the Use column indicates that the default data in
the record will be included. At insertion or replacement, the lighting device processes the
additional record(s). If a match is found for a record field name, the default data from the
record attached to the symbol applies to that field and displays in the Object Info palette.
Lighting Device Opens the Lighting Device Parameters dialog box, to set lighting device parameter
Parameters display options; see Specifying Lighting Device Parameter Display on page 21
Save as default Saves the current Spotlight preferences as the default; the default settings saved include
those on the Universe and Lightwright tab

2. Specify the auto-positioning and appearance settings for the files lighting devices.
Click Save as default to use the lighting device and other Spotlight settings for other files created with the
Vectorworks Spotlight product.
3. Click OK.
Class setting changes require confirmation before regenerating the lighting devices.

Specifying Lighting Device Parameter Display

The lighting device parameters that display on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette can be customized. The
customized parameters apply to all lighting devices in the file, and parameter sets can be saved.
To specify lighting device parameters:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Spotlight Preferences.
2. The Spotlight Preferences dialog box opens. Click the Lighting Device tab.
3. Click Lighting Device Parameters.
The Lighting Device Parameters dialog box opens. From this dialog box, Object Info palette parameters for
lighting devices can be added, renamed, deleted, removed from display, and ordered. Parameter sets can be saved
and managed.
Default lighting device parameters cannot be deleted.
22 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Settings list Select a saved set of parameters to apply or edit. Once a saved set has been edited, <customized>
displays in the list; click Save to save the custom set. Select <Default> to apply the standard set
for the Vectorworks Spotlight program.
Save Opens the Save Settings dialog box; enter the name for the new saved set. Enter the same name as
a previously saved set to overwrite the set.
Manage Opens the Saved Settings dialog box; select the set of saved parameters to rename or delete. Click
OK to return to the Lighting Device Parameters dialog box.

Parameter list Lists the parameters, in order, that will display on the Shape Tab of the Object Info palette. Only
items with a check mark in the Show in Shape Pane column will display on the Object Info
palette. To change the order of a parameter, click and drag within the # column.
 Spotlight Setup | 23

Parameter Description
New Opens the Edit Field dialog box, to add a custom parameter to the list.

Enter the name of the new parameter, and select its type and default value, if any (see Creating
Record Formats on page 188 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Click OK to
return to the Lighting Device Parameters dialog box.
Edit Opens the Edit Field dialog box, to edit the currently selected parameter name, type, and default
value
Remove Deletes the currently selected parameter(s) from the set

4. If settings have been changed, save the current settings as a set by clicking Save; <customized> is not considered
as a saved set, though it applies to the current file.
5. Click OK to return to the Spotlight Preferences dialog box. The parameter display set that was selected applies to
the current file.
Regardless of whether Save as default is clicked in the Spotlight Preferences dialog box, the last selected saved
set of parameters is in effect, even when creating a new file. New files created in Vectorworks Spotlight always
default to the last saved parameter set.

Universe Assignment in Vectorworks Spotlight

At the beginning of a project (and at any other time), the Vectorworks Spotlight product can be set to automatically
handle the assignment of DMX universe and dimmer combinations. As instruments are added to the light plot, the U
Dimmer and Universe instrument parameters are determined based on the dimmer numbers specified in the Spotlight
Preferences dialog box.
To specify the dimmer and universe assignment:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Spotlight Preferences.
The Spotlight Preferences dialog box opens. Click the Universe tab.
24 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Manually assign the Dimmer Disables automatic universe assignment by the Vectorworks Spotlight product;
and Universe dimmer and universe values need to be assigned manually for each lighting device
Automatically assign As dimmer numbers are entered for lighting devices, the universe is automatically
Universe assigned by the Vectorworks Spotlight product
System Specifies the universe system; up to six systems, A through F, are available. Each
system can contain up to 64 DMX universes.
Univ #, Label, Start #, End # Specifies where the universe breaks occur. For each universe, enter the dimmer
range with a Start and End value; divisions of 512 are typical, but non-uniform
divisions are also accepted. The universe name (label) is not required.
Previous/Next Page When defining more than eight universes, navigate to additional universe entries
with Previous Page and Next Page. Up to 64 DMX universes can be specified per
system.
Save as default Saves the current Spotlight preferences as the default; the default settings saved
include those on the Universe and Lightwright tab

2. To enable automatic universe assignment, click Automatically assign Universe.

3. Select a universe system and then for each universe in the system, provide a name (optional) and a starting and
ending value. Click Next Page to continue entering universe break values.
Click Save as default to use this universe assignment and other Spotlight preferences for other files created with
the Vectorworks Spotlight product.
4. Click OK.
The dimmer numbers of inserted instruments are automatically assigned to a universe. The U Dimmer parameter
in the Object Info palette displays the automatically assigned dimmer number when automatic assignment is on.
 Project Setup for Mechanical Design | 25

Project Setup for Mechanical Design

At the beginning of a mechanical design project, use the Drawing Setup command to quickly set relevant drawing
units, layer scale and print area from a single dialog box. A sheet border and title block can also be inserted
automatically. An alternate method of setting up a document is to open one of the pre-configured machine design
template files and use it as a starting point.
The Machine Design (Imperial) template opens with File > Document Settings > Units set to inches on the
General Display tab, decimal rounding set to three decimal places, and the design layer scale set at 1:1.
To set up a project with the Drawing Setup command:
1. Select File > New.
The Create Document dialog box opens.

2. Select Create blank document, and then click OK.

3. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Drawing Setup
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Drawing Setup
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Drawing Setup

The Drawing Setup dialog box opens.

4. Specify the drawing units, layer scale, print area, and sheet border, and then click OK. For more information on
Drawing Units, Layer Scale, and the Print Area, see Setting Up the Drawing on page 73 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
26 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Drawing Units The current drawing units value on the General Display tab of the Units dialog box
displays; click Change to revise the current drawing units
Layer Scale The current layer scale displays; click Change to set a different layer scale.
If the active layer is a sheet layer, the layer scale cannot be changed.
Print Area The current print area value displays; click Change to enter different print area
parameters
Insert Sheet Border Automatically inserts a sheet border
Insert Title Block Select the title block to insert within the sheet border, or select None to leave out the
title block; see Creating Sheet Borders on page 561
Insert Revision Block Select to insert a revision history block within the sheet border; for more information,
see Creating Sheet Borders on page 561
Insert Tolerance Block Select to insert a tolerance specifications block within the sheet border (ASME title
block required); for more information, see Editing a Tolerance Block on page 564
Insert Projection Block Select to insert a projection block containing either a first angle or third angle
projection symbol within the sheet border (ASME title block required)

The drawing setup parameters are saved with the file. Use the Object Info palette to make any changes to the sheet
border once it has been placed in the drawing.

Records and Schedules

Some architectural elements (doors and spaces, for example) have pre-defined data that is automatically attached to
them as they are created. Pre-formatted schedules are available for reporting this data, as well as data from other
elements of the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, and Spotlight products. (For information on choosing a
preformatted schedule in Vectorworks Landmark and Spotlight, see Creating Schedules Automatically on page 37).
Typically, custom data records and schedules are created and edited with the Resource Browser. The Record and
Schedule Management suite provides an alternate method for managing data in architectural documents.
For information about using the Resource Browser to create and edit record formats and schedules (worksheets), see
Record Formats on page 188 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Creating Worksheets on
page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Record formats and schedules created in this way cannot be
used with Vectorworks Architect products Record and Schedule management suite, however.
The records and schedules suite includes the following commands:
VA Records and Schedules: Establishes default formats for records that can be attached to objects, and for
schedules that can be generated from those records
VA Create Record: Adds selected record formats to the current file
VA Create Schedule: Adds selected schedules to the current file
By default, records and schedules created with VA Records and Schedules are added to the VA Defaults project
preference set, and new files use that VA Defaults set. If additional sets of records and schedules are needed, create a
new set of preferences and select that set before setting up a new drawing file. See Working with Project Preference
Sets on page 35 for more information.
 Records and Schedules | 27

Defining Records and Schedules

Use the VA Records and Schedules command to create and modify a set of record format and schedule definitions that
can be used in any file.
After defining record formats and schedules, make them available in the current file using the VA Create Record and
VA Create Schedule commands.

Editing Record Definitions

To edit a record definition:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules.
The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Records Lists currently defined record formats
Add Adds a new record to the current preference set
Remove Deletes the selected record
Edit Opens the selected record for editing
Schedules Lists currently defined schedule formats
Add Adds a new schedule to the current preference set
Remove Deletes the selected schedule
Edit Opens the selected schedule for editing

2. Select the record to edit.

3. Click Edit in the Records section of the Records and Schedules dialog box.
The Record Formats dialog box opens.
28 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Record Fields Lists the current fields of the selected record
Add Creates a new record field
Remove Deletes the selected record field (cannot be undone)
Edit Opens the selected record field for editing

4. Click Add to add a new record field or click Edit to edit the selected field.
The Edit Field dialog box opens. Add or edit the field information.

Parameter Description
Name Specifies the name of the selected record field
Default Enter a default value for the field, if desired
Type Specifies the type of field: Integer, Boolean, Number, or Text

5. Click OK to close the Edit Field dialog box.

6. In the Record Formats dialog box, continue to modify, add, or remove record items.
7. Click OK to close the Record Formats dialog box, and then click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog
box.
Once a record definition has been updated, instances of the new record format cannot co-exist in the same file with
instances of the old record format. If an object is inserted into a drawing with a record format that differs from the
current record of the same name, a dialog box opens requesting which format to retain. Records in the un-retained
format will be purged, and their information will be lost. For this reason, it is recommended that any changes be
made to record formats prior to beginning a project.

Adding Record Definitions

To add a record definition:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules.
The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.
 Records and Schedules | 29

2. Click Add in the Records section of the Records and Schedules dialog box.
The Enter Text dialog box opens. Enter the name of the new record.
3. Click OK.
The Record Formats dialog box opens, listing the default fields of the new record; only the Add button is enabled.

4. Click Add to add a new field to the current record definition. Enter a Name and Default value for the field. Select
the field Type from the list.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Field dialog box.
The new field displays on the Record Formats dialog box. If more fields are needed, repeat steps 4 and 5.
6. Click OK.
The new record and its fields are added to the record definition list.
7. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.

Removing Record Definitions

To remove a record definition:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules.
The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.
2. Select the record to remove.
3. Click Remove in the Records section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. This operation cannot be undone;
click Yes to confirm that the record should be removed.
The record definition is removed from the record list.
4. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.

Editing Schedule Definitions

The Schedule definitions detail the column heading text, width, and border attributes for each record field being
reported.
To edit a schedule definition:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules.
The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.
2. Select the schedule to edit.
3. Click Edit in the Schedules section of the Records and Schedules dialog box.
The Edit Schedule Format dialog box opens. Specify the schedule appearance by selecting the column order and
formatting.
30 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Schedule Information Select the record to format, defining the data to be reported in the schedule
Available Record Fields Select the record field(s) to include in the schedule
Schedule Columns Displays the fields that will be included in the schedule
Add > Moves the selected available record field into the Schedule Columns list
< Remove Deletes a selected field from the Schedule Columns list
Move Up Moves the selected field up in the Schedule Columns list order
Move Dn Moves the selected field down in the Schedule Columns list order
Heading Enter a title for the selected Schedule Column item, if desired. The title displays in row 2
of the column corresponding to the field.
Sub-Heading 1 Enter a subheading for the selected Schedule Column item if desired. The title displays
in row 3 of the column corresponding to the field.
Sub-Heading 2 Enter a subheading for the selected Schedule Column item, if desired. The title displays
in row 4 of the column corresponding to the field.
Width (chars) Specifies the width, in characters, for the selected Schedule Column item
Borders Specifies the column border display for the selected Schedule Column
Options Opens the Schedule Format Options dialog box; proceed with step 4

4. Click Options to edit the schedule font style and size.

The Schedule Format Options dialog box opens; the current font type and size settings for the heading,
subheadings, and body display.
 Records and Schedules | 31

5. If different font settings are desired, click the appropriate Change button to open the Format Text dialog box and
modify the font type and size for the heading, subheadings, and body of schedule items. (See Formatting Text
on page 348 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
6. Click OK to close the Schedule Format Options dialog box, and then click OK to close the Edit Schedule Format
dialog box.
7. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.

Adding Schedule Definitions

To add a schedule definition:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules.
The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.
2. Click Add in the Schedules section of the Records and Schedules dialog box.
The Enter Text dialog box opens.
3. Enter the name for the new schedule.
4. Click OK.
The Edit Schedule Format dialog box opens. For details on the Edit Schedule Format dialog box parameters, see
Editing Schedule Definitions on page 29.
5. Select the record that defines the data to be reported in the new schedule, and then add the desired fields to use for
the schedule.
6. Select a schedule column, and then enter the column formatting information. If desired, click Options and set the
font formatting for the column, and then click OK.
7. Click OK to save the new schedule.
The new schedule definition is added.
8. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.

Removing Schedule Definitions

To remove a schedule definition:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Records and Schedules.
32 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

The Records and Schedules dialog box opens.

2. Select the schedule definition to remove.
3. Click Remove in the Schedules section of the Records and Schedules dialog box. This operation cannot be
undone; click Yes to confirm that the schedule should be removed.
The schedule definition is removed from the schedule list.
4. Click Done to close the Records and Schedules dialog box.

Creating Records
The VA Create Record command adds record formats created with the VA Records and Schedules command to the
current file. Once the records are added, they can be attached to items in the drawing using the ID Label tool. They can
also be attached by selecting an object and then selecting the check box next to the record format in the Data tab of the
Object Info palette.
To create a record:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Create Record.
The Create Record dialog box opens, listing the available records that can be added to the file.

2. Select the record to add to the file.

3. Click OK to add the specified record to the file.

Creating Schedules
The VA Create Schedule command generates worksheets for the current file. Any schedule definitions that were
created with the VA Records and Schedules command display in the list, as well as several pre-formatted schedules
provided as default content with the Vectorworks Architect product.
The Display default content option must be selected on the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences to see the
pre-formatted schedules. (See Session Preferences on page 20 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
Pre-formatted schedules include:

Diffuser Report Objects with IFC Entity Plant List - Simple w/Images
Door Hardware Legend Objects with IFC Entity - Specific Plant List - Types
Door Schedule Objects without IFC Entity Plumbing Schedule
Door Schedule w/Images Plant List - Basic Roof Face Area
Drawing List Plant List - Basic w/Images Room Finish Schedule
Equipment Schedule Plant List - Colors Wall Area
 Records and Schedules | 33

Existing Tree Schedule Plant List - Colors w/Images Wall Style Report
Existing Tree Schedule w/Images Plant List - Costing Wall Style Report w/Images
Irrigation Head Schedule Plant List - Costing w/Images Window Schedule
Irrigation Line Schedule Plant List - Simple Window Schedule w/Image

To generate a schedule:
1. Select Tools > Reports > VA Create Schedule.
The Create Schedule dialog box opens, listing the schedules that can be added to the file.

2. Select the desired schedule to be created. Enter a new Schedule Title if desired. Select Place worksheet on
drawing to place the worksheet on the drawing for printing.
3. Click OK.
Each schedule has a record format associated with it. If there is a difference between the record definition
currently in the file and the record definition in the current preference set, a notice displays with the option to
continue or fix the record.
If the selected schedule already exists in the file, a warning dialog box opens. Select whether to replace or rename
the new schedule (some schedules also have a recalculate option), and click OK.

4. Click on the drawing area where the top left corner of the schedule is to be located.
The worksheet opens, displaying the schedule information. If the option to place the worksheet on drawing was
selected, the worksheet is included on the drawing.
If the on drawing worksheet is accidentally deleted, select the worksheet name from the Resource Browser and
select Worksheet On Drawing from the Resources menu.
34 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Creating a Room Finish Legend

There can be dozens of room finishes assigned within a project file. To obtain a detailed report of all room finish data,
first generate a room finish schedule as described in Creating Schedules on page 32. Then generate a detailed legend
showing a full description of the finishes using the Create Rm Finish Legend command. This command can only be
used after room finishes have been assigned to space objects.
To generate a room finish legend:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Rm Finish Legend.
The Create Room Finish Legend dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Create legend as text block Adds the legend to the drawing as a text block
Label Indent Sets the offset from the location title to the item title
Note Indent Sets the offset from the location title to the item description
Section Spacing Sets the text spacing between each section
Note Spacing Sets the text spacing between each item description
Bold Section Titles Displays the location titles in bold face text
Create legend as worksheet Adds the legend to the drawing as a worksheet
Worksheet Name Sets the name of the worksheet
Place worksheet in document Places the worksheet on the drawing at the next mouse click
Add row between sections Adds a worksheet row between each location section
Bold section titles Displays the location titles in bold face text

2. Select whether the legend should be displayed as a text block or as a worksheet. See Creating Text Blocks on
page 344 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Creating Worksheets on page 811 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Display Method Description

Text block Define the area for the legend to occupy. Click to set the top left corner of the text block, and
then click to set the bottom right of the text block. The text legend is generated within the
defined rectangle.
Worksheet The worksheet is created with the legend information. If the Place worksheet in document
option is selected, click on the drawing to set the top left corner of the worksheet.
 Working with Project Preference Sets | 35

3. Click OK.

Working with Project Preference Sets

In most cases, the default project preference set (VA Defaults) is the only set needed. If additional sets of records and
schedules are needed, create a new set of preferences and select that set before setting up a new drawing file.
A project preference set is a grouped configuration of record, schedule, and library information that is used by a
drawing file. A project preference set can be customized for particular projects (residential or commercial, for
example) or different types of clients (restaurant or retail store, for example). Different record and schedule formats can
be assigned, as well as information in room finish libraries and door hardware libraries. These custom configurations
are saved in external text files. The VA Set Project Prefs command assigns which set of external files to use within the
current drawing. The settings files used by these commands, taken together, are called a project preference set.
Dialog boxes in the Vectorworks Architect products Record and Schedule management suite display the name of the
current preference set in the title bar.
Because the preference sets are stored as external files, they can be shared among many users to comply with office
standards. The preference set folders can be copied to the same location for each user, or shared on a network location.
Either select the VA Set Project Prefs command to designate the preference set location, or copy the following text file
to each computer:
[Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\VA2_Preference_Set_Paths.txt
See Project Preference Sets on page 1017 for information on the files contained in the preference set folders.

Selecting a Project Preference Set

The default preference set is named VA Defaults, and its files are located in
[Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_Def.
To use a different project preference set, select it when setting up the file. The preference set selection is saved with the
file. Changes to VA Records and Schedules, the Door Hardware Library, or the Room Finish Library are saved in the
currently selected project preference set.
When using template files for different types of projects, make a preference set selection before saving the
template.
To select a project preference set:
1. Select Tools > Options > VA Set Project Prefs.
The VA Preference Sets dialog box opens. The listed sets are available for use in the file.

Parameter Description
Preference set list Lists project preference sets that are available for use in the file
36 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

Parameter Description
Add Adds a project preference set to the list; specify the set location and name
Remove Deletes the selected project preference set association (the file is not deleted, but cannot be
selected for this project)
Edit Changes the project preference set name or location

2. Select the project preference set to activate.

3. Click Done.
The selection VA Defaults cannot be deleted or edited; it contains the information that is used if no project
preference set is designated or if there is an error finding the designated set.

Creating a New Project Preference Set

While the Vectorworks Architect product installs with six project preference sets, it supports the use of an unlimited
number. To add preference sets beyond the default options, manually create additional preference folders and then add
the set to the list of defined sets using the VA Set Project Prefs command.
The project preference set folder must contain the following files for correct operation:
Door Hardware Library.txt
Equipment Record.txt
Equipment Schedule.txt
Plumbing Fixt Record.txt
Plumbing Schedule.txt
VA2 Records and Schedules.txt
VA_Project_Set.txt
If additional records and schedules are defined using the VA Records and Schedules command, their data files are
stored in the project preference set folder.

Adding a Project Preference Set

After creating a project preference set, add it to the list of project preference sets available:
1. Select Tools > Options > VA Set Project Prefs.
2. The VA Preference Sets dialog box opens. Click Add.
The Add Preference Set dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Path Enter or browse for the path to the project preference set folder
Name Specifies a name for this project preference set

3. Click OK to return to the VA Preference Sets dialog box. To use the new project preference set, select it from the
list and click Done.
 Creating Schedules Automatically | 37

Creating Schedules Automatically

The Vectorworks Landmark and Spotlight products include a Choose Schedule command with preformatted schedules
that are generated automatically (similarly, the Vectorworks Architect product includes preformatted, customizable
records and schedules as described in Records and Schedules on page 26). The schedules can be created any time; as
objects are added to the drawing, recalculate the worksheet to update the results.
The preformatted schedules are from the default content included with the Vectorworks Landmark or Spotlight product
in the [Vectorworks]\ Libraries folder (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
The default schedules for Vectorworks Landmark include plant lists, irrigation plans, and existing tree reports, with or
without images. Plants to be included in the Plant List worksheets must have On Plant List selected in the Plant
Settings dialog box or the Object Info palette. Irrigation plans are created by using the ID Label tool and worksheets
together. Before creating the schedule, place ID labels on the drawing with the ID Label tool. (See Using the ID Label
Tool on page 566.)
A formatted worksheet can be saved as a custom schedule to be used again; export the worksheet resource (renamed
with a custom name) to the default content folder, or to your user folder default library. Your customized worksheet
becomes available for selection in the Choose Schedule dialog box. For information on exporting resources, see
Exporting Custom Resources on page 616.
Another way to create a schedule is to select Tools > Reports > Create Report. List the objects with the relevant
record, such as the Existing Tree record, and then select the desired columns to include in the report. See Creating
Reports on page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.
To add a schedule:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Choose Schedule (Landmark workspace) or Spotlight > Reports > Choose Schedule
(Spotlight workspace).
The Choose Schedule dialog box opens. Select one of the worksheets to create; select Place worksheet on
drawing to add the worksheet to the drawing area.

2. Click OK to create the selected worksheet.

If the worksheet is to be placed on the drawing, click to indicate the position of the top left corner of the
worksheet.
The worksheet, populated with specific information from the current drawing, is automatically created.
For more information on worksheets, see Worksheets on page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Sharing Custom Content Using Workgroup Folders

When Vectorworks Design Series is installed, you can create a workgroup environment, to share one or more folders of
custom content files on a network with coworkers. These files might contain content that will be used by all users (such
as templates, symbols, export settings, or workspaces). Or they might contain custom content specific to different
38 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

projects. Each user who needs access to those files can then designate that shared network folder as a workgroup folder
in his or her Vectorworks Preferences, so that the custom content will be available in the Vectorworks program.
You can manually add custom files to the workgroup Libraries folder, to have resources such as symbols and hatches
display as favorites in the Resource Browser, or as default content in dialog boxes and palettes. See Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information. For details about where to put files and
how to name them, see Sharing Custom Files with a Workgroup on page 39 in this guide.

Designating Workgroup Folders

To designate workgroup and project folders:
Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences, and then click the User Folders tab.

Parameter Description
User Data and Preferences Specifies the folder that contains Vectorworks preferences, log files, workspaces,
Folder and any personal content you create. This might be a folder on the local computer,
or on a USB drive or network drive; this allows you to run the Vectorworks
program from any computer.
For more information about user folders, see User Folders Preferences on
page 27 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Choose Click Choose to change the user data folder. The Vectorworks program must be
restarted if you change the location of the user data. See User Data and
Preferences Folder on page 28 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
for details.
Explore (Windows) or To look at the contents of the current folder, click Explore (to open Windows
Reveal in Finder (Macintosh) Explorer) or click Reveal in Finder (to open Macintosh Finder)
Workgroup and Project Folders Specifies the folders where the Vectorworks program will look for additional
content, such as office standard files, shared project files, and workgroup
reference files. This might be a shared folder on a network drive, or a
project-specific folder on the local computer.
Folders are searched in order from the top of the list to bottom; if multiple files
with the same name are found, only the first version of the file is shown in the
program. To change the position of a folder, click in the # column and drag the
folder up or down in the list.
 Sharing Custom Content Using Workgroup Folders | 39

Parameter Description
Add Opens a dialog box to select a folder to add to the list
Remove Deletes the selected folder from the list
Explore (Windows) or Displays the contents of the selected folder in either Windows Explorer or
Reveal in Finder (Macintosh) Macintosh Finder

To easily access a workgroup folder, use the file list in the Resource Browser. See Accessing Existing Resources
on page 162 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.

Click to open the file list

Select Workgroup Libraries to

access your workgroup folders

Accessing workgroup folders from the Resource Browser

Sharing Custom Files with a Workgroup

To share custom content with a workgroup, create a main workgroup folder in a shared location. Within the folder,
create a subfolder that matches the standard Vectorworks program subfolder for that type of data (Libraries, Plug-Ins,
Settings, or Workspaces). If necessary, create additional subfolders within those folders (for example,
Libraries\Defaults\Templates or Libraries\Defaults\Space\Space - Space Name).
Do not modify the Plant Database subfolder, if present. Place custom plant symbols in one of the plant library
subfolders (in the Libraries\Defaults folder).
To access the shared content, another Vectorworks user simply designates the main folder as a workgroup folder in his
or her Vectorworks Preferences. Here are some examples of possible workgroup folder content:
Master files from which design layers, classes, and resources can be referenced
Plug-ins
Templates
Resource libraries (for gradients, hatches, line types, record formats, Renderworks textures, slab styles, symbols,
text styles, tiles, VectorScripts, wall styles, and worksheets)
Space object lists (space names, occupant organizations, and room finishes)

Sharing Custom Libraries

When the Vectorworks program presents content in a palette or dialog box, it includes content from the user and
workgroup folders as well as the content it ships with. For example, when you select Modify > Hatch to edit a hatch,
the Hatches dialog box shows default hatches from the Vectorworks folder (where the software is installed), your user
folder, and any workgroup folders you have designated.
If the same file name exists in more than one folder, only the content from one of the files is shown in the Vectorworks
program, according to the following priority: user folder, workgroup folder, application folder. For example, if the
following files exist, only hatches from the file in the user folder show in the hatch list in the Attributes palette in the
Vectorworks program.
[User]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches\Hatches_Default.vwx
40 | Chapter 1: Setting up the Project

[Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches\Hatches_Default.vwx
[Vectorworks]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches\Hatches_Default.vwx
Therefore, the name of your custom library file affects content availability in the Vectorworks program.
To totally supersede the Vectorworks default hatches, use the same name as the hatch file in the Vectorworks
program folder (Hatches_Default.vwx).
To make your custom hatches available along with the Vectorworks default hatches, use a unique name, such as
Custom_Hatches.
To share a custom library, create a library file and put the file on the network in a workgroup folder. The folder
structure must be the same as that of the Vectorworks default content. For example, to add a custom hatch library, place
the file in your workgroup default hatch folder: [Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches.
If the same resource name exists in two default files (that have different names), the resource list in Vectorworks shows
both resources, and includes the file name. For example, on the Attributes palette you might see two hatches named
Brick (Custom_Hatches.vwx) and Brick (Hatches_Default.vwx). You can use both hatches in a drawing, but after
you import the first one, you are prompted to either replace the first one, or rename the second one.
To make the custom library resources available from the Resource Browser only (not as defaults in dialog boxes
and palettes), place the file in a Favorites folder in a workgroup folder. See Using Favorites Files on page 164 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. This method of sharing resources is more flexible, because users can
choose either to import the resource, or reference it (see Referencing Resources on page 127 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide).
Space Planning and Programming 2
Introduction
The Vectorworks Architect product performs space planning and programming studies, and creates schematic floor
plans.
These features can be combined in various ways depending on your preferred workflow:
To begin the design process, draw the spaces. Reposition and reshape the spaces as needed to develop a schematic
floor plan. Then create the walls automatically from those spaces.
Begin with a solid model, and then create the exterior walls from the model.
Create the walls first, and then create the space objects automatically to determine the areas enclosed by the walls.
Import an adjacency matrix that was provided by a client, and automatically create a bubble diagram and a
stacking diagram. Reshape and reposition the space objects in the bubble diagram to create a floor plan, and then
create the walls automatically from the spaces.
Create the initial schematic design with polylines instead of spaces, and then convert the polylines to spaces.
Create the model with stories, and associate the net/gross volume of the spaces along with the stories.

Space Planning
Use the Space tool to create a schematic floor plan. The Vectorworks Architect product can then automatically create
walls from those spaces. To track room finish data on a schedule, add finish information to the spaces. If necessary, IFC
data (including extended space properties used by the General Services Administration) can be attached to the spaces.
The net and gross volume of a space can be associated with story elevation, so that as story layer levels change, the
space volume adjusts accordingly.
If walls or polylines that represent spaces already exist in the drawing, use space planning commands to create spaces
from the walls or polylines.
When creating and updating spaces, the visibility of walls can affect the spaces, depending on the situation and action:
When creating spaces, only visible walls are taken into account
When updating existing spaces (clicking Update Boundary from the Object Info palette), only visible walls are
taken into account
When existing spaces are regenerated, for example due to changed space labels, a new height value, or moved
walls, wall visibility has no effect on automatically bounded spaces, because the spaces are already associated
with the walls.
See Editing Space Boundaries on page 88 for more information.

Creating Spaces with the Space Tool

Spaces are path objects that have the characteristics of a building space or room, which include information such as the
space name, number, finish information, and height. The space label, which is drawn using a pre-defined or
user-defined symbol, can display not only name and number, but virtually any desired information. Space objects
automatically calculate their area, volume, and perimeter.
The Room Name Simple tool (in the Dims/Notes tool set) creates a text label only; it does not attach room finish,
area, IFC, or GSA information to a space object.
To draw a free-standing space with the Space tool, select either the Rectangle or the Polyline mode. If the walls are
already drawn, select the Picked Walls mode or Inner Boundary mode to create a space bounded by visible walls.
42 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Apply Bzier
Inner Boundary Polyline Attributes Vertex Tangent Arc Arc Vertex Preferences

Picked Walls Rectangle Pick Up Corner Cubic Point on Arc Fillet

Attributes Vertex Vertex Radius

Mode Description
Picked Walls Creates a space object based on a closed set of selected walls
Inner Boundary Creates a space object in a clicked area that is bounded by visible walls
Rectangle Draws a rectangular space object
Polyline Draws a polyline space object; as with a polyline, select one of six types of control points for
the vertices from the Tool bar
Pick Up Attributes Picks up the attributes of a space that is clicked upon.
The properties that are transferred can be customized; see Space Settings Advanced
Settings Pane on page 64 for details.
Apply Attributes Transfers the space attributes that have been picked up with the Pick Up Attributes mode to a
space that is clicked upon.
Press the Ctrl key (Windows) or the Option key (Macintosh) when you click to toggle
between the Pick Up Attributes and Apply Attributes modes.
Corner Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the space using polyline segments with straight lines and angled
vertices at the control points
Bzier Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the space using polyline segments with curves pulled toward, but
not touching the control points
Cubic Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the space using polyline segments with curves that pass through
the control points
Tangent Arc For Polyline mode, creates the space using polyline segments that are tangent to the previous
segment
Point on Arc For Polyline mode, creates the space using polyline segments that are drawn by clicking three
points: the start point, a point the arc passes through, and the end point
Arc Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the space using polyline segments with curves that look like a
fillet placed at the control points
Fillet Radius For Polyline mode, sets the fillet radius when the Arc Vertex mode is selected
Preferences Sets the default parameters that are used for each new space object
 Space Planning | 43

Office 2 Office 3
AREA: 100.0 sq ft AREA: 100.0 sq ft

Office 1 Lobby
AREA: 100.0 sq ft AREA: 116.5 sq ft

Creating Spaces from Existing Walls

Spaces can be automatically created by first selecting the enclosing walls or by clicking within the boundary of a closed
set of visible walls. The spaces are automatically associated with their bounding walls.
Alternatively, select AEC > Space Planning > Create Spaces from Walls to create spaces from a set of enclosed
walls on a specified design layer (see Creating Spaces from Walls on page 85).

To create a space within a selected set of visible walls:

1. Click the Space tool from the Space Planning tool set.
2. From the Attributes palette, set the 2D attributes for the space (fill, pen, opacity, and line thickness).
3. From the Tool bar, select Preferences. Set the default parameters for space objects as described in Space
Properties on page 44 (numbering style, label, and classes for the parts of the space object).
4. From the Tool bar, select Picked Walls mode.
5. Click on each wall that forms the wall set and press Enter, or click the check mark button on the Tool bar. The
space is created with the attributes and settings you specified.
6. Add information specific to the space as described in Adding Information to Spaces on page 44.

To create a space within a closed set of visible walls:

1. Click the Space tool from the Space Planning tool set.
2. From the Attributes palette, set the 2D attributes for the space (fill, pen, opacity, and line thickness).
3. From the Tool bar, select Preferences. Set the default parameters for space objects as described in Space
Properties on page 44 (numbering style, label, and classes for the parts of the space object).
4. From the Tool bar, select the Inner Boundary mode.
5. Click in an open area of the drawing that is bounded by walls; the walls must be visible, joined together, and on
layers that have the same layer scale as the space layer. The space is created with the attributes and settings you
specified.
6. Add information specific to the space as described in Adding Information to Spaces on page 44.

Drawing Spaces with the Space Tool

To draw a space with the Space tool:

1. Click the Space tool from the Space Planning tool set.
44 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

2. From the Attributes palette, set the 2D attributes for the space (fill, pen, opacity, and line thickness).
3. From the Tool bar, select Preferences. Set the default parameters for space objects as described in Space
Properties on page 44 (numbering style, label, and classes for the parts of the space object).
4. From the Tool bar, either select the Rectangle mode, or select the Polyline mode and then select the type of control
point for the polyline vertices.
5. Draw the space as follows:
For a rectangular space, click to begin the rectangle, and then click again to finish the rectangle and create the
space.
For a polyline space, click to begin the polyline, and then click to set each polyline vertex. Click on the start
point to end the polyline and create the space.
The space is created with the attributes and settings you specified.
6. Add information specific to the space as described in Adding Information to Spaces on page 44.

Adding Information to Spaces

After all spaces have been created, select specific spaces and add more information to them on the Object Info palette,
such as a space name and room finishes. The items that are changed most frequently are available on the Shape tab. To
access the full set of space properties, click the Settings button to open the Space Settings dialog box.
The properties that are available on the Object Info palette are determined by the Advanced Settings pane on the
Space Settings dialog box. See Space Settings Advanced Settings Pane on page 64 for details.

Copying Attributes to Other Spaces

If several spaces need to have attributes in common, such as the same space name and room finishes, copy the
attributes from an existing space and apply them to the other spaces.

To copy attributes to other spaces:

1. Click the Space tool from the Space Planning tool set, and then from the Tool bar, select Preferences.
2. From the Space Settings dialog box, select the Advanced Settings pane.
3. Select the attributes to transfer between spaces from the Eyedropper Transfer Properties window (see Space
Settings Advanced Settings Pane on page 64 for details).
4. Select the Pick Up Attributes mode from the Tool bar. Click the space with the attributes you want to transfer.
5. Select the Apply Attributes mode from the Tool bar, and click each space that should have those attributes.
Alternatively, press the Ctrl key (Windows) or the Option key (Macintosh) while you click to activate the Apply
Attributes mode.

Space Properties
Use the Space tools Preferences to set the default parameters for space objects before you create them, including the
label style, automatic numbering, boundary calculations, and 3D graphic attributes. For maximum control over the
display of spaces, you can set default classes for the label, label leader line, 2D attributes, 3D attributes, and the entire
space object. Preference settings are an easy way to apply common, consistent settings to all spaces.
The spaces 2D graphic attributes are not taken from the Preferences settings. Instead, set the appropriate fill and
pen styles in the Attributes palette before you create the spaces.
Once the spaces have been created, use the Object Info palette to edit the properties of individual spaces, including
space name and occupant, room finishes, and any additional data attached to the space. The items that are changed
 Space Planning | 45

most frequently are available on the Shape tab. To access the full set of space properties, click the Settings button to
open the Space Settings dialog box.
The properties that are available on the Object Info palette are determined by the Advanced Settings pane on the
Space Settings dialog box. See Space Settings Advanced Settings Pane on page 64 for details.
To reduce the time required to regenerate space objects after properties are edited, Vectorworks only regenerates
the space components that are changing and only recalculates the bounds of the spaces if necessary. To force the
complete regeneration of edited space objects, select Tools > Utilities > Reset all Plug-Ins.
The fields that display on the Space Settings dialog box are slightly different, depending on whether you access the
dialog box with the Preferences mode of the Space tool or with the Settings button on the Object Info palette.
The settings are grouped into several panes of related parameters. Select each group of parameters from the list in the
left pane of the dialog box; the parameters display in the center pane.
The right pane of the dialog box always displays a preview of a space label based on the current settings. To edit the
appearance of the space label (for example, to change the font size or the pen color), click the Edit Layout button at
any time.
Space Settings - Preview Panes on page 46
Space Settings Numbering Pane on page 47
Space Settings Occupancy Pane on page 48
Space Settings 2D Boundaries & Area Pane on page 51
Space Settings 3D Boundaries Pane on page 54
Space Settings Space Label Pane on page 56
Space Settings 2D Attributes Pane on page 57
Space Settings 3D Attributes Pane on page 60
Space Settings Room Finishes Pane on page 61
Space Settings Additional Data Pane on page 62
Space Settings Advanced Settings Pane on page 64
A few controls are available only on the Object Info palette, as described here:
Space Settings Object Info Palette on page 65
46 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Space Settings - Preview Panes

Parameter Description
Space Label Preview Dynamically displays a preview of the space label with the currently selected
parameters; see Space Settings Space Label Pane on page 56
Edit Layout Click to enter object editing mode to edit the format; see Object Editing
Mode on page 16 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
 Space Planning | 47

Space Settings Numbering Pane

Parameter Description
Numbering
Space Number When you set the default preferences for the Space tool, if the Space Number Style is
Manual, leave this field blank and add the numbers to spaces after they are created. For all
other numbering styles (auto-numbering), the field displays the Next value and cannot be
edited.
When you edit a space using the Settings button from the Object Info palette, if the Space
Number Style is Manual, enter a number for this space. For all other numbering styles
(auto-numbering), the field displays the spaces assigned number and cannot be edited.
Space Number Style Specifies the type of numbering to use on space objects.
Select Manual to enter a number for each space manually in the Space Number field.
Select Counter Only to have the Vectorworks program automatically assign the next
available number to each space as it is created.
If custom number styles were created, they display at the bottom of the list; select the
style to use to auto-number each space as it is created.
Edit Number Styles Opens the Edit Number Style dialog box to create or edit number styles. See Custom
Number Styles on page 66 for details.
48 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Auto-Number Settings Specify the following values if auto-numbering is in use (that is, Space Number Style is
not set to Manual)
Start value Specifies the numeric value to assign to the first new space
Increment Specifies the amount to increment the numeric value of each new space; this number is
automatically added to the Next value each time a space is created
Next value Specifies the numeric value to assign to the next new space that is created
Validate Available only when you edit a space using the Settings button from the Object Info
Auto-Numbering palette (not when you set the default preferences for the Space tool); opens the Validate
Auto-Numbering dialog box to adjust the automatic space numbers. See Validating
Auto-Numbering on page 67 for details.

Space Settings Occupancy Pane

Parameter Description
Occupancy
Space Type Identifies a space as either Normal (for example, a room) or Full Floor (the entire floor
of a building)
 Space Planning | 49

Parameter Description
Space Name Specifies the space name; the spaces in an adjacency matrix are listed by space name,
and the space name can also be used in space labels. Select a name from the list, or select
Custom and enter a name in the field below the pull-down list.
The top portion of the list contains the space names that are currently used in the
drawing. The lower portion of the list displays all available space names that are still
unused, compiled from lists in the Vectorworks program folder, your user folder, and
your designated workgroup folder.
To customize a space name list, select Edit List from the bottom of the list to open the
Edit Space - Space Name List dialog box (see Editing Lists of Space Names and
Occupant Organizations on page 68 for details).
Allows entry of a custom
name for this drawing only

Names currently used in

this drawing

Names available (from all lists),

but not currently used in this
drawing

Opens a dialog box for editing

the list of available names
Occup. Organization Specifies the organization associated with the occupant; the spaces in the stacking
diagram are grouped by the organization name.
This field is very similar to the Space Name field above. The list is separated into
sections based on whether the available names are currently in use. Select a name from
the list, or select Custom and enter a name in the field below the pull-down list.
To customize an occupant organization list, select Edit List from the bottom of the list to
open the Edit Space - Occ Organization List dialog box (see Editing Lists of Space
Names and Occupant Organizations on page 68 for details).
Occupant Name Specifies the individual occupant name
Proposed Area Specifies the programmed area for the space
50 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Assign Zones Click the column to the left of a zone name to select it. Up to five zones of different types
can be assigned to a space; only one zone can be assigned from each zone type (HVAC,
Preservation, Security, and so on).
When you edit a space from the Object Info palette, click the Assign Zones button
to open a dialog box with the same zone information that displays on the
Occupancy pane.
To customize the zones list, click New to open the Create Zone dialog box.

To add a zone to an existing zone type, select the Zone Type, enter the Zone Name,
and click OK.
To create a new zone type, select Add New Zone Type from the Zone Type list, enter
a name, and click OK.
To delete a zone, click the zone name, and click Delete to remove the zone from the list.
The IFC Zones command attaches IFC data to space zones. See Assigning IFC
Data to Space Zones on page 784.
GSA Occupancy If Enable GSA is selected (Advanced Settings pane), opens the GSA Occupancy dialog
box to enter the data required for GSA projects (see GSA Data on page 81). When the
drawing is complete, select File > Export > Export IFC Project to save the file in IFC
format.
 Space Planning | 51

Space Settings 2D Boundaries & Area Pane

Parameter Description
2D Boundaries Area
Boundary Display
Show 2D Boundary Displays the polyline that represents the space; if this option is selected, also select an
option for the 2D Boundary Display.
2D Boundary Display Specifies what to display for the space: Inside Walls less Columns, Inside Wall Faces,
Wall Centerlines, Net Boundary, or Gross Boundary. A Net boundary is defined by the
inside face of the surrounding walls, and a Gross boundary is defined by the center line
of the surrounding walls.
If the area and perimeter values for the space are used in a worksheet, the values
always match the displayed boundary.
52 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Gross Net Boundary
Gross Boundary Def. Specifies the definition to use for the gross boundary: Wall Centerlines, Building Gross,
BOMA Rentable, or Custom.
The Custom option is only available for an existing space object surrounded by walls. If
Custom is selected, click Edit Gross Custom to open the Edit Custom Gross Boundary
dialog box.

Do one of the following:

Select each wall in the display window, and then select the appropriate bounding
definition for it.
Click Reset Gross Boundary to set all boundaries for the space to one of three
pre-set options (Centerlines of All Walls; Centerlines of Interior Walls, Inside Face
of Exterior Walls; Centerlines of Interior Walls, Outside Face of Exterior Walls).
 Space Planning | 53

Parameter Description
Net Boundary Specifies the definition to use for the net boundary: Inside of Walls, or Custom.
Definition If Custom is selected, click Edit Net Custom to open the Edit Custom Net Boundary
dialog box:

Enter an amount to offset the space boundary from the wall. When the space is edited
from the Object Info palette and it contains wall projections, columns, and/or pilasters,
also choose whether to exclude wall projections and column islands from the area
calculation.
Net Area Modifier Adjusts the net area value by the specified percentage
Gross Area Modifier Adjusts the gross area value by the specified percentage
Calculate Room Automatically calculates the Length and Width dimensions of the space object; when
Dimensions deselected, the Length and Width can be entered manually
Length/Width Display the dimensions of the space; when Calculate Room Dimensions is deselected,
the Length and Width can be entered manually. Manual changes affect the display of
the length and width values, but do not change the actual dimensions of the space
object.
54 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Space Settings 3D Boundaries Pane

Parameter Description
3D Boundaries
Show 3D Select to display the space volume boundaries in 3D

Volume Display Select whether to display the Net or Gross volume; the actual net or gross volume
depends on the height boundary selections and any offsets
Height Net
 Space Planning | 55

Parameter Description
Height Directly sets the desired net height of the space. When the space height is determined
manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the space is automatically set to
Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the space is bound by the layer wall height value or by a story level, the
space height displays automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the space.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design Layer
Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, the top of the space can be bound by one of the level types defined for the
story or the story above it. By setting the top of the space to a level type, if the elevation
of the associated story changes, the height of the space changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the space from its specified top bound height
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the space. Alternatively, the
bottom of the space can be bound by one of the level types defined for the story or the
story below it. By setting the bottom of the space to a level type, if the elevation of the
associated story changes, the height of the space changes automatically to match.
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the space, sets the offset from its specified bottom bound height
Height Gross
Height Directly sets the desired gross height of the space. When the space height is determined
manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the space is automatically set to
Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the space is bound by the layer wall height value or by a story level, the
space height displays automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the space.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design Layer
Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, the top of the space can be bound by one of the level types defined for the
story or the story above it. By setting the top of the space to a level type, if the elevation
of the associated story changes, the height of the space changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the space from its specified top bound height
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the space. Alternatively, the
bottom of the space can be bound by one of the level types defined for the story or the
story below it. By setting the bottom of the space to a level type, if the elevation of the
associated story changes, the height of the space changes automatically to match.
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the space, sets the offset from its specified bottom bound height
56 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Space Settings Space Label Pane

Parameter Description
Space Label
Display Space Label Select to display the spaces label on the drawing
Class Select a class for the entire space label, or select New to create a new class (see Creating
Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, when you set the default preferences for the Space tool, select <Space
Class> which places the label in the same class as the space object.
Individual elements of the space label may be assigned to different classes, as well.
Space Label Symbol Select the symbol to use for the space label from the list of symbols available in this
document.
To create a new text-based symbol, or to designate another symbol within the
document as a space label, click Manage Space Labels. See Creating Space
Labels on page 72 or Converting Symbols into Space Labels on page 75 for more
information.
Space Label Angle Enter an angle to rotate the label, if desired
 Space Planning | 57

Parameter Description
Fields list The fields defined for the label symbol display; when a field is selected from the list, the
field is highlighted in red in the Space Label Preview pane. To edit a field, select it from
the list, and then do the following:
To use a different piece of data for a label (for example, to show the gross area instead
of the net area), select the new definition from the Format Field list.
From the Space Label pane, you can only edit the fields currently on the list. To add
or delete fields, you must edit the label symbol. See Editing Existing Space Labels
on page 71, Creating Space Labels on page 72, or Converting Symbols into
Space Labels on page 75 for more information about custom labels.
To change the prefix or suffix that will display along with the field value on the label,
click Edit to open the Edit Format dialog box. Enter the desired values and click OK.

Manage Space Opens the Manage Space Labels dialog box to create, rename, duplicate, or delete the
Labels space label symbols for this document; see Customizing Space Labels on page 71 for
details
Save As Default Opens a dialog box to save the current space label settings to a template file in your user
folder, which makes it one of the available labels for new documents. Enter a name for
the label and click OK. The template file is created (or updated) automatically in the
space stamp file in the user folders default library (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Space Settings 2D Attributes Pane

These settings apply to the space object only; the space label is a symbol, which can be edited with the Edit
Layout button, or from the Resource Browser (see Editing Existing Space Labels on page 71).
58 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Space Object Class Select a class for the entire space object, or select New to create a new class (see Creating
Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, select <Active Class>, which places the space object in the class that is
active when the space is created.
2D Boundary When you set the default preferences for the Space tool, only the Class parameter is
available for the 2D Boundary, because the fill and pen attributes are determined by the
Attributes palette.
When you edit a space using the Settings button from the Object Info palette, all of the 2D
boundary parameters are available.
Class Select a class for the 2D boundary, or select New to create a new class (see Creating
Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, select <Active Class>, which places the boundary in the class that is active
when the space is created. Or select <Space Class>, which places the boundary in the same
class as the space object.
 Space Planning | 59

Parameter Description
Fill Style Select a fill style for the space object, and then customize the fill using the additional fields
that display. For example, select the color for a solid fill, or select a hatch from the list of
those available. For hatch, tile, gradient, and image fills, click Edit to open a dialog box for
editing the fill. To use the fill specified for the selected class, select Class Style.
See Fill Attributes on page 505 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Pen Select the pen style for the space object, and then customize the pen using the additional
fields that display. For example, select the thickness for a solid pen, or select a color for a
dash pen. To use the pen specified for the selected class, select Class Style.
See Pen Attributes on page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Opacity Use the slider or enter a percentage to specify the opacity of the space object, or click Use
Class Opacity to use the opacity setting for the selected class.
See Opacity Attributes on page 508 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leader Line If the label is placed outside the space boundary, a leader line is drawn automatically
Class Select a class for the leader line, or select New to create a new class (see Creating
Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, select <Space Class>, which places the leader line in the same class as the
space object.
Pen Select the pen style for the leader line, and then customize the pen using the additional
fields that display. For example, select the thickness for a solid pen, or select a color for a
dash pen. To use the pen specified for the selected class, select Class Style.
See Pen Attributes on page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Marker Start/End To include start or end markers for the leader line, check the appropriate box(es). Then
select the style for the markers, or select Custom to create a new marker style.
See Marker Attributes on page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
60 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Space Settings 3D Attributes Pane

Parameter Description
3D Attributes
Class Select a class for the 3D attributes of the space object, or select New to create a new class
(see Creating Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Alternatively, select <Space Class>, which places the 3D attributes in the same class as the
space object.
Fill Style Select a fill style for the space object, and then customize the fill using the additional fields
that display. For example, select the color for a solid fill, or select a hatch from the list of
those available. For hatch, tile, gradient, and image fills, click Edit to open a dialog box for
editing the fill. To use the fill specified for the selected class, select Class Style.
See Fill Attributes on page 505 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Pen Select the pen style for the space object, and then customize the pen using the additional
fields that display. For example, select the thickness for a solid pen, or select a color for a
dash pen. To use the pen specified for the selected class, select Class Style.
See Pen Attributes on page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Texture To use a texture for the space object, select a texture from the list of those available. To use
the texture specified for the selected class, select Class Style.
 Space Planning | 61

Space Settings Room Finishes Pane

Parameter Description
Room Finishes
On Room Finish Schedule Includes the space object in the Room Finish Schedule; if enabled, select the
appropriate finishes for the ceiling, walls, base trim, and floor of the space object
Ceiling Select a finish for the space objects ceiling.
The top portion of the list contains the ceiling finishes that are currently used in the
drawing. The lower portion of the list displays all available ceiling finishes that are
still unused, compiled from lists in the Vectorworks program folder, your user
folder, and your designated workgroup folder.
North, East, South, and Select a finish for each of the space objects walls.
West Walls The top portion of the list contains the wall finishes that are currently used in the
drawing. The lower portion of the list displays all available wall finishes that are
still unused, compiled from lists in the Vectorworks program folder, your user
folder, and your designated workgroup folder.
Base Trim Select a finish for the space objects base trim.
The top portion of the list contains the base trim finishes that are currently used in
the drawing. The lower portion of the list displays all available base trim finishes
that are still unused, compiled from lists in the Vectorworks program folder, your
user folder, and your designated workgroup folder.
62 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Floor Select a finish for the space objects floor.
The top portion of the list contains the floor finishes that are currently used in the
drawing. The lower portion of the list displays all available floor finishes that are
still unused, compiled from lists in the Vectorworks program folder, your user
folder, and your designated workgroup folder.
Remarks Allows entry of additional remarks about the finishes
Edit Finishes Opens the Edit Room Finishes dialog box (see Creating, Editing, and Deleting
Room Finishes on page 76)

Once the room finish information is entered, add the Room Finish Schedule to the drawing file; see Assigning a Room
Finish on page 79.

Space Settings Additional Data Pane

 Space Planning | 63

Parameter Description
Additional Data
Fields list You can attach data to the space object and display the information in a space label, or in
a worksheet. All available fields display in a list, along with any data that has been
entered for the fields.
For most fields, simply click the field name in the list, and then enter the desired data in
the entry field that displays below the list of field names. To attach data that is not
available on the list, you can use up to ten Additional Info fields; click Rename User
Fields to name these fields.
The Room ID and Formula fields have additional functionality. The Room ID allows you
to specify an identifier based on a formula that can include data fields from the space as
well as user-defined static text. This ID can then be used as a variable in a space tag
symbol. For example, you might define a spaces Room ID using the design layer and
space number fields as variables.
Rename User Fields If you entered data for any of the Additional Info fields, click this button to open the
Rename User Fields dialog box and enter names for the fields.
When you click OK, a message displays that the change will be applied to all space
objects that use that field.
Use IFC Data Includes the IFC data for the space object when the file is saved in IFC format
IFC Data If Use IFC Data is selected, opens the IFC Data dialog box to enter the data for various
space properties (see Viewing and Editing IFC Data on page 785). When the drawing is
complete, select File > Export > Export IFC Project to save the file in IFC format.
64 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Space Settings Advanced Settings Pane

Parameter Description
Advanced Settings
Enable GSA Includes the GSA data for the space object when the file is saved in IFC format;
click GSA Occupancy (on the Occupancy pane) to assign the GSA Occupancy
information for the space. See GSA Data on page 81.
Make picked up attributes When the Pick Up Attributes mode of the Space tool is used, the attributes selected
the default in the Eyedropper Transfer Properties list are set as the default for new spaces. If the
2D Boundary Attributes are selected, the picked up attributes will be set as the
default in the Attributes palette. This allows you to create new spaces with the same
attributes as an existing space.
 Space Planning | 65

Parameter Description
Eyedropper Transfer Specifies which properties of a space object will be transferred when the Pick Up
Properties Attributes and Apply Attributes modes of the Space tool are used. The available
attributes display in the Attribute column, grouped by category. To see the attributes
in a category, click the disclosure arrow to the left of the attribute name.
Click the Use column next to an item to select it; if the item is a category heading,
such as Finishes, all items in the category are selected.
Space Properties on Specifies which properties of a space object will be displayed for editing on the
Object Info Palette Object Info palette. The available properties display in the Property column,
grouped by category. To see the properties in a category, click the disclosure arrow to
the left of the property name.
Click the Show column next to an item to select it; if the item is a category heading,
such as Occupancy, all items in the category are selected.
Restore Default Properties Resets the space properties on the Object Info palette to the default settings

Space Settings Object Info Palette

Certain space parameters can be edited directly from the Object Info palette; most of the space parameters can be edited
by clicking Settings from the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Assign Zones Opens the Assign Zones dialog box, which has the same functionality as the Assign
(Occupancy section) Zones section of the Occupancy pane of the Space Settings dialog box (see Space
Settings Occupancy Pane on page 48)
66 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Auto-Boundary Specifies whether the space object is associated with a set of walls, or whether its
boundaries were created manually. For an auto-bounded space, if the walls are edited
(whether moved, reshaped, or replaced, or due to a change in the wall style, the wall
thickness, or the wall components), the space edge path updates automatically.
See Editing Space Boundaries on page 88.
Update Boundary Available only if Auto-Boundary is enabled.
(2D Boundaries & Area Updates the boundary of the space to match the surrounding walls after visible walls are
section) added, deleted, or moved; also updates the boundary if a custom space boundary
definition is changed (for example, if the space boundary is offset from the walls).
Assign Room Finish Available only if On Room Finish Schedule is enabled; opens the Assign Room
(Room Finish section) Finishes dialog box, which has the same functionality as the Room Finishes pane of the
Space Settings dialog box (see Space Settings Room Finishes Pane on page 61)
Matrix Order Specifies the location of the space object in the adjacency matrix
(Additional Data section)

Using Auto-Numbering
The Vectorworks Architect program can automatically number spaces as they are created, or you can enter numbers
manually. If you use the auto-numbering feature, the Numbering pane of the Space Settings dialog box has additional
features to customize numbers and to adjust numbers when needed.

Custom Number Styles

You can create custom space numbers that contain information other than just a counter, such as the floor the space is
on, or what zone the space is in.
To create, edit, or delete a number style:
1. Select the Space tool, and then click Preferences on the Tool bar.
2. On the Space Settings dialog box, select Numbering from the left pane to display the Numbering pane.
3. Click Edit Number Styles to add, edit, or delete the available number styles.
The Edit Number Style dialog box opens.
 Space Planning | 67

Parameter Description
Space Number Style Enter a descriptive name for the number style
Prefix / Suffix Specifies additional information to display before or after the space number. Enter text,
and optionally, select one or more items from the list of variables to the right of the field to
insert data from another field as part of the space number.
For example, your number style might have the floor the space is on, followed by a period
and the automatically assigned space number. In the Prefix field, select the Floor variable,
and then type a period; the space number variable is added to the definition automatically.

4. Edit the number styles as follows:

To add a new number style, enter the Space Number Style, and a Prefix and/or Suffix. Click Save; the number
style is added to the bottom of the existing list.
To edit a number style, select it from the list and then edit the Prefix and/or Suffix as needed. Click Save to
save the changes.
To delete a number style, select it from the list and then click Delete.
5. When all editing is complete, click OK to close the Edit Number Style dialog box.

Validating Auto-Numbering
Occasionally the auto-numbering may need adjustment. For example, if a space is deleted after creation, one of the
numbers will be missing from the sequence. If a space was duplicated, its number may be used twice for the same label
type. The Vectorworks Architect program can help you detect and correct such problems.
To validate auto-numbering:
1. Select the space object.
2. From the Object Info palette, click the Settings button to open the Space Settings dialog box, and then select the
Numbering pane.
3. Click Validate Auto-Numbering.
The Validate Auto-Numbering dialog box opens.
68 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Total Counter of this Tag / For the selected space object, displays the total number of space objects that use the
Start Value / Increment same label, along with the start value and increment set for auto-numbering
Ctr / Space Number Each space object that uses the same label as this space displays in a list, which
shows the spaces current counter (Ctr) and Space Number. The list also includes an
entry if a number in the sequence is missing.
Correction button When a list item with a numbering error is selected, a button to correct the problem
(name varies) displays below the list.

4. If there is a message next to a space number, select it and then click the correction button that displays beneath the
list.

Message Problem Correction

missing A number in the sequence is missing Click Close Gaps to renumber all spaces that fall
after the gap in the sequence
Value invalid (< Start) The spaces current number is less Click Assign valid value to automatically
than the start value renumber the spaces as needed
(multiple) Multiple spaces have this number Click Increase by Increment to automatically
renumber the space

5. When all problems have been corrected, click OK.

Editing Lists of Space Names and Occupant Organizations

The Occupancy pane of the Space Settings dialog box has Space Name and Occup. Organization fields from which
you can select values to assign to spaces. The names are collected from files in the Vectorworks application folder, your
user folder, and any folder designated as your workgroup folder.
From the Vectorworks application folder, the default content from the standard occupant organization and space name
libraries is always available (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). These lists
are called BOMA Standard Occupant Organizations.txt and Generic Space Names.txt. You cannot modify these
lists, but you can import and export items from them. Use the Space Settings dialog box to create custom versions of
these lists, or to create new lists, as needed. Edits are automatically saved to your user folder.
In a workgroup environment, create space name and occupant organization lists and place them in a shared location.
The folder structure must be the same as that of the default content libraries. See Customizing the Space Settings on
page 80.
To edit a list of space names or occupant organizations:
1. Select the Space tool, and then click Preferences on the Tool bar.
Alternatively, select an existing space object, and from the Object Info palette, click the Settings button.
2. On the Space Settings dialog box, select Occupancy from the left pane to display the Occupancy pane.
3. Click Space Name or Occup. Organization, and select Edit List from the bottom of the list.
The appropriate editing dialog box opens.
 Space Planning | 69

4. Select the list to view.

To view items from the list in the current document, click Active Document.
To view items from a list external to the drawing file, click Default Folder, and then select from the List
options. Lists from the Vectorworks application folder, your user folder, and your designated workgroup folder
display.
5. Edit, import, or export items as described in the following table. The options available depend on what type of list
you are editing.

Edit Function Applicable Files Procedure

Rename the list User lists Click Rename, enter the new list name, and click OK. The list name
in the edit dialog box changes.
Change the list order Active document, Click the item number and drag it up or down to the desired position.
user lists
70 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Edit Function Applicable Files Procedure

Add an item Active document, Click New.
user lists If the active document list or a user list is selected, a blank item is
added to the current list. Enter a name in the Item Value field.
If a list from the application folder or a workgroup folder is
selected, an alert displays, and you are prompted to add the item to
a list in your user folder instead. Answer Yes to open a dialog box
to add an item.

Enter a name in the Item Value field. To create a new file, select
Save to New File and enter a unique name. To add to an existing
file, select Add to Current File and select a file from the
pull-down list. Click OK to display the new item and list.
Edit an item name Active document, Select the item and enter the new name in the Item Value field.
user lists
Delete an item Active document, Select the item and click Delete. The item is removed from the list,
user lists and the items below it on the list are renumbered.
Import items User, workgroup, and Select one or more items and click Import. The items are added to
application lists the Active Document list.
Export items Active document, Select one or more items and click Export to open the export dialog
user, workgroup, and box.
application lists

To create a new file, select Export to New File and enter a unique
name. To add to an existing file, select Add to Current File and
select a file from the pull-down list. Click OK to complete the
export.
 Space Planning | 71

6. Click OK to save the changes and close the edit dialog box. If you changed an external list, a message displays the
path in your user folder where the edited file was saved; click OK.
7. Click OK to close the Space Settings dialog box.

Customizing Space Labels

The Vectorworks program provides several space labels, which you can use or modify as needed. You can also create
new custom labels, import a space label symbol from another document, or convert a symbol in the current document
into a space label.
Custom space labels are symbols that are designated as space labels from the Space Settings dialog box. Like any other
symbol, by default a custom label is only available in the document in which it is created. To make a custom space label
available from the Space Settings dialog box for all of your documents, use the Save as Default option to save the label
to a template file. The Space Default template file is created in your user folder automatically, in
[User Folder]\Libraries\Defaults\.
To share custom space labels with a workgroup, create a template file that contains the labels (see Creating Space
Labels on page 72). Place the file in the workgroups default labels folder. The labels then display on the list of
available symbols on the Space Label pane of the Space Settings dialog box. See Customizing the Space Settings on
page 80.

Editing Existing Space Labels

You can easily make minor adjustments to an existing space label. For example, you might adjust the font style or
color, or change the graphics that are included in the symbol.
To modify an existing space label symbol:
1. Do one of the following:
From the Space Label pane of the Space Settings dialog box, select the label to be edited; a preview of it
displays on the right side of the dialog box. Click Edit Layout to open the symbol editing window.
If the label displays in the Symbols/Plug-in Objects group in the Resource Browser, select it and then select
Edit from the Resources menu. From the Edit Symbol dialog box, select the 2D Component option, and click
Edit to open the symbol editing window.

Space label symbol

72 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

2. In the symbol editing window, edit the text formatting, graphic components, and attributes of the symbol as
needed. Note that a space label is a world-based symbol, which means that its size in the editing window is the
same as it will be when inserted into the drawing. See Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. When the changes are complete, click Exit Symbol.
4. The symbol definition and all instances of the label in the drawing are updated automatically.

Creating Space Labels

If none of the available space labels are suitable, create a new label.
To create a new space label:
1. From the Space Planning tool set, select the Space tool.
2. From the Tool bar, click Preferences to open the Space Settings dialog box.
3. Select the Space Label pane, and click Manage Space Labels. The Manage Space Labels dialog box opens.

Item Description
Symbols list The left side of the dialog box displays a list of all space label symbols currently available,
along with the current status of each:
Default symbols are those available from default content, but not yet used in the drawing;
once a default space label symbol is used, it is imported into the drawing files resources and
the status becomes Specified. Default symbols cannot be renamed or deleted.
Specified symbols are currently used in the drawing.
Unspecified symbols are currently in the drawing files resources, but not yet used or saved
as a default.
Symbol preview The top right side of the dialog box displays a preview of the selected symbol; if a label field
has not been defined yet, a red Not specified message displays on the image
New Text Tag Opens the New Text Tag dialog box, to create a new space symbol; proceed with step 4

New Symbol Tag Opens the New Symbol Tag dialog box, to designate a symbol in the current document as a
space symbol. See Converting Symbols into Space Labels on page 75 for details.
 Space Planning | 73

Item Description
Rename Opens the Rename Label dialog box; enter a new name for the symbol and click OK.
If the selected symbol has a Default status, a message displays that it cannot be renamed.
Duplicate Opens the Duplicate Label Symbol dialog box; enter a name for the duplicate symbol and click
OK.
Delete Opens the Delete Space Label dialog box. Specify whether to delete the space symbol from the
symbol library entirely, or to keep the symbol, but remove the space label definition from it
(this removes the label from the list of current space label choices). Click OK to delete the
label.
If the selected symbol has a Default status, a message displays that it cannot be deleted.

4. Click New Text Tag; the New Text Tag dialog box opens to the Data Fields tab.

5. All available data fields for spaces display in the list on the left. Select the fields to be used in the symbol, and
click Add (or click Add All) to move them to the list on the right. To remove fields from the symbol list, select
them and click Remove (or click Remove All). Alternatively, double-click a field name to move it from one list to
the other.
6. In the list of selected symbol fields on the right, each field is assigned a sequential number, which corresponds to
a variable in the symbol layout (for example, #2#). To change a fields number, click its number column, and drag
the field up or down to the desired location on the list.
7. Select the Attributes tab to specify how all fields in the symbol will display.
74 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Item Description
Font Select a font for the field text from the list of fonts available on the system
Size Select a font size from the list of standard sizes available in points. To enter a custom point
size, or to enter a size in different units, select Set Size to open the Set Text Size dialog box.
Enter a Size, and then select the appropriate Unit: Points, Page Millimeters, or Page Inches.

Style Select a style for the field text from the list of styles available. On Macintosh, select Custom
Style to open the Custom Style dialog box, to specify a different combination of styles.

Alignment Select a type of alignment for the field text: Left, Center, Right, or Standard (justify)
Fill Select a fill for the background of the field text objects: None, Pattern, or Solid. Or, to assign
the fill by text object class, select Class Style.
 Space Planning | 75

Item Description
Color If a Solid fill was selected, select the fill color
Pattern/Fore/Back If a Pattern fill was selected, select the Pattern, and the foreground and background colors
Text Color Select a color for the field text

8. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Manage Space Labels dialog box. Click OK again to return to the
Space Label pane of the Space Settings dialog box.
9. Complete the definition of the label as described in Space Settings Space Label Pane on page 56.
10. To save the label to your template, select the Save as Default option.
11. To change the appearance of the label (for example, to rearrange the data fields or to add graphic elements), click
Edit Layout to open the symbol editing window.
The symbol is a group object, in which each defined field is a text block that contains text in the following format:
#(natural number)#. You may ungroup the blocks and move them or change their attributes, but do not change the
contents of the text blocks.
In the following example, the top part of the symbol is a center-aligned text block that contains a variable for field
1; the Space Number will be assigned to this field. The bottom part of the label has a text block that contains a
variable for field 2; the Occupant Name field will be assigned to this field. Another text block was added, which
serves as a label for the occupant name. A rectangle and a line were also added to enhance the label.
Text block for field 1 variable

Static text block Text block for field 2 variable

12. When the edits are complete, click Exit Symbol. The new label is now available to assign to spaces for this
document.

Converting Symbols into Space Labels

If you already have a symbol you want to use, you can convert it for use as a space label.
To convert a symbol into a space label:
1. Ensure that the symbol includes a text block for each piece of space object data you want to display on the label.
The text in each field block should be in the following format: #(natural number)#. The example below has four
fields. Apply the font, size, style, alignment, and fill and pen style desired to each text block.
76 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Also, ensure that the space label symbol is specified as having world-based units (not page-based).

2. From the Space Planning tool set, select the Space tool.
3. From the Tool bar, click Preferences to open the Space Settings dialog box.
4. Select the Space Label pane, and click Manage Space Labels. The Manage Space Labels dialog box opens.
5. Click New Symbol Tag; the New Symbol Tag dialog box opens.

6. The available symbols and symbol folders in the current document display; symbols already defined as space
labels do not display. Locate and select the symbol to be used for the new label, and click OK.
7. On the Manage Space Labels dialog box, notice that the preview window shows that the fields are not specified
yet. Click OK to return to the Space Settings dialog box.
8. Complete the definition of the data fields as described in Space Settings Space Label Pane on page 56. The
new label is now available to assign to spaces for this document.
9. To save the label to your template, select the Save as Default option.

Room Finishes
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Room Finishes
The Room Finishes pane of the Space Settings dialog box has Ceiling, Base Trim, Floor, and North/South/East/West
Wall fields from which you can select values to assign to spaces. The names are collected from files in the Vectorworks
application folder, your user folder, and any folder designated as your workgroup folder.
From the Vectorworks application folder, the default content from the room finish libraries is always available (see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). You cannot modify these lists, but you can
import and export items from them. Use the Space Settings dialog box to create custom versions of these room finish
lists, or to create new lists, as needed. Edits are automatically saved to your user folder.
In a workgroup environment, create room finish lists and place them in a shared location. The folder structure must be
the same as that of the default content libraries. See Customizing the Space Settings on page 80.
 Space Planning | 77

To edit a room finish list:

1. Select the Space tool, and then click Preferences on the Tool bar.
2. On the Space Settings dialog box, select Room Finishes from the left pane to display the Room Finishes pane.
Alternatively, select an existing space object and click Assign Room Finish in the Object Info palette. (If the
button is not enabled, select On Room Finish Schedule.)
3. Click Edit Finishes to add, edit, or delete the available room finishes.
The Edit Room Finishes dialog box opens.

4. Select the list of room finishes to view.

To view items from the current document, click Document Finishes, and then select from the Location
options (ceiling, walls, baseboard, or floor).
To view items from a list external to the drawing file, click Default Finishes, and then select from the
Location options. Lists from the Vectorworks application folder, your user folder, and your designated
workgroup folder display.
5. Edit, import, or export items as described in the following table. The options available depend on what type of list
you are editing.

Edit Function Applicable Files Procedure

Rename the list User lists Click Rename, enter the new list name, and click OK. The list name
in the edit dialog box changes.
Change the list order Active document, Click the item number and drag it up or down to the desired position.
user lists
78 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Edit Function Applicable Files Procedure

Add an item Active document, Click New.
user lists If an active document list or user list is selected, a blank item is
added to the current list. Enter a Key and Description.
If a list from the application folder or a workgroup folder is
selected, an alert displays, and you are prompted to add the item
to a list in your user folder instead. Answer Yes to open a dialog
box to add an item.

Enter a Key and Description. To create a new file, select Save to

New File and enter a unique name. To add to an existing file,
select Add to Current File and select a file from the pull-down
list. Click OK to display the new item and list.
Edit an item Key or Active document, Select the item and enter the new value in the appropriate field. The
Description user lists Key is the ID that displays for the selected finish in the space label
(if applicable), Room Finish Legend, and Room Finish Schedule.
Description text displays for the selected finish in the Room Finish
Legend.
Delete an item Active document, Select the item and click Delete. The item is removed from the list,
user lists and the items below it on the list are renumbered.
Import items User, workgroup, and Select one or more items and click Import. The items are added to
application lists the appropriate list in the current document.
 Space Planning | 79

Edit Function Applicable Files Procedure

Export items Active document, Select one or more items and click Export to open the export dialog
user, workgroup, and box.
application lists

To create a new file, select Export to New File and enter a unique
name. To add to an existing file, select Add to Current File and
select a file from the pull-down list. Click OK to complete the
export.

6. Click OK to save the changes and close the edit dialog box. If you changed an external finish list, a message
displays the path in your user folder where the edited file was saved; click OK.
7. Click OK to close the Space Settings dialog box.

Assigning a Room Finish

Room finishes can be applied to space objects (see Creating Spaces with the Space Tool on page 41). The
information displays in the Room Finish Schedule and in the Room Finish Legend (see Records and Schedules on
page 26).
To assign finishes to a space object:
1. Select an existing space object.
2. In the Object Info palette, select On Room Finish Schedule to add the finish information to the Room Finish
Schedule. Click Assign Room Finish.
The Assign Room Finishes dialog box opens.
Alternatively, click Settings to open the Space Settings dialog box, and select the Room Finishes pane.
80 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Ceiling Lists all of the defined finish items for ceilings
North, East, South, and West Walls Lists all of the defined finish items for each wall
Base Lists all of the defined finish items for baseboards
Floor Lists all of the defined finish items for floors
Finish Remarks Allows entry of additional remarks about the finishes
Edit Finishes Opens the Edit Room Finishes dialog box (see Creating, Editing, and
Deleting Room Finishes on page 76)

3. Select the desired finishes for each part of the room and click OK. The information is associated with the selected
space object.
4. The Room Finish Schedule can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource
Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the default architectural reports file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries
folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the Room Finish Schedule worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is
populated with information from the objects in the current drawing. (See Creating Schedules on page 32.)
5. To add a legend for the Room Finish Schedule, use the Create Rm Finish Legend command (see Creating a
Room Finish Legend on page 34).

Customizing the Space Settings

When you edit the space name, occupant organization, and room finish lists in the Vectorworks Architect product, the
changes are saved to text files in your user folder. In a workgroup environment, you can create a set of files that contain
standard settings for your office and share them with coworkers over a network.
 Space Planning | 81

To access the shared content, another Vectorworks user simply designates that folder as a workgroup folder in his or her
Vectorworks Preferences. Then, when the user creates spaces in a drawing, the space name, occupant organization, and
room finish list items are collected from files in the Vectorworks program folder, the user folder, and any folder
designated as a workgroup folder.
To create custom space settings:
1. In the Space tools preferences, customize the space name, occupant organization, and room finish lists as needed.
The appropriate files are created in the user data folder specified in your Vectorworks preferences (see User
Folders Preferences on page 27 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
2. To share the custom files with a workgroup, put the files on the network in a workgroup folder. When coworkers
set up this workgroup folder in their Vectorworks preferences, they also have access to the files (see Sharing
Custom Content Using Workgroup Folders on page 37). The folder structure must be the same as the default
content room finish, standard occupant organization, and space name libraries provided with the Vectorworks
Architect product in [Vectorworks]\Libraries. For example, to add a custom space name library, place the file in
your workgroup default space name folder: [Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults\Space - Space Name.
3. To share custom space labels with a workgroup, save the labels to your template file (see Creating Space Labels
on page 72). Place the file in the workgroups default space stamp folder.
4. Remove the custom files you created from your user folder if you intend to use the workgroup settings. Remember
that the contents of the user folder have priority over the contents of the workgroup folder.

GSA Data
The General Services Administration in the United States has set deliverables standards that require that projects be
delivered in IFC format. In addition, they require that certain additional GSA-specific data be included with spaces.
To specify GSA data for a space object:
1. Select an existing space object.
2. In the Object Info palette, click Settings to open the Space Settings dialog box.
3. Select the Advanced Settings pane, and then click Enable GSA.
4. Select the Occupancy pane, and then click GSA Occupancy.
The GSA Occupancy dialog box opens.
82 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
OmniClass Select the federal agency classification for the space by its function; to see the subclasses
beneath a heading, click the disclosure arrow to the left of the heading
Space Category Select the GSA category for the space; the numeric code for the category displays to the left
Space Type Select the GSA code that describes the usage of the space; a description of the code displays to
the right
Occupant Select the federal agency code and name for the organization that will occupy the space; to see
the subclasses beneath a heading, click the disclosure arrow to the left of the heading

5. Enter the GSA data for the space object and click OK.
6. When the drawing is complete and all required GSA data has been entered, select File > Export > Export IFC
Project to save the file in IFC format.

GSA Spatial Program BIM Requirements

A GSA spatial program BIM has some specific modeling requirements. Use the following guidelines to create an
optimal IFC export from the Vectorworks program, that is compatible with all GSA guidelines and standards.
General
Reduce, eliminate, or deactivate (by hiding appropriate classes) the 3D components of objects that do not
contribute to the spatial definition of the model. While the IFC data format does support a number of non-spatial
or non-structural items, they are not required for the current GSA spatial program BIM.
Ensure that all wall intersections are correctly configured, so that an automatically bound space object can
properly detect room extents.
Ensure that all space objects have the following settings in the Object Info palette:
2D Boundary Display (2D Boundaries & Area section) is set to Net Boundary
2D Net Boundary Definition (2D Boundaries & Area section) is set to Inside Face of Walls
Show 3D (3D Boundaries section) is enabled
 Space Planning | 83

The Volume Display of the 3D boundary is set to Net, and the height is set to properly represent the full
height of the space, either manually, or based on story-aware settings
Columns and Pilasters
The GSA requires a net space boundary that wraps around pilasters and free-standing concrete columns, excluding
them from the area calculations. However, the space boundary should not wrap around steel columns, or columns
embedded in a wall; these should be ignored.
To create a GSA BIM-compatible vertical support, use either the Column or Pilaster tool. A column is restricted to
symmetrical square or oval plan geometry. A pilaster must be set to Architectural, or Structural and Architectural, to
comply with GSA requirements. The space boundary will wrap around the extents of these structures.
Columns that are exposed steel wide flanges or H-shapes do not need to be excluded from the GSA BIM area. If a
structural steel column is required, use extruded plan geometry inside a hybrid symbol to create the column; the
column will be recognized as 3D geometry, but it will not be excluded from the GSA BIM area in the space object.
Shafts
Per GSA guidelines, a shaft that has a floor penetration greater than nine square feet should be designated as its own
space.
If this shaft is bounded completely by walls, simply create a space object inside the shaft. If the shaft is not bounded by
walls, use the Wall tools <Virtual wall> style to create a boundary; once the shaft is surrounded with virtual walls,
create spaces in the room and shaft.

Creating Walls from Spaces

Once the floor plan has been developed with multiple spaces, the interior and exterior walls can be automatically
created.
To create walls from spaces:
1. Ensure that space objects are present in the drawing. To automatically create walls with a 3D height, specify a
delta-Z value for the design layer where the walls will be created.
2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Create Walls from Spaces. The Create Walls from Spaces dialog box opens.
Specify the style of walls to create and their location.
84 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Create Walls from Selected Select to allow walls to be created from selected spaces; deselect to create walls
Spaces Only from all the spaces in the source layer
Source Layer Specifies the layer containing the space objects
Destination Layer Indicates the layer on which to create the walls
Place Exterior Walls Select how to align the exterior walls with the spaces
Along Inside of Spaces Creates the exterior walls along the inside of the space polylines; select this
option if the spaces represent the gross area
Along Outside of Spaces Creates the exterior walls along the outsides of the space polylines; select this
option if the spaces represent the net area
Along Centerline of Spaces Creates the exterior walls centered along the outside edges of the space
polylines
Using Wall Control Offset Creates exterior walls that are offset as determined by the Exterior Wall Style
Exterior / Interior Wall Style Select a wall style for the exterior and interior walls from either the default
content or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Constrain straight walls to vertical Select to create straight vertical or horizontal walls out of spaces that are not
or horizontal perfectly vertical or horizontal
If they are within ___ degrees Indicates the threshold for constraining walls; walls that deviate from vertical or
of vert/hor horizontal within the number of degrees specified are automatically straightened

100.0 sq ft 95.6 sq ft 100.0 sq ft 95.6 sq ft

97.9 sq ft 97.9 sq ft

Original spaces not Resulting walls constrained

drawn straight horizontally and vertically
Combine Collinear interior walls Select to draw multiple, collinear interior walls as a single wall

The available wall styles are defined by wall style resources (see Using Wall Styles on page 118).
3. Click OK to create the walls on the destination layer.

Office 2 Office 3

Office 1 Lobby

Exterior and interior walls are applied automatically to the spaces. Round walls approximating the curves are used
for Bzier and cubic spline vertices in the space objects.
 Space Planning | 85

Creating Spaces from Walls

Another approach to creating floor plans is to start the design by creating walls, and then automatically create spaces to
determine the area of each room or the gross area defined by the wall perimeter.
To create spaces from walls:
1. Create the walls and ensure that they are properly joined.

2. From the Attributes palette, set the 2D attributes for the spaces (fill, pen, opacity, and line thickness).
3. Select the Space tool, and from the Tool bar, select Preferences. Set the default parameters for space objects as
described in Space Properties on page 44 (numbering style, label, and classes for the parts of the space object).
4. Select AEC > Space Planning > Create Spaces from Walls. The Create Spaces from Walls dialog box opens.
Specify how to create the spaces, the minimum area for creating spaces, and their location.

Parameter Description
Create Room Spaces Creates space objects for each room defined by the walls in the source layer
Create Gross Floor Space Creates a single space object equivalent to the entire outer boundary of the walls
in the source layer
Source Layer Specifies the layer that contains the walls
86 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Destination Layer Indicates the layer on which to create the spaces
Minimum area Specifies the threshold for creating a space; spaces will be created only for areas
above this value
Create Spaces from Selected Creates spaces only from selected walls; deselect to create spaces from all the
Walls Only walls in the source layer

5. Click OK to create the spaces on the destination layer.

4 - Space

1 - Space

3 - Space

2 - Space

Spaces are created for all areas enclosed by walls, or for the gross area defined by boundary of the walls. Default
room name information is set and should be edited to complete the floor plan (see Space Properties on page 44).
After the spaces are created, the original walls can still be modified. To update the spaces to conform to the new walls,
select the Create Spaces from Walls command again. The existing spaces are reshaped without losing any space
parameters that have already been specified.
If the original spaces were not drawn perfectly straight, select the Create Walls from Spaces command with the
Constrain Straight Walls option. Now that the walls are straight, select the Create Spaces from Walls command
to straighten the spaces.

Creating Spaces from Polylines

During the initial stages of a design, it may be easier to work with polylines instead of spaces. Use the Modify > Add/
Clip/Intersect/Combine into Surface commands to modify the polylines to create the desired shapes. Once the
polyline shapes are finalized, convert them into spaces to take advantage of the additional features that space objects
provide, such as labels, area calculations, room finishes, and so on.
To convert polylines into spaces:
1. From the Attributes palette, set the 2D attributes for the spaces (fill, pen, opacity, and line thickness).
2. Select the Space tool, and from the Tool bar, select Preferences. Set the default parameters for space objects as
described in Space Properties on page 44 (numbering style, label, and classes for the parts of the space object).
3. Select the polylines to convert into spaces. This command also converts rectangles, rounded rectangles, polygons,
arcs, circles, and ovals into spaces.
4. Select AEC > Space Planning > Create Spaces from Polys. The selected items are converted into spaces.
 Space Planning | 87

Office 1
327.8 sq ft

Office 2 Office 3
77.9 sq ft 94.7 sq ft

Another option is to draw a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (seeCreating
Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Creating Objects from Shapes on
page 696).

Getting Floorplan Information from a Solid Model

If a solid model has been used to develop a massing study, the Vectorworks Architect product can extract information
from the model to begin work on the floorplans. Specifically, gross area polylines can be created automatically for each
building level directly from the solid model with the Model to Floorplan command. A stacking diagram can display
the sum of the areas of these polylines, which makes it easy to determine the amount of floor area provided by a solid
model before creating the floorplans. In addition, exterior walls can be created automatically. If the model changes after
the polylines and walls are created, run the Model to Floorplan command again to update the polylines and walls.
To create a floorplan from a model:
1. Select the model. The solid model should be a CSG solid (addition, subtraction, union), solid primitive (sphere,
hemisphere, cone, cylinder), extrude, or multiple extrude.
This command cannot be used in Top/Plan view. Select the model from a 3D view.
2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Model to Floorplan.
The Model to Floorplan dialog box opens. Specify the layers to include and set the type of floorplan elements to
create.
88 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Parameter Description
Layer list Lists the layers with heights that intersect the solid. Select the design layer(s) to
include in the floorplan, and deselect layers, such as sheet layers or site model layers,
which should not be included in the floorplan. A selected layer displays with a check
mark.
Create Gross Area Polylines For each selected layer, creates a polyline from the exterior perimeter of the model
Create Stacking Diagram Creates a stacking diagram showing the available area on each layer (see Creating a
Stacking Diagram on page 96)
Create walls Creates walls based on the model perimeter
Position Creates exterior walls based on the model perimeter, along the inside, outside, or
center of the perimeter
Wall Style Specify a wall style to use for the exterior walls from either the default content or the
current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide

3. Click OK to create the floorplan objects. If selected, polylines, walls, and a stacking diagram are placed on the
drawing. To update the floorplan objects based on model changes, select the Model to Floorplan command again.

Kitchen
Floor 2
Lobby
Floor 1
Office
Total Used/Available:

Editing Space Boundaries

Once a space is created, its boundary is edited differently depending on the current Auto-Boundary setting.
If Auto-Boundary is enabled, the space is associated with a set of walls, regardless of whether the walls are
visible. When the walls that surround the space change, in many cases, the space updates automatically.
If Auto-Boundary is disabled, the space must be edited directly as a path object.
Each space has a control point that indicates the label location. If the space is auto-bounded, it also has a separate
anchor control point that locates the space within its boundary. The anchor control point is typically in the center of
the spaces bounding box, so it may be directly on top of the label control point. (If you create the space with Inner
Boundary mode, the anchor is placed where you click to create the space.)
To move a label or an anchor, click the control point and drag it to a new location; click again to move the point. If a
label is moved outside of the space boundary, a line is drawn to connect the label to the space automatically.
 Space Planning | 89

Bedroom 3 Bedroom 3
10 Walk-in Closet 10 Walk-in Closet
11 11
Label control point Label control point

Click the control point of the space label and Click to place the label; a line is automatically drawn from the
drag it outside the space boundary space boundary to the new position of the control point

To edit a space with Auto-Boundary enabled:

1. Add, delete, or move the associated walls.
2. The spaces and labels update automatically, unless you are adding a new wall that affects an existing space or
removing a wall that surrounds a space.
If walls have been moved, the wall settings (thickness or components) have changed, or you move, edit, or
delete an associated column or wall feature, the associated space object(s) and labels update automatically.
If walls that are associated with a space are deleted, the space changes from an auto-bound space to a manual
space. The space can be associated with new walls; see Converting Space Boundary Associations on
page 89.
If walls have been added, update the space object(s). Select one or more spaces, and then click Update
Boundary from the Object Info palette. The location of the updated space is based on the position of the
anchor point; other areas created by the dividing wall remain empty.
Alternatively, select AEC > Space Planning > Update Space Boundaries to update all spaces, whether or not
they are selected.
3. The boundary of the space adjusts to match the surrounding walls; if the space label anchor point is now outside
the space, a line is drawn automatically from the label to the space.
In cases where architects may have adjacent spaces in a design that are not explicitly separated by an actual wall,
the <Virtual wall> wall style (a wall without width or height) gives the user a boundary for space objects to see
when Auto-Boundary is enabled, primarily for IFC export.
To edit a space with Auto-Boundary disabled:
To add, subtract, and change vertices, edit the polyline with the Reshape tool.
The space object is a path object and some parameters cannot be edited directly from the Object Info palette. To
make changes to the space path object, including changing its dimensions, select Modify > Edit Space. For
example, you can reshape, add, clip, intersect, and combine into surfaces. Click Exit Path to return to the
drawing.

Converting Space Boundary Associations

Converting to Manual Mode
Auto-bounded spaces can be converted to manual mode, releasing them from their association with walls.
To convert auto-bounded spaces to manual spaces:
1. Select the auto-bounded space. In the Object Info palette, the Auto-Boundary mode displays Auto-Bounded.
2. Select Manual from the Auto-Boundary list.
The space is disassociated from its wall set, though it remains in place.
90 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Converting to Auto-Bounded Mode Using Anchor Points

Manually bounded spaces can be converted to auto-bounded mode by automatically associating them with the
surrounding walls.
To convert manual spaces to auto-bounded spaces:
1. Select the manual space(s). In the Object Info palette, the Auto-Boundary mode displays Manual.
2. Select Auto-Boundary from the Auto-Boundary list.
The space object(s) is regenerated using the anchor point(s) to find the surrounding walls and associate them with
the space(s).
Converting to Auto-Bounded Mode by Picking Boundaries
Manually drawn spaces can be associated with a set of walls, converting them to auto-bounded mode. Similarly, an
auto-bounded space can be associated with a new set of walls by this method.
To convert manual spaces to auto-bounded spaces:
1. Select the manual space. In the Object Info palette, the Auto-Boundary mode displays Manual.
2. Select Pick Boundary from the Auto-Boundary list.
The Space tool is automatically activated, and Inner Boundary mode is selected (Picked Walls mode can also be
selected).
3. For Inner Boundary mode, click in an open area of the drawing that is bounded by walls. For Picked Walls mode,
click on each wall that forms the wall set and press Enter, or click the check mark button on the Tool bar.
4. The manual space is associated with the wall set. Its location and size may change as it is bounded by the wall set.

Programming Studies
The Vectorworks Architect product provides several tools for creating and managing space programming study
information in both tabular and graphical formats, including an adjacency matrix, bubble diagram, and stacking
diagram.
In an adjacency matrix worksheet, information is used to automatically create the following items in the drawing:
a bubble diagram, containing space objects for each space in the matrix, with the appropriate area and department
information, and space links connecting the spaces, with line weights indicating the strength of the relationship
between the spaces
an adjacency matrix diagram
an adjacency score object, showing the total lengths of all the space links
a stacking diagram
 Programming Studies | 91

Adjacency matrix

Bubble diagram Adjacency score

Stacking diagram
The space objects are square when they are first created, but they can be reshaped with the Reshape tool. The spaces
can be repositioned to create clusters of related spaces.

Creating an Adjacency Matrix

Adjacency matrices specify, in tabular format, the spaces and area requirements that must be incorporated into a design.
In addition, the relationships among the various spaces are identified. Spaces which should be located next to each
other are strongly related, while spaces which can or should be separated have a weak relationship.
An adjacency matrix is typically developed in a spreadsheet program and imported into a Vectorworks file. An
adjacency matrix can also be created in a worksheet in a Vectorworks file, exported as a tab-delimited file, and then
imported back into a Vectorworks file to create an adjacency matrix.

Creating an Adjacency Matrix Worksheet

To create an adjacency matrix worksheet:
1. From the Resource Browser Resources menu, select New Resource and then select Worksheet. See Creating
Worksheets on page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Create the adjacency matrix, using every other row for space names and areas, and alternate rows for specifying
the relationships among the spaces.
92 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Any third-party spreadsheet program that can save a tab- or comma-delimited text file can be used to create the
adjacency matrix. Ensure that there is at least one cell containing data on each spreadsheet row. Certain
spreadsheet programs do not export rows without data, which could disrupt the expected sequence of data in the
file as it is imported into the Vectorworks file.
3. Click File > Export > Export Worksheet to export the worksheet as a tab- or comma-delimited file.

4. Click OK and specify the name and location of the file.

Importing an Adjacency Matrix Spreadsheet

To import an adjacency matrix:
1. Ensure that the file to be imported is a tab- or comma-delimited file.
2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Import Adjacency Matrix. The Import Adjacency Matrix dialog box opens.
Specify the adjacency matrix file import options.
 Programming Studies | 93

Parameter Description
External Filename Enter the name of the adjacency matrix file or click Browse to specify its location; a sample
file is specified by default
Header Rows Specifies the number of rows in the spreadsheet that do not include space or space relationship
information
Row Spacing Set this to 0 (zero) if there is a space name on every row or set this to 1 if there is a space name
on every other row in the drawing file
Field Delimiter Specifies the delimiter that was used to separate fields for the spreadsheet
Column Numbers Specifies the columns to include in the adjacency matrix as well as their position
and Preview
Department Select to include department number information and specify its column number
Space Select to include area name information and specify its column number
Area Select to include the space area information and specify its column number
Relationships Select to include the space relationship information and specify its column number
Preview Displays the data in the selected columns

3. Click OK to import the adjacency matrix. If this is the first time an adjacency matrix, stacking diagram, spaces, or
space links are placed in the file, the object properties dialog box opens for each type of object. Accept the default
values and click OK.

Inserting an Adjacency Matrix

An adjacency matrix diagram can also be created manually with the Adjacency Matrix tool, based on spaces and
space relationships currently in the file.

To insert an adjacency matrix diagram:

1. Click the Adjacency Matrix tool from the Space Planning tool set.
2. Click at the desired location for the adjacency matrix.
94 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

3. Click again to set the matrix rotation. If this is the first time an adjacency matrix diagram is placed on the drawing,
the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the default preferences, which apply to all adjacency matrix
diagrams placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
The adjacency matrix is created.

If no space objects currently exist in the drawing, an adjacency matrix place holder is created.

Adjacency Matrix Properties

The adjacency matrix is more than just a presentation graphic, because it dynamically shows what is in the drawing.
The adjacency matrix updates automatically when spaces or space links change.
The Rotation, Height Scale and Width Scale parameters of an adjacency matrix can be edited in the Object Info
palette.
To adjust the order of adjacency matrix spaces, change the Matrix Order number in the Object Info palette for the
relevant space object (see Space Properties on page 44).

Creating a Bubble Diagram

A bubble diagram is a graphical view of the data from a space planning spreadsheet. Spaces are connected by space
links that represent the relationships among the spaces. Thick links indicate a strong relationship between the spaces,
while weak relationships are drawn with thin lines. The efficiency of the bubble diagram layout can be determined by
calculating its adjacency score.
A bubble diagram is inserted into a drawing automatically when an adjacency matrix is imported (see Importing an
Adjacency Matrix Spreadsheet on page 92). A bubble diagram can also be created manually by linking spaces with
the Space Link tool.

Linking Spaces

To link spaces:

1. Create spaces as described in Creating Spaces with the Space Tool on page 41.
2. Click the Space Link tool from the Space Planning tool set.
3. Click on the first space to link, and then on the second space. The space link is automatically created.
 Programming Studies | 95

Office
500.0 sq ft Training Room
800.0 sq ft

Kitchen
500.0 sq ft

Space Link Properties

The space links update dynamically as the spaces are moved around in the drawing.
To change the strength of a link, select it and change the Strength value (from 1 to 18) in the Object Info palette.

Calculating the Adjacency Score

The adjacency score object displays a numerical value that represents the efficiency of the space layout. The score
value is determined by first multiplying the link length times strength for each space link, and then calculating the sum
of these values for all the space links in the file. The lower the score, the more efficient the layout.

To insert an adjacency score object:

1. Click the Adjacency Score tool from the Space Planning tool set.
2. Click in the document to set the object location.
3. Click a second time to set the object rotation.
If spaces or space link objects are deleted, the adjacency score object value is not automatically updated. Slightly
move any space or adjacency score object in the document to reset the adjacency score object value.

Dispatch
350.0 sq ft Office
500.0 sq ft Training Room
800.0 sq ft

Score: 11085

Storage
1200.0 sq ft
Shop Kitchen
600.0 sq ft 500.0 sq ft
96 | Chapter 2: Space Planning and Programming

Creating a Stacking Diagram

A stacking diagram provides a floor-by-floor representation of the total amount of area taken up by all the spaces on the
floors. It is useful for balancing the allocation of spaces among several floors.
A stacking diagram is inserted into a drawing automatically when an adjacency matrix is imported (see Importing an
Adjacency Matrix Spreadsheet on page 92). A stacking diagram can also be inserted manually with the Stacking
Diagram tool. The stacking diagram is based on spaces and space relationships currently in the file.

Inserting a Stacking Diagram

To insert a stacking diagram:

1. Click the Stacking Diagram tool from the Space Planning tool set.
2. Click at the desired location for the stacking diagram. Click again to set the diagram rotation. If this is the first
time a stacking diagram is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the default
preferences, which apply to all stacking diagrams placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited
later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
3. The stacking diagram is created.
The layers are stacked on the basis of their layer elevation values, which can be changed in the Organization
dialog box (Tools > Organization).
If no space objects currently exist in the drawing, a stacking diagram place holder is created.

Stacking Diagram Properties

Like the adjacency matrix, the stacking diagram dynamically shows what is in the drawing. The stacking diagram
updates automatically when spaces or space links are changed. In addition, fill attributes assigned to spaces are
reflected in the stacking diagram automatically.
The Rotation, Height Scale and Width Scale parameters of an adjacency matrix can be edited in the Object Info
palette. In addition, the Gap Scale parameter controls the distance between the stacking diagram rows. Show Totals
toggles the display of the total amount of space used.
The stacking diagram is arranged in rows that correspond to the layers of the drawing. The spaces present in each layer
are shown in separate rows; the layer name and total area used are displayed to the left of each row.
Spaces in the stacking diagram are grouped by Department name (set for each space in the Object Info palette).
Adjacent spaces with the same Department name are separated by thin lines.
Thinner lines separate
Spaces and area allocated to spaces with the same
Top Floor layer department number

Spaces and area allocated to

Bottom Floor layer
Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls 3
Once a drawing file has been set up according to standards, and space planning and programming has established the
floor plan, use the tools in the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark product to create the slabs and walls.
Some of the tools and commands in the Vectorworks Design Series products are similar to those available in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals product, but with extended capabilities required for design. Certain commands that display
in the Model > AEC menu in the Fundamentals workspace are also located in the AEC menu in the Architect
workspace, the Architectural menu in the Landmark workspace, or the Architectural menu in the Spotlight
workspace, but they may have enhanced functionality in the Vectorworks Design Series product.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, or Spotlight

Modify > Create Polys from AEC > Create Polys from Walls (or Landmark > Architectural >
Walls Create Polys from Walls, or Spotlight > Architectural > Create
Polys from Walls)
Modify > Create Walls from AEC > Create Objects from Shapes with extended capabilities in
Polygon the Vectorworks Architect product
Wall tool and Round Wall tool Wall tool and Round Wall tool, located in the Building Shell tool
located in the Walls tool set set, with extended capabilities in the Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark products

Creating Slabs
The Slab tool, available in the Vectorworks Architect product, creates architectural floor slabs. Slabs can be drawn
manually or they can be based on, and associated with, an existing set of walls. The method of associating slab
components with wall components can be specified, to create accurate and detailed cross-section views.

To draw a free-standing slab manually with the Slab tool, select the Polyline mode. If the walls are already drawn,
select the Picked Walls mode or Inner Boundary mode to create a slab bounded by visible walls.
Corner Cubic Point on Fillet
Inner Boundary Vertex Vertex Arc Radius

Picked Walls Polyline Bzier Tangent Arc Arc Vertex Preferences

Vertex

Mode Description
Picked Walls Defines the perimeter of a slab based on a closed set of selected walls
Inner Creates a slab object in a clicked area that is bounded by visible walls
Boundary
98 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Mode Description
Polyline Draws a polyline slab object; as with a polyline, select one of six types of control
points for the vertices from the Tool bar
Corner Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the slab using polyline segments with straight lines and
angled vertices at the control points
Bzier Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the slab using polyline segments with curves pulled
toward, but not touching the control points
Cubic Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the slab using polyline segments with curves that pass
through the control points
Tangent Arc For Polyline mode, creates the slab using polyline segments that are tangent to the
previous segment
Point on Arc For Polyline mode, creates the slab using polyline segments that are drawn by clicking
three points: the start point, a point the arc passes through, and the end point
Arc Vertex For Polyline mode, creates the slab using polyline segments with curves that look like
a fillet placed at the control points
Fillet Radius For Polyline mode, sets the fillet radius when the Arc Vertex mode is selected
Preferences Sets the default parameters that are used for each slab object

Drawing Slabs Manually

To draw a manual slab object that is not associated with any walls:

1. Click the Slab tool from the Building Shell tool set, and select Polyline mode from the Tool bar.
2. To draw an unstyled slab, select <Unstyled> from the Slab Style list on the Tool bar. To create a styled slab, select
it from the Tool bar Slab Styles list, which displays the slab style resources in this file as well as default slab
styles. Create a new slab style by clicking Preferences from the Tool bar; see Creating Slab Styles on page 101.
3. Select a polyline drawing mode. See Polyline Tool on page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
A slab can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Create Objects from Shapes command
(see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).
4. Similarly to drawing a polygon, create a closed slab shape.
Double-click while drawing to close the slab automatically.
Every slab contains a component designated as the datum component. The top of this component is the
Z-reference datum, and is fixed vertically (it does not change with any changes to the slab thickness or definition).
The reference datum of the slab can be set to the active layer elevation value, or set to be bound by one of the level
types defined for the story or the story below it. By setting the slab datum to the level type, if the elevation of the
associated story changes, the datum of the slab changes automatically to match.
 Creating Slabs | 99

2nd click 3rd click

1st click 4th click 5th click

3D view

Creating Automatically Bounded Slabs from Existing Walls

Slabs can be automatically created by first selecting the enclosing walls or by clicking within the boundary of a closed
set of visible walls. The slabs are automatically associated with their bounding walls.
Use classes to distinguish interior and exterior walls to easily place slabs associated with the correct wall set.
Every slab contains a component designated as the datum component. The top of this component is the Z-reference
datum, and is fixed vertically (it does not change with any changes to the slab thickness or definition). The reference
datum of the slab can be set to the active layer elevation value, or set to be bound by one of the level types defined for
the story or the story below it. By setting the slab datum to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story
changes, the datum of the slab changes automatically to match.
The slab edge path is defined by the outside or inside face of the walls, or by components within the wall, as defined by
the slab component properties. If the walls are edited (whether moved, reshaped, or replaced, or due to a change in the
wall style, the wall thickness, or the wall components), the slab edge path updates automatically. However, if the walls
are edited so significantly that the slab cannot retain its association, you have the option to create a manual slab from
the automatically bounded slab.
Because the walls and slab are associated, section views display accurately. When creating a section view, similar
component fills can be merged to display as a single unit (see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 750).
Once an automatically bounded slab is created, it can be moved to another layer and still retain its association with the
walls.

To create an automatically bounded slab within a selected set of visible walls:

1. Click the Slab tool from the Building Shell tool set, and select Picked Walls mode from the Tool bar.
2. To draw an unstyled slab, select <Unstyled> from the Slab Style list on the Tool bar. To create a styled slab, select
it from the Tool bar Slab Styles list, which displays the slab style resources in this file as well as default slab
styles. Create a new slab style by clicking Preferences from the Tool bar; see Creating Slab Styles on page 101.
3. Click on each wall that forms the wall set and press Enter, or click the check mark button on the Tool bar.
4. The slab is created.
100 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

1st click

4th click 2nd click

3rd click

To create a slab within a closed set of visible walls:

1. Click the Slab tool from the Building Shell tool set, and select Inner Boundary mode from the Tool bar.
2. To draw an unstyled slab, select <Unstyled> from the Slab Style list on the Tool bar. To create a styled slab, select
it from the Tool bar Slab Styles list, which displays the slab style resources in this file as well as default slab
styles. Create a new slab style by clicking Preferences from the Tool bar; see Creating Slab Styles on page 101.
3. Click in an open area of the drawing that is bounded by walls; the walls must be visible, joined together, and on
layers that have the same layer scale as the slab layer.
4. The slab is created.

With exterior walls visible, click to place a Send the created slab to the back (Modify > Send >
concrete-style slab Send to Back) for Top/Plan view

Converting Slab Boundary Associations

Converting to Automatically Bounded Mode
Manually drawn slabs can be associated with a set of walls, converting them to automatically bounded mode. Similarly,
an automatically bounded slab can be associated with a new set of walls by this method.
To convert manual slabs to automatically bounded slabs:
1. Select the manual slab. In the Object Info palette, the Bounding mode displays Manual.
2. Click Pick Boundary from the Bounding list.
The Slab tool is automatically activated, and Inner Boundary mode is selected (Picked Walls mode can also be
selected).
 Creating Slabs | 101

3. For Inner Boundary mode, click in an open area of the drawing that is bounded by walls. For Picked Walls mode,
click on each wall that forms the wall set and press Enter, or click the check mark button on the Tool bar.
4. The manual slab is associated with the wall set. Its location and size may change as it is bounded by the wall set.

Converting to Manual Mode

Automatically bounded slabs can be converted to manual mode, releasing them from their association with walls.
To convert automatically bounded slabs to manual slabs:
1. Select the automatically bounded slab. In the Object Info palette, the Bounding mode displays Auto-Bounded.
2. Click Manual from the Bounding list.
3. The slab is disassociated from its wall set, though it remains in place.

Using Slab Styles

Unstyled slabs can be created; in a new file, the default unstyled slab includes a single component. The attributes of an
unstyled slab can be changed from the Attributes palette. The use of slab styles, however, facilitates drawing slabs by
saving the slab preferences settings so that they can be easily applied to other slabs. Slab styles are resources that can
be imported into other files and shared as office standards. Slab styles, textures, and hatches are provided as default
content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and displays in the Resource
Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Setting and saving the dynamic
height information of a slab in its slab style is a convenient way of automatically setting the defined height condition
when using slabs with stories.
If a selected slab styles parameters are edited, the slab style automatically changes to unstyled, indicating that the
edited style must be saved as a new style to save changes (alternatively, the changes can be applied as an unstyled slab,
and not get saved).
Unused slab styles can be purged; see Purging Items from a File on page 260 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.

Creating Slab Styles

To create a slab style:

1. Click the Slab tool from the Building Shell tool set, and click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Slab Preferences dialog box opens.
102 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Parameter Description
Slab Style To modify an existing slab style, select the Slab Style from either the default
content or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Alternatively, select Unstyled as
the slab style and set the parameters.
Save Preferences as Opens the Assign Name dialog box; enter a slab style name and click OK
Slab Style
Preview Displays a sectioned preview of the slab structure, including any defined
components. The top of the preview indicates the top part of the slab as it will
be drawn.
Overall Thickness Displays the thickness of the slab. The slab thickness is always determined by
the thickness of its components; a slab always has one component by default.
Edit Slab Attributes Opens the Slab Attributes dialog box, to specify the slab fill, pen, and opacity
settings
Components Lists the components that form the structure of the slab, in order from top to
bottom as displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click
and drag within the # column.
Datum One of the slab components is designated as the datum component by
clicking in the Datum column. A check mark indicates that the component is
the datum component. The top of this component is the Z-reference datum,
and is fixed vertically (it does not change with any changes to the slab
thickness or definition)
Other Component The remaining columns in the component list display the component
settings thickness, edge offset method, and class setting
 Creating Slabs | 103

Parameter Description
New Click to define the components of the slab; see Creating Slab Components
on page 109 for information on creating components
Edit Opens the Slab Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected
components thickness and attributes (alternatively, double-click on a
component to open the Slab Component Attributes dialog box)
Delete Deletes the selected slab component; the slab thickness is adjusted
accordingly

2. Click Edit Slab Attributes to define the slab attributes in Top/Plan view.
The Slab Attributes dialog box opens. The slab attributes of an unstyled slab are initially set to the parameters
displayed in the Attributes palette. If they are changed here, the Attributes palette reflects the changed attributes of
the selected slab (after exiting the Slab Preferences dialog box).
Fill, pen, and opacity can be set by class rather than by the attributes in the Slab Attributes dialog box. If the slab
class is changed later, the slab changes to use the attributes of the new class. Slab attributes cannot be overridden
on a per-instance basis; if a slab style uses class attributes, all slabs of that style must use class attributes.
However, slabs of the same slab style can be placed in different classes.

Parameter Description
Fill
Use Class Sets slab fill attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Slab
Attributes Attributes dialog box
Style Specify the slab fill attributes, or select None for no fill. Selected hatch, gradient,
or image fills, if not already present in the file, are imported and added to the
Resource Browser (default content is automatically imported into the current file
at the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser). See Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Fill Attributes
on page 505 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Pen
Use Class Sets pen attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Slab Attributes
Attributes dialog box
Style Specify the slab pen attributes, or select None for no pen; see Pen Attributes
on page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
104 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Parameter Description
Line When a pen style has been selected, specify the line thickness; see Line
Thickness Attributes on page 509 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide. If Line Type is selected as the pen style, also select the dashed line type
to use.
Opacity
Use Class Sets slab opacity by class rather than by the parameters in the Slab Attributes
Opacity dialog box
Opacity Specifies the transparency of the slab; drag the slider to the left to increase the
transparency, or enter a percentage directly in the box to the right of the slider

3. Click OK to return to the Slab Preferences dialog box.

4. Click the Insertion Options tab to set the slab options and to select textures for the slab parts (Renderworks
required).

Parameter Description
Datum LayerZRef Sets the slabs datum height to be defined by the layer elevation, or set it to be
bound by one of the level types defined for the story or the story below it. By
setting the slab datum to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story
changes, the datum of the slab changes automatically to match.
Datum Offset from Specifies the offset (positive or negative) of the slabs datum component from
Layer Z the layer elevation (see Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Class Specifies the default class for the slab
 Creating Slabs | 105

Parameter Description
Textures
(Renderworks
required)
Use Component Uses the textures defined for the slab components to texture the slab
Textures This option can also be selected for an existing slab from the Render tab of
the Object Info palette.
Use Object Textures Uses the textures defined below for the slab parts
Part Applies the texture selected in Texture to the selected parts of the slab (see
Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide for information on applying textures to an object
with parts)
Revert to Overall If a part was assigned a texture but it should inherit its texture from Overall
instead, select the part and click Revert to Overall. The part moves back below
the divider, and (from Overall) displays as its texture name.
Texture Applies the selected texture to the selected Part.
Textures can also be set from the Render tab of the Object Info palette. Textures
applied from the Object Info palette override the textures set here. Applying a
Texture to an Object on page 620 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
No Texture Does not apply a texture to the selected Part
Class Texture Sets the slab to use the texture specified by the slabs class. The class texture is
set from the Other tab in the Edit Classes dialog box; see Setting Class
Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Any
slabs with that slab style use class textures for that part of the slab (unless
overridden). Class Texture can also be chosen for a selected slab in the Render
tab of the Object Info palette.
Choose Texture Choose a texture for the selected Part from the default content or the current
files content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide). Textures set here override the object class textures.

5. Click the Data tab to specify slab record information, which is IFC-compliant and can be included in a slab style
schedule. These fields are optional; enter text only where desired.
106 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

6. Click Save Preferences as Slab Style.

The Assign Name dialog box opens.
7. Enter a unique name for the slab style and click OK.
If the slab style name already exists, you are prompted to cancel and select a different name, or replace existing
slabs with the slab style applied with the edited slab style. If you are replacing slab styles, the Slab Replacement
dialog box opens; specify the slab replacement properties.
8. The new slab style is saved with the file and is listed under Slab Styles in the Resource Browser as well as the Slab
Style list in the Tool bar.
A new slab style can also be created by clicking New Resource > Slab Style from the Resources menu in the
Resource Browser. A slab style created in this way is not associated with the current slab preference setting, but
can be applied later.

Editing Slab Styles

To edit a slab style:
1. Select the slab style from the Resource Browser and click Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Slab Style dialog box opens.
 Creating Slabs | 107

2. Edit the slab and component parameters as described in Using Slab Styles on page 101, and Creating Slab
Components on page 109.
If a new slab style Name is specified, it replaces the original slab style name (similar to selecting Rename from
the Resources menu).
3. Click OK.
4. If slabs with that style already exist in the drawing, the Slab Replacement dialog box opens (see Replacing Slab
Styles on page 108).
The slab style to apply cannot be selected (the edited style is applied).
5. Click OK to edit the slab style.
Changes apply to any existing slabs in the drawing with the edited slab style, and will be used for any subsequent
slabs created with that slab style.

Applying Slab Styles

By a variety of methods, slab styles can be selected for a slab before drawing it, or applied to existing slabs. Once a slab
style has been selected for a slab, the Attributes palette is no longer available for changing slab attributes; attributes are
set as part of the style.
To apply a slab style prior to creating the slab:
1. Select the Slab tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Select the desired style from the Slab Style list on the Tool bar. The available slab styles are from either the default
content or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Alternatively, click Preferences from the Tool bar. In the Slab Preferences dialog box, select the Slab Style.
To apply a slab style from the Resource Browser prior to drawing the slab:
1. Ensure that no slabs are selected.
2. Select a slab style in the Resource Browser, and click Apply from the Resources menu.
108 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Alternatively, double-click on the slab style in the Resource Browser.

3. The Slab tool is automatically made active and the selected slab style is applied to the slab as it is drawn.
To apply a slab style to an existing slab from the Object Info palette:
1. Select one or more slabs.
2. From the Object Info palette, select the slab Style. To apply a different (default) style, select Replace (see
Replacing Slab Styles on page 108).
To apply a slab style to an existing slab from the Resource Browser:
1. Select one or more slabs.
2. Select the slab style from the Resource Browser and click Apply from the Resources menu. Alternatively, drag the
selected slab style from the Resource browser to the slab and click on the slab selection.
The Slab Replacement dialog box opens (see Replacing Slab Styles on page 108). The slab style list is disabled
(the style selected in the Resource Browser is applied).
3. Click OK.
A styled slab can be converted to an unstyled slab.
To remove a slab style:
1. Select one or more slabs to un-style.
2. From the Object Info palette, select Convert to Unstyled Slab.
The slab is released from its style; its attributes can be edited from the Attributes palette.

Replacing Slab Styles

Slab styles applied to existing slabs can be replaced with a different slab style.
A slab replacement situation may also occur if pasting a styled slab from another file.
To replace a slab style:
1. Select one or more slabs.
2. From the Object Info palette, select Replace from the Style list.
The Slab Replacement dialog box opens. Specify the new slab style. The red line indicates the datum component
of each slab style; replacement is aligned to the datum.

Parameter Description
Slab style list From the list, select the slab style that will replace the current style
 Creating Slabs | 109

Parameter Description
Previews The left preview shows the current slab style, and the right preview shows the
replacement slab style selected in the slab style list. Preview slabs are drawn from
top to bottom, so the top of the preview indicates the top part of the slab as it will
be drawn.
Replacement Select whether to replace the current settings for slab height, class designations,
options and texture assignments (Renderworks required for textures) with those of the new
slab

If slabs with different slab styles were selected for replacement, the current slab preview is blank and components
do not display.
3. Click OK to replace the slab style of the selected slab(s).

Creating Slab Components

Slab components define the sections that make up a slab. For example, to indicate that a slab is made up of gypsum
board ceiling, wood framing, and a plywood deck, define a component for each of these items to illustrate their
location. Slab components can be offset from the edges of the walls (automatically bounded slabs) or the edge of the
slab (manual slabs); their appearance can be specified for cross-section views, and they can be textured (Renderworks
required), creating realistic section views and rendered views, as well as accurate slab material estimates. The area and
volume of slab components (minus any holes cut) can be calculated in worksheets; see Worksheet Functions on
page 837 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

The overall thickness of a slab is equal to the sum of its components. Component fill and pen style are only displayed in
section viewports.

To define slab components:

1. Click the Slab tool from the Building Shell tool set, and click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Slab Preferences dialog box opens.
2. On the Definition tab, click New.
The Slab Component Attributes dialog box opens. Specify the component name, thickness, edge offset, and
appearance in section views and rendered views.
110 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Parameter Description
Definition
Name Provide a name for the component, which displays in the Components list in
the Slab Preferences dialog box
Class Select a class for the component to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the class named <Object Class>, which places the
component in the same class as the slab object.
Thickness Specifies the components thickness; the thickness of a slab is the sum of its
components. A component must have a thickness greater than 0.
Edge Offset The method of offsetting the component from the edge of the slab depends on
whether the slab is an automatically bounded slab, associated with a set of
walls, or a slab drawn manually. The edge offset setting displays for each
component in the component list on the Definition tab of the Slab Preferences
dialog box.
Auto-Bound Sets the component edge to the inner or outer face of the wall, outer face of the
inner wall component, inner face of the outer wall component, or inner face/
outer face/center of the wall component designated as the core component
Manual Specifies the offset of the component from the edge of the slab
Section Fill Specifies the component appearance in section views
Use Class Sets component fill attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Slab
Attributes Component Attributes dialog box. If the component class is changed later, the
component changes to use the attributes of the new class.
 Creating Slabs | 111

Parameter Description
Style Specify the slab fill attributes, or select None for no fill. Selected hatch,
gradient, or image fills, if not already present in the file, are imported and
added to the Resource Browser (default content is automatically imported into
the current file at the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser). See
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and
Fill Attributes on page 505 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Use a tile fill with Fit to Wall selected, to represent insulation fill. See
Defining Tiles on page 520 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
Section Pen Specifies the component appearance in section views
Use Class Sets component pen attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Slab
Attributes Component Attributes dialog box. If the component class is changed later, the
component changes to use the attributes of the new class.
Style Specify the slab pen attributes, or select None for no pen. Selected line types, if
not already present in the file, are imported and added to the Resource Browser
(default content is automatically imported into the current file at the point of
use and displays in the Resource Browser). See Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Pen Attributes on page 507 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Line When a pen style has been selected, specify the line thickness; see Line
Thickness Attributes on page 509 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide. If Line Type is selected as the pen style, also select the dashed line type
to use.
Texture (Renderworks
required)
No Texture Does not apply a texture to the component
Class Texture Sets the component to use the texture specified by the components class. The
class texture is set from the Other tab in the Edit Classes dialog box; see
Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
Choose Texture Select a texture for the component from the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide).

3. Click OK to create the component and return to the Slab Preferences dialog box.
The slabs Overall Thickness value changes to be determined by its components. As components are defined,
they display in the preview. Click and drag a component in the # column to change its order.
4. To save the component settings with the slab settings as a slab style, click Save Preferences as Slab Style (see
Creating Slab Styles on page 101).
112 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

5. Click OK.
Once created, the components of a selected slab can be edited by clicking Components from the Object Info
palette.

Editing Slabs
Slabs are path-based objects and can be reshaped, added to, and clipped. For example, a slab may need a hole clipped to
accommodate a flight of stairs, or may need area added to represent a balcony.

Reshaping Slabs
To reshape a slab:

1. Click the Reshape tool from the Basic palette.

Alternatively, double-click on the slab to activate the Reshape tool.
2. Click one of the modes from the Tool bar.
See Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. The datum component is selected for reshaping; any editing applies to the entire slab.

Clipping a Slab
When clipping a slab, select whether the clip operation should affect the entire slab or only certain components.
 Creating Slabs | 113

To clip a slab:
1. Create a closed 2D object to represent the clipping object. The object must overlap the slab.
2. Select both the slab and the clipping object.
3. Select Modify > Clip Surface.
4. The Clip shape from slab dialog box opens. Select whether to clip the entire slab, or choose the components to be
clipped by selecting them.

5. Click OK.

Clip applied to entire slab Clip applied to top component only

Isometric views

Adding to the Slab Surface

When adding to a slab, select whether the add operation should affect the entire slab or only certain components.
To add to a slab:
1. Create a closed 2D object to represent the add surface. The object must overlap the slab.
2. Select both the slab and the add surface object.
3. Select Modify > Add Surface.
4. The Add Shape to Slab dialog box opens. Select whether to add to the entire slab, or choose the components to be
added to by selecting them.

5. Click OK.
114 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Add applied to entire slab Add applied to bottom component only

Isometric views

Modifying the Clipping/Adding Shape

The original editing object used to clip or add to the slab can be modified.
To modify the editing object:
1. Select the slab.
2. Select Modify > Edit Slab.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Slab command
becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Slab button is visible in the top right corner of the
drawing window. The editing object is selected.

3. Move, delete, or reshape the editing object (new editing objects cannot be added, however). The slab is locked and
cannot be edited.
4. Click Exit Slab to return to the drawing.

Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark

The Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products both use the same straight and round wall tools that are part of the
Vectorworks Fundamentals product, but with expanded capabilities. See Creating Walls on page 429 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Additional wall parameters are available only in the Architect and Landmark
products. These products add the ability to create, save, and use wall styles and to create new wall or component
classes during wall creation and editing. In the Vectorworks Architect product, walls also have the ability to have their
top and bottom boundaries set to the layer level types of the layers story.
In the Vectorworks Architect product, walls can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the
Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 115

To create straight walls in the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark products:

To create round walls in the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark products:

1. Click the Wall or Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. To draw with an unstyled wall, select <Unstyled> from the Wall Style list on the Tool bar. If the desired styled
wall resource has already been created, select it from the Tool bar list or double-click on the resource in the
Resource Browser. Proceed to Step 7.
3. To create or edit a wall style, or change the parameters of an unstyled wall, click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Wall Preferences dialog box opens. This dialog box can be accessed any time afterward to modify default wall
settings. Walls can also be drawn first, and then the parameters can be set later from the Object Info palette. Most
of the parameters in the Wall Preferences dialog box are documented in Creating Walls on page 429 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the parameters that apply to the Vectorworks Architect or
Landmark products are described here.

Parameter Description
Wall Style Select a wall style for the wall; see Using Wall Styles on page 118. Alternatively,
select <Unstyled> to create the wall without linking the parameters to a wall style.
Save Preferences Opens the Assign Name dialog box; enter a wall style name and click OK (see
as Wall Style Creating Wall Styles on page 119)

4. Click New to specify wall components.

116 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

In the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products, wall components can be assigned to a class; this allows
maximum flexibility since the component classes can be shown or hidden separately from the wall class. Select a
class for the wall component to control its appearance and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed;
alternatively, create a new class by selecting New, or select the class named <Object Class> which places the
component in the same class as the wall. By default, components are assigned to the wall class.
When a component is in an invisible class, its fill and lines are hidden. Invisible components on the interior and
exterior of a wall cause the walls lines and fill to adjust to the visible components only, making the wall appear
thinner than its actual width. This allows walls to show only their structural components, for example. If all
components are invisible, the wall displays at its full thickness, without components.

Wall with all components visible Wall with only structural Wall with only finish
component visible components visible

5. Click the Insertion Options tab to set the height options for walls in the Vectorworks Architect product (the height
of walls in other products and the other insertion options are the same as described for the Vectorworks
Fundamentals product).
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 117

Parameter Description
Height
Height Directly sets the desired height of the wall. When the wall height is
determined manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the wall is
automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is modified
accordingly.
When the top of the wall is bound by the layer wall height value or by a story
level, the wall height displays automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the wall.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide).
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product. The
top of the wall can be bound by one of the level types defined for the story or
the story above it. By setting the top of the wall to the level type, if the
elevation of the associated story changes, the height of the wall changes
automatically to match.
The default wall styles automatically assign a top bound level type to the
wall, assuming that stories will be used in the file. However, this can be
changed by selecting a different option.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the wall from its specified top bound height
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the wall; Layer
Elevation is the only option available unless the Vectorworks Architect
product is installed.
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product. The
bottom of the wall can be bound by one of the level types defined for the story
or the story below it. By setting the bottom of the wall to the level type, if the
elevation of the associated story changes, the height of the wall changes
automatically to match.
The default wall styles automatically assign a bottom bound level type to the
wall, assuming that stories will be used in the file. However, this can be
changed by selecting a different option.
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the wall, sets the offset from its specified bottom bound
height

6. Click the Data tab to specify wall record information, which is IFC-compliant and can be included in a wall style
schedule. These fields are optional; enter text only where desired.
118 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

7. When the wall parameters have been specified, and any changes saved as a wall style resource if desired, click
OK.
8. A saved or selected wall style is saved as a resource in the file, and appears in the Resource Browser and in the
Wall Style list on the Tool bar.
9. Click at the desired location to start drawing.
10. Click to end the segment and begin another, or double-click to end the wall.

Using Wall Styles

Unstyled walls can be used in the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products. The attributes of an unstyled wall can
be changed from the Attributes palette. The use of wall styles, however, facilitates drawing walls by saving the wall
preferences settings so that they can be easily applied to other walls. Wall styles are resources that can be imported into
other files and shared as office standards. Wall styles, textures, and hatches are provided as default content (default
content is automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Setting and saving the dynamic height
information of a wall in its wall style is a convenient way of automatically setting the defined height condition when
using walls with stories (Vectorworks Architect required).
Wall styles without a suffix designation include the OmniClass coding standards for component names (such as
[092116] Gypsum Board); this classification helps with tracking and analysis in a BIM workflow. Wall styles
designated as no codes do not include the OmniClass designation in their component names. Use the no code
wall styles if Omniclass information is not necessary for the model.
If a selected wall styles parameters are edited, the wall style automatically changes to unstyled, indicating that the
edited style must be saved as a new style to save changes (alternatively, the changes can be applied as an unstyled wall,
and not get saved).
The basic properties of a styled wall (such as wall height and caps) can be changed from the Object Info palette without
requiring a new style definition.
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 119

Unused wall styles can be purged; see Purging Items from a File on page 260 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.

Creating Wall Styles

To create a straight wall style:

To create a round wall style

1. Select the Wall or Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set, and then click Preferences from the Tool
bar.
The Wall Preferences dialog box opens.
2. To modify an existing wall style, select the Wall Style from either the default content or the current files content;
see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Alternatively, select Unstyled as the
wall style and set the parameters.
3. Specify the wall and component parameters as described in Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark on page 114, and Drawing Straight Walls on page 430 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
4. Click Save Preferences as Wall Style.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
5. Enter a unique name for the wall style and click OK.
If the wall style name already exists, you are prompted to cancel and select a different name, or replace existing
walls with the wall style applied with the edited wall style. If you are replacing wall styles, the Wall Replacement
dialog box opens; specify the wall alignment properties.
6. The new wall style is saved with the file and is listed under Wall Styles in the Resource Browser as well as the
Wall Style list in the Tool bar.
A new wall style can also be created by clicking New Resource > Wall Style from the Resources menu in the
Resource Browser. A wall style created in this way is not associated with the current wall preference setting, but
can be applied later.
7. Worksheets listing the current wall styles and wall areas in the drawing can be added to the drawing from the VA
Create Schedule command (in the Architect workspace) or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser,
open the open the default architectural reports file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with
the Vectorworks Architect product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Drag the Wall Area and/or Wall Style Report worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with
information from the objects in the current drawing.

Editing Wall Styles

To edit a straight wall style:

To edit a round wall style:

1. Select the wall style from the Resource Browser and click Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Wall Style dialog box opens.
120 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

2. Edit the wall and component parameters as described in Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark
on page 114, and Drawing Straight Walls on page 430 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
If a new wall style Name is specified, it replaces the selected wall style name.
3. Click OK.
4. If walls with that style already exist in the drawing, the Wall Replacement dialog box opens (see Replacing Wall
Styles on page 121).
The wall style to apply cannot be selected (the edited style is applied). Select the wall alignment properties.
5. Click OK to edit the wall style.
Changes apply to any existing walls in the drawing with the edited wall style, and will be used for any subsequent
walls created with that wall style.

Applying Wall Styles

By a variety of methods, wall styles can be selected for a wall before drawing it, or applied to existing walls. Once a
wall style has been selected for a wall, the Attributes palette is no longer available for changing wall attributes;
attributes are set as part of the style.
To apply a wall style prior to drawing the wall:
1. Select the Wall or Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Select the desired style from the Wall Style list on the Tool bar. The available wall styles are from either the
default content or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
Alternatively, click Preferences from the Tool bar. In the Wall Preferences dialog box, select the Wall Style.
To apply a wall style from the Resource Browser prior to drawing the wall:
1. Ensure that no walls are selected.
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 121

2. Select a wall style in the Resource Browser, and click Apply from the Resources menu.
Alternatively, double-click on the wall style in the Resource Browser.
3. The Wall tool is automatically made active and the selected wall style is applied to the wall as it is drawn. (If a
round wall is desired, select the Round Wall tool from the Building Shell tool set.)
To apply a wall style to an existing wall from the Object Info palette:
1. Select one or more walls.
2. From the Object Info palette, select the wall Style from either the default content or the current files content; see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To apply a different (default) style, select Replace (see Replacing Wall Styles on page 121).
To apply a wall style to an existing wall from the Resource Browser:
1. Select one or more walls.
2. Select the wall style from the Resource Browser and click Apply from the Resources menu. Alternatively, drag
the selected wall style from the Resource browser to the wall and click on the wall selection.
The Wall Replacement dialog box opens (see Replacing Wall Styles on page 121).
3. Select the wall alignment properties. The wall style list is disabled (the style selected in the Resource Browser is
applied).
4. Click OK.
A styled wall can be converted to an unstyled wall.
To remove a wall style:
1. Select one or more walls to un-style.
2. From the Object Info palette, select Convert to Unstyled Wall.
The wall is released from its style; its attributes can be edited from the Attributes palette.

Replacing Wall Styles

Wall styles applied to existing walls can be replaced with a different wall style.
A wall replacement situation may also occur if pasting a styled wall from another file. You can select a
replacement wall style and how to align the styles for the pasted walls.
To replace a wall style:
1. Select one or more walls.
2. From the Object Info palette, select Replace from the Style list.
The Wall Replacement dialog box opens. Specify the new wall style, and then select a component (or the wall)
from the current and replacement structure lists. Specify the alignment option for each selection; the preview
updates, with a red line showing the replacement alignment.
122 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Parameter Description
Wall style list From the list, select the wall style that will replace the current style
Previews The left preview shows the current wall style, and the right preview shows the
replacement wall style selected in the wall style list. Preview walls are drawn from
left to right, so the top of the preview, by default, indicates the left part of the
wall as it will be drawn.
Align lists On the left, the current wall structure is listed; the right list displays the
replacement wall structure. Select one wall component from each list and specify
its alignment options. The previews update with red lines to show how the
replacement wall will align with the current wall.
Alignment options Select an option for aligning the current structure to the replacement structure
Replacement Select whether to replace the current settings for wall height, class designations,
options and texture assignments (Renderworks required for textures) with those of the new
wall

If walls with different wall styles were selected for replacement, the current wall preview is blank and components
are not listed. Wall alignment can only occur for the left, center, or right of the selected wall(s).
3. Click OK to replace the wall style of the selected wall(s).

Moving Connected Walls

The Selection tool has an additional mode, Connected Walls, in the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products.
This mode automatically maintains the connection between the wall being moved and adjoining walls. The involved
wall angles remain constrained throughout the move. While dragging a wall, precise offset distances can be entered in
the Offset field of the Tool bar.
The Connected Walls mode does not apply to Y-joined walls or round walls.
Connections between T-joined walls and L-joined walls are also maintained if they are moved using the Move or
Nudge command, or moved and/or duplicated using the Duplicate Array command or the Move by Points tool,
as long as the ends of the moved or duplicated walls overlap with the walls to which they were originally
connected. See the following sections of the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide to use these commands and
this tool: Moving Objects on page 254 and Duplicate Array on page 263.
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 123

Connected Walls

To move a wall while maintaining its connection to adjacent walls:

1. Click the Selection tool from the Basic palette.

2. Select Connected Walls from the Tool bar.
3. Click on the desired wall and drag it to a new location; alternatively, change the wall length by editing the L value
in the Object Info palette (polar coordinates), or by editing a dimension value. The walls stay connected during the
move.
When moving a wall connected between two other walls, the wall being moved is resized to maintain the
connection. A T- or L-joined wall, when moved beyond the end of the connected wall, disconnects the walls.

End-to-end walls joined as an L-join move together as a single wall.

For corner joined walls, all involved walls are resized to maintain the connection. A wall cannot be moved in such
a way that its length equals zero.

To move a collection of walls without changing the walls relative to each other, deselect the Connected Walls
mode, and then move the walls.

Creating Wall End Caps

The Wall End Cap tool creates both standard and custom component wrapping at the end of a wall. It has three modes:
Add

Component Clip
Wrap
124 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Mode Description
Component Wrap Automatically wraps the selected component, creating a standard wall cap
Add Creates a custom wall end cap by adding
Clip Creates a custom wall end cap by removing
Preferences Sets whether to create wall caps inside or outside the wall endpoint

Setting Wall End Cap Preferences

To set wall end cap preferences:

1. Click the Wall End Cap tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Wall End Cap Preferences dialog box opens.

Determine whether to create the wall end caps outside the wall endpoint. Deselect the option to create the wall end
caps inside the wall endpoint, so that the wall length does not extend past the original length.
3. Click OK.
This option is also available from the Object Info palette for existing wall end caps.

Creating a Standard Wall End Cap

To create a standard end cap by wrapping a component:

1. Click the Wall End Cap tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click Component Wrap from the Tool bar.
3. Click to select a component within the wall. This component wraps along the wall end.
4. Click to select the component where the wrapping should end.
The component wraps around the wall end to the end point.
1st click
2nd click
1st click

2nd click

Wall End Cap Properties

An End Cap in Wall object is created by the Wall End Cap tool. This object, while distinct from the wall, moves with
the wall and adjusts if the wall is resized. The object can be dimensioned, reported in wall schedules, and exported as
part of the wall.
The wall cap uses the line weight of the source component, and its 3D geometry is of the same height as the source
component.
The Extend Cap Past Wall Endpoint option can be changed from the Object Info palette.
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 125

Adding a Custom Wall End Cap

To create a custom wall end cap by adding a shape to a component:

1. Create a 2D, closed shape to represent the wall end cap. The object must intersect the end of the wall.
2. Click the Wall End Cap tool from the Building Shell tool set.
3. Click Add from the Tool bar.
4. Click to select a component within the wall. This component style is used to create the wall end cap.
5. Click to select the shape.
6. The shape is added to the component and the wall end, creating the custom wall cap.
1st click

2nd click

Clipping to Create a Custom Wall End Cap

To create a custom end cap by clipping a shape from a component:

1. Create a 2D, closed shape to represent the wall end cap. The object must intersect the end of the wall.
2. Click the Wall End Cap tool from the Building Shell tool set.
3. Click Clip from the Tool bar.
4. Click to select a component within the wall. This component style is used to create the wall end cap.
5. Click to select the shape.
6. The shape is subtracted from the component, creating the custom wall cap.

1st click
2nd click

Joining Wall Components

The Component Join tool joins the selected components between two straight wall segments; components within
pre-existing joined wall segments can also be joined. There are three modes for joining wall components.
L Join

T Join Capped Join

126 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Mode Description
T Join Extends or shortens one wall component segment until it intersects with a second wall
component segment
L Join Joins the closest ends of two wall components to create a corner
Capped Join Applies a capped join to the component being joined

Components can be joined to the edge of walls instead of specific components in Capped Join mode.
Normally, when joining walls with the Wall Join tool and the Auto join walls preference enabled, the components
automatically join correctly. A core component must be set. (See Joining Walls on page 450 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.)
The Component Join tool is useful for adjusting components that did not join as desired when walls were connected,
even in complex wall joins.

T Join Mode
The T Join mode extends or shortens one wall component segment until it intersects with a second wall component
segment. As only the first component is extended, this mode will not create corner type joins. (For those, use the L join
mode. See L Join Mode on page 126 for more information.)

To join wall components with the T Join mode:

1. Click the Component Join tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click T Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the component within the wall segment to join. The component is highlighted.
4. Select the second wall segment to join. The component to be joined is highlighted.

1st click

2nd click

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each component within the wall segment that needs to be joined.

L Join Mode
The L Join mode joins the closest ends of two wall components to create a corner. Both component lengths are
extended or shortened, as necessary, until they meet cleanly.
 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 127

To join wall components with the L Join mode:

1. Click the Component Join tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click L Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the component within the wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join. The component to be joined is highlighted.

1st click

2nd click

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each component within the wall segment that needs to be joined.

Capped Join Mode

Like the T Join mode, the Capped Join mode extends or shortens one wall component until it intersects with a second
component. The component end is capped at the point where it joins the other wall.

To join wall components with the Capped Join mode:

1. Click the Component Join tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click Capped Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the component within the wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join. The component to be joined is highlighted.

1st click

2nd click

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each component within the wall segment that needs to be joined.

Hiding Wall Components

The Hide details preference prevents wall components from being drawn at or below a pre-set layer scale factor,
creating a cleaner drawing when printing at small scales. For example, if the scale factor is set to 1:48, components in
walls do not display on any layer set to 1/4 or smaller.
To hide wall components:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences.
The Document Preferences dialog box opens.
128 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

2. Select Hide details when layer scale <= 1:. Enter a scale factor in the scale field.
3. Click OK.

Wall components shown at 1:2 scale Wall components hidden at 1:48 scale

Fitting Walls to Defined Geometry

In the Vectorworks Architect product, walls can be set to the layer height at creation. After creation, they can be
automatically extended upward or downward to fit to defining geometry such as the site model, roofs, floors, or
NURBS surfaces.
To fit walls to defined geometry:
1. Select the straight or curved wall(s) to be fit.

Roof moved to show walls before being fit to roof

2. Select AEC > Fit Walls to Objects.

 Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark | 129

The Fit Walls to Objects dialog box opens. Specify the location of the wall object and indicate the fit parameters.

Parameter Description
Constrain tops of selected walls to Fits walls to objects at the top of the wall(s)
objects
Fit to objects on Specifies the layer of the defining geometry for the tops of the
wall(s); this geometry can consist of roofs, floors, slabs, 3D
polygons, extrusions, or NURBS surfaces
Wall top embedding depth Specifies the distance that the wall penetrates the object. This can
avoid problems such as gaps; for very thick walls, a negative
embedding depth may be necessary so that the wall does not
protrude from the object.
Constrain bottoms of selected walls Fits walls to object at the bottom of the wall(s)
to objects
Fit to objects on Select the layer of the defining geometry for the bottom of the
wall(s)
Include Site Models on selected Select to conform the bottom of the wall(s) to the shape of the
layer underlying site model
Curved wall fit interval For curved walls, sets the increment for fitting the wall
Wall fitting reference Select the part of the wall to fit to the constraining object (Center,
Left, or Right)

3. Click OK to fit the wall(s) to the constraining object indicated.

Walls or portions of walls which lie outside the constraining object retain their height as set in the Object Info
palette. Walls which have had peaks added (with the Reshape tool) do not have the peaks reset if the peaks lie
outside the constraining object. Walls with a bottom fit to the site model retain a level top rather than a fixed
height; the top of the wall does not vary with the bottom.
130 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

The Fit Walls to Objects command is available for Vectorworks Landmark but is not present in the Landmark
workspace. It can be added to the Vectorworks Landmark workspace (see Using the Workspace Editor on page 869
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Creating Wall Features

Once a round or straight wall has been created, features such as projections and recesses can be added to it. Create wall
features from 2D or 3D objects, as well as symbols. By default, 2D objects are extruded to span the height of the wall;
offsets from the top and bottom of the wall can be specified as needed. Use 3D objects, such as sweeps or other solids,
to create more complicated features. Use symbols to be able to update multiple instances of a feature with a single edit.
It it not recommended to create wall features that are applied to the entire length of the wall, such as battered
walls, or wall caps.
Unlike a symbol, a wall feature is actually part of the wall geometry. A wall feature interacts with the wall components,
it renders along with the rest of the wall, and if it was created from a 2D object, it automatically adjusts when the wall
height changes.

Creating Wall Projections

To create wall projections:
1. Create the closed 2D or 3D solid object with which to modify the wall. The geometry of the object must define an
area or volume that has no self-contacts, no self-intersections, and no edges that fold back on themselves.
2. For a 2D object, simply make sure that the object overlaps the wall, and that the view is Top/Plan. For a 3D object,
first create the object at the appropriate height in relation to the bottom of the wall (Z axis); then set the
appropriate X and Y axis location so that the object overlaps the wall.
 Creating Wall Features | 131

3. With both the wall and the modifier object selected, choose the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Wall Projection
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Create Wall
Projection
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Create Wall
Projection

Alternatively, for 2D objects only, select Modify > Add Surface.

The Create Wall Feature Projection dialog box opens; different fields display depending on whether a 2D or 3D
modifier object was selected.

Options when a 2D object is used Options when a 3D object is used

Parameter Description
Feature Component From the list of components currently in the wall, select a component to be
applied to the area of the feature object. Otherwise, select <Object> to use the
objects own fill, or select <None> if the feature is intended to be a hole in the
wall (for example, to create an opening for an object that is not part of the wall).
Left Side Wrap (2D Select the first component to wrap around the feature on the left side of the wall;
objects only) this can be <None>, or any component to the left of the Feature Component
(higher in the list). All components to the outside of the Left Side Wrap
component also wrap.
Right Side Wrap Select the first component to wrap around the feature on the right side of the wall;
(2D objects only) this can be <None>, or any component to the right of the Feature Component
(lower in the list). All components to the outside of the Right Side Wrap
component also wrap.
Offset From Wall Specifies the distance from the top of the wall where the wall feature ends in 3D
Top (2D objects views
only)
Cut Plane (3D Specifies the distance from the bottom of the wall at which a section slice is taken
objects only) of the 3D object and is used to represent the wall feature in Top/Plan view.
If the 3D object does not run the whole height of the wall, be sure that this
value actually intersects the 3D object; otherwise the object will not appear
in Top/Plan view.
132 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Parameter Description
Use Profile as Core Select this option to use the area of the original 2D object as the core of the wall
(2D objects only) feature; other wall components will wrap around the core, which may make the
projection larger than the original object. Deselect this option to limit the area of
the projection to the area of the original 2D object.
Use Object 3D Select this option to display the surfaces created by the feature object with its own
Attributes (3D attributes when it is rendered in 3D; when deselected, the walls attributes are
objects only) used on those surfaces
Show Extents In addition to the 3D section specified by the Cut Plane value, shows the outline
Below/Above Cut of the part of the 3D object below and above the cut plane; the pen attributes of
Plane (3D objects this representation can be edited (see Wall Feature Properties on page 134)
only)
Preview Changes the view of the wall feature to match the current parameter settings,
without saving the settings

4. Select the options for the wall feature, and click OK.

Creating a wall projection feature from a 2D polygon

Creating Wall Recesses

To create a wall recess:
1. Create the closed 2D or 3D solid object with which to modify the wall. The geometry of the object must define an
area or volume that has no self-contacts, no self-intersections, and no edges that fold back on themselves.
2. For a 2D object, simply make sure that the object overlaps the wall in Top/Plan view. For a 3D object, first create
the object at the appropriate height in relation to the bottom of the wall (Z axis); then set the appropriate X and Y
axis location so that the object overlaps the wall.
3. With both the appropriate wall and the modifier object selected, choose the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Wall Recess
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Create Wall Recess
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Create Wall Recess

Alternatively, for 2D objects only, select Modify > Clip Surface.

 Creating Wall Features | 133

The Create Wall Feature Recess dialog box opens; different fields display depending on whether a 2D or 3D
modifier object was selected.

Options when a 2D object is used Options when a 3D object is used

Parameter Description
Left Side Wrap (2D Select the first component to wrap around the feature on the left side of the wall;
objects only) this can be <None>, or any component to the left of the Feature Component
(higher in the list). All components to the outside of the Left Side Wrap
component also wrap.
Right Side Wrap Select the first component to wrap around the feature on the right side of the wall;
(2D objects only) this can be <None>, or any component to the right of the Feature Component
(lower in the list). All components to the outside of the Right Side Wrap
component also wrap.
Offset From Wall Specifies the distance from the top of the wall where the wall feature ends in 3D
Top (2D objects views
only)
Cut Plane (3D Specifies the distance from the bottom of the wall at which a section slice is taken
objects only) of the 3D object and is used to represent the wall feature in Top/Plan view.
If the 3D object does not run the whole height of the wall, be sure that this
value actually intersects the 3D object; otherwise the object will not appear
in Top/Plan view.
Preview Changes the view of the wall feature to match the current parameter settings,
without saving the settings

4. Select the options for the wall feature, and click OK.

Creating a wall recess feature from a 3D sweep

134 | Chapter 3: Creating Design Series Slabs and Walls

Wall Feature Properties

After a wall feature has been created, it can be edited in the Object Info palette. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the feature and select Properties from the context menu.
In addition to the parameters available when the feature is created, the following options are available.

Parameter Description
Flip Flips the wall feature to the other side of the wall
Set Position Activates the Move by Points tool in Reference Point mode, to move the wall
feature a specified distance along the length of the wall (see Moving Objects
with the Reference Point Mode on page 257 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide)
Edit Extents If Show Extents Below Cut Plane or Show Extents Above Cut Plane is
Attributes (3D selected, opens the Extents Attributes dialog box to allow editing of the 3D object
object projections outlines shown for the areas below and above the cut plane
only)

Editing Wall Features

Similar to symbols, the original 2D or 3D object (or symbol) can be edited after the wall feature is created. For
example, the location or shape of the object can be changed.
To access the editing mode, double-click the wall feature. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on the feature and select Edit from the context menu. To delete the wall feature, delete the original object
from which the wall feature was created. Click Exit Wall Feature to exit the editing mode.
Also similar to symbols, wall features can be moved and duplicated in various ways in both straight and round walls.
See the following topics in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide:
Moving Symbols in Walls with the Selection Tool on page 490 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Nudging Symbols in Walls on page 490 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move Command on page 490 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide
Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move by Points Tool on page 491 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide
Duplicate Array on page 263 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Creating the Building Shell 4
Use the tools in the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark product to create the structural, roof, and framing elements.
Some of the tools and commands in the Vectorworks Design Series products are similar to those available in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals product, but with extended capabilities required for design. Certain commands that display
in the Model > AEC menu in the Fundamentals workspace are also located in the AEC menu in the Architect
workspace, or the Architectural menu in the Landmark and Spotlight workspaces, but they may have enhanced
functionality in the Vectorworks Design Series product.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, or Spotlight

Model > AEC > Pillar AEC > Pillar (or Landmark > Architectural > Pillar, or
Spotlight > Architectural > Pillar)
Model > AEC > Floor AEC > Floor (or Landmark > Architectural > Floor, or Spotlight
> Architectural > Floor)
Model > AEC > Roof Face AEC > Roof Face (or Landmark > Architectural > Roof Face, or
Spotlight > Architectural > Roof Face)
Model > AEC > Create Roof AEC > Create Roof (or Landmark > Architectural > Create
Roof, or Spotlight > Architectural > Create Roof)

Creating Structural Shapes in Vectorworks Design Series

A variety of commonly used structural steel shapes are available as 2D objects in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
product, including: angle, channel, I-beam, rectangular tubing, round tubing, square tubing, tee, and wide flange. 3D
equivalents of these objects are available in the Vectorworks Design Series products. Since the 2D and 3D parameters
are nearly identical, all parameters are documented with the 2D objects for convenience. To insert one of the 3D
equivalent objects, click the appropriate 3D tool in the Detailing tool set and refer to Structural Shapes and Details on
page 473 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The Vectorworks Design Series products contain two additional 2D/3D structural shapes: bulb flat and Z-section, as
well as four additional series: Australian Standard (ANZ), British Standard (BSI), German/Austrian Standard (DIN),
and Japanese Standard (JIS). The availability of these series may vary from shape to shape.
The Update Plug-in Objects command may need to be run on files containing structural shapes that were created
in an earlier version of the Vectorworks program. This command converts the structural shapes to the latest
format; see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 49 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
136 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Bulb Flat
Bulb Height
Fillet
Radius Bulb Radius

Bulb Angle

Bulb Bulb
Radius Width

Width

Fillet
Radius Thickness
Insertion Point

To create a bulb flat object:

1. Click the Bulb Flat tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the bulb flat properties and click OK.

Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the bulb flat size
Length (3D Enter the length of the 3D bulb flat
only)
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D bulb flat
Centroid (2D
only)
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom bulb flat size
Width Displays the bulb flat width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value
Thickness Displays the bulb flat thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Bulb Height Displays the bulb height, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value
 Creating Structural Shapes in Vectorworks Design Series | 137

Parameter Description
Bulb Width Displays the bulb width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value
Bulb Radius Displays the bulb radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Bulb Angle Displays the bulb angle in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
(Deg.) custom value
Section Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
Properties imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units
selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the bulb flat area
About Axis X-X/
Y-Y
Moment of Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
Inertia centroidal axes
Section Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
Modulus centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
Gyration centroidal axes

Z-Section
Flange Width (Top)

Toe Radius
(Top)
Fillet
Depth Radius Web Thickness

Toe Radius (Bottom)

Flange Thickness
Flange Width
Insertion Point (Bottom)

To create a Z-section object:

1. Click the Z-Section tool from the Detailing tool set.

2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the Z-section properties and click OK.
138 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the Z-section size
Length (3D only) Enter the length of the 3D Z-section
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D Z-section
Centroid (2D
only)
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom Z-section size
Depth Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of
a custom value
Flange Width Displays the top and bottom flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
(Top) / entry of a custom value
(Bottom)
Web Displays the web thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
Thickness value
Flange Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
Thickness custom value
Toe Radius Displays the top and bottom toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
(Top) / entry of a custom value
(Bottom)
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Section Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units
Properties for imperial shapes and millimeter for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected
and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the Z-section area
About Axis X-X/
Y-Y
Moment of Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
Inertia centroidal axes
Section Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
Modulus centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
Gyration centroidal axes
 Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect | 139

Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect

Top Plate

TP Thickness
Capital Height

Struct Height
Arch Height Pilaster
Base Height

Struct Offset Z

BP Thickness

Column

Bottom Plate

Pilaster Column

Columns and pilasters can be architectural in nature (for aesthetic and space-defining purposes), structural in nature
(for holding up the building and connecting to other structural elements), or both. Use the Column tool or Pilaster tool
to draw an object that not only reflects the architectural appearance of a column/pilaster, but also defines it in structural
terms that can be used in an engineering analysis of the building. Structural and architectural elements can be displayed
or hidden, as desired.
A pilaster can be placed in a wall (however, a column cannot be placed in a wall). A pilaster inserted in a wall can set
its architectural height relative to the wall.
The Vectorworks Fundamentals product and all Vectorworks Design Series products include a basic column object
containing parameters similar to those described here (see Creating Columns on page 496 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). The pilaster is provided only in the Vectorworks Architect product. In the Architect
product, the column and pilaster objects contain the added ability to have a structural component that can be wood,
concrete, or any manufactured steel column shape; the column ID can also, optionally, be placed on the drawing.
Additionally, in the Architect product, the column/pilaster can be exported to IFC format for exchange with structural
analysis programs; see Exporting Columns and Pilasters to IFC Format on page 146.

To create a column in the Vectorworks Architect product:

To create a pilaster in the Vectorworks Architect product:

1. Click the Column tool or Pilaster tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click to place the column/pilaster in the drawing, and click again to set the columns/pilasters rotation. If this is
the first time the object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to
subsequently created columns/pilasters; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the column/pilaster properties. The parameters of the architectural and structural elements of the column/
pilaster can be set separately.
140 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

To create a circular or square architectural or structural component, enter the same value for the components
width and depth.

Parameter Description
Use Center Marks Select this option to size the cross at the column/pilaster insertion point
and enter the Center Mark Size
Use Component Select whether to use only architectural components, only structural
components, or a combination of architectural and structural components
for the column/pilaster. Depending on the selection, different options are
available.
When both Architectural and Structural components are selected, the
height of the architectural and structural components can be set
individually.
Use Wall Height For architectural only or architectural and structural components, select to
(Pilaster only, inserted in draw the architectural pilaster height equal to the wall height. This option
wall) is only available when a pilaster has been inserted into a wall.

Height Directly sets the desired height of the column/pilasters architectural or

(Architectural Only or structural component, including base and capital (if any). When the height
Structural Only) is determined manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the
column/pilaster is automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset
value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the column/pilaster is bound by the layer wall height
value or by a story level, the column/pilaster height updates automatically.
Arch Height When architectural components are included with structural, directly sets
(Architectural and the desired height of the column/pilasters architectural component,
Structural) including base and capital (if any). When the height is determined
manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the column/pilaster
is automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is
modified accordingly.
When the top of the column/pilaster is bound by the layer wall height
value or by a story level, the column/pilaster height updates automatically.
Struct Height When structural components are included with architectural, directly sets
(Architectural and the desired height of the column/pilasters structural component, including
Structural) top plate and base plate (if any). When the height is determined manually
by this method, the Top Bound property of the column/pilaster is
automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is modified
accordingly.
When the top of the column/pilaster is bound by the layer wall height
value or by a story level, the column/pilaster height updates automatically.
 Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect | 141

Parameter Description
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the object.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting
Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide)
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product.
The top of the object can be bound by one of the level types defined for the
story or the story above it. By setting the top of the object to the level type,
if the elevation of the associated story changes, the height of the object
changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the object from its specified top bound height
Bot Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the object; Layer
Elevation is the only option available unless the Vectorworks Architect
product is installed.
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product.
The bottom of the object can be bound by one of the level types defined for
the story or the story below it. By setting the bottom of the object to the
level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes, the height of the
object changes automatically to match.
Bot Offset For the bottom of the object, sets the offset from its specified bottom
bound height
Arch. Comp. Class For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components,
displays the class for the architectural components of the column/pilaster
(selected in the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box)
142 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Arch Offset X / Arch For Architectural and Structural components, specify the distance to offset
Offset Y the architectural component of the column from the insertion point, in the
(Column only) X and Y directions
The 2D columns insertion point always coincides with the center
marks (if any) and the center of the structural component (if any), and
the architectural component is offset from the insertion point as
specified by these properties
Base Width Base Corner Radius

Shaft Width

Arch Offset Y
Struct Depth

Shaft Depth

Base Depth
Struct Clearance

Insertion
Point Arch Offset X

Struct Width

Struct Clearance

Struct Offset X / For Architectural and Structural components, specify the distance to offset
Struct Offset Y the structural component of the pilaster from the insertion point, in the X
(Pilaster only) and Y directions
The 2D pilasters insertion point always coincides with the face of the
wall, centered on the architectural component; the structural
component and center marks (if any) are offset from the insertion
point, as specified by these properties
Struct Clearance

Insertion Point
Shaft Depth

Base Depth
Struct Offset Y

Struct Offset X

Shaft Width

Base Width
 Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect | 143

Parameter Description
Struct Offset Z For Architectural and Structural components, specify the distance to offset
the structural component of the column/pilaster from the architectural
component, in the Z direction
Shaft Type For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
to draw the column/pilaster with an oval or rectangular shaft type
Shaft Width For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter
the shaft width
Shaft Depth For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter
the shaft depth
Shaft Corner Radius For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter
the corner radius for a rectangular shaft type
Shaft Taper For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
whether to draw the column/pilaster with a classic or straight taper, or no
taper
Taper Width For a straight or classic taper, enter the taper width
Taper Depth For a straight or classic taper, enter the taper depth
Shaft Finish For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components,
displays the class to use for rendering the 3D shaft (selected in the Get
Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Use Capital For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
whether to add a capital to the architectural component
Capital Type Select to draw the column/pilaster with an oval, oval mushroom,
rectangular, or rectangular mushroom capital
Capital Width Enter the capital width
Capital Depth Enter the capital depth
Capital Height Enter the capital height
Capital Corner Radius For rectangular capital type, enter the corner radius of the capital
Capital Finish For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components,
displays the class to use for rendering the 3D capital (selected in the Get
Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Use Base For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
whether to add a base to the architectural component
Base Type Select an oval or rectangular base type
Base Width Enter the base width
Base Depth Enter the base depth
Base Height Enter the base height
Base Corner Radius For rectangular base type, enter the base corner radius
Base Divisions Enter the number of divisions for the base
Divider Depth / Height For more than one base division, enter the depth and height for each
divider
144 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Base Finish For Architectural Only or Architectural and Structural components,
displays the class to use for rendering the base (selected in the Get
Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Column ID For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter the
Column ID (for reporting purposes, and optionally to be displayed in the
drawing)
Display Column ID Select this option to display the column ID on the drawing; the ID text is
placed at the insertion point of the column/pilaster, at the center of a
control point. Click and drag the control point to move the ID to the
desired location on the drawing. The ID text attributes can be modified
using the Text menu commands.
Column ID Class Displays the class to use for the column ID text (selected in the Get
Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Get Finishes/Classes Click to open the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box to select the class to use
for attributes of the 3D shaft, capital, and base of the column and to select
the class for the column ID text (if applicable) and the architectural and/or
structural components of the column/pilaster (as applicable, based on the
component type specified); in addition to classes present in the drawing,
architectural component classes include the Wall-Interior and
Structural-Columns class standards and structural component classes
include the Structural-Columns class standard. Alternatively, create a new
class by selecting New, or select the class named <Object Class> which
places the item in the same class as the column or pilaster object.

Struct Type For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
whether the structural component is made of concrete, wood, or steel
Struct Shape For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, specify
whether the concrete or wood structural shape is oval or rectangular
Struct Width For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter the
width of the concrete or wood structural component
Struct Depth For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter the
depth of the concrete or wood structural component
 Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect | 145

Parameter Description
Struct Corner Radius For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter the
structural corner radius for a rectangular structural shape
Select Structural Shape For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, click to
open the Select Structural Shape dialog box to select the structural shape to
use for steel structural types. Select the structural shape from the default
content or the current files content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Select the shapes series and
size, and click OK.

Struct Shape / Struct For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, displays
Series / Struct Size the selected steel structural shape symbol name, series, and size
Struct Height For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, specify
the overall height of the structural column/pilaster, including base plate
and top plate (if any)
Struct Rotation For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, enter the
number of degrees to rotate the structural component
Struct Clearance For Architectural and Structural components, specifies the clearance
around the structural component that will be subtracted from the
architectural component
Struct. Comp. Class For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, displays
the class for the structural component of the column/pilaster (selected in
the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Use Top Plate For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
whether to add a plate to the top of the structural component
TP Shape Select to draw either an oval or rectangular top plate
TP Width Enter the width of the top plate
TP Depth Enter the depth of the top plate
TP Thickness Enter the thickness of the top plate
TP Corner Radius For a rectangular top plate, enter the corner radius
Use Base Plate For Structural Only or Architectural and Structural components, select
whether to add a plate to the bottom of the structural component
BP Shape Select to draw either an oval or rectangular base plate
BP Width Enter the width of the base plate
146 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
BP Depth Enter the depth of the base plate
BP Thickness Enter the thickness of the base plate
BP Corner Radius For a rectangular base plate, enter the corner radius

4. Click OK.
A column/pilaster with the specified parameters is placed on the drawing. The object parameters can be modified
in the Object Info palette.

Exporting Columns and Pilasters to IFC Format

In the Vectorworks Architect product, columns and pilasters can be exported to IFC format for exchange with structural
analysis programs. If the column/pilaster has both architectural and structural components enabled, the object is
exported as an IfcColumn and the architectural component is exported as an IfcCovering with an IfcCoveringType of
Cladding. If the column/pilaster has only an architectural or structural component enabled, the object is exported as an
IfcColumn. For more information on exporting to IFC format, see IFC Format Interoperability on page 779.

Adding Roof Accessories

Attic, soffit, and fascia roof accessories can be inserted when a roof object is being created, or they can be added,
modified, or deleted later on. If the roof is reshaped, the accessories are automatically regenerated to suit the new
shape.
The accessories are part of the roof object. To modify or remove them later on, select the roof object, and change the
accessory settings from the Object Info palette.
Roof accessories cannot be added to roof face objects. See Creating Roof Objects on page 458 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
To add roof accessories:
1. With the appropriate walls selected, select AEC > Create Roof.
The Create Roof dialog box opens.
 Adding Roof Accessories | 147

2. Click Create Accessories.

The Create Roof Accessories dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Insert Attic Select to add an attic to the roof
Attic Settings Opens the Edit Attic Settings dialog box for specification of attic parameters; see
Inserting an Attic on page 148
Insert Soffit Select to add a soffit to the roof
Soffit Settings Opens the Edit Soffit Settings dialog box for specification of soffit parameters; see
Inserting a Soffit on page 148
Insert Fascia Select to add fascia to the roof
Fascia Settings Opens the Edit Fascia Settings dialog box for specification of fascia parameters; see
Inserting Fascia on page 149

3. Select the accessories to be added to the roof object.

4. For each selected accessory, click the corresponding settings button.
A dialog box displays with parameters for that accessory.
148 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

5. Enter accessory parameters as described in the following sections and click OK to return to the Create Roof
Accessories dialog box.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired accessory parameters have been entered.
7. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, click OK to return to the Create Roof dialog box; click OK again to
create the roof object with the selected accessories.

Roof with no accessories Roof with soffit and fascia added

Inserting an Attic
To add an attic accessory to a roof:
1. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, select Insert Attic, and click Attic Settings.
The Edit Attic Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Full Height Specifies that the attic space is the full height of the attic area
Partial Height Specifies that the attic space is the height entered in the box provided

2. Enter the attic parameters and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box.

Inserting a Soffit
The soffit accessory has a pork chop profile.
 Adding Roof Accessories | 149

To add a soffit accessory to a roof:

1. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, select Insert Soffit, and click Soffit Settings.
The Edit Soffit Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Recess Specifies the distance between the bottom edges of the roof rafters and the soffit
Trim Depth Specifies the distance between the outer edges of the rafters and inside edge of the
soffit

2. Enter the soffit parameters and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box.

Inserting Fascia
The fascia accessory has a rectangular profile.
To add a fascia accessory to a roof:
1. From the Create Roof Accessories dialog box, select Insert Fascia, and click Fascia Settings.
The Edit Fascia Settings dialog box opens.
150 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Fascia Width Specify a width for the fascia accessory
Fascia Height Specify a height for the fascia accessory

2. Enter the fascia parameters and click OK to return to the Create Roof Accessories dialog box.

Framing
The Vectorworks Architect software includes a suite of tools for developing framing plans. There are tools for framing
roofs, walls, and floors. Both architects and builders can take advantage of these tools to visualize framing details while
still in the design stage of a project, to generate framing detail drawings, and to develop material take-off lists. The
Simple Beam Calculator command is also available for analysis of a simply-supported beam with a single load.
A roof face area worksheet can also be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource
Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the default architectural reports file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries
folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the Roof Face Area worksheet to the drawing. The worksheet is populated with
information from the objects in the current drawing.

Framing a Roof
A roof object can be automatically framed with rafters, collars (collar beams), ridges, and other roof elements with the
Roof Framer command. The command creates framing member objects; see Creating Framing Members on
page 160 for information on object parameters.
This command does not work on roof face objects.
To automatically frame a roof:
1. Select the roof object.
2. Select AEC > Framing > Roof Framer.
The Roof Framer dialog box opens.
 Framing | 151

3. Select the tab for the type of roof framing element to create, and select the check box to create the framing
element. More than one type can be selected at the same time; other framing elements can be added later.
An individual framing element can be added with the Framing Member tool, available from the Detailing tool
set; see Creating Framing Members on page 160.
4. Enter the framing parameters for each desired framing element as described in the following sections.
5. For each selected roof framing element, click Object Attributes to specify its appearance.
The Attributes dialog box opens. See Applying Object Attributes on page 501 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide for information on applying graphic attributes, and Applying and Mapping Textures on page 616
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on texture parameters.
152 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Graphic Attributes Each graphic attribute can be set by the class style or to specific settings. If
set by the class style, the attributes are controlled by the class selected in the
Roof Framer dialog box for the framing element.
Fill Select Class Style to use the class style for the fill attribute, choose None to
apply no fill, or choose a fill style
Pen Select Class Style to use the class style for the pen attribute, choose None to
apply no pen, or choose a solid/dash or pattern style; see Pen Attributes on
page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Line Thickness Select Class Thickness to use the class style for the line thickness attribute,
choose Set Thickness to specify the line thickness, or select a line thickness
(see Line Thickness Attributes on page 509 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide)
Texture (Renderworks Select Class to use the class texture for the framing element (see Applying
required) Object Textures by Class on page 632 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide), choose None to apply no texture, or choose Select to set the
texture parameters
Texture Select the texture to apply from either the default content or the current files
content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide
Map Type Select the texture map type
Radius For sphere and cylinder maps, sets the texture radius; the default radius is the
same as the 3D object radius. Increasing this value reduces the size of the
texture on the object.
Start/End Cap Applies the texture to the start and end caps of the framing element
 Framing | 153

Parameter Description
Repeat Repeats the texture in a horizontal and/or vertical direction
Horizontally/
Vertically
Scale Factor Enter a scale value to determine the texture size when projected onto the
object
Horizontal/Vertical Sets the start location of the texture horizontally and vertically
Offset
Rotation Sets the angle of texture rotation; enter a rotation value from 0 to 360 degrees

6. Click OK to return to the Roof Framer dialog box.

7. Click OK to frame the roof.

Creating Rafters
To create rafters:
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Rafters tab, and select Create Rafters.
2. Specify the rafter parameters.

Parameter Description
Rafter Size Specifies the rafter size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be
edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 159)
Dormer Rafter Size If the roof contains dormer windows, enter the size, in Width x Height, of the
dormer rafters
Minimum Spacing Specifies the minimum distance allowed between rafters
Maximum Spacing Specifies the maximum distance allowed between rafters; for consistent rafter
spacing of the entire roof, the Minimum and Maximum Spacing values
should be equal
Set top of Rafters to
Top of Roof Matches the tops of the rafters to the top of the roof object
object
Bottom of Roof Treats the roof object as a roof deck and matches the tops of the rafters to the
object bottom of the roof
Match Rafters across Select to ensure that opposing rafters meet on the roof ridges, hips, and valleys
Ridges/Hips/Valleys
154 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the rafter attributes

3. Click OK to create the rafters.

Rafter Size

Minimum Spacing
Maximum Spacing

Creating Collars
To create collars (collar beams):
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Collars tab, and select Create Collars.
2. Specify the collar parameters.

Parameter Description
Style Select the collar style
Joist (tie beam that rests on the bearing wall)
Flush Collar (tie collar that is flush to the rafters, usually attached to the rafters
with metal plates)
Collar Tie (tie collar that scabs onto the rafters and is attached with nails, bolts,
and so on)
Size Specifies the collar size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be edited
by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on page 159)
Spacing Select the collar spacing (Every Rafter, Every Other Rafter, and Every Third Rafter)
Elevation AFF Specifies the elevation above finished floor of the bottom of the collars
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the collar attributes
 Framing | 155

3. Click OK to create the collars.

Size

Elevation AFF

Creating Plates
To create plates:
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Plates tab, and select Create Plates.
2. Specify the plate parameters.

Parameter Description
Size Specifies the plate size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be
edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on
page 159)
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the plate attributes

3. Click OK to create the plates.

Size

Creating Purlins
To create purlins:
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Purlins tab, and select Create Purlins.
2. Specify the purlin parameters.
156 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Purlin Size Specifies the purlin size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes can be
edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes on
page 159)
Elevation of First Specifies the elevation above finished floor of the bottom of the lowest purlin
Purlin
Elevation of Last Sets the elevation from the top of the roof to the last purlin
Purlin
Create Purlins by:
Number of Purlins Indicates the number of purlins to create; the purlins are evenly spaced
between the first and last purlins
Distance Between Specifies the distance between purlins; the number of purlins created is based
Purlins on this value
Purlin Position
Top of Rafter Matches the tops of the purlins to the top of the roof object, as for roof tile
supports
Bottom of Rafter Matches the tops of the purlins to the bottom of the roof, as when the purlins
support the rafters
Purlins Start at the Sets the elevation of the first purlin to start from the lower end of the rafter
Lower End of the
Rafter
Rotate Purlins to Rotates the purlins so that they match the slope of the roof
Roof Slope
Bearing inset Specifies the depth at which the purlin is notched into the rafters; if purlins are
rotated this field appears dimmed since the inset only applies to horizontal
purlins
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the purlin attributes

3. Click OK to create the purlins.

Elevation of last purlin

Distance between purlins

Elevation of first purlin

Size
 Framing | 157

Creating Ridges
To create ridges:
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Ridges tab, and select Create Ridges.
2. Specify the ridge parameters.

Parameter Description
Ridge Size Specifies the ridge size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes
can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element
Sizes on page 159)
Ridge Elevation Specifies the ridge elevation options
Flush to Top of Rafters Indicates that the top of the ridge should be the same as the top of the
rafters
Notched into rafters, Specify the depth that the ridge is notched into the rafters
depth
Flush to Bottom of Indicates that the bottom of the ridge should be the same height as the
Rafters bottom of the plumb cut on the rafters
Specify AFF Indicates the height of the bottom of the ridge, above the finished floor
Flush to Top of Hips Sets the top of the ridge to be the same as the top of the hips
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and
visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively,
create a new class by selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the ridge attributes

3. Click OK to create the ridges.

Size

Creating Trimmers
To create trimmers:
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Trimmers tab, and select Create Trimmers.
2. Specify the trimmer parameters.
158 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Trimmer Size Specifies the trimmer size in Width x Height, in current file units. Sizes
can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom Frame Element Sizes
on page 159)
Set top of Trimmers to
Top of Roof object Matches the tops of the trimmers to the top of the roof object
Bottom of Roof Treats the roof object as a roof deck and matches the tops of the trimmers
object to the bottom of the roof
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and visibility.
The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new
class by selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the trimmer attributes

3. Click OK to create the trimmers.

Size

Creating Hip and Valley Rafters

To create hip and valley rafters:
1. In the Roof Framer dialog box, click the Hips/Valleys tab, and select Create Hips and Valleys.
2. Specify the hip and valley rafter parameters.

Parameter Description
Hip/Valley Size Specifies the size of the hip and valley rafters in Width x Height, in
current file units. Sizes can be edited by selecting Edit List (see Custom
Frame Element Sizes on page 159)
Set top of Hips and Valleys
to
Top of Roof object Matches the tops of the hips and valleys to the top of the roof object
Bottom of Roof object Treats the roof object as a roof deck and matches the tops of the hips and
valleys to the bottom of the roof
 Framing | 159

Parameter Description
Class Select a class for the roof element to control its appearance and visibility.
The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new
class by selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Classes Edits class attributes; see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Object Attributes Specifies the hip and valley rafter attributes

3. Click OK to create the hip and valley rafters.

Size

Custom Frame Element Sizes

The size of the framing elements can be selected from a pre-set list, or the list can be edited to contain desired or
custom sizes.
To edit the size list of the frame elements:
1. From the Size field in one of the framing element tabs of the Roof Framer dialog box, select Edit List.
The Edit Size List dialog box opens, listing the currently available sizes of the roof element.

Parameter Description
Add Adds a size to the list; specify the width and height of the new size
Remove Deletes the currently selected size
Edit Edits the currently selected size; enter the new width and height parameters
Move Up/Move Down Changes the order of the sizes by moving the selected size up or down in the
list

2. Click OK to edit the size list.

160 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

The text files which populate the size lists in the framing element dialog boxes can also be edited. The text files
are located in [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data.

Creating Framing Members

The Framing Member tool draws framing elements for rafters, beams, joists, and framing members with a horizontal
projection.
For a file created in a version of Vectorworks software prior to 2009, board, joist, rafter, and original framing member
objects are considered to be legacy objects. To convert them to the current functionality of the framing member tool,
select Tools > Utilities > Update Plug-in Objects; see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 49 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

To create a framing member:

1. Select the Framing Member tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to begin drawing the linear framing member object. Click to set the length of the object.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
3. The framing member object is drawn. The framing member properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Rotation Specifies the angle of the framing member object
Span Specifies the length of the framing member in the floor plan
Width Indicates the framing member profile width
Height Sets the framing member profile height
Type Select the form of framing element: rafter, solid beam, wood floor truss,
open-web steel joint, cold-formed steel channel, steel section, or custom
profile
Structural Use Provides a label describing how the framing member is used.
To specify your own structural use name, click Other. The Enter Special
Structural Use dialog box opens; enter text for the structural use of this
framing member and click OK.

Volume Displays the calculated volume of the framing member

Volume Units Select the units for calculating the framing member volume: board feet, cubic
feet, cubic meters, or the default volume units set for the file (see Units on
page 75 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Quantity Label Describes the framing member materials, for use in quantity worksheets
Pitch Specifies the slope of the framing member along its span
 Framing | 161

Parameter Description
Beginning/Ending Specifies the miter angle at each end of the framing member. This is the angle
miter that the framing member is cut, in plan.
Beginning/Ending Specifies the bevel angle at each end of the framing member. This is the angle
bevel that the framing member is cut, in elevation.
2D Display Select the 2D display method for the framing member: solid, centerline,
width, or width with centerline
Show Label Displays the text entered in Label Text as a label next to the 2D
representation of the framing member. After placement, adjust the text
position with the control point.

Label control point

Label Text Enter the text to display in 2D as a label

Vertical Reference If you change the vertical reference from top, center, or bottom, the Change
Vertical Reference dialog box opens; if the object position is maintained, the
framing member remains stationary and the placement line is adjusted. If the
defining line is maintained, the framing member object moves accordingly.

Rafter
Bearing inset Specifies the offset distance of the framing members bearing point (insertion
point) from its end
Overhang Specifies the additional length that the framing member extends past its end
Eave Style Select vertical, horizontal, double, or square eave profile
Fascia Height For double eave styles, specifies the height of the end of the framing member
profile
Upper Notch Offset/ Indicates the size of an optional notch located at the top of the framing
Depth member
Solid Beam
Draw 2D Hangers Displays 2D graphics indicating framing hangers at start, end, both, or none
Roll Angle Specifies the angle the framing member rotates about its cross-section axes
Wood Floor Truss
Draw 2D Hangers Displays 2D graphics indicating framing hangers at start, end, both, or none
162 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Flange Height Sets the height of the truss top and bottom chords; the chord width is set by
the object width
Web Width/Height Specifies the size of the truss web components; if Use Solid Web is selected,
the Web Width parameter specifies the thickness of the solid web
Panel Spacing Indicates the spacing of the truss panels (subdivisions)
Draw Verticals Displays vertical web components between each sloping web component
Use Solid Web Toggles the web component configuration between open-web and solid,
I-beam style
Open-Web Steel Joist
Flange Height Sets the height of the truss top and bottom chords; the chord width is set by
the object width
Web Width/Height Specifies the size of the truss web components
Gauge Sets the thickness of the top and bottom chords
Panel Spacing Indicates the spacing of the truss panels (subdivisions)
Draw Verticals Displays vertical web components between each sloping web component
Bottom Bearing Toggles the configuration of the truss between top chord and bottom chord
bearing
Cold-formed Steel
Channel
Draw 2D Hangers Displays 2D graphics indicating framing hangers at start, end, both, or none
Flange Height Specifies the length of the top and bottom flange extensions
Gauge Sets the thickness of the framing member
Roll Angle Specifies the angle the framing member rotates about its cross-section axes
Steel Section
Roll Angle Specifies the angle the framing member rotates about its cross-section axes
Select Structural Click to open the Select Structural Shape dialog box to select the structural
Shape shape to use for steel sections. Select the structural shape from the default
content or the current files content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Select the shapes series and size,
and click OK.

Structural Shape data Displays the selected structural shape symbol name, series, and size
Custom Profile
 Framing | 163

Parameter Description
Profile Symbol Def Displays the selected profile symbol name
Choose Profile For custom structural profiles, click Choose Profile Symbol to select a
Symbol structural profile symbol from the default content or the current files content
(see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide). Select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK.

The profile name displays in the Object Info palette.

Roll Angle Specifies the angle the framing member rotates about its cross-section axes

Framing a Floor
Use the Create Joists from Poly command to create the joist and perimeter objects necessary to frame a floor. If the
floor is a slab object, select the slab component to serve as a boundary for the joist area. The command creates framing
member objects; see Creating Framing Members on page 160 for information.
To frame a floor:
1. Select a slab, polygon, polyline, or floor object.
If a stairwell hole exists in the floor, solid beam framing member objects are used for the headers.
2. Select AEC > Framing > Create Joists from Poly.
The Create Joist from Poly dialog box opens.
164 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Use Slab Component If a slab is selected, its components display in the list. Select a
component to serve as the boundary for the joist area; the joists are
created at the same elevation as the selected slab component.
Draw Joists Creates joist objects for floor framing
Elevation of Top of Joist Sets the elevation relative to the layer elevation value for the top of the
joist
Center-to-Center Spacing Specifies the spacing from the center of one joist to the center of the
next joist
Class Select a class for the joists to control their appearance and visibility.
The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new
class by selecting New, or select the currently active class.
Set Joist Properties Opens the Set Joist Properties dialog box; proceed with step 3
Set Joist Attributes Opens the Set Joist Attributes dialog box; proceed with step 5
Draw Perimeter Framing Draws framing members around the perimeter of the floor
Members
Elevation of Top of Framing Sets the elevation relative to the layer elevation value for the top of the
perimeter framing
Class Select a class for the framing members to control their appearance and
visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively,
create a new class by selecting New, or select the currently active class.
 Framing | 165

Parameter Description
Set Framing Member Opens the Set Framing Member Properties dialog box; proceed with
Properties step 3
Set Framing Member Opens the Set Framing Member Attributes dialog box; proceed with
Attributes step 5
End Condition of Joists at Select the type of condition for the ends of the joists where they
Perimeter connect to the perimeter framing: Inside Face, Centerline, or Outside
Face
Corner Condition of Perimeter Select the type of condition for the corners of the perimeter framing:
lapped or mitered joints
Delete Source Geometry Deletes the original source object after the framing is created

3. Select whether to draw joists and/or perimeter framing members for the floor framing. Then, specify the properties
of the joists and the perimeter framing. Click Set Joist Properties or click Set Framing Member Properties.
The Set Joist Properties or Set Framing Member Properties dialog box opens. The available parameters depend on
the Type of joist or framing member selected.

Parameter Description
Width Specifies the joist or framing member profile width
Height Specifies the joist or framing member profile height
166 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Type Select the form of the joist or framing member element:
rafter, solid beam, wood truss, open-web steel joist,
cold-formed steel channel, steel section, or custom profile
Profile Symbol Def For custom profiles, displays the selected profile symbol
name
Choose Profile Symbol For custom profiles, click Choose Profile Symbol to select a
structural profile symbol from the default content or the
current files content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Select a symbol
from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK.

The profile name displays in the Object Info palette.

2D Display Select the 2D display method: solid, centerline, width, or
width with centerline
Show Label Displays the text entered in Label Text as a label next to the
2D representation of the joist or framing member
Label Text Enter the text to display in 2D as a label
Vertical Reference Select whether the objects defining line is at the top, center,
(Rafter, Solid Beam, Wood Truss, or bottom
Open-Web Steel Joist, Cold-formed
Steel Channel, Steel Section)
Draw 2D Hangers Displays 2D graphics indicating framing hangers at start,
(Solid Beam, Wood Truss, Cold-formed end, both, or none
Steel Channel)
Flange Height Sets the height of the truss top and bottom chords; the chord
(Wood Truss, Open-Web Steel Joist, width is set by the object width
Cold-formed Steel Channel)
Web Width/Height Specifies the size of the truss web components; if Use Solid
(Wood Truss, Open-Web Steel Joist, Web is selected (wood truss only), the Web Width
Cold-formed Steel Channel) parameter specifies the thickness of the solid web

Gauge Sets the thickness of the top and bottom chords

(Open-Web Steel Joist, Cold-formed
Steel Channel)
 Framing | 167

Parameter Description
Panel Spacing Indicates the spacing of the truss panels (subdivisions)
(Wood Truss, Open-Web Steel Joist)
Draw Verticals Displays vertical web components between each sloping web
(Wood Truss, Open-Web Steel Joist) component

Bottom Bearing Toggles the configuration of the truss between top chord and
(Open-Web Steel Joist) bottom chord bearing

Use Solid Web Toggles the web component configuration between

(Wood Truss) open-web and solid, I-beam style

Section Type Select the type of structural shape for the steel section:
(Steel Section) Angle, Bulb Flat, Channel, I-beam, Rectangular Tubing,
Round Tubing, Square Tubing, Tee, or Wide Flange
Section Series Select the series type for the steel section
(Steel Section)
Section Shape Select the size of the steel section
(Steel Section)

4. Click OK to set the joist or perimeter framing member properties.

5. Specify the attributes of the joists and the perimeter framing. Click Set Joist Attributes or click Set Framing
Member Attributes.
The Set Joist Attributes or Set Framing Member Attributes dialog box opens. The dialog boxes are identical
whether setting joist or perimeter framing attributes, and contain a Graphic Attributes tab and Texture tab
(Renderworks required).
168 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Graphic Attributes Each graphic attribute can be set by the class style or to specific settings. If
set by the class style, the attributes are controlled by the class selected in the
Create Joists from Poly dialog box.
Fill Select Class Style to use the class style for the fill attribute, choose None to
apply no fill, or choose a fill style
Pen Select Class Style to use the class style for the pen attribute, choose None to
apply no pen, or choose a solid/dash or pattern style; see Pen Attributes on
page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Line Thickness Select Class Thickness to use the class style for the line thickness attribute,
choose Set Thickness to specify the line thickness, or select a line thickness
(see Line Thickness Attributes on page 509 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide)
Texture (Renderworks Select Class to use the class texture for the framing element (see Applying
required) Object Textures by Class on page 632 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide), choose None to apply no texture, or choose Select to set the
texture parameters
Texture Select the texture to apply from either the default content or the current files
content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide
Map Type Select the texture map type
Radius For sphere and cylinder maps, sets the texture radius; the default radius is the
same as the 3D object radius. Increasing this value reduces the size of the
texture on the object.
Start/End Cap Applies the texture to the start and end caps of the framing element
Repeat Repeats the texture in a horizontal and/or vertical direction
Horizontally/
Vertically
Scale Factor Determines the texture size when projected onto the object; either enter a
scale value or use the slider to change the scale
Horizontal/Vertical Sets the start location of the texture horizontally and vertically
Offset
Rotation Sets the angle of texture rotation; either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360
degrees or use the slider to change the rotation angle

6. Click OK to set the joist or perimeter framing member attributes.

7. Click OK to close the Create Joist From Poly dialog box.
8. If joists are to be created, an alert dialog box requests the selection of two points to set the joist orientation. Click
OK to close the dialog box and click two points to indicate the desired joist orientation.
9. The joists and/or perimeter framing member objects are created. In addition, a Joist Take-Off worksheet is
automatically created and added to the Resource Browser.
The framing member parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette. These parameters are identical to those
of a single framing member object; see Creating Framing Members on page 160.
 Framing | 169

Framing a Wall
The Vectorworks Architect product creates a highly detailed estimate of the placement and number of studs needed to
frame walls. In addition to showing stud placement in a framing diagram, the Wall Framer command also
automatically generates frame elevation drawings and two different worksheets, Frame TakeOff and Frame Wall Info.

To use the wall framer:

1. Ensure that the walls have the desired height. If necessary, change the wall height.
2. Select AEC > Framing > Wall Framer.
If a framing model has not yet been created, the New Framing Model dialog box opens. Enter a name for the
framing model design layer (up to eight characters).

3. Click Create.
The Wall Framing dialog box opens. Select the desired settings for the framing model.

Parameter Description
Model Name Select the framing model layer to be used
New Opens the New Framing Model dialog box to create a new model
170 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Delete Deletes the currently selected model. Click Yes to delete the selected
model. This operation cannot be undone. This command cannot be used if
there is only one model in the document.
Framer Output
3D Model Creates a 3D model layer, complete with the placement of studs, top
plates, sole plates, and other components required for framing
2D Model Creates framing plan and framing diagram layers. The framing plan is a
top view of the wall showing the sole plate and stud placement and is
drawn in a layer that parallels the layers in the framing model. The top
plates are removed to show the stud placement. The framing diagram is an
elevation view showing the sole plate, top plates, and stud placement. The
framing diagram is drawn in a new design layer and generates as many
layers as needed.
Worksheets Creates two sets of worksheets. The first set provides details on the
framing results, including a list of studs sorted by layer, class, frame, and
size (Frame TakeOff). The second set provides a summary of frame
information, sorted similarly, but providing area and linear footages
itemized for each framed wall (Frame Wall Info).
Frame the following Select which layer(s) contain wall data to frame
layers
Options Opens the Wall Class dialog box to allow the editing of wall class values;
see step 4

The framing diagram and the 3D model representations also include symbols and inserted items, such as doors and
windows.
4. Click Options.
The Wall Class dialog box opens. Enter the framing parameters for each wall class.
 Framing | 171

Parameter Description
Wall Class
Name Lists the classes that contain walls to be framed; walls in the classes in this
list are included in the framing model. The framing parameters for each
class are displayed beneath.
New Click to add an additional wall class to the list to be framed
Delete Deletes the currently selected wall class from the list to be framed. Click
Yes to delete the selected class. This operation cannot be undone.
Stud Spacing Enter the center-to-center distance between studs in this wall class
Sheet Stock Width Enter the width of the wall sheathing; this is the horizontal sheathing
dimension
Max Plate Length Enter the length of lumber to be used for top and bottom frame members in
this wall class
Sheet Stock Height Enter the width of the wall sheathing; this is the vertical sheathing
dimension
Lumber
Nominal Select the lumber type to use for this wall class; the default types are 2 x
4, 2 x 6, and 2 x 10
New Click to create a new nominal lumber type; enter the name and click OK;
then, with the new type selected in the Nominal list, enter the lumber
dimensions in Size
Delete Deletes the currently selected nominal lumber type. Click Yes to delete the
selected lumber type. This operation cannot be undone. This command
cannot be used if there is only one lumber type in the document.
172 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell

Parameter Description
Size Enter the true short dimension for the lumber
by Enter the true long dimension for the lumber
Output Options
Fire Blocking Select to have extra blocking added to this wall class between studs on
walls that are shorter than the sheet stock height
Double End Studs Select to have two studs, rather than one stud, placed at each wall end in
this wall class
Double Top Plate Select to have two plates, rather than one plate, placed at top of each wall in
this wall class
Double Bottom Plate Select to have two plates, rather than one plate, placed at the bottom of
each wall in this wall class

5. Click OK to return to the Wall Framing dialog box.

6. Click OK to create the framing model.
The program creates the estimated framing for the walls and any other output information requested.
The 2D results display in Top/Plan view without a top plate. To view the results with a top plate, switch to another
view such as Front, Back, Left, or Right.
To view the 3D results, switch to a view such as Left Isometric or Right Isometric.
The Framer TakeOff and Framer Wall Info worksheets, if created, display in the drawing area.

Inserting Ceiling Grid Objects

Use the Ceiling Grid tool to insert a ceiling grid object containing tiles with user-specified length, width, and
placement angle. A ceiling grid object can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Create Objects
from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To insert a ceiling grid object:

1. Click the Ceiling Grid tool from the MEP tool set.
2. Click in the drawing file to set the start point of the ceiling grid object, and then click to set the position of each
additional vertex. Click the last point to complete creation of the ceiling grid object. If the polyline is open, the
program automatically completes it.
The Ceiling Grid object properties dialog box opens. Click OK to accept the default settings.
 Inserting Ceiling Grid Objects | 173

3. Use the Reshape tool to modify the locations of the vertices after object creation, or use the vertex editing controls
on the Object Info palette to move the vertices or change the degree of vertices. The tiles are automatically
adjusted to fit the new shape.

Parameter Description
Angle Specify the tile placement angle
Tile Width Specify the tile width
Tile Length Specify the tile length
Vertex parameters Edits the ceiling grid object path vertices; see Editing
Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide

For information on editing object vertices, see Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
174 | Chapter 4: Creating the Building Shell
Adding Design Series Windows and Doors 5
Once the initial drawing structure has been established, add the windows and doors to the drawing. The Vectorworks
Architect and Landmark products have window and door tools that are similar to the windows and doors available from
the libraries of the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, but with expanded capabilities. Additional window and door
parameters are available only in the Architect and Landmark products.

Inserting Windows
All Vectorworks products include a limited window object containing parameters similar to those described here. In the
Vectorworks Fundamentals product, the window object is inserted from an object library through the Resource
Browser. In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the window object is inserted with the Window tool.
The Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products also include window symbols in standard sizes and various
configurations, ready to install in walls. Additionally, the Vectorworks Architect product provides extensive libraries of
window symbols, listed by configuration and size.
A window can be customized by adjusting various parameters, and then saved as symbol so that its parameters are
preset upon insertion (see Creating a Window or Door Symbol on page 222).
The Update Plug-in Objects command may need to be run on files containing windows that were created in an
earlier version of the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark product. This command converts the windows to the
latest format; see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 49 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

To insert a window:

1. Select the Window tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. If this is the first time a window is inserted into the drawing, click Preferences from the Tool bar to open the
Window Settings dialog box for specifying the default preferences which apply to all windows placed
subsequently in this file. The settings are grouped into several panes of related parameters, which are listed on the
left side of the dialog box. Proceed to step 3.
If this is not the first time a window is inserted into the drawing (or if you do not want to specify default window
preferences first), click in the drawing area or in a wall to set the insertion point of the window, and click again to
set the rotation. Edit window parameters in the Object Info palette as necessary, as described in Editing Existing
Windows and Creating Schedules on page 195.
3. Select each pane and set the window parameters as described in the following sections. Click OK to set the
window parameters and close the Window Settings dialog box.
Window Settings Preview Panes on page 176
Window Settings General Pane on page 177
Window Settings 2D Visualization Pane on page 179
Window Settings 3D Visualization Pane on page 179
Window Settings ID Tag Pane on page 181
Window Settings Corner Window Pane on page 182
Window Settings Jamb and Sash Pane on page 183
Window Settings Sill Pane on page 184
Window Settings Transom Pane on page 185
Window Settings Trim Pane on page 186
Window Settings Lintel Pane on page 187
Window Settings Muntins Pane on page 187
Window Settings Interior Shutters Pane on page 188
Window Settings Exterior Shutters Pane on page 189
Window Settings Interior Wall Detail Pane on page 190
176 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Window Settings Exterior Wall Detail Pane on page 191

Window Settings Classes Pane on page 192
Window Settings Data Pane on page 193
If you are inserting a corner window, place the window in a wall that is attached to another wall. Once parameters
are set, the window moves to the nearest corner automatically. This represents one half of the corner window
assembly.

Several features of the window are described as interior or exterior. These include trim, shutters, and
wall-wrap components. These elements are determined based on the internal and external faces of the wall. The
left side of the wall (as viewed along the wall direction) is always exterior, and the right side is interior.
Flipping the window does not flip these elements.

Window Settings Preview Panes

Parameter Description
3D Preview Dynamically displays a 3D preview of the window with the currently selected
parameters
View Select the standard view for the 3D preview of the window
Render Select the render mode for the 3D preview of the window
Top/Plan Preview Dynamically displays a Top/Plan preview of the window with the currently selected
parameters
 Inserting Windows | 177

Window Settings General Pane

Parameter Description
Window Shape Select the window shape
All window shapes other than rectangular are fixed glass; only the appropriate
parameters on each pane of the Window Settings dialog box are available for
these fixed glass shapes.
Top Shape Select the shape of the top of the window
Transom Select whether to add a transom above the window; transom parameters are set
from the Transom pane
Rise When applicable for the selected Top Shape, enter the distance between the start of
the top shape to the top of the window
Spring Enter the distance traveled above the bottom pane before the top shape starts; if
Square is selected as the Top Shape, the spring is the total height
Sash Select the window type. To create a simple opening in a wall for defining a window
break without creating any geometry to represent the window, select the Opening
option; a variety of window settings are enabled or disabled automatically, as
described in the following sections. To define a custom window sash, select Custom
Sash and click Custom Sash Options to open the Custom Sash Options dialog
box; see Creating a Custom Window Sash Opening on page 194.
178 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Use Symbol Select Use Symbol Geometry and click Browse to select a window symbol from
Geometry the current files resources. Select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and
click OK.

The symbol Name displays in the Window Settings dialog box and the preview is
updated with the selected symbol.
When a symbol is selected, all fields pertaining to the windows geometry are
disregarded; however, parametric values are still available for scheduling and
reporting purposes only.
Size Reference Select the appropriate option to define the window width and height; the Size
Reference selection automatically updates the Width and Height fields, but does
not change the size of the window:
Sash Opening - this represents the window opening including the sash and glass,
but excluding the transom and jamb; this is typically used to show the window
opening for emergency exit purposes
Unit Size - this represents the current overall window width and height, including
the transom and sash; this is the default setting for imperial units
Rough Opening - this represents the current overall window width and height,
including the transom, sash, and shim gap (for the Opening Sash configuration,
the Size Reference is automatically changed to Rough Opening); this is the
default setting for metric units
Width/Height The width/height of the window is measured based on the Size Reference
selection:
Sash Opening - width/height is measured at the outside of the sash
Unit Size - width/height is measured at the outside of the jamb
Rough Opening - width/height measures the rough opening
For circle, half circle, hexagon, and octagon shaped windows, the height
parameter is disabled, and the parameter is automatically calculated based on
the windows width.
Elevation in Wall Enter the window elevation
Elevation Select either the sill or the head of the window as the elevation reference point
Reference
Plan Wall Offset Enter the distance to offset the window insertion point from the centerline of the
wall
 Inserting Windows | 179

Window Settings 2D Visualization Pane

Parameter Description
Show Plan Detail Select to display all the window details in Top/Plan view
Draw Wall Lines Select whether to draw wall lines at all times; wall lines are drawn in the
Ceiling-Main class to easily create reflected ceiling plans
Use Part Line Controls line styles and weights for the window part; if this group is selected, these
Styles settings override the line style and weight settings from the Attributes palette
Jamb/Sash/ Choose the line style and weight to use for the selected part or select Set Thickness
Trim/Sill/ to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen
Glazing/Wall Attributes on page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Lines/Swing
Visibility Classes
Sill/Lintel/2D Select a class for each window component to control its visibility. The classes
Loci present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting New,
select the default class name, or select the class named <Window Class> which
places the component in the same class as the window object.

Window Settings 3D Visualization Pane

3D Visualization options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration.
180 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
3D Hinge
Direction Marker
Show Interior/ Select to draw lines representing the hinge direction of the window sashes on the
Exterior interior/exterior side of the window in 3D
Marker
Hinge Select a class for the windows 3D hinge direction marker to control its visibility.
Direction The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
Marker Class selecting New, or select the class named <Window Class> which places the marker
in the same class as the window object.
Marker Points Set the hinge direction marker to point toward the hinge or toward the handle
Towards
Show 3D Open Select to draw 3D window sashes as open at the specified Open Angle
Clerestory Enabling Clerestory draws the window as dashed if the sill is higher than the
specified elevation and draws the window as non-breaking (solid) if the sill is
below the specified Dash Height
 Inserting Windows | 181

Window Settings ID Tag Pane

Parameter Description
Include on Select whether to include this windows information in the window schedule and
Schedule also set the window ID tag to visible
ID Prefix Assigns alphanumeric information before the numerical label value; adding prefix
information is optional
ID Label Assigns a numerical value to the ID; this number increments automatically if the
auto-increment option is chosen in the ID Settings dialog box (see Using the ID
Label Tool on page 566)
ID Suffix Assigns alphanumeric information after the label value; adding suffix information
is optional
Bubble Shape Select the ID tag bubble shape
Bubble Size Enter the minimum bubble size (this value represents the bubble size times the
layer scale; the bubble shape is maintained relative to the text inside it for ID
bubble uniformity throughout the drawing file)
Bubble Line Select the bubble line attributes and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set
Attributes Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on
page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Show Leader Select to draw a leader line from the ID tag to the window object
Line Attributes Select the leader line attributes and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set
Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on
page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
182 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Include Marker Select whether to include a marker for the ID leader line and choose the desired
style from the marker list, or select Custom to create a custom marker. Select Edit
Marker List to open the Edit Marker List dialog box; see Editing the Marker
List on page 511 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
ID Class Select a class for the ID tag to control its appearance and visibility. The classes
present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting New,
select the default class name, or select the class named <Window Class> which
places the ID tag in the same class as the window object.
Keep ID When selected, automatically rotates the ID so that it is horizontal
Horizontal
Show Tag in 3D Select to display the ID tag in 3D views
View
Horizontal Enter the horizontal offset of the 3D ID tag relative to the bottom left corner of the
Offset rough opening when looking at the exterior side of the window (a positive value
moves the tag inside the opening relative to the starting corner; a negative value
moves the tag outside the opening relative to the starting corner)
The ID tag is offset slightly from the outside face of the window sash. The size
and shape of the text and bubble, if present, will match the plan settings, and
the text will always be right reading from the outside of the wall. The bubble
will scale with text scaling in viewports.
Vertical Offset Enter the vertical offset of the 3D ID tag relative to the bottom left corner of the
rough opening when looking at the exterior side of the window (a positive value
moves the tag inside the opening relative to the starting corner; a negative value
moves the tag outside the opening relative to the starting corner)

Window Settings Corner Window Pane

Corner Window options are not enabled for non-rectangular window shapes.
 Inserting Windows | 183

Parameter Description
Corner Window Select this option to redraw the current window as a corner window.
Settings that do not apply to a corner window may be disabled or changed when the
corner window option is selected.
When you click OK to exit the Window Settings dialog box, the window is moved
to the corner of the wall to which it is most closely located. To complete the corner
window, insert another one into the adjacent, attached wall.
Corner windows do not work in tandem with one another. When you make
adjustments to one window, you will also need to update the other. This can be
accomplished quickly with the Eyedropper tool or from the Object Info
palette. When you make adjustments to the wall containing a corner window,
the window moves along with the wall and remains locked in the corner
position. When adjusting the angle of the wall, the miter is automatically
adjusted in most cases; if a corner window object does not automatically
update, temporarily change a parameter in the Object Info palette to force a
reset of the window object.
Corner Select Flush Glass to draw the glass right to the edge of the wall and wrap it around
Condition the corner, select Mitered Sash to draw the window with a mitered sash in the
corner, select Corner Post to draw the window with a post in the corner, or select
Opening to create a simple opening in a wall for defining a window break without
creating any geometry to represent the window (the Sash configuration is
automatically also changed to Opening). For windows with a corner post, specify
the Size of the post and its Offset within the wall.

Window Settings Jamb and Sash Pane

Jamb and Sash options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration.
184 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Jamb
Jamb Width Enter the face width of the window jamb (parallel to the wall)
Jamb Depth Enter the depth of the window jamb (perpendicular to the wall)
Use Wall Select to set the jamb depth to the overall wall depth
Depth
Use Jamb Select this field to specify a jamb extension to fill any gap between the interior face
Extension of the jamb and the interior face of the wall; enter the desired Jamb Extension
Width
In 2D views, extensions use the Jamb line styles and weights (see Window
Settings 2D Visualization Pane on page 179); in 3D views, the extension fill
color and/or textures and visibility are controlled by the Interior Jamb class
(see Window Settings Classes Pane on page 192).
Sash
Sash Width Enter the sash width
Sash Depth Enter the sash depth
Sash Offset Enter the offset of the sash relative to the jamb depth (a positive value moves the
sash toward the window exterior; a negative value moves the sash toward the
window interior)
Sash Width Enter the sash width offset relative to the jamb width (leaving the default value of 0
Offset keeps the sash adjacent to the jamb, and a positive value makes the sash intersect
the jamb; a negative value is not permitted)
Glass Offset Enter the glass offset relative to the sash depth (a positive value moves the glass
toward the window exterior; a negative value moves the glass toward the window
interior)
Unequal Sash To create a double hung window with an unequal sash height, select to customize
the top sash height, and enter the desired scale factor for the sash; to customize the
horizontal top sash muntins, see Window Settings Muntins Pane on page 187.
Select to customize the width of the left and right sliders for a picture window
slider, and enter the desired scale factor for the sashes. The sash scale factor applies
to both the left and right sliders.
Shim Gap Enter the distance between the jamb exterior face and the rough opening (for the
Opening Sash configuration, the Shim Gap is automatically set to 0)
Show Shim Gap Select whether to display the shim gap in Top/Plan view
in Plan
Masonry Module Enter the masonry module dimension

Window Settings Sill Pane

Sill options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration or for non-rectangular window shapes.
 Inserting Windows | 185

Parameter Description
Include Sill Select whether to include a sill and select the sill style type
Timber Specify the sill lip thickness, amount of keep for the sill, sill height, total sill depth,
sill extension width, stool lip thickness, and stool nose dimension
Masonry Specify the sill lip thickness, amount of keep for the sill, rise dimension, sill height,
total sill depth, and sill extension width
Brick Specify the sill lip thickness, rise dimension, total sill depth, sill extension width,
stool lip thickness, and stool nose dimension

Window Settings Transom Pane

Transom options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration or for non-rectangular window shapes.
186 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Sash
Sash Width Enter the transom sash width
Sash Depth Enter the transom sash depth
Mullion
Mullion Width Enter the transom mullion width
Mullion Depth Enter the transom mullion depth
Muntins
Pattern Select the transom muntin pattern
Vertical/ For colonial muntins, enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars
Horizontal Prairie and renaissance muntins come with pre-set configurations; therefore,
Bars any number of Vertical/Horizontal Bars specified are disregarded
Bar Depth/ Enter the transom muntin bar width/depth
Width
Bar Offset Enter the transom muntin bar offset
Number of For sunburst patterns, enter the number of muntin rays
Rays

Window Settings Trim Pane

Trim options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration.

Parameter Description
Include Interior/ Select whether to include interior/exterior trim
Exterior Trim
Width/Depth Enter the interior/exterior trim width and depth
 Inserting Windows | 187

Parameter Description
Include Trim Select whether to include interior/exterior trim along the window bottom
Under Stool/
Sill

Window Settings Lintel Pane

Lintel options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration or for non-rectangular window shapes.

Parameter Description
Include Lintel Select to add a lintel above the window or transom
Int./Ext. Enter the interior and exterior lintel protrusion
Protrusion
(1) Thickness Enter the lintel thickness
(2) Angle Enter the lintel angle
(3) Drop Enter the length of the lintel drop

Window Settings Muntins Pane

Muntin options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration or for non-rectangular window shapes.
188 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Top Sash/Bottom Select which sashes should have muntins applied to them
Sash
Pattern Select the muntin pattern
Vertical/ For colonial muntins, enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars
Horizontal Bars Prairie and renaissance muntins come with pre-set configurations; therefore,
any number of Vertical/Horizontal Bars specified are disregarded
Bar Depth/Width Enter the muntin bar width/depth
Bar Offset Enter the muntin bar offset
Number of Rays For sunburst patterns, enter the number of muntin rays
Custom Top Sash For a double hung window with an unequal sash and colonial muntins, select to
Muntins customize the top sash, and enter the desired number of horizontal bars

Window Settings Interior Shutters Pane

Interior Shutter options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration or for non-rectangular window shapes.
 Inserting Windows | 189

Parameter Description
Include Interior Select whether to include interior shutters
Shutters
Use Custom If Square is selected as the Top Shape, select whether the interior shutters should
Width be a width other than the default value (1/2 the width of the window) and enter the
desired custom width
Frame Depth Enter the depth for the interior shutters
Offset from Jamb Enter the offset distance from the interior edge of the window jamb that shutters
will be positioned when fully opened
Panel Shutter Select to create paneled shutters
Panel Frame Enter the rail and stile width of the paneled shutter
Width
Number of Select One panel per sash to divide shutters at sash divisions or select to divide
Panels panels equally by the Custom number of panels specified
Custom Shutter Click Choose Symbol to select a custom shutter symbol from default content; see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Custom shutters must be 3D-only symbols made from generic solids, saved in
the default content location.

Window Settings Exterior Shutters Pane

Exterior Shutter options are not enabled for the Opening Sash configuration or for non-rectangular window shapes.
190 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Include Exterior Select whether to include exterior shutters
Shutters
Use Custom If Square is selected as the Top Shape, select whether the exterior shutters should
Width be a width other than the default value (1/2 the width of the window) and enter the
desired custom width
Frame Depth Enter the depth for the exterior shutters
Offset from Jamb Enter the offset distance from the interior edge of the window jamb that shutters
will be positioned when fully opened
Panel Shutter Select to create paneled shutters
Panel Frame Enter the rail and stile width of the paneled shutter
Width
Number of Select One panel per sash to divide shutters at sash divisions or select to divide
Panels panels equally by the Custom number of panels specified
Custom Shutter Click Choose Symbol to select a custom shutter symbol from default content; see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Custom shutters must be 3D-only symbols made from generic solids, saved in
the default content location.

Window Settings Interior Wall Detail Pane

Interior Wall Detail options are not enabled for non-rectangular window shapes.
 Inserting Windows | 191

Parameter Description
Number of Specify the number of interior wall components to wrap; when interior wall
Components components are specified, the window enables a control point to set the wrapping
point

Interior control point

Splay Wall Select whether to splay the interior wall; the splay can be specified either as an
angle/diagonal or with width and depth values
(1) Splay Enter the interior wall splay angle
Angle
(2) Splay Enter the interior wall splay diagonal value
Diagonal
(3) Splay Enter the interior wall splay width
Width
(4) Splay Enter the interior wall splay depth
Depth

Window Settings Exterior Wall Detail Pane

Exterior Wall Detail options are not enabled for non-rectangular window shapes.
192 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Number of Specify the number of exterior wall components to wrap; when exterior wall
Components components are specified, the window enables a control point to set the wrapping
point
Exterior control point

Splay Wall Select whether to splay the exterior wall; the splay can be specified either as an
angle/diagonal or with width and depth values
(1) Splay Enter the exterior wall splay angle
Angle
(2) Splay Enter the exterior wall splay diagonal value
Diagonal
(3) Splay Enter the exterior wall splay width
Width
(4) Splay Enter the exterior wall splay depth
Depth

Window Settings Classes Pane

The visibility of the overall 3D window is controlled by the Class setting on the Object Info palette; component
settings are controlled from the Window Settings dialog box.
 Inserting Windows | 193

Parameter Description
Window Select a class for each window component to control its fill color and/or texture and
components visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new
class by selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named
<Window Class> (or Glazing-Clear, if applicable) which places the component in
the same class as the window object.
For windows with an Opening Sash configuration, in a 3D view, a no fill/no
pen weight extrude completely fills the wall in place of the window; this
extrude is placed in the Interior Jamb class and is filtered out in IFC export
operations. Change the class settings to control the visibility of the extrude, as
needed.

Window Settings Data Pane

Certain data fields represent calculated values and cannot be edited; as a result, the Field Name and Field Value appear
dimmed for those data fields.
194 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Field Name Select the data field from the list and its name displays beneath the list; information
associated with the Field Name can be specified in the Field Value area. The user
fields can include additional user-defined information with the window.
Field Value Enter data for use in the window schedule

Creating a Custom Window Sash Opening

A custom window sash opening can be created for selection in the Window Settings dialog box. A rectangular sash
opening can contain any number of rectangular sashes.
To create a custom window sash opening:
1. From the General pane of the Window Settings dialog box, select the Custom Sash operation and click Custom
Sash Options.
The Custom Sash Options dialog box opens for selecting and specifying the sash opening parameters. As
parameters are defined, the preview dynamically displays the configuration operations of the sashes filling the
opening.
 Inserting Windows | 195

Parameter Description
Num. of Rows/Columns Specify the number of rows and columns in the sash opening (the total
number of sashes cannot exceed 64)
Overall Width/Height Displays the overall width and height of the custom sashes
Mullion Width/Depth Displays the mullion width and depth
Selected Sash The currently active sash displays in red to indicate that it is selected
Width/Height For the active sash, specify the desired Width and Height
Operation For the active sash, choose the desired window type
Include Muntins Select whether to include muntins for each sash
Lock Sash When selected, locks the sash dimensions and operation
Configuration
Unequal Sash To create a double hung window with an unequal sash height, select to
customize the top sash height, and enter the desired scale factor for the
sash; to customize the horizontal top sash muntins, see Window Settings
Muntins Pane on page 187.
Select to customize the width of the left and right sliders for a picture
window slider, and enter the desired scale factor for the sashes. The sash
scale factor applies to both the left and right sliders.
<< or >> Click << or >> to move backward or forward to activate sashes for
dimension and operation specification

2. Click OK to close the Custom Sash Options dialog box and return to the Window Settings dialog box. The
Window Settings dialog box preview is updated with the customization results.

Editing Existing Windows and Creating Schedules

To edit window parameters, click Settings from the Object Info palette, double-click the window to open the Window
Settings dialog box, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a window and select Edit from the context
menu.
196 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Window objects can also be edited in the Object Info palette. If the window has been inserted as a plug-in object, most
settings from the Window Settings dialog box display. If the window is a black symbol made from a window object,
fields pertaining to window geometry do not display. See Symbol Types on page 170 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
The fields in the Object Info palette are named similarly (but not always identically) to those in the Window Settings
dialog box, and reflect the order in which settings are entered in the dialog box, for ease of editing. Two additional
Object Info palette parameters are available for windows inserted in a wall: click Flip to flip the window orientation, or
click Set Position to activate the Move by Points tool in Reference Point mode and move the window by a specified
distance from a reference point.
When multiple window objects are selected for editing, and if the parameter settings of the selected objects are
different, parameters display in an indeterminate state. Any values changed through the dialog box are changed for
all the selected objects.
The Window Schedule can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command (see Records and
Schedules on page 26) or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the default architectural reports
file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect product (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the Window Schedule worksheet to the drawing.
(Users of the Vectorworks Landmark product can create the worksheet by selecting Tools > Reports > Create Reports
and creating a report for objects with a window record.) The worksheet is populated with information from the window
objects in the current drawing (note that corner windows are counted as two separate windows in the worksheet). To
edit the worksheet after it has been created, see Using Worksheets on page 814 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.

Window Terminology Specific to the United Kingdom

Certain window terminology varies in the United Kingdom. The window object is automatically localized in the
Vectorworks program for users with a United Kingdom serial number; however, since the documentation is not
localized, the terminology does not match. This table shows how the terms are mapped.

U.S. Term (in Documentation) U.K. Term (in Vectorworks Program)

Transom Fanlight
Rough Opening Structural Opening
Muntins (Leaf and Transom) Glazing Bars
Colonial (Muntin Style) Georgian
Prairie w/sunburst (Muntin Style) Prairie w/ Fan Top
Colonial w/sunburst (Muntin Style) Georgian w/Fan Top
Mullion (Transom) Transom Bar
Trim Architraves
Interior Trim Interior Architraves
Exterior Trim Exterior Architraves
Masonry Opening (Data) Nearest Full-Module of Masonry
Window Configurations Window Configurations
Fixed Glass Fixed Light
Single Hung Sliding Sash (lower)
Double Hung Sliding Sash (upper and lower)
 Inserting Window Walls | 197

U.S. Term (in Documentation) U.K. Term (in Vectorworks Program)

Casement Side-Hung Casement
Bi-Parting Casement Double-Hung Casement
Awning Top-Hung Casement
Hopper Bottom-Hung Casement

Inserting Window Walls

A straight or curved window wall object can simulate the appearance of an entire wall of glass.

To insert a straight window wall:

To insert a curved window wall:

1. Select the Window Wall (Straight) or Window Wall (Curved) tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. The straight window wall is a linear object; click to mark the beginning of the window wall and then click again to
mark the end of the window wall. The curved window wall is a point object; click once to insert the window wall,
and then again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the tool is used in this session, the Window Wall Properties dialog box opens. Specify the
preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK. The parameters can be changed later in the
Object Info palette.
The created window wall can be dragged into an existing wall.

Parameter Description
Length (straight) Indicates the total length of the straight window wall
Overall Angle Sets the arc distance of the curved window wall
(curved)
Height
Height Directly sets the desired height of the window wall. When the window wall
height is determined manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the
window wall is automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset
value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the window wall is bound by the layer wall height value or
by a story level, the wall height displays automatically.
198 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the window wall.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide).
Alternatively, the top of the window wall can be bound by one of the level
types defined for the story or the story above it. By setting the top of the
window wall to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes,
the height of the window wall changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the window wall from its specified top bound
height
Bot Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the window wall.
Alternatively, the bottom of the window wall can be bound by one of the level
types defined for the story or the story below it. By setting the bottom of the
window wall to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes,
the height of the window wall changes automatically to match.
Bot Offset For the bottom of the window wall, sets the offset from its specified bottom
bound height
Offset Indicates the offset of the window wall from its insertion point
Glass Offset Specifies the distance that the glass is offset from the object centerline
Starting/Ending Adds vertical mullions at the beginning or end of the window wall
Mullion
1st Mullion Spacing Sets the distance that the first mullion is offset from the beginning of the
window wall
Mullion Spacing Indicates the mullion spacing along the window wall
Mullion Depth/Width Sets the mullion depth and width values
1st/2nd/3rd Mullion Specifies the distance of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mullion from the base of the
Height wall
Glazing Select a class for the appearance and visibility of the window glass. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the class named <WindowWall Class>, which places
the window wall glazing in the same class as the window wall object.
Radius (curved) Sets the radius of the curved window wall
Start/End Miter Specifies the miter angle of straight window walls at the beginning and end of
(straight) the wall; this setting is most effective when the starting/ending mullions are
disabled
Fit To Curved Wall When a curved window wall is inserted within a curved wall, automatically
(curved) aligns the rotation and radius of the window wall to match that of the wall

Inserting Doors
All Vectorworks products include a limited door object containing parameters similar to those described here. In the
Vectorworks Fundamentals product, the door object is inserted from an object library through the Resource Browser. In
the Vectorworks Design Series products, the door object is inserted with the Door tool.
 Inserting Doors | 199

The Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products also include door symbols in standard sizes and various
configurations, ready to install in walls. Additionally, the Vectorworks Architect product provides extensive libraries of
door symbols, listed by configuration and size.
A door can be customized by adjusting various parameters, and then saved as symbol so that its parameters are preset
upon insertion (see Creating a Window or Door Symbol on page 222).
The Update Plug-in Objects command may need to be run on files containing doors that were created in an
earlier version of the Vectorworks Architect or Landmark product. This command converts the doors to the latest
format; see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 49 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

To insert a door:

1. Select the Door tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. If this is the first time a door is placed on the drawing, click Preferences from the Tool bar to open the Door
Settings dialog box for specifying the default preferences which apply to all doors placed subsequently in this file.
The settings are grouped into several panes of related parameters, which are listed on the left side of the dialog
box. Proceed to step 3.
If this is not the first time a door is inserted into the drawing (or if you do not want to specify default door
preferences first), click in the drawing area or in a wall to set the insertion point of the door, and click again to set
the rotation. Edit door parameters in the Object Info palette as necessary, as described in Editing Existing Doors
and Creating Schedules on page 222.

3. Select each pane and set the door parameters as described in the following sections. Click OK to set the door
parameters and close the Door Settings dialog box.
Door Settings Preview Panes on page 200
Door Settings General Pane on page 201
Door Settings 2D Visualization Pane on page 203
Door Settings 3D Visualization Pane on page 203
Door Settings ID Tag Pane on page 205
Door Settings Jamb Pane on page 206
Door Settings Leaf Pane on page 208
Door Settings Lights Pane on page 210
Door Settings Threshold Pane on page 211
Door Settings Transom Pane on page 212
Door Settings Trim Pane on page 213
Door Settings Lintel Pane on page 213
Door Settings Hardware Pane on page 214
Door Settings Kick Plates Pane on page 215
Door Settings Interior Wall Detail Pane on page 217
Door Settings Exterior Wall Detail Pane on page 218
Door Settings Classes Pane on page 218
Door Settings Data Pane on page 219
200 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Several features of the door are described as interior or exterior. These include trim and wall-wrap
components. These elements are determined based on the internal and external faces of the wall. The left side of
the wall (as viewed along the wall direction) is always exterior, and the right side is interior. Flipping the door
does not flip these elements.

Door Settings Preview Panes

Parameter Description
3D Preview Dynamically displays a 3D preview of the door with the currently selected
parameters
View Select the standard view for the 3D preview of the door
Render Select the render mode for the 3D preview of the door
Top/Plan Preview Dynamically displays a Top/Plan preview of the door with the currently selected
parameters
 Inserting Doors | 201

Door Settings General Pane

Parameter Description
Size Reference Select the appropriate option to define the door width and height; the Size
Reference selection automatically updates the Width and Height fields, but does
not change the size of the door:
Leaf Size - this represents the door width and height that measures to the inside
of the jamb, excluding the jamb, transom, and sidelights; this is the default
setting for imperial units
Unit Size - this represents the current overall door width and height that measures
to the outside of the jamb, including the jamb, transom, and sidelights
Rough Opening - this represents the current overall door width and height that
measures to the outside of the jamb, including the jamb, transom, sidelights, and
shim gap (for the Opening Configuration, the Size Reference is automatically
changed to Rough Opening); this is the default setting for metric units
Width/Height The width/height of the door is measured based on the Size Reference selection:
Leaf size - width/height of the door leaf is measured at the inside of the jamb
Unit Size - width/height is measured at the outside of the jamb
Rough Opening - width/height measures the rough opening
202 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Use Symbol Select Use Symbol Geometry and click Browse to select a door symbol from the
Geometry current files resources. Select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and
click OK.

The symbol Name displays in the Door Settings dialog box and the preview is
updated with the selected symbol.
When a symbol is selected, all fields pertaining to the doors geometry are
disregarded; however, parametric values are still available for scheduling and
reporting purposes only.
Top Shape Select the shape of the top of the door
Transom Select whether to add a transom above the door; transom parameters are set from
the Transom pane
Rise Enter the distance between the start of the top shape to the top of the door (not
applicable for Square and Round Top Shape)
Spring Enter the distance traveled above the floor before the Top Shape begins
Offset in Wall Enter the distance to offset the door insertion point from the centerline of the wall
Configuration Select the general door configuration. To create a simple opening in a wall for
defining a door break without creating any geometry to represent the door, select
the Opening option; a variety of door settings are enabled or disabled automatically,
as described in the following sections. (Note about UK terms)
Operation Select the advanced operation for a sliding or complex swing door, where O
represents a fixed door and X represents an operating door
Unequal Leaf For bi-part and double acting configurations, select this option to insert a door with
leaves of unequal widths
Width Leaf 1/2 When Unequal Leaf is selected, enter the width of the first door leaf; the width of
the second door leaf is calculated automatically and displayed in as the Width Leaf
2 value
 Inserting Doors | 203

Door Settings 2D Visualization Pane

Parameter Description
Show Plan Detail Select to display all the door details in Top/Plan view
Draw Wall Lines Select whether to draw wall lines at all times; wall lines are drawn in the
Ceiling-Main class to easily create reflected ceiling plans
Use Part Line Styles Controls line styles and weights for the door part; if this group is selected,
these settings override the line style and weight settings from the Attributes
palette
Jamb/Leaf/Trim/ Choose the line style and weight to use for the selected part or select Set
Swing/Sash/Glazing/ Thickness to open the Set Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line
Astragal/Wall Lines/ thickness; see Pen Attributes on page 507 in the Vectorworks
Threshold/Overhead Fundamentals Users Guide
Swing
Visibility Classes
Slab & Swing/Lintel/ Select a class for each door component to control its visibility. The classes
2D Loci/OH Door present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
Path selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named
<Door Class> which places the component in the same class as the door
object.

Door Settings 3D Visualization Pane

3D Visualization options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.
204 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
3D Hinge Select to draw lines representing the 3D hinge direction
Direction Marker
Show Interior/ Select to draw lines representing the hinge direction of the door leaves on the
Exterior interior/exterior side of the door in 3D
Marker
Hinge Select a class for the doors 3D hinge direction marker to control its visibility. The
Direction classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
Marker Class selecting New, or select the class named <Door Class> which places the marker in
the same class as the door object.
Marker Points Set the hinge direction marker to point toward the hinge or toward the handle
Towards
Draw 3D Open Select to draw 3D doors as open at the specified Open Angle
3D Detail Level Select the level of detail to include for 3D doors
 Inserting Doors | 205

Door Settings ID Tag Pane

Parameter Description
Include on Select whether to include this doors information in the door schedule and also set
Schedule the door ID tag to visible
ID Prefix Assigns alphanumeric information before the numerical label value; adding prefix
information is optional
ID Label Assigns a numerical value to the ID; this number increments automatically if the
auto-increment option is chosen in the ID Settings dialog box (see Using the ID
Label Tool on page 566)
ID Suffix Assigns alphanumeric information after the label value; adding suffix information
is optional
Bubble Shape Select the ID tag bubble shape
Bubble Size Enter the minimum bubble size (this value represents the bubble size times the
layer scale; the bubble shape is maintained relative to the text inside it for ID
bubble uniformity throughout the drawing file)
Bubble Line Select the bubble line attributes and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set
Attributes Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on
page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Show Leader Select to draw a leader line from the ID tag to the door object
Line Attributes Select the leader line attributes and weight, or select Set Thickness to open the Set
Thickness dialog box for creating a custom line thickness; see Pen Attributes on
page 507 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
206 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Include Marker Select whether to include a marker for the ID leader line and choose the desired
style from the marker list, or select Custom to create a custom marker. Select Edit
Marker List to open the Edit Marker List dialog box; see Editing the Marker
List on page 511 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
ID Class Select a class for the ID tag to control its appearance and visibility. The classes
present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting New,
select the default class name, or select the class named <Door Class> (or
Glazing-Clear, if applicable) which places the ID tag in the same class as the door
object.
Keep ID When selected, automatically rotates the ID so that it is horizontal
Horizontal
Show Tag in 3D Select to display the ID tag in 3D views
View
Horizontal Enter the horizontal offset of the 3D ID tag relative to the bottom left corner of the
Offset rough opening when looking at the exterior side of the door (a positive value moves
the tag inside the opening relative to the starting corner; a negative value moves the
tag outside the opening relative to the starting corner)
The ID tag is offset slightly from the outside face of the door leaf. The size and
shape of the text and bubble, if present, will match the plan settings, and the
text will always be right reading from the outside of the wall. The bubble will
scale with text scaling in viewports.
Vertical Offset Enter the vertical offset of the 3D ID tag relative to the bottom left corner of the
rough opening when looking at the exterior side of the door (a positive value moves
the tag inside the opening relative to the starting corner; a negative value moves the
tag outside the opening relative to the starting corner)

Door Settings Jamb Pane

Jamb options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.
 Inserting Doors | 207

Parameter Description
Width Enter the face width of the door jamb (parallel to the wall)
Depth Enter the depth of the door jamb (perpendicular to the wall)
Use Wall Depth Select to set the jamb depth to the overall wall depth
Use Jamb Select this field to specify a jamb extension to fill any gap between the interior face
Extension of the jamb and the interior face of the wall; enter the desired Jamb Extension
Width
In 2D views, extensions use the Jamb line styles and weights (see Door
Settings 2D Visualization Pane on page 203); in 3D views, the extension fill
color and/or textures and visibility are controlled by the Int. Jamb class (see
Door Settings Classes Pane on page 218).
Shim Gap Enter the distance between the jamb exterior face and the rough opening (for the
Opening Configuration, the Shim Gap is automatically set to 0)
Show Shim Gap Select whether to display the shim gap in Top/Plan view
in Plan
Masonry Module Enter the masonry module dimension
Astragal Flange / Use these two dimensions to determine the size of the astragal flange or depth
Depth (enter zero to display without an astragal flange); enabled if Swing Bi-part is
selected in the Configuration field on the General pane

Astragal
Depth

Astragal
Flange
208 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Door Settings Leaf Pane

Leaf options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.

Parameter Description
Leaf Select the desired leaf type
Solid
Thickness Enter the thickness of the door slab
Include Vision Select to include vision panel(s)
Panels
Vision Panel Select the shape of the vision panel(s)
Shape
Bottom Offset Enter an offset value, measured from the bottom of the leaf to the bottom of the
lowest vision panel
Right Offset Enter an offset value, measured from the edge of the leaf to the nearest edge of the
vision panel.
For the most common door configurations, this parameter is measured from
the unhinged edge of the leaf, which is the right edge in Vectorworks default
front view in the 3D preview. However, with some of the more complex,
multi-part door configurations, the offset is measured from different points to
provide correct alignment of vision panels. Consult the 3D Preview to confirm
the appearance.
Panel Height/ Enter the height/width of the individual vision panel(s)
Width Panel Width is enabled only for the rectangle and oval vision panel shapes.
For square and round, the width is automatically set equal to the height.
 Inserting Doors | 209

Parameter Description
Number of Enter the number of vision panels
Panels
Separation For leafs with more than one vision panel, enter the vertical offset between panels
Set Top Panel For leafs with more than one vision panel, select to make the top vision panel a
Height different height than the other panels and specify the desired Panel Height
Add Vision For doors with an unequal leaf, select to include vision panels with the same
Panels to parameters on the smaller leaf as well as the main leaf. See Door Settings
Unequal Leaf General Pane on page 201to create an unequal leaf.
Glass The Glass leaf type enables the options specific to glass doors on this pane,
such as Muntin Style; it does not make the door leaves render as transparent
glass. To make the glass render properly, apply a Glazing class on the Classes
pane.
Thickness Enter the thickness of the door slab
Top Rail Width Enter the width of the top door rail
L/R Stile Width Enter the width of the left and right stile
Bottom Rail Enter the width of the bottom door rail
Width
Muntin Style Select the muntin style
Vertical/ Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars
Horizontal Bars
Bar Width/Depth Enter the muntin bar width/depth
Bar Offset Enter the muntin bar offset for Prairie muntins
Panel
Thickness Enter the thickness of the door slab
Top Rail Width Enter the width of the top door rail
L/R Stile Width Enter the width of the left and right stile
Bottom Rail Enter the width of the bottom door rail
Width
Vertical/ Enter the number of vertical/horizontal panels in the door
Horizontal Panels
Mid Stile Width Enter the width of any interim stiles
Set Top Panel Select to make the top door panel a different height than the other panels and
Height specify the desired Panel Height
Single Top Panel Select to specify only one panel across the top of the leaf, regardless of the number
of panels below
Glazing in Top Select to insert glazing in the top panel(s)
Panels
Muntin Style Select the muntin style
210 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Vertical/ Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars
Horizontal
Bars
Bar Width/ Enter the muntin bar width/depth
Depth
Bar Offset Enter the muntin bar offset for Prairie muntins
Custom
Thickness Enter the thickness of the door slab
Custom Leaf Select the leaf type from the default content; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Custom leaves must be 3D-only symbols made from generic solids, saved in
the default content location.

Door Settings Lights Pane

Lights options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.

Parameter Description
Include Select to include sidelights
Sidelights
Left/Right Enter the left/right sidelight width
Width
Sash Width Enter the sidelight and transom sash width
Sash Depth Enter the sidelight sash depth
 Inserting Doors | 211

Parameter Description
Mullion Width Enter the sidelight mullion width
Mullion Depth Enter the sidelight mullion depth
Include Muntins Select whether to add muntins to the sidelights
Style Select the sidelight muntin style
Vertical/ Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars
Horizontal
Bars
Bar Width Enter the sidelight muntin bar width
Bar Depth Enter the sidelight muntin bar depth
Bar Offset Enter the muntin bar offset for Prairie muntins

Door Settings Threshold Pane

Threshold options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.

Parameter Description
Include Threshold Select whether to include a threshold
(1) Depth (Int)/ Enter the interior and exterior threshold depth
(2) Depth (Ext)
(3) Overall Enter the overall threshold depth
Depth
(4) Offset Enter how far to offset the threshold from the center of the door jamb
(5) Thickness Enter the threshold thickness
212 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
(6) Nosing Enter the threshold nosing height
Threshold Select to limit the threshold to under the leaf; otherwise, to extend the threshold
Under Leaf beyond the inside of the jamb, enter the desired Extension width (this amount is
applied to each side of the threshold, and negative values are not permitted)

Door Settings Transom Pane

Transom options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.

Parameter Description
Sash Width Enter the transom sash width
Sash Depth Enter the transom sash depth
Mullion Width Enter the transom mullion width
Mullion Depth Enter the transom mullion depth
Include Muntins Select whether to add muntins to the transom
Style Select the transom muntin style
Vertical/ Enter the number of vertical/horizontal muntin bars
Horizontal
Bars
Bar Width Enter the transom muntin bar width
Bar Depth Enter the transom muntin bar depth
Bar Offset Enter the muntin bar offset for Prairie muntins
 Inserting Doors | 213

Door Settings Trim Pane

Trim options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.

Parameter Description
Include Interior/ Select whether to include interior/exterior trim
Exterior Trim
Width/Depth Enter the interior/exterior trim width and depth

Door Settings Lintel Pane

Lintel options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.
214 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Include Lintel Select to add a lintel above the door or transom
Int. / Ext. Enter the interior and exterior lintel protrusion
Protrusion
(1)Thickness Enter the lintel thickness
(2)Angle Enter the lintel angle
(3)Drop Enter the length of the lintel drop

Door Settings Hardware Pane

Hardware options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.
 Inserting Doors | 215

Parameter Description
Include Hardware Select to include a door hardware set with the door object; see Assigning,
Creating, Editing, and Deleting Door Hardware Sets on page 220.
View Click to open the View Door Hardware Set dialog box to view the parameters for
Hardware the currently selected door hardware set; click OK to return to the Door Settings
dialog box
Manage Click to open the Door Hardware Library dialog box to assign, create, edit, or
Hardware delete door hardware sets; see Assigning, Creating, Editing, and Deleting Door
Hardware Sets on page 220

Door Settings Kick Plates Pane

Kick Plates options are not enabled for the Opening Configuration.
216 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Interior/Exterior Kick Select to include a kick plate on either side of the leaf
Plate
Height Set the height of the kick plate
While the height is variable, the kick plates distance from the right, left
and bottom edges of the door is a fixed value of one inch/25.4 mm.
Class Select a class for the kick plate to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Door
Class> which places the kick plate in the same class as the door object.
 Inserting Doors | 217

Door Settings Interior Wall Detail Pane

Parameter Description
Number of Specify the number of interior wall components to wrap; when interior wall
Components components are specified, the door enables a control point to set the wrapping point

Interior control
point

Splay Wall Select whether to splay the interior wall; the splay can be specified either as an
angle/diagonal or with width and depth values
(1) Angle Enter the interior wall splay angle
(2) Diag Enter the interior wall splay diagonal value
(3) Width Enter the interior wall splay width
(4) Depth Enter the interior wall splay depth
218 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Door Settings Exterior Wall Detail Pane

Parameter Description
Number of Specify the number of exterior wall components to wrap; when exterior wall
Components components are specified, the door enables a control point to set the wrapping point

Exterior
control
point

Splay Wall Select whether to splay the exterior wall; the splay can be specified either as an
angle/diagonal or with width and depth values
(1) Angle Enter the exterior wall splay angle
(2) Diagonal Enter the exterior wall splay diagonal value
(3) Width Enter the exterior wall splay width
(4) Depth Enter the exterior wall splay depth

Door Settings Classes Pane

The visibility of the overall 3D door is controlled by the Class setting on the Object Info palette; component settings
are controlled from the Door Settings dialog box.
 Inserting Doors | 219

Parameter Description
Door components Select a class for each door component to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Door
Class> (or Glazing-Clear, if applicable) which places the component in the same
class as the door object.
For doors with an Opening Configuration, in a 3D view a no fill/no pen
weight extrude completely fills the wall in place of the door; this extrude is
placed in the Interior Jamb class and is filtered out in IFC export operations.
Change the class settings to control the visibility of the extrude, as needed

Door Settings Data Pane

Certain data fields represent calculated values and cannot be edited; as a result, the Field Name and Field Value appear
dimmed for those data fields.
220 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Field Name Select the data field from the list and its name displays beneath the list; information
associated with the Field Name can be specified in the Field Value area. The user
fields can include additional user-defined information with the door.
Field Value Enter data for use in the door schedule

Assigning, Creating, Editing, and Deleting Door Hardware Sets

A door hardware set can be assigned to the door, and a door operator device (such as a knob or lever) can be selected to
display on the 3D door from default content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
To assign, create, edit, or delete a door hardware set:
1. From the Hardware pane of the Door Settings dialog box, select Include Hardware and click Manage
Hardware.
The Door Hardware Library dialog box opens for selecting a door hardware set and door operator device.
 Inserting Doors | 221

Parameter Description
Title Bar Displays the name of the current preference set (see Working with Project
Preference Sets on page 35)
Door hardware set list Lists all defined door hardware sets
Add Creates a new hardware set
Remove Removes the selected hardware set from the library (this action cannot be
undone)
Edit Edits the currently selected hardware set

If the Door Hardware Library.txt file (in [Vectorworks]\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_Def) is already in use, the Add and
Remove buttons on the Door Hardware Library dialog box are disabled and the Edit button changes to a View
button. A Read Only heading will display in the title bar of the Door Hardware Library dialog box and the Edit
Door Hardware Set dialog box is also disabled until the file is writable again.
2. Select Edit or Add.
The Edit or Add Door Hardware Set dialog box opens. The Add dialog box is similar to the Edit dialog box except
that all fields are blank.

Parameter Description
Description Indicates the name of the door hardware set
Hdw Set ID Indicates the unique ID value assigned to the door HW Set field in the door
schedule
Hinge Qty Indicates the number of hinges
Hinge Type Indicates the hinge type
Lockset Type Indicates the lockset type
Closer Type Indicates the closer type
Stop Type Indicates the stop type
Key Code Indicates the key code
Notes Contains any pertinent notes about the door operator device
222 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors

Parameter Description
Symbol List the available door hardware to assign to the door from the default content
(see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)

3. Complete each field with the desired information to add a new door hardware set, or edit the desired fields to
change an existing door hardware set.
4. Click OK, and then click Done to return to the Door Settings dialog box.
The applied information appears in the door hardware legend generated (see Creating Schedules on page 32).

Editing Existing Doors and Creating Schedules

To edit door parameters, click Settings from the Object Info palette, double-click the door to open the Door Settings
dialog box, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a door and select Edit from the context menu.
Door objects can also be edited in the Object Info palette. If the door has been inserted as a plug-in object, most settings
from the Door Settings dialog box display. If the door is a black symbol made from a door object, fields pertaining to
door geometry do not display. See Symbol Types on page 170 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The fields in the Object Info palette are named similarly (but not always identically) to those in the Door Settings
dialog box, and reflect the order in which settings are entered in the dialog box, for ease of editing. Two additional
Object Info palette parameters are available for doors inserted in a wall: click Flip to flip the door orientation, or click
Set Position to activate the Move by Points tool in Reference Point mode and move the door by a specified distance
from a reference point.
When multiple door objects are selected for editing, and if the parameter settings of the selected objects are different,
parameters display in an indeterminate state. Any values changed through the dialog box are changed for all the
selected objects.
The door schedule and/or door hardware legend can be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command
(see Creating Schedules on page 32) or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the default
architectural reports file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect
product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the door schedule or door
hardware legend worksheet to the drawing. (Users of the Vectorworks Landmark product can create the worksheet by
selecting Tools > Reports > Create Reports and creating a report for objects with a door record.) The worksheet is
populated with information from the objects in the current drawing. To edit the worksheet after it has been created, see
Using Worksheets on page 814 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Creating a Window or Door Symbol

If the same customized style of window or door is to be used numerous times in a drawing, consider turning a single
instance of the object into a symbol. This eliminates the need to repeatedly apply parameters, maximizes memory
efficiency, and allows global editing of symbols. See Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
If a custom window or door is unique (that is, it has only one instance) in a project, creating a symbol from it is
unnecessary. However, making a symbol of the installed window or door makes it easy to reuse it in other drawings
should there be a need to do so in the future.
After the symbol is created, it can be selected from the Window or Door Settings dialog box (by selecting Use Symbol
Geometry as described in Inserting Windows on page 175 and Inserting Doors on page 198), where it can take
advantage of functionality such as embedded IDs and data, cavity wrapping, splays, and wall offsets. To enable
automatic ID labeling, from the ID Tag pane of the settings dialog box, select Include on Schedule, and specify the ID
parameters. If necessary, set the class to which the ID is assigned to visible. Alternatively, set the automatic ID labeling
 Creating a Window or Door Symbol | 223

through the ID Label tool; see Using the ID Label Tool on page 566.

Door Terminology Specific to the United Kingdom

Certain door terminology varies in the United Kingdom. The door object is automatically localized in the Vectorworks
program for users with a United Kingdom serial number; however, since the documentation is not localized, the
terminology does not match. This table shows how the terms are mapped.

U.S. Term (in Documentation) U.K. Term (in Vectorworks Program)

Transom Fanlight
Rough Opening Structural Opening
Muntins (Leaf, Sidelight, Transom) Glazing Bars
Colonial (Muntin Style) Georgian
Mullion (Transom) Transom Bar
Trim Architraves
Interior Trim Interior Architraves
Exterior Trim Exterior Architraves
Masonry Opening (Data) Nearest Full-Module of Masonry
Door Configurations Door Configurations
Swing Simple Single Leaf
Swing Bi-Part Double Leaf
Pocket Simple Pocket Single
Pocket Bi-Part Pocket Bi-Parting
Bi-Fold Simple Bi-Fold Single
Bi-Fold Bi-Part Bi-Fold Double
Double Acting Double-Swing Double-Leaf
Leaf Types Leaf Types
Solid Flush
Glass Glazed
224 | Chapter 5: Adding Design Series Windows and Doors
Adding Design Series Stairs 6
Inserting Stairs
The Vectorworks Design Series products have two stair tools available: Stair and Custom Stair. These tools allow you
to build a stair with various geometries. The stair is a hybrid object, offering control over the 2D plan appearance, as
well as the 3D component, for plan and presentation drawings. Both tools include many options, details, and
configurations, and perform many stair design chores automatically.

For drawings that do not require a complex stair object, the Simple Stair tool is also available in the workspaces of the
Vectorworks Landmark and Spotlight products. For the Vectorworks Architect product, the workspace can be edited to
add the Simple Stair tool. See Creating Simple Stairs on page 498 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
for details.
The Stair tool is available in the Vectorworks Architect workspace only. The stair provides a set of common
configurations (straight, L-shaped, U-shaped, and circular). It allows the creation of styles from sets of parameters
controlling groups of geometry and display attributes, to be saved and recalled for use in other stair instances. The stair
can be set to determine its own floor-to-floor height based on the layers the stair connects, and can take advantage of a
project set up with stories. The stair can have separate lower floor and upper floor graphical representations. This
avoids having to draw stairs on two different layers, and edit them separately, to completely represent the same
physical staircase. Stair break options can be set differently on each layer, to get exactly the desired look in Top/Plan
view. The entire stair configuration can be saved as a symbol, to be used again or shared with others, establishing a
library of stair standards. Stair parameters can also be copied from one stair to another. While the geometric variation
of the stair is restrained, the control over 2D and 3D graphic attributes is high. Stairs can be created as 2D only objects
or as hybrid objects.
The Custom Stair tool is available in the workspaces of all Vectorworks Design Series products. The stair supports a
variable number of flights and landings, making it possible to create any combination of elements required by the stair
design. Based on a set of common configurations, the stair can be built on a flight-by-flight, landing-by-landing basis.
The custom stair can then be set to determine its own floor-to-floor height, on the basis of the difference between the
layer elevations. When layers with set elevations are present, the stair automatically calculates the number of risers it
needs, given the floor-to-floor height and the maximum riser height. The stair creates a 2D/3D going up
representation of itself on the lower floor, and a 2D coming down representation of itself on the upper floor. This
avoids having to draw stairs on two different layers, and edit them separately, to completely represent the same
physical staircase. Stair break options can be set differently on each layer, to get exactly the desired look in Top/Plan
view. While the geometric variation and object control of the custom stair is very high, the controls over 2D and 3D
graphic attributes are simpler than the Stair object.

Creating a Stair
If the stair will have a lower layer and upper layer representation, or if its total rise will be defined by layer or story
elements, it should be inserted on the layer representing the lower of the two floors it connects.
226 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

To insert a stair:

1. Click the Stair tool from the Building Shell tool set.
Five modes are available.
Pick up Update

Insert Preferences

Apply

Parameter Description
Insert Inserts a stair with the parameters specified in Preferences
Pick up Picks up selected attributes from a stair to be transferred to another stair;
attributes are selected in the stair preferences
Apply Transfers selected attributes from one stair to another; attributes are selected
in the stair preferences and picked up in Pick up mode. See Transferring
Stair Properties on page 255.
Update Updates all stairs in the drawing, which is necessary when layer scale has
changed and a change to the stairs schematic representation is also required
Preferences Opens the Stair Settings dialog box, to set default stair parameters

2. Select Insert mode and then click Preferences from the Tool bar before placing the stair to set the default stair
parameters. Click OK to set the stair parameters and close the Stair Settings dialog box.
Alternatively, insert the default stair and then click Settings from the Object Info palette, or simply double-click
on an existing stair, to set the stair parameters.
3. When the stair configuration parameters on each tab are set, consider whether to save the stair as a symbol. See
Saving a Stair as a Symbol on page 252.
If the same customized stair is to be used numerous times in a drawing, or will be used in another drawing or by
another designer, this eliminates the need to repeatedly apply parameters, maximizes memory efficiency, and
allows global editing of symbols. See Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
If you dont wish to create a symbol, the stair attributes can easily be transferred. See Transferring Stair
Properties on page 255.
4. Click in the drawing to insert the stair. Click again to set the stairs rotation.
To edit stair parameters for a placed stair, click Settings from the Object Info palette, double-click the stair to open the
Stair Settings dialog box, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a stair and select Edit from the context
menu. Depending on the stair settings, certain parameters are available directly from the Object Info palette; see Stair
Settings Object Info Palette on page 255.
Each tab of the stair parameters is described in the following sections. As the parameters are defined, the preview
dynamically displays the stair appearance.
General Tab on page 227
Geometry Tab on page 229
2D Graphics Tab on page 235
Construction Tab on page 241
 Inserting Stairs | 227

Railings Tab on page 243

Graphic Attributes Tab on page 248
Transferring Stair Properties on page 255

General Tab
1. Click the General tab to set the stair configuration.
Select a predefined configuration as the basis for the new stair. The general configuration can be based on either
pre-defined default content symbols, custom default files in the user folder, a saved symbol in the current file, or
by selecting a typical stair configuration.
From the Symbol Selection list, select an initial stair configuration from the current file, custom defaults, or
from the standard configurations. Once a selection has been made, a symbol selection list allows the symbol or
predefined symbol to be selected from the file, custom, or default content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Click Select Standard Configuration to select an initial stair configuration that most closely matches the type
of stair to create. The Select a Stair Configuration dialog box opens; select one of the configurations. If there
are any current stair parameters that should be saved and transferred to the new stair, select the category or
categories from Transfer settings from current stair.
When the stair configuration has been selected, the available parameters on the tabs change to reflect the selection.
2. Once the initial configuration has been selected, change parameters as necessary to define the stair.
Minimum and maximum value ranges can be set for the stair angle, tread depth, riser height, and step length; see
Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Stair Geometry Parameters on page 254.

Parameter Description
General Settings
228 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Component Select whether to create a 2D only or hybrid 2D/3D object
Class Select a class for the stair. The classes present in the drawing are listed;
alternatively, create a new class by selecting New, select the currently active
class, or select a default class name.
Orientation For stairs with oblique/winder treads, specifies the side of the stair with the
shortest tread depth; for L- and U-Stairs, determines the direction of travel
General Geometry Specify overall parameters for the stair configuration; parameters are
described in Geometry Tab on page 229. These general parameters can be
set here or on the Geometry tab.
Values entered here are also set on the Geometry tab. For stairs with multiple
flights, the Stair Width value entered on the General tab is applied to all
flights on the Geometry tab.
Lock button For any parameter, locks the parameter value, forcing the other parameters to
recalculate to automatically adjust
Preview Displays a preview of the current stair configuration
Preview for Select either a detailed or schematic view for the preview
Stair detail status Stair details may be hidden at certain layer scales, depending on the detail
(in parentheses) display setting on the Display tab of the document preferences (see Display
Preferences on page 30 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Depending on the setting, the status indicates whether stair details will
display for stairs in the drawing, or shows the scale required for the details to
display.
View Select a view for the preview from the list of standard views; 3D views are
not available for a 2D only stair
Render Mode Select a render mode for the preview from the list of available modes
Calculate Forces the stair object the recalculate based on the current set of parameter
values
Previous Stair Loads the parameter values of the most recently created stair
Save as Symbol Creates a symbol based on the current settings; see Saving a Stair as a
Symbol on page 252
Use Minimum/ Enables the use of minimum/maximum settings.
Maximum Values Normally, this option should be enabled to create stairs with valid proportions
and settings that meet standard requirements. However, during the initial
design phase, it may be convenient to temporarily disable the settings while
exploring various geometry and design possibilities.
Edit Opens the Min./Max. Settings dialog box; see Setting Minimum and
Maximum Values for Stair Geometry Parameters on page 254

3. If you switch to another stair configuration after making parameter changes on any tab, the New Stair dialog box
opens.
 Inserting Stairs | 229

Switching to a new configuration loses any parameter settings that have already been made. The settings from the
current stair configuration can be transferred to the new stair if needed. Select the settings to transfer, or click All
to select all settings and None to deselect all the settings.

Geometry Tab
1. Click the Geometry tab to set both basic and detailed stair geometry based on the configuration selected on the
General tab. The geometry parameters automatically influence each other; entering a few desired parameters
causes the remaining parameters to adjust accordingly.
The diagrams next to each parameter indicate the relevant area of the stair.
230 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description Applies to

Lock button For any parameter, locks the parameter value, forcing the All
other parameters to recalculate to automatically adjust;
see Stair Geometry Errors on page 234
Link button Links stair flight widths so that they are set to the same Stairs with multiple
value automatically; enter a value for one of the widths, flights
and click Link to enter the same value for all linked
flights
Total Rise: By Sets the floor-to-floor height of the stair by either a value All
Value or By or by layer elevation settings of the layers/levels it
Layer Elevation connects. If by layer elevation, the Total Rise By Layer
Elevations dialog box opens; see Step 2.
Tread Depth(G) Specifies the average depth of the stair tread, measured All
from the face of the riser to the face of the next riser.
Also known as the going.
Riser Height(R) Indicates the average height of the stair risers All
Step Displays the step length, which is calculated as 2 * the All
Length(2R+G) Riser Height (R) + Tread Depth (G)
Stair Width Sets the overall width of the stair Stairs with a single flight
Stair Width 1/2/3 Sets the width of each flight of stairs Stairs with multiple
flights,
L-Stair, Single Landing,
L-Stair with winders
U-Stair, Single and
Double Landings,
U-Stair with winders
Length Specifies the total length of the stair, measured from the All
nosing of the starting tread to the end of the last tread
Walk Line Indicates the length of the line that determines the All
Length direction of the stair and is the critical line from which
the tread depth, oblique dimensions, and other values are
calculated
Draw Top Tread When enabled, the top tread is drawn; its parameters can All
be specified independently from the rest of the stair.
Select the parameter from the list, and enter its value.
Min. Inside Specifies the minimum allowable tread depth value for All
Tread Depth oblique, winder, or fixed angle winder stair treads
 Inserting Stairs | 231

Parameter Description Applies to

Walk Line Offset Sets the walk line location All
Options Walk Line by Offset: Sets the distance to offset the
walk line from the inside of the stair; enter the offset
value
Walk Line on Center: For stairs with fewer than
two stair widths, sets the walk line offset to 0.5
times the stair width
Walk Line Centered on All Flights: For stairs with
several flights, sets the walk line offset to 0.5 times
the stair width, centering the walk line for all
flights.
If the stair has different flight widths, the walk line
displays centered for all flights, but the calculation
of treads and winders is based on the first flight
only.
Walk Line Centered on First Flight: For stairs
with several flights, sets the walk line offset to 0.5
times the stair width. For stairs with winders, the
walk line is centered based on the first flight only.
Oblique Bottom Offsets the distance of the front edge of the first tread All
Tread from the start of the overall length of the stair (as
measured along the walk line)
Oblique Top Offsets the distance of the front edge of the last tread All
Tread from the start of the overall length of the stair (as
measured along the walk line)
Num. of Risers Sets the number of risers for the stair Straight, Single Flight
Run
L-Stair, Winder
U-Stair, Single and
Double Winder Return
Circular Stair
Num. of Risers 1 Sets the number of risers for the first or bottom flight of Straight, Single
stairs Landing, Double
Landing
L-Stair, Single Landing
U-Stair, Single and
Double Landings
Num. of Risers 2 Sets the number of risers for the second or middle flight Straight, Single
of stairs Landing, Double
Landing
L-Stair, Single Landing
U-Stair, Single and
Double Landings
232 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description Applies to

Num. of Risers 3 Sets the number of risers for the third or top flight of Straight, Double
stairs Landing
U-Stair, Double
Landings
Landing Length Indicates the landing length Straight, Single
1 Landing, Double
Landing
L-Stair, Single Landing
U-Stair, Single and
Double Landings
Landing Length Sets the length of the second landing Straight, Double
2 Landing
U-Stair, Double Landing
Side 1 Indicates the overall outside length of the stair, as L-Stair, Single Landing
measured from the start or bottom of the stair to the U-Stair, Single and
outside corner of the landing Double Landings
Side 2 Indicates the overall outside length of the stair, as L-Stair, Single Landing
measured from the outside corner of the landing to the U-Stair, Single and
end or top of the stair, or to the outside corner of the next Double Landings
landing
Side 3 Indicates the overall outside length of the stair, as U-Stair, Single and
measured from the outside corner of the landing to the Double Landings
end or top of the stair
Offset 1 Specifies the distance from the front edge of the landing L-Stair, Single Landing
or last riser of the first flight to the inside corner of the U-Stair, Single and
first landing Double Landings,
Fixed Angle Winder
stairs
Offset 2 Specifies the distance from the inside corner of the U-Stair, Double
landing to the back edge of the landing or first riser of Landings,
the next flight Fixed Angle Winder
stairs
Offset 3 Specifies the distance from the front edge of the landing U-Stair, Double
or last riser of the second flight to the inside corner of the Landings,
second landing Double Fixed Angle
Winder
Offset 4 Specifies the distance from the inside corner of the U-Stair, Double
second landing to the back edge of the second landing or Landings,
first riser of the next flight Double Fixed Angle
Winder
Outside Sets the diameter measured from the outside of the stair Circular Stair
Diameter
Inside Diameter Sets the diameter measured from the inside of the stair Circular Stair
Sweep Sets the angle of the arc formed by the walk line Circular Stair
 Inserting Stairs | 233

2. If setting the stair Total Rise by layer elevation instead of by a specific value, the height of the stair can be
constrained by layer or story elements at its top and bottom boundaries; the lower floor and upper floor indicate
the two stories the stair connects. Adjusting a bounding element causes the height of the stair to automatically
change accordingly.
Select By Layer Elevation; the Total Rise by Layer Elevations dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the stair.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting
Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide).
Alternatively, the top of the stair can be bound by one of the level types
defined for the story or the story above it. By setting the top of the stair
to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes, the
height of the stair changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the stair from its specified top bound height
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the stair.
Alternatively, the bottom of the stair can be bound by one of the level
types defined for the story or the story below it. By setting the bottom of
the stair to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story
changes, the height of the stair changes automatically to match.
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the stair, sets the offset from its specified bottom
bound height
Z of Top Bound Displays the elevation value of the stairs upper boundary
Z of Bottom Bound Displays the elevation value of the stairs lower boundary
Calculated Total Rise Displays the calculated total rise value for the stair based on the stairs
upper and lower boundaries

Click OK to set the stair total rise.

3. The Preview contains two preview graphics.
The lower preview graphic displays a detailed section/elevation view of the treads and risers, and indicates the
current rise angle.
234 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Rise angle

The upper preview graphic is interactive.

Click on an upper or lower tread to set the oblique tread parameters for the highlighted treads.
L- and U-Stairs have clickable red areas at the corner of the landing. Click each area to set rounded corner
parameters for the inside and outside corners of the landing. The Stair Landing Corners dialog box opens. For
each corner, set the rounded corner parameters to a right angle, or round the corner by specifying a chamfer or
fillet value.

For fixed angle winder stair configurations, click on the stair winder to set the winder parameters. The Winder
Parameters dialog box opens. Specify the number of treads for the winder section of the stair, and select
whether the winder tread depths should match the tread depths for the straight parts of the stair. If maintaining
a constant tread depth is desired, the minimum winder tread depth may need to be adjusted to prevent errors
(see Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Stair Geometry Parameters on page 254).

Stair Geometry Errors

The Geometry tab allows values to be locked, which forces other parameters to recalculate while maintaining
appropriate calculated values for the stair. Occasionally, a invalid entry is attempted, which generates an error due to
other locked values. An alert dialog box notifies you of the error and offers several possible options to avoid it.
Situations which can generate an alert include:
 Inserting Stairs | 235

The total rise calculation is based on multiplying the number of risers by the riser height, and therefore cannot be
edited without changing one of the values. Similarly, the number of risers or riser height cannot be edited when the
total rise is locked.

Parameter to be Locked Unlocked Resolution

edited
Total rise Riser Height Num. of Risers Change the riser height or the total rise
and number of risers as suggested, or
return to previous values
Total rise Num. of Risers Riser Height Modify the riser height, or the riser
height and the number of risers as
suggested, or return to previous values
Total rise Riser Height and N/A Change the riser height and/or the
Num. of Risers number of risers as suggested, or return
to previous values
Riser height Total rise N/A Modify the total rise, or the riser height
and number of risers as suggested, or
return to previous values
Number of risers Total rise N/A Change the total rise, or the riser height/
step length, or the riser height and
number of risers as suggested, or return
to previous values

The total rise of the stair and the stair length (or sweep angle, for circular stairs) impact other values such as tread
depth, riser height, and the number of risers. When the length/sweep angle is locked, it may become impossible to
obtain valid entries for the other parameters. Since the stair length or sweep angle is a multiple of the tread depth,
one cannot be edited when the other is locked.

Parameter to be Locked Resolution

edited
Total rise Length or Sweep Change the number of risers and step length, or unlock the
Angle length/sweep angle as suggested, or return to previous
values
Tread depth Length or Sweep Modify the length/sweep angle, and/or change the number
Angle of risers and the tread depth as suggested, or return to
previous values
Length or Sweep Tread Depth Change the tread depth, and/or the number of risers, or
Angle change the risers and length/sweep angle as suggested, or
return to previous values

2D Graphics Tab
The remaining four stair configuration tabs have a method of saving and recalling each tabs settings or style. The
settings on the tab can be saved as a set and then loaded, replacing the current tab parameters. See Managing Stair
236 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Styles on page 251.

1. Click the 2D Graphics tab to set the stairs 2D appearance on lower and, if desired, upper floors. The lower floor is
always the floor where the stair has been placed. Selecting display options for the upper floor is optional; the
upper floor representation is usually on another layer, and can be specifically selected here. These parameters
apply only to the Top/Plan view, and do not affect the 3D appearance of the stair.

Parameter Description
2D Graphic Styles Saves and recalls styles from a saved set; see Managing Stair Styles on
page 251
View Determines the view to apply the parameters to the stair; depending on
drawing settings like layer scale and the document preference Hide details,
the detailed or schematic view status is displayed
Detailed Applies the 2D graphic parameters to stairs in a detailed layer scale view
Schematic Applies the 2D graphic parameters to stairs in a schematic scaled view
Accept for all Applies the 2D graphic parameters to stairs in all views (detailed and
Views schematic)
Stair Break Settings Sets the stair break parameters; select the stair break configuration, and then
refine the display with the additional parameters
Break Elevation Sets the Z-height (relative to Layer Z=0) for the stair break
Break Line Angle Specifies the angle of the break line, measured from the leading edge of the
tread/riser
Break Lines Sets the distance between the pair of parallel break lines, measured in page
Separation scale units
 Inserting Stairs | 237

Parameter Description
Break Line Indicates how far to extend the break lines past the sides of the stair
Extensions
Draw Outlines at When selected, draws boundary outlines around the stair object
Break
Show Markers at When selected, adds start and end markers to the walk line above and below
Break the stair break
End of Walk Line Sets the end of the walk line at either the last tread before the stair break or
is: directly at the break
2D Graphics Settings Controls the display of the walk line, nosing, stringers, headroom outline, and
railings in Top/Plan view only
Show Nosing/Riser Displays the stair nosing and riser offset
Offset
Show Tread Offset Displays the left and right tread offset
Show Stringers Displays the stair stringers
Show Headroom Displays the headroom outline; specify the headroom height above the stair
Outline
Show Handrail Displays the handrail (railing parameters are set on the Railings tab)
Show Top Rail Displays the top rail of the handrail and/or guardrail
Show Posts Displays railing posts
Show Railing above Displays the railing above the stair break
Stair Break
Lower Floor The stair always displays on the lower floor (the floor where it has been
placed); set the display of stair breaks, walk lines, arrow directions, and stair
text
238 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Display Stair Select the stair display configuration for the lower floor
Plain (no Break): Does not draw a stair break; the stair is drawn as set by
the 2D attributes on the Graphic Attributes tab
Solid with Break: Draws a stair break; the stair is drawn as set by the 2D
attributes and 2D Stair Break on the Graphic Attributes tab, but line styles
remain solid
Below Break Only: Draws a stair break; all geometry above the stair break
is hidden
Above Break Only: Draws a stair break; all geometry below the stair
break is hidden
Break, Dashed Above: Draws a stair break; all line styles above the stair
break are automatically dashed according to the settings on the Graphics
Attributes tab
Break, Dashed Below: Draws a stair break; all line styles below the stair
break are automatically dashed according to the settings on the Graphics
Attributes tab
Dashed Above Only: Draws a stair break; all line styles above the stair
break are automatically dashed according to the settings on the Graphics
Attributes tab
Dashed Below Only: Draws a stair break; all line styles below the stair
break are automatically dashed according to the settings on the Graphics
Attributes tab
Walk Line Below/ When selected, draws a walk line below/above the stair break. For Plain (no
Above Stair Break break) Display Stair style, draws a walk line the full length of the stair. When
a walk line is indicated, select whether to display a start and/or end marker on
the ends of the walk line (to show markers at a break, Show Markers at
Break must be enabled). Set the arrow direction. The marker style is set on
the Graphic Attributes tab.
Draw Entire Break For Below Break Only and Dashed Below Only, select whether to draw the
top of the stair break line, in addition to the bottom of the stair break line
(which is always shown)
Stair Data Opens the Stair Data Settings dialog box, for setting the appearance of stair
text on the lower floor (see Step 2)
Upper Floor Select to display the stair on the upper floor in both detailed and schematic
views, and set the display of stair breaks, walk lines, arrow directions, and
stair text for the upper floor
Layer Specify the layer where the upper floor representation of the stair will be
displayed. This selection affects both the detailed and schematic display of
the stair on the upper floor. It is not related to the total rise stair height
selection on the General or Geometry tab.
Upper floor stair The Display Stair, walk line, and Stair Data options function the same as for
configuration the lower floor
 Inserting Stairs | 239

Parameter Description
Break Offset Adjusts the position of the stair break along the walk line. Enter a positive or
negative offset to position the break without any gaps between upper and
lower floors.
Preview Displays a preview of the upper and lower floors of the 2D stair with the
parameters applied

2. Click Stair Data for the lower, and optionally, the upper floor, to set the display of the 2D stair information text.
The Stair Data Settings dialog box opens. The stair configuration determines the number of available run or flight
parameters. Stair data text appearance is set on the Graphic Attributes tab.

Parameter Description
Show Numbers of When selected, displays the riser numbers for the stair.
Risers Specify the text position and offset for the flight and the step, and set the text
rotation.
Position in flight For straight stairs, indicate whether riser numbers display on the center, left,
or right of the flight. For other stairs, indicate whether riser numbers display
centered, or on the inner or outer side of the stair flight. The Offset value sets
the distance between the riser numbers and the stair boundary.
Position in step Sets the riser position centered on the step or at the start of the tread. The
Offset value sets the distance between the riser numbers and the start of the
tread, for numbers at the start of the tread only.
240 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Rotation Specifies the rotation of the riser numbers

Horizontal in stair: riser numbers Vertical in stair: riser numbers Aligned to edge: riser numbers
always remain horizontal always remain vertical rotate by flight angle

Aligned to tread: riser numbers Perpendicular to tread: riser numbers

rotate with tread angle remain perpendicular to tread edge
Run For each available run of stairs with multiple flights, select whether to include
text for the total rise, average riser height, average tread depth, arrow
direction (Up or Down, depending on walk line direction), and/or walk line
length. As each item is selected for display, its code appears in the text box;
text can also be typed between items. Select Line Break to add a carriage
return between items. Set the angle of the text.
Note For the entire stair, select whether to include text for the total rise, average
riser height, average tread depth, arrow direction (Up or Down, depending on
walk line direction), and/or walk line length. As each item is selected for
display, its code appears in the text box; text can also be typed between items.
Select Line Break to add a carriage return between items. Set the angle of the
text.

The position of the stair run and note text can be adjusted by moving its control point.

Text control point

3. Click OK to return to the Stair Settings dialog box.

 Inserting Stairs | 241

Construction Tab
The settings on the tab can be saved as a set and then loaded, replacing the current tab parameters. See Managing Stair
Styles on page 251.
Click the Construction tab to specify stair construction parameters. The parameters displayed depend on the
selected construction configuration.

Parameter Description Applies to

Construction Saves and recalls styles from a saved set; see Managing All
Styles Stair Styles on page 251
View Determines the view to apply the parameters to the stair; All
depending on drawing settings like layer scale and the
document preference Hide details, the detailed or
schematic view status is displayed
Detailed Applies the construction parameters to stairs in a detailed All
layer scale view
Schematic Applies the construction parameters to stairs in a schematic All
scaled view
Accept for all Applies the construction parameters to stairs in all views All
Views (detailed and schematic)
Construction Select the type of construction for the stair All
Configuration
Solid Stair Models the stair structure as single, monolithic geometry, All
but still includes treads and risers
242 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description Applies to

Stringer Models the stair structure as one, two, or three stringers All
Underneath (carriages) underneath that support the treads and risers
above them. If three stringers are specified, the third will
automatically be centered between the others, not the edge
of the steps.
Stringer Models the stair structure as two stringers (carriages) on All
Outside either side of the stair which support the treads and risers
above them
Concrete Stair Models the stair structure as monolithic, without separate All
treads or risers
Circular Stair For circular stair configurations, select to obtain circular All
stair construction parameters
Construction All
Settings
Upper Floor Wraps the 3D stair geometry at the top of the stair around All
Thickness the edge of the floor slab by the indicated distance,
correctly terminating all parts related to the construction
type
Lower Floor Wraps the 3D stair geometry at the bottom of the stair All
Thickness around the edge of the floor slab by the indicated distance,
correctly terminating all parts related to the construction
type. If set to 0 (zero) truncates the stair geometry so the
bottom of the stair rests on top of the slab
Landing Specifies the thickness of the stair landing, excluding any Stairs with a single
Thickness treads. The landing thickness plus the tread thickness is landing
equal to the distance from the top of the tread to the bottom
of the landing (solid stairs) or stringer (stringer
underneath)
Landing Specifies the thickness of the first stair landing, excluding Stairs with two
Thickness 1 any treads landings
Landing Specifies the thickness of the second stair landing, Stairs with two
Thickness 2 excluding any treads landings
Solid When selected, draws 3D geometry below the treads and Solid
Structure risers representing the structural mass of the stair. Specify Concrete
Thickness the distance from the rear face to the inside edge where the
riser and tread meet.
Tread When selected, draws 3D stair tread geometry; specify the Solid
Thickness tread thickness Stringer Underneath
Stringer Outside
Riser When selected, draws 3D stair riser geometry; specify the Solid
Thickness riser thickness Stringer Underneath
Stringer Outside
 Inserting Stairs | 243

Parameter Description Applies to

Nosing/Riser When selected, draws both 2D and 3D stair nosing All
Offset geometry; set the distance that the nosing extends past the
riser face over the preceding tread
Create Top For stairs with the Draw Top Tread option disabled on the All
Riser and Geometry tab, select whether to display the top riser and
Nosing tread nosing in 3D views
Offset Right Offsets the stair body from the right/inner edge of the stair Solid
(or Inner treads and riser by the distance specified; as determined by Stringer Underneath
Offset) the stair width, configuration, and orientation
Offset Left (or Offsets the stair body from the left/outer edge of the stair Solid
Outer Offset) treads and riser by the distance specified; as determined by Stringer Underneath
the stair width, configuration, and orientation
Stringer Sets the stringers structural clear depth Stringer Underneath
Depth Stringer Outside
Stringer Sets the thickness (width) of the stringer Stringer Underneath
Width Stringer Outside
Stringer For stairs with one stringer, specifies the stringers offset Stringer Underneath
Distance distance from the center of the stair
Tread/Stringer Sets the treads offset distance from the bottom of the Stringer Outside
Offset stringers depth, as measured to the back, bottom edge of
the tread
Stringer Specifies the distance that the stringer extends past the Stringer Outside
Extension at front edge of the starting (bottom) tread
Stair Bottom
Stringer Specifies the distance that the stringer extends past the Stringer Outside
Extension at front edge of the last (top) tread
Stair Top
Column When selected, adds a central column All, when stair
configuration is
Circular Stair
Custom Specifies the central column height for spiral stairs All, when stair
Column configuration is
Height Circular Stair
Custom Specifies the central column diameter for spiral stairs All, when stair
Column configuration is
Diameter Circular Stair
Outside Sets the value for the tread nosing at the outside diameter Circular stair, when
Nosing of a circular stair stair configuration is
also circular stair

Railings Tab
The settings on the tab can be saved as a set and then loaded, replacing the current tab parameters. See Managing Stair
Styles on page 251
244 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Click the Railings tab to set the stairs handrail and guardrail parameters. The Railings tab is divided into three
panes. On the left, the handrail and guardrail categories display, along with each current setting for the left, right,
or both sides of the stair. Handrail and guardrail parameters are set separately. Click a disclosure arrow to reveal
handrail or guardrail parameter categories. Select a category to edit its parameter settings in the middle pane. On
the right, three previews display the railing cross-section, top/plan stair view, and isometric stair view.

Parameter Description
Railing Styles Saves and recalls styles from a saved set; see Managing Stair Styles on
page 251
View Determines the view to apply the parameters to the stair; depending on
drawing settings like layer scale and the document preference Hide details,
the detailed or schematic view status is displayed
Detailed Applies the railing parameters to stairs in a detailed layer scale view
Schematic Applies the railing parameters to stairs in a schematic scaled view
Accept for all Applies the railing parameters to stairs in all views (detailed and schematic)
Views
Accept Settings for Select the railing to which the current settings apply
Right/Left or Applies the parameters to the selected side only
Inside/Outside
Railing
Both Sides Applies the parameters to railings on both sides
Handrail
 Inserting Stairs | 245

Parameter Description
Show Handrail When selected, adds a handrail to the stair and enables the handrail
parameters; Show displays for the handrail settings
Position
Height Sets the vertical distance from the leading edge of the tread/nosing to the top
of the handrail
Handrail Position Select whether the railing is on the stair or next to the stair
Offset to Tread Indicates the distance between the edge of the stair (the solid structure or the
Edge stringers) and the handrail
Top Rail
Profile Type Select the basic geometry of the top rail
Line: A 3D polyline serves as the railing profile
Flat: A 3D polygon with width, but no height, serves as the railing profile
Round: The cross-section is round, controlled by width
Rectangular: The cross-section is rectangular, controlled by width and
height
Width Sets the width for flat, rough, and square top railing geometry
Height Sets the height of rectangular top railing geometry
Bottom Extension Specifies the distance the top rail extends past the leading edge of the first
tread or start of the stair; select whether the bottom extension is horizontal to
the bottom riser or slopes with the stair
Top Extension Specifies the distance the top rail extends past the leading edge of the last/top
tread/end of the stair; select whether the top extension is horizontal to the
bottom riser or slopes with the stair
Guardrail
Show Guardrail When selected, adds a guardrail to the stair and enables the guardrail
parameters; Show displays for the guardrail settings
Position
Height Sets the vertical distance from the leading edge of the tread/nosing to the top
of the guardrail
Guardrail Position Select whether the railing is on the stair or next to the stair
Offset to Tread Indicates the distance between the edge of the stair (the solid structure or the
Edge stringers) and the guardrail
Top Rail
Create Top Rail Select whether to create a top rail on the guardrail
246 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Profile Type Select the basic geometry of the top rail
Line: A 3D polyline serves as the railing profile
Flat: A 3D polygon with width, but no height, serves as the railing profile
Round: The cross-section is round, controlled by width
Rectangular: The cross-section is rectangular, controlled by width and
height
Width Sets the width for flat, rough, and square top railing geometry
Height Sets the height of rectangular top railing geometry
Start at Bottom Defines where the top rail of the guardrail begins
At Post: The top rail begins at the first post
At Tread: The top rail begins at the stair tread
Extend Tread by: Sets a specific distance the top rail extends past the
leading edge of the first tread or start of the stair. Select whether the bottom
extension is horizontal to the bottom riser or slopes with the stair.
End at Top Defines where the top rail of the guardrail ends
At Post: The top rail ends at the last post
At Tread: The top rail ends at the stair tread
Extend Tread by: Sets a specific distance the top rail extends past the
leading edge of the last/top tread/end of the stair. Select whether the bottom
extension is horizontal to the bottom riser or slopes with the stair.
Frame
Create Frame Select whether to create a frame on the guardrail
Frame Type Sets the geometry for the area below the top rail, and between posts
Frame: Adds a frame to support the frame bars; the frame must include at
least one of the top, bottom, or left-right vertical supports
Panel: Adds a solid panel below the top rail
Top/Bottom/ Select options to include in the frame
Left-Right Verticals
Offset to Top Rail Indicates the perpendicular distance between the bottom of the top railing, and
the top of the frame or panel
Offset to Stair Sets the perpendicular distance between the leading edge of the tread/nosing
or the bottom of the frame or panel
Profile Type For Frame types, sets the frame cross-section geometry
Line: A 3D polyline serves as the railing profile
Flat: A 3D polygon with width, but no height, serves as the railing profile
Round: The cross-section is round, controlled by width
Rectangular: The cross-section is rectangular, controlled by width and
height
 Inserting Stairs | 247

Parameter Description
Width Sets the width of the frame or panel
Height Sets the height of rectangular profiles
Frame Bars
Create Horizontal Select whether to create horizontal frame bars
Bars
Create Vertical Bars Select whether to create vertical frame bars
Profile Type Sets the cross-section geometry of the frame bars
Line: A 3D polyline serves as the frame bar profile
Flat: A 3D polygon with width, but no height, serves as the frame bar
profile
Round: The cross-section is round, controlled by thickness
Rectangular: The cross-section is rectangular, controlled by thickness and
depth
Thickness Sets the thickness of round and square frame bar profiles
Depth Sets the depth of rectangular frame bar profiles
Maximum Distance Specifies the maximum distance between centerlines of frame bar geometry,
setting the spacing of the frame bars
Posts
Create Posts Select whether to create vertical supports of the top rail and frames
Shape Sets the geometry of the guardrail posts
Line: A 3D polyline serves as the post profile
Flat: A 3D polygon with width, but no depth, serves as the post profile
Round: The cross-section is round, controlled by width
Rectangular: The cross-section is rectangular, controlled by width and
depth
Width Sets the width for flat, round, and rectangular posts
Depth Sets the depth of rectangular posts
Arrangement Determines how to place the posts
On each Tread Places one post at the midpoint of the tread depth for each tread
Distance (approx.) Specifies the distance between each post
248 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Placement Links the post positions on the left and right sides of the stair based on one of
these methods:
Each side individually: The post positions are calculated separately for
each side of the stair based on the approximate Distance value
Left side has priority: The left side post distances are calculated based on
the approximate Distance value; the posts on the right are placed
symmetrically
Right side has priority: The right post distances are calculated based on
the approximate Distance value; the posts on the left side are placed
symmetrically
On each Corner Places a post at each landing corner, regardless of the distance set
Min Distance Specifies the minimum distance between a corner post and the next adjacent
post on a landing
Previews Three preview panes display:
The detailed plan and elevation view of a representative portion of the
railing system
An overall top/plan view of the stair
An isometric view of the stair, when Component is set to 2D and 3D on the
General tab

Graphic Attributes Tab

The settings on the tab can be saved as a set and then loaded, replacing the current tab parameters. See Managing Stair
Styles on page 251.
1. Click the Graphic Attributes to specify the appearance of stair components.
 Inserting Stairs | 249

Parameter Description
Attributes Styles Saves and recalls styles from a saved set; see Managing Stair Styles on
page 251
View Determines the view to apply the parameters to the stair; depending on
drawing settings like layer scale and the document preference Hide details,
the detailed or schematic view status is displayed
Detailed Applies the graphic attributes to stairs in a detailed layer scale view
Schematic Applies the graphic attributes to stairs in a schematic scaled view
Accept for all Applies the graphic attributes to stairs in all views (detailed and schematic)
Views
Graphic Attribute Lists all geometry and text parameters that have graphic attributes settings,
Settings divided by 2D and 3D attributes. Click the disclosure arrow to reveal further
parameters under certain categories.
Each categorys current class, fill, pen, line style, line thickness, opacity, and
if applicable, texture is displayed. Double-click on a line to set attributes.
Select a class for each stair component to control its appearance and visibility.
The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class
by selecting New, select the currently active class, select the default class
name, or select the class named <Stair Class> which places the stair
component in the same class as the stair object.
250 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
2D Walk Line and In addition to the class, pen, fill, and other typical attributes, the walk line
Marker Attributes and markers have specific parameters
The Double Line, Oval, and Filled Arrowhead marker styles are
available especially for stair walk lines to meet DIN requirements
Start Marker Sets the graphics for the beginning of the walk line arrow that indicates the
Up direction of travel on the stair, from the bottom tread, or start, of the stair
End Marker Sets the graphics for the end of the walk line arrow that indicates the Up
direction of travel on the stair, at the top, or end, of the stair
Fit to tread depth Fits the line end marker of the walk line to the depth of the tread

Fit to tread Fit to tread

depth enabled depth disabled

Set Class Style Sets each attribute (fill, pen, line style, line thickness, opacity, and texture) of
all stair components to the By Class setting. The attributes are then
controlled by the class assigned to the component. (See Setting Class
Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.) To
set only the opacity by class, select the Use Class Opacity option when
defining the graphic attributes for each category.
Remove Class Style Removes the By Class setting for each attribute of all stair components.
The attributes are then controlled by the individual attribute settings made for
each component.
Apply to all Stairs Applies all the attribute settings of the current stair to all stairs in the file,
including symbol definitions and stairs that may be within groups.
Use caution when selecting this option, as it affects all stairs in the file.

2. The graphic attributes of each item is displayed, and can be set by double-clicking on the items line.
An attributes dialog box with the name of the item is displayed. See The Attributes Palette on page 501 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on setting attributes.
 Inserting Stairs | 251

3. Set the attributes and click OK to return to the Graphic Attributes tab.

Managing Stair Styles

In the Stair Settings dialog box, the 2D Graphics, Construction, Railings, and Graphic Attributes tabs have the option
of saving the current tabs settings as a style that can be recalled later. The stair minimum/maximum settings can also
be saved as a style set.
Saving Parameter Styles
To save tab settings as a style:
1. When the tab parameters have been set, click Save (located in the Styles area at the top left of the tab).
The Save Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Create New Style Saves the settings in a new style set; enter the set name
Replace Style Replaces the selected style with the current set of parameters

2. Click OK to save the style set.

The new style name appears in the Styles list.
252 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Recalling a Saved Style

To recall a saved style:
Select the style from the Styles list. Any currently set parameters are replaced by those of the saved style set. The
Styles list contains saved styles as well as a limited number of default styles.
Managing Styles
Styles can be renamed and deleted.
Default styles (located in the application folder) cannot be renamed or deleted.
To manage styles:
1. Click Manage Styles (located in the Styles area at the top left of the tab).
The Styles dialog box opens, listing all currently saved style sets and their saved location.

Parameter Description
Rename Opens the Rename Style dialog box, to rename the currently selected style
name. Enter the new name for the style. Click OK to return to the Styles
dialog box.
Delete Deletes the selected style

2. Click OK to return to the Stair Settings dialog box.

Saving a Stair as a Symbol

The stair configuration, along with all its parameters, can be saved as a symbol for use again in the current file or in
another library file. The stair is saved as a red symbol and becomes a plug-in object with pre-set parameters when
inserted. See Understanding Symbols on page 169 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Inserting Stairs | 253

To save the stair as a symbol:

1. From the Stair Settings dialog box, click Save as symbol.
The Save Stair dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Destination Select whether to save the stair symbol in the current file or in a library file
available in the user folder
Save as symbol in Saves the stair as a symbol in the current file
current document
Save as template in Saves the stair symbol to a custom default library file located in the user
library file folder; the exact location is displayed upon saving
Name Enter a name for the symbol
Symbol Folder Select the symbol folder from the available hierarchy in the current file;
subfolder lists are displayed for the selected folder
Symbol folder list Displays available subfolders for the selected symbol folder; select a location
for saving the new stair symbol
New Folder Creates a new symbol folder in the current file; provide a folder name
Browse Browses the subfolder contents of the currently selected symbol folder

2. Select whether to save the stair symbol in the current file or in a library file.
To save the symbol in a library file, select Save as template in library file and enter a name for the symbol
To save the symbol in the current file, select Save as symbol in current document, enter a name for the
symbol, and select a symbol folder destination for the symbol by double-clicking on the selected symbol folder
name
3. Click OK.
254 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

If the symbol was saved in the user default library, it is available from the General tabs Symbol Selection list
under the Custom Defaults category. Library files can be shared among users.

If the symbol was saved in the current file, it is available from the General tabs Symbol Selection list under
the Current Document category, and also from the Resource Browser. Symbols can be shared by exporting
them from the Resource Browser (see Exporting Custom Resources on page 616).

Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Stair Geometry Parameters

When setting stair parameters, a geometry envelope can be set to specify the allowable value ranges for tread depth,
riser height, step length, and stair angle. Setting these values can assist with creating proportional stair geometry that
complies with standards.
During the initial phases of design, it may be convenient to temporarily disable the minimum/maximum
restrictions by deselecting Use Minimum/Maximum Values from the Stair Settings dialog box.
The stair minimum/maximum settings can be saved as a style set and then loaded, replacing the current dialog box
parameters. See Managing Stair Styles on page 251
To set minimum and maximum stair parameter ranges:
1. From the Geometry pane of the Stair Settings dialog box, click Edit.
The Min/Max Settings dialog box opens.
 Inserting Stairs | 255

Parameter Description
Min/Max Styles Saves and recalls styles from a saved set; see Managing Stair Styles on
page 251
Values Specify the minimum and maximum values for the tread depth, riser height,
and step length. Additionally, set the maximum angle (steepness) for the
entire stair. For fixed angle winder stairs, set the minimum tread depth value.

2. Click OK to set the geometry minimum and maximum values.

Stair Settings Object Info Palette

Certain stair parameters can be edited directly from the Object Info palette, depending on the settings of the selected
stair. These parameters display when the Total Rise of the stair is set by Layer Elevation, or the stair has an upper floor
representation. All of the stair parameters can be edited by clicking Settings from the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the stair.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide).
Alternatively, the top of the stair can be bound by one of the level types
defined for the story or the story above it. By setting the top of the stair to the
level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes, the height of the
stair changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the stair from its specified top bound height
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the stair.
Alternatively, the bottom of the stair can be bound by one of the level types
defined for the story or the story below it. By setting the bottom of the stair to
the level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes, the height of
the stair changes automatically to match.
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the stair, sets the offset from its specified bottom bound
height
Upper Layer If an upper floor representation of the stair is enabled, specify the layer to
display the representation.
Settings Opens the Stair Settings dialog box, to edit all of the stair parameters

Transferring Stair Properties

Specific stair parameters can be transferred from one stair to another.

To transfer stair attributes:

1. Click the Stair tool from the Building Shell tool set and select Pick up mode from the Tool bar.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to set the transfer parameters.
The transfer attributes cannot be accessed when clicking Settings from the Object Info palette.
3. Click the Transfer tab.
256 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Attributes Select the stair attributes to transfer; selected attributes display with a check
mark
All/None Selects/deselects all the attributes with a single click
Picked up values When the selected attributes are picked up in Pick up mode, they also
become stair defaults become the default parameters for the Stair tool
Accept for all Stairs in The most recently picked up, selected attributes, are applied to all stairs in the
Drawing file

4. Select the attributes to transfer, and select whether the attributes should become Stair tool defaults and/or should
also apply to all stairs in the file.
5. Click OK.
6. In Pick up mode, click on the stair with the desired attributes.
The cursor changes to an eyedropper, and the source stair is highlighted in red.
7. Move the cursor to the target stair, and click Apply mode from the Tool bar.
Press the Option (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) key to switch between the Pick up and Apply modes.
8. Click on the target stair to transfer the selected attributes.
 Inserting Stairs | 257

Creating a Custom Stair

The custom stair obtains some of its parameters based on the layer where it is placed and, if it is configured to do so,
displays on both the lower layer and upper layer; stairs should be placed in a drawing with layers set up according to
the project building levels.
A custom stair should be inserted on the layer representing the lower of the two floors it connects.
Custom stairs are made up of flight and platform components, and are assembled to create unlimited possible
configurations. A variety of stair materials are possible, with non-rectangular and custom stringer profiles.

To insert a custom stair:

1. Click the Custom Stair tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. Click to insert the custom stair.
The first time a custom stair is placed in a drawing file, the Select a Stair Configuration dialog box opens
automatically. Otherwise, click Preferences from the Tool bar before placing the stair to set the default custom
stair parameters.
Select an initial stair configuration from the default content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). Components can be edited and added to the initial configuration.

Parameter Description
Symbol Specifies the location of stair symbols
Folders
Symbols Provides a graphical list of available stair symbols

3. Click OK.
The Stair Preferences dialog box opens. Click the General tab to set the overall custom stair height, tread and riser
information, and 2D parameters.
258 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Overall Height Specify whether the stair height is obtained according to its upper and lower
layer elevation or with a set value
By Layer Sets the stair height according to the distance between its lower and upper
Elevation layers. Select the upper and lower layers.
If the layers set here are different from the active layer where the stair was
originally placed or when the Stair tool was selected, the stair is placed on
the layers specified here, and not on the active layer.
Offset from Specifies a starting and/or landing point elevation offset from the selected
Upper/Lower layers; indicate the offset distance
Layer Z
Specify Sets the stairs height to a specific value, regardless of layer height
Tread and Riser Sizes
Tread Depth Sets the tread depth (front to back)
Uniform Tread Sets a uniform tread width for the entire stair
Width
Max. Riser Height Specifies the maximum allowable riser height
Actual Riser Displays the actual riser height, in the current file units, based on stair height
Height
 Inserting Stairs | 259

Parameter Description
Number of Risers Displays the number of risers, based on riser and stair height
Offset Stair Offsets the running line (for calculating European-style winder stairs); enter
Running-Line by the offset distance
Draw Top Tread Specify whether the stair should include a tread at the same level as the upper
floor it serves
2D Detail
Draw Dashed Specifies whether to indicate the riser position with dashed lines
Nosing Recess
Unless Hiding If drawing dashed lines indicating the nosing recess of risers, specify whether
Wall Components to hide the lines when also hiding wall components with the Hide details when
layer scale < = 1 document preference; see Hiding Wall Components on
page 127
End/Start Marker Specify a starting and ending marker style for the path-of-travel marker (arrow)
Arrow Class Sets the class for the path-of-travel marker to control its appearance and
visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a
new class by selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class
named <Custom Stair Class> which places the marker in the same class as the
stair object.
Data Class Sets the class for stair data that displays with the path-of-travel marker, to
control its appearance and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are
listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting New, select the default
class name, or select the class named <Custom Stair Class> which places the
stair text in the same class as the stair object.
Apply Applies the current settings to the preview image; use the preview to judge the
effect of the parameter changes
Browse Opens the Select a Stair Configuration dialog box, to select a different stair
symbol from the default content

4. Click the Flights and Platforms tab, for specifying custom stair flight, winder, and platform parameters.
The selected stair configuration displays in the preview, with the current component displayed in red. Stair
components can be added and removed, and the stair configuration is automatically adjusted to meet the stair
height.
If adjacent flights and platforms (landings) do not have the same width, they are aligned by the center of the
adjacent edges.
260 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Add After Opens the Add Stair Component dialog box, for adding a stair component
(stair flight, winder, or platform) after the currently highlighted component.
Select the component to add and click OK. If treads need to be removed to
meet the stair height requirement, they are removed from the next flight.
Add Before Opens the Add Stair Component dialog box, for adding a stair component
(stair flight, winder, or platform) before the currently highlighted
component. Select the component to add and click OK. If treads need to be
removed to meet the stair height requirement, they are removed from the
previous flight.
Next/Previous Highlights the next or previous stair component, for adding or removing
components, or changing parameters
Remove Removes the currently highlighted stair component
Type When adding or editing a stair component, sets the type of component and its
associated parameters. Edits are applied to the currently highlighted
component.
Flight - Straight
Width Specify the width of the flight of stairs
Number of Treads Specify the number of treads in this portion of the stair
 Inserting Stairs | 261

Parameter Description
Flight - Curved
Width Specify the width of the flight of stairs
Number of Treads Specify the number of treads in this portion of the stair
Outside Radius Indicate the distance of the outside radius of the curved flight
Counter-Clockwise Switches the outside radius to the other side of the stair, for flights that curve
Going Up in a counter-clockwise direction
Winder - Skewed
Width Specify the width of the winder
Number of Treads Specify the number of treads in this portion of the stair
Start/End Angle Sets the skew angle at the start and end of the winder
Winder - L
Width Specify the width of the winder
Number of Treads Specify the number of treads in this portion of the stair (at least two treads
are required)
Length Side 1/Side 2 Indicates the length of each section of the winder (refer to the preview)
Angle Sets the angle, in degrees, between Side 1 and Side 2
Radius Corner Rounds the corner between Side 1 and Side 2
Maintain Constant Sets the length of the selected side(s) automatically to maintain constant
Tread Runs tread sizes for the length of the winder
Winder - U
Width Specify the width of the winder
Number of Treads Specify the number of treads in this portion of the stair (at least four treads
are required)
Length Side 1/Side 2/ Indicates the length of each section of the winder (refer to the preview)
Side 3
Angle 1/2 Sets the angle, in degrees, between Side 1 and Side 2 (Angle 1) and between
Side 2 and Side 3 (Angle 2)
Radius Corner 1/2 Rounds the corner between Side 1 and Side 2 (Corner 1) and between Side 2
and Side 3 (Corner 2)
Maintain Constant Sets the length of the selected side(s) automatically to maintain constant
Tread Runs tread sizes for the length of the winder
Platform - Straight
Width Specify the width of the straight platform
Length Specify the length of the straight platform
Platform - Curved
Width Specify the width of the curved platform
Angle Determines the platform length of travel by the angle between the start and
end of the platform
262 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Length Determines the platform size by length and radius; enter the length
Outside Radius Indicate the distance of the outside radius of the curved platform
Counter-Clockwise Switches the outside radius to the other side of the stair, for flights that curve
Going Up in a counter-clockwise direction
Platform - L
Start/End Width Specify the width at each end of the platform
Length Side 1/Side 2 Indicates the length of each section of the platform (refer to the preview)
Angle Sets the angle, in degrees, between Side 1 and Side 2
Radius Corner Rounds the corner between Side 1 and Side 2
Platform - U
Start/End Width Specify the width at each end of the platform
Length Side 1/Side 2/ Indicates the length of each section of the platform (refer to the preview)
Side 3
Angle 1/2 Sets the angle, in degrees, between Side 1 and Side 2 (Angle 1) and between
Side 2 and Side 3 (Angle 2)
Radius Corner 1/2 Rounds the corner between Side 1 and Side 2 (Corner 1) and between Side 2
and Side 3 (Corner 2)
Left Rail/Right Rail Determines, for each highlighted component, the railing configuration for
the left and right sides of the stair (going up); specify whether the side has a
handrail, guardrail, both a handrail and guardrail, or no railings
Apply Rails to Entire Applies the left and right railing settings from the highlighted component to
Stair all of the stair flights and platforms
Apply Applies the current stair component parameters to the preview image; use the
preview to judge the effect of parameter changes

5. Click the Upper/Lower Floors tab to set the custom stair appearance in Top/Plan view for both the upper and lower
floor layers.
The appearance of the custom stair line style, line weight, and fill style can be set in the Attributes palette. If
classes are selected for the appearance of the 3D components on the Construction tab, the fill style is overridden.
The drawing must have an upper and lower layer and have height set by layer elevation to display parameters for
each floor. Otherwise, only lower floor parameters can be set.
 Inserting Stairs | 263

Parameter Description
Show Stair Break Hides a portion of the stair with a stair break, so that the upper/lower portion of
the stair can be displayed in 2D
Break at Tread # Specifies where to begin the stair break; if the stair break is a platform, the
break is drawn at the last tread going up (for the lower floor) or the last tread
going down (for the upper floor)
Draw Dashed Stair When the stair break is shown, draws the portion of the stair above or below
Below/Above the break with dashed lines; deselect to hide the stairs above or below the break
Show Arrow Select to display the path-of-travel arrow
Arrow Direction Select an up or down arrow direction
Draw Arrow to When displaying a stair break, hides the arrow after the break
Break Only
Show Stair Data Select to display stair data with the path-of-travel arrow
Number of Risers Displays the number of risers
Riser Height Displays the riser height
Arrow Radiusing Select how to draw the arrow line: radiused (curved) for all components of the
stair, radiused for all components except platforms, where a corner is placed, or
with vertices (corners) at all stair components
264 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

6. Click the Construction tab to set the 3D custom stair appearance, including construction style, and tread, riser, and
stringer parameters and classes.
Masonry (concrete) stairs do not require stringer or riser thickness parameters.

Parameter Description
Construction Style Select the construction material of the stairs: wood, steel, masonry, or
monolithic
Wood/Steel
Treads
Nosing Depth Specify the nosing depth
Tread Thickness Specify the vertical thickness of the nosing
Class Sets the class for the tread to control its appearance and visibility. The classes
present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting
New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Custom Stair
Class> which places the tread in the same class as the stair object.
Risers
Riser Style Select whether risers are open, or closed; if closed, specify whether closed
vertically or sloped
 Inserting Stairs | 265

Parameter Description
Riser Thickness Indicates the horizontal thickness for vertical riser styles (for wood stairs, this
refers to the grade of lumber used to construct the stair)
Class Sets the riser class for vertical riser styles to control the appearance and
visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a
new class by selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class
named <Custom Stair Class> which places the riser in the same class as the
stair object.
Stringers
Differentiate Allows different parameters for left and right stringers to be specified
Stringers
Style Specify whether stringers are underneath or outside the stair; if outside the
stair, select a rectangular or custom profile
Offset from For Underneath stringer styles, specifies the distance between the outside of
Outside the stair tread to the outside of the stringers
Stringer Thickness Specifies the stringer width
Stringer Height Specifies the stringer height; if the stringers are underneath the treads, this
height includes notches and cannot be less than the notch depth +2
Use Platform Draws stringers around the outside of platform components
Stringers
Vertical Offset For outside platform stringers, offsets the stringers vertically by the specified
distance
Choose Stringer For custom stringer styles, click Choose Stringer Profile to select a stringer
Profile profile symbol from the default content or the current files content (see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK.

The stringer profile name displays in the Stair Settings dialog box and the
preview is updated with the selected symbol.
When a symbol is selected, all fields pertaining to the stringer geometry
are disabled.
Profile name When a custom stringer profile has been selected, displays the profile symbol
name
266 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Class Sets the class for the stringer to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Custom
Stair Class> which places the stringer in the same class as the stair object.
Masonry
Treads
Nosing Depth Specify the nosing depth
Tread Thickness Specify the vertical thickness of the nosing
Class Sets the class for the tread to control its appearance and visibility. The classes
present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting
New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Custom Stair
Class> which places the tread in the same class as the stair object.
Risers
Riser Style Masonry riser styles are closed vertically
Monolithic
Treads
Nosing Depth Specify the nosing depth
Class Sets the class for the tread to control its appearance and visibility. The classes
present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting
New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Custom Stair
Class> which places the tread in the same class as the stair object.
Risers
Riser Style Select whether risers are open, or closed; if closed, specify whether closed
vertically or sloping
Class Sets the riser class for vertical riser styles to control the appearance and
visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a
new class by selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class
named <Custom Stair Class> which places the riser in the same class as the
stair object.

7. Click the Handrails tab to specify handrail settings for the left and right sides of the custom stair. The preview
displays the handrails on one side.
The presence of handrails and/or guardrails for each component of the stair is determined by the settings on the
Flights and Platforms tab.
 Inserting Stairs | 267

Parameter Description
General Settings
Rail Class Sets the class for the rail to control its appearance and visibility. The classes
present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting
New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Custom Stair
Class> which places the rail in the same class as the stair object.
Automatically Reset Sets the handrails to update each time the stair parameters change. If further
Rails handrail customization is desired, deselect this check box and edit the handrail
and guardrail profile geometry by selecting Modify > Edit Custom Stair. See
Object Editing Mode on page 16 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide for more information.
Handrail Settings
Overall Height Specifies the height at the top of the highest rail
Top Rail Diameter Specifies the diameter of the top rail
Handrail Inset Sets the handrail inset distance from the edge of the stairs; this parameter is
useful when a handrail needs to be inset from a taller guardrail
Top Extension Sets the distance to extend the rail at the top of the stair
Top Extension Select whether the top extension is parallel to the top riser or continues to
Configuration follow the stair slope
268 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Bottom Extension Sets the distance to extend the rail at the bottom of the stair
Bottom Extension Select whether the bottom extension is parallel to the bottom riser or continues
Configuration to follow the stair slope
Guardrail Settings
Overall Height Specifies the height of the top rail
Top Rail Shape Select a round or rectangular top rail shape
Top Rail Width/Dia. Sets the width of a rectangular rail or the diameter of a round rail
Top Rail Height Sets the height of a rectangular rail
Top Rail Inset Specifies the inset distance (from the edge of the stairs) for the top rail of the
guardrail
Num Inter Rails Indicates the number of horizontal intermediate rails (parallel to the top rail)
Inter Rail Spacing Sets the distance between the intermediate rails (when there are more than one)
Inter Rail Diameter Sets the diameter of the intermediate rails
Inter Rail Inset Sets the inset distance (from the edge of the stairs) for the intermediate rails
Baluster Spacing Specifies the distance between the balusters (upright supporting posts);
baluster spacing cannot exceed the Tread Depth (specified on the General tab)
Baluster Diameter Specifies the diameter of the balusters
Baluster Inset Specifies the inset distance (from the edge of the stairs) for the balusters

Stairs with multiple horizontal rails can take a long time to regenerate. Temporarily deselect Detail 3D Handrails
in the Object Info palette to speed up performance.
8. Click OK.
9. Click in the drawing to insert the custom stair. Click again to set the custom stair rotation.

UP 18R

Custom Stair Properties

The properties of a custom stair object can be edited in the Object Info palette. Frequently-accessed parameters are
available directly in the palette. To edit stair parameters, click Settings from the Object Info palette, double-click the
stair to open the Stair Settings dialog box, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a stair and select Edit
from the context menu
 Inserting Stairs | 269

If moving a custom stair object, temporarily deselect Detail 3D Handrails from the Object Info palette to
decrease regeneration time.

Parameter Description
Settings Opens the Stair Settings dialog box, for editing stair parameters. The tabs and
settings on this dialog box are the same as those in stair preferences; see
Creating a Custom Stair on page 257. If more than one stair object is selected
for editing, the Settings button appears dimmed; select a single stair to access
the Stair Settings dialog box for editing parameters.
Flr-Flr Height Sets the stairs height to a specific value, regardless of layer height; this height
is display-only if the stair height is set by layer elevations in the stair settings
Max Riser Specifies the maximum possible riser height
Actual Riser Displays the actual riser height
Tread Depth Sets the horizontal (front to back) tread depth
Uniform Tread Width Sets the uniform tread width for the entire stair
Construction Style Select the construction material of the stairs: wood, steel, masonry, or
monolithic
Riser Style Select whether risers are open, or closed; if closed, specify whether closed
vertically or sloping
Tread Height Sets the vertical tread thickness
Nosing Depth Specifies the depth of the stair nosing
Stringer Style Specify whether stringers are underneath or outside the stair; if outside the
stair, select a rectangular or custom profile
Stringer Width Specifies the stringer width (thickness)
Stringer Height Specifies the stringer height; if the stringers are underneath the treads, this
height includes notches and cannot be less than the notch depth +2
Stringer Offset For Underneath stringer styles, specifies the distance between the outside of
the stair tread to the outside of the stringers
Draw Top Tread Specify whether the stair should include a top tread
Detail 3D handrails For speedier performance, temporarily draws handrails as NURBS curves,
rather than extrude along path objects
Auto-reset handrails Sets the handrails to update each time the stair parameters change. If further
handrail customization is desired, deselect this check box and edit the handrail
and guardrail profile geometry by selecting Modify > Edit Custom Stair. See
Object Editing Mode on page 16 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide for more information.
Re-selecting Auto-reset handrail when a custom profile has been
specified replaces the custom handrail, and the custom information is lost.
Left Rail Select the railing configuration for the left and right sides of the stair (going
up); specify whether the side has a handrail, guardrail, both a handrail and
guardrail, or no railings
270 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Right Rail Select the railing configuration for the left and right sides of the stair (going
up); specify whether the side has a handrail, guardrail, both a handrail and
guardrail, or no railings
Draw Lower Stair Draws a stair break for the lower floor stair representation, or for the entire
Break stair if the overall stair height is set manually in the stair settings
Lower Break Specifies where to begin the stair break; if the stair break is a platform, the
break is drawn at the last tread going up (for the lower floor)
Lower Arrow Select Up or Down for the arrow
Draw Upper Stair Draws a stair break for the upper floor stair representation; the drawing must
Break have an upper and lower layer and have height set by layer elevation to display
separate parameters for upper and lower floors
Upper Break Specifies where to begin the stair break; if the stair break is a platform, the
break is drawn at the last tread going down (for the upper floor)
Upper Arrow Select Up or Down for the arrow

The position of the custom stair arrow text can be adjusted by moving the control point.

Arrow text
control point

Inserting Escalators
A basic escalator can be inserted, with its height defined automatically from its top and bottom layer boundaries.

To insert an escalator:

1. Select the Escalator tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. The escalator is a point object; click once to insert the escalator, and then again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the tool is used in this session, the Escalator Properties dialog box opens. Specify the
preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK.
The parameters can be changed in the Object Info palette after insertion.

Parameter Description
Height
 Inserting Escalators | 271

Parameter Description
Height Directly sets the desired height of the escalator. When the escalator height
is determined manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the
escalator is automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value
is modified accordingly.
When the top of the escalator is bound by the layer wall height value or by
a story level, the escalator height displays automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the escalator.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting
Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide).
Alternatively, the top of the escalator can be bound by one of the level
types defined for the story or the story above it. By setting the top of the
escalator to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story changes,
the height of the escalator changes automatically to match.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the escalator from its specified top bound
height
Bot Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the escalator.
Alternatively, the bottom of the escalator can be bound by one of the level
types defined for the story or the story below it. By setting the bottom of
the escalator to the level type, if the elevation of the associated story
changes, the height of the escalator changes automatically to match.
Bot Offset For the bottom of the escalator, sets the offset from its specified bottom
bound height
Type Select a generic escalator or one of the common escalator types
Slope angle Select from the common slope angles available for an escalator
Floor depth above Indicates the depth of the floor-to-ceiling construction on the upper floor
being serviced by the escalator; this parameter affects the size of the
headroom and pit in Top/Plan view
Step width Select a common step width configuration
Horizontal lead in Select the number of horizontal escalator steps at the bottom of the
escalator
Balustrade type Select the type of geometry that encloses the sides of the escalator and
supports the moving handrail
Section cut Select whether to display the escalator with a section break going up or
down, or without a break
Draw 3D In 3D views, represents the escalator with a 3D polygon
Show pit Indicates whether the extents of the minimum required pit below the
escalator display in Top/Plan view
Show headroom Indicates whether the extents of the minimum required headroom above
the escalator display in Top/Plan view
272 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Override Maximum Overrides the maximum allowable length of the selected escalator type;
Allowable Span this parameter is affected by the horizontal lead-in and slope angle values,
as well as the selected escalator type
Override Maximum Overrides the maximum allowable floor-to-floor height of the selected
Height Limit escalator type; this parameter is affected by the horizontal lead-in and
slope angle values, as well as the selected escalator type

Inserting Ramps
To insert a ramp:

1. Select the Ramp tool from the Building Shell tool set.
2. The ramp is a point object; click once to place the lower end of the ramp, and then again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the tool is used in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Specify the
preferences to use for this tool during this session, or accept the defaults.
When the ramp configuration has been selected, the available parameters in the dialog box change to reflect the
selection.
3. Click OK.
The parameters can be changed in the Object Info palette after insertion.

Parameter Description
Style Select a either a standard (simple board) or masonry ramp style
Width Set the ramps width
Height Set the ramps height
Rise over Run Set the ramps rise over run value.
The rise is the distance along the Y axis the ramp rises above the Z
height, and run is the distance along the X axis for the ramp to reach that
height. This value can be entered as a fraction, and the Vectorworks
software will convert it to a decimal.
Thickness For a standard style ramp, set the ramps thickness
Config Select the ramps configuration from the list of preformatted options
Landing Height Set the landings height above the finished floor, if applicable
Offset 1 For ramps with a landing, set a distance, if applicable, to offset the bottom of
the upper ramp away from the top of the lower ramp
Offset 2 For ramps with a landing, set a distance, if applicable, to offset the bottom of
the upper ramp toward the top of the ramp
Curved landing Select to make the landing curved
2D Stair Break Select to create a break line in the 2D view
Create 3D Select to create a 3D view
Left Rail Select to provide a handrail on the left side (facing the top of the ramp)
 Inserting Handrails | 273

Parameter Description
Right Rail Select to provide a handrail on the right side (facing the top of the ramp)
Rail H Set the handrail height above the ramp surface
Rail W Set the handrail width
Arrows (2D view) For 2D views, select whether to provide an arrow pointing up or down, or no
arrow

Inserting Handrails
Handrails can be inserted independently of those available as part of the Stair and Custom Stair tools.

To insert a straight handrail:

To insert a curved handrail:

1. Select either the Straight Handrail tool or Curved Handrail tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set.
2. The handrails are point objects; click once to place the handrail and then again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the tool is used in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Specify the
preferences to use for this tool during this session, or accept the defaults.
3. Click OK.
The parameters can be changed in the Object Info palette after insertion.

Parameter Description
Length For a straight handrail, set the overall length
Overall Angle For a curved handrail, set the overall angle of the curve
Radius For a curved handrail, set the radius of the curve
Top Rail Width Set the width of the top rail
Top Rail Thk Set the thickness (height) of the top rail
Inter Rail Width Set the width of the lower horizontal rails
Inter Rail Thk Set the thickness (height) of the lower horizontal rails
Starting Upright Select to place an upright flush with the start of the horizontal rails
Ending Upright Select to place an upright flush with the end of the horizontal rails
1st Upright Spacing Set the distance before the first upright (not counting the starting upright, if
one is included)
Upright Spacing Set the spacing, measured on center, between all subsequent uprights
Upright Width Set the width of the uprights
Upright Depth Set the depth of the uprights
Caps Select to add caps to one or both ends
1st Horizontal Height/ Set the height/spacing of the first horizontal rail (not counting the top rail),
Spacing measured down from the top of the handrail
Horizontal Spacing Set the spacing, measured on center, between all subsequent horizontal rails
274 | Chapter 6: Adding Design Series Stairs

Parameter Description
Overall Height Set the overall height of the handrail
Rise Set the rise from one end of the handrail to the other
Start Miter For a straight handrail, set the angle in degrees of the miter at the beginning
of the top rail
End Miter For a straight handrail, set the angle in degrees of the miter at the end of the
top rail
Top Rail/Uprights/ Select the class from the current list of classes, or select New to create a new
Intermediate Rails class (see Creating Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide)
Adding MEP Information to the Design 7
Introduction
The Vectorworks Architect product includes the Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing (MEP) components required to
complete the building design. Add plumbing, circuit, and HVAC elements to a project using various menu commands,
tools, and symbols.

Plumbing and Piping Objects

Plumbing and piping objects are available from the MEP tool set and [Vectorworks]\Libraries (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). These objects are accessed through the Resource Browser
and consist of hybrid 2D/3D representations of common plumbing fixture elements. See Using the Resource Browser
on page 157 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

HVAC
The Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) tools and objects add HVAC ducts and diffusers in a variety of
configurations to a drawing. These geometric models can represent a variety of actual items. For example, the diffuser
object can have its dimensions and parameters set to develop many differently sized diffusers, including industry
standard sizes that can be predefined.
HVAC objects are available in [Vectorworks]\Libraries (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide). These objects are accessed through the Resource Browser and consist of hybrid 2D/3D representations
of common HVAC duct work elements. See Using the Resource Browser on page 157 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Duct work objects include optionally displayed labels and elevation marker tags. The label contents are determined by
a user-defined string of values, such as width and height (obtained automatically) and any text desired. The elevation
marker tag indicates the top and bottom above the finish floor of an HVAC duct work item; Show 3D Detail must be
enabled to display the elevation marker tag. Both the HVAC label and elevation marker tag can be easily moved by
dragging its control point to the correct location.

Control Points Elevation Marker

Specify rectangular, round, or oval
duct types (some ducts have
additional options)

Label

This value is added to top and

Specify whether the duct is insulated bottom elevations, allowing ducts to
and/or lined and indicate the thickness be measured from the floor rather
of the lining/insulation than the ceiling

A diffuser report, containing a diffuser, register, and grille schedule, can be included. It can be added to the drawing
from the VA Create Schedule command or the Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the default
architectural reports file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect
product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the Diffuser Report
276 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design

worksheet to the drawing. An HVAC Diffuser, Register and Grille worksheet, populated with information from the
objects in the current drawing, is automatically created.
For more information on labels, elevation marker tags, and HVAC reports, refer to the Duct_Object.pdf file included in
[Vectorworks]\Extras.

Electrical and Communication Circuiting

The communications and electrical circuiting tools and objects add electrical and communication objects, including
panels and disconnects, to a drawing. The circuiting tools link these objects, creating a communication or electrical
circuit.

Electrical and Communication Objects

Electrical and communication objects are available from the MEP tool set and in specific object libraries (see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). These objects are accessed through the
Resource Browser, and consist of hybrid 2D/3D representations of common electrical devices. These symbols already
have the correct records attached for proper circuiting. See Using the Resource Browser on page 157 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
It is also possible to create custom electrical symbols, panels and disconnects; attaching the correct record to these
symbols makes them circuitable. See Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols on page 976 for
information.

Naming Panels
When inserting panels (electrical or communication) from object libraries, give each panel its own name so that it can
be uniquely identified by the Circuiting tool.
To identify an inserted panel with a unique name:
1. Insert the panel from the Resource Browser.

2. With the panel still selected, click the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Provide the unique panel name under the
Panel record information.
 Electrical and Communication Circuiting | 277

Click on the Panel record

to change the name

Click on the default

name to edit it

Provide a unique name for

the panel by typing it here

Circuiting Tool
Once electrical or communication panels and objects have been inserted, the Circuiting tool links the objects by
assigning each item a circuit number and associating it with a panel board.
The symbol or object that is being circuited must be on a visible (not grayed) layer. If the symbol is not on the
active layer, the symbol is copied to the active layer, and then the record information is attached. This is designed
so that an electrical engineer can use workgroup referencing to access architectural layers with preliminary outlet
locations. The engineer can then copy those outlets to the proper layer without re-entering data.

Creating a Circuit
When creating a circuit, do not include the panel symbol.

To create a circuit:

1. Click the Circuiting tool from the MEP tool set.

2. Click on the first item to be circuited.
If selecting a custom symbol without a Circuiting record attached, the tool attaches the record to the current
symbol, as well as to all subsequent symbols in the circuit. In this case, specify whether an electrical or
communication circuit is being created.
Based on the items record, the tool determines whether this is an electrical or communication device. The
Circuiting Tool dialog box opens.
278 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design

Parameter Description
Circuit Information Enter the circuit information (used on the panel schedule)
Panel Select the associated panel
Circuit # Enter the circuit number
Trip Enter the trip rating
Wire Size Enter the size of the wire
Conduit Size Enter the conduit size
V.A./Watts Enter the total V.A./Watts rating
Remarks Enter remarks for the circuit
Check Voltage and Phase of Select to verify that the voltage and phase of circuited items is
Circuit Items correct
Draw circuiting lines Select to draw connecting circuiting lines
Overwrite existing object data Select to apply the current object information to all objects in the
circuit
Object Data Enter parameters for the object being circuited
Phase/Pole Enter the number of phases/poles
Voltage Enter the voltage
V.A./Watts Enter the V.A./Watts for this object
Remarks Enter remarks for the object

3. Enter the desired information for the circuit and the objects in the circuit.
4. Click OK.
The information is transferred to the objects record.
5. Continue clicking on the items to be circuited in the order the circuit loop should be drawn.
6. To complete the circuit, click in an empty area of the drawing. Confirm that you wish to place the Home Run
marker.
The Circuiting tool generates a Home Run marker and phases are denoted as specified.

Home Run marker

Circuit

Adding to a Circuit

To add an item to an existing circuit:

1. Click the Circuiting tool from the MEP tool set.

2. Click the communication or electrical device from which to begin the new circuit connection.
A notice displays, asking if additional items are to be added to this circuit. Click Yes.
 Electrical and Communication Circuiting | 279

2nd click

1st click
3rd click

3. Click the item to add to the circuit, and then select the next item in the circuit.

To complete the circuit, click away from any selectable objects. A notice displays asking if you wish to continue.
Click No to end this procedure.
If adding an item at the end of a circuit, place the third click anywhere on the drawing. The item is chained to the
item that previously had the Home Run marker attached. A notice displays, confirming whether to place the Home
Run. Click Yes. The Circuiting tool generates a Home Run marker and phases are denoted.

Editing Circuits
The Edit Circuiting tool modifies existing circuit information. Use this tool to reassign circuit numbers and update the
information attached to the circuited elements.

To edit existing circuits or a circuited item:

1. Click the Edit Circuiting tool from the MEP tool set.
2. Click on the circuited item to be edited.
The Edit Circuit Tool dialog box opens.
280 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design

Parameter Description
List of editing Selects the editing operation to perform.
operations Select Edit circuit information only to edit the information which applies to
the entire circuit. Select Edit selected item only or Edit all items on the
circuit to enter edits which apply only to the selected circuiting item or edit
both circuit and circuited object information. Select Delete selected item
only or Delete entire circuit to delete the circuited item from the circuit or
delete the entire circuit (the circuited items remain on the drawing).
Circuit to Edit Selects the specific circuit to edit; available if selected item has multiple
circuit assignments associated with it
Circuit Information Enter the circuit information (used on the panel schedule)
Panel Name Select the associated panel
Circuit # Enter the circuit number
Trip Enter the trip rating
Wire Size Enter the size of the wire
Conduit Size Enter the conduit size
V.A./Watts Enter the total V.A./Watts rating
Remarks Enter remarks about the circuit
Check Voltage and Select to verify that the voltage and phase of circuit items is correct
Phase of Circuit
Items
Item Data Enter parameters for the object being circuited
Phase/Pole Enter the number of phases/poles
Voltage Enter the voltage
V.A./Watts Enter the V.A./Watts for this object
Remarks Enter remarks for the object

3. Select the operation to perform.

If there are multiple records attached to this item, select the record to edit from the Circuit To Edit list. The record
information displays in the Circuit Tool dialog box.
4. Click OK.

Comm Device Tool

The Comm Device tool inserts an indicator and basic specifications to indicate the type and location of a
communications device.

To insert a communications device:

1. Select the Comm Device tool from the MEP tool set.
2. Click to place the object into a wall and click again to set the rotation of the object.
 Sizing Calculators | 281

If this is the first time a communications device has been placed on the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box
opens. Before placing the object, specify the preferences to use for this tool during this session, or accept the
default values.
3. Click OK.
Object instances can be modified in the Object Info palette after insertion.

Parameter Description
2D Scale Factor Set the size of the communications device indicator; increase the scale value
to obtain a larger object. Indicators maintain a constant size regardless of the
drawing scale.
Config Select the configuration of the communications device, which is indicated by
a preformatted shape
Telephone Data Data/Voice TV/Cable Watchman Sound

Staff Paging Fire Alarm Clock Nurse Call Pushbutton

Bell/Buzzer Bell Transformer Chime Electric Door Opener

Config Label Type the label for the communications device

Mtg Height AFF Set the mounting height above the finished floor
Show 3D Detail Select to show a communications device wall plate in 3D views. If Show 3D
Detail is not selected, a 3D locus will indicate the devices location in 3D
views.

Sizing Calculators
The Vectorworks Architect product provides sizing calculators for performing calculations and adding drawing
specifications without leaving the program.
The software includes a standard database of wire specifications used for the Conductor Sizing and Conduit Sizing
calculators. The database contains the names, dimensions, and physical properties of a selected group of wiring types.

Conductor Sizing Calculator Command

The Conductor Sizing Calculator reports the correct wire size for a given load, based on a single conductor and the
length of travel.
282 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design

To perform conductor sizing calculations:

1. Select AEC > Electrical > Conductor Sizing Calc.
The Conductor Sizing Calculator dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Calculate Select the type of calculation to perform
Phase Factor Specifies the phase factor
Wire Properties Enter the known conductor parameters; values returned by the
calculation will appear dimmed
Type/Manuf. Select the wire type or manufacturer
Size/Part Number Select the wire size or the manufacturer part number
Sectional area of the wire, Enter the cross sectional area of the conductor wire in cmils
cmil
Approximate AWG Enter the approximate AWG (American Wire Gauge) of the conductor
Resistance of conductor Enter the resistance of the conductor material at 75c
material at 75c
Temperature (c) Enter the operating temperature in Celsius
Amps Enter the amp rating
Length (ft.) Enter the conductor length in feet
Type Select whether the conductor type is Aluminum or Copper, and then
enter an Alpha value if other than standard
Voltage Drop Select whether the voltage drop is a Percentage or Absolute. If a
percentage, enter the value.
Voltage Enter the working voltage
Calculate Performs the selected calculation

2. Select the type of calculation to perform, based on the current parameters, from the Calculate list.
 Sizing Calculators | 283

Calculation Description
Wire Size Provides the sectional area of the wire (cmil) and the approximate
AWG for wire sizes below 250 kcml
Ohms/ft/cmil-ft Calculates the resistance per sectional area of wire
Voltage Drop Calculates the voltage drop across the length of the conductor, either as
a percentage or absolute value
Phase Factor Provides the phase factor value of the conductor
Voltage Calculates the voltage value of the conductor
Ampacity Determines the amp rating of the conductor
Length of Run Calculates the allowable length of the conductor specified for the load
given

3. Enter the required values in the fields. Fields where the result will be displayed appear dimmed. Some calculations
require the selection of the wire type or manufacturer, as well as the wire size or part number. When all the
required parameter values are complete, the Calculate button becomes available; click to perform the calculation.
4. The calculation results are displayed. Select another calculation to perform or click Close to exit.

Conduit Sizing Calculator Command

The Conduit Sizing Calculator reports the proper size conduit(s) required for a given set of wires.
To perform conduit sizing calculations:
1. Select AEC > Electrical > Conduit Sizing Calc.
The Conduit Sizing Calculator dialog box opens.

2. Using the information contained in the wire specifications database, select a wire type or manufacturer and a wire
size or part number.
The cross-sectional area of the wire is displayed.
3. Enter the number of conductors of this type and size.
4. Click Add to include the conductor type in the conduit.
Repeat steps 2 4 to add more conductors to the conduit.
5. Click Remove to remove a selected conductor from the Conductors Currently in Conduit list; click Clear All to
remove all conductors from the list.
284 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design

6. Select a Conduit Type from the list and specify the Number Of Conduits and Conduit stuff percentage.
Though a percentage is suggested, this can be modified.
7. The Results section of the dialog box displays the actual and nominal conduit sizes required.
8. When calculations are complete, click Close.

Creating Piping Runs

Determine the section lengths and amount of material required for piping runs. Piping runs can be drawn by clicking
the Piping Run tool from the MEP tool set, by drawing a polygon and selecting the Create Piping Runs command, or
by drawing a polyline and selecting the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes
on page 696).
To create a piping run:
1. Draw one or more polygons to represent the piping run.
2. With the polygon(s) selected, choose AEC > Electrical > Create Piping Runs.
The piping run results are displayed and can be edited in the Object Info palette. An existing piping run can be
reshaped with the Reshape tool, and the path polyline can be edited by selecting Edit from the context menu (see
Object Editing Mode on page 16 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Parameter Description
Conduit Size Specifies the diameter of the conduit
Material Select the piping run material from the list; this selection can be displayed in the
piping run tag
Remarks Specify any remarks to be displayed in the piping run tag
Show Tag Select to display the piping run Conduit Size and Material
1/2 Aluminum Rigid 12 AWG

Show Remarks Select to display the piping run Remarks; Show Tag must be selected in order to
display the remarks
Length Displays the length of the piping run
Section Length Specifies the length of piping run sections; edit this parameter to determine various
piping run requirements
Num of Runs Specify the number of runs; increase the number to estimate the additional material
required
Num of Displays the number of sections required
Sections
Couplings Displays the number of couplings required
Turns Specifies the type of turns to use for the piping run corners
Use Bends Bends the conduit and includes the bend in the length
Use Elbows Counts the number of 45 and 90 elbows and displays the number
Radius Specify the bend radius
45s / 90s Displays the number of elbow turns (when Use Elbows is selected)
 Panel Scheduling and Diagramming | 285

The piping run does not count turns at a junction box (at the location of an electrical object).

Panel Scheduling and Diagramming

Creating a Panel Schedule

The Create Panel Schedule command generates panel schedules based on the circuiting information assigned to the
file. If necessary, modify the dimensions and layout of the panel to conform to existing office standards.
To create a panel schedule:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Panel Schedule.
The Create Panel Schedule dialog box opens. Specify the panel schedule criteria and click OK.

Parameter Description
Panel list Select a panel from the list of available panels for creating the schedule
Place in Select to place scheduling information in a worksheet resource named with the
worksheet panel name
Place in Select to place a panel schedule on the drawing
Document
Choose Schedule Indicates the location for placing the panel schedule on the drawing
Layer Specifies the layer for placing the schedule
Class Specifies the class for the schedule
Panel Style Select the panel formatting style from the list
Edit Changes the panel schedule formatting

2. If placing the schedule on the drawing, click at the desired location.

286 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design

If placing the panel schedule in a worksheet, a worksheet is created with the panel name.
If circuiting changes are made, delete the outdated panel schedule and repeat the create panel schedule procedure.

Changing the Panel Schedule Format

To format a panel schedule:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Panel Schedule.
The Create Panel Schedule dialog box opens.
2. Select the panel schedule and its location as described in Creating a Panel Schedule on page 285.
3. Click Edit.
4. The Schedule Formatting dialog box opens. Select the schedule to format from the Schedule list. A list of
available fields and, if applicable, the schedules printed name displays.

Parameter Description
Schedule Select the schedule to format
Printed Name Specifies the name that is printed on the schedule
Available Fields Lists all possible schedule column items
Schedule Columns Lists, in order, all included schedule columns
Move > Moves a selected item from the Available Fields list to the Schedule Columns
list
< Move Moves a selected item from the Schedule Columns list back to the Available
Fields list
Move Up / Move Down Moves a selected item in the Schedule Columns list to adjust the list order
Printed Schedule Width Specifies the total width of all schedule columns when printed
Column Headers Displays the current font, style, and size for header information in the
schedule. Click Change to edit the font format.
Body Displays the current font, style, and size for body text in the schedule. Click
Change to edit the font format.
 Panel Scheduling and Diagramming | 287

The columns shown in the Column Order list appear in the schedule in order.
Panel schedule formatting is stored as a worksheet named Panel Schedule Fmt. This worksheet can be imported,
using the Resource Browser, into other files where the same formatting is desired.
5. Click OK to return to the Create Panel Schedule dialog box. Click OK to place the schedule with the specified
format.

Creating Panel Riser Diagrams

Panel riser diagrams summarize the electrical panels and disconnects in a project file.
To create a panel riser diagram:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Panel Riser Diag.
2. Click on the drawing to place the panel(s) at that location.

A panel displays the Panel Name, Number of Phases/Poles, A disconnect displays the Disconnect
Voltage, Amps, Number of spaces, Device Name, and Name, Number of Phases/Poles,
Circuit where it is connected Voltage, Amps, Device Name, and
Circuit where it is connected

Panels and disconnects can be rearranged, edited and annotated; graphics can be added to complete the panel riser
diagram. If the panels are regenerated, any edits are lost. Once the panels have been generated, they can be
arranged into a completed panel diagram, as seen in the following illustration:
288 | Chapter 7: Adding MEP Information to the Design
Site Modeling 8
Sitework Overview
The sitework-related commands allow the development of complex 2D and 3D models of site terrain in the
Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products. The Vectorworks Landmark product contains certain additional
commands.
The source data for a site model is the 3D information used to create a representation of the existing site. The
information can be in the form of 3D loci, 3D polygons, or surveyor data. The site model object created from the source
data contains both 2D and 3D site information, and it can be copied to other layers and files. Special snapshot copies
of the site model allow different forms of site model to be shown side by side.
Once generated, two forms of the site model can be displayedthe existing site model and the proposed site model.
The existing site model is a direct representation of the source data, including any existing site modifications. The
proposed site model is the existing site model, plus the geometric effects of proposed site modifiers, such as roads and
pads. The existing and proposed site models can be displayed or hidden at creation or from the Object Info palette.
Site models use the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) method to connect input data. This method can work with
data that are scattered and in clumpsthey do not have to be organized in a rectangular grid. The model uses all the
data, without doing approximations, to create a network of triangles. These triangles form the terrain model; the model
then performs interpolation to calculate the threading of contour lines.
After generation, the site model is cached so that updating occurs more efficiently; however, large file sizes can result.
See Display Preferences on page 30 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To upgrade a site model from a previous version of the Vectorworks program, see Migrating from Previous Versions
on page 975.

Site Model Source Data

Four commands can be used to input source data into the drawing for the development of a site model: Import Survey
File, 2D Polys to 3D Contours, 3D Polys to 3D Loci (Vectorworks Landmark only), and Grid Method Entry. The
selection of a method depends on the type of source information.
In addition, stake objects, 3D loci, or 3D polygons can be used directly as the source data for the site model. No
conversion is necessary before using this type of source data.
The Modify by Record command can convert 2D polygons or polylines with attached record elevation data directly to
3D contours at the proper elevation. See Modifying Objects by Record Value on page 608.
Before you create the site model, check the source data with the Validate 3D Data command to ensure that a valid site
model will be created.

Importing Source Data from an External File

Site model source data can be generated by tabular coordinate information from an external file. This file must be a text
file with fields delimited by separators in one of the formats available.
To import survey information for use as source data:
1. On the layer to receive the imported data, select Active Layer Scale from the drawing context menu to set the
scale, or select the File > Document Settings > Document Setup command (see Document Setup on page 2).
2. Select Landmark > Survey Input > Import Survey File (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Survey Input >
Import Survey File (Architect workspace). The standard Open File dialog box opens. Select the file to import.
The Import Survey File dialog box opens. Specify the file format options, scrolling through each line of data if
necessary, and set the file import options.
290 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

Parameter Description
Data from selected Displays the first line of data in the selected file
file
Line # Displays the line number of the data displayed; click the < or > button to check
each line in the file
File format Select the file format of the imported file
Units Select the unit of the imported file
Field separator Specifies the file field delimiter
Tab delimited Select if fields are separated by tabs
Other character If fields are not separated by tabs, select Other character and then enter the
character separating each field
Import Options
Create Stake Places stake objects to represent each 3D point in space, with text to display the
Objects elevation when in Plan view (see Inserting Stake Objects on page 368). Stake
objects include the appropriate Easting, Northing, and Elevation values.
For big sets of source data, creating large numbers of stake objects could result
in performance issues. It may be preferable to create 3D loci instead.
Create 3D Locus Places 3D loci, which contain only location information (X, Y, and Z
Objects (imports coordinate)
only location)

3. Click OK.
As each line of the file is read, either 3D loci or stake objects are inserted into the drawing at the coordinates specified
by the file. If this is the first time a stake object has been inserted in the drawing, the Object Preferences dialog box
opens. Accept the defaults and click OK.
 Site Model Source Data | 291

Adding Source Data with 2D Polygons

Another way of generating the site model source data is to draw, trace, or import 2D polygons representing contours;
then use the 2D Polys to 3D Contours command to convert the polygons to 3D polygons.
The Modify by Record command can convert 2D polygons or polylines with attached record elevation data
directly to 3D contours at the proper elevation. See Modifying Objects by Record Value on page 608.
To generate source data with the 2D Polys to 3D Contours command:
1. Create or import the 2D polygons representing contour lines.
Polylines cannot be used. If contours are drawn with polylines, convert them to polygons first with the Modify >
Convert > Convert to Polygons command.
2. Select Landmark > Survey Input > 2D Polys to 3D Contours (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Survey Input
> 2D Polys to 3D Contours (Architect workspace). The 2D Poly to 3D Contour Setup dialog box opens. Enter the
first elevation and change in elevation between contour lines, and then select the type of object to be created.

Parameter Description
Start Elevation Indicates the elevation of the lowest contour in the drawing
Interval Specifies the change in elevation from one contour line to the next
Create 3D Polygons/3D Select whether to create 3D polygons or 3D loci
Loci

3. Click OK.
The Set Elevation dialog box opens, and the first polygon in the drawing order is highlighted. If necessary, use the
Up or Dn buttons to set the elevation of the highlighted polygon, and then click Next. When prompted, indicate
whether to delete the original 2D polygons.

Parameter Description
Up/Dn Changes the elevation of the selected polygon
292 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

Parameter Description
Use same height as prev. Sets the elevation for successive polygons to the same value
Next Selects the next polygon
Done Stops setting polygon elevations; click when all the polygon elevations have
been specified

4. Repeat for all of the polygons in the drawing.

This process can be interrupted by clicking Done. Resume setting elevations by selecting the starting polygon and
selecting the 2D Polys to 3D Contours command.
Either 3D polygons or loci are created from the 2D polygons, with Z values equal to the assigned elevations. These Z
values can be edited in the Object Info Palette if they are incorrect.

Converting 3D Polygons to 3D Loci

The 3D Polys to 3D Loci command converts the vertices of 3D polygons into 3D loci. These loci can then be used to
create the site model.
To create 3D loci from 3D polygons:
1. Select Landmark > Survey Input > 3D Polys to 3D Loci.
The 3D Poly to 3D Loci Command dialog box opens.

2. To remove the 3D polygons, select Delete original 3D polygons.

3. Click OK. The vertices of any 3D polygons located in the current layer are converted to 3D loci. The loci retain
the Z values of the original polygons. These 3D loci can then serve as source data for the site model, or can be
converted to stake objects and modify an existing site model.

Original 3D polygons Resulting 3D loci

Adding Source Data by Grid Method Entry

The Grid Method Entry command creates a rectangular grid of points on the screen, and prompts you to enter the
elevations of those points. The Create Site Model command then creates a topographical model based on those points.
 Site Model Source Data | 293

Use this method when the source data is extracted from a paper map. Draw a grid on the map, and then determine the
elevation of each grid intersection by interpolation between adjacent contour lines. Use these elevation values to create
the grid.
To generate source data with the Grid Method Entry command:
1. Select Landmark > Survey Input > Grid Method Entry (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Survey Input >
Grid Method Entry (Architect workspace). When prompted, click at the upper left corner of the grid.
2. After the starting point is picked, the Point Entry Grid Setup dialog box opens.

Enter the number of rows and columns of points to be created, as well as the distance between the points (Grid
Spacing), and then click OK. A grid of red 3D loci is created.
3. The Enter Z Values dialog box opens.

The first point on the drawing, at the upper left hand corner, is automatically selected. Enter the elevation of the
point, and click Next. The elevation is applied to that point, and then the second point in that row is automatically
selected. Enter the elevation for that point; continue until elevations have been entered for all of the points in the
grid, and then click Done.

Validating 3D Source Data

Use the Validate 3D Data command before you create the site model, to check the 3D source data for errors. Even if a
site model already exists, the source data can be checked. If problems occur due to erroneous site model source data,
error alerts are automatically displayed. A site model with errors can still be created; however, results may not be as
expected.
The following problems can generate errors:
Duplicate 3D data points or polygons
3D data points that are coincident or vertically placed
Crossing contours (3D polygons) in the 3D source data
To validate 3D source data:
1. Select the source data (3D loci, 3D polygons, or stake objects) to be checked.
2. Select Landmark > Validate 3D Data (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Terrain > Validate 3D Data (Architect
workspace).
294 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

3. If the source data are valid, a dialog box states that no problems were found. Proceed with creating the site model
as described in Creating the Site Model on page 295.
4. If there are errors in the source data, the Problems with Site Model Source Data dialog box opens.
Problems encountered are listed, and some conditions have an associated button for correcting each error by
modifying or deleting the erroneous data.
If a site model already exists, the problem data can be viewed by selecting the site model and selecting Modify >
Edit Site Model, or Right-clicking (Windows or Ctrl-clicking (Macintosh) and selecting Edit Site Model Source
Data from the Site Model context menu. Problem data conditions are highlighted and annotated.
5. When problem correction is complete, click Close.
Select Validate 3D Data again to ensure that the errors have been corrected.

Simplifying 3D Polygons
If the existing site model is created from 3D polygons (not 3D loci), processing time can be decreased by removing
redundant polygon vertices within a specified tolerance. For example, this removes extra vertices in straight or
nearly-straight segments of imported 3D polygons used as source data. This feature does not significantly change the
appearance of the site model, but can dramatically decrease the time it takes to process the model.
The Simplify 3D Polygons command is specialized for certain site model workflows. To simplify 2D polygons,
3D polygons, and polylines in other workflows, see Simplifying Polygons and Polylines on page 341 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To remove redundant 3D polygon vertices:
1. Select the 3D polygon(s). (The original polygons remain unchanged.)
2. Select Landmark > Simplify 3D Polygons (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Terrain > Simplify 3D Polygons
(Architect workspace).
The Simplify Selected 3D Polygons dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Simplification Tolerance Specifies the tolerance for removing unnecessary vertices
Put Simplified Result in Layer Select the layer where the filtered polygons will be placed

3. Click OK.
Redundant vertices are removed from the 3D polygon(s) and the results are sent to the layer specified.
 Creating the Site Model | 295

Creating the Site Model

Creating a Site Model from the Source Data

Once source data has been obtained for the site model, the site model can be created. After generation, the site model is
cached so that updating occurs more efficiently; however, large file sizes can result. See Display Preferences on
page 30 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To create a site model from source data:
1. Ensure that valid source data exists. The site model can be created from 3D loci, 3D polygons, stake objects, or by
one of the methods described in Site Model Source Data on page 289. Verify that there are no problems with the
source data with the Validate 3D Data command (see Validating 3D Source Data on page 293).
2. Select the source data.
3. Select Landmark > Create Site Model (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Terrain > Create Site Model
(Architect workspace).
The Site Model Settings dialog box opens. Specify the site model parameters.

Parameter Description
Site Model Name Enter a name for the site model object
Keep Original Source Leaves a copy of the source data in the layer (the site model always retains a copy of
Data in Layer the source data in its profile group). This parameter displays only during initial site
model creation.
Settings
296 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

Parameter Description
Minor Contour Specifies the standard contour line placement interval
Interval
Major Contour Specifies the placement interval of major (heavy) contour lines
Multiple
Start Contour Offset Controls the starting elevation of the 2D contours

Start Contour Offset = 0 Start Contour Offset = 0.5 Start Contour Offset = 1
Minor Contour Interval = 1 Minor Contour Interval = 1 Minor Contour Interval = 1
Major Contour Interval = 5 Major Contour Interval = 5 Major Contour Interval = 5

Maximum Elevation Specifies the highest contour elevation to be displayed. No contours are created if the
maximum elevation is lower than the minimum elevation, but this can be useful for cut
and fill calculations (for example, for pond or backfill volumes).
If a site model update will result in contours exceeding the minimum/maximum
range, an alert displays, allowing the range to be adjusted.
Minimum Elevation Specifies the lowest contour elevation to be displayed
Datum Elevation Indicates the reference elevation used to define the bottom of a site model when the 3D
Mesh Solid style is selected in 3D Display Settings; set to zero for normal cut and fill
calculations
Flow Arrow Spacing Determines the placement of the flow arrows
3D Grid Spacing Sets the grid (mesh) size for 3D display; also determines flow arrow placement
Smoothing Interval When selecting a triangulation method for 2D and/or 3D site model display, sets the
distance for adding new points to the contours. Certain site models, since they are
created from randomly-located origin points, may have an uneven triangulation
distribution. Smoothing forces the site model to create an even distribution of data
points along each contour line, simulating even sampling. Enter zero to use the original
contour points for triangulation. Low values may result in long calculation times.
2D Display Settings
Display Select whether to display the existing site model only, proposed site model only, or
both existing and proposed site models. The display option can be changed later from
the Object Info palette.
Existing Only Displays only the existing model, including any site modifiers that apply to the existing
site model
Proposed Only Displays only the proposed model (the current model changed by any site modifiers
that apply to the proposed site model)
Proposed + Existing Displays both the proposed model and the existing model; this option is useful when
using the site model for a grading plan, with different existing and proposed
topographical line styles
Style Select a 2D site model display mode
 Creating the Site Model | 297

Parameter Description
2D Contour Draws contour lines
2D Contour Smooths contour lines
(smoothed)
2D Contour (colored Draws contour lines and colors the elevations for conducting an elevation analysis
elevations) (elevation analysis parameters are specified by clicking Graphic Properties and
selecting the Site Analysis tab; see Setting Site Model Graphic Properties on
page 298)
2D Contour (colored Draws 2D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing
slopes) Interval, and colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope
analysis
2D Triangle Represents the surface as triangular facets
2D Triangle (colored For 2D triangle display, colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting
slopes) a slope analysis (slope analysis parameters are specified by clicking Graphic
Properties and selecting the Site Analysis tab; see Setting Site Model Graphic
Properties on page 298)
2D Triangulated Draws 2D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing
Contours Interval
Show Flow Arrows Adds arrows to show the downward direction for drainage analysis
Show Labels Labels major 2D contour line elevations
Parallel to the topo When labels are selected for display, labels are parallel to the topography lines
line
Draw Site Border Draws a closed 2D polygon along the site border (outer edge) of the site model
3D Display Settings
Display Select the 3D site model display. The display option can be changed later from the
Object Info palette.
No 3D Display Displays only the 2D site model, with no 3D component
Existing Only Displays the existing 3D site model
Proposed Only Displays the proposed 3D site model
Cut and Fill Displays the 3D cut and fill volumes. Areas where existing and proposed site models
are the same are represented by a flat area. Cut areas display as a depression in the 3D
surface, and fill areas display as a raised area in the 3D surface. (Select cut and fill
colors by clicking Graphic Properties and selecting the Site Model tab; see Setting
Site Model Graphic Properties on page 298.)
Style Select a 3D site model display mode
3D Contour Draws the site model using horizontal 3D polygons
3D Grid Draws the site model using a regular grid (mesh) of horizontal four point rectangles,
spaced by the 3D Grid Spacing value; the mesh can be colored, filled, and rendered
with shadows
3D Mesh solid Groups 3D triangles to form a Vectorworks mesh; a skirt and bottom are added to
create a valid solid
298 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

Parameter Description
3D Triangle Generates 3D triangles with the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) method; this
method is the most accurate, as it involves no interpolation
3D Triangles Generates 3D triangles with the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) method, and
(colored slopes) colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope analysis
3D Extruded Contour Creates horizontal solids with a thickness equal to the contour interval; top edges run
along contour lines or the site border. This creates a layer cake or chipboard model
effect.
3D Triangulated Draws 3D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing
Contours Interval
3D Triangulated Draws 3D contour lines by triangulation, according to the specified Smoothing
Contours (colored Interval, and colors the slopes within specified angle ranges for conducting a slope
slopes) analysis
Show 3D Grid Superimposes a 3D grid on the model; specify the grid spacing value in Spacing
Fill Displays 3D grid squares with a fill; Show 3D Grid does not need to be selected to
display a filled grid
Show 3D Contour Superimposes a 3D contour on the model
Use Site Modifiers on
All Layers Modifies the proposed site model with modifiers from any layer in the file
Visible Layers Only Modifies the proposed site model with modifiers from visible layers only; modifiers on
invisible layers do not affect the site model
Same Layer as Site Modifies the proposed site model with modifiers that exist only on the site model layer
Model only
Graphic Properties Specifies the site model appearance, along with slope and elevation analysis
parameters (see Setting Site Model Graphic Properties on page 298)

4. Click OK.
A site model is created in the active layer and displays as specified.

Setting Site Model Graphic Properties

The site model 2D and 3D graphic display properties can be specified to obtain the desired graphic component colors
and line styles. In addition, specify the colors for elevation and slope analyses, and for the 3D cut and fill volume
representation. These graphic properties can be set when the site model is first created, or changed later from the Object
Info palette.
To set the site model graphic properties:
1. When creating a new site model, click Graphic Properties from the Create Site Model dialog box. To edit a
current site model, click Site Model Settings from the Object Info palette, double-click the site model, or
right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a site model and select Edit from the context menu to open the
Site Model Settings dialog box, and then click Graphic Properties from the Site Model Settings dialog box.
The Graphic Properties dialog box opens.
 Creating the Site Model | 299

2. On the Site Model tab, the 2D (existing and proposed) and 3D site model display can be completely customized by
selecting the class and color for all components, as well as the line type and marker style for certain components.
Double-click on a line to set attributes, or select the item and click Edit.
An Attributes dialog box opens. Select an overall class for each site model component to control its appearance
and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by selecting New, or
select the class named <Site Model Class> which places the site model component in the same class as the site
model object.
Each attribute (color, line type, line thickness, and marker) can be set to the By Class setting. The attributes are
then controlled by the class assigned to the component. (See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
Major contour
Site border
Minor contour

Flow arrow

2D Contour style 2D Triangle style

300 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

3D Grid style 3D Mesh Solid style Cut and Fill volumes

3. On the Site Analysis tab, set the slope and elevation analysis graphic parameters. A slope analysis shows the slope
change of the site model with color ranges indicating the steepest to the shallowest slope. An elevation analysis
shows the elevation change of the site model as a gradient of color from the minimum to the maximum elevation.

Parameter Description
Slope Colors Specify the slope analysis settings
Number of slope Indicate the number of slope levels to use in the analysis
categories
Category __ maximum For each category, indicate the maximum slope percentage and its
slope % associated color; slopes below the specified percentage will be colored as
specified
Slopes exceeding Slopes above the maximum categorys percentage will receive the
maximum category selected color
Elevation Colors Specify the elevation analysis color settings; a color gradient from the
minimum to the maximum elevation is applied to the site model for the
elevation analysis
 Setting Site Model Properties | 301

Parameter Description
Minimum Elevation Select the starting color for the lowest elevation
Color
Maximum Elevation Select the starting color for the highest elevation
Color
2D Cut & Fill Area Draws a polygonal representation of the cut and fill over the 2D
representation of the site model with the specified colors
Cut Volume Area Color Select the color for the volume that is cut from the site model
Fill Volume Select the color for the volume of fill required for the site model

4. Click OK to close the Graphic Properties dialog box.

5. To display a slope analysis, select a 2D display style of 2D or 3D Triangle (colored slopes), 2D Contour (colored
slopes), or 3D Triangulated Contours (colored slopes) for the site model. To display an elevation analysis, select a
2D display style of 2D Contour (colored elevations) for the site model.

Slope analysis Elevation analysis

Create a snapshot of the site model to easily display a slope or elevation analysis along with the site model (see
Creating a Site Model Snapshot on page 305).

Setting Site Model Properties

Site Model Properties

The site model object can be copied, cut, pasted, rotated, and deleted like other objects. In 2D Top/Plan view, the 2D
Display selected for the site model is shown; if both existing and proposed models are selected for display, they are
superimposed. In any 3D view, the 3D Display selected (if any) is shown.
If the Renderworks product is installed, the site model can be textured from the Render tab of the Object Info palette.
The texture is applied to the surface of the site model, and is scaled to fit the site model bounding box.
To see the original source data that were used to create the site model, select Modify > Edit Site Model, or select Edit
Site Model Source Data from the site model context menu. Changes can be made to the source data, and the source
data can be validated (see Validating 3D Source Data on page 293). Return to the site model by clicking Exit Source
Data at the top right of the drawing window. Click Update in the Object Info palette, or select Update from the site
model context menu, to reflect any source data changes in the site model.
Select the Create Drape Surface command to create a smoothed version of the site model contours (see
Creating a Drape Surface on page 397 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
302 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

Once generated, the site model is cached so that updating occurs more efficiently; however, large file sizes can result.
See Display Preferences on page 30 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The parameters of a selected site model can be changed; click Site Model Settings from the Object Info palette,
double-click the site model, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a site model and select Edit from the
context menu to open the Site Model Settings dialog box. For more information on the parameters, see Creating the
Site Model on page 295.

Parameter Description
Site Model Opens the Site Model Settings dialog box. The settings here (and the related graphic
Settings properties settings) are identical to those specified at site model creation, and are
described in Creating the Site Model on page 295.
The option to keep or delete original source data is only available at site model
creation.
Update Updates the site model and any associated snapshots, when the existing site data has
changed or site modifiers have been added or changed
Create a Snapshot Creates a snapshot of the site model with the current site model settings, for displaying
different versions of the site model (see Creating a Site Model Snapshot on page 305)
2D Display Select the display type for the 2D site model
2D Style Select the display style for the 2D site model
3D Display Select the display type (or no display) for the 3D site model
3D Style Select the display type for the 3D site model
Area Display Type Select the units for displaying the projected and surface areas for existing and proposed
site models
Projected Area Displays the projected area (the area projected in plan view) of the site model
Surface Area Displays the 3D surface area of the existing site model
(Existing)
Surface Area Displays the 3D surface area of the proposed site model (when one exists)
(Proposed)
Update Cut and Recalculates the site model cut and fill; after modifying and updating the proposed site
Fill Calculations model, click to view the resulting cut and fill volumes (see Creating a Spoil Pile Area
on page 316). When the calculated volumes indicate that updating is necessary, click to
display the latest results.
Volume Display Select the units for displaying the cut and fill volumes (or allows cut and fill volumes to
Type be hidden, if desired)
Volume (Existing) Displays the total volume of the existing site model
Volume Displays the total volume of the proposed site model
(Proposed)
Cut Volume When the proposed site model has been modified by a site modifier, displays the volume
cut from the site model
Fill Volume When the proposed site model has been modified, displays the volume of fill added to
the site model
Net C&F Volume Displays the net cut or fill volume, indicating whether fill is required or extra cut volume
needs to be removed from the site
 Setting Site Model Properties | 303

Parameter Description
Total C&F Displays the sum of the cut and fill volumes
Volume

Updating a Site Model

If a site modifier object is moved or modified on any layer, the site model displays as an out-of-date site model with a
red and white striped border. This indicates that the site model requires updating.
To update the selected site model:
1. Select the site model.
2. On the Object Info palette, click Update.
3. The selected site model is updated.

If the update causes the site model contours to fall outside the minimum/maximum elevation range specified in the
site model settings, an alert displays, allowing the range to be adjusted.

Cropping a Site Model

The site model can be cropped by a custom site border shape. This allows you to limit the area of the site model,
without permanently excluding the original extents of the source data. The original site model can easily be restored by
editing the site model crop object.
To crop a site model:
1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the site model and select Edit Site Model Crop from the
context menu.
2. In site border editing mode, any existing site border object is selected. Move the site border, or use the Reshape
tool to reshape (edit) the site border object; see Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide. The site border object can also be deleted and a new site border object can be created
from any closed 2D shape.
To remove the cropping from a site model, delete the site border object. This restores the site model to its original
bounds.
304 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

3. When the site border is ready, click the Exit Site Model Crop button (or select Modify > Exit Site Model Crop)
to return to the drawing.
4. The site border crops the site model object.
With the Draw Site Border option selected in the site model settings, the site border displays in Top/Plan view.
Adjust the color of the site border in the graphic properties of the site model settings.

Reshaping the Site Model

The edge of a selected site model displays a crop or border (select Draw Site Border in the Site Model Settings to
draw a 2D polygon on the edge of the site model in Top/Plan view). The Reshape tool reshapes the crop. This is similar
to editing the site model crop object as described in Cropping a Site Model on page 303.)

To reshape the site model crop:

1. Select the site model.

2. Click the Reshape tool from the Basic palette, and click Edit Site Model Crop from the Tool bar.
3. Reshape the site model crop as described in Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide. Crop vertices can be repositioned, added, and deleted.
The site model crop is immediately reshaped. No updating is necessary.

Use the Move Polygon Handles mode of the Reshape tool in

Edit Site Model Crop mode to move the site model crop
vertex, reshaping the crop

Editing Contour Labels

To change the font size of the contour labels, set the size from the Text > Size menu, and then click Update in the
Object Info palette of a selected site model.
 Setting Site Model Properties | 305

Normally, contour labels are distributed along the major contour lines at regular intervals. Occasionally, this is not
desirable and a label needs to be moved. When a site model is selected, two additional modes are available for the
Reshape tool. These modes allow the contour labels to be repositioned, added, and removed.
Show labels must be selected in the Site Model Settings dialog box.

To edit contour labels:

1. Select the site model.

2. Click the Reshape tool from the Basic palette, and click Edit Site Model Label Position from the Tool bar.
Each label on the major contours of the site model displays with a control point.

By default, this contour label was placed

in a crowded area of the drawing

3. Use the Move Label Handle mode to move the label along the current contour line. Add Label mode adds a label
along the contour line; click to add a label at that location. Finally, click on a label control point in Delete Label
mode to remove the contour label.

Move Label Handle mode moves Click on a contour line in Add Label Click on a label control point in
the contour label along the contour mode to place a new label at that Delete Label mode to remove the
line; click to place it in its new location label
location

Only one contour label can be edited at a time. The Reshape tool marquee modes have no effect on contour label
operations. See Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more
information.
If the site model changes later, the relative label positions are preserved, reducing the need to reposition them
again.

Creating a Site Model Snapshot

Creating a snapshot of the site model allows several display styles of the site model to be viewed at one time. The
snapshot views cannot be edited directly; however, if the original site model is modified, the changes apply to all
related snapshots automatically upon updating.
306 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling

To create a site model snapshot:

1. Set the properties of the site model as desired for the snapshot. The snapshots appearance is based on the current
site model settings, and its location is based on the original source data.
2. From the Object Info palette of a selected site model, click Create a Snapshot.
3. The snapshot is created on the active layer, over the original site model. The Object Info palette of a selected
snapshot displays the parameters of the original site model, and cannot be changed for the snapshot (with the
exception of the display units).
4. Any changes to the original site model are reflected in associated snapshots when clicking Update in the Object
Info palette of the selected original site model.

Sending Objects to the Site Model Surface

Trees, parking areas, retaining walls, site retaining modifiers, and other site objects may need to be placed on the
surface of the model. For this purpose, use the Send to Surface command.
This command is effective for 3D loci, 3D polygons, extrudes, sweeps, meshes, slabs, light objects, walls, and
symbols with a 3D component. If a 2D polyline or 2D polygon is selected, it will first be converted into its 3D
equivalent before being sent to the surface.
To send an object to the surface:
1. Make the layer with the site model object the active layer.
2. Place the object on the active layer plane and move it to the desired location on the site model.
3. Select Landmark > Send to Surface (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Terrain > Send to Surface (Architect
workspace).
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object and select Send to Surface from the
context menu (Vectorworks Landmark required).
4. If the object is a retaining wall or pad with retaining edge site modifier, the Send to Surface dialog box opens.
Select the method of sending the object to the surface of the site model, and click OK.
 Setting Site Model Properties | 307

Parameter Description
Elevate the retaining edge Sets the existing vertices of the retaining edge or retaining wall left/right edge
to the surface elevation
Fit the retaining edge Fits the retaining edge or retaining wall left/right edge to the surface of the
site model, modifying existing vertices and/or adding new vertices
Elevate the pad Sets the elevation of the retaining edge pad or retaining wall pad to the
surface elevation; the edges remain unchanged

5. The correct Z value is given to the objects insertion point, bottom-most point, or specified portion, placing the
object on the surface of the site model.
308 | Chapter 8: Site Modeling
Modifying the Site Model 9
Site Model Modification Overview
As discussed in Sitework Overview on page 289, when the site model is generated, two different display modes of
the site model object are availableexisting and proposed. The existing site represents the site prior to your project;
the proposed site incorporates the projects changes. To modify the site model, use the Site Modifiers tool, along with
other site modification tools in Vectorworks; a site modifier can be applied to either the existing or proposed site
model.
Site modifiers can be placed on any layer. The site model properties specify whether modifiers in another layer can
affect the site model (see Creating the Site Model on page 295). You might put various site modifiers on separate
layers, for example, so that you can show each modifiers effect on the site model individually. When a site modifier is
placed in the drawing, the Site-DTM-Modifier class is created automatically.

Creating a Pad
A pad is a 3D polygon representing the shape of an element which is to be added to, and normally, modifies, the site
model. The modifier can be applied to the existing or proposed site model; the site model is modified when the site
model is updated. Pads can be drawn with the Site Modifiers tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the
Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To create a pad:

1. Click the Site Modifiers tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Draw the pad object. Pads can be drawn closed or open (open pads are sometimes called break lines).

If this is the first time the Site Modifiers tool has been used, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the
defaults and click OK.
3. In the Object Info palette, select Pad in the Config field.
4. If the pad is sloping, enter the Slope value (positive for rising, negative for falling), and select the slope definition
unit (Angle or Percent in the SlopeDef field).
A slope arrow is automatically drawn on the pad, indicating the direction of the slope. The bulls-eye at the start of
the slope arrow indicates the zero elevation point of the sloping pad. Select the control points of the slope arrow to
move either end. Deselect Show Slope Arrow to hide the slope arrow.

Parameter Description
Config Indicates the type of modifier object
Elevation Sets the reference elevation of the pad at its control point; if a Z-height is also specified, the
resulting elevation is additive
310 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Slope Determines the angle of the pad; if the value is zero, the pad has no slope, and the following
two parameters are not displayed
SlopeDef Select Angle or Percent to determine the slope units
Apply To Specifies whether the site modifier applies to the existing or proposed site model
Show Slope If selected, displays a modifiable slope arrow and the current slope in Top/Plan view; Show
Arrow Slope Arrow only displays if the slope is a value other than zero

Slope directional
control point

Reference Elevation control point

Update Updates the area and volume calculations displayed in the Object Info palette for the area of
Calculations the site model located under the site modifier
Site model area Displays the area and volume information for the site model area located under the site
and volume data modifier; select the units for the area and volume. For more information, see Site Model
Properties on page 301.

The Site Modifiers tool generates a 3D pad polygon modifier that is always planar.
5. Normally, create grade limits around the pad (see Creating Grade Limits on page 313 and Creating Grade
Limits Automatically on page 314).

Pad

Grade limits

Site modifiers before updating the site model

6. The site model requires updating to reflect the pad modification. Select the site model and click Update from the
Object Info palette.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 311

The proposed site model has been modified

by the pad, but only the area within the
grade limit area has been changed

The existing site model is indicated

with dashed lines in this example

2D view Rendered 3D view

For predictable results, pads should not overlap. All pads should be either completely inside or completely outside
of all grade limits. Pads, including those that may be incorporated into plug-in objects (such as landscape walls)
cannot cross outside the grade limits.

Creating a Pad with a Retaining Edge

A pad with a retaining edge is similar to a regular pad site modifier, but it includes an additional configuration that
defines an edge around the pad, allowing the terrain to be shaped around the pad. For example, the retaining edge can
be used to adjust the terrain around a hardscape, offering precise control over the cut and fill amounts.
The modifier can be applied to the existing or proposed site model; the site model is modified when the site model is
updated. Pads can be drawn with the Site Modifiers tool, or by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Create
Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To create a pad with a retaining edge:

1. Click the Site Modifiers tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Draw the pad object; the retaining edge is added automatically.

If this is the first time the Site Modifiers tool has been used, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the
defaults and click OK.
3. In the Object Info palette, select Pad with Retaining Edge in the Config field.
4. If the pad is sloping, enter the Slope value (positive for rising, negative for falling), and select the slope definition
unit (Angle or Percent in the SlopeDef field).
A slope arrow is automatically drawn on the pad, indicating the direction of the slope. The bulls-eye at the start of
the slope arrow indicates the zero elevation point of the sloping pad. Select the control points of the slope arrow to
move either end. Deselect Show Slope Arrow to hide the slope arrow.
312 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Config Indicates the type of modifier object
Elevation Sets the reference elevation of the pad at its control point; if a Z-height is also
specified, the resulting elevation is additive
Slope Determines the angle of the pad; if the value is zero, the pad has no slope, and the
following two parameters are not displayed
SlopeDef Select Angle or Percent to determine the slope units
Apply To Specifies whether the site modifier applies to the existing or proposed site model
Show Slope If selected, displays a modifiable slope arrow and the current slope in Top/Plan view;
Arrow Show Slope Arrow only displays if the slope value is other than zero

Slope directional
control point
Reference Elevation control point
Update Updates the area and volume calculations displayed in the Object Info palette for the
Calculations area of the site model located under the site modifier
Site model area Displays the area and volume information for the site model area located under the site
and volume data modifier; select the units for the area and volume. For more information, see Site
Model Properties on page 301.
Vertex Edits the path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the
parameters Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Move Select the portion of the retaining edge modifier to edit (vertex or edge), and then edit
its Z value, or scroll through its vertices with the left and right arrows and change the
selected vertex Z value
Edit For vertex selection made in Move, scrolls through the vertices, highlighting the
currently selected vertex. Click the center button to highlight the selected vertex.
Z Sets the elevation of the modifier item selected in Move or the vertex selected in Edit

The Site Modifiers tool generates a 3D pad polygon modifier that is always planar.
5. The retaining edge modifier is drawn separately, and it can be used to control the depression around the pad.
Reshape the retaining edge either from the Object Info palette or with the Reshape tool.
The Object Info palette vertex parameters include the ability to edit the Z value of the selected retaining
modifier vertex or retaining modifier edge.
The retaining edge site modifier can be reshaped with the Reshape tool, similar to reshaping walls (see
Reshaping Walls on page 446 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Move vertices, and add or
delete vertices to reshape the retaining edge.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 313

Add a vertex to the retaining edge Change the elevation of a retaining

with the Reshape tool edge vertex with the Reshape tool

The Send to Surface command can be used to send either the retaining modifier edge or the pad to the surface
of the site model.
6. The site model requires updating to reflect the pad modification. Select the site model and click Update from the
Object Info palette.

Creating Grade Limits

Grade limits define the area of topographical transition between existing site data and the site modifiers enclosed
within the grade limits; they can be thought of as a limit of construction. Outside the grade limits, the site remains
unchanged; within the grade limits, the site model is defined by the pads. Grade limits can overlap, but cannot
completely enclose, another grade limit area. Grade limits should not cross a pad or spoil pile.
Grade limits are created automatically around certain site modifiers, such as massing models. Grade limits can also be
created automatically from pads (Vectorworks Landmark required); see Creating Grade Limits Automatically on
page 314. To draw grade limits manually, use the Site Modifiers tool, or draw a polyline and then select the Create
Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To create grade limits:

1. Click the Site Modifiers tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Draw the grade limit area around a site modifier, such as a pad.

Pad

Grade limits

Site modifiers before updating the site model

If this is the first time the Site Modifiers tool has been used, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the
defaults and click OK.
3. In the Object Info palette, select Grade Limits from the Config field.

Parameter Description
Config Indicates the type of modifier object
Apply To Specify whether the grade limits apply to the existing or proposed site model
314 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Show 3D In 3D views, represents the grade limits with a 3D polygon; deselect this option to
hide this geometry
Update Calculations Updates the area and volume calculations displayed in the Object Info palette for
the area of the site model located under the site modifier
Site model area and Displays the area and volume information for the site model area located under the
volume data site modifier; select the units for the area and volume. For more information, see
Site Model Properties on page 301.

4. The site model requires updating to reflect the grade limit modification. Select the site model and click Update
from the Object Info palette.

Creating Grade Limits Automatically

Because grade limits are often associated with a pad or other type of site modifier, the Vectorworks Landmark product
can create grade limits automatically around a site modifier, based on specific parameters. Grade limits can be created
with a gradual sloping transition from the existing site contours to the modifier, placed at a variable or fixed distance
from the modifier. The grade limits cut and fill the site model to create a constant slope (batter slope).
To create grade limits automatically around one or more site modifier(s):
1. Select the site modifier(s) which require the grade limits. Valid modifiers include pads, road objects, massing
models, and landscape walls.
2. Select Landmark > Create Grade Limits from Pad.
The Create Grade Limits from Pad dialog box opens. Select the grade limit parameters.

Parameter Description
Grade Limits Offset
Control
Distance Creates the grade limits at a fixed offset distance
Batter Slope Creates variable offset grade limits based on slope (the slope variation
determines the offset; the grade limits are located at the intersection of the
slope and the existing terrain)
Max. Offset Sets the fixed offset distance for Distance offset control, or specifies the
maximum offset distance allowed for Batter Slope offset control
Max. Slope For Batter Slope offset control, specifies the maximum allowable slope
(in degrees)
 Site Model Modification Overview | 315

Parameter Description
Slope Control Options
Use Midpoints Enables additional testing points for a more uniform slope
Test Increment Specifies the number of midpoints to test; a smaller increment distance
increases the accuracy of the slope calculations, but can also increase the
time to create the grade limits (the minimum increment is 12)

3. Click OK to create the grade limits.

4. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.

Pad

Grade limits

Creating a Pad from Grade Limits

A pad modifier can automatically be created within defined grade limits. The pad is placed so that the cut and fill
amounts of the underlying proposed site model are set equally, helping site designers start with a balanced solution.
Certain restrictions apply when creating the pad:
The polygon that defines the grade limit area must be closed. If more than one grade limit area is selected, all the
grade limit polygons must be closed. (To close the polygon, select the grade limit and then select Closed in the
Object Info palette.)
The grade limit area must be fully enclosed within a site model.
The specified batter slope cannot be too small to create the pad; a slope value that is too low prevents balanced cut
and fill.
To create a pad automatically from the grade limits:
1. Select one or more grade limit objects.
2. Select Landmark > Create Pad from Grade Limits.
3. The Create Pad from Grade Limits dialog box opens.
316 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

4. Specify the batter slope for the pad; the slope must be greater than 0 but less than 90 degrees.
5. Click OK.
The resulting pad modifier is created and selected.

Grade limits Pad

Creating a Spoil Pile Area

A spoil pile refers to an area where excess earth is used to help balance the cut and fill, so that the site does not require
earth to be moved in or out. A spoil pile area applies an even thickness of cut or fill for the site. To create a spoil pile,
either use the Site Modifiers tool, or draw a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see
Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).
To create a spoil pile area:
1. Create the site model and add any modifiers, such as pads and roads, and update the proposed site model by
clicking Update from the Object Info palette of the selected site model.

2. The initial cut and fill volumes are displayed in the Object Info palette (see Site Model Properties on page 301).
3. Click the Site Modifiers tool from the Site Planning tool set.
4. Draw the spoil pile area.
If this is the first time the Site Modifiers tool has been used, the Object Preferences dialog box opens. Accept the
defaults and click OK.
5. In the Object Info palette, select Spoil Pile from the Config field. Adjust the elevation of the spoil pile up or down
depending on whether fill is required or excess fill is present.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 317

Parameter Description
Config Indicates the type of modifier object
Elevation Sets the reference elevation of the spoil pile; a positive elevation is reported as fill volume,
while a negative elevation is reported as cut volume, when calculating the underlying
existing or proposed site model
Apply To Specifies whether the site modifier applies to the existing or proposed site model
Show 3D In 3D views, represents the spoil pile with a 3D polygon; deselect this option to hide this
geometry
Update Updates the area and volume calculations displayed in the Object Info palette for the area
Calculations of the site model located under the site modifier
Site model area Displays the area and volume information for the site model area located under the site
and volume data modifier; select the units for the area and volume. For more information, see Site Model
Properties on page 301.

6. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.

Spoil pile

7. With the site model still selected, click Update Cut and Fill Calculations from the Object Info palette.
Evaluate the results of the spoil pile by checking the Net C&F Volume results in the Object Info palette of the
selected site model. If the spoil pile elevation needs adjustment, select the spoil pile and enter a new Elevation
value in the Object Info palette. Then select the site model, click Update, and then click Update Cut and Fill
Calculations.
8. Continue adjusting the spoil pile elevation until a balanced cut and fill volume is achieved.
Display the 3D cut and fill volumes by selecting Cut and Fill as the 3D Display in the Object Info palette of a
selected site model. The cut and fill colors are specified on the Site Model tab of the Graphic Properties dialog
box. In addition, a 2D polygonal representation of the cut and fill area can be displayed by selecting 2D Cut &
Fill Area from the Site Analysis tab. See Setting Site Model Graphic Properties on page 298.

Creating a Texture Bed

The texture bed site modifier converts a 2D polygon into an area of the drawing that can be textured. For example,
texture a lawn with grass, a terrace with bricks, or a sand trap with sand for a photorealistic rendered appearance. To
draw a texture bed, either use the Site Modifiers tool, or draw a polyline and then select the Create Objects from
Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).
The Renderworks product is required for creating and rendering texture beds.
318 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

To create a texture bed:

1. Click the Site Modifiers tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Draw the texture bed.
3. In the Object Info palette, select Texture Bed from the Config field.

Parameter Description
Config Indicates the type of modifier object
Elevation Sets the reference elevation of the texture bed above the site model surface; normally,
set this value to zero. The texture is designed to lie on the surface of the site model
when the texture bed is set to an elevation of zero.
Apply To Specifies whether the site modifier applies to the existing or proposed site model
Texture from The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
Class clicking New, or select the class named <Site Modifiers Class> to derive the texture
from the class of the site modifier. The indicated class should have a texture applied on
the Other tab, with Use Textures At Creation selected. See Applying Object
Textures by Class on page 632 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Show 3D In 3D views, enabling this option represents the texture bed with a 3D polygon;
deselect this option to hide the geometry and display the texture bed only with its
texture
Update Updates the area and volume calculations displayed in the Object Info palette for the
Calculations area of the site model located under the site modifier
Site model area Displays the area and volume information for the site model area located under the site
and volume data modifier; select the units for the area and volume. For more information, see Site
Model Properties on page 301.

See Textures and Shaders on page 590 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on
textures.
4. The site model requires updating to reflect the texture bed modification. Select the site model and click Update
from the Object Info palette.
5. Render the model with a Renderworks render mode to see the texture bed.

Texture bed
 Site Model Modification Overview | 319

Mapping Images on the Site Model

Images can be mapped to the surface of the site model; for example, use an aerial image of the site. Unlike the texture
bed, which is a site modifier, mapping of an image texture occurs from the Render tab of the Object Info palette, and is
adjusted with the Attribute Mapping tool.
The Renderworks product is required for mapping images.
To map images on the site model:
1. Create an image texture as described in Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Select the site model. From the Object Info palette, select the image texture from the Texture list on the Render
tab. See Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. Switch to a 3D view from the Views > Standard Views menu, and render the site model to view the mapped
image.
4. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Visualization tool set to position, move, resize, and rotate the image
texture. Mapping adjustments are constrained to the 2D texture space plane; the image cannot be skewed or tilted.
See Direct Texture Mapping on page 623 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Creating Custom Site Modifiers

As the Site Modifiers tool creates a pad, grade limits, spoil pile, or texture bed site modifier, the site modifier contains
geometry that is placed in the Site-DTM-Modifier class. It is also possible to create site modifiers with polygons and
NURBS curves; placing them in the Site-DTM-Modifier class causes them to modify the proposed site model.
The type of site modifier created depends on the object.
A 2D polygon acts like grade limits;
A 3D polygon or NURBS curve acts like a pad.
To obtain uniform sloping sides on an open 3D polygon used as a swale or break line, place the 3D polygon in the
Site-DTM-Modifier class, and select Create Grade Limits from Pad (Vectorworks Landmark required). See
Creating Grade Limits Automatically on page 314.

Creating a Massing Model

The Massing Model tool creates a building shell for illustrative purposes. This is an easy way to create a representative
or context building when a detailed building is not required. Building models can also be created by drawing a polyline
and then selecting the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696). A
massing model can be a site modifier.
320 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

To create a massing model:

1. Click the Massing Model tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click to begin drawing the outline of the building. Continue clicking to draw the shell polyline. Double-click, or
click once at the start point, to end the polyline.

3. The massing model parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Name Enter a building name for labeling
Show in Plan Select whether to show the building roof or footprint in Plan view
Label Select a text label, if any, for the building shell in Plan view; move the text control
point to reposition the text
Text control point

Height Specifies the building height (to the eave)

Floor Count Specifies the number of floors in the building
 Site Model Modification Overview | 321

Parameter Description
Floor Usage Data Opens the Floor Usage Data dialog box, for reporting the usage of massing model
floors. This is useful in worksheets, for example, when reporting the usage data of
the floors using the FloorUsageData parameter (see Worksheet Functions on
page 837 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). The number of floors
listed depends on the Floor Count (if the Floor Count is reduced later, floor
usage data will be lost).

By default, each floors usage is Unspecified. To specify the floor usage data,
select each floor and enter the Usage Data for that floor.
A semi-colon cannot be used in the usage data, because this is the delimiter
for the FloorUsageData function.
Wall Class Select a class to use for wall style attributes
Use Custom Roof from Select to create a custom roof as described in Creating a Custom Massing Model
Profile Roof on page 322. The first roof created by the object is used as the default
custom roof; if the number of stories has changed, the height of the custom roof
needs to be manually adjusted.
Roof Overhang Specifies the distance the roof extends from the building
Roof Thickness Indicates the roof thickness
Roof Class Select a class to use for hipped roof style attributes
Pitched Roof Select to add a roof to the building shell
Eave Style Select an eave style from the list
Roof Slope Specifies the roof pitch angle in degrees
Draw Floors Select to draw floors in the building
Slab Thickness Specifies the floor thickness
Display Shadow in Plan Select to display a shadow based on the roof outline in Top/Plan view.
View Document-wide settings from the Plan Shadows pane on the Document
Preferences dialog box are applied. Click Shadow Settings to open the Document
Preferences dialog box to review and edit the settings (see Plan Shadows
Preferences on page 35 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
322 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Use Site Modifiers Adds a pad and grade limits to the base of the building and allows the building to
modify the site model
Use Grade Limits Uses grade limits to define the site modifier modification area
Grade Limits Off. Sets the offset of the grade limits from the massing model
Gross Area Displays the gross area value for all the floors
Vertex parameters Edits the object vertices. See Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

4. If the massing model is used as a site modifier, the proposed site model requires updating. Select the site model
and click Update from the Object Info palette.

Creating a Custom Massing Model Roof

If the standard flat or pitched massing model roof is not sufficient for portraying a more specific type of model, the roof
geometry can be customized.

To create a custom massing model roof:

1. Create the massing model as described in Creating a Massing Model on page 319.

2. Select Use Custom Roof from Profile.

3. Select Modify > Edit Massing Model to enter roof profile editing mode.
In this mode, the roof can be selected and modified by standard editing methods used in the Vectorworks program;
see Editing Objects on page 247 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. The Reshape tool can also be
used.
The first roof created by the object is used as the default custom roof; if the number of stories has changed, the
height of the custom roof needs to be manually adjusted. A pitched roof is treated as a roof object; edit its
parameters as described in Editing Roof Objects on page 460 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Eaves can be changed to gables, for example.
The geometry of a pitched roof can be further edited by selecting Modify > Edit Group and creating cut-outs; see
Creating Cutouts in a Roof Object on page 463 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Geometry can
be added to the roof (a dome or cupola), or subtracted from the roof using 3D tools. Click the Exit Group button
(or select Modify > Exit Group) to return to the roof profile editing mode.
Deleting the existing custom roof causes a copy of the current standard roof, pitched or flat, to be placed in the
group when the group is exited.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 323

4. When the roof edits have been made, click the Exit Profile button (or select Modify > Exit Profile) to return to
the drawing.

Changes to the massing model may require manual updates to the custom roof; select the massing model and select
Modify > Edit Massing Model to make any changes.

Creating a Road
A road object can be set to be a site model modifier, and changes the proposed site model when the site model is
updated.
Creating a road is a multi-step procedure. The centerline of the road is defined with a polyline, and then stakes are
added. The elevation of the stakes, which are initially set to the surface of the site model, can be modified before the
road is created. Finally, the site model is updated and modified by the road object.
A Roadway (NURBS) object offers a simpler, but less exacting, way of inserting a road on a site model, and is
available in both the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products. See Creating NURBS Roadways on
page 329 for more information.

Creating the Road Centerline

The road design elements can be created on a separate layer to facilitate modifications later.

To create the road centerline:

1. If desired, create a new layer for the road by selecting Tools > Organization. The layer scale should be the same
as the site model layer scale. Set the site model layer to visible, and select View > Layer Options > Show/Snap
Others.
2. Using the Polyline tool, create a polyline that represents the road shape.
For more information on polylines, see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
324 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Interior vertices of the polyline must be arc-smoothed (no Bzier or cubic vertices).

The road must be contained within the site model grade limits.

Placing Station Points Along the Road Polyline

The Vectorworks Landmark product places station points (stake objects) along the selected polyline at a specified
interval.
To place station points:
1. Select the polyline, and then select Landmark > Roads > Station on Polyline. The Place Station Points Along
Polyline dialog box opens. This command places stations at 100 (or 30.48 m) intervals. In addition, partial station
points can be placed at smaller intervals. Enter the interval between partial stations and select a labeling option for
the curve information.

Parameter Description
Partial station interval Indicates the spacing interval between partial station points
 Site Model Modification Overview | 325

Parameter Description
Create individual curve labels Creates curve data tables at each polyline curve.
The curve labels include the following data:

Point of Curvature (PC)

verse
Point of Tangency (PT)
Point of Intersection (PI)
of Tra

Included Angle (I)

Tangent Distance (T)
tion

Radius (R)
Length of Curve (L)
Direc

Chord (C)
Center of Curve (O)

Create circular curve data table Creates a Station Worksheet with the curve data; the worksheet
number corresponds to the polyline number
No Curve Data No curve data tables or tangent guide lines are created

2. Click OK to create the station points along the polyline. If this is the first time a stake has been placed in the file,
the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and click OK. Stake properties are described in
Inserting Stake Objects on page 368.
Each station point is labeled. If curve data tables were created, they can be selected and moved if necessary.

Tangential guide line

Station point (stake)

Curve data table
326 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

3. The stakes have all been set to the elevation of the site model; the next step is to automatically set the road stake
elevations as described in Setting Stake Elevations on page 326.

Setting Stake Elevations

In Placing Station Points Along the Road Polyline on page 324, the stake elevations were set according to the site
model; in real situations, a road is often set to a grade other than natural grade. The Align Stakes Vertically command
sets the elevation of the stakes to a specific plane.
To set the stake elevations with a linear alignment:
1. Set the elevation of only one of the terminal stakes (one of the stakes at the ends of the segment to align) by
selecting the stake and entering its elevation in the Object Info palette. If a site model was present when the
Station on Polyline command was executed, the elevation of the stake is set to the proposed site model elevation
for reference.
2. In the segment to align, press the Shift key to select both the first and last stake (the stakes at either end of the
desired elevation alignment), and then select Landmark > Roads > Align Stakes Vertically.
The Align Stakes Vertically dialog box opens.

3. Enter either a slope value in percentage for the road or the elevation of the last stake, and click OK.
The elevations of the stakes located between the selected stakes are set to the specified plane.

Creating the Road

This procedure creates the road by automatically making an individual road object between each stake. The road
follows the centerline polyline, and is set to the elevations specified by the stakes.
To create the road:
1. Select the center polyline or any of the station points, and select Landmark > Roads > Create Road from
Stakes.
The Create Road from Stakes dialog box opens. Enter the road parameters.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 327

Parameter Description
Width Specifies the road width between the curbs
Curb Height/Width Specifies the height and width of the road
curbs
Paving Thickness Indicates the thickness of the road paving

2. Click OK. The polyline and stakes are used to create a road section between adjacent stakes. If this is the first time
a road has been created in the file during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens for creating straight
and curved roads. Accept the default values and click OK in both dialog boxes.
3. Once created, the straight and curved sections of the road need to become site modifiers by selecting the road
sections and then selecting Use Site Modifiers in the Object Info palette.
Use the Custom Selection command to select the straight and curved road sections; see Creating Custom
Selection Scripts on page 847 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The grade limits offset can be set manually, or the grade limits can be turned off and created separately using the
Create Grade Limits from Pad command (see Creating Grade Limits Automatically on page 314). When site
modifiers are used, each road section contains a pad (see Creating a Pad on page 309 and Creating Grade
Limits on page 313).

Parameter Description
Z Elevation of the first stake in the segment
Radius (curved roads) Arc radius of the segment (set by the command)
Width (curved roads) Width of the segment (set by the command)
Road Length (straight roads) Length of segment (set by the command)
Paving Width (straight Width of the segment (specified in the Create Road from Stakes dialog
roads) box)
Curb Height Sets the height of the curb (specified in the Create Road from Stakes
dialog box)
328 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Curb Width Sets the width of the curb (specified in the Create Road from Stakes
dialog box)
Paving Thickness Sets the thickness of the road (specified in the Create Road from Stakes
dialog box)
Rise Difference in height between stake elevations
Show Joints Displays the connecting joint between road sections
Use Site Modifiers When selected, creates a pad and grade limits for each section to modify
the site
Use Grade Limits Uses grade limits to define the site modifier modification area
Left/Right Grade Limits Controls the grade limit offsets on either side of the road
Offset
Sweep (curved roads) Sets the degree (arc angle) of the sweep of the segment

Stakes should not be moved (except in elevation) when using the Create Road from Stakes command. If an
additional stake is required, add a vertex point to the polyline, provide an elevation value, and run the Create
Road from Stakes command again.

4. The proposed site model requires updating. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
If the road was created on a different layer from the site model, click Site Model Settings from the Object Info
palette and ensure that Use Site Modifiers on All Layers is selected.
The proposed site model is updated. If Use Site Modifiers was selected for the road sections, the contour lines are
adjusted to rise or fall to meet the level of the road.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 329

Use the Attributes palette to add a solid fill color to the road

Creating NURBS Roadways

Roadway objects can be used to modify the site model. To draw a roadway object, either use one of the various
roadway tools on the Site Planning tool set, or draw a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes
command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).
One of the most flexible roadway objects is the Roadway (NURBS) tool, which uses NURBS curves to define the road
shape. The Roadway (NURBS) object, while easy to edit, does not represent accurate alignments of low-speed
roadways, which are typically constructed with arcs (constant radius) and tangents (straight lines); the Vectorworks
Landmark product provides these roadway objects (see Creating a Road on page 323).
A suggested process for using the Roadway (NURBS) object is:
Create the roadway
Select the Send to Surface command to set the road to the existing terrain
Select Redistribute and Smooth Curve from the Object Info palette of the selected roadway once or twice to
smooth out the road slightly, so it does not follow every hill and valley in the existing terrain
Manually reshape the road in 3D as required (to match other road elevations, garage elevations, and so on.)
Only select Redistribute Stations for more or fewer station annotations. Fewer stations are easier to work with
when sketching and reshaping, but a road construction company might require more stations to be specified.
Redistribute Stations is also useful to ensure that the station spacing is equal after reshaping the road.

To create a road with the Roadway (NURBS) object:

1. Click the Roadway (NURBS) tool from the Site Planning tool set.
The following modes are available.
NURBS Curve by NURBS Curve
Interpolation Point Degree Setting

Preferences

NURBS Curve by Control Point

See Creating NURBS Curves on page 387 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
330 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

2. Click in the drawing file to set the start point of the road, and then click to set the position of each additional
NURBS vertex. Double-click the last point to complete creation of the roadway (NURBS) object.
The roadway (NURBS) object properties dialog box opens. Click OK to accept the default settings.
3. The roadway (NURBS) properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Z height Adjusts the elevation of the entire road
Road Length Displays the length of the road
Paving Width Specifies the overall width of the paved road surface (without curbs)
Paving Height Specifies the road paving thickness (without curbs)
Curb Width Specifies the curb or shoulder width
Curb Height Specifies the curb or shoulder height
Left Guardrail Adds a guardrail to the left side of the road
Right Guardrail Adds a guardrail to the right side of the road
Show Stations The NURBS curve vertices are used as the station points; select to display
the station points. In 2D, stations display as loci with text displaying the
point elevation. In 3D, the stations display as round stakes.
Create Pad for Site Select for the Roadway (NURBS) object to create its own pad modifier
Model
Create Grade Limits for Select for the Roadway (NURBS) object to create its own grade limits
Site Model modifier, which controls the zone in which the terrain transitions between
the existing elevation and the road elevation
Grade Limits Method Specify whether to create offset or sloped grade limits
Grade Limits Off. When creating offset grade limits, specify the distance from the road to the
grade limits
Grade Limits Slope When creating sloped grade limits, specify the batter slope
Paving Class Select the class for the paved portion of the road
Curb Class Select the class for the curb or shoulder
Redistribute Stations Redistributes the stations at a specified spacing interval
Redistribute and Smooth Redistributes the station points at a specified spacing interval and smooths
Curve the NURBS curve
Send Stations to Surface Click to set the Z value of the stations to the surface of the site model. The
stations can be set to either the surface of the existing site model, or to the
surface of the proposed site model, which may have been altered by
modifiers.
If the stations are sent to the surface of a proposed site model which has
been changed by modifiers, it may be necessary to deselect Create Pad for
Site Model and Create Grade Limits for Site Model for the Roadway
(NURBS) in order to prevent site modifier errors caused by crossing pads or
grade limits.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 331

Parameter Description
Align Stations Vertically Sets the elevation of the indicated station points to a specific plane. As the
starting and ending stations are indicated, a red line previews the included
station points. The % Grade indicates the grade that will be set between
station points.
NURBS curve Edits the roadway NURBS curve
parameters

4. If necessary, use the Reshape tool to modify the locations of the vertices after object creation, or use the vertex
editing controls on the Object Info palette to move the vertices or change the degree of vertices.
5. Update the site model. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.

Creating Landscape Walls

The Vectorworks Architect and Landmark programs include the ability to create a stepped wall. The Vectorworks
Landmark program also contains the ability to create a retaining wall site modifier, and several ways of creating
landscape walls with the landscape wall tools. The stepped wall and retaining wall site modifier are based on walls
created with the Wall or Round Wall tool, offering the benefits and flexibility of the architectural wall tools.

Creating Stepped Walls

Stepped walls add wall peaks to existing walls created with the Wall tool or Round Wall tool. The existing wall can be
a single wall or a chain of multiple wall segments that are L-joined to each other. Stepped walls can have a constant rise
at each interval, or conform to underlying terrain with a variable rise, such as free-standing landscape walls or fences.

To create a stepped wall:

1. Select the wall or multiple, L-joined walls.
2. Select AEC > Create Stepped Wall (Architect workspace) or Landmark > Architectural > Create Stepped
Wall (Landmark workspace).
The Create Stepped Wall dialog box opens. Set the stair parameters.
332 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

The options available depend on the selected Step Style (even steps or terrain steps). If the parameters are set so
that the steps are uneven, the top step is truncated.
Total length

Step rise
Total rise
Step length

Even step wall depicted

Parameter Description
Even Steps Creates a stepped wall with a constant rise and wall peaks at even intervals
Preview Previews the selected configuration
Total Length Displays the total length of the stepped wall to be created
Number of Steps Displays the total number of steps to be created
Calculator The steps are created based on three parameters: step length, step rise, and
total rise. Based on the entry of two of these parameters, the third is
automatically calculated. Click to place the calculator at the parameter that
should be automatically calculated, and enter the values for the other two
parameters.
Step Length Sets the length of one step
Step Rise Sets the rise of one step
Total Rise Specifies the total rise value
Apply Steps to Steps can be applied to either the top or bottom of the wall, or both
Top of Wall Steps apply to the top of the wall
Horizontal Offset Specifies the horizontal offset of the top steps; positive values move the steps
to the left, while negative values move them to the right. This allows the last
step to be shorter or longer, for example.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 333

Parameter Description
Bottom of Wall Steps apply to the bottom of the wall
Horizontal Offset Specifies the horizontal offset of the bottom steps; positive values move the
steps to the left, while negative values move them to the right.
Reverse Direction Sets whether steps should be started from the beginning of the wall (option is
deselected) or end of the wall (option is selected)
Terrain Steps
Total Length Displays the total length of the stepped wall to be created
Number of Steps Displays the total number of steps to be created
Step Length Sets the length of one step
Vertical Offset Specifies the offset distance from the terrain surface; an offset of zero keeps
the steps at the surface, while a positive value raises them above the surface
Apply Steps to
Top of Wall Applies steps to the top of the wall, mirroring the terrain
Horizontal Offset Specifies the horizontal offset of the top steps; positive values move the steps
to the left, while negative values move them to the right. This allows the last
step to be shorter or longer, for example.
Bottom of Wall Terrain steps are always applied to the bottom of the wall, since the steps
follow the terrain
Horizontal Offset Specifies the horizontal offset of the bottom steps; positive values move the
steps to the left, while negative values move them to the right.
Place Steps Above The steps are reversed so that they are above the terrain
Terrain

3. Click OK to create the stepped wall.

The Send to Surface command can be used on walls; it sets the bottom Z value at the start of the wall to the
existing terrain surface (see Sending Objects to the Site Model Surface on page 306).

Creating Retaining Walls

A retaining wall site modifier can be created based on existing walls created with the Wall tool or Round Wall tool.
The existing wall can be a single wall or a chain of multiple wall segments that are L-joined to each other. The retaining
wall created can modify the site model, and the terrain can be sculpted as desired around the retaining wall.
Once created, the retaining wall site modifier is not associated with the wall object used to create it.
To create a retaining wall site modifier:
1. Select the wall or multiple, L-joined walls.
2. Select Landmark > Create Retaining Wall Site Modifier.
The Create Retaining Wall Site Modifier dialog box opens. Set the initial location of the site modifiers within the
retaining wall. There are three distinct areas that can modify the site model:
the pad at the bottom of the wall, which can be offset from the top or bottom of the wall, or simply follow the
terrain;
the left and right side edges of the wall, which can be offset from the top or bottom of the wall, or follow the
terrain; and
334 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

the starting and ending edges of the wall.

The left and right sides of the wall are determined by the wall direction as it was drawn.

Parameter Description
Diagram This wall schematic shows the location of the pad modifier at the bottom of
the wall (1), the left (2) and right (3) edge modifiers, and the start (4) and end
(5) edge modifiers; it also shows the wall start and end, which determines the
wall direction and therefore which edge is left and right
Pad Specifies the vertical offset and shape of the modifier pad; the modifier can
be offset from the top or bottom of the wall and follow top or bottom wall
peaks, or can simply follow the current terrain. The pad offset can control the
cut and fill values produced by the site modifier
Offset Below Wall Top Sets the pad modifier to be offset below the top of the wall by the specified
value
Follow Top Wall The modifier shape follows the wall peaks at the top of the wall. If a wall has
Peaks vertical peaks, the modifiers will be nearly vertical
Offset Above Wall Sets the pad modifier to be offset above the bottom of the wall by the
Bottom specified value
Follow Bottom Wall The modifier shape follows the wall peaks at the bottom of the wall. If a wall
Peaks has vertical peaks, the modifiers will be nearly vertical.
Follow Terrain The pad modifier follows the terrain location (offset and shape) along the
bottom of the wall
Side Edges
Left/Right Modifier Select whether to create the edge modifier objects on the left and/or right
Edge sides of the retaining wall. Edge modifiers sculpt the terrain at the left or right
of the retaining wall sides according to the parameters set. The modifier can
be offset from the top or bottom of the wall and follow top or bottom wall
peaks, or can simply follow the current terrain.
Offset Below Wall Sets the edge modifier to be offset below the top of the wall by the specified
Top value
 Site Model Modification Overview | 335

Parameter Description
Follow Top Wall The modifier shape follows the wall peaks at the top of the wall. If a wall has
Peaks vertical peaks, the modifiers will be nearly vertical
Offset Above Wall Sets the edge modifier to be offset above the bottom of the wall by the
Bottom specified value
Follow Bottom The modifier shape follows the wall peaks at the bottom of the wall. If a wall
Wall Peaks has vertical peaks, the modifiers will be nearly vertical.
Follow Terrain The edge modifier follows the terrain location (offset and shape) along the
side of the wall
Start/End Edges The start and end edge modifiers define how the terrain wraps around the
retaining wall sides
Include Start Modifier Select whether to create an edge modifier object at the starting edge of the
Edge wall
Include End Modifier Select whether to create an edge modifier object at the ending edge of the
Edge wall

3. Click OK to create the retaining wall site modifier. The original wall(s) remain in the drawing; the site modifier is
a new, separate object.
4. Update the site model to apply the changes (select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette).
Retaining wall site
modifier created

Site model updated

Editing Retaining Walls

Retaining wall parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Apply To Select whether the retaining wall modifies the existing or proposed site model
Width Determines the distance between the left and right edges of the retaining wall
Pad Offset Specifies the offset of the pad from the Z elevation of the retaining wall site
modifier object itself; the offset can control the cut and fill values produced
by this site modifier
Include Left/Right/ Toggles the modification of the site model by the selected modifier edge
Start/End Modifier parameters
Edge
Vertex parameters Edits the path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
336 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Move Select the portion of the retaining wall modifier to edit, and then edit its
Elevation, or scroll through its vertices with the left and right arrows and
change the selected vertex Elevation
Edit For vertex selections made in Move, scrolls through the vertices, highlighting
the currently selected vertex. Click the center button to highlight the selected
vertex.
Elevation Sets the elevation of the modifier item selected in Move or the vertex selected
in Edit

The retaining wall site modifier consists of four modifier edges, joined by common vertices. The left and right edges of
the retaining wall site modifier can be reshaped with the Reshape tool, similar to reshaping walls (see Reshaping
Walls on page 446 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Move vertices, and add or delete vertices to
reshape the retaining wall.

Reshape right edge with the Reshape tool in a 3D view Site model updated

The start and end edges cannot be directly edited with the Reshape tool. However, a vertex added to the left or right
edge can be edited by the Reshape tool (select Start/End Modifier Edge from the Move list in the Object Info palette,
and click Add Vertex). Adding vertices to the start and end edges allows them to be reshaped as needed.

Vertex added to start edge

can be moved by the
Reshape tool

Vertex shared by start

modifier and right modifier

Pad modifier vertex

The Send to Surface command can be used to send either the retaining wall modifier edge or the pad to the surface of
the site model.

Landscape Wall Tools

The Vectorworks Landmark program includes three tools for creating landscape walls.
A landscape wall object (retaining wall) can be set to be a site model modifier. It changes the proposed site model when
the site model is updated.
To draw straight, arc, and Bzier landscape walls, either use the landscape wall tools, or draw a polyline and then select
the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696). Place the different
types of landscape walls next to each other to achieve a particular design or effect.
To create a row of straight and curved landscape walls, use the Create Objects from Shapes command.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 337

Straight Landscape Walls

To insert a straight landscape wall:

1. Click the Landscape Wall tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click and drag to define the length and angle of the landscape wall. Click again to set the end point. If this is the
first time the tool is used during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and
click OK.
The straight landscape wall parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Top width

Left pitch Right pitch

Cross section

Parameter Description
Z Elevation of starting point of wall
Rot Angle of rotation of wall
Length Total length of all wall sections in the object
Top Width Width of wall at top (see diagram)
Step Height When the wall starting point and ending point are different, this parameter
indicates the height of the step between sections
Wall Height Wall height above Z value
Rise Difference in height between wall starting and ending points
Left/Right Pitch Angle of wall on left and right sides (see diagram); for a straight wall with
site modifiers, the left side is always the side that retains earth
Use Site Modifiers Adds a pad and grade limits to each wall section and allows the landscape
wall to modify the site model
Use Grade Limits Uses grade limits to define the site modifier modification area
Left/Right Grade Controls the grade limit offsets on either side of the wall (applies only when
Limits Off. site modifiers are used)
Show Joints Displays the connecting joints between wall sections
338 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Arc Landscape Walls

To insert an arc landscape wall:

1. Click the Landscape Wall Arc tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click to define the placement of the arc landscape wall and click again to set the rotation. If this is the first time the
tool is used during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and click OK.
The landscape wall arc parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Top Width

Inside pitch Outside pitch

s
diu
Ra
Arc sweep Cross section
angle

Parameter Description
Z Elevation of starting point of wall
Radius Radius of all wall sections
Top Width Width of wall at top (see diagram)
Step Height When the wall starting point and ending point are different, this parameter
indicates the height of the step between sections
Wall Height Wall height above Z value
Rise Difference in height between wall starting and ending points
Inside/Outside Pitch Angle of wall on the inside and outside (see diagram); for an arc wall with site
modifiers, the side of the wall that retains earth must be selected in Retained
Side
Show Joints Displays the connecting joints between wall sections
Retained Side For an arc wall with site modifiers, select the side of the wall that retains earth
Arc Sweep Angle, in degrees, of arc (see diagram)
Use Site Modifiers Adds a pad and grade limits to each wall section and allows the landscape
wall to modify the site model
Use Grade Limits Uses grade limits to define the site modifier modification area
Inside/Outside Grade Controls the grade limit offsets on either side of the wall (applies only when
Limits Off. site modifiers are used)

Bzier Landscape Walls

To insert a Bzier landscape wall:

1. Click the Landscape Wall Bzier tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click and drag to define the length and angle of the landscape wall. Click again to set the end point. If this is the
first time the tool is used during this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default values and
click OK.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 339

3. Adjust the control points of the Bzier wall by clicking and dragging to obtain the desired curvature.

Control points

The Bzier landscape wall parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Top width

Left pitch Right pitch

Cross section

Parameter Description
Z Elevation of starting point of wall
Wall Length Total length of all wall sections
Top Width Width of wall at top (see diagram)
Wall Height Wall height above Z value
Resolution Select a 3D display resolution; low resolution displays fastest, but high
resolution provides the best quality
Rise Difference in height between wall starting and ending points
Left/Right Pitch Angle of wall on left and right sides (see diagram); for a Bzier wall with
site modifiers, the left side is always the side that retains earth
Show Joints Displays the connecting joints between wall sections
Use Site Modifiers Adds a pad and grade limits to each wall section and allows the landscape
wall to modify the site model
Use Grade Limits Uses grade limits to define the site modifier modification area
Left/Right Grade Controls the grade limit offsets on either side of the wall (applies only
Limits Off. when site modifiers are used)

Creating Hardscape Objects

A hardscape object is comprised of paved areas with joint patterns and optional borders. A boundary hardscape or
pathway hardscape can be created. To draw a hardscape object, either use the Hardscape tool, or create a polyline and
then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696). The
hardscape object can modify the site model.
The following modes are available.
340 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Boundary Pathway Edge Polyline creation

Configuration options options

Pathway Configuration Preferences

Mode Description
Boundary Creates a hardscape with a boundary configuration, defining an area with an
Configuration optional border
Pathway Creates a hardscape along a path
Configuration
Pathway Edge options For the pathway configuration, sets where to create the pathway in relation to
the drawn polyline
Polyline creation Selects the method for drawing the polyline upon which the hardscape object
options is based; see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Preferences Sets the default preferences for the hardscape object

To create a hardscape object:

1. Click the Hardscape tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify the default Hardscape tool parameters for this session.
The Hardscape Object Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Definition
Name Enter a name for the hardscape object, which displays as the ID in the ID tag
Tag Display Select whether to display the hardscape tag to the right or left of the leader line,
without a leader line (floating), or not at all
 Site Model Modification Overview | 341

Parameter Description
Tag Style Select the ID tag display style.
Select Name Only to display the name of the hardscape object only (as defined
in the Name field)
Select Name-Area(s) to display the hardscape object name, area and, if
applicable, the area of the border
Select Name-Area(s)-Perim to display the hardscape object name, perimeter
length and, if applicable, the area of the border.
Tag Class Select a class for the hardscape tags, to control the tag appearance (line and
marker style) and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed;
alternatively, create a new class by selecting New, select the default class name,
or select the class named <Hardscape Class> which places the tag in the same
class as the hardscape object.
Display Tag Line Displays a marker at the end of the leader line; specify the marker style by editing
Marker the hardscape tag class (see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Snap Tag to Select this option to automatically align the endpoint of the tag with the edge or
Hardscape Edge corner of the hardscape that is nearest to the shoulder point of the tag
342 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Joint Pattern Select the main hardscape joint pattern. The Set Joint Pattern Options dialog box
opens when Flagstone, Pavers-Grid, or Pavers-Running is selected. Enter the
pattern size; click the Lock button to create a symmetrical pattern, or deselect the
Lock button to create an asymmetrical pattern. Specify the pattern angle.

Joint Pattern
Origin Pattern Angle

Pattern Size

Alternatively, select a hatch, stipple, or tile resource from either the default
content or the current files content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide or Defining Hatches on page 514 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Click OK. For hatch, stipple, or tile fills, the selected resources name displays
beneath the Joint Pattern list.

None Flagstone Pavers-Grid

Pavers-Running Hatch Stipple

The joint pattern origin is editable and has a control point marked with a red locus
for identification.

Area Class Select a class for the joint pattern, to control its appearance and visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the default class, Hardscape-Component-Main Joint.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 343

Parameter Description
Configuration Sets the boundary and pathway parameters for the hardscape object
Boundary/ Boundary defines the hardscape object with a user-defined polyline as the outer
Pathway edge of the hardscape object (for example, to define regular or irregular patio
areas), while Pathway defines the hardscape object with a user-defined polyline
as an alignment for a linear path

Offset
Width

Boundary Pathway

Width Width of the pathway hardscape object

Offset Sets the offset of the pathway centerline from the placement line
Draw Border Select to include a border pattern along the edges of the hardscape object
Width Enter the width of the border
Joint Pattern Select the border paving pattern. The Enter Value dialog box opens when Spaced
Joints is selected; enter the desired joint spacing value. Alternatively, select a
hatch, stipple, or tile resource from either the default content or the current files
content.
Click OK. For hatch, stipple, or tile fills, the selected resources name displays
beneath the Joint Pattern list.
Similar to the main hardscape joint pattern, the border hardscape joint pattern
origin is editable. It has a control point marked with a green locus for
identification.
Background Click the color box to select the desired border color
Color
Border Class Select a class for the border joint pattern, to control its appearance and visibility.
The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, or select the default class, Hardscape-Component-Border Joint.
Pathway Borders Select the border configuration for pathway hardscape objects with borders

Left

Direction of
Start placement poly End

Right

Draw 3D Specify 3D hardscape object parameters

344 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
3D Type The hardscape object can act as a 3D slab object or as a pad or texture bed site
modifier for a site model. Select the type of 3D modifier to create. Select Slab or
Pad Modifier if the paving area is flat. Select Texture Bed Modifier if the paving
area covers an area of the site with topographical changes. For more information,
see Site Model Modification Overview on page 309. Select None to not display
the hardscape object in 3D views.
Thickness For a slab or pad, enter the thickness parameter
Main Texture Select the texture resource for the hardscape object or assign it by class (see
Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide); the displayed textures are from either the default content or the current
files content. The texture origin and rotation are automatically set to match the
2D fill origin and rotation for the main texture area.
Border Texture Select the texture resource for the border object or assign it by class (see Setting
Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide);
the displayed textures are from either the default content or the current files
content. The texture origin and rotation are automatically set to match the 2D fill
origin and rotation for the border.

The Stipple joint patterns are a processor-intensive action for large hardscape objects and can significantly
increase regeneration time.
When drawing a hardscape object with a curved boundary, speed the regeneration time by setting the 2D
conversion resolution in Vectorworks preferences to low (see Edit Preferences on page 17 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide).
3. Click OK.
4. Click the appropriate mode in the Tool bar to specify the creation method of the hardscape object. Select whether
to create a boundary or pathway hardscape object.
The hardscape configuration can also be changed after creation from either the Hardscape Object Settings dialog
box or the hardscape context menu commands (see Converting the Hardscape Object to a Boundary or Pathway
Configuration on page 347).
For information on the Polyline tool modes, see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
5. Click to set the hardscape objects start point.
6. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until
the hardscape object is complete. Return to the start point (for boundary configurations), or simply double-click
(for either pathway or boundary configurations) to finish creating the hardscape object.
7. When classing the subcomponents of the hardscape object, such as for the joints or tags, the class visibility of the
specified class controls the visibility of the corresponding subcomponent. The class attributes are only applied to
the corresponding subcomponent when the Use at Creation option is selected for the class. For example, if the
Joint Class is set to the Hardscape-Component-Main Joint class, and that class specifies a hatch Fill Style, edit the
class and select the Use at Creation option to apply the fill attribute. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
8. If the hardscape 3D Type is set to Pad Modifier or Texture Bed Modifier, update the site model to apply the
modification. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 345

Editing the Hardscape Object Settings

The parameters can be edited for selected hardscape objects through the Hardscape Settings button on the Shape tab
of the Object Info palette. To modify the default hardscape object settings, click the Preferences button on the Tool bar.
Many of the parameters are identical to those used to create the hardscape object (see Creating Hardscape Objects on
page 339). However, certain parameters are accessible in the Object Info palette only.

Parameter Description
Shape Tab
Hardscape Settings Click to edit the selected hardscape object; for more information, see
Creating Hardscape Objects on page 339. If more than one hardscape
object is selected for editing, the Hardscape Settings button appears
dimmed; select a single hardscape object to access the Hardscape Object
Settings dialog box for editing parameters.
Save Hardscape Click to save the selected hardscape object as a symbol; for more
information, see Saving the Hardscape Object Settings on page 348. If
more than one hardscape object is selected for editing, the Save Hardscape
button appears dimmed; select a single hardscape object to save it as a
symbol.
Definition
Hardscape Name Specifies the name assigned to the hardscape object
Draw Border Includes a border pattern along the edges of the hardscape object
Border Width Enter the width of the border
Path Width Width of the pathway hardscape object
Path Offset Sets the offset of the pathway centerline from the placement line
Joint Pattern Size X/ Specifies the size of the joint pattern units, for flagstone, pavers-grid, and
Y pavers-running joint patterns
Joint Pattern Angle Specifies the rotation angle of the joint pattern
Border Pattern Size Sets the width of the spaced joints, when spaced joints are selected for the
border
Border Pattern Enter the angle of the pattern inside the border
Angle
Main Unit Price Sets the price per square unit for the main hardscape material, for use in
worksheets
Main Price Code Specifies the main hardscape price code
Border Unit Price Sets the price per square unit for the border material, for use in worksheets
Border Price Code Specifies the hardscape border price code
Tag
Tag Display Select whether to display the hardscape tag to the right or left of the leader
line, without a leader line (floating), or not at all
346 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Tag Style Select the ID tag display style.
Select Name Only to display the name of the hardscape object only (as
defined in the Name field)
Select Name-Area(s) to display the hardscape object name, area and, if
applicable, the area of the border
Select Name-Area(s)-Perim to display the hardscape object name,
perimeter length and, if applicable, the area of the border.
Tag Class Select a class for the hardscape tags, to control the tag appearance (line and
marker style) and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed;
alternatively, create a new class by clicking New, or select the class named
<Hardscape Class> which places the tag in the same class as the hardscape
object.
Tag Approach Angle Specifies the angle of the leader line, from 0 to 360
Tag Shoulder Angle When a tag shoulder line is enabled, sets the angle of the shoulder line, from 0
to 360
Tag Text Alignment Select whether the tag text is aligned on top of a continuation of the leader
line, or centered vertically at the end of the leader line
Snap Tag to Select this option to automatically align the endpoint of the tag with the edge
Hardscape Edge or corner of the hardscape that is nearest to the shoulder point of the tag
Display Tag Line Displays a marker at the end of the leader line; specify the marker style by
Marker editing the hardscape tag class (see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Draw 3D
3D Type The hardscape object can act as a 3D slab object or as a pad or texture bed site
modifier for a site model. Select the type of 3D modifier to create. Select Slab
or Pad Modifier if the paving area is flat. Select Texture Bed Modifier if the
paving area covers an area of the site with topographical changes. For more
information, see Site Model Modification Overview on page 309. Select
None to not display the hardscape object in 3D views.
3D Thickness For a slab or pad, enter the thickness parameter
Information
Main Area Displays the size of the main area
Border Area Displays the size of the border area
Footprint Area Displays the area of the entire footprint of the hardscape
Main Perimeter Displays the perimeter measurement of the main area polyline
Border Perimeter Displays the perimeter of the border only
Footprint Perimeter Displays the perimeter measurement of the entire footprint polyline
Vertex parameters Edits the vertices of the path object that the hardscape is based upon; see
Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide
 Site Model Modification Overview | 347

Parameter Description
Render Tab
Texture If a 3D Type was selected in the Hardscape Object Settings dialog box, the
Texture drop-down menu is enabled for the main area texture (border textures
must be set in the Hardscape Object Settings dialog box)

To set individual border segments to invisible for boundary hardscapes or cut-out holes, select the hardscape
object, and then click the Reshape tool. Select Hide or Show Edges mode. Click the midpoint of the hardscape
border segments or the cut-out hole to hide. Repeat this process to set the border segments back to visible, if
necessary.
To quickly determine the left and right side of a pathway hardscape object, select the hardscape object and click
the middle button next to the Vertex field on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette; while the button is clicked,
the first vertex of the hardscape object is highlighted with a red box.
When classing the subcomponents of the hardscape object, such as for the joints or tags, the class visibility of the
specified class controls the visibility of the corresponding subcomponent. The class attributes are only applied to
the corresponding subcomponent when the Use at Creation option is selected for the class. For example, if the
Joint Class is set to the Hardscape - Component - Main Joint class, and that class specifies a hatch Fill Style, edit
the class and select the Use at Creation option to apply the fill attribute. See Setting Class Attributes on
page 112 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Reshaping the Hardscape Object
Double-click the hardscape object to activate the Reshape tool, or select the Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
Select the object handles to reshape the hardscape object. For more information, see Reshaping Objects on page 293
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Converting the Hardscape Object to a Boundary or Pathway Configuration
After creation, a boundary hardscape object can be converted to a pathway hardscape object, and similarly, a pathway
configuration can be converted to a boundary configuration. The conversion preserves the appearance, but the path of
the object changes.

Boundary hardscape object Pathway hardscape object (open

(closed path) path)

To convert a boundary hardscape object to a pathway hardscape configuration:

1. Select the boundary hardscape object.
2. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the hardscape object and select Convert to Pathway from the
context menu.
To convert a pathway hardscape object to a boundary hardscape configuration:
1. Select the pathway hardscape object.
2. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the hardscape object and select Convert to Boundary from
the context menu.
348 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Alternatively, click Hardscape Settings from the Object Info palette of a selected hardscape object, and select the
configuration.
Hardscape Tag Appearance
Hardscape tags can be adjusted in several ways.
When hardscape tags are required, their default appearance is normally specified in the hardscape object settings
(see Creating Hardscape Objects on page 339).
Individual hardscape tags can then be changed for selected hardscape objects by adjusting the hardscape tag
parameters in the Object Info palette.
The hardscape tag class controls the appearance of the leader/shoulder lines, as well as the marker style.
To align hardscape tags for improved readability, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command (see
Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
If an individual tag needs to be repositioned, hardscape tags also have two control points for adjusting the shoulder
length, tag shoulder angle, and tag location; or the shoulder location, leader line length, and tag approach angle.
When Snap Tag To
Hardscape Edge is
deselected, specifies
where the tag ends

Adjusts shoulder length, tag shoulder

angle, and tag location

Adjusts shoulder location, leader line

length, and tag approach angle

Saving the Hardscape Object Settings

Once the hardscape object is set to the desired appearance, the settings can be saved for future use or importing into
other files, by saving the hardscape object. When inserted from the Resource Browser, all the hardscape object settings
are preset.
To save the selected hardscape object settings:
1. Select a hardscape object.
2. In the Object Info palette, click Save Hardscape.
The Enter String dialog box opens.
3. Enter a unique name.
4. Click OK.
The hardscape object is saved in the Hardscapes symbol folder in the Resource Browser. Boundary and pathway
hardscape objects are assigned unique thumbnail view icons for easy identification. For more information on the
Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 157 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
5. To use a saved hardscape object, double-click on it in the Resource Browser. Alternatively, drag the saved
hardscape onto an existing hardscape to apply the saved settings.

Editing Hardscape Object Fills

Hardscape object fills can be changed through the Attributes palette. If a joint pattern was specified, the joint pattern is
drawn over the fill attribute of the hardscape object. The main joint pattern origin is editable and has a control point
marked with a red locus for identification; the border joint pattern uses a green locus.
 Site Model Modification Overview | 349

To change the appearance of a hatch fill, edit the hatch definition as described in Editing Hatch Definitions on
page 519 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Change the size or angle of a hatch fill by temporarily
switching to a Pavers-Running pattern, setting the Pattern Size X, Y and/or Pattern Angle values, and then switching
back to the selected hatch.
Hardscape objects can also use images and gradients as fills. Use the Attribute Mapping tool to adjust the fill
direction and size. For more information on using image or gradients, see The Attributes Palette on page 501 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide; for more information on using the Attribute Mapping tool, see Mapping
Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool on page 531 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
If the subcomponents of the hardscape object are classed, such as for the joints or tags, the class visibility of the
specified class controls the visibility of the corresponding subcomponent. The class attributes are only applied to the
corresponding subcomponent when the Use at Creation option is selected for the class. For example, if the Joint Class
is set to the Hardscape - Component - Main Joint class, and that class specifies a hatch Fill Style, edit the class and
select the Use at Creation option to apply the fill attribute. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

The angle or origin point of a hardscape fill can be adjusted. Move the control point at the center of the hardscape
to control the origin point of the paving pattern (including a hatch) and change the Joint Pattern Angle value to
adjust the angle.
When joining bordered hardscape objects with similar borders, use the Add Surface command (see Add
Surface on page 330 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
To coordinate the joint patterns of several hardscape objects, configure the hardscape objects with the same
settings and drag their main pattern origin control points (marked with the red locus) to a common location.
Set joint patterns of all
hardscape objects to same point
Boundary
hardscape

Boundary Path
hardscape hardscape

Showing and Hiding Site Modifiers

Site modifiers, such as pads, grade limits, and portions of roads and landscape walls can be made hidden or visible. The
modifications to the proposed site model are still visible even when the modifier is hidden.
To show or hide site model modifiers:
1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide Site Modifiers.
2. If site modifiers were hidden, they are displayed; if they were visible, they become hidden.
350 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Correcting Site Modifier Errors

When the site model has been modified, if errors or problems are detected with the site modifiers, an alert
automatically opens when the site model is updated.
The following modifier problems can generate errors:
Two intersecting grade limits
Pad which does not lie inside the grade limits
Pad intersecting grade limits or the site border
Two intersecting pads
Spoil pile intersecting the site border
Spoil pile intersecting grade limits or the site border
Two intersecting spoil piles
Spoil pile intersecting a texture bed
Texture bed intersecting the site border
Texture bed intersecting grade limits
Two intersecting texture beds
Locus which does not lie inside the grade limits
If these errors exist, the site model can still be modified; however, results may not be as expected. It may be better to
cancel the update and remove the problem. Resolve the errors by locating the offending modifier and making
adjustments to prevent intersecting modifiers.
If a site model already exists, the problem data can be viewed by selecting the site model and selecting Modify >
Edit Site Model, or selecting Edit Site Model Source Data from the site model context menu. Problem data
conditions are highlighted and annotated.
Update the site model to ensure that the errors have been corrected.

Drawing Property Lines

Use the Property Line tool to draw property lines. Alternatively, use one of the following methods.
Draw a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes
on page 696).
Draw arcs and lines, select Modify > Compose to create a single polyline, and then select the Create Objects
from Shapes command.

Property Line Tool

The Property Line tool interactively creates property boundaries from surveyors descriptions. The resulting polyline
is composed of line and/or arc segments. The closing error can be automatically drawn and measured. Each segment
can be individually labeled with distance and bearing; a curve data worksheet displays curve data.
 Drawing Property Lines | 351

To create property lines using the Property Line tool:

1. Click the Property Line tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click to set the starting point of the first property segment.
A red bulls-eye is placed on the drawing to mark the starting point; the Define Property Line dialog box opens.
3. Specify the segment parameters and click Add to update the drawing file; the bulls-eye cursor moves to the end
of the segment. Continue to add or remove segments as needed.

Parameter Description
Line Specify whether the current segment is a line
Bearing Enter the azimuth or bearing of the line segment; if entering a bearing, a
variety of formats are supported. Use spaces (N 10 30 0 E), degreesd for
degrees, m for minutes, and s for seconds (N10d0m0s E), or decimal
degrees (N 10.5d 0m 0s E).
Distance Enter the distance of the line segment
Curve Specify whether the current segment is a curve
Start Tangent to Forces the back tangent to be collinear with the previous segment
Previous
Back Tangent Enter the azimuth of the back tangent of this curve; a variety of formats are
supported. Use spaces (10 30 0), degreesd for degrees, m for minutes,
and s for seconds (10d0m0s), or decimal degrees (10.5d 0m 0s).
Radius Enter the radius of the curve segment
Arc Dist Select to use the distance along the arc
352 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Chord Dist Select to use the distance between the point of tangency and the point of
curvature

Tangent Dist Select to use the distance from the end point of the last segment to the point
of the intersection of the curve

Delta Angle Select to use the central angle of the curve as measured from the center of
the arc

Chord Bear. Select to use the bearing of the arc chord

Forward Tangent Displays the forward tangent value
Counter-Clockwise Select to draw the curve Counter-Clockwise
Remove Click to remove the selected segment from the property line
Update Click to update the parameters for the current segment
Add Click to add a segment to the property line
Previous / Next Click to move backward and forward through the segments
Automatically create Select to automatically create the final segment between the last point and
closing segment the first

4. Click OK to create the property line.

If this is the first time the Property Line tool has been used, the Object Preferences dialog box opens. Accept the
defaults and click OK.
 Drawing Property Lines | 353

To create property lines by drawing a path object, rather than specifying parameters in a dialog box, add the
Property Line object to the workspace through the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets
on page 874 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Once added to the workspace, click the Property
Line object and draw the path object(s) as desired.

Editing Property Lines

Property lines can be edited using the Reshape tool after creation, or by clicking the Edit with Dialog button in the
Object Info palette. Additional parameters can also be modified in the Object Info palette. See Reshaping Objects on
page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for information on using the Reshape tool for editing.
To edit property lines using the Object Info palette:
1. Select the property line.
2. Modify the parameters in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Name Enter a property line name
Number Enter a property line number
Area Displays the area of the property line
Perimeter Displays the length of the property line perimeter
Show Name Select to display the property line name
Show Number Select to display the property line number
Show Area Select to display the area of the property line, along with a leader line
Area Units If using Imperial drawing units, select Acres or Square Feet; if using metric
drawing units, select Hectares or Square Meters
Decimals Indicates the number of decimal places to display for the property line area
Text Rotation Specifies the text rotation degrees
Fill Behind Text Select to display a fill behind text
Annotate Segments Select to annotate each segment of the property line
Annotation Style When Annotate Segments is selected, indicate the annotation information to
display
Angle Format Select whether the annotations display in Azimuth or Bearing angle format
Show as Texture Bed on Select to display the property line as a texture bed on the site model (see
Site Model Creating a Texture Bed on page 317)
Texture Bed Class If Show as Texture Bed was selected, specify the texture bed class
Edit with Dialog Click to display the Define Property Line dialog box for editing the property
line; see Drawing Property Lines on page 350 for information on
parameters
Vertex parameters Edits the property line path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on
page 252 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

For information on editing object vertices, see Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
354 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

3. If the property line was designated to be a texture bed on the site model, select Tools > Organization. On the
Classes tab, select the class designated as the texture bed class, and assign it a distinctive fill color, or, if the
Renderworks product is installed, a texture. Select the site model and click Update from the Object Info palette;
the property line displays as a texture bed on the site model. Switch to a 3D view and render for the full effect.
4. When Annotate Segments is selected and curve data exists, a curve data worksheet is automatically created,
showing curve data in worksheet form. Select Window > Worksheets to display the worksheet, or view it from
the Resource Browser.

Analyzing the Site Model

Reporting Site Model Volume
The individual cut and fill calculations for a site model can be listed in a report for verification.
To list site model volume:
1. Select the site model to analyze. Only one site model can be analyzed at a time.
2. Select Landmark > Create Site Volume List (Landmark workspace) or AEC > Terrain > Create Site Volume
List (Architect workspace).
The Create Site Model Volume List dialog box opens. On the Columns tab, select the columns of site model data
to include in the report.

Parameter Description
Available Columns Lists the columns that can be selected for inclusion in the report
Selected Columns Lists the columns to be included in the report; to change the list order, use
the cursor to drag and drop the items to move in the # column.
Add Adds one or more selected item(s) from the available list to the end of the
Selected Columns list
Add All Adds all available columns to the end of the Selected Columns list
Remove Removes one or more selected item(s) from the Selected Columns list
Remove All Removes all column items from the Selected Columns list
Column Parameters
 Analyzing the Site Model | 355

Parameter Description
Triangle Index Creates a numeric index for each triangle that makes up the site model
Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN)
Existing Surface Area Lists the surface area of each triangle in the existing site model
Proposed Surface Lists the surface area of each triangle in the proposed site model
Area
Projected Area Lists the projected area of the common (existing and proposed) site model
triangles
Existing Volume Lists the volume of each triangle (extruded to the existing site models
Minimum Elevation plus its Datum Elevation)
Proposed Volume Lists the volume of each triangle (extruded to the proposed site models
Minimum Elevation plus its Datum Elevation)
Cut Volume Compares the existing and proposed volume for each triangle in the site
model, and displays the extra volume present in the proposed model
Fill Volume Compares the existing and proposed volume for each triangle in the site
model, and displays the volume removed from the proposed model
Net Cut & Fill Lists the fill volume minus the cut volume for each triangle in the site
Volume model
Total Cut & Fill Lists the fill volume plus the cut volume for each triangle in the site model
Volume

3. On the Grade Limits Modifiers tab, select the grade limits site modifiers to include in the report calculations.

Parameter Description
Available Grade Lists the grade limit-type site modifiers in the drawing; grade limits modifiers
Limits Modifiers are identified by an assigned number
Selected Grade Limits Lists the site modifiers to be included in the report calculations
Modifiers
Add Adds one or more selected item(s) from the available list to the end of the
Selected Grade Limits Modifiers list
356 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Add All Adds all available modifiers to the end of the Selected Grade Limits
Modifiers list
Remove Removes one or more selected item(s) from the Selected Grade Limits
Modifiers list
Remove All Removes all items from the Selected Grade Limits Modifiers list
Show Modifier When a numbered grade limits modifier is highlighted, selects the associated
site modifier in the drawing, and zooms in so the site modifier is easily
identifiable
Modifier Parameters
Outside Grade Includes all areas of the site model surface without any modifiers
Limits
Grade Limits Each grade limits site modifier in the drawing is identified with a number. If
Modifier __ you have provided a name for the site modifier on the Data tab of the Object
Info palette, the name displays in parentheses

4. On the Options tab, choose report output parameters.

Parameter Description
Show Data for When selected, the report includes the entire surface of the site model.
Unmodified Site Deselect this option to exclude the unchanged surface between the existing
Model Surface and proposed site models from the report.
Create Text File Creates a tab-delimited text file of the report, which can easily be imported
into a spreadsheet program for further manipulation. Specify the name of the
text file and the location to save it in.
Create Triangle Group Creates a group containing subgroups of polygons and volumetric data text
for each triangle that makes up the site model triangulated network. For
complex site models, a significant amount of information is displayed; adjust
text size of the entire selected group with Text > Size.
Create Worksheet Adds a Volume List worksheet containing the volume data to the current file

5. Click OK to create the site model volume report.

 Analyzing the Site Model | 357

Zone of Visual Influence Analysis

This type of analysis creates a representation of shadowed and lighted areas as seen from a specified point of view.
To perform a zone of visual influence analysis:
1. Select the site model to analyze.
2. Select Landmark > Zone of Visual Influence.
The Zone of Visual Influence dialog box opens. Specify the analysis parameters.

Parameter Description
Select Site Model Select the site model to analyze
View height above Site Represents the view point elevation for the study. For example, 60
Model inches (152.4 cm) is often used as a standard eye level when standing.

3. Click OK.
4. Click on the site model to indicate the observation point.
5. Click again to perform the analysis.
A light source is automatically inserted, and the layer is rendered to complete the analysis. Dark regions indicate
areas that cannot be seen from the specified observation point at that viewing level.
358 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Observation
point

Zone of Visual Influence analysis

Obtaining Site Model Data

Site Model Section

Use the Site Model Section command to create a profile or sectional views of the site.
To create a site model section:
1. Draw or select a 2D polygon or polyline to define the section alignment. In the Vectorworks Landmark product, if
you are selecting a previously drawn polyline with station points (such as a road or Roadway (NURBS) object), a
station point profile can be created.

The polygon or polyline vertices must be contained within the limits of the site model.
2. With the polygon or polyline selected, click Landmark > Site Model Section (Landmark workspace) or AEC >
Terrain > Site Model Section (Architect workspace).
The Create Site Model Section dialog box opens. Specify the site model section parameters.
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 359

Parameter Description
Create section on layer Specify the layer where the section will be placed
Draw Background Grid Select to draw a background grid, and click the color box to specify the
grid color
Draw Existing Site Profile Select to draw a profile for the existing site model, and click the color
box to specify the profile color
Draw Proposed Site Profile Select to draw a profile for the proposed site model, and click the color
box to specify the profile color
Draw Selected Station Profile Select to draw a profile of the station points, and click the color box to
(Vectorworks Landmark specify the profile color; this option is available only if a polyline
required) associated with station points (such as a road) is selected
Station Points
Draw points at polygon If the selected polygon does not contain stake objects, select to create
vertices station points at the polygon vertices; this option is available only if a
station polyline is selected
Draw points at interval If the selected polygon does not contain stake objects, select to create
station points at the specified interval
Draw points at existing When stakes exist along the profile polygon, station points are
stakes automatically created for the stakes; this option is available only if a
(Vectorworks Landmark polyline with station points (such as a road) is selected
required)
Formatting Click to specify the section graphic formatting

3. Click Formatting.
The Site Model Section Formatting dialog box opens. Specify the formatting for the site model section graphic.
360 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Display Scale Factor Specifies the site model scale factor; the layer scale factor is entered by
default
Vertical Magnification Sets an independent scale factor for the Y axis of the graphic
Factor
Vertical Margin Specifies the distance, in page units, between the highest and lowest
points in the graph and the graph margins
Horizontal Margin Specifies the distance, in page units, between the graph start and end
and the graph margins
Draw Legend Text Indicates whether to create a legend for the graph; legend text is color
coded to match the section profiles
Legend point size Specifies the size, in points, of the legend text
Draw Elevations Indicates whether to display the elevation of the profiles along the
station points
Elevation point size Specifies the size, in points, of the elevation text
Station Point Labels Sets the type of label, if any, to apply to the station points on the
(Vectorworks Landmark background grid
required)
Profile Line Weight Specifies the thickness of the profile lines
Station Line Weight Specifies the thickness of the station lines

4. Click OK to return to the Create Site Model Section dialog box.

5. Click OK to create the sectional view of the site. If the site model changes, the site model section needs to be
recreated.
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 361

Station point labels

Station lines (Landmark required)

Profile
lines

Legend

Elevations

Calculating Grade
The Grade tool annotates terrain slopes on site plan documents.
Networks of grade objects can be created to show slope characteristics across a surface. Grade objects can be used in
conjunction with a site model, and can modify the site model. In addition, 3D loci can be generated from grade object
elevations, and used as the basis of creating a site model.
The Grade tool has three modes:
Edit Elevation

Insert Preferences

Update

Mode Description
Insert Draws a grade object based on set elevation parameters or a site model
Edit Elevation Changes the elevation value of one or more existing grade objects
Update Updates all grade objects in the drawing, applying current preference settings
and updating any overlapped elevation points
Preferences Sets the default global preferences for the grade object

Specifying Global Grade Object Preferences

The grade indicator appearance for all grade objects in the file can be specified globally.

To set global grade object appearance:

1. Click the Grade tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar. Alternatively, select an existing grade object; click Settings from the Object
Info palette, double-click the grade object, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a grade object
and select Edit from the context menu.
The Grade Settings dialog box opens. Click the Global Settings tab.
362 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Display Settings
(global)
Arrow Line Length Specifies the length of the grade directional arrow, in page units
Arrow Offset Sets the distance of the grade directional arrow from the grade line, in page
units
Grade Def. Select the type of display for the slope (percent, permille, run/rise ratio, rise/
run ratio, or angle)
Precision Sets the displayed precision for the slope value
Directional Indicator
Attributes (global)
Pen/Style Select the pen style and line thickness for the grade directional arrow.
Alternatively, select Class style in the Pen list. The pen, color, style, and
marker are then determined by the class attributes of the grade object.
Color Click the color box to select the grade directional arrow color
End Marker Specifies the marker type for the end of the grade directional arrow
Opacity Sets the opacity of the grade directional arrow; drag the slider to the left to
decrease opacity, or enter an opacity percentage
Use Class for The opacity of the arrow can be set by the class of the grade object
Opacity
Analyze Grade Uses grade objects to analyze the slope or elevation; see Analyzing Grade
Objects on page 366
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 363

3. Click OK to set the global grade indicator attributes.

4. Click Update from the Tool bar to update all grade objects in the drawing with the global settings.

Inserting Grade Objects

To insert a grade object:

1. Click the Grade tool from the Site Planning tool set, and select Insert mode from the Tool bar.
2. Click to set the start of the grade. Move the mouse and click again to set the end point.
The Grade Settings dialog box opens. Click the Object Properties tab.

Parameter Description
General Given two parameters, the grade parameters are calculated for the remaining
parameters. Enter the two known parameters to calculate and display the
other grade parameters.
The initial elevation of the first and/or second points of the grade object is
determined by these methods:
If an existing grade object is under one of the points, the elevation of the
existing grade object is used
If a stake object is under one of the points, its elevation is used
If a site model is under one of the points, the calculated elevation of the
point is used
If none of the above occurs, the elevation of the last created grade object is
used
364 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Parameter 1 Select the first known parameter (Elevation 1, Elevation 2, Upward Grade
in %, Downward Grade in %, or elevation change) and enter the value
associated with the parameter
Parameter 2 Select the second known parameter (available choices depend on the first
parameter selected), and enter the value associated with the parameter
Parameter Display The remaining parameters are calculated and displayed, including the grade
length
Graphics Sets the graphic appearance of the grade object. The appearance of the
indicator, grade definition, and precision is set in the global settings (see
Specifying Global Grade Object Preferences on page 361).
Once created, each graphic element of the grade object has its own control
point. Move a control point to adjust the position of the text and indicator.

Elevation marker Select the symbol to use to indicate the elevation marker at each end of the
symbol grade object; grade symbols are also provided as default content (default
content is automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and
displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Scale Scales the elevation marker with respect to the layer scale by the specified
scale factor; a Factor of less than one decreases the size of the marker while a
Factor of more than one increases its size
Show Slope Value Displays the grade value
If the value does not display, increase the text size by selecting Text >
Size.
Show Length Value Displays the grade length (distance between the points) and the slope arrow;
the slope arrow always indicates the downward slope direction
Show Elevation Displays the elevation value at each end of the grade object
Value
Draw Line Draws a slope line to represent the distance between the two elevation points
Site Model
Grade Object Mode
Use Grade Object Uses the elevation values specified in the General parameters
Heights
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 365

Parameter Description
Use Heights from When the grade is drawn over a site model, the elevation of the first and
Site Model second points is derived from either the existing or proposed site model. The
values in the General parameters do not apply. The grade object updates with
the site model.
Change Site Model Uses the grade object as a site modifier object; the elevation values specified
(Use Grade as Pad in the General parameters are applied to either the existing or proposed site
Modifier) model. Update the site model to apply the changes (select the site model and
click Update from the Object Info palette.).
Apply To
Existing/Proposed Selects the site model to provide elevation values when Use Heights from
Site Model Site Model is selected, or the site model to be modified when Change Site
Model is selected

3. Click OK.
Grade objects can be edited from the Object Info palette. Commonly-required parameters can be accessed directly
from the Object Info palette, or click Settings to change any of the parameters of selected grade objects.
Alternatively, edit the settings of a grade object by double-clicking on it, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on a grade object and select Edit from the context menu.
Grade objects can be used together, using an existing grade object as a reference for another grade object. Either
move the endpoint of one grade object onto the line of another grade object, or create a new grade object with an
end point on an existing grade object. The existing grade object is split at the new endpoint, creating a network of
overlapping grade objects. The elevation of the shared point is interpolated from the slope of the existing object; if
an elevation point is updated, all overlapping grade objects automatically update. Click Update mode from the
Tool bar of the Grade tool to force an update of all overlapping grade objects.

2nd click

1st click

Editing Elevation
If the elevation changes after one or more grade objects have been placed, there is no need to replace the existing grade
object(s). Change the elevation of one end of a grade object, or offset the elevation of selected (or all) grade objects in
the drawing.
Elevation marker symbols must be at a valid scale to edit elevations. If the Edit Elevation dialog box does not
open, increase the marker scale factor for the grade object.

To edit grade object elevation:

1. Click the Grade tool from the Site Planning tool set, and select Edit Elevation mode from the Tool bar.
366 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

2. Click at the start or end of a grade object.

The Edit Elevation dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Elevation at Selected End Changes the elevation for the selected end of the grade object
Marker
Offset Selected Grade Adjusts the elevation of all selected grade objects by the specified
Objects amount
Offset All Grade Objects Adjusts the elevation of all grade objects in the file by the specified
amount

3. Click OK to edit the elevation of the grade object(s).

Analyzing Grade
Grade objects can be used to analyze the slope objects in a drawing and identify critical slopes. Grade objects that are
outside specified slope or elevation ranges are highlighted or selected.

To perform a grade analysis:

1. Click the Grade tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar. Alternatively, click Settings from the Object Info palette of a selected grade
object.
The Grade Settings dialog box opens. Click the Global Settings tab.
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 367

Parameter Description
Global settings Global attribute display of the slope indicator is described in Specifying
Global Grade Object Preferences on page 361
Analyze Grade
Objects
Mark Objects Select the action to take when critical grade objects are identified
Highlight Critical Click the color box to select the highlight color for grade objects that meet the
Objects criteria
Select Critical Selects all grade objects that meet the criteria
Objects
Criteria Specifies the criteria for critical grade objects
Grade out of range Sets a range of acceptable slope values; grades outside of the range are
(%) considered to be critical
Elevations out of Sets a range of acceptable elevation values; elevations outside of the range
range are considered to be critical
Show intersections Specifies that any intersecting grade objects should be considered critical

3. Click OK. Grade objects that do not meet the criteria are considered critical, and are highlighted and/or selected,
as specified.

Creating Loci from a Grade Object

One or more grade object(s) can be used to place 3D loci on the current layer. The 3D loci can then be used to create
stake objects or a site model.
368 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

To create 3D loci from stake object elevations:

1. Select one or more grade objects.
2. Select Landmark > Create 3D Loci at Grade Points.
A 3D locus is placed at the ends of each selected grade object. The Z-value of the loci match the associated
elevation of the grade start or end point.

Inserting Stake Objects

Stake objects represent a 3D point in space, with text to display the elevation, coordinate points, or other information.
Using a stake object, the elevation information for a point on the site model can be determined and labeled. A stake
object can be used as a site modifier. If the design layer is georeferenced, a stake object can be used as a geographic
marker.
The following modes are available.
Offset Insertion

Standard Insertion Elevation

Preferences

Mode Description
Standard Insertion Inserts a single stake object
Offset Insertion Inserts a stake at each vertex of the drawn polygon shape
Preferences Sets the default preferences for the stake object
Elevation Sets the default elevation value for stake objects

To insert a stake object:

1. Click the Stake tool from the Site Planning tool set, and select the mode from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the site model to place the stake object, or draw a temporary polygon to place a series of stake objects at
each click point and double-click to end the series.
If this is the first time the Stake tool has been used, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Accept the defaults
and click OK.
To automatically increment the ID parameter when placing new stake objects, select Auto ID Numbering and
specify an Initial ID Number. Otherwise, leave Auto ID Numbering unselected and specify the default ID
Number for stake objects.
3. The stake objects are added to the drawing at the elevation specified in the Tool bar.
Select the Send to Surface command to set the stake elevation to that of the site model surface (see Sending
Objects to the Site Model Surface on page 306).
4. If the stake objects are site modifiers, update the site model to apply the changes (select the site model and click
Update from the Object Info palette.).
5. Move the control point to adjust the label and leader line position. If there are several stake objects, use the Align/
Distribute Leader Lines command to improve readability (see Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on
page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
6. The stake properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 369

Label and leader

line control point

Parameter Description
Z-value Specifies the stake elevation.
To create road stakes with the Vectorworks Landmark product, set the
elevation of the first stake along the polyline; the elevation of the
remaining stakes is automatically calculated (as described in Setting
Stake Elevations on page 326)
Rotation Rotates the stake object indicator and the label (if applicable) around the
stake object indicators center
Mode
Include as site model Uses the stake as site model data if it is located in the source data layer
data (select when using stakes to create a site model)
Set elev to site model Sets the stake elevation to the existing site model elevation
Use as 2D graphic only Treats the stake like a text box and does not include 3D information such
as elevation
Site modifier object Treats the stake object as a site modifier, which has an effect on the site
model
Site Model When the stake object is used as a site modifier, specifies whether it
affects the existing or proposed site model
Style Selects the graphic style of the stake object indicator

None Triangle Filled Circle Dot Cross Circle Tick

Triangle Cross Mark

Mark Offset X Offsets the stake object indicator from the insertion point along the X axis
Mark Offset Y Offsets the stake object indicator from the insertion point along the Y axis
Mark Rotation Rotates the stake object indicator around its center
Label Reference Selects the type of information to display in the label; select No Label to
display no text. The available label fields depend on the label reference
selected.

ID Elevation Description ID/ ID/ Description/

Elevation Description Elevation

Stationing Coordinate Coordinate Coordinate No Label

Data Point (NE) Point (EN) Point (XY)
370 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Label Position Specifies the alignment of the label, and which side to place the leader line
(when displayed):
Auto: Automatically determines whether to place the text on the left or
right, depending on the position of the label related to the stakes
location
Right: Places the text to the right of the label control point and
left-justifies the text
Left: Places the text to the left of the label control point and
right-justifies the text
Center: Centers the text on the label control point
Description For description type labels, enter description text
ID Prefix For ID type labels, enter a prefix to display before the ID number
ID Suffix For ID type labels, enter a suffix to display after the ID number
Auto ID Numbering Select to automatically increment the ID number parameter when inserting
new stake objects
(Initial) ID Number For ID type labels, specify the ID number. When Auto ID Numbering is
selected, the ID Number field changes to Initial ID Number, and ID
numbers will be automatically incremented beginning with the initial
number specified. When Auto ID Numbering is not selected, specify the
default ID Number for stake objects
Station Point Data For Stationing Data labels, indicates the station point data for the selected
stake object
Coordinate Point Coordinate point type labels can show the stakes distance from a point of
origin (user origin), or they can show the stakes geographic position
(latitude and longitude) if the design layer is georeferenced (see GIS and
Georeferencing on page 620).
To display distance, specify Document Units, Feet, or Meters as the
Coordinate Units. The Coordinate Point (NE - Northing-Easting) and
Coordinate Point (EN - Easting-Northing) options display the distance
prefixed with the direction (N, W, S, E). The Coordinate Point (XY)
option displays the distance prefixed with the file coordinates (X, Y).
To display longitude and latitude, specify Decimal Degrees or Degrees/
Minutes/Seconds as the Coordinate Units.
If the stake object or user origin moves, the coordinates automatically
update to reflect the change.
Coordinate Units For coordinate point type labels, specifies the units to use for the
coordinates.
Select Document Units, Feet, or Meters to show the stakes position
relative to the user origin of this drawing.
If the design layer is georeferenced, select Decimal Degrees or Degrees/
Minutes/Seconds to show the stakes geographic position.
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 371

Parameter Description
Coordinate Prec When coordinate point type labels are set for units of Feet, Meters,
Decimal Degrees or Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, specifies the precision
with which the measurements will be labeled
Show Elevation For coordinate point type labels, select to display the elevation below the
other coordinates
Elevation Units Specifies the units to use for the elevation.
Select Document Units, Feet, or Meters to show the stakes position
relative to the user origin of this drawing.
If the design layer is georeferenced, select Decimal Degrees or Degrees/
Minutes/Seconds to show the stakes geographic position.
Elevation Prec For coordinate point type labels where the elevation value was selected to
display, and the specified elevation units are Feet, Meters, Decimal
Degrees or Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, specifies the precision with which
the measurements will be labeled
Show Unit Mark Select to display the unit mark along with the unit value
If Document Units are set for Coordinate Units, the unit mark
visibility is determined by the document setting.
Display Leader Line Adds a leader line from the label to the stake object (adjust the leader line
position by moving the leader line control point)
Scale Factor Determines the size of the stake object indicator

Converting 3D Loci to Stake Objects

3D loci can be converted to stake objects, which can then be used to modify a site model. This is useful when survey
data, in the form of 3D loci, need to modify an existing or proposed site model.
To create stake objects from 3D loci:
1. Select the 3D loci.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Stake Object from 3D Locus.
The Convert to Stake Object dialog box opens. Set the properties for new stakes.
372 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model

Parameter Description
Mode Select the type of stake object(s) to create:
Include as site model data: Uses the stake as site model data if it is
located in the source data layer (select when using stakes to create a site
model)
Set elev to site model: Sets the stake elevation to the existing site model
elevation
Use as 2D graphics only: Treats the stake like a text box and does not
include 3D information such as elevation
Site modifier object: Treats the stake object as a site modifier, which has
an effect on the selected site model
Site Model Select the site model which the stakes affect
Style Selects the graphic style of the stake object

None Triangle Filled Circle Dot Cross Circle Tick Mark

Triangle Cross

Label Reference Selects the type of information to display in the label; select No Label to
display no text. The available label fields depend on the label reference
selected.

ID Elevation Description ID/ ID/ Description/

Elevation Description Elevation

Stationing Coordinate Coordinate Coordinate No Label

Data Point (NE) Point (EN) Point (XY)

ID Prefix For ID type labels, enter a prefix to display with the ID

Auto ID Numbering Select to automatically increment the ID number parameter when inserting
new stake objects
(Initial) ID Number For ID type labels, specify the ID number. When Auto ID Numbering is
selected, the ID Number field changes to Initial ID Number, and ID
numbers will be automatically incremented beginning with the initial number
specified. When Auto ID Numbering is not selected, specify the default ID
Number for stake objects
Description For description type labels, enter description text
Station Point Data For Stationing Data labels, indicates the station point data for the selected
stake object
Coordinate Units Coordinate point type labels show the stakes distance from a point of origin
(user origin). This field specifies the units (document units, feet, or meters) to
use for the coordinates.
Display Leader Line Adds a leader line from the label to the stake object (adjust the leader line
position by moving the leader line control point)
 Obtaining Site Model Data | 373

Parameter Description
Scale Factor Determines the size of the label display
Delete Source Loci Deletes the original loci that were converted

3. Click OK to create the stake objects.

If the stake objects are site modifiers, update the site model to apply the changes (select the site model and click
Update from the Object Info palette).
See Inserting Stake Objects on page 368 for additional stake object parameters that can be edited from the
Object Info palette.
374 | Chapter 9: Modifying the Site Model
Planting and Irrigation Design 10
Planting and Irrigation Overview
The Vectorworks Landmark product provides a complete set of commands, tools, and symbols for adding plants and
irrigation to the design.
The Plant tool both defines and places plant objects. The plant database maintains an extensive set of plant data that
can be used in plant definitions.
Placing plants is extremely flexible. Place plants pre-defined with species information and appearance settings, or add
generic plants to the drawing and re-assign them to a specific plant species later in the design process. A selected plant
can be placed individually or in multiples. Once placed, a plant group can be changed into individual plants, or
individual plants can be grouped. In addition, defined and undefined plant masses can be created according to several
methods.
When the Vectorworks Landmark product is installed, a generic plant objects library is included. In addition, 2D and
3D plant symbols are provided as default content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at the
point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide). The resources in the Plant Defaults.vwx file are available in the Plant Settings dialog box.

Use the Existing Tree tool to document the existing trees on a site for landscaping, construction work, and
management. The species, condition, appearance, and action to be taken are some of the details that can be provided for
each existing tree on the site, with a report created for the arborist or landscaper.
Add landscape areas, generic plant graphics, and irrigation to complete the drawing. Planting schedules, existing tree
reports, and irrigation plans are worksheets which calculate project costs, materials required, and other factors.
Landscape and irrigation plans are easily set up by using the Create Standard Viewports command to create typical
standard plans (see Creating Standard Viewports on page 9); however, this is not a requirementthe Vectorworks
Landmark product functions with custom file setup parameters as well.

Creating Plant Definitions

The Plant tool defines or edits specific plants for placement, and then places those defined plants. A plant definition
includes the specific 2D and 3D plant appearance, parameters, and botanical data. Plants are defined by editing a
current definition or by creating a duplicate of a current definition. The plant definition is specified by entering
parameters or by loading (and editing) botanical data from the plant database.
376 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Several plant symbols and default definitions are provided as default content (default content is automatically imported
into the current file at the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). In addition, several libraries of plant objects are included with Vectorworks
Landmark.
When plants are defined, the definition parameters apply by default; individual plant settings can be changed before the
plant is inserted on the drawing, in the Plant Settings dialog box, or after placement, in the Object Info palette.

To create a plant definition:

1. Click the Plant tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. The Plant Settings dialog box opens automatically if plants have not yet been placed in the drawing. Otherwise,
click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Plant Settings dialog box opens.

3. On the Definition pane, select a plant symbol that is close in appearance to the new plant.
Plants can be placed with just this basic information; see Adding Plants to the Design on page 385. The plant
definition can be edited later if desired.
4. Click Edit Definition from any pane in the Plant Settings dialog box to edit the current definition, or click
Duplicate from the Definition pane to create a new plant definition based on the selected plant. Alternatively, to
edit a plant definition, select a plant from the drawing, select Edit from the Resource menu or the plant context
menu, and select Definition.
 Creating Plant Definitions | 377

Whether creating a new plant from a duplicate, or editing a current plant definition, the Edit Plant Definition
dialog box opens, displaying the selected plant symbol. Provide a name for the plant symbol, and then specify the
plant parameters on each tab to define the plant. As the parameters are defined, the preview dynamically displays
the plant appearance.
Although the Edit Plant Definition dialog box and the Plant Settings dialog box appear similar, keep in mind that
the plant definition parameters define the default plant settings. The default plant settings can be changed at
placement, allowing for variations of the same plant definition.
To automatically add plant information from the plant database, click Get Plant Data (see Using Plant List Data
in Vectorworks Landmark on page 411).
The plant definitions geometry can be based on a symbol present in the file or from default plant content, from
drawing objects in the file, or from another plant; see Creating Plant Geometry on page 383.
5. When the default plant parameters have been defined, click OK to return to the Plant Settings dialog box. From
there, additional plants can be defined, and a plant can be selected for placement.
When using workgroup referencing, the plant definitions must exist in the same file as the site model they
reference, so that their Z values can be set to the site model surface.
Plant resources can be exported from the Resource Browser or by selecting Export Plant from the plant context
menu; see Exporting Custom Resources on page 616.
Each pane of the plant definition dialog box is described in the following sections.
Plant Definition - Preview on page 377
Plant Definition - Insertion Options Pane on page 378
Plant Definition - Schedule Pane on page 379
Plant Definition - Render Pane on page 380
Plant Definition - Plant Data Pane on page 382

Plant Definition - Preview

Every pane of the plant definition displays the Plant Symbol Name and previews, allows botanical data to be obtained
from the plant database, and provides the option to obtain the 2D and 3D plant geometry from a symbol. The previews
update as the plant definition changes.
378 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Plant Symbol Name Enter a name for the plant symbol; this name displays in the Resource
Browser
Get Plant Data Opens the Get Plant Data dialog box; select a plant to add its data to the
current plant definition (see Using Plant List Data in Vectorworks
Landmark on page 411)
Preview Dynamically previews the plant appearance, showing how it will appear
when added to the drawing with the Plant tool
Top/Plan Preview Displays the 2D component of the plant symbol
3D OpenGL Displays the 3D component of the plant symbol, if one has been added to the
Preview symbol definition (image props, such as those provided by xFrog, can be
used as 3D plant geometry; see Editing Plants on page 395)
Copy from Symbol Obtains the plant geometry from a symbol in the file or from default content;
see Creating Plant Geometry from a Symbol on page 383

Plant Definition - Insertion Options Pane

Specify the default insertion options for the plant definition on the Insertion Options pane.
If plant data were obtained from the plant database, the plant database values are displayed. Values and settings entered
on this tab become the default for the plant definition. These default values can be changed for individual plants.
 Creating Plant Definitions | 379

Parameter Description
Spread Specifies the default plant spread diameter (the maximum width of the mature
plant, as drawn) for both single and multiple plant placement
Height Sets the default height of the typical mature plant at insertion
Spacing Sets the default spacing between plants at insertion, for the Poly-Edge
Spaced, Rectangular Array, and Triangular Array insertion modes

Plant Definition - Schedule Pane

Click the Schedule pane to specify default plant values for display and reporting.
If plant data were obtained from the plant database, the plant database values are displayed. Values and settings entered
on this tab become the default for the plant definition. These default values can be changed for individual plants.
380 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Latin Name Specifies the plant genus and species
Common Name Specifies the plant common name or names
Plant/TagID Identifies the plant with a unique code; this code appears in the plant list and on
ID tags, if selected (see Plant ID Codes on page 983 for the definition of
common code categories)
Scheduled Size Indicates the plant caliper or container size; displays in the Plant List
worksheet
Quantity Type Select the quantity unit for the plant; quantity can be defined as unit count,
dripline area, or border area
Price Code (SKU) Specifies the price code entry in Stock Keeping Units (SKU)
Price Indicate the plant cost per unit of quantity; the plant cost and quantity are
reflected in the Extended Price calculation in the Plant List worksheet
Schedule comments Specifies default comments about the plant that display in the Plant List
worksheet

Plant Definition - Render Pane

Click the Render pane to specify the 2D plant styles. These effects display in Top/Plan view only; plant shadows do not
display in worksheet images. A document preference makes it easy to give plans a uniform appearance by applying a
document-wide shadow style to all plants and massing models in a drawing (see Plan Shadows Preferences on
page 35 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Even when a document preference is set, plant definitions
can be edited on the Render pane to customize the drawings appearance. The outline, massing, and shadow parameters
can be toggled for all plants in a document by selecting View > Show > Show or Hide Plant Styles.
 Creating Plant Definitions | 381

Values and settings entered on this tab become the default for the plant definition. These default values can be changed
for individual plants.

Parameter Description
Plant Massing
Outline Select up to three offset plant outlines

No outline One outline Two outlines Three outlines

382 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Mass Plants Hides the details of plants that overlap to easily create a plant mass. A
continuous outline is created around overlapping plants, and internal details are
hidden. The 2D appearance of the massed group is controlled by the back
polygon in the plant symbol group, so massing could cause the plant to display
without a fill color. (An alternative way of hiding plant details is to use the
Plant-Components classes to control the visibility of elements within the plant
symbol.)
Plants that contain bitmap images cannot be massed.

Plant details displayed Details hidden for massing

Plant Shadow in Specifies special shadow effects that display in Top/Plan view only
Plan View
No Shadow Select to omit shadows from the Top/Plan view
Use Document Select to use the settings from the Plan Shadows pane on the Document
Preference Settings Preferences dialog box; click Settings to review or edit these document-wide
shadow settings (see Plan Shadows Preferences on page 35 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Custom Select to create a custom shadow setting for this plant object
Offset Enter a value for the shadow offset
Offset Units Select the shadow offset units.
Factor of Object Height calculates the offset based on the objects height
and the offset value.
Angle Set the shadow angle by entering a value between -180 to 180 or by using the
slider.
0 is straight up.
Fill Style Select a fill style for the shadow
Color/Resource/ Depending on the fill style selected, select a fill color, resource (hatch, image,
Class gradient, tile), or class for the shadow
Opacity Set the shadow opacity by entering a value between 0 and 100% or by using
the slider
Use Class Opacity Select to use the classs opacity setting (see Setting Class Properties on
page 109 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)

Plant Definition - Plant Data Pane

Click the Plant Data pane to view the plant database information for the plant.
To add botanical data from a plant list to the plant definition, click Get Plant Data and select a plant (see Using Plant
List Data in Vectorworks Landmark on page 411).
 Creating Plant Definitions | 383

To change the plant data for the current plant definition only (without changing the plant list data), click on the
parameter and click Edit. Enter the new value in the Edit Field dialog box and click OK.

Creating Plant Geometry

The plant geometry in a plant definition can easily be created from another symbol, from drawing objects, or from
another plant.

Creating Plant Geometry from a Symbol

To create plant geometry from another symbol:
1. Begin to create a plant definition as described in Creating Plant Definitions on page 375.
2. From the Edit Plant Definition dialog box, click Copy from Symbol.
The Copy From Symbol dialog box opens. From the symbol list, select the symbol that has the geometry to copy
and choose whether to copy the 2D, 3D, or both components of the symbol geometry.
384 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Symbol list Select the symbol that has the geometry to copy; the list contains the
symbols in the current file (regardless of whether they are plant
symbols) and the default content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Use only the 2D Copies only the 2D component of the selected symbol to the plant
component of the symbol definition
Use only the 3D Copies only the 3D component of the selected symbol to the plant
component of the symbol definition
Use the 2D and the 3D Copies both the 2D and 3D components of the selected symbol to the
components of the symbol plant definition

3. Click OK to copy the selected geometry from the symbol to the current plant definition.

Creating Plant Geometry from Drawing Objects

To create plant geometry from drawing objects:
1. Select the 2D, and optionally, 3D drawing objects to use in a new plant definition.
A plant symbol can be created from another symbol. The xFrog plant images can be used as a basis for the 2D
geometry; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Select Landmark > Create New Plant.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing, with the geometry or plant symbol
selected, and select Create New Plant from the document context menu.
The Edit Plant Definition dialog box opens, with the plant symbol name as Untitled Plant.

3. Specify the plant definition parameters, similar to creating a new definition (see Creating Plant Definitions on
page 375).
 Adding Plants to the Design | 385

4. Click OK to create the new plant.

If no 3D geometry was originally included, the plant symbol contains a 3D locus by default. Once the plant has
been created, edit the 3D component of the plant symbol to add the 3D geometry. See Editing Symbol
Definitions on page 181 for information on editing symbol components. Image props, such as those provided by
xFrog, can be used as 3D plant geometry.

Creating Plant Geometry from an Existing Plant

To create plant geometry from an existing plant:
1. Select the existing plant with geometry to convert to a new plant symbol.
2. Select Landmark > Create New Plant.
Alternatively, select Create Plant from Object from the plant context menu, or select the plant to duplicate from
the Resource Browser, and select Duplicate, and then Edit, from the Resources menu.
The Edit Plant Definition dialog box opens, with the plant name symbol as Untitled Plant.

3. The plant graphics and parameters are based on the original plant. Specify new plant definition parameters, similar
to creating a new definition (see Creating Plant Definitions on page 375).
4. Click OK to create the new plant.

Adding Plants to the Design

Plant placement in the Vectorworks Landmark program is very flexible. Generally, plants are defined first, and then
placed; plant parameters are set by the definition, but if necessary, certain parameters can be changed in the Plant
Settings dialog box before placement, or in the Object Info palette after placement. This allows variations of the same
plant definition, which is an essential part of a landscape designers workflow. Another way of placing plants is to
place generic plants from the default content, and create plant definitions for them later.
In addition to the appearance and parameters defined for plants, the Plant tool can place plants in several
configurations, from single plants to arrays of plants. When setting parameters after placement, an array of plants is
386 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

considered to be a single plant in the Object Info palette. Plants can also created by drawing a polyline and then
selecting the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).
Poly-Vertex Placement Rectangular
Array Pickup

Single Plant
Placement

Poly-Edge Triangular Preferences

Spaced Array

Mode Description
Single Plant Placement Places a single specified plant at each mouse click

Poly-Vertex Placement Places plants at each clicked polygon vertex

Poly-Edge Spaced Places plants along the drawn polygon at the Spacing distance specified in
the definition or settings

Rectangular Array Fills the drawn polygon with plants in a rectangular array at the Spacing
distance specified in the definition or settings
 Adding Plants to the Design | 387

Mode Description
Triangular Array Fills the drawn polygon with plants in a triangular array at the Spacing
distance specified in the definition or settings

Pickup Sets the default plant settings to match those of a selected existing plant
Preferences Opens the Plant Settings dialog box, for specifying the plant to place, its
placement options, and its definition
Plant ID Selects a plant for placement by its ID (Plant Symbol Name)

To place plants on the drawing:

1. Click the Plant tool from the Site Planning tool set and select the plant to place.
The Plant Settings dialog box opens automatically if there are no plants in the Resource Browser. Otherwise, click
Preferences from the Tool bar to select the plant to place, and specify the plant settings if they are different from
the definition. The plant settings are described in the following sections.
The plant to place can also be selected by its plant symbol name from the Plant ID list on the Tool bar. The plant
resources in the active drawing display alphabetically at the top of the list; the remaining plants are from the
default content resources.
Double-click a plant from the Resource Browser to activate the Plant tool and place the selected plant.
The Plant tool uses these settings until they are changed again by selecting a different plant ID from the Tool bar,
clicking Preferences from the Tool bar, or until Pickup mode is selected, which changes the default settings to
those of a selected existing plant.
2. Select the plant placement mode from the Tool bar.
3. Depending on the placement method selected, either click in the drawing to place a single plant, or draw a
polygon. As the Plant tool is clicked in the drawing, a preview of the plant spread is displayed to help with plant
placement.
The Plant tool parameters are retained so that the successive placement of plants is easily accomplished.
Each pane of the plant settings is described in the following sections. As the parameters are defined, the preview
dynamically displays the plant appearance.
Do not be confused by the similar appearance of the Plant Settings dialog box and the Edit Plant Definition dialog box;
keep in mind that the plant definition parameters define the default plant settings. The default plant settings can be
changed at placement if needed, allowing for variations of the same plant definition. Default plant settings that do not
require editing can be left as defined by the plant definition.
Plant Settings - Definition Pane on page 388
Plant Settings - Insertions Options Pane on page 388
388 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Plant Settings - Annotation Pane on page 389

Plant Settings - Render Pane on page 391
Plant Settings - Tag Pane on page 392
Plant Settings - Schedule Pane on page 395

Plant Settings - Definition Pane

The Definition pane can be used to select the plant definition for placement by the Plant tool; select the plant from the
graphical list. From any pane, you can also edit the plant definition parameters or create a duplicate of the plant
definition, as described in Creating Plant Definitions on page 375.

Plant Settings - Insertions Options Pane

The Insertion Options pane displays the default plant insertion settings from the plant definition. To override the plant
definition parameters, select the parameter check box and enter the custom value. In addition, if the plant should be
included in plant report worksheets, select On Plant List.
 Adding Plants to the Design | 389

Parameter Description
Custom Spread Specifies the plant spread diameter (the maximum width of the mature plant,
as drawn) for both single and multiple plant placement
Custom Height Sets the height of the typical mature plant at insertion
Custom Spacing Sets the spacing between plants at insertion, for the for the Poly-Edge
Spaced, Rectangular Array, and Triangular Array insertion modes
On Plant List Includes the plant in plant report worksheets

Plant Settings - Annotation Pane

Select plant display parameters on the Annotation pane.
390 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Polygon For multiple plant placements, changes the display of the boundary or center polygon
Display defining the plant cluster shape.

None Centers - solid Centers - dashed

Boundary - solid Boundary - dashed Gapped - solid Gapped - dashed

Tick Style Select a tick mark (plant center mark) style

Cross Dot
 Adding Plants to the Design | 391

Parameter Description
Tick Size Specifies the tick mark size
Plant Rotation For multi-plant placements, orients the plants in the horizontal direction, rotates the
plants along the line created by the drawn polygon, or rotates the plants randomly,
creating a more natural appearance

Plants rotated along the line Plants randomly rotated along the line

Plant Scale Keeps the plants at a fixed size, or randomly varies the plant scale according to the
specified percentage of variation

Plants randomly rotated and scaled

Plant Settings - Render Pane

The Render pane displays the default render settings from the plant definition. The Use Plant Definition settings
indicate that the plant definition render settings apply; see Plant Definition - Render Pane on page 380. To override
the plant definition parameters, select the Custom outline and massing option, and/or select the No Shadow, Use
Document Preference Settings, or Custom shadow setting.
392 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Plant Settings - Tag Pane

Set the display of the plant ID tags on the Tag pane.
 Adding Plants to the Design | 393

Parameter Description
Display Select On to display a plant tag to the right or left of the leader line; set the left or
right position with the Tag Shoulder Angle.
Class Select a class for the plant tags, to control the tag appearance (line and marker style)
and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new
class by selecting New, or select the default class name.
Approach Specifies the angle of the leader line, from 0 to 360. Setting the same angle for
Angle several selected plants aligns their leader lines, for an attractive planting plan.
Shoulder Angle When a tag shoulder line is enabled, sets the angle of the shoulder line and, if
selected, tag display, from 0 to 360. To display the plant tag to the left, specify an
angle greater than 90 or less than 270 degrees. To display the plant tag to the right,
specify an angle less than 90 or greater than 270 degrees. Setting the same angle for
several selected plants aligns their shoulder lines, for an attractive planting plan.
Bubble Specifies the bubble style, if any, for displaying quantity or quantity and Plant ID
with the plant tag

Circle Circle (Quantity Hexagon Hexagon Rectangle Round

only) (Quantity only)
394 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Top / Center / The custom tags present in the drawing and the predefined plant record field
Bottom combinations for tags are listed. Specify the information to display on each level of
the plant tag, or select None to hide a level of the plant tag. For the center level,
select Continuation Line to continue the shoulder as a dividing line between the top
and bottom tag information. Alternatively, select Set Custom Tag to define a custom
plant tag; see Creating a Custom Plant Tag on page 394.
Enable Tag Adds a shoulder line to the leader line; adjust the shoulder angle with the shoulder
Shoulder Line control point, or by entering a Tag Shoulder Angle
Snap Tag to Snaps the end of the leader line to the center of the plant; deselect to adjust the
Plant Centers endpoint location manually
Display Tag Displays a marker at the end of the leader line; specify the marker to use by editing
Line Marker the plant tag class (see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide)

Creating a Custom Plant Tag

In addition to providing several predefined plant tags, Vectorworks Landmark allows designers to create custom plant
tags.
1. From the Tag pane of the Plant Settings dialog box, select Set Custom Tag from one of the Top / Center /
Bottom fields. Settings for the plant tag currently displaying in this field are displayed in the Set Custom Tag
dialog box.
The Set Custom Tag dialog box opens.

If editing an existing tag through the Object Info palette, the selected tags data displays.
2. Select values from predefined plant record fields (including an empty string to skip the field value) in the order
they should be listed, and type the delimiter text that will appear between values. Up to six plant record fields can
be specified.
The Tag Appearance field displays a static text preview of the custom tag. To preview a long tag in its entirety,
Click-drag the bottom right corner of the dialog box to resize it.
3. Click OK.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other Top / Center / Bottom fields on the Plant Settings dialog box, as
appropriate, to complete creation of the custom tag.
 Editing Plants | 395

Plant Settings - Schedule Pane

The Schedule pane displays the default schedule settings from the plant definition; see Plant Definition - Schedule
Pane on page 379. To override the plant definition parameters, select the parameter check box and enter the custom
value.

Editing Plants

Plant Properties
The plant properties are displayed, and can be edited, in the Object Info palette. As plants are placed, they take on the
properties of the associated plant definition and/or the properties in the Plant Settings dialog box. Changes made in the
Object Info palette for the selected plants apply to those individual plants only; changes are not reflected in the plant
definition.
For multi-plant placement options, edit the polygon defining the plant with the Reshape tool if necessary; the
plant placement automatically adjusts to fit the new shape.

Parameter Description
Plant Settings Opens the Plant Settings dialog box, for viewing and editing plant parameters; see
Adding Plants to the Design on page 385
396 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Definition Displays the plant definition parameters and allows the spacing to be edited as
described in Plant Settings - Insertions Options Pane on page 388
Replace Plant Opens the Replace Plant dialog box; select the plant to replace the currently selected
plant or all plant instances. (Alternatively, select Replace Plant from the plant
context menu.) See Replacing Plants on page 397.
Annotation/ Edits the plant annotation parameters as described in Plant Settings - Annotation
Render Pane on page 389 and the render parameters as described in Plant Definition -
Render Pane on page 380
Tag Edits the plant tag parameters as described in Plant Settings - Tag Pane on
page 392
Vertex Edits the plant vertices for multi-plant placements; see Editing Vertex-Based
parameters Objects on page 252 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

Plant Tag Appearance

Plant tag appearance and placement is flexible, and can be adjusted in several ways, including through the plant
settings, Object Info palette, tag class settings, and the control point locations on the drawing.
Individual plant tags can then be changed for selected plants by adjusting the plant tag parameters in the Object
Info palette. For example, selected plants in one area of a planting plan look more uniform when they all use the
same tag approach and tag shoulder angle.
The plant tag class controls the appearance of the leader/shoulder lines, as well as the marker style.
To move the plant tags of several selected plants at once, click the Unrestricted Interactive Scaling mode of the
Selection tool.
To align plant tags for improved readability, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command (see Aligning and
Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
If an individual tag needs to be repositioned, plant tags also have several control points for adjusting the tag text
and leader line and shoulder position and angle.
Adjusts shoulder length, tag shoulder Appearance specified by tag bubble
angle, and tag location parameter

Adjusts shoulder location, Appearance specified by plant

leader line length, and tag definition tag top/center/bottom
approach angle parameters

Adjusts endpoint location and tag approach

angle when tag is not snapped to plant center

Editing Plant Attributes

Plants are hybrid symbols, containing a 2D symbol, and optionally, a 3D symbol. As plant definitions are created, the
plant symbol is automatically imported into the current file and appears in the Resource Browser. Plants are red
plug-in object symbols (see Understanding Symbols on page 169 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for
 Editing Plants | 397

information on symbol types). The 2D and 3D plant graphics are scaled by the plant definition height and spread
parameters.
Because plants are red symbols, plant attributes cannot be directly set or modified from the Attributes palette. Instead,
edit the plant symbol components.
To edit plant symbol attributes:
1. Select the plant symbol in the Resource Browser. From the Resources menu, select Edit, or select Edit from the
Resource Browser context menu.
Alternatively, select a plant in the drawing window, and double-click or select Edit from the context menu.
The Edit Plant dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
2D/3D Graphics Edits the 2D or 3D symbol components (geometry, or shape, and attributes like
color and line weight) as described in Editing Symbol Definitions on page 181
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Definition Edits the definition of the plant symbol as described in Creating Plant
Definitions on page 375)
Path For multiple plant placements, selects the boundary or center polygon defining
the plant cluster shape, and automatically activates the Reshape tool for editing
the path

2. Edits to the 2D or 3D components immediately affect all instances of the symbol. Changes to the plant definition
affect all future instances of the plant.

Replacing Plants
When replacing plants, select whether to replace the current plant only, or all instances of the selected plant.
To replace plants:
1. Select the plant(s) to replace, or select a plant that is a representative of the plant instances to replace.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Replace Plant.
Alternatively, Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the plant and select Replace Plant from the
context menu.
The Replace Plant dialog box opens.
398 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Graphical plant list Select the replacement plant from the list of plant symbols in the file and in
default content
Selected Plants Replaces the selected plant(s) with the new plant
Only
All Instances Replaces all instances of the plant with the new plant. This does not affect the
plant definition of the replaced plant, but simply replaces all plants of one type
with another.

3. Click OK to replace the plant(s) or all the plant instances with the new plant.

Modifying Plant Clusters

Plants placed in a multiple placement mode of the Plant tool are associated as a cluster. The cluster moves together,
and parameter changes affect all plants in the cluster. However, it is possible to dissociate the cluster to make individual
plant changes. In addition, new clusters can be created with different combinations of plants. Clustering identical plants
which are in close proximity can be desirable for labeling and identification purposes.

Converting Plant Clusters

One or more plant clusters can be disassociated to change individual plant parameters or location.
To convert a plant cluster to individual plants:
1. Select the plant cluster or clusters to convert.
2. Select Landmark > Change Plant Grouping.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the plant cluster and select Change Plant
Grouping from the context menu.
3. If one plant cluster is selected, the plants in the cluster are automatically converted to individual plants.
4. If more than one plant cluster is selected, the Choose Mode dialog box opens.
 Editing Plants | 399

5. Select Convert Selection into Individual Plants.

6. Click OK. The plants are converted, retaining their original plant type; they can be moved and changed
individually.

Combining Plants
Individual plants and plant clusters can be combined into a single plant cluster. The converted cluster will be a
multi-plant placement at polygon corners.
To convert plants to a plant cluster:
1. Select the individual plants, plant clusters, or combination of individual plants and clusters to convert.
2. Select Landmark > Change Plant Grouping.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the plant and select Change Plant Grouping
from the context menu.
3. If the selection consists of individual plants of the same type, they are automatically converted to a single plant
cluster.
4. If individual and clustered plants are selected, the Choose Mode dialog box opens.

5. Select Combine Plants into One Single Plant.

6. Individual and clustered plants of the same type are automatically converted to a single plant cluster.
If the selection consists of more than one plant type, the Please Choose Plant dialog box opens.
400 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

7. All the plants in the selection will be converted to one of the plant types. Select the plant type from the list and its
Plant Spread value is displayed. Click OK.
8. The selected plants are converted to a single cluster of identical plant types.

Plants are clustered based on their drawing order. If the joining polygon of the resulting plant is not as expected,
change the drawing order of the plants prior to joining them.

The Plant Database

The plant database provided with the Vectorworks Landmark product manages an extensive list of plant names and
botanical information which can be used to associate specific plant data with plant definitions.
The plant database is a stand-alone FileMaker application that opens in a separate window. The benefits of using the
FileMaker database for plant data management include improved navigation, editing, searching, and filtering, as well
as the ability to import data from industry-standard sources. At installation, a large set of plant records is provided.
FileMaker is a comprehensive data-management program. The details of every menu command and option are beyond
the scope of this manual. However, all relevant information for using FileMaker in conjunction with the Vectorworks
Landmark product is presented. Familiarity with FileMaker is not required to use the database or to manage botanical
data, and to use that data in the Vectorworks program. The full version of FileMaker can also be used when working
with the plant database. For in-depth information about FileMaker, including product documentation, visit
www.filemaker.com and navigate to the Support area. (The plant database may not contain all the functionality
documented for the full version of FileMaker.)
The general workflow consists of managing the botanical information in the plant database application, and from there,
creating the plant lists to be used in the Vectorworks Landmark product.

Accessing the Plant Database

Accessing the plant database for the first time requires initial setup.
 The Plant Database | 401

To access the plant database for the first time:

1. Select Landmark > VW Plants Database.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing and select VW Plants Database
from the context menu.
The Choose Plant Database Location dialog box opens.

2. Indicate where the plant database information is to be located. By default, the plant database is stored locally, in
the user folder of the computer where the Vectorworks software is installed. Larger offices that wish to share the
plant database among several computers can store and access the plant database from a workgroup folder located
on a central computer or server. Alternatively, select Browse for database folder and then click Browse to
specify the desired location.
If this is the first time the plant database is being accessed and it does not yet exist in the specified location, the
database is automatically created in that location. Whenever the plant database is opened in the future, it will use
the data from that location. The location can be changed at any point by selecting Landmark > Choose VW
Plants. It is possible to maintain several plant databases and switch among them with this command.
3. Click OK. The creation of a new plant database location may take a few moments.
The VW Plants dialog box may open. Specify a user name for the FileMaker application.

4. Click OK.
The Vectorworks Landmark plant database opens, in a separate window.
402 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Once the plant database has been set up, it is accessed immediately when selecting Landmark > VW Plants
Database. The plant database can also be accessed when creating a plant definition, by clicking Open VW Plants
from the Get Plant Data dialog box.

Importing Plant Database Information

A default set of plant database records is provided at installation. The plant database supports several data formats for
import, including tab-delimited files, Excel spreadsheets, .xml files, and many others. The import folder feature
allows movies and images to be imported. In addition, plant lists from previous versions of the Vectorworks program
can be imported.
To import plant database information:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the File > Import Records database command. Files, folders, or .xml files can be imported. Select this
command to import plant lists from Vectorworks program versions prior to 12.
To import plant data from Vectorworks versions 2008 through 2012, first select the File > Convert VW Plants
database command to convert the plant data to the most recent FileMaker format. Then, import the data with
Import Records.
To import plant lists from Vectorworks 12.x, select the File > Import Vectorworks 12 Plant List database
command.
3. After specifying the location of the file(s) to import, field mapping is required to import the data correctly into the
current database. (For Vectorworks 12.x plant lists, field mapping is automatically performed.)
 The Plant Database | 403

The important mapping fields for proper use in the Vectorworks Landmark product are described in Plant
Database Field Mapping on page 984. If more information is required, consult the Support area of
www.filemaker.com.

Adding Additional Plant Data

Additional plant datasets may be located in the Plant Database\VW Plants\Additional Datasets folder. These files
typically contain regional plant sets provided by a distributor or other plant sets installed with the Vectorworks
Landmark software. The field matching has already been performed for these data sets, and they are easy to add to the
plant database.
To add plant data from the Additional Datasets folder:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the File > Add Additional Plant Data database command.
Select the file to import. Field mapping is automatic, and the plant information is added to the plant database.

Viewing Plant Database Records

Each plant entry and its associated botanical information is considered a record in FileMaker. Several view modes
display the records in ways designed to facilitate performing related tasks. When the plant database first opens, the
records operate in Browse mode, with Forms displayed.
To familiarize yourself with the different display modes, and view the plant records in a variety of ways:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the View > Status Toolbar database command to enable viewing controls and status at the top of the record
form. Many of these items can also be found on the View and Records menu.
View the previous or the next Displays the current record number; Displays the records found/total number of plant records
record (Browse or Preview enter a record number to display and their sort status, and toggles the found display
modes)

Select data, list, or Scroll through Select form, list, or Print preview Find menu Quick Find
web layout the records table view

3. From the Status toolbar and the View menu, select the view mode and layout options depending on the task to
accomplish.

Mode or View Description

Option
View Mode
Browse Displays plant record information and allows editing
Find Displays a blank form for specifying search criteria
Preview Displays plant record information as it will be printed
View as Form Displays each record as an individual form or page
View as List Displays records consecutively in a scrollable list
View as Table Displays each record as an item in a table, for sorting and reordering
Layout
404 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Mode or View Description

Option
Data View Displays plant record information
List View Displays limited plant data for each plant, for sorting and reordering
Web View Displays a special browser (using the default system browser) for locating
plant images and information
Records Found After a search, the green toggle button displays an approximate pie chart and
toggle and status the number of records found; click the green pie chart button to toggle the
display to records that are not in the found set. The sort status is also
indicated.
Show All Clears the results from a search, displaying all records
New Record Adds a plant record to the database
Delete Record Deletes the currently selected record from the database
Find Switches to Find mode layout, for searching
Find menu Allows searches to be saved, modified, recalled, and cleared
Sort Opens the Sort Records dialog box, for determining the sort order for the plant
records, or for unsorting the records
Quick Find Searches for the text entered or recent searches, without switching to Find
mode
Preview Displays the records in a Print Preview mode

Searching for Plants

The plant database can be searched from Quick Find in the Status toolbar or by switching the view to Find mode.
Quickly search by entering text or repeating a recent search, or conduct flexible, sophisticated searches by combining
search criteria. Search criteria can be saved and managed, making it easy to re-create plant lists.

Quick Find Search

Quick find searches the plant records for text.
Quick Find field

Quick Find menu

To perform a quick find search:

1. Type one or more search terms into the Quick Find field in the Status toolbar.
2. Press Enter.
3. The records that contain the search terms are displayed.
To quickly repeat a previous search, click on the Quick Find menu and select the search term used previously.

Find Mode
Find mode performs a more advanced search based on specific criteria. Searches can be saved and managed.
 The Plant Database | 405

Find menu

To search for plants in Find mode and manage found sets:

1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the View > Find Mode database command or click Find from the Status toolbar. Alternatively, select
Create New Find from the Find menu.
A blank form opens and the display switches to Find mode. Find mode functions are available from the Status
toolbar.
406 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

3. Enter the criteria for searching.

Examples include searching for the Latin name Liatris, Light Range Sun, with a Height > 3-5 ft.
Click the Omit button in the Status toolbar (or select the Omit options from the Records menu) to exclude, rather
than search for, the criteria. Use the Operators list for even more specific searches.
4. Click Perform Find from the Status toolbar, or press Enter.
5. The view mode automatically switches to Browse, and the records that meet the search criteria are displayed.
6. To save the current set of search criteria, select Save Current Find from the Find menu.
Other search criteria set maintenance can be performed from the Find menu, to modify, edit, clear, and select
saved searches. A previously saved search is executed by selecting its name from the Find menu.
To return to viewing all the plant records, select the Records > Show All Records database command or click
Show All from the Status toolbar.
 The Plant Database | 407

Managing Plant Database Records

Editing Plant Records
Plant database records can be edited in Browse mode, whether in form, list, or table view (see Viewing Plant Database
Records on page 403).
To edit plant records:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the View > Browse Mode database command.
3. Select the plant record to edit by scrolling or searching.
4. Changes made to the fields and check boxes are automatically saved.
Useful edits include:
Marking a plant as a Favorite (to search for favorite plants later)
Indicating the Project Information (to track plants by project)
Adding custom information to drop-down lists
Placing an image, video, audio, pasted text, or link to an embedded object into one of three containers;
right-click on an image container to access the options
Adding image credits and data source information to avoid copyright issues
Adding extra plant or project information that is useful in the Vectorworks program
Switch between metric and imperial units for the Height and Spread fields with the Edit > Options > Use
Imperial Value Lists or Use Metric Value Lists database commands.

Image container

Project ID numbers and favorites can be easily be added to all plants found by a search, with the Records > Add
Project ID and Records > Mark As Favorite database commands. These fields export to the Vectorworks program
and are useful for tracking and finding plants. If the Project ID is no longer needed at the completion of a project,
search for all plants with that ID and then select the Records > Delete Project ID database command to remove it.
408 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Adding Plant Records

To add a plant to the plant database list:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the View > Browse Mode database command.
3. Select the Records > New Record database command or click New Record from the Status toolbar.
New records are appended to the end of the record set.
4. Enter the plant information. Information is saved automatically.

Deleting Plant Records

To remove a plant from the plant database list:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Locate the record or records to delete, by searching or scrolling.
3. Select the Records > Delete Record database command or click Delete Record from the Status toolbar to delete
an individual record, or Records > Delete Found Records to delete a found set of records.
Confirm the deletion; this action cannot be undone.

Accessing Plant Information from the Internet

If access to the Internet is available, plant images and information are easily obtained from within the plant database
window. Images can be copied directly into the database (image credits can also be specified).
To access plant information from the Internet:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Locate the plant record that requires images or information.
3. Select the View > Swap Data View/Web View database command to toggle to web view, or select the Web Data
layout from the Status toolbar.
In web view, a search is automatically conducted for the current plant based on its Latin name, and information
about it, as well as images, are displayed from different sources.
 The Plant Database | 409

4. Click on the web view tabs to find plant information from the various sources. The available sources may depend
on regional settings provided by a distributor.
5. Click the buttons to navigate through the web pages of each tab or to reset the view to the initial search (based on
the Latin name).
Forward

Back Reset

6. To easily copy an image from the Internet to the plant database, select Copy (Windows) or Copy Image
(Macintosh) from the image context menu. Then select Paste from the image container context menu. Image
credits can be added in the Image Credits area under the images, to avoid copyright issues.
Image files can also be saved and inserted into the database later, as described in Editing Plant Records on
page 407.
410 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

7. Select the View > Swap Data View/Web View database command, or change the layout from the Status toolbar,
to return to the database view.

Creating Plant Lists for Vectorworks Landmark

Plant lists are the connection between the FileMaker plant database and the Vectorworks Landmark product. Creating
plant lists from the entire set, or from found sets, in the plant database allows that data to be attached to plants in the
Vectorworks program. Create as many plant lists as necessary; the appropriate plant list is selected for the plant
definition. The data attached to a plant becomes part of the plant definition, and can be added to planting plans and
displayed by plant ID tags.
Plant lists are created from the plant database; plant lists can also be created automatically based on plant category.
To create a plant list from the plant database:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Search for the plants to include in the plant list (see Searching for Plants on page 404). The plant list is created
from a found set of records, or from all the plant records. Larger plant lists take longer to load into the
Vectorworks program.
3. Select the File > Create Vectorworks Plant List database command.
The Create Plant List dialog box opens. Provide a name for the plant list.
 The Plant Database | 411

4. Click OK.
The plant list file is a tab-delimited file saved in the location of the plant database.

Plant Lists from Categories

To create plant lists based on plant category:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Select the File > Create Category Plant Lists database command.
A plant list is created for each category. If there are no plants found for a category, no list is created for that
category. Plants without a category assigned, or with a custom category, are not included. In addition, an All
plant list contains all plants regardless of category.
3. The plant lists are tab-delimited files saved in the location of the plant database.

Plant Lists for Existing Tree Species

By default, all plants in the tree Category of the database are included in the Species Data dialog box for access by the
Existing Tree tool. If desired, search the plant database for the trees you require, and then add only these trees to the
existing tree species list.
To create a custom existing tree species list:
1. Open the plant database as described in Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
2. Search for the trees to include in the existing tree species list (see Searching for Plants on page 404).
3. Select the File > Create Existing Tree List database command. This customizes the existing tree list to use only
the plants found in the database search.

Using Plant List Data in Vectorworks Landmark

Plant list information is available to plant definitions from the Plant Data tab.
To use plant list data in a plant definition:
1. Create the plant definition as described in Creating Plant Definitions on page 375.
2. In the Edit Plant Definition dialog box, click Get Plant Data.
The Get Plant Data dialog box opens.
412 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Plant List Select the plant list that contains the required plant information; all plant lists
created from the plant database and saved in the database location are listed.
A progress bar indicates the status of the plant list import when it is used for
the first time, and allows the import to be canceled.
Open VW Plants Opens the Vectorworks plant database, for locating plant information and
creating plant lists
Explore Opens Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh) to the folder containing
generated plant lists
Name List Display Toggles between plant list display by Latin name or common name
Name Find Finds a plant in the plant name list by matching typed characters
Name List Lists the plants included in the currently selected plant list. Select a plant to
view its botanical information on the right, and to use that data in the plant
definition.
Plant Data Displays the botanical information (from the plant database) for the plant
selected in the name list

3. Select the plant name and data to include in the plant definition, and click OK.
4. The Plant Data tab displays the data from the plant database.
 Documenting Existing Trees | 413

Documenting Existing Trees

The Vectorworks Landmark product includes the Existing Tree tool, for documenting the existing trees on a site.
Details about each tree can be provided, including information such as species, condition, life expectancy, significance,
and action to be taken. The 2D and 3D appearance of the trees can be specified, indicating the root and tree protection
zones, with detailed plant ID tags and graphics for retained and removed trees, and the ability to select a 3D trunk and
canopy shape. A report including the relevant information can be automatically created.

Existing Tree Workflow

When placing existing trees into the drawing, the following workflow is recommended:
414 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Initialize the plant database if it has not yet been opened, by selecting Landmark > Choose VW Plants. See
Specifying Existing Tree Species Information on page 417 and The Plant Database on page 400. This action
populates the list of existing trees so that species information can be selected.
Click the Existing Tree tool from the Site Planning tool set, and then select Preferences from the Tool bar to open
the Object Properties dialog box for the Existing Tree. Set the defaults for the placement of existing trees,
including automatic numbering, ID tag, 2D and 3D appearance (including the selection of 2D component
symbols), and species information.
While setting the default properties for the Existing Tree tool, specify classing wherever possible to be able to
control the visibility of classed elements (easily accomplished from the Navigation palette) as well as specify
appearance by class for many of the elements.
Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box. On the Classes tab, navigate to the classes
related to the existing tree, and specify their appearance. Classes should be set to Use at Creation. For canopy and
trunk classes, set the texture (Renderworks required) or color to display in 3D views. Set the marker and line style
of the tag class if a marker is to be displayed.
When placing existing trees, keep in mind that the selected 2D component symbols will not display until an
Action has been specified. This helps you determine at a glance which trees still require an action to be set.
The parameters of groups of selected trees, or trees on a specific layer, or all trees can be set in a single operation
by using the Apply properties in the various Existing Tree dialog boxes.
Indicate the location of important and less important areas of the site by specifying the significance of each tree or
group of trees.
Information about these settings is provided in the following sections.

Placing Existing Trees

To place an existing tree:

1. Click the Existing Tree tool from the Site Planning tool set.
If this is the first time the object has been placed in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Set the
default existing tree properties before placing trees, or place the tree and then edit its parameters in the Object Info
palette.
2. Click in the drawing to place the existing tree. Click again to set the rotation.

Click in the center of the trunk to

obtain a control point, and drag to
change the trunk location

The appearance of the existing tree may not match its 2D settings until certain parameters have been specified in
the Object Info palette. For example, until the Action is specified, the tree does not display with the symbol set for
Retain or Remove; the significance must be set for the significance color to display.

Existing Tree Properties

The existing tree properties can be edited from the Object Info palette.
 Documenting Existing Trees | 415

Parameter Description
Get Species Data Opens the Species Data dialog box, to obtain botanical information from the
plant database; see Specifying Existing Tree Species Information on
page 417
Botanical Name/ Displays the trees botanical and common name, when obtained by clicking
Common Name Get Species Data; alternatively, enter the botanical and common name if not
using the plant database information
Tag and Number Opens the Tag and Number Options dialog box, to set the plant ID tag and
Options automatic numbering options; see Existing Tree Autonumbering and ID
Tags on page 425
Tree No Displays the trees autonumber, when autonumbering is enabled;
alternatively, if autonumbering is not selected, enter an ID number for the tree
Origin Specifies whether the tree is an endemic, native, or exotic species
Height Sets the height of the tree
Canopy Max. Diam Sets the trees maximum canopy diameter
Also Use Canopy Min. Enables the canopy minimum diameter option, which allows an additional
Diameter smaller canopy size to be specified, for tree canopy shapes that are oval rather
than circular
Canopy Min. Diam Specifies the minimum dimension of the canopy; the oval canopy shape is
created within the specified maximum and minimum values. The 3D solid
shape is also affected.
Canopy Rotate Sets the rotation angle of the tree canopy; this is useful when the canopy is an
elliptical or uneven shape
First Branch Hgt Indicates the height of the lowest (first) branch; this determines the bottom
position of the 3D canopy
DBH Specifies the diameter of the tree trunk at breast height. Adult breast height is
considered to be 51 55 (1.3 1.4 m) above the ground. The DBH value
also determines the initial diameter of the critical and primary root zones.
Root Display Sets whether to display the critical and/or primary root zones, the root ball
zone only, or no root zones. Specify the appearance of the zones by clicking
2D Properties (see Setting 2D Existing Tree Appearance on page 419).
The root zones move with the tree trunk location.

Primary root zone

Root ball
Critical root zone
416 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Critical Root Diam Specifies the diameter of the critical root zone; initially, this value is set to 2.5
times the DBH, but the value can be changed. A changed value is reset if the
Root Display is turned off; set the value to 0 (zero) to re-apply the DBH
factor.
Primary Root Diam Specifies the diameter of the primary root zone; initially, this value is set to 5
times the DBH, but the value can be changed. A changed value is reset if the
Root Display is turned off; set the value to 0 (zero) to re-apply the DBH
factor.
Ball Diameter When the root ball is set to display, indicates the diameter of the root ball
Tree Protection Displays and edits the tree protection zone, the area around the tree that
should be fenced off, or preserved, to protect the tree. The tree protection
zone moves with the tree trunk location.
The tree protection zone may need to extend beyond the initial boundary
shape. To reshape the tree protection zone:
1. Select Edit Tree Protection Zone from the Tree Protection parameter.
The tree protection zone displays with editing handles.

Drag the resize handle to reshape

the tree protection zone

2. Drag the handles to reshape the zone. Adjust the radius at the corners of
the zone with the TPZ Cnr Radius value, which only displays during
zone editing.
3. When reshaping is finished, select Display Tree Protection Zone from
the Tree Protection parameter.
TPZ Cnr Radius When the tree protection zone editing mode is enabled, specifies the corner
radius of the protection zone; set to a smaller value to simulate sharp corners
Condition Indicates the condition of the tree: excellent, good, average, poor, or custom
Custom Condition When a custom condition is selected, enter the custom tree condition
SULE Indicates the Safe Useful Life Expectancy (S.U.L.E.) rating for the tree. A
custom life expectancy value can be entered.
Custom SULE When a custom S.U.L.E. is selected, enter the custom life expectancy
Significance Specifies the significance of the existing tree. This selection causes the
significance color set in the 2D Properties dialog box to display. A custom
significance can be set.
 Documenting Existing Trees | 417

Parameter Description
Custom When a custom significance is selected, enter the custom tree significance.
Significance To preserve the ability to set and display the significance color automatically,
select one of the provided significance values, and then select Custom. Keep
the initial default significance word, and then enter any custom information.
For example, to use the Hazardous category, but add custom comments, select
Hazardous, and then Custom. The word Hazardous displays for Custom
Significance. After the word Hazardous, add your custom comment, such as
Hazardous - remove immediately. By retaining the word Hazardous at the
start of the custom comment, the significance color selected for Hazardous
still displays.
Action/Comment Indicates the action to be taken for the tree. The category selected (Retain,
Transplant, or Remove) determines the symbol to display based on the
selections made in the 2D Properties dialog box. A custom action can be set.
When transplanting a tree, set the original tree Action to Transplant - Original
location. Copy the tree, disabling its automatic numbering properties and
manually assigning it to the same Tree No. as the original tree. Move the
copy to the new tree location and set the Action for the copy to Transplant -
Proposed location.
Custom Action When a custom action is selected, enter the custom action to take for the tree.
To preserve the ability to automatically set the displayed symbol, select one
of the provided actions, and then select Custom. Keep the initial default
action category, and then enter any custom information. For example, to use
the Remove category, but add custom comments, select Remove, and then
Custom. The word Remove displays for Custom Action. After the word
Remove, add your custom comment, such as Remove - storm damaged. By
retaining the word Remove at the start of the custom comment, the symbol
selected for Remove still displays.
Reduced Level/Age/ These parameters provide additional information about the tree and can be
Year Planted/Date included in reports. Notes can be selected for display in the tree tag.
Assessed/Location/
Notes
2D Properties Opens the 2D Properties dialog box, to set display options for the 2D symbol
components, significance colors, and the root zone and tree protection zone
attributes; see Setting 2D Existing Tree Appearance on page 419
3D Properties Opens the 3D Properties dialog box, to set the 3D canopy and trunk display
options; see Setting 3D Existing Tree Appearance on page 422

Specifying Existing Tree Species Information

The species information for existing trees is obtained from the Vectorworks plant database; see The Plant Database
on page 400. If the plant database has not yet been opened, its default location needs to be set.
To specify botanical data from the Vectorworks plant database:
1. If it has not yet been opened, initialize the plant database by selecting Landmark > Choose VW Plants.
The Choose Plant Database Location dialog box opens. Select the plant database location as described in
Accessing the Plant Database on page 400.
418 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

By default, all plants in the tree Category of the database are included in the Species Data dialog box for access
by the Existing Tree tool. If desired, search the plant database for the trees you require, and then select the File >
Create Existing Tree List database command. This customizes the existing tree list to use only the plants found
in the database search.
2. From the Object Info palette of a selected existing tree, click Get Species Data.
The Species Data dialog box opens, listing tree species information. Species can be easily added to the list.
If the list is blank, the plant database location was not initialized.

Parameter Description
Species list Lists the botanical and common name of the trees contained in the existing
tree list; click either heading to sort. Black text indicates species that appear
in the Existing Trees.txt file located in the Plant Database folder within the
user folder. Blue text indicates species that you have added to the list.
Botanical Name/ Displays the botanical and common name of the selected tree; to add a tree to
Common Name the list, enter its botanical information and click Add Tree to Existing Tree
List
Remove Tree from Removes the selected custom (blue text) tree species from the list. Black text
Existing Tree List indicates default species, which cannot be removed from the existing tree list.
Add Tree to Existing Adds the current Botanical Name and Common Name to the existing tree
Tree List list. Edit a default entry if needed, or add a new species to the list. Custom
(added or edited) species display with blue text.

3. Select the species from the list, and click OK.

The Object Info palette displays the species information.
 Documenting Existing Trees | 419

Setting 2D Existing Tree Appearance

The 2D appearance controls the symbol for the tree and trunk, and also sets the attributes of the significance status,
primary and critical root zones, and tree protection zones. The settings apply to the selected tree or a variety of other
selection options, and can be set as the default 2D attributes for the drawing. This is a powerful way to control the 2D
appearance of all existing trees in the layer or drawing in one operation.

Using classes for the significance colors, root zone, and tree protection zone is recommended. The visibility of
these elements is easy to control with classes. See Managing Classes on page 106 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Existing tree symbols are provided as default content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at
the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide). The resources in the ET Symbols.vwx file are available in the 2D Properties dialog box.
To set the existing tree 2D appearance:
1. From the Object Info palette of a selected existing tree, select 2D Properties. Alternatively, double-click on an
existing tree.
The 2D Properties dialog box opens.
420 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Use 2D Component Uses 2D symbol components to display the tree. The tree symbol displayed in
Symbols the drawing depends on the Action specified in the Object Info palette.
Tree Retain Select the symbol to display for a tree that is retained (the associated Object
Info palette Action is Retain)
Tree Remove Select the symbol to display for a tree to be removed (the associated Object
Info palette Action is Remove)
Tree Trunk Select the tree trunk symbol for either retained or removed trees
Transplanted Trees Select the symbol to display for the existing position of a tree to be
transplanted (the associated Object Info palette Action is Transplant -
Original location); select the symbol to display for the new position of the
transplanted tree (the associated Object Info palette Action is Transplant -
Proposed Location). Specify the tree trunk symbol for transplanted trees in
both the original and new locations.
Use Significance Applies significance colors to the tree to indicate its relative importance on
Colors the site. The significance color used depends on the Significance selected in
the Object Info palette.
Significance rating For each significance rating, select the color to display. For more information
colors on colors, see Applying Colors on page 540 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Documenting Existing Trees | 421

Parameter Description
Display Specifies where to place the significance color.

Indicator beside tree ID Circle around trunk Tree fill color

Use the significance color as a tree fill for complex plans with multiple
trees, to easily distinguish significance categories for densely forested
areas.
Class If desired, select a class to control the display of the significance indicators.
The classes present in the drawing are listed, or select the default class, Exist
Tree-Significance. Class attributes control all indicator attributes with the
exception of the fill color (any fill colors selected here override the class
settings).
Root Zone Attributes Applies line colors and styles to the primary and critical root zone indicators.
Root zones must be selected for display in the Object Info palette.
Primary Line Color/ Select the color and line style for the primary root zone line
Style
Critical Line Color/ Select the color and line style for the critical root zone line
Style
Class If desired, select a class to control the display of the root zone indicators. The
classes present in the drawing are listed, or select the default class, Exist
Tree-Root Zones. The line attributes set here override the class settings.
Tree Protection Zone Applies a line color and style to the tree protection zone indicator. The tree
Attributes protection zone must be selected for display in the Object Info palette.
TPZ Line Color/ Select the color and line style for the tree protection zone line
Style
Class If desired, select a class to control the display of the tree protection zone
indicator. The classes present in the drawing are listed, or select the default
class, Exist Tree-TPZ. Any line attributes set here override the class settings.
Apply Properties The various 2D properties can be applied to a single tree, all trees in the layer
or drawing, and as the tool default settings
422 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Apply list Select the method to apply the properties.
To this object only: Applies the properties to the currently selected existing
tree
To all objects on all layers: Applies the parameter categories selected in
Properties to Apply to all existing trees in the drawing
To all objects on active layer only: Applies the parameter categories
selected in Properties to Apply to all existing trees in the current layer
To all selected objects on all layers: Applies the parameter categories
selected in Properties to Apply to selected existing trees in the drawing
To all selected objects on active layer only: Applies the parameter
categories selected in Properties to Apply to selected existing trees in the
current layer
Also apply as the Sets the selected 2D properties as the default properties for the Existing Tree
document defaults tool. Existing trees placed by the tool after clicking OK will have these
properties applied.
Properties to Apply When applying properties to more than just the currently selected tree, select
which properties to globally apply

2. Click OK.
Certain 2D properties depend on selections made in the Object Info palette for each existing tree, and are not
applied immediately. For example, the symbol specified in Tree Remove does not display unless Remove is
selected as the Action for the tree.
The symbols for retained and removed trees are scaled by the canopy height and diameter specified in the Object
Info palette. The original and proposed symbols for a transplanted tree are scaled by the DBH parameter.

Setting 3D Existing Tree Appearance

The 3D appearance controls the symbol for the tree and trunk in 3D views. The settings apply to the selected tree or a
variety of other selection options, and can be set as the default 3D attributes for the drawing. This is a powerful way to
control the 3D appearance of all existing trees in the layer or drawing in one operation. Showing trees in a 3D view is
also useful for creating shadow diagrams (Renderworks required).

Color shader texture combined with noise transparency shader

Using classes for the tree canopy shape and trunk is recommended. The attributes (color or texture) of these
elements are easy to control with classes (Renderworks is required to use textures). The class color or texture must
be set to Use at Creation. See Managing Classes on page 106 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Documenting Existing Trees | 423

Existing tree symbols are provided as default content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at
the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide). The resources in the ET Symbols.vwx file are available in the 3D Properties dialog box.
Image props, such as those provided by xFrog, can be used as 3D tree geometry. However, canopy height and canopy
diameter changes in the Object Info palette do not affect the geometry of image props.
To set the existing tree 3D appearance:
1. From the Object Info palette of a selected existing tree, select 3D Properties.
The 3D Properties dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Create 3D Geometry Select whether to create 3D geometry for the existing tree
Canopy Shape Select the symbol to display for the 3D canopy
424 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Trunk Shape Select the symbol to display for the 3D trunk shape. Short trunks extend to
the First Branch Hgt value indicated in the Object Info palette, while long
trunks extend into the canopy. If using a canopy texture that is partially
transparent, use a long trunk shape for a more realistic appearance. A curved
shape gives the trunk a flanged appearance near the ground; random
selections are slightly more free-form in shape.

Straight Short Straight Long Curved Short

Curved Long Random Curved Short Random Curved Long

Optional Class Names

3D Canopy If desired, select a class to control the appearance and visibility of the canopy.
The classes present in the drawing are listed, or select the default class, Exist
Tree-3D Canopy.
3D Trunk If desired, select a class to control the appearance and visibility of the trunk.
The classes present in the drawing are listed, or select the default class, Exist
Tree-3D Trunk.
Apply Properties The various 3D properties can be applied to a single tree, all trees in the layer
or drawing, and as the tool default settings
Apply list Select the method to apply the properties.
To this object only: Applies the properties to the currently selected existing
tree
To all objects on all layers: Applies the properties to all existing trees in the
drawing
To all objects on active layer only: Applies the properties to all existing
trees in the current layer
To all selected objects on all layers: Applies the properties to selected
existing trees in the drawing
To all selected objects on active layer only: Applies the properties to
selected existing trees in the current layer
 Documenting Existing Trees | 425

Parameter Description
Also apply as the Sets the 3D properties as the default properties for the Existing Tree tool.
document defaults Existing trees placed by the tool after clicking OK will have these properties
applied.

2. Click OK.
The 3D canopy shape is affected by changes in the Object Info palette for height, diameter, First Branch Hgt, and
DBH values.

Existing Tree Autonumbering and ID Tags

Existing tree tags can contain an automatic numbering ID as well as tree information. Set up the new tree
autonumbering properties first, to automatically number the trees according to the settings as they are placed on the
drawing. Autonumbering can also be changed after placement on a tree-by-tree basis.
To set autonumbering and ID tag information for existing trees:
1. From the Object Info palette of a selected existing tree, select Tag and Number Options.
The Tag and Number Options dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Auto Number New Trees Sets autonumbering defaults for trees to be placed on the drawing. Deselect
the option if autonumbering is not desired.
Leading Zeros Specify the number of leading zeros to use for the autonumber. Using
leading zeros allows correct sorting in worksheets.
New Tree Prefix/ Specifies a prefix and or/suffix, if any, before and after the autonumber
Suffix
Auto number When selected, existing trees that are copied or duplicated (with the
duplicated trees Duplicate command, or by clicking and dragging with the Option
(Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) key pressed) receive their own autonumber
Separate numbering Restarts the autonumbering series for each layer of the drawing
on each layer
426 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Auto Number This Tree Sets autonumbering properties for the currently selected tree; deselect to
manually enter a number in Full ID Number instead of using an
autonumber. When displaying transplanted trees, for example, the same
number is needed for the tree representation in the original and new
locations. For one of the representations, deselect Auto Number This Tree
and enter the identical number in the Full ID Number.
If Auto number duplicated trees is not selected, Auto Number This
Tree is automatically disabled when an autonumbered tree is
duplicated.
Leading Zeros Specifies the number of leading zeros to use for the autonumbering of the
selected tree
This Tree Prefix/ Specifies a prefix and or/suffix, if any, before and after the autonumber for
Suffix the selected tree
Full ID Number Displays the selected trees autonumber; deselect Auto Number This Tree
to specify a custom ID Number
ID Tag Options Specifies how to display existing tree ID tags
Snap tag to edge of Snaps the end of the leader line to the edge of the trunk; deselect to adjust
trunk the endpoint location manually
Display marker at end Adds a marker to the leader line endpoint. The marker style is controlled by
of tag leader the ID tag class.
Enable tag shoulder Adds a shoulder to the leader line
line
Shoulder Angle Sets the angle of the ID text and shoulder
Display Specifies the information to display in the tag; each item displays on its own
line. The Notes information is set in the Object Info palette.
Class If desired, select a class to control the appearance (color of text and
attributes of the leader line, as well as marker style) and display of the ID
tag. The classes present in the drawing are listed, or select the default class,
Exist Tree-Tags.
Apply To Select the method to apply the numbering and ID properties.
To this object only: Applies the properties to the currently selected
existing tree
To all objects on all layers: Applies the properties to all existing trees in
the drawing
To all objects on active layer only: Applies the properties to all existing
trees in the current layer
To all selected objects on all layers: Applies the properties to selected
existing trees in the drawing
To all selected objects on active layer only: Applies the properties to
selected existing trees in the current layer
 Documenting Existing Trees | 427

Parameter Description
Also apply as the Sets the tag and numbering properties as the default properties for the
document defaults Existing Tree tool. Existing trees placed by the tool after clicking OK will
have these properties applied.
Also apply position of Also applies the position of the ID tag and leader line from the currently
ID tag selected tree to the existing trees set in Apply To

2. Click OK.
Existing tree tag appearance and placement is flexible, and can be adjusted in several ways, including through the
Object Info palette, tag class settings, and the control point locations on the drawing.
When existing tree tags are required, define their appearance in the Tag and Number Options dialog box. Apply
the ID tag options to all existing trees and to the document defaults.
Individual tags can then be changed for selected existing trees by clicking Tag and Number Options from the
Object Info palette. For example, selected trees in one area of a planting plan look more uniform when they all use
the same tag approach and tag shoulder angle. Set the Shoulder Angle and then select Also apply position of ID
tag.
The existing tree tag class controls the appearance of the leader/shoulder lines, as well as the marker style.
To move the plant tags of several selected plants at once, click the Unrestricted Interactive Scaling mode of the
Selection tool.
If an individual tag needs to be repositioned, plant tags also have several control points for adjusting the tag text
and leader line and shoulder position and angle.
Align and distribute the leader lines for improved readability with the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command
(see Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Adjusts shoulder length, tag shoulder
angle, and tag location Contents specified by ID Tag Options
Display parameter

Adjusts shoulder location,

leader line length, and tag
approach angle

Adjusts endpoint location

and tag approach angle

Adjusts trunk location

Customizing Existing Trees

Existing trees are hybrid symbols, containing a 2D symbol component, and optionally, a 3D symbol component. The
default existing tree symbols are located in the default content included with the Vectorworks Landmark product in
Vectorworks\Libraries (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). As 2D and 3D
settings are made, the associated tree symbols are automatically imported into the current file and appear in the
Resource Browser.
428 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

As with any resource, the symbols can be edited through the Resource Browser, and these edits apply to the current file.
Alternatively, custom existing tree symbols can be added to the default ET Symbols.vwx file, either directly or by
exporting edited tree symbols to the file (duplicate and rename the symbols from the Resource Browser first, so that the
original symbols are not overwritten). For more information on symbol operations in the Resource Browser, see
Working with Resources on page 167 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. See Exporting Custom
Resources on page 616 for information on exporting resources.
These naming conventions ensure that any custom symbols are available for selection in the 2D and 3D Properties
dialog boxes:
Symbol names for retained trees, or the new location of transplanted trees, must begin with 1. (the number 1,
followed by a period)
Symbol names for removed trees, or the original location of transplanted trees, must begin with 2.
Symbol names for the 2D tree trunk must begin with 3.
Symbol names for the 3D canopy must begin with 4.

Plant Graphics
In addition to plant placement with the Plant tool, there are additional ways of representing plant masses on a planting
plan. Large, defined planting areas containing specific plants can be created with the Landscape Area tool. Undefined
plant masses and groups can be added with the Plant Line and Vegetation Line commands. To further change the
appearance of the planting plan, all plant styles can be displayed or hidden.

Creating Landscape Areas

Landscape areas consist of large, defined regions of plant combinations, useful for conceptual planning and specifying
large planting or reforestation areas, when individual plant symbols do not need to be drawn. Plant information from a
landscape area is based on plant symbol data, and is included in plant list worksheets.
A landscape area can also be created without plant information specified, for use as a general ground cover or mulch
area with a label showing the total area required.
Landscape area objects can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Create Objects from Shapes
command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To create a landscape area:

1. Click the Landscape Area tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify or change the default landscape area parameters.
The Landscape Area Settings dialog box opens.
 Plant Graphics | 429

Parameter Description
Tag Information Specifies the landscape area tag format
Name Provides a name for the landscape area, which can be displayed in the tag
Tag Display Select On to display a landscape area tag to the right or left of the leader line; set
the left or right position with the Tag Text Angle
Tag Class Specifies the class for the landscape area tag, or allows a new class to be created for
the tag
Tag Line Angle Specifies the angle of the leader line, from 0 to 360
Tag Text Angle When a landscape area tag is set to display, sets the tag text display angle, from 0 to
360. To display the area tag to the left, specify an angle greater than 90 or less than
270 degrees. To display the area tag to the right, specify an angle less than 90 or
greater than 270 degrees.
Tag Header Select the information to display in the first line of the landscape tag, or select
None to hide the top portion of the ID tag; select Custom to define a custom ID
text string formula
Tag Body Select the information to display in the main portion of the landscape tag, or select
None to hide this portion of the ID tag; select Custom to define a custom ID text
string formula
430 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Area Units Select the units for calculating the landscape area; this is set to the file units by
default (see Units on page 75 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide),
but can be changed
Display Tag Line Displays a marker at the end of the leader line; specify the marker to use by editing
Marker the tag class properties (see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Graphics
3D Display Select a 3D display option for the landscape area
2D Only Does not create a 3D representation of the landscape area; the landscape area
displays in top/plan view only
3D Plants When the landscape area contains plant symbols with an image prop 3D
component, switching to a 3D view displays the image props in a rectangular array,
for a realistic 3D view. Plant density is determined by the distribution or percentage
specified for the landscape area. 3D loci are placed when the plant definitions do
not have a 3D component.
3D Poly Creates a 3D polygon at a default elevation of 0, and can display a fill color when
rendered. Alternatively, assign the landscape area a texture from the Render tab of
the Object Info palette (Renderworks required)
Texture Bed Creates a texture bed for the 3D representation of the landscape area. If there is
more than one site model in the file, the texture bed conforms to the site model that
is in the same layer as the landscape area, if there is one. Apply a texture to the
landscape area (Renderworks required). Select the site model and click Update
from the Object Info palette; the landscape area displays as a texture bed on the site
model
Border Style Specifies the type of border for the edge of the landscape area
Standard Sets the landscape area border to a single line
Plant Cloud Draws the landscape area border with a convex or concave cloud shape; specify the
cloud billow type and the billow parameters. In addition to selecting the billow size
and height, the billow variability sets the variation between the smallest and largest
billows.
Plant Line Creates a freehand plant line border for the landscape area; for a rougher plant line
border, specify a short segment length with high segment thickness
Plant Specifies how to calculate the plant quantities of the combined plants in the
Information landscape area, for tag display as well as planting plan worksheets; select
Distribution Rate or Percentage
Distribution Rate Calculates plant quantity based on plant distribution rate. As each plant is added to
(automatic the list of plants in the landscape area, its rate per area or from the center is
coverage area %) specified; the percentage of each plant in the landscape area is calculated
automatically.
Distribution Rate Calculates plant quantity based on plant distribution rate. As each plant is added to
(custom coverage the list of plants in the landscape area, its rate per area or from the center is
area %) specified, as well as the percentage of each plant in the landscape area. This option
allows plants to be merged within the landscape area.
 Plant Graphics | 431

Parameter Description
Percentage Calculates plant quantity based on plant percentage of the total. As each plant is
added to the list of plants in the landscape area, its percentage is specified. The
plant distribution rate must be the same for all plants in the landscape area; specify
the rate and units to use.
Plant list Displays the plants included in the landscape area, including each plants
distribution rate and percentage of the plant total. The plant order can be changed
by click-dragging an item in the # column to a new position; this affects the plant
list order in the plant tag body.
Add Click to open the Edit Landscape Area dialog box, to add a plant to the list of plants
in the landscape area, and specify its distribution rate or percentage
Edit Click to open the Edit Landscape Area dialog box, to edit the selected plant; a
different plant symbol can be selected, or the plant distribution rate or percentage
changed
Delete Click to delete the selected plant from the list of plants in the landscape area

3. Specify the plants included in the landscape area, as well as their frequency. Click Add to specify or Edit to
change an included plant and its distribution rate or percentage value. The total percentage of all plants in the
landscape area should be 100 when finished.
The Edit Landscape Area Information dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Plant Symbol To include plant information in the landscape area, select a symbol from the
default content or the current files plant symbols (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Latin Name/Common Displays the selected plants definition information
Name/Plant/Tag ID
Rate If Distribution Rate was selected in the Landscape Area Preferences dialog
box, indicate the plant distribution value and units. This distribution value is
used to calculate the plant quantity for each plant type in the landscape area.
Percentage If Percentage was selected in the Landscape Area Preferences dialog box,
indicate the percentage of this plant in the landscape area. Using a fixed
distribution rate for all plants, the percentage is used to calculate the plant
quantity for each plant type in the landscape area. The total value of all plants
must add up to 100%.
432 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

4. Click OK, and then click OK again to close the Landscape Area Preferences dialog box.
5. Click on the appropriate mode in the Tool bar to select the boundary creation method of the landscape area.
For more information on the Polyline tool modes, see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
6. Click to set the landscape areas start point.
7. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until
the landscape area object is complete.

Landscape Area-6857.103 sq ft
50%-Colorado Blue Spruce
20%-Sweet Birch
30%-Shademaster Honey locust

2D landscape area 3D landscape area with 3D plants

The appearance of the landscape area is controlled by several methods.

Change the landscape area parameters from the Object Info palette, including specifying a general unit price (for
indicating the price per square unit in worksheets), price code (such as a SKU number) and vertex parameters;
click Landscape Area Settings from the Object Info palette to change landscape area information and other
preference parameters
Change the landscape area 2D attributes from the Attributes palette
Change the landscape area tag appearance by editing its parameters in the Object Info palette, editing the tag class
properties, and/or moving tag control points (similar to a plant tag; see Plant Tag Appearance on page 396)
To align landscape area tags for improved readability, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command (see
Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Reshape the landscape area by double-clicking on it. The Reshape tool is automatically activated, to reshape the
object directly in the drawing.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the landscape area object and select Edit from the context
menu. The Edit Landscape Area dialog box opens. Either edit the settings of the selected landscape area, or edit
the shape of the object path with the Reshape tool.

Creating a Plant Line

The Plant Line command creates a freehand plant line along a line, polyline, or polygon. It can be used to represent a
single undefined plant, line of plants, or general plant mass. No specific plant symbol information is included in a plant
line; use the Landscape Area tool if defined plant areas are necessary (see Creating Landscape Areas on page 428).
To create a plant line:
1. Select the object (line, polyline, or polygon) with the Selection tool.
2. Select Landmark > Plant Line.
The Plant Line dialog box opens. Suggested values are based on the selections perimeter.
 Plant Graphics | 433

Parameter Description
Segment Length Maximum length of each plant line segment; longer segments create a
rougher plant line appearance
Thickness Maximum perpendicular distance of each segment; a higher thickness
value results in a rougher plant line appearance
Corner Types Specifies the type of corner to create between segments; each type
produces a different plant line effect
Delete original Select to remove the object that forms the basis of the plant line

3. Select the desired plant line parameters and click OK. The plant line is created. If desired, apply colors, textures,
and other attributes to the plant line with the Attributes palette.

Normal Corner Type Cubic Corner Type Bzier Corner Type

Segment Length: 0.16 Segment Length: 0.0516 Segment Length: 0.16
Thickness: 0.0251 Thickness: 0.251 Thickness: 0.251

Arc Corner Type Random Corner Type Plant Line command Plant Line command
Segment Length: 0.0516 Segment Length: 0.0516 executed twice executed three times
Thickness: 0.251 Thickness: 0.0251

Creating a Vegetation Line

The Vegetation Line command creates a vegetation line around a selection of closed objects or symbols. It can be used
to represent a massed collection of undefined vegetation.
To create a vegetation line:
1. Select the closed objects or symbols that will form the basis of the vegetation line. The items should overlap.
434 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

2. Select Landmark > Vegetation Line.

The Vegetation Line dialog box opens. Select the type of vegetation line to create, and whether the original objects
should be deleted or retained.

Parameter Description
Standard Vegetation Line Creates an outline based on the outer perimeter of the selections
Cloud Vegetation Line Creates a cloud outline based on the parameters specified
Minimum/Maximum Specifies the minimum and maximum radius of each arc in the cloud
Radius
Billow Height Specifies the cloud billow height factor
Delete Original Select to delete the original selection of objects when creating the
vegetation line

3. Click OK to create the vegetation line. If desired, apply colors, textures, images, hatches, gradients and other
attributes to the vegetation line with the Attributes palette. See The Attributes Palette on page 501 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on applying attributes.

Standard Vegetation Line Cloud Vegetation Line

The vegetation line can be assigned to a class (with the desired attributes). The original plant symbols can remain
hidden by a vegetation line with a solid fill; however, the underlying vegetation can be revealed by hiding the
vegetation line class.
 Irrigation | 435

Show/Hide Plant Styles

The Show or Hide Plant Styles command controls the visibility of the outline, massing, and shadow parameters set on
the Render pane of a plant definition (see Plant Definition - Render Pane on page 380), on the Render pane of the
plant settings (see Plant Settings - Render Pane on page 391), as well as on the Object Info palette.
These effects display in Top/Plan view only. In a complex drawing with many plants, these settings can take a
significant amount of time to display and edit, and it is useful to toggle the effects on and off.
To show or hide the plant styles:
1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide Plant Styles.
2. If the plant styles are currently hidden, this command displays the outline, massing, and shadows of all plant
objects with those parameters set.
If the plant styles are currently visible, this command hides the effects. The Outline selection is saved for the
plants, even when hidden.

Irrigation

Irrigation Tools
The irrigation tools in the Site Planning tool set insert generic drip emitters, irrigation heads, and irrigation lines into
the drawing.

A selection of standard pre-configured manufacturers irrigation products are available through the Resource Browser,
and are located in the default irrigation libraries from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the
Vectorworks Landmark product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
For more information on the Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 157 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.

Inserting a Drip Emitter

A generic drip emitter can be inserted into the drawing with the Drip Emitter tool. Alternatively, use a drip emitter
from one of the irrigation object libraries.

To insert a drip emitter:

1. Click the Drip Emitter tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click in the drawing to insert the drip emitter. Click again to set the rotation.
The first time the tool is used, the Drip Emitter Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default parameters and
click OK to insert the drip emitter.
436 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

3. The drip emitter properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Manufacturer Displays the manufacturers name or Generic
Model Displays the manufacturers model number
Type Options include Pressure Compensating and Non-Pressure Compensating
Head Style Selects the type of emitter head (Micro-Spray, Drip Manifold, or Sub-surface
Drip)
Spray Nozzle For Micro-Spray head style, indicates the arc degrees of spray
Working Pressure Displays the water line pressure, for use in worksheets
Flow Rate Displays the flow rate per hour in either metric or imperial units
Unit Selects the units for the display of flow rate
Scale Factor Determines the size of 2D drip emitter display
Microtube For Sub-surface Drip head style only, displays the coordinates of microtube
Control placement (1 is the microtube curvature, and 2 is the end point)

2nd click
2nd click

1st click 1st click

Click in the center of the drip Click in the center of the drip emitter
emitter to obtain the control point, again to obtain the second control
and then on the end point point, and then define the curvature

The Sub-surface drip emitter contains control points in the center of the
symbol; click and drag first to determine the microtube end point, and then
again to define the curvature

Inserting an Irrigation Head

A generic irrigation head can be inserted into the drawing with the Irrigation Head tool. Alternatively, use an
irrigation head from one of the irrigation object libraries.

To insert an irrigation head:

1. Click the Irrigation Head tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click in the drawing to insert the irrigation head. Click again to set the rotation.
The first time the tool is used, the Irrigation Head Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default parameters and
click OK to insert the irrigation head.
3. The irrigation head properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Manufacturer Manufacturers name or Generic
Model Manufacturers model number
 Irrigation | 437

Parameter Description
Spray Pattern Selections include Circular, Rectangular, and Special
Head Type Indicates a Fixed Spray or Rotary sprinkler
Body Spray head height (for use in worksheets)
Nozzle Manufacturers nozzle type
Spray Radius or For circular spray patterns, displays the radius of the spray; for rectangular spray
Width patterns, displays the spray width
Length of Rect Displays the length of a rectangular spray pattern
Spray
Show Spray Select to display the irrigation spray pattern
Pattern
Spray Arc Indicates the arc of the spray pattern and determines the spray pattern display
Trajectory Angle (in degrees) of water as it is thrown from the spray head (for use in
worksheets)
Working Pressure Water line pressure (in psi or kg/cm3) for use in worksheets
Spacing Indicates triangular or square spacing
Precipitation Rate Number of inches or millimeters of water placed over a certain area per hour, for
use in worksheets
Head Scale Factor Determines the size of 2D irrigation head display
Unit Specify either Metric or Imperial units

The spray pattern can be hidden and displayed with the Show or Hide Spray Pattern command (see Show/Hide
Spray Pattern on page 438).

Inserting an Irrigation Line

An irrigation line can be inserted into the drawing with the Irrigation Line tool. Alternatively, use an irrigation line
from one of the irrigation object libraries.

To insert an irrigation line:

1. Click the Irrigation Line tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click and drag to define the length of the irrigation line.
The first time the tool is used, the Irrigation Line Properties dialog box opens. Accept the default parameters and
click OK to insert the irrigation line.
3. The irrigation line properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Length Displays irrigation line length
Type Indicates the irrigation line material (PVC, PE, Galvanized Steel, or Copper)
Diameter Displays irrigation tubing diameter
Has Sleeve Select if the irrigation line has a sleeve
438 | Chapter 10: Planting and Irrigation Design

Parameter Description
Sleeve Diameter When the Has Sleeve option is selected, indicates the tubing diameter of the
sleeve

Show/Hide Spray Pattern

The Show or Hide Spray Pattern command controls the visibility of the spray pattern of irrigation head objects.
To show or hide the spray pattern:
1. Select View > Show > Show or Hide Spray Pattern.
2. If the spray patterns are currently hidden, this command causes the spray pattern of all irrigation head objects to
become visible. In the Object Info palette, Show Spray Pattern is selected automatically.
If the spray patterns are currently visible this command causes the spray pattern of all irrigation head objects to
become hidden. In the Object Info palette, Show Spray Pattern is automatically deselected.
Creating the Lighting Design 11
Lighting Design Overview
Define the basic elements of the light plot before placing the lighting instruments. Create the design layers, classes, and
lighting positions, and then establish the label legends (and legend format) before creating the rest of the plot.
A lighting device consists of a lighting instrument, and optionally, an accessory; these are placed on a lighting position.
The lighting instruments in the Vectorworks Spotlight product represent more than simply a graphical symbol. An
instrument contains design information, such as labels, focus, position, channel, and color. Instruments are labeled with
lighting information according to the label legend format. Use the standard instrument symbols, or convert your own
custom symbols to instruments.

Before placing instruments, determine default setup parameters and whether universe assignment should be handled
automatically by the Vectorworks Spotlight product; see Spotlight Setup on page 18.
Place the lighting instruments in their own design layer and in their own classes. A drawing structure based on layers
and classes facilitates selecting, viewing, and printing the light plot.
Once the lighting positions have been created and the lighting instruments have been defined and placed, the
instruments can be edited to conform to changes in the lighting design. The instruments can be combined into
multi-circuit instruments. Accessories are added to the instruments. In addition, the focus point of the instruments can
be defined, and photometric data can be obtained.

Light Plot Structure

A structured system of layers and classes makes selecting, viewing, and printing items considerably easier. When
creating a light plot, develop a standard layer and class structure, along with a system for assigning items to the
appropriate layers and classes. Some objects include the ability to be automatically assigned to classes.
For more information on layers and classes, see Managing Layers on page 94 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide and Managing Classes on page 106 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Placing the stage, lighting positions, lighting instruments, focus points, and scenic elements in separate design layers is
recommended. Select Tools > Organization and click the Design Layers tab to create and manage layers.
Use the same scale for all the layers.
Place light plot items in their own classes. This allows you to globally turn off the display of certain classes for viewing
and printing. Select Tools > Organization and click the Classes tab to create and manage classes. Lighting devices can
be automatically assigned to classes determined at setup; see Lighting Device Setup on page 18.
The Vectorworks Spotlight product automatically creates certain classes to control instrument label visibility. These
include the Label class and its subclasses, and the Setup Notes class.

Layer and Class Examples

An example of the use of layers and classes would be a show file with all of the scenery on a single design layer, and
classes created to represent Act 1 and Act 2. When adding scenic elements, place them on the scenery design layer, and
assign them to either the Act 1 or Act 2 class. With this structure, use layer visibility to view only the scenery design
layer, and class visibility to turn the Act 1 or Act 2 classes on and off. This method allows the position of the set pieces
in each act to be viewed independently.
440 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Scenery position for Act 1 Scenery position for Act 2

Another way to take advantage of structuring is to also use classes for the lighting instruments. In a situation with
multiple shows in repertory, assign each instrument to the class of the show where it is used. This allows you to display
each shows instruments independently of the other shows.

Creating Lighting Positions

Lighting positions represent the hanging points for instruments; they should be placed on the light plot before the
instruments are added. Lighting positions manage the numbering of instruments according to the instruments location
on the lighting position.

Defining the lighting positions first is useful because once the space has been created, with the stage and lighting
positions defined, the file can be used as a template for future light plots in that space. For more information on creating
templates, see Creating Templates on page 81 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Place the lighting positions in their own design layer and in their own classes. A drawing structure based on layers
and classes facilitates selecting, viewing, and printing the light plot.
Creating lighting positions is generally a two-step process. First, the geometry of the lighting position is inserted or
drawn. Then, the object or geometry is converted into an intelligent lighting position symbol, ready for instrument
placement.
Several different types of objects can be used as the basis for a lighting position symbol:
Lighting pipes
Lighting pipe ladders
Straight trusses
Curved trusses
Custom 2D or 2D/3D geometry that you draw
Once one of these objects has been configured, convert it into an intelligent lighting position symbol with the Convert
to Light Position command. The symbol displays in the Resource Browser. For more information about symbols, see
Understanding Symbols on page 169 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Creating Lighting Positions | 441

Symbols from the current file, the symbol libraries, or a Favorites file can then be inserted with the Light Position Obj
tool.

Placing Lighting Pipe Objects

Insert and configure a lighting pipe object with the Lighting Pipe tool.

To insert a lighting pipe object:

1. Click the Lighting Pipe tool from the Spotlight tool set.
Alternatively, create a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects
from Shapes on page 696).
2. Click in the drawing area to begin drawing the lighting pipe.
If this is the first time a lighting pipe has been placed on the drawing, the Properties dialog box opens. Specify the
preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK.
3. To draw a multi-segment pipe, click to set the end of one segment and start the next.
Create a curved pipe by changing the vertex type (see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide).
4. Double-click to complete the lighting pipe polyline.
The lighting pipe parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Total Pipe Length Specifies the total length of the lighting pipe; for a single-segment lighting pipe,
the length can be edited by changing this value. (Change the segment length or
edit multi-segment pipes with the Reshape tool.)
Arc Radius For single-segment curved pipes, specifies the radius of the arc
Position Name Enter the name to be used for the symbol when converting the pipe to a lighting
position
Location Optionally, specifies the location for use in reports
Pipe
Draw Pipe Shows or hides the 2D component of the lighting pipe
Line Type Select either a single or double line for Top/Plan views
Diameter Sets the pipe diameter for all views
End Marker Specifies whether to display the end(s) of the pipe with an end marker in Top/
Plan view
Tick Mark
Draw Tick Marks Creates evenly-spaced marks to assist with lighting instrument placement
Draw Loci Adds a 2D and 3D locus at the tick mark positions for visibility in 3D views
Centers Specifies the distance between tick mark centers
Centered on Spaces the tick marks based on the total length of the pipe, or based on each
segment of a pipe that is considered divided into two equal sections
442 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Origin Starts the tick mark placement at the center of the pipe or split equally from the
center of the pipe

On Center Split Center

Type Select Line or Dot as the 2D tick mark indicator
Size Specifies the length of line tick marks or the diameter of dot tick marks
Gap Length Adds a gap on either side of the tick mark; specify the gap length
Offset Specify a positive or negative value to shift the tick marks right or left from their
centers
Align Tick Marks to Aligns the center tick mark with the snap grid (see Grid Snapping on page 135
Grid in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); this does not change the tick
mark spacing but it may change the Offset value
Footprint/3D
Show Footprint Creates a 2D projection of the 3D component in Top/Plan view; this is useful if
the lighting pipe is offset or rotated
Align 3D with Footprint When selected, aligns the 3D component and the footprint in 3D views. This is
the default behavior for the hybrid object to appear correctly in both 2D and 3D
views.
Deselecting this option and setting offset and rotation values is useful only for
workflows where a hybrid appearance is not critical; however, lights placed in
one view may not appear positioned correctly in all views.
Origin Offset X/Y Offsets the 3D component from its origin along the X/Y axes
Rotation Rotates the 3D component about its origin
I Rotation Rotates the 3D component along the I axis (parallel to the width)
J Rotation Rotates the 3D component along the J axis (perpendicular to the lighting pipe); a
positive value pivots the pipe up, away from the ground
Classes
Auto-Class Uses the class specified in Settings as the root class for the lighting pipe
components; this root class is automatically set as the prefix for the sub-classes
Pipe Select a class for the lighting pipe to control its fill color and/or texture and
visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a
new class by selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class
named <Lighting Pipe Class> which places the pipe in the same class as the
lighting pipe object (specified in Settings).
Tick Marks Select a class for the tick marks to control their fill color and/or visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Lighting
Pipe Class> which places the tick marks in the same class as the lighting pipe
object (specified in Settings).
 Creating Lighting Positions | 443

Parameter Description
End Marker Select a class for the end markers to control their fill color and/or visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Lighting
Pipe Class> which places the end markers in the same class as the lighting pipe
object (specified in Settings).
Footprint Select a class for the footprint to control its fill color and/or visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named <Lighting
Pipe Class> which places the footprint in the same class as the lighting pipe
object (specified in Settings).
Settings Opens the Lighting Pipe Settings dialog box, to set the default class for the
lighting pipe.

Select the Make default for new documents option to always use the specified
class as the default class for lighting pipe objects in new files.
Vertex Parameters Edits the pipe vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

To use the lighting pipe as a lighting position, convert it to a lighting position symbol; see Creating a Lighting Position
Symbol on page 450.

Placing Lighting Pipe Ladders

Insert and configure a lighting pipe ladder with the Lighting Pipe Ladder tool.

To insert a lighting pipe ladder:

1. Click the Lighting Pipe Ladder tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click in the drawing area to insert the ladder. The ladder is a rectangular object, and can be inserted in Center-line
Placement mode or Edge Placement mode.

Placement Mode Description

Center-line Click once, and then again, to define the width through the center of the
ladder. Click again to specify the width of half the ladder.
Edge Click once, and then again, to define the length along the edge of the ladder.
Click again to specify the grid ladder.

If this is the first time a lighting pipe ladder has been placed on the drawing, the Properties dialog box opens.
Specify the preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK.
The lighting pipe ladder parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
444 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Ladder Width/ Height Specifies the lighting pipe ladder dimensions
Guides Select how to draw the ladder based on the preview guide rectangle: on the
ladder center, inside, or outside
Number of Rungs Specifies the number of ladder rungs
Evenly Spaced Rungs Spaces the rungs evenly within the ladder frame; deselect to specify custom
rung spacing
Custom Rung Spacing Opens the Custom Rung Spacing dialog box, to specify the spacing between
each ladder rung.

Enter the distance between the rungs; the first and final distances are
automatically calculated. Click Calculate Even Spacing to automatically
space the rungs evenly, as a starting point for spacing or to reset the values.
Position Name Enter the name to be used for the symbol when converting the ladder to a
lighting position
Location Optionally, specifies the location for use in reports
Pipe
Draw Pipe Shows or hides the 2D component of the lighting pipe ladder
Line Type Select either a single or double line for Top/Plan views
Diameter Sets the pipe diameter for all views
Tick Mark
Draw Tick Marks Creates evenly-spaced marks to assist with lighting instrument placement
Draw Loci Adds a 2D and 3D locus at the tick mark positions for visibility in 3D views
Centers Specifies the distance between tick mark centers
Centered on Spaces the tick marks based on the total length of one side of the ladder or
based on each portion of one segment of the ladder that is considered divided
into two equal sections
Origin Starts the tick mark placement at the center of one side of the ladder or split
equally from the center of one of the ladder sides

On Center Split Center

Type Select Line or Dot as the 2D tick mark indicator
 Creating Lighting Positions | 445

Parameter Description
Size Specifies the length of line tick marks or the diameter of dot tick marks
Gap Length Adds a gap on either side of the tick mark; specify the gap length
Offset Specify a positive or negative value to shift the tick marks right or left from
their centers
Align Tick Marks to Grid Aligns the center tick mark with the snap grid (see Grid Snapping on
page 135 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); this does not
change the tick mark spacing but it may change the Offset value
Footprint/3D
Show Footprint Creates a 2D projection of the 3D component in Top/Plan view; this is useful
if the lighting pipe ladder is offset or rotated
Align 3D with Footprint When selected, aligns the 3D component and the footprint in 3D views. This
is the default behavior for the hybrid object to appear correctly in both 2D and
3D views.
Deselecting this option and setting offset and rotation values is useful only for
workflows where a hybrid appearance is not critical; however, lights placed
in one view may not appear positioned correctly in all views.
Origin Offset X/Y Offsets the 3D component from its origin along the X/Y axes
Rotation Rotates the 3D component about its origin
I Rotation Rotates the 3D component along the I axis (parallel to the width)
J Rotation Rotates the 3D component along the J axis (perpendicular to the lighting pipe
ladder); a positive value pivots the ladder up, away from the ground
Classes
Auto-Class Uses the class specified in Settings as the root class for the lighting pipe
ladder components; this root class is automatically set as the prefix for the
sub-classes
Pipe Select a class for the lighting pipe ladder to control its fill color and/or texture
and visibility. The classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively,
create a new class by selecting New, select the default class name, or select
the class named <Lighting Pipe Ladder Class> which places the pipe in the
same class as the lighting pipe ladder object (specified in Settings).
Tick Marks Select a class for the tick marks to control their fill color and/or visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named
<Lighting Pipe Ladder Class> which places the tick marks in the same class
as the lighting pipe ladder object (specified in Settings).
Footprint Select a class for the footprint to control its fill color and/or visibility. The
classes present in the drawing are listed; alternatively, create a new class by
selecting New, select the default class name, or select the class named
<Lighting Pipe Ladder Class> which places the footprint in the same class as
the lighting pipe ladder object (specified in Settings).
446 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Settings Opens the Lighting Pipe Settings dialog box, to set the default class for the
lighting pipe ladder.

Select the Make default for new documents option to always use the
specified class as the default class for lighting pipe ladder objects in new files

To use the lighting pipe ladder as a lighting position, convert it to a lighting position symbol; see Creating a Lighting
Position Symbol on page 450).

Inserting a Straight Truss

Straight truss parameters are illustrated by the following diagram.
Truss length Incomplete connection Width
Connection interval interval (red)

Chord
Height
Lacing

Straight truss Ladder bar

Left view straight
truss

Straight folding truss Ladder bar spacing

To add a straight truss to the light plot:

1. Click the Straight Truss tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click in the drawing area where the truss will be located and draw a line to indicate the length of the truss.

Click 2

Click 1

Trusses are 2D/3D hybrid objects. Complex trusses can increase the time required to render the model in 3D.
The straight truss properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
 Creating Lighting Positions | 447

Parameter Description
Length Specifies the length of the truss in drawing units
Profile Select the truss profile from the list
Connection Select the type of connection from the list
Connection Interval Indicates the distance for dividing the truss into component sections
Folding Select to indicate a folding truss
Pre Rigged Select whether to include a light bar
Height/Width Shows height and width values for the truss
Chord Profile Select round or square chord tubing
Chord Width Shows the diameter of round chords or the width of square chords
Ladder Bar Spacing Specifies the interval of the ladder bars
Ladder Bar Profile Select round or square ladder bar tubing
Top/Side Ladder Bar Indicates the diameter of the top and side ladder bar tubing; enter 0 to draw
Diameter no ladder bar
Lacing Profile Select round or square lacing tubing
Top/Side Lacing Indicates the diameter of the top and side lacing tubing. Enter 0 to draw no
Diameter lacing.
Hanging Angle Indicates the angle of the truss between the stage or floor and the hanging
point
Rotation Specifies the rotation about the truss axis
Show 3D Detail Select to render the truss with greater 3D detail
Highlight Displays odd sized truss divisions in red
Message Provides information about the truss placement and indicates successful
placement

A connection interval shorter than the defined interval length is displayed in red when Highlight is selected.
To use the truss as a lighting position, convert it to a lighting position symbol; see Creating a Lighting Position
Symbol on page 450).

Inserting a Curved Truss

Curved truss parameters are illustrated by the following diagram.
448 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Chord

Ladder
spacing arc

Segment arc Lacing

Ladder bar

Curved Truss

To add a curved truss to the light plot:

1. Click the Curved Truss tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click to define the truss insertion point. Click again to set the rotation of the curved truss.
Trusses are 2D/3D hybrid objects. Complex trusses can increase the time required to render the model in 3D.
The curved truss properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Radius Specifies the radius of the truss measured from the truss center line
Total Arc Indicates the total angle covered by the truss in degrees
Segment Arc Specifies the interval in degrees for dividing the truss into component sections
Connection Select the type of connection from the list
Profile Select the truss profile from the list
Height/Width Shows height and width values for the truss
Chord Profile Select round or square chord tubing
Chord Width Specifies the diameter of round chords or the width of square chords
Ladder Spacing Arc Specifies the interval of the ladder bars in degrees
Ladder Profile Select round or square ladder bar tubing
Top/Side Ladder Bar Specifies the diameter of the top and side ladder bar tubing. Enter 0 to draw no
Diameter ladder bar.
Lacing Profile Select round or square lacing tubing
Top/Side Lacing Specifies the diameter of the top and side lacing tubing. Enter 0 to draw no
Diameter lacing.
Show 3D Detail Select to render the truss with greater 3D detail
Highlight Displays odd sized truss divisions in red
Message Provides information about the truss placement and indicates successful
placement
Draw 3D only Select to display only the 3D component of the truss
 Creating Lighting Positions | 449

If the final segment of a truss is shorter than the defined interval length, it is displayed in red when Highlight is
selected.
To use the truss as a lighting position, convert it to a lighting position symbol; see Creating a Lighting Position
Symbol on page 450).

Rotating a Curved Truss

A curved truss can be rotated with the Rotate tool.
To rotate a curved truss:
1. Select the truss. In the Object Info palette, select Draw 3D Only.
2. Click the Rotate tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click to set a fulcrum line; click to end. Move the cursor to rotate the truss, and then click to set the rotation.

Truss Configuration Requirements

A great deal of flexibility is incorporated in the Spotlight truss object. However, in order to create a valid truss, the
wide variety of configurations leads to certain restrictions in the application of truss properties.

Truss Requirements
The width and height of the truss must be greater than three times the chord width
The truss hanging angle must be between -90 and +90
A triangular truss must form a valid triangle
The chord diameter must be greater than zero
A pre-rigged truss cannot have lacing
A pre-rigged truss cannot be folding
Only box trusses can be pre-rigged
A folding truss cannot have top lacing
Folding is not allowed on a stacking truss
Top lacing is not allowed on a stacking truss
The top brace diameter must be less than or equal to the chord width
The side brace diameter must be less than or equal to the chord width
The connection interval must be greater than the ladder bar spacing
Ladder bar spacing must be greater than three times the top brace size
If the section is too small, lacing may not be drawn

If a truss is drawn that does not meet these requirements, an alert message is generated.
450 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Creating a Lighting Position Symbol

As described in Creating Lighting Positions on page 440, lighting position geometry can be created by placing one of
the Spotlight lighting pipe, ladder, or truss tools. You can also create your own geometry for conversion. At a
minimum, a lighting position symbol requires at least a 2D component; it also requires a 3D component to display
correctly in 3D views. For more information on symbols, see Understanding Symbols on page 169 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
When the configured lighting position geometry has been placed in the drawing, convert it to a lighting position
symbol. Not only does at become a lighting position symbol on the drawing, it also displays in the Resource Browser,
where it can easily be inserted into the drawing again, or it can be referenced or exported to other files.
To convert lighting position geometry to a lighting position symbol:
1. Select the geometry.
If multiple objects are to be converted to a single lighting position, group the objects first by selecting Modify >
Group.
2. Select Spotlight > Object Conversion > Convert to Light Position.
3. The Enter String dialog box opens; specify the name of the lighting position, and then click OK.
The selected object is converted to a lighting position symbol that remains inserted in the drawing. (If multiple
items were selected for conversion, each object is converted one at a time.) Instruments can then be placed on the
lighting position.
Select the lighting position from the Resource Browser as an active symbol definition and use the Light Position
Obj tool to insert it again if required (see Inserting Lighting Positions on page 450).

Inserting Lighting Positions

Insert a lighting position symbol from the Resource Browser with the Light Position Obj tool. This can be a symbol
that you have created (see Creating Lighting Positions on page 440), or it can be one of the symbols imported from
the libraries included with the Vectorworks Spotlight software ([Vectorworks]\Libraries); see Libraries on page 155
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

To insert a lighting position symbol:

1. Click the Light Position Obj tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Select the desired lighting position symbol from the Resource Browser and choose Make Active from the
Resources menu to make it the active symbol definition. Alternatively, double-click on the symbol to activate it.
3. Click in the drawing to insert the active lighting position symbol definition, and then click again to set the lighting
position rotation.
If the lighting position symbol is inserted without first clicking on the Light Position Obj tool, the symbol is
inserted by the Symbol Insertion tool. However, the lighting position functionality will not be present. When
correctly inserted, the Object Info palette displays Light Position Obj for the selected lighting position.
Once the Light Position Obj tool has been selected, it remains selected by default so that lighting positions can be
repeatedly inserted. To place non-lighting position symbols after placing lighting positions, switch to the Symbol
Insertion tool.
 Setting Up Instrument Label Legends | 451

4. A different type of lighting position can be placed by changing the active symbol definition and continuing to use
the Light Position Obj tool.
The lighting position object parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Z (Height) For 3D lighting positions, specifies the height
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the lighting position
Position Name Specifies the name of lighting position symbol
Location Optionally, specifies the location for use in reports
Show Name Displays the Position Name on the drawing
Insert Position Inserts an instrument summary, filtered for the current lighting position; see
Summary Creating an Instrument Summary for a Lighting Position on page 531
Starting Number Specifies the starting number for instrument auto-numbering
Increment Specifies the increment for auto-numbering instruments
Numbering Specifies the page relative numbering direction
Direction
Multi Circ Num Specifies the multi-circuit numbering format for multi-circuit instruments:
Style AlphaNum: Numbers the multicircuit instruments with A1, A2, A3...
Num.Alpha: Numbers the multicircuit instruments with 1.A, 1.B, 1.C...
Num.Num: Numbers the multicircuit instruments with 1.1, 1.2, 1.3...
Auto Number Select to automatically number instruments and multi-circuit instruments on
the lighting position; see Instrument Numbering on page 467
Symbol Name For reference, displays the name of the symbol used to create the lighting
position

The Z value of a lighting position can only be specified for lighting positions with 3D geometry. However, the Z
value can be specified for the lighting instruments placed on any type of lighting position (2D, 3D, or hybrid). A
lighting position created from a symbol or plug-in object automatically assumes the Z value of the original object.
If a lighting position is copied, it is automatically renamed; any associated duplicated lighting instruments are
associated with the new lighting position. Deleting a lighting position does not delete the associated lighting
instruments.
If instruments are moved to a different lighting position, the lighting position name is automatically updated for
the instruments and the Z-height of the instruments is calculated automatically based on the lighting position
Z-height.

Setting Up Instrument Label Legends

Label legends specify the labels and label formatting for lighting instruments on the light plot. Multiple label legends
can be defined and then selectively applied to different instruments. The active label legend is applied to instruments as
they are placed, or a label legend can be selected for existing instruments from the Object Info palette. Label legends
are 2D screen plane objects. (See Planar Modes of 2D Objects: Screen Plane and Layer Plane on page 201 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
452 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Label Classes
Each label is automatically placed in its own Label class. This allows the labels to be globally turned on and off. For
example, if the designer is printing the light plot for an electrician, the Label-Purpose class of labels can be hidden so
that only electrical information labels are shown.
The labels display the lighting instrument object information. The instrument Object Info palette also shows this
information (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 459).

Using the Label Legend Manager

The Label Legend Manager controls the setup and modification of the instrument label styles. Select Spotlight > Label
Legend > Label Legend Manager to set up the legends for the light plot. The Label Legend Manager dialog box
opens.

Parameter Description
Active To activate the default legend for lighting instruments, select the label legend
and click in the Active column. The active legend is indicated with a check
mark.
Any new instruments created will use the active legend as the default label
legend; the legend name is displayed in the instrument Object Info palette,
and can be changed at any time (see Changing the Instrument Label Legend
on page 470).
Legend Name Lists the files current legends
Add Creates a new label legend and specifies the labels to include, as well as their
attributes (see Creating Label Legends on page 452)
Remove Deletes the selected label legend; the active label legend cannot be removed
Edit Fields Edits the labels included in the selected legend, along with their attributes
(see Editing Label Legends on page 454)
Edit Layout Specifies the position of the labels in relation to an instrument (see
Formatting the Label Legend on page 455)

Creating Label Legends

To create a new legend:
1. In the Label Legend Manager dialog box, click Add.
The Add New Legend dialog box opens. Select the labels for placement and specify their attributes. Indicate the
instrument symbol to use when formatting the label legend, and select whether the legend rotates with the
instrument.
 Setting Up Instrument Label Legends | 453

Parameter Description
Legend Name Provide a name for the new legend by typing it in the Legend Name field. A
name must be entered before closing the dialog box.
Attributes
Use Click to select an item to appear in the label legend. A check mark indicates
the label is included. Click again to remove the label from use.
Attribute Lists the possible labels that can be selected for inclusion in the label legend
Right Reading For each label, select whether it will always be right-reading or allowed to
rotate with the instrument. A check mark indicates the field is right-reading;
deselect to allow the field to rotate with the instrument.

Right Reading selected Right Reading deselected

Container Type Select the container for each label by clicking in the Container field until the
desired container is displayed.
Lighting Instrument Specifies a symbol to use for label placement when editing the label layout
Layout Symbol (see Formatting the Label Legend on page 455); by default, the active
symbol is selected. Click Choose to open the Choose an Instrument Symbol
dialog box, where a different symbol can be selected from the current files
resources.
454 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Non-Rotating Specifies whether the label legend rotates with the instrument, or remains
stationary as the instrument rotates

Non-Rotating deselected Non-Rotating selected

Custom container symbols can be added to the list of available containers. Draw a container object, and then click
Modify > Create Symbol. Enter a name for the container; click OK. In the Move Symbol dialog box, specify the
location of the Containers folder and click OK. The symbol is added to the list of available containers. Any
symbol can be placed in the containers folder and used as a label container. The pre-defined container symbols can
also be edited and customized.
Container attributes can be determined by the label text or lighting device; see Lighting Device Setup on
page 18
2. When all the label items and attributes have been specified for the legend, click OK. The new legend name
displays in the Legend Name list in the Label Legend Manager dialog box.
3. Once the legend has been created, it needs to be formatted. See Formatting the Label Legend on page 455.

Editing Label Legends

To edit a legend:
1. In the Label Legend Manager dialog box, select the legend, and then click Edit Fields. The Edit Label Legend
dialog box opens. See Creating Label Legends on page 452 for a description of the legend parameters.
To identify which legend needs to be edited before opening the Label Legend Manager, Right-click (Windows) or
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the lighting device and select Locate Label Legend in Resource Browser from the
context menu.

The legend name displays at the top of the dialog box, and cannot be changed from here.
 Setting Up Instrument Label Legends | 455

To rename a label legend, locate it in the Resource Browser in the Label Legends folder of the current file
(navigate there manually or use the Locate Label Legend in Resource Browser context menu command). When
the label legend is highlighted, Right click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Rename from the
Resources menu. (Any existing instruments that use the old legend name will lose their labels.)
2. The currently selected label items have a check mark next to the label name. Select any additional label items to
appear in the legend by clicking in the Use column. To deselect a label item, click the associated check mark in the
Use column; the check mark is removed.
3. Lighting Instrument Layout Symbol displays the name of the symbol currently used in the label legend. To use a
different symbol, click Choose to open the Choose an Instrument Symbol dialog box. Select a new reference
symbol from the resources present in the drawing and click OK.
When you change the instruments reference symbol, the symbols appearance on the drawing will not change.
However, the change will be reflected within the label legend; the name shown on the Edit Label Legend dialog
box will update, as will the appearance of the symbol in the layout editor (see Formatting the Label Legend on
page 455).
4. Click OK.

Formatting the Label Legend

Once a legend has been created, format it so that the labels are displayed in specific positions. The labels, containers,
and layout symbol are selected when creating the label legend; see Creating Label Legends on page 452.
To format the label legend:
1. In the Label Legend Manager dialog box, select the legend, and then click Edit Layout.
Alternatively, Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a lighting device and select Locate Label
Legend in Resource Browser from the context menu. The label legend associated with that lighting device is
highlighted in the Resource Browser. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the highlighted label
legend, and select Edit from the context menu. The Edit Symbol dialog box opens. Select 2D Component and
click Edit. (See Editing Symbol Definitions on page 181 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for
additional information about the Edit Symbol dialog box.)
The Edit Symbol window opens, where the default position and format of the labels is specified for instruments
that use this label legend. The name of the current label legend is displayed at the top of the Edit Symbol window.
The instrument used for the layout is either the symbol selected in Lighting Instrument Layout Symbol or the
active symbol at the time the legend was created.
456 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Name of legend
currently being
edited

Labels available
for instrument

Drag labels
into position

2. The labels selected for the legend display to the left of the instrument diagram. Drag each label to its position on or
around the instrument. The labels formatting can be set by selecting the label, and then using the Object Info
palette or the Text menu to select the labels font, size, style, and justification. The label stacking order can be
changed with the Modify > Send commands; the instrument is part of the stacking order. Change the color of the
label by selecting it and applying a solid pen color from the Attributes palette.
If necessary, the labels placed outside the bounding box of the instrument are adjusted so they are always placed at
an absolute distance from the instrument. For example, a label placed six inches in front of an instrument always
appears six inches in front of any instrument to which the label is applied. The position of a label placed upon an
instrument is scaled so it is in the same relative position whether the instrument is larger or smaller than the one
used for formatting. A label placed at the center of the instrument is always at the center.
3. When the labels are set, click Exit Symbol in the upper right corner of the window to return to the drawing. The
formatting and position of the labels applies to all instruments that use this legend.

Repositioning Labels
Labels should normally be repositioned through the Label Legend Manager. On a complex light plot, however, a label
can be hidden by the nearest object. If that occurs, click on the instrument to select it, and then click on the instrument
label control point, located at the center of the label, with the Selection tool. Drag the label to another location. This
one-time repositioning does not affect the label legend.

Label control point

Fresnel color information obscured Fresnel color information now visible

by other lighting instrument
 Adding Lighting Instruments | 457

Creating a Label Legend from an Existing Instrument

If labels have been repositioned and the arrangement is suitable to use as a label legend for other instruments, you can
create a new label legend from a selected lighting instruments legend. The current label arrangement and instrument
rotation are used for the new label legend.
To create a label legend based on an existing instrument:
1. Select the lighting instrument. The instrument must already have a label legend attached.
2. Select Spotlight > Label Legend > Create Label Legend from Lighting Device.
3. Provide a unique name for the new label legend.
By default, the instruments existing label legend is appended with a -1 (or with the next available number) as a
suggested name.
4. Click OK.
The new label legend is created, and it is automatically assigned to the selected instrument. The instrument
specified in Symbol Name in the Object Info palette of the selected instrument becomes the representative
lighting device for the label legend.

Importing Label Legends from Another File

Label legends from another file created with the Vectorworks Spotlight product can be imported into the current file.
Import the Label Legends symbol folder contents from the original file into the new file with the Import command in
the Resource Browser; place the legends into the Legends folder. The imported label legends are listed in the Label
Legend Manager. See Importing a Symbol or Symbol Folder on page 186 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.

Adding Lighting Instruments

Instruments can be inserted from the thousands of symbols provided in symbol libraries, or created as custom symbols
that you convert into lighting instruments.
In the Resource Browser, either select one of the lighting symbols from the symbol libraries or one of the symbols
you have created in this file or a Favorites file. Insert the symbol with the Inst Insertion tool to place a lighting
instrument object on the light plot. This method is described in Inserting Instruments on page 458.
Convert custom geometry to a lighting instrument. This method is described in Creating a Lighting Instrument
Symbol on page 457.
The instrument symbols from the libraries included with the Vectorworks Spotlight product contain all the
required attribute information. When creating or using your own symbols with the Vectorworks Spotlight product,
see Lighting Instrument Specifications on page 985.
An existing lighting instrument with specific parameters can be saved as a red symbol.

Creating a Lighting Instrument Symbol

The Vectorworks Spotlight product provides hundreds of lighting symbols; however, it is not necessary to use only
these pre-defined symbols. Create a Spotlight instrument out of a currently selected symbolonce the symbol is
converted to an instrument, the instrument functionality is present and the label legend is attached.
See Lighting Instrument Specifications on page 985 for more information and restrictions on using custom
symbols for lighting instruments, and information on attaching the Light Info Record.
To create a lighting instrument:
1. Convert the object to a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol.
458 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Symbols can have a separate 2D and 3D representation.The lighting instrument object automatically uses the
appropriate portion of the symbol. At a minimum, the symbol must have at least a 2D component; it also requires
a 3D component to display correctly in 3D views. For information on symbols, see Creating New Symbols on
page 172 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Select the symbol(s).
3. Select Spotlight > Object Conversion > Convert to Instrument.
The selected symbol(s) is converted into a lighting instrument that remains inserted in the drawing. The active
label legend, if any, is applied to the instrument(s); see Using the Label Legend Manager on page 452 for more
information. The instrument properties can be changed through the Object Info palette; some of the instrument
parameters may need to be entered.
If creating multi-circuit instruments, first create each instruments symbol (see Multi-circuit Instrument
Specifications on page 989). Then insert the multi-circuit instruments as described in Inserting Multi-circuit
Instruments on page 473.
Select the instrument from the Resource Browser as an active symbol definition and use the Inst Insertion tool to
insert again if required (seeInserting Instruments on page 458).

Creating a Preformatted Lighting Resource

Any instrument that has been inserted from a library or converted from a symbol can be saved as a red symbol. Its
appropriate default values are retained, and when inserted from the Resource Browser, the instrument picks up the
lighting position and active label legend. For more information on red symbols, see Symbol Types on page 170 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To create a lighting instrument resource with pre-defined parameters:
1. Select a current instrument and ensure that all its parameters have been specified as desired.
In the Object Info palette, set the Use Legend parameter to None and delete the lighting position (Position
parameter). Set the Z height of the instrument to 0.
Set a label legend name to use a specific label legend, rather than the current one, upon insertion. If the label
legend is not in the file at the time of symbol insertion, it is automatically imported.
2. With the instrument selected, select Modify > Create Symbol.
The Create Symbol dialog box opens. Provide a name for the new symbol. For information on symbols, see
Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
3. Select Convert to Plug-in Object, and then click OK.
4. Click OK to create the symbol.
If the Move dialog box opens, specify the location of the resource.
5. The lighting symbol is saved in the Resource Browser as a red symbol. When the symbol is inserted, it functions
as a plug-in object and the saved parameters are retained.

Inserting Instruments
Existing instrument symbols are inserted with the Inst Insertion tool. This can be a symbol that you have created,
located in a Favorites file or the current file, or it can be one of the symbols imported from the libraries included with
the Vectorworks Spotlight software ([Vectorworks]\Libraries); see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide. When the Vectorworks Spotlight product is installed, lighting instrument symbols are also
provided as default content. Default content is automatically imported into the file and displays in the Resource
Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Editing Lighting Instruments | 459

For information on importing symbols, see Accessing Existing Resources on page 162 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.

To insert a lighting instrument:

1. From the Resource Browser, double-click on the instrument symbol to insert. This automatically activates the
symbol and selects the Inst Insertion tool from the Spotlight tool set.
Alternatively, select the instrument symbol from the Resource Browser and choose Make Active from the
Resources menu to make it the active symbol definition. The Inst Insertion tool is automatically selected.
2. Click once to insert the active instrument symbol definition, and then again to determine the instrument rotation.
By default, the active Label Legend is applied to the instrument.

If an instrument symbol is accidentally inserted by the Symbol Insertion tool, the instrument functionality will
not be present. When correctly inserted, the Object Info palette displays Lighting Device for the selected
instrument.
Once the Inst Insertion tool has been selected, it remains selected by default so that instruments can be repeatedly
inserted.
3. Place instruments on a lighting position to add them to that lighting position and allow auto-numbering. A
different type of instrument can be placed by double-clicking on another instrument symbol definition and
continuing to use the Inst Insertion tool.
Once instruments have been inserted, they continue to automatically associate with the nearest lighting position
within a specified Pick Radius set in the Spotlight preferences (see Spotlight Setup on page 18). To avoid
instruments changing their lighting position association as they are moved, disable automatic positioning.

Editing Lighting Instruments

Once lighting instruments have been inserted (normally, on a lighting position), many of the parameters of one or more
selected instruments can be changed from the Object Info palette and Lighting Device dialog box, and the color,
numbering, alignment, and other options can be controlled.
To select all lighting instruments focused on a particular focus point, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on the focus point and select Select Focused Lighting Devices from the context menu. The focus
point and any other selected objects are deselected automatically to facilitate faster editing of the lighting
instrument(s).

Lighting Instrument Properties

The instrument (lighting device) parameters can be viewed and edited in the Object Info palette.
The parameters that display on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette depend on the settings made in Spotlight
preferences; see Specifying Lighting Device Parameter Display on page 21.
Double-click on an instrument, or click Edit from the Object Info palette or the context menu of one or more selected
instruments. The Lighting Device dialog box opens, facilitating instrument parameter modifications; see Changing
Instrument Properties on page 462. Advanced light properties, which include turning the associated light source on,
460 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

are available by editing the light source embedded within the instrument; see Advanced Light Properties on
page 466.
For a custom instrument symbol without an information record attached, enter the required instrument object
parameters (see Attaching the Light Info Record and Light Info Record M on page 988). An entry is not required for
every field.

Parameter Description
XYZ/IJK Changes the instruments location and rotation; the instrument labels rotate with the
Location/ instrument unless Right Reading was selected in the Label Legend Manager (see
Rotation Formatting the Label Legend on page 455). In a 3D view, if an instrument is associated
with a focus point, the instrument, along with any accessories, rotates automatically so that it
points to the focus point.
Edit Opens the Lighting Device dialog box, for editing instrument parameters of one or more
lighting instruments; see Changing Instrument Properties on page 462
Device Type Displays the type of object that is selected; normally, instruments are Light device types
(Device, Practical, SFX, Power, and Other are also considered Light types). Accessories such
as color frames, barn doors, and top hats are Static Accessory types; accessories that require a
control channel, such as color scrollers, are Accessory types.
Inst. Type Displays the specific type of lighting instrument
Wattage Indicates the power consumed by the instrument
Purpose Specifies the purpose for using
Position Displays the name of the lighting position
Unit Number Identifies the instrument location on the lighting position
Color Specifies the gel color number according to manufacturer code, RGB values, color name
from the file, or web (hex) codes; when the light associated with the instrument is turned on,
Color specifies the actual light color. Use + between color numbers to indicate combinations
of two or more colors. See Lighting Instrument Color on page 466
The color setting can affect the display of the lighting device color, depending on the
Spotlight preferences. See Lighting Device Setup on page 18
Dimmer Specifies the dimmer or DMX address number of the instrument
Channel Specifies the channel number of the instrument
Universe Indicates the DMX group of the dimmer; this is set automatically if the Spotlight file is set up
to assign the universe. See Universe Assignment in Vectorworks Spotlight on page 23
U Dimmer When the universe is automatically assigned, displays the dimmer number assigned within
the universe
Circuit Number Indicates the circuit number where instrument is plugged in
Circuit Name Specifies the name of bundled circuit group
System Specifies the letter describing the control system (Lightwright-compatible parameter)
User Field 1 6 Provides user-defined fields; use these extra fields to keep track of any desired data (see
Specifying Lighting Device Parameter Display on page 21)
Num Channels Identifies the number of control channels used by the instrument
Frame Size Indicates the dimensions of the color cut
 Editing Lighting Instruments | 461

Parameter Description
Field Angle Sets the field angle of the instrument
Field Angle 2 Specifies the second field angle for an elliptical light source
Beam Angle Sets the beam angle of the instrument
Beam Angle 2 Specifies the second beam angle for an elliptical light source
Weight Specifies the instrument weight
Gobo 1 Indicates the gobo texture number for the first gobo
Specifying the gobo texture by clicking Edit in the Object Info palette provides a
graphical method of selecting textures from the default content (see Changing
Instrument Properties on page 462)
Gobo 1 Rotation Sets the rotation angle of gobo texture 1
Gobo 2 Indicates the gobo texture number for the second gobo
Gobo 2 Rotation Sets the rotation angle of gobo texture 2
Gobo Shift Adjusts the position of the instrument gobos to the front or rear
Mark Provides a user-defined label (Lightwright-compatible parameter)
Draw Beam Select to draw an accurate wireframe representation of the light beam; the light beam is
drawn based on the instrument parameters, and can be used to check whether the stage and
focus areas have been adequately lit (see Drawing Light Beam Representations on
page 479)
Draw Beam as Generates a light beam that appears solid when rendered
3D Solid
Use Vertical By default, draws the wireframe beam in a vertical orientation when possible, when either
Beam (Focus Draw Beam or Draw Beam as 3D Solid is selected. When deselected, the beam is usually
Point required) drawn in a horizontal orientation.
Show Beam at In a 2D view, select whether to draw the beam as it crosses the focus point, at the falloff
distance as projected through the focus point, or in both areas
Replace with Replaces the selected instrument with the current active symbol (see Replacing
Active Symbol Instruments on page 469)
Refresh Labels Refreshes instrument labels if label changes have been made
Falloff distance Specifies how far the wireframe light beam is drawn beyond the focus point; the Focus
Instruments command sets this value to the distance between the focus point object and 0
Lamp Rotation Indicates the rotation angle of the virtual elliptical light source, from 0 to 90
Angle
Shutter Controls the angle and depth of top, left, right, and bottom shutter cuts. Each shutter is
parameters located at 90 intervals around the lighting instrument, and can be adjusted +/- 45. The
shutter depth ranges from 0 to 100%, with 100% cutting through the center of the light
source.
Symbol Name Displays the name of the symbol used to create the instrument
Use Legend Select the label legend to apply from the list of label legends in the file (see Using the Label
Legend Manager on page 452)
462 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Focus Specifies the focus point for the lighting instrument. The focus point must be defined first
(see Focusing Instruments on page 477).
Set 3D Specifies the X/Y position of the instrument at the hanging point, for 3D views only
Orientation

For instruments and accessories, do not provide a name on the Data tab. The instrument or accessory Unique ID
Number (UID) is automatically entered and must be used as the instrument or accessory name.

Changing Instrument Properties

To edit the properties of a lighting instrument:
1. Select one or more lighting instruments.
2. From the Object Info palette or the context menu, select Edit, or simply double-click a single instrument selection.
The Lighting Device dialog box opens. The lighting device parameters are described in Lighting Instrument
Properties on page 459. Only the parameters which are different are described here.

Parameter Description
Position Lists the lighting positions in the file; select one for the lighting instrument, or select the
ellipsis (...) to create a new lighting position name
If a new position is named, a lighting position of that name must then be created in
the file
 Editing Lighting Instruments | 463

Parameter Description
Color Specifies the gel color number according to manufacturer code, RGB values, color name
from the file, web (hex) codes, color combination, or the color selected from the color
box (see Applying Colors on page 540 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide). The selected color is added to the files active document color palette, and can be
specified for a selected lighting device by its name.
When the light associated with the instrument is turned on, Color specifies the actual
light color (see Lighting Instrument Color on page 466).
The color setting can affect the display of the lighting device color, depending on the
Spotlight preferences. See Lighting Device Setup on page 18.
Focus Lists the focus points in the file; select one for the lighting instrument, or select the
ellipsis (...) to create a new focus point name
If a new focus point is named, a focus point of that name must then be created in the
file
Use Legend Select the label legend to apply from the list of label legends in the file (see Using the
Label Legend Manager on page 452)
Symbol Lists the instrument symbols from the current files resources; select a different symbol
Name for the lighting instrument from the resources imported into the file
Get Opens the Import External Resource dialog box; select an instrument symbol from either
Resource the default content or the current files content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Previous/ When more than one instrument is selected, displays the parameters of the previous or
Next next instrument in the selection
Apply to All When more than one instrument is selected, and the parameters of the first instrument in
the selection are displayed, applies only the parameters that have been modified to all the
instruments in the selection

3. Click the Light Information tab.

464 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Get Data from Obtains the light information from the Light Info record attached to the symbol
Symbol definition
Get Resource Opens the Import External Resource dialog box; select a gobo texture symbol
from either the default content or the current files content (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Inserting Gobo
Projections on page 541)

4. Click the Shutters tab to set the shutter cut information.

 Editing Lighting Instruments | 465

Specify the depth and angles for the top, left, right, and/or bottom shutters. Each shutter is located at 90 intervals
around the lighting instrument, and can be adjusted +/- 45. The shutter depth ranges from 0 to 100%, with 100%
cutting through the center of the light source.
5. Click the User Data tab to edit user field value information.

User data fields and any default values display here and the default values can be edited by selecting a field name
and entering the new value in Value.
6. Click OK to apply the changes to the selection.
466 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

The properties of one or more selected instruments or objects can also be edited from the Shape tab of the Object Info
palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 459).
A selected instrument or a selection of instruments can be cut, copied, and pasted with the Edit menu commands. See
Editing Objects on page 247 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on the basic
editing commands.

Advanced Light Properties

More advanced control over the lighting instrument properties is possible by editing the light source embedded within
the instrument. Turn the lighting instrument on and off by editing the embedded light.
To edit the embedded light source:
1. Select the lighting instrument(s).
2. From the lighting instrument context menu, select Edit Light.
The Light Properties dialog box opens. These parameters offer full control over the light source, and are described
in Light Source Properties on page 649 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. The Renderworks
product is required for certain parameters.
Various light parameters are disabled, because they are controlled by the lighting device object instead.
Select a light Kind of Custom to associate a light distribution file with the light. Note that light distribution files
and theatrical lighting manufacturers may not specify output in the same way.
3. To enable the light properties, turn the light on in the Properties dialog box or from the Visualization palette, or
right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the instrument and select Turn On from the context menu.

Lighting Instrument Color

The gel color of a lighting instrument is specified by the Color parameter in the Object Info palette or Lighting Device
dialog box. Define the color by one of these methods.
RGB values separated by commas (such as 191, 49, 26); values must be between 0 and 255
Manufacturer color codes, by manufacturer name or abbreviation and color number (such as Gam 650, G 650,
G-650, or G650)
Name of the color as specified in the files color palettes (see Applying Colors on page 540 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide)
Web hex values prefixed by the pound sign (such as #003366)
Combinations of two or more colors (such as R46+R10); the resultant calculated color combination displays, just
as when combining actual color filters. Invalid single colors are treated as white when calculating color
combinations.
Acceptable manufacturer names and abbreviations are shown in the following table.

Manufacturer Product Name Abbreviation

Rosco Roscolux R, X
Rosco Supergel R, S, RS
Rosco E-Color E, RE
Rosco CalColor R, RC
Rosco Cinegel R, RCG
 Editing Lighting Instruments | 467

Manufacturer Product Name Abbreviation

Rosco Cinelux R, RCL
Rosco Storaro R, RSO
Lee Filter Lee L
Gam Gam G
Apollo Apollo A, AP
GoboMan GoboMan GM

To draw a colored light beam for the lighting instrument, see Drawing Light Beam Representations on page 479.

The color setting can affect the display of the lighting device color, depending on the Spotlight preferences. See
Lighting Device Setup on page 18.

Instrument Numbering
Instruments can be numbered automatically according to lighting position order, or manually according to specified
settings.

Numbering Instruments Automatically

Instruments can numbered according to the lighting position automatic numbering parameters (see Inserting Lighting
Positions on page 450).
To automatically number the instruments on a lighting position:
1. Select the lighting position.
2. From the Object Info palette, specify the Starting Number, Increment, Numbering Direction, and, for
multi-circuit instruments, the Multi Circ Num Style.
3. Click Auto Number.
The instruments are automatically numbered. The Unit Number in the Object Info palette of a selected lighting
instrument displays its number, which can be changed to override the automatic number.
To display the numbers on the drawing, specify a label legend that includes the Unit Number in the label. See
Setting Up Instrument Label Legends on page 451.
To automatically number all instruments assigned to a lighting position:
Select Spotlight > Auto Number Positions to globally automatically number the lighting instruments in the
drawing based on the settings in each lighting position.
If lighting positions are selected when the command is activated, only the instruments on the selected lighting
positions are numbered.
468 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Numbering Instruments Manually

Instruments do not have to be numbered according to the lighting positions automatic numbering feature. The
Number Instruments command provides a method of numbering instruments by unit number and other parameters
that automatically increment. In addition, the command can automatically increment several other instrument
parameter fields.

Numbering Selected Instruments

To number selected instruments manually:
1. Select the instrument(s) to be numbered.
2. Select Spotlight > Number Instruments.
The Number Instruments dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Field Name Select the field name to automatically increment
Universe is not available when automatic universe assignment is enabled; see
Universe Assignment in Vectorworks Spotlight on page 23.
Prefix/Start#/ Specify a prefix for the numbering if desired, the starting number, an optional
Suffix/ suffix, and the increment value. For example, a Starting Number of 2, Increment
Increment of 2, and Suffix of A numbers the instruments as follows: 2A, 4A, 6A, and so on.
Use # Chans Instead of specifying a constant increment value, the increment can be based on the
number of channels assigned to the instrument
Direction The numbering direction is relative to the page; click the desired numbering
direction. Select Manual to number the instruments by clicking, instead of by
selection; see Numbering Instruments by Clicking on page 468.
Multi-circuit Select the numbering format for multi-circuit instrument numbering; these items
Numbering are identical to the selections made when specifying automatically numbering for
multi-circuit instruments (see Inserting Lighting Positions on page 450)

3. Click OK.
The selected instruments are numbered, and any fields automatically specified, in the selected direction.

Numbering Instruments by Clicking

To number instruments manually in the order they are selected:
1. Select Spotlight > Number Instruments.
 Editing Lighting Instruments | 469

2. Specify the field and numbering parameters as described in Numbering Selected Instruments on page 468.
3. In the Direction list, select Manual (the manual direction is selected automatically if no instruments were
selected).
4. Click OK, and click the instruments to be numbered one by one. To stop numbering instruments, click in an empty
area of the drawing.

Replacing Instruments
An individual instrument can be replaced by another type of instrument by choosing the new active symbol in the
Resource Browser, and then selecting Replace with Active Symbol in the Object Info palette.
However, this process would be time-consuming for multiple instruments. By using the Replace Instrument
command, all the instruments of a particular type can easily be replaced with another type of instrument. Alternatively,
a selection of instruments can be replaced with another type of instrument.

Replacing All Instruments of One Type

To replace all the instruments of one type:
1. Select Spotlight > Replace Instrument.
The Replace Instruments dialog box opens.

This option is unavailable when no

instruments are selected

2. Click Replace All, and then specify the instrument type to be replaced by selecting it from the list.
3. In the Symbol Folders list, select the location of the replacement instrument type. Select the specific instrument
type from the Symbols list.
4. Click OK. All instruments of the type specified are replaced with the selected instrument type.

Replacing Selected Instruments

To replace selected instruments:
1. Select the instruments to be replaced.
2. Select Spotlight > Replace Instrument.
The Replace Instruments dialog box opens.
470 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

3. Click Replace selected instruments.

4. Specify the location of the replacement instrument type in the Symbol Folders list. Select the specific instrument
type from the Symbols list.
5. Click OK. The selected instruments are replaced with the specified instrument type.

Changing the Instrument Label Legend

As instruments are placed on the light plot, the active label legend is assigned to them by default. However, the legend
can be changed for a selection of instruments.
To change the instrument label legend:
1. Select one or more instruments.
2. Click on the Spotlight > Label Legend > Assign Legend to Insts command.
The Assign Legend to Insts command is also available from the object context menu for selected instruments.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) to quickly access the command.
The Assign Legend to Insts dialog box opens.

3. Select the new label legend for the instruments.

4. Click OK; the new label legend is applied to the selection.
The label legend can also be changed for an individual instrument by selecting the instrument, and then selecting
the legend name from the Use Legend list in the Object Info palette.
Use the Find and Modify command to quickly generate a custom selection of specific instruments and apply the
new legend to the selected instruments (see Find and Modify on page 472).
 Editing Lighting Instruments | 471

Refreshing Instrument and Light Position Data

The Spotlight > Refresh Instruments command updates light position information and instrument labels to reflect
any changes that have been made. This ensures that all current data is displayed; it is a good idea to select this
command before printing the light plot.
Two-fers do not get updated with the instrument information when the Refresh Instruments command is selected.
The Refresh Instruments command is also available from the document or object context menu. Right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) to quickly access the command.

Aligning Instruments
Lighting instruments can be automatically aligned and distributed along a specified guide line with the Align and
Distribute Items tool.

To align and/or distribute instruments along a line:

1. Select the objects to be aligned or distributed.

2. Click the Align and Distribute Items tool from the Spotlight tool set.
3. Click to define the beginning of the guide line, and click to end.
The Align and Distribute dialog box opens.

The instruments can be aligned and distributed according to several options.

Original instrument alignment and distribution

Parameter Description
Just Align The instruments are aligned, but their distribution is not changed

Along line on centers Aligns and distributes selected objects along the guide line using a specified
spacing setting between the center point of the instruments
472 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Evenly between The instruments are aligned and distributed evenly between the guide line
points points, starting with instruments at the beginning of the guide line

Evenly inside points The instruments are aligned and distributed evenly between the guide line
points, starting with spacing at the beginning of the guide line

4. Click OK to align or distribute the instruments according to the selected option.

Find and Modify

Custom selection criteria can be defined to quickly and easily search for instruments, lighting positions, and
accessories and to perform an action upon the search results.
To find and modify objects:
1. Select Spotlight > Find and Modify.
The Find and Modify dialog box opens.

2. Select the type of object to be searched and specify the change(s) to occur to the items found.

Parameter Description
Find All Select the type of object to be searched, and then specify the criteria for the search.
For example, find all instruments with a circuit number of 66. The list of values is
filtered as the criteria are defined.
 Inserting Multi-circuit Instruments | 473

Parameter Description
Change the __ field A specific parameter value can be changed to a new value by clicking Change,
to __ selecting the parameter, and entering the new value. Instruments on a particular
circuit can be changed to another circuit, for example.
Replace them with Click Replace to change the found items to the item specified in the list. For
this symbol example, find all instruments with a particular purpose, and change them to be of
the same instrument type.
Assign this Label The label legend for found instruments can be changed by clicking Assign and
Legend selecting the new label legend
Renumber the __ The renumber operation changes the numbering values for the specified item and
field from __ location. Enter the starting number value for the change. For example, change the
starting at__ numbering for all PAR instruments on Electric #2 to begin with 12.
Copy the __ field One parameter from the searched item can be copied to another parameter by
to the __ field selecting the parameters from the lists in the Copy operation. For example, copy
the circuit number to the dimmer number or the dimmer number to the channel
number.
Change the class to Change the class of the found items by clicking Change the Class to
__
Just Select Them The found item(s) can simply be selected by clicking Just Select Them
Just Deselect Them Deselect the items found by the custom search by clicking the Just Deselect Them
option
Delete Them Delete the items found by the custom search by clicking the Delete Them option
Item Count Displays an item count of the objects meeting current criteria at the bottom of the
Find and Modify dialog box

3. Once the find and modify criteria have been defined and action(s) specified, click OK. The selected change(s) will
occur to the items located by the search.

Inserting Multi-circuit Instruments

Lighting instruments can be inserted as multi-circuit instruments that act as a group while retaining their individual
parameters and labels.
As an example, a three-cell Cyc light consisting of different colors can be inserted as a single multi-circuit instrument
that can be easily positioned. However, each light in the multi-circuit instrument retains its own information, which is
displayed in its label legend. When generating paperwork, each cell of the instrument is listed individually.
The Inst Insertion tool inserts multi-circuit instruments.
The Spotlight > Object Conversion > Convert to MultiCircuit command is no longer required when inserting
multi-circuit instruments, although it is still available.

To insert a multi-circuit instrument:

1. Create a multi-circuit symbol out of instrument symbols (left, center, and right components), or locate a
multi-circuit symbol in the Resource Browser.
See Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
474 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Multi-circuit symbol

The multi-circuit symbol must consist only of other symbols to be properly inserted as a multi-circuit instrument.
Otherwise, the Inst Insertion tool treats it as a single circuit instrument.
2. Click the Inst Insertion tool from the Spotlight tool set.
3. Select Make Active from the Resources menu to make the multi-circuit symbol the active symbol definition.
Alternatively, double-click on the symbol to activate it.
4. Click once to insert the active multi-circuit instrument symbol definition, and then again to determine the
multi-circuit instrument rotation. By default, the active Label Legend is applied to each part of the multi-circuit
instrument. The multi-circuit instrument is numbered according to the lighting position settings.

The instruments retain their individual

information but move as a single unit

The Spotlight > Object Conversion > Convert to MultiCircuit command can add a selected instrument to the
multi-circuit instrument. To undo a conversion to a multi-circuit instrument, select the multi-circuit instrument and
then the Convert to MultiCircuit command.

Ganging Instruments
Two-fers gang two or more instruments together on one circuit, dimmer, channel, or dimmer and channel.
The ganging field parameter value(s) should match. If not, the value(s) from the first selected instrument are used.

To gang two or more instruments:

1. Click the Ganging tool from the Spotlight tool set.

Click Preferences from the Tool bar to set the default tool preferences, if desired.
2. Click on the first, and then the second, instrument to be ganged together. If more than two instruments are to be
ganged together, continue clicking on each instrument in succession.

1. Click on 1st instrument 2. Click on 2nd instrument

3. Click to set offset

3. Click to set the offset distance of the two-fer label.

If the field values of the instruments do not match, confirm that this is acceptable in the Notice dialog box which
opens.
4. Click OK. The instruments are ganged together with one or more two-fer objects.
 Adding Accessories | 475

The properties of a two-fer are displayed, and can be edited, in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Update Insts Select to update the ganged instruments. Changes to one instrument are updated for the
other ganged instrument. Also updates two-fer counts in the position summary inventory
report.
Corner Style Select the corner style for the two-fer object (Square, Arc, or Bzier)
Gang By Indicate whether to gang by Channel, Dimmer, Circuit (name and number), or dimmer
and channel
Field Value Enter the value for the two-fer label. (For example, if ganging by channel number, enter
a channel number of 80.) This new value updates the former value for dimmer or
channel in the instrument record. If ganging by circuit or channel and dimmer, enter the
two values separated by a comma.
Show Label Select to display the two-fer label or labels with the ganged values
Use Container Select to place the label or labels in a container; if ganged by dimmer and channel, the
same container is used for both labels. By default, the label legend container from the
first selected instrument is used, but this can be overridden by specifying a container
name.
Container Name The container name must exactly match one of the container symbol names located in
the Resource Browser (normally, these are in the Containers folder)

Adding Accessories
Accessories can be inserted from the many symbols provided in symbol libraries, or created as custom symbols that
you convert into accessories.
In the Resource Browser, either select one of the accessory symbols from the existing symbol libraries or one of
the symbols you have created in this file or a Favorites file. Insert the symbol with the Accessory Insertion tool to
place the accessory object on the light plot. This method is described in Inserting Accessories on page 476.
Convert custom geometry into an accessory. This method is described in Creating an Accessory on page 476.
The accessory symbols from the libraries included with the Vectorworks Spotlight product include all the required
attribute information and have the correct accessory type assigned (Accessory or Static Accessory). To create or
use your own symbols, see Accessory Specifications on page 989.
Lighting instrument accessories, such as color frames, barn doors, and top hats, are placed on the same design layer as
the instruments. Accessories such as color frames, barn doors, and top hats have a Device Type of Static Accessory.
Accessories that require a control channel, such as color scrollers, have a Device Type of Accessory.
An instrument can have multiple accessories in the same location (most accessories are placed at the front of an
instrument). It can also have several accessories in different locations. Once an accessory has been associated with an
instrument, the instrument controls the accessory.
476 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Creating an Accessory
The Vectorworks Spotlight product provides accessory symbols; however, it is not necessary to use only the
pre-defined symbols. Create an accessory out of a currently selected symbolonce the symbol is converted to an
accessory, the accessory functionality is present. See Accessory Specifications on page 989 for restrictions on using
symbols for accessories.
To create an accessory:
1. Draw the accessory, and then convert the object to a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol.
Symbols can have a separate 2D and 3D representation. The accessory object automatically uses the appropriate
portion of the symbol. At a minimum, the symbol must have at least a 2D component; it also requires a 3D
component to display correctly in 3D views. For information on symbols, see Creating New Symbols on
page 172 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Select the symbol(s).
3. Select the lighting instrument to associate with the accessory or accessories.
Only one instrument can be selected.
4. Select Spotlight > Object Conversion > Convert to Accessory.
The selected symbol is converted into an accessory and remains inserted in the drawing. It is associated with the
selected lighting instrument. The accessory properties can be changed through the Object Info palette; some of the
accessory information may need to be entered.
Accessories such as color frames, barn doors, and top hats should have a Device Type of Static Accessory.
Accessories that require a control channel, such as color scrollers, should have a Device Type of Accessory.

Select the accessory from the Resource Browser as an active symbol definition and use the Accessory Insertion
tool to insert it again if required (see Inserting Accessories on page 476).
To associate an accessory with a different lighting instrument, or associate an accessory that was never properly
associated, select the accessory and the instrument to associate, and then select Spotlight > Object Conversion >
Convert to Accessory.

Inserting Accessories
Existing accessory symbols are inserted with the Accessory Insertion tool. This can be a symbol that you have created,
located in a Favorites file or the current file, or it can be one of the symbols imported from the libraries included with
the Vectorworks Spotlight software ([Vectorworks]\Libraries); see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
For more information on importing symbols, see Importing a Symbol or Symbol Folder on page 186 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

To insert an accessory:

1. From the Resource Browser, double-click on the accessory symbol to insert. This automatically activates the
symbol and selects the Accessory Insertion tool from the Spotlight tool set.
Alternatively, select the accessory symbol from the Resource Browser and choose Make Active from the
Resources menu to make it the active symbol definition. The Accessory Insertion tool is automatically selected.
 Focusing Instruments | 477

2. Click once to insert the active accessory symbol definition, and then again to determine the accessory rotation.
The cursor changes to a bulls eye. Click on the instrument which will be associated with the accessory.

Because the accessory is controlled by the associated instrument, the items move together. However, an accessory
can be positioned on its own by selecting it and dragging.
If an accessory symbol is accidentally inserted by the Symbol Insertion tool, the accessory functionality will not
be present. If correctly inserted, the Object Info palette displays Lighting Device (with a Device Type of
Accessory or Static Accessory) for the selected accessory.
Once the Accessory Insertion tool has been selected, it remains selected by default so that accessories can be
repeatedly inserted. To place non-instrument symbols after placing accessories, switch to the Symbol Insertion
tool.

Accessory Properties
The accessory Object Info palette is nearly identical to the instrument palette format, because it requires many of the
same parameters. The Device Type is Static Accessory or Accessory instead of Light.
Entering a parameter in the accessory Object Info palette will not change the associated instrument parameters.
For more information on the fields in the Object Info palette, see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 459.
When a lighting instrument is deleted, its associated accessory is also deleted.

Focusing Instruments
To focus a lighting instrument assembly and beam on a particular area or object, a focus point needs to be defined.
The focus point can also be used to create Magic Sheets that show the instruments focused on a particular area (see
Magic Sheets on page 537). In addition, the focus point can be used as one of the criteria for finding instruments with
the Find and Modify command (see Find and Modify on page 472). It is also possible to select all lighting devices
assigned to a particular focus point for quick editing (see Editing Lighting Instruments on page 459).

Creating a Focus Point Object

An object defined as a focus point specifies where instrument assemblies and light beams should be directed. If the
focus point is moved, any instruments that are aimed at it update their focus position based on the focus point
information.
Like lighting positions and instruments, focus points should be inserted on their own design layer, to facilitate
selection, viewing, and printing. Alternatively, it is acceptable to insert the focus points on the same design layer as the
scenic elements. Focus points can also be inserted into their own classes.

To create a focus point object:

1. Click the Focus Point tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify the default focus point settings. These settings can be changed later
for existing focus points from the Object Info palette.
The Focus Point Properties dialog box opens.
478 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Show Focus Point Select whether to display the focus point name along with the focus point
Name shape
Focus Point Shape Select a shape for the focus point.
Standard Hybrid: an octagon in both Top/Plan view and 3D views
Standard 2D: an octagon in Top/Plan view and a 3D locus in 3D views
Standard 3D: a 2D locus in Top/Plan view and an octagon in 3D views
Locus Points Only: a 2D locus point in Top/Plan view and a 3D locus in
3D views (does not display in rendered views)
Default content: Existing focus shape symbols are provided as default
content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at
the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

3. Click on the plot to insert the focus point object.

4. The Place Focus Point dialog box opens. Enter the name of the focus point, the focus height above the stage floor,
and then click OK.

The focus point name is required later to specify the focus point for the lighting instruments.
The name of a focus point can be changed on the Data tab of the Object Info palette, and can be updated in the
drawing file by selecting Reset on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette. Place focus points in their own class so
they can be easily hidden for a 3D rendering. Alternatively, select Standard 2D or Locus Points Only for the Focus
Point Shape.

Assigning a Focus Point to a Lighting Instrument

One or more instruments and/or multi-circuit instruments can be focused on a focus point. The focus point is used to
draw light beam representations (see Drawing Light Beam Representations on page 479), calculate photometric
values (see Obtaining Photometric Data on page 480) and for rendering gobo projections (see Gobo Projection
Requirements on page 544). In 3D views, the instrument rotates to point automatically at the focus point.
With the Focus Instruments at Next Click context menu command, selected lighting instruments can quickly create
and focus on an existing focus point, or create one using the current focus point properties. Alternatively, use the Focus
Instruments command to select an existing focus point, or create one and set its properties at that time.
 Focusing Instruments | 479

To focus the lighting instrument(s) with the context menu command:

1. Select the instrument(s).
2. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), and select Focus Instruments at Next Click from the context
menu.
3. To create a new focus point for the instrument(s), click in the drawing. The current focus point properties are used,
and a unique name is automatically assigned to the new focus point; see Creating a Focus Point Object on
page 477. Alternatively, click on an existing focus point or locus.
The instrument(s) are assigned to the new or existing focus point.
To focus the lighting instrument(s) with the menu command:
1. Select the instrument(s).
2. Select Spotlight > Focus Instruments.
The Focus Instruments dialog box opens. Specify the name of the focus point, or select Next Click to create a new
focus point with the next mouse click (you will be prompted for the name of the focus point object).

To change the focus point of a single instrument, enter the name of the new focus point in the Focus field of the
Object Info palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 459).

Drawing Light Beam Representations

Once the focus point of instruments has been specified, light beam representations can be drawn. Wireframe light beam
representations can be controlled by class; see Lighting Device Setup on page 18.
To turn on the light beam for one or more instruments:
1. Select the instrument(s).
Use the Select Focused Lighting Devices context menu to quickly select all lighting devices assigned to a focus
point (see Changing Instrument Properties on page 462).
An instrument must have a focus point in order to draw a light beam representation (see Assigning a Focus Point
to a Lighting Instrument on page 478). Elliptical light sources require secondary beam and field angles. The
Focus Instruments command inserts a default falloff distance for elliptical light sources.
2. Select Draw Beam from the instrument Object Info palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 459).
480 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Light beam Light beam

Top/Plan view 3D view

An accurate wireframe representation of the light beams spread and location on the stage is drawn, oriented to the
focus point. The light beam of instruments used for general wash lighting can also be drawn; however, a focus
point is still required in order to draw the light beam representation.
3. Select Draw Beam as 3D Solid from the instrument Object Info palette to see the light beam as a solid cone of
light. The Color specified in the Object Info palette or Lighting Device dialog box determines the solid color (see
Lighting Instrument Color on page 466). The class of the light beam can also determine its appearance and
optionally, texture (Renderworks required).

Obtaining Photometric Data

The Vectorworks Spotlight product can determine and display the surface illumination values of the stage at a specific
location (Photometer object) or along a grid (Photometric Grid object).
For photometric values to be measured, the lighting instrument(s) must have a designated focus point.

Inserting a Photometric Grid

To insert a photometric grid:

1. Ensure that each lighting instrument contributing to the illumination is focused.

The light beams do not have to be drawn for calculations to be made.

2. Click the PhotoGrid tool from the Spotlight tool set.
3. Click on the plot to insert the photometric grid. The grid is a rectangular object, and can be inserted in Center-line
Placement mode or Edge Placement mode.
 Obtaining Photometric Data | 481

Placement Mode Description

Center-line Click once, and then again, to define the width through the
center of the grid. Click again to specify the width of half the
grid.
Edge Click once, and then again, to define the length along the edge
of the grid. Click again to specify the grid width.

The photometric grid calculates and displays the illumination values at its elevation point. The values are
displayed in either foot candles (Imperial) or lux (Metric), depending on the units selected in File > Document
Settings > Units. If Use Threshold Settings is selected, colors indicate the illumination range according to the
Threshold values set in the Object Info palette.

Color Description
Gray Illumination value of zero
Green Illumination value between zero and Lower Threshold
Tan Illumination value between Lower and Upper Threshold
Blue Illumination value above Upper Threshold

The photometric grid range colors can be changed. See Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors on
page 991.
Tan Green Gray

Blue Lower Threshold = 300 FC

Upper Threshold = 700 FC

4. To evaluate the illumination values at different heights, change the elevation of the photometric grid in the Object
Info palette.

Photometric Grid Properties

The photometric grid properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the photometric grid
Z Sets the elevation value of the grid; illumination values vary depending on
the elevation
482 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Show Elevation Select to display the grid elevation along with the photometric values
Show Zero Select to display elevation values of zero
Calculate using only Select to determine the photometric values based on only instruments with
visible beams Draw Beam selected; this reduces calculation time
Use Threshold Settings Select to display the grid with colors that correspond to the specified
threshold ranges
Lower Threshold Specify the illumination value at the lower end of the range; values below
this level are displayed in green, and values between the lower and upper
threshold are displayed in tan
Upper Threshold Specify the illumination value at the upper end of the range; values above
this level are displayed in blue
Grid Spacing X Specifies the spacing of photometric values in the X direction
Grid Spacing Y Specifies the spacing of photometric values in the Y direction
Grid Width X Specifies the length of the grid in the X direction
Grid Width Y Specifies the length of the grid in the Y direction
Reset Refreshes the grid display after changes have been made to the lighting
conditions

Inserting a Photometer
To insert a photometer:

1. Ensure that each lighting instrument contributing to the illumination is focused.

The light beams do not have to be drawn for calculations to be made.

2. Click the Photometer tool from the Spotlight tool set.
3. Click on the plot to insert the photometer. Click again to set the photometer rotation.
The photometer calculates and displays the illumination values at its elevation point. The values are displayed in
either foot candles (Imperial) or lux (Metric), depending on the units selected in File > Document Settings >
Units. See Inserting a Photometric Grid on page 480 for information on indicating threshold limits with a color.
 Obtaining Photometric Data | 483

Photometer

4. To evaluate the illumination values at different heights, change the elevation of the photometer in the Object Info
palette.

Photometer Properties
The photometer properties can be changed in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the photometer
Z Sets the elevation value of the photometer; illumination values vary depending on
the elevation
Show Elevation Select to display the objects elevation along with the photometric value
Show Zero Select to display an elevation value of zero
Calculate using Select to determine the photometric value based on only instruments with Draw
only visible beams Beam selected; this reduces calculation time
Use Threshold Select to display the object in a color that corresponds to the specified threshold
Settings ranges
Lower Threshold Specify the illumination value at the lower end of the range; values below this
level are displayed in green, and values between the lower and upper threshold are
displayed in tan
Upper Threshold Specify the illumination value at the upper end of the range; values above this
level are displayed in blue
Reset Refreshes the photometer display after changes have been made to the lighting
conditions
484 | Chapter 11: Creating the Lighting Design
Stage Objects and Paperwork 12
Stage Objects and Paperwork Overview
Once the lighting positions, instruments, and focus points have been created, the basic light plot exists. Next, additional
stage objects can be added.
The final step is to generate accurate and complete paperwork. This allows the electricians hanging the show to
transform the light plot into the components required to create the lighting design on stage. The Vectorworks Spotlight
product eliminates the arduous job of manually creating the instrument summaries, schedules, inventory reports, magic
sheets, and other paperwork.

Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot

Stage objects, such as soft goods (curtains, scrims, borders, and pipe-and-drape assemblies), video screens, speakers,
and scenic objects are used in the Vectorworks Spotlight product to aid in developing the lighting or event design.
A 3D stage object can be used as a focus point for lighting instruments by naming it as the focus point in the instrument
Object Info palette (see Lighting Instrument Properties on page 459).
To facilitate viewing and printing the light plot, place the stage objects in their own design layer, apart from
lighting positions, instruments and the theater ground plan, and in their own classes.

Inserting Soft Goods

The Soft Goods tool inserts theater and event planning draperies such as curtains, borders, scrims, and pipe-and-drape
assemblies. Soft goods objects are drawn along a path, so they can be straight, curved, or in any configuration for total
flexibility; the path can be edited after placement. The 3D appearance of soft goods objects can be set for a realistic
appearance, or display more schematically. The materials used to create the soft goods configuration can be included in
a report for cost estimation (see Creating Reports on page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Text
labels identify the components of the soft goods object.

Inserting Curtains and Borders

The Soft Goods tool creates a curved or straight stage curtain or border. To draw a curtain, either use the Soft Goods
tool, or create a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from
Shapes on page 696).

To insert a curtain or border:

1. Click the Soft Goods tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify or change any default Soft Goods tool parameters.
The Soft Goods Object Properties dialog box opens.
3. Select either Curtain or Border from the Function list, and specify any other default parameters for this session.
486 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

4. Click OK.
5. Click on the appropriate mode in the Tool bar to select the creation method of the soft goods object.
The Corner Vertex or Point on Arc modes are recommended. For more information on the Polyline tool modes,
see Creating Polylines on page 226.
6. Click to set the soft goods objects start point.
7. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until
the curtain or border object is complete.
Once created, the soft goods object can be reshaped by double-clicking on it. The Reshape tool is automatically
activated, to reshape the object directly in the drawing.
The curtain or border parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette. However, certain parameters are not
available for borders.

Pleat width

Adjustable length

Pleat
Centerline depth
Track Curtain opens
from center

Parameter Description
Function Select either Curtain or Border (for pipe-and-drape assembles, see Inserting
Pipe-and-Drape Assemblies on page 488)
Adjustable Length Specifies the length of a straight curtain or border
Height Indicates the height of the curtain or border
Show Centerline In Top/Plan view, displays the curtain center line or the border reference line
Add Track Draws the curtain track
Track Width Sets the width of the curtain track
Show Traveler Pull Shows the traveler pull on the left or right of the track, or hides the traveler
pull
Open From For curtains, creates an opening in the curtain at the center or at one of the
ends. Select None to hide all openings in the curtain.
Width When a curtain opening has been selected, specifies the width of the opening
Show Ghost Curtain Displays the open section of the curtain with dotted lines in Top/Plan view
Reverse Side For borders, switches the curtain to the other side of the center reference line
Running Length For curved curtains, shows the total curtain length
Stock Drape Width Specifies the width of an individual drape panel
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 487

Parameter Description
Total Drape Count Displays the number of drape panels required based on the specified stock
drape width
Simple 2D Temporarily simplifies the Top/Plan view of the curtain or border, showing it
as a line
Simple 3D Temporarily simplifies the 3D view of the curtain or border, showing it as a
flat surface
Pleat Width Indicates the distance between pleats
Pleat Depth Indicates the depth of the curtain pleats
Flip Pleats Switches the positive and negative portions of the pleats
Adjust Starting For borders, offsets the starting point of the border
Adjust Ending For borders, offsets the ending point of the border
3D Curtain Options Opens the 3D Curtain Options dialog box, for setting the appearance of the
curtain in 3D. An image (Renderworks required) or color can be set; see
Setting Soft Goods 3D Display Options on page 491. To create a scrim,
select Scrim from the Soft Goods Options list.
Current Option Displays the currently selected 3D option
Location Enter notes about the curtain or border location, if desired
Material Color Enter notes about the curtain or border color (does not affect the curtain
appearance)
Material Type Enter notes about the curtain or border material (does not affect the curtain
appearance)
Top Finish Select the finish for the top of the curtain or border
Spacing Sets the spacing for tie, hook, or grommet finishes
Bottom Finish Select the finish for the bottom of the curtain or border
Sides Finish Select the finish for the sides of the curtain or border
Fullness % Specifies the curtain or border fullness information (does not affect curtain
appearance)
Lining Enter notes about the curtain or border lining material
Note Enter any miscellaneous information required, such as stock number or other
data
Class Soft Goods Parts When first selected, automatically creates a class for the curtain or border.
This allows the soft goods visibility and 2D appearance to be set by class.
Select a class name from the Class Set list. Once the class has been created,
this check box toggles whether class visibility changes apply to the selected
soft goods object.
Class Set Select one of five class names when classing the curtain or border
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text
of soft goods labels; see Formatting Soft Goods Object Labels on page 493
Default Text Positions Text labels can be moved by dragging their control point; this option returns
them to their default locations
488 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters
Vertex Parameters Edits the vertices of the path object that the curtain is based upon; see
Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide

Inserting Pipe-and-Drape Assemblies

The Soft Goods tool creates pipe-and-drape assemblies typically used in event planning, such as when creating
temporary booths in a convention center. To draw a pipe-and-drape assembly, either use the Soft Goods tool, or create
a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on
page 696).

To insert a pipe-and-drape assembly:

1. Click the Soft Goods tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify or change any default Soft Goods tool parameters.
The Soft Goods Object Properties dialog box opens.
3. Select Pipe-and-Drape from the Function list, and specify any other default parameters for this session.
4. Click OK.
5. Click on the appropriate mode in the Tool bar to select the creation method of the soft goods object.
For more information on the Polyline tool modes, see Creating Polylines on page 226.
6. Click to set the soft goods objects start point.
7. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until
the pipe-and-drape assembly is complete.
Once created, the soft goods object can be edited by selecting the object, and then selecting Modify > Edit Soft
Goods. Reshape the soft goods polyline with the Reshape tool; click Exit Profile to return to the drawing.
The pipe-and-drape assembly parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 489

Slider

Base plate

Parameter Description
Function Select Pipe-and-Drape (for curtains or borders, see Inserting Curtains and
Borders on page 485)
Adjustable Length Specifies the length of a straight pipe-and-drape assembly
Height Indicates the height of the pipe-and-drape assembly
Show Centerline In Top/Plan view, displays the center line of the pipe-and-drape assembly
Draw Slider(s) Draws the soft goods slider segments at the top of the assembly
Slider Options The number of sliders (panel segments) created depends on the Adjustable
Length of the entire assembly, the selected Slider Options range, and the
Target Length specified. Select from a list of standard slider size ranges, or
select Custom to create a non-standard slider size and enter the number of
panels to include.
Target Length Sets the desired slider length within the range specified in Slider Options. If
Custom was selected for the Slider Options, enter the specific length for the
slider.
Actual Length Displays the calculated slider length used for the segments
Slider Total Displays the actual number of slider segments used; if Custom was selected
for the Slider Options, specify the number of slider segments desired
Running Length Displays the total length of the pipe-and-drape assembly
Base Plate Size Select from a list of standard base plate sizes, or choose the rounded boom
base
End Hardware Select whether to include end hardware (base plate and upright) at each end
of the assembly
First Plate Shift When a base plate is included at the start of the assembly, select whether it is
centered on the upright (None), or shifted towards the inside (In) or outside
(Out). This option does not apply to a boom base.
Last Plate Shift When a base plate is included at the end of the assembly, select whether it is
centered on the upright (None), or shifted towards the inside (In) or outside
(Out). This option does not apply to a boom base.
Upright/Plate Total Displays the number of uprights and base plates in the assembly
Show 3D Uprights Displays the upright hardware in 3D views; deselect this option for faster
rendering
Stock Drape Width Specifies the width of an individual drape panel
490 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Total Drape Count Displays the number of drape panels required based on the specified stock
drape width
Simple 2D Temporarily simplifies the Top/Plan view of the pipe-and-drape assembly,
showing it as a line
Simple 3D Temporarily simplifies the 3D view of the pipe-and-drape assembly, showing
it as a flat surface
Pleat Width Indicates the distance between pleats
Pleat Depth Indicates the depth of the pleats
Flip Pleats Switches the positive and negative portions of the pleats
3D Curtain Options Opens the 3D Curtain Options dialog box, for setting the appearance of the
pipe-and-drape assembly in 3D. An image (Renderworks required) or color
can be set; see Setting Soft Goods 3D Display Options on page 491
Current Option Displays the currently selected 3D option
Location Enter notes about the pipe-and-drape assembly location, if desired
Material Color Enter notes about the pipe-and-drape assembly color (does not affect the
drapery appearance)
Material Type Enter notes about the pipe-and-drape assembly material (does not affect the
drapery appearance)
Note Enter any miscellaneous information required, such as stock number or other
data
Class Soft Goods Parts When first selected, automatically creates a class for the pipe-and-drape
assembly. This allows the soft goods visibility and 2D appearance to be set by
class. Select a class name from the Class Set list. Once the class has been
created, this check box toggles whether class visibility changes apply to the
selected soft goods object.
Class Set Select one of five class names when classing the pipe-and-drape assembly
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text
of soft goods labels; see Formatting Soft Goods Object Labels on page 493
Default Text Positions Text labels can be moved by dragging their control point; this option returns
them to their default locations
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters
Vertex Parameters Edits the vertices of the path object that the curtain is based upon; see
Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.

To create an opening in the pipe-and-drape assembly, edit the vertex parameters in the Object Info palette. Select
the vertex prior to the opening as described in Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide, and then click Hide Next Edge.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 491

Setting Soft Goods 3D Display Options

Select an image texture (Renderworks required) or color to display on the curtain, border, or pipe-and-drape assembly
in 3D views. A curtain object can also be made to look like a scrim; pipe-and-drape assemblies can have alternating
panel colors. The Vectorworks Spotlight product includes a number of sample image textures, or you can create your
own textures (image textures or other textures; see Creating Textures on page 591 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide). The settings made here override any class settings made, if the soft goods object is assigned to a class;
an alert dialog box displays if there is a conflict.

To set the 3D display options:

1. Select a curtain, border, or pipe-and-drape assembly. From the Object Info palette, click 3D Curtain Options.
The 3D Curtain Options dialog box opens. Select the display from the Soft Goods Options list and then choose
the formatting options.
492 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Soft Goods Options Select the type of display for the soft goods material:
Opaque: Displays with a solid color
Scrim: Displays with a partly transparent color
Image (Renderworks required): Displays an image or assigned texture
Multi-Color: Displays each panel of the pipe-and-drape assembly with
an alternating solid color
Opaque
Opaque or Scrim Specifies the color of the soft goods object in 3D views; click the color box to
Color select the color
Scrim
Opaque or Scrim Specifies the color of the soft goods object in 3D views; click the color box to
Color select the color
Image
(Renderworks
required)
Image Select the image texture to display on the soft goods object, from the current
files textures
Image Adjustments If the selected image does not have the desired size or position in the Preview,
adjust its scale or position
Scale Increases or decreases the image scale
Horizontal Shift Shifts the image horizontally to the left or right
Vertical Shift Shifts the image vertically up or down
Flip Image Flips the image
Preview Displays the image selected for the soft goods object
Multi-Color
(pipe-and-drape
only)
Multi-Color Properties Lists the colors, in order, that will alternate on the pipe-and drape assembly
panels
To change the order of the colors, click in the # column and drag the
color to a new position in the list.
Panel Color Specifies a panel color; click the color box to select the color
Name Enter a name for the specified color
Add Color Adds the Panel Color to the Multi-Color Properties list, to be included
among the panel colors. If a color has been changed, replaces the changed
color in the list.
Remove Color Removes the selected color from the Multi-Color Properties list

2. Click OK.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 493

Formatting Soft Goods Object Labels

A variety of soft goods object labels can be included on the drawing.
To select labels for display and format the text:
1. Select a soft goods object. From the Object Info palette, click Text Options.
The Text Options dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Optional Elements to Select items to add to the text label; different label elements are available for
Show curtains or borders and pipe-and-drape assemblies
Text Attributes
Stack Text Separates each selected label element by placing it in its own line of text;
deselect this option to create a single line for all the selected elements
Automatically Automatically places the label with the soft goods object; deselect this option
Position Text to be able to reposition the label by dragging the label control point
Keep Text Maintains the text in a horizontal position even when the object is rotated;
Horizontal deselect this option to rotate the label along with the object
Include Element Includes the name of the element along with the value; deselect this option to
Labels display the parameter value only
Text Formatting Specify the text size, color, and alignment
Options
494 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

2. Specify the text label elements and formatting, and then click OK.
Once the label has been added to the drawing, it can be moved by clicking and dragging the label control point (unless
Automatically Position Text was selected in the Text Options). Click Default Text Positions from the Object Info
palette of a selected soft goods object to restore the text label to its original location.

Label control point

Inserting Video Screen Objects

Video screen objects, such as televisions, projectors, and screens, are often a required part of visualizing a room layout
for event planning, and are occasionally needed for theater productions. The Vectorworks Spotlight product
automatically helps with the calculations required for placement, image size, and viewing area; it can also display a
glowing image on the screen for a realistic look (Renderworks required). The video objects can be labeled with
calculated information and certain objects display the optimum viewing area.

Inserting a Television Object

The television object simulates CRT and flat screen televisions.

To insert a television:

1. Click the Television tool from the Spotlight tool set.

2. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
3. If this is the first time a television is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the
default preferences, which apply to all televisions placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited
later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.

The television objects parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
TV Type Select the type of TV: flat panel, CRT, or CRT curved
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 495

Parameter Description
Screen Aspect Select the aspect ratio of the screen: 4:3 (Standard) or 16:9 (Wide screen);
curved CRT screens cannot have a 16:9 aspect ratio
Casing Select the television model from the default content (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); available models
depend on the selected TV Type and Screen Aspect
Width (image) Displays the width of the screen image area
Height (image) Displays the height of the screen image area
Show Coverage Zone Indicates the viewing area based on the screen size; observers within the area
(2D only) should be able to see the screen

Near coverage zone

Far coverage zone

Zone Reference Calculates the coverage zone based on screen width, height, or diagonal
measurement
Viewing Angle Indicates the maximum viewing angle of the screen relative to dead-on
Near Multiplier Specifies the multiplier of the reference dimension to determine the extent of
the near coverage zone
Far Multiplier Specifies the multiplier of the reference dimension to determine the extent of
the far coverage zone
Edit Screen Image Opens the Edit Screen Image dialog box to select the image for screen display;
(Renderworks see Setting the Image on the Video Screen on page 508).
required)
Screen Image Displays the name of the current screen image
Add Adjustable For flat panel televisions, adds a stand to the screen casing
Stand
Stand Height Specifies the height measurement from the base of the stand to the bottom of
the screen casing
Class Television When first selected, automatically creates classes for the different parts of the
Parts television and, if selected, stand, for appearance and visibility control. This
allows portions of the television or stand to be set to visible, grayed, or
invisible. Once the classes have been created, this check box toggles whether
class visibility changes apply to the selected television.
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text of
coverage zone labels; see Formatting Video Screen Object Labels on
page 509
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters
496 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Inserting an LED Screen

The Light-emitting Diode (LED) object simulates a variety of low-resolution LED screens in arrays on a base structure.

To insert an LED screen or array:

1. Click the LED Screen tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
3. If this is the first time LED screens are placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the
default preferences, which apply to all LED screens placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited
later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
The LED screen parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Module Shape Select a shape for the screen modules in the array

Tile Flat Tile Cap Disk Flat

Disk Cap Tube Dome

Tile Flat Creates rectangular-shaped modules

Tile Cap Creates rectangular-shaped modules with frosted caps
Disk Flat Creates round modules
Disk Cap Creates round modules with frosted caps
Tube Creates tube-shaped modules
Dome Creates dome-shaped modules
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 497

Parameter Description
Width Specifies the width of each module in the array
Height For tiled arrays, sets the height (length) of each module in the array
Cap Depth For capped arrays, sets the depth of each modules cap
Tube Orientation For tube arrays, specifies whether the tubes are oriented vertically or
horizontally
Length For tube arrays, sets the length of one of the tube modules
Build Array Based
On
Module Counts Sets the size of the entire LED array based on the number of modules specified
and Spacing in the horizontal and vertical directions, as well as the horizontal and vertical
spacing distance set between the modules
Overall Sets the size of the entire LED array based on the specified array width and
Dimensions and height, as well as the horizontal and vertical spacing between the modules; the
Spacing screen count is automatically calculated
Overall Sets the size of the entire LED array based on the specified array width and
Dimensions and height, as will as the number of modules specified in the horizontal and vertical
Module Counts directions; the spacing is automatically calculated
Array Width/Height Specifies the width and height of the entire LED array, when the array is based
on overall dimensions
Horizontal/Vertical Specifies the spacing between modules in the horizontal and vertical directions,
Spacing when the array is based on spacing parameters
Horizontal/Vertical Specifies the number of modules in the horizontal and vertical directions, when
Count the array is based on the module counts
Module Total Displays the total calculated number of modules in the array
Width/Height (Calc.) Displays the calculated width and height of the array, when determined by
module count and spacing
H/V Spacing (Calc.) Displays the calculated module spacing in the horizontal and vertical
directions, when the array is determined by the overall dimensions and module
counts
H/V Count (Calc.) Displays the total number of modules in the horizontal and vertical directions,
when the array size is determined by the overall dimensions and module
spacing
Pixels Per Module H/ Specifies the number of horizontal or vertical pixels for each module (for
V calculation purposes only; does not affect the module display)
Array Size (Pixels) Displays the total number of pixels for the entire LED array
498 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Base Structure Select a base structure for the array, or select None to display only the
module(s); modify the appearance of the structure by selecting Class LED
Array Parts and then editing the structure class

Blocks Frame Curtain

Web Vert. Strips Horiz. Strips

Blocks Creates a structure of individual blocks bases for each module

Frame Creates a single frame for the entire array
Curtain Creates a single background for the array
Web Creates a webbed structure behind the modules
Vert. Strips Places the LED modules in vertical columns
Horiz. Strips Places the LED modules in horizontal rows
None Does not create a base structure for the array; displays only the LED modules
Base Width Specifies the width of blocks, vertical or horizontal strips, or the entire frame
Base Height Specifies the height of blocks, vertical or horizontal strips, or the entire frame
Base Depth Specifies the depth of blocks, vertical or horizontal strips, or the entire frame
Horizontal Inset Sets the horizontal distance (margin) between the horizontal edge of the base
structure and the array
Vertical Inset Sets the vertical distance (margin) between the vertical edge of the base
structure and the array
Pleat Width For curtain or web structures, specifies the pleat width of the curtain (2D only
for web structures)
Pleat Depth For curtain or web structures, specifies the pleat depth of the curtain (2D only
for web structures)
Webbing Width For web structures, sets the width of the connecting web segments
Tilt Specifies the tilt angle of the screen array
Edit Array Image Opens the Edit Screen Image dialog box to select the image for the screen
(Renderworks display; see Setting the Image on the Video Screen on page 508)
required)
Array Image Displays the name of the current screen image
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 499

Parameter Description
Simple 3D Creates a single textured 3D polygon to represent the screen modules; this
speeds rendering when each module does not need to be shown individually
Class LED Array When first selected, automatically creates classes for the different parts of the
Parts LED screen and, if selected, the base structure., for appearance and visibility
control. This allows portions of the screen or base to be set to visible, grayed, or
invisible. Once the classes have been created, this check box toggles whether
class visibility changes apply to the selected LED array.
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text of
calculated labels; see Formatting Video Screen Object Labels on page 509
Default Text Restores text labels to their default positions
Positions
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters

Inserting a Video Screen Object

Video screen objects consist of a video screen and optional front or rear projector.

To insert a video screen:

1. Click the Video Screen tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
3. If this is the first time a video screen is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the
default preferences, which apply to all video screens placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited
later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
The height of the video screen and associated projector(s) depends on several factors.
The Z value entered in the Object Info palette determines the distance from the active layer plane to the bottom of
the screen (including the border).
When the screen includes legs, the legs are drawn on the active layer plane unless a Floor Height value has been
specified. The Floor Height distance shifts the floor, and therefore the legs, by that amount from the layer plane.
Projector stands are inserted relative to both the Vertical Shift and Floor Height values, allowing stands to be
shifted up or down from the screens floor as set by the Floor Height value.
The video screen objects parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Screen Type Select the screen type: rear or front projector, or LED screen
500 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Screen Aspect Select one of the standard screen aspect ratios, or choose custom screen
dimensions
Stock Size Select one of the standard screen sizes based on height x width measurements
Width (image) Displays the width of the screen image area (without the screen border or
frame) for standard screen sizes. For custom screens, enter the screen width;
the screen height is automatically calculated for all custom screens (except
rect. all custom dimensions).
Height (image) Displays the height of the screen image area (without the screen border or
frame) for standard screen sizes. For custom screens, enter the screen height;
the screen width is automatically calculated for all custom screens (except
rect. all custom dimensions).
Diagonal (calc) Displays the calculated diagonal screen size
Diameter (image) For Round Custom screens, indicates the screen diameter
Frame Select the type of border around the image area: No Frame, a Frame with a
specified thickness, or a flat Border Only
Border Width For Frame and Border Only types, specify the width of the frame or border
Depth For Frame type, indicate the thickness of the frame
Edge For Frame type, sets the distance between the screen and the front face of the
screens frame
Screen Tilt When no Screen Legs are selected, specifies the tilt of the screen in degrees.
Positive values tilt the top of the screen away from the viewer, and negative
values tilt it toward the viewer.
Total Clearance Displays the total vertical clearance height required by the complete video
screen object from the floor to the top of the screen, including any border,
dress kit, valence, or other accessories
Show Coverage Zone Indicates the viewing area based on the screen size; observers within the area
(2D only) should be able to see the screen

Near coverage zone

Far coverage zone

Zone Reference Calculates the coverage zone based on screen width, height, or diagonal
measurement
Viewing Angle Indicates the maximum viewing angle of the screen relative to dead-on
Near Multiplier Specifies the multiplier of the reference dimension to determine the extent of
the near coverage zone
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 501

Parameter Description
Far Multiplier Specifies the multiplier of the reference dimension to determine the extent of
the far coverage zone
Screen Legs Select the type of screen support: None, Goalpost (includes two legs, and is
similar to commercial fastfold systems), or Tripod (creates a roll-up type
support arrangement)
Show Feet For Goalpost configurations, select how the feet of the frame display: Both,
Front, Back, or None
Add Dress Kit When Goalpost or Tripod screen legs are selected, adds a dress kit of
draperies to conceal the projector (rear) and supports from audience view
Dress Kit Color Select the color of the dress kit draperies
Left Leg Width Indicates the width of the drapery on the left side of the screen
Right Leg Width Indicates the width of the drapery on the right side of the screen
Valence Height Sets the height of the drapery above the screen
Border Overlap Indicates the amount of overlap of the dress kit drapery over all sides of the
screens border
Pleat Width Specifies the width of each pleated section of the left, right, and valence
draperies
Pleat Depth Specifies the depth of the pleats for the left, right, and valence draperies
Hide Screen Toggles the display of the screen geometry
Edit Screen Image Opens the Edit Screen Image dialog box to select the image for screen
(Renderworks display; see Setting the Image on the Video Screen on page 508).
required)
Screen Image Displays the name of the current screen image
Show Projector Toggles the display of the projector unit
Show Projection Toggles the display of the projection cone
Cone
Projector Model Select the projector model from the default content (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Projector Aspect For screens with a portrait orientation, select a standard projector aspect ratio
L/R Shift Shifts the projector to the left or right relative to the screen
Horiz. Offset Angle Sets the angle of offset from the projector to the screen, measured side-to-side
on the horizontal plane and based on the L/R Shift value
Point at Screen Center When the projector has been shifted to the left or right, keeps the projector
pointed at the center of the screen
Projector Tilt Sets the tilt of the projector, in degrees, relative to the horizontal plane
Place Based On Sets the position of the projector either based on a fixed lens size or the
projection distance
Projection Dist. When Distance is selected for the projector placement, enter a distance value
or click and drag the projectors on the drawing to set the distance
502 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Lens Select a standard fixed or zoom lens size, or choose Custom. When the
projector is placed based on distance, this displays the calculated lens size.
Zoom Factor For zoom or custom lenses, sets the lens zoom factor
Show Zoom Range For zoom lenses, indicates the optimal area on the drawing where the
projector should be placed, to achieve the desired image size within the zoom
range of the lens

Zoom range
indicator

Vertical Position Select the projector placement mode:

Screen Center: The center of the projector lens aligns with the screen
center
Align to Top: The top of the projector body aligns with the top of the top of
the screen border
Align to Bottom: The bottom of the projector body aligns with the bottom
of the screen border
Stand: Places the projector on a stand selected in Stand Model
Rigged: Places the projector at a height specified in Floor Height with the
bottom of the projector at the Trim height
Specific Shift: Shifts the projector relative to the screen center by the
Vertical Shift distance, as measured from the center of the projector lens
Vertical Shift For projectors on a stand or with a specific shift, specifies the distance
between the floor (as set by the Floor Height) and the stand or projector (this
allows stands or projectors to be placed on a plane shifted up or down from
the screen)
Stand Model For projectors on a stand, select the projector stand model from the default
content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide)
Floor Height For rigged projectors or projectors on a stand, indicates the distance from the
active layer plane to the floor, effectively shifting the floor by the indicated
height
L/R Shift For projectors on a stand, shifts the stand to the left or right, relative to the
projector
F/B Shift For projectors on a stand, shifts the stand to the front or back, relative to the
projector
Trim (bottom) For rigged projectors, indicates the location of the bottom of the projector
Vert. Offset Angle Displays the vertical offset angle of the projector to the screen, based on the
vertical position of the projector
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 503

Parameter Description
Multiple Projector When there is more than one projector, select whether they are stacked or
side-by-side
Horiz Space For side-by-side multiple projectors, sets the distance between the projectors
Offset Distance For side-by-side multiple projectors, sets the offset distance between the
screen and the second projector, relative to the first projector
Class Video Screen When first selected, automatically creates classes for the different parts of the
Parts video screen for appearance and visibility control. This allows portions of the
video screen, projector, and other elements to be set to visible, grayed, or
invisible. Once the classes have been created, this check box toggles whether
class visibility changes apply to the selected video screen object.
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text
of coverage zone and other labels; see Formatting Video Screen Object
Labels on page 509
Default Text Restores text labels to their default positions
Positions
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters

Inserting a Blended Screen and Projector

The blended screen simulates projection screens that require multiple projectors to produce one large image.

To insert a blended screen and projector(s):

1. Click the Blended Screen tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
3. If this is the first time a blended screen is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify
the default preferences, which apply to all blended screens placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be
edited later in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
When you insert a blended screen, a Blended Screen object is created. Once the parameters of the blended screen and
projectors have been set, click Insert Projectors from the Object Info palette to create the projectors associated with
that screen. The blended screen settings control the initial projector settings, though each projector can then be set
independently (by changing parameters like text position or cone display) if needed. Moving or rotating a blended
screen after the projectors have been inserted also moves or rotates the associated projectors.
Use caution when clicking Insert Projectors if projectors have already been inserted; this deletes existing
projectors and their parameter settings.
The height of the blended screen and associated projectors depends on several factors.
504 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

The Z value entered in the Object Info palette determines the distance from the active layer plane to the bottom of
the screen (including the border).
When the screen includes legs, the legs are drawn on the active layer plane unless a Floor Height value has been
specified. The Floor Height distance shifts the floor, and therefore the legs, by that amount from the layer plane.
Projector stands are inserted relative to both the Vertical Shift and Floor Height values, allowing stands to be
shifted up or down from the screens floor as set by the Floor Height value.
The blended screen and blended projector object parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Blended Screen Parameters

Parameter Description
Screen Type Select either front or rear projector
Screen Name Provide a name for the screen object; associated blended projectors identify the
screen by this name; if the name is already in use, the name that was already in
use changes automatically
Width (image) Enter the width of the screen image area (without the screen border or frame)
Height (image) Enter the height of the screen image area (without the screen border or frame)
Screen Size (pixels) Displays the total screen size based on the screen dimensions
Frame Select the type of border around the image area: No Frame, a Frame with a
specified thickness, or a flat Border Only
Border Width For Frame and Border Only types, specify the width of the frame or border
Depth For Frame type, indicate the thickness of the frame
Edge For Frame type, sets the distance between the screen and the front face of the
screens frame
Screen Tilt When Add Folding Legs is selected, specifies the tilt of the screen in degrees.
Positive values tilt the top of the screen away from the viewer, and negative
values tilt it toward the viewer.
Total Clearance Displays the total vertical clearance height required by the complete blended
screen object from the floor to the top of the screen, including any border, dress
kit, valence, or other accessories
Screen Aspect (calc) Displays the aspect ratio of the screen
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 505

Parameter Description
Show Coverage Indicates the viewing area based on the screen size; observers within the area
Zone (2D only) should be able to see the screen

Near coverage zone

Far coverage zone

Zone Reference Calculates the coverage zone based on screen width, height, or diagonal
measurement
Viewing Angle Indicates the maximum viewing angle of the screen relative to dead-on
Near Multiplier Specifies the multiplier of the reference dimension to determine the extent of
the near coverage zone
Far Multiplier Specifies the multiplier of the reference dimension to determine the extent of
the far coverage zone
Add Folding Legs Draws folding legs and feet under the screen
Show Feet For folding legs, select how the feet of the frame display: Both, Front, Back, or
None
Add Dress Kit When folding legs are selected, adds a dress kit of draperies to conceal the
projector (rear) and supports from audience view
Dress Kit Color Select the color of the dress kit draperies
Left Leg Width Indicates the width of the drapery on the left side of the screen
Right Leg Width Indicates the width of the drapery on the right side of the screen
Valence Height Sets the height of the drapery above the screen
Border Overlap Indicates the amount of overlap of the dress kit drapery over all sides of the
screens border
Pleat Width Specifies the width of each pleated section of the left, right, and valence
draperies
Pleat Depth Specifies the depth of the pleats for the left, right, and valence draperies
Edit Screen Image Opens the Edit Screen Image dialog box to select the image for screen display;
(Renderworks see Setting the Image on the Video Screen on page 508).
required)
Screen Image Displays the name of the current screen image
506 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Projector Model Select the projector model from the default content (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); specify the
projector settings, which apply to all projectors upon insertion
Projector Aspect Select the projector aspect ratio
Overshoot % Specifies the total amount of top and bottom overshoot to be discarded when
using narrow aspect projectors to achieve a certain pixel blend
Proj. Resolution Select the projector pixel resolution
Projector Tilt Sets the tilt of the projector, in degrees, relative to the horizontal plane
Place Based On Sets the position of the projector either based on a fixed lens size or the
projection distance
Projection Dist. When Distance is selected for the projector placement, enter a distance value or
click and drag the projectors on the drawing to set the distance
Lens Select a standard fixed or zoom lens size, or choose Custom. When the
projector is placed based on distance, this displays the calculated lens size.
Zoom Factor For zoom or custom lenses, sets the lens zoom factor
Vertical Position Select the projector placement mode:
Screen Center: The center of the projector lens aligns with the screen center
Align to Top: The top of the projector body aligns with the top of the top of
the screen border
Align to Bottom: The bottom of the projector body aligns with the bottom of
the screen border
Stand: Places the projector on a stand selected in Stand Model
Rigged: Places the projector at a height specified in Floor Height with the
bottom of the projector at the Trim height
Specific Shift: Shifts the projector relative to the screen center by the
Vertical Shift distance, as measured from the center of the projector lens
Vertical Shift For projectors on a stand or with a specific shift, specifies the distance between
the floor (as set by the Floor Height) and the stand or projector (this allows
stands or projectors to be placed on a plane shifted up or down from the screen)
Stand Model For projectors on a stand, select the projector stand model from the default
content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide)
Floor Height For rigged projectors or projectors on a stand, indicates the distance from the
active layer plane to the floor, effectively shifting the floor by the indicated
height)
Trim (bottom) For rigged projectors, indicates the location of the bottom of the projector
Multiple Projector When there is more than one projector (identical paired projectors for each
section of the screen), select whether they are stacked or side-by-side
Horiz Space For side-by-side multiple projectors, sets the distance between the projectors
Area Horiz. Count Sets the number of areas into which the screen is divided; if the value entered is
too small, the lowest possible number of areas is automatically set
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 507

Parameter Description
Area Width Displays the width of each screen area
Area Height Displays the height of each screen area
Proj. Spacing Displays the distance between projectors, measured from the center of each
projector lens
Overlap (meas.) Displays the amount of screen area overlap, measured in distance units
Overlap (pixels) Displays the amount of screen area overlap, measured in pixels
Show Projection Toggles the display of the projection cone for all projectors associated with the
Cones screen
Class Blended When first selected, automatically creates classes for the different parts of the
Screen Parts blended screen for appearance and visibility control. This allows portions of the
screen, projector, and other elements to be set to visible, grayed, or invisible.
Once the classes have been created, this check box toggles whether class
visibility changes apply to the selected video screen object.
Insert Projectors Inserts the required number of blended projectors based on the specified
parameters; these projectors are associated with the blended screen. The
projector model specified in Projector Model, and its associated parameters,
apply to all inserted projectors.
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text of
coverage zone and other labels; see Formatting Video Screen Object Labels
on page 509
Default Text Restores text labels to their default positions
Positions
Update Updates the blended screen object and its associated projectors when changes
have been made to the screens Object Info palette parameters; this also
refreshes the associated projector information without changing individual
blended projector parameters such as text options

Blended Projector Parameters

Parameter Description
Screen Name Displays the name of the screen with which the projector is associated
Screen Parameters Displays the main screen parameters set by the blended screen
Show Projection Cone Toggles the display of the projection cone for this projector only
Projector Parameters Displays the main projector parameters set by the blended screen
L/R Shift For projectors on a stand, shifts the stand to the left or right, relative to the
projector
F/B Shift For projectors on a stand, shifts the stand to the front or back, relative to the
projector
508 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Show Zoom Range For zoom lenses, indicates the optimal area on the drawing where the
projector should be placed, to achieve the desired image size within the zoom
range of the lens

Zoom range
indicator

Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text
of projector labels; see Formatting Video Screen Object Labels on page 509
Default Text Positions Restores text labels to their default positions
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters

Setting the Image on the Video Screen

Select an image to display on the video screen or LED screen (Renderworks required). The Vectorworks Spotlight
product includes a number of sample images, or you can create your own textures. Textures must use an image color
shader with constant reflectivity to display on the video screen (see Creating Textures on page 591 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
To set the video screen image:
1. Select a video screen object or LED screen object. From the Object Info palette, click Edit Screen Image or Edit
Array Image.
The Edit Screen Image or Edit Array Image dialog box opens.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 509

Parameter Description
Screen Image Select the screen image to display on the television, LED, or video screen
from either the default content (see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide) or the current files textures.
Image Adjustments If the selected image does not have the desired size or position in the Preview,
adjust its scale or position
Scale Increases or decreases the image scale
Horizontal Shift Shifts the image horizontally to the left or right
Vertical Shift Shifts the image vertically up or down
Tile Image Repeats the image over the screen; deselect to show only a single instance of
the image; does not apply to LED screens
Preview Displays the screen image at the correct aspect ratio for the video screen

2. If needed, adjust the image scale, and shift the image horizontally or vertically until it appears correctly in the
preview, and then click OK.

Formatting Video Screen Object Labels

A variety of video screen object labels can be included on the drawing. Different options are available depending on the
video screen object.
To select labels for display and format the text:
1. Select a video screen object. From the Object Info palette, click Text Options.
The Text Options dialog box opens.

Text Option Description

Coverage Zone Displays the near and far coverage zone distances and multipliers at the
specified text size and color
510 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Text Option Description

Image Dimensions Displays the screen image dimensions, and if selected, the image size, screen
clearance, and aspect ratio values, at the specified text size, color, and
alignment. If desired, the image dimension text order can be changed from
the default height x width to width x height instead, by selecting Swap
Dimension Order.
Lens Information Displays the projector lens size at the specified text size, color, and alignment
Projection Distance Displays the distance from the projector to the screen at the specified text
size, color, and alignment. A dimension line can be included; specify the
marker size. Video screens can also display the total projection depth
distance.
Projector IDs Labels the projector body with the entered ID information (such as projector
name), at the specified text size and color. Any Note text is not displayed, but
stores internal information about the projector.
Multiple Projector Displays the multiple projector layout for stacked projectors at the specified
Note text size and color
Show Zone For LED screen arrays, displays the overall array dimensions and total
Dimensions number of modules at the specified text size, color, and alignment
Keep Text Horizontal Maintains the text in a horizontal position even when the object is rotated;
deselect this option to rotate the label along with the object

2. Specify the text labels and formatting, and then click OK.
Once the labels have been added to the drawing, they can be moved by clicking and dragging the label control point.
Click Default Text Positions from the Object Info palette of a selected video object to restore the text labels to their
original locations.

Label control point

Inserting Speakers and Speaker Arrays

Audio objects, including speakers and arrays of speakers, are often a required part of visualizing a room or stage layout
for event planning and entertainment design, and can also be needed for theater productions. The Vectorworks
Spotlight product creates speaker system layout drawings and can perform basic audio coverage analysis. The speakers
and speaker arrays can be labeled with information and calculated data and can display the optimum listening area for
up to three ranges.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 511

Speaker arrays Speaker

The Vectorworks Spotlight software comes with default speaker data located in the audio tools folders of the
[Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the Vectorworks Spotlight product (see Libraries on page 155 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). You can also save speaker data to a library file, which can be shared
with others, and you can import speaker data from other files. The file(s) must be located within the Audio
Tools\Speakers or Audio Tools\Bumpers folders.
Another way to share speakers or speaker arrays is to create symbols from them and import the symbol into
another file.

Inserting Speakers
Individual speakers that are not part of an array are inserted with the Speaker tool. Manually-inserted speakers can be
placed as single speakers, or as several speakers arranged in a column. A variety of supports and labeling options are
available. Use a speaker type and information with pre-set data from the speaker library file located in the
[Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the Vectorworks Spotlight product (see Libraries on page 155 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide), or create a speaker with custom data and save it to the library for future
use and sharing.

To insert a speaker:

1. Click the Speaker tool from the Spotlight tool set.

2. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
3. If this is the first time a speaker is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the
default preferences, which apply to all speakers placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited later
in the Object Info palette. Click OK.

The speaker objects parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
512 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Type Select a speaker from the default speaker data available in the library file;
alternatively, select <Generic> to create a speaker with custom data and then save the
speaker as a custom speaker in the library file.
Select Import to import predefined speaker data only (such as width and weight)
from a default content library file or other file containing speakers. The Import
Speaker Type dialog box opens to select the file and type. A symbol is not imported
from the file; only data is added.
Brand Specifies the speaker manufacturer
Model Specifies the manufacturers information
Front Width/Height Indicates the width and height of the front face of the speaker
Back Width/Height Indicates the width and height of the back face of the speaker; the back face cannot
be larger than the front face
Depth Specifies the speaker depth
Tilt Reference When the speaker is in an array, sets the reference for tilting the speaker to either the
front or back face
Weight Indicates the weight of the speaker
Self-Powered Indicates whether the speaker uses an internal or remote amplifier
Expand Dispersion When selected, allows you to enter range notes and dispersion area information for
Features up to three ranges; deselect to enter only Overall information
Range 1/2/3 Enter notes for three dispersion ranges, such as a frequency range, key frequency, or
crossover point. When Expand Dispersion Features is deselected, the range is
automatically set to Overall and only one set of notes can be entered.
Horiz./Vert. Enter the horizontal and vertical dispersion angle(s), from 0 to 180; ranges 2 and 3
Dispersion are only available when Expand Dispersion Features is selected
Throw Distance Sets the throw distance reference for the dispersion lines; ranges 2 and 3 are only
available when Expand Dispersion Features is selected
Save Type to Library Saves the current speaker configuration as a new speaker type; enter the name of the
speaker type. This custom speaker can then be selected from the Type list.
Delete Type from Removes the speaker currently selected in Type from the library file; the current
Library parameters remain as set, and the type becomes <Generic>
Listening Height Sets the listening height reference for the dispersion lines. Listening height must be
less than the speakers elevation (Z value).
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 513

Parameter Description
Show Dispersion Draws the top, bottom, left, and right dispersion lines, along with a center reference
Range 1/2/3 line, for each of the three dispersion ranges selected for display (or the Overall range
if expanded dispersion is not selected). An outline or hatch pattern representing the
listening area coverage shadow is drawn when the throw distance and the vertical
dispersion and tilt angles allow the speaker to cover the area at or below the
Listening Height.

Coverage shadow

Dispersion line

Show Dispersion Displays hatch fills in the coverage shadow of each enabled dispersion range
Hatch
Support Select the support method for the speaker. The options are for reference only, except
for Tripod, which creates a tripod floor stand in the drawing.
Stand Height For tripod support, sets the height of the floor stand
Tilt Difference Displays the tilt difference between the selected speaker and the one above it
Actual Tilt Angle Specifies the tilt angle of the speaker, from -90 to 90
Location Indicates the speaker location (such as Downstage Right)
Purpose Indicates the purpose of the speaker (such as Center Fill)
Rack Enter notes about the rack driving the speaker
Drive Line Indicates information about the drive line feeding the signal to the speaker
Column ID An individual speaker can optionally be part of a column of speakers or in a speaker
array. This specifies the column ID. Speakers in the same column receive a stacked
Column ID when Arrange Column is clicked.
Position in Column When speakers are arranged in a column or array, indicates the speakers position in
the stack. Position 1 is the top speaker.
Arrange Column Provides selected speakers with a Column ID in order of their arrangement, based
on their elevation (Z value); calculates tilt differences, and assigns each speaker a
Position in Column number
Notes Enter miscellaneous notes such as rental source or stock number
514 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Class Speaker Parts When first selected, automatically creates classes for the different parts of the
speaker, for appearance and visibility control. This allows portions of the cabinets,
grills, and other elements to be set to visible, grayed, or invisible. Once the classes
have been created, this check box toggles whether class visibility changes apply to
the selected speaker object. You may need to click Update to view any changes.
Parts Classes Prefix When speaker parts are classed, enter a prefix for the class names so that they are
sorted together
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text of
coverage zones and other labels; see Formatting Speaker Object Labels on
page 520
Default Text Position Restores text labels to their default positions
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters. For example, you may need to refresh the display when toggling Class
Speaker Parts on and off, when the attributes of the speaker parts have been set by
class.

Inserting Speaker Arrays

Large venues require the use of speaker arrays, which consist of speakers stacked in a column and topped by a bumper
(top mounting bracket). Up to three different types of speakers can be included in an array. The speakers can each be
tilted differently to provide maximum audio coverage for the audience.

To insert a speaker array:

1. Click the Speaker Array tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
3. If this is the first time a speaker array is placed on the drawing, the object properties dialog box opens. Specify the
default preferences, which apply to all arrays placed subsequently in this drawing. Properties can be edited later in
the Object Info palette. Click OK.
4. A bumper is inserted on the drawing. From the Object Info palette, click Configure Array.
The Array Detail and Configuration dialog box opens. Specify the bumper parameters on the Bumper tab.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 515

Parameter Description
Definition
Type Select a bumper from the default bumper data available in the library file;
alternatively, select <Generic> to create a bumper with custom data and then
save the bumper as a custom bumper in the library file.
Select Import to import predefined bumper data only (such as width and
weight) from a default content library file or other file containing bumpers.
The Import Bumper Type dialog box opens to select the file and type. A
symbol is not imported from the file; only data is added.
Brand Specifies the bumper manufacturer
Model Specifies the manufacturers information
Save Type To Saves the current bumper configuration as a new bumper type; enter the name
Library of the bumper type. This custom bumper can then be selected from the Type
list.
Delete Type From Removes the speaker currently selected in Type from the library file; the
Library current parameters remain as set, and the type becomes <Generic>
Attributes
Width/Depth Indicates the width and depth of the bumper
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the bumper
516 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Hardware Width Sets the width of the bumper hardware (brackets)
Weight Specifies the bumper weight
Preview Displays a preview of the bumper, which updates as parameters change; the
arrow indicates the front face

5. On the Speaker A, B, and C tabs, configure up to three types of speakers for inclusion in the array. If speaker B
and/or C are not to be included, select a Type of None on those tabs.

Parameter Description
Definition
Type Select a speaker from the default speaker data available in the library file;
alternatively, select <Generic> to create a speaker with custom data and then
save the speaker as a custom speaker in the library file.
Select Import to import predefined speaker data only (such as width and
weight) from a default content library file or other file containing speakers.
The Import Speaker Type dialog box opens to select the file and type. A
symbol is not imported from the file; only data is added
Brand Specifies the speaker manufacturer
Model Specifies the manufacturers information
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 517

Parameter Description
Save Type to Saves the current speaker configuration as a new speaker type; enter the name
Library of the speaker type. This custom speaker can then be selected from the Type
list.
Delete Type from Removes the speaker currently selected in Type from the library file; the
Library current parameters remain as set, and the type becomes <Generic>
Attributes
Front Width/Height Indicates the width and height of the front face of the speaker
Back Width/Height Indicates the width and height of the back face of the speaker; the back face
cannot be larger than the front face
Depth Specifies the speaker depth
Tilt Reference For speakers in an array, sets the reference for tilting the speaker to either the
front or back face
Weight Indicates the weight of the speaker
Self-Powered Indicates whether the speaker uses an internal or remote amplifier
Dispersions
Override Vertical Calculates the dispersion based on the arrays Angle Relative to Preceding
Dispersion(s) with value for each speaker set on the Array tab, rather than the individual
Array Angles speakers vertical dispersion angles
Expanded Dispersion When selected, allows you to enter range notes and dispersion area
information for up to three ranges; deselect to enter only Overall information
Range 1/2/3 Enter notes for three dispersion ranges, such as a frequency range, key
frequency, or crossover point. When Expanded Dispersion is deselected, the
range is automatically set to Overall and only one set of notes can be entered
Horiz./Vert. Enter the horizontal and vertical dispersion angle(s), from 0 to 180; ranges 2
Dispersion and 3 are only available when Expanded Dispersion is selected
Throw Distance Sets the throw distance reference for the dispersion lines; ranges 2 and 3 are
only available when Expanded Dispersion is selected
Preview Displays a preview of the speaker, which updates as parameters change; the
arrow indicates the front face

6. Set up the array configuration on the Array tab.

518 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Bumper Type Displays the bumper type that was selected on the Bumper tab
Bumper Angle Sets the angle of the bumper, establishing a starting angle for the top
mounting
Definition Lists the speakers that make up the array and their relative and actual
dispersion angles, in order from top to bottom starting from below the
bumper. Add speakers to the list by selecting one or more from the Speaker
Types to Add list, and then clicking Add/Swap Speaker(s). To re-order the
speakers, click the # column of the speaker to be moved, and drag it up or
down the list. A horizontal line indicates where the speaker will be inserted in
the current order.
Speaker Types to Add Lists the speaker(s) defined on the Speaker tabs. These speakers are available
for placement in the array.
Add/Swap Speaker(s) Adds one or more selected speakers to the array; to swap speakers, select the
speaker(s) to be replaced in the Definition list first. To add speakers without
swapping, ensure that no speakers are highlighted in the Definition list.
Type Counts Lists the number of each type of speaker, as well as the total number of
speakers, included in the array
Delete Speaker(s) Deletes the speaker(s) selected in the Definition list
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 519

Parameter Description
Angle Relative to Sets the angle of the speaker(s) selected in the Definition list. Individual
Preceding speakers have range dispersion angle settings, but these can be overridden to
use this angle set for the array instead. The Rel and Act angles in the
Definition list update to reflect the current speaker angles.
Preview Displays a preview of the speaker array, which updates as parameters change;
the arrows indicate the front face

7. Click OK to create the speaker array. From the Object Info palette, click Insert Speakers to add the speakers to
the drawing.
The speaker array properties can be edited in the Object Info palette. To edit the array, select the bumper. Individual
speakers can be selected and certain parameters can be set independently, but since the speakers are controlled by the
array, many of their parameters are not available (see Inserting Speakers on page 511 for parameter descriptions).

Parameter Description
Array Details
Column ID Specifies a name for the bumper-speaker combination that makes up the array
Location Indicates the array location (such as Downstage Right)
Purpose Indicates the purpose of the array (such as Center Fill)
Rack Enter notes about the rack driving the speaker
Drive Line Indicates information about the drive line feeding signal to the speaker
Notes Enter miscellaneous notes such as rental source or stock number
Configure Array Opens the Array Detail and Configuration dialog box, to view and edit speaker
array parameters
Current Types Lists the bumper and speakers that make up the array, along with speaker counts
Total Weight Displays the total weight of all the array components, including the bumper; click
Insert Speakers if not displayed
Bottom Box Trim Displays the vertical trim of the bottom speaker; click Insert Speakers if not
displayed
Listening Height Sets the listening height reference for the speakers dispersion lines. Listening
height must be less than any speakers elevation (Z value).
Override A/B/C Vert. Calculates the dispersion based on the arrays Angle Relative to Preceding value
Disp. with Array for each speaker set on the Array tab, rather than the individual speakers vertical
Angles dispersion angles
520 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Show Dispersion for Draws the top, bottom, left, and right dispersion lines for each of the three
Range 1/2/3 dispersion ranges selected for display, for each speaker (or the Overall range if
expanded dispersion is not selected). When applicable, a center reference line is
drawn for each of the three dispersion ranges, for each of the speaker models in the
array. An outline or hatch pattern representing the listening area coverage shadow
is drawn when the throw distance and the vertical dispersion and tilt angles allow
the speaker to cover the area at or below the Listening Height.

Show Dispersion Displays hatch fills in the coverage shadow of each enabled dispersion range
Hatch
Class Speaker Array When first selected, automatically creates classes for the different parts of the
Parts speaker array, for appearance and visibility control. This allows portions of the
cabinets, grills, and other elements to be set to visible, grayed, or invisible. Once
the classes have been created, this check box toggles whether class visibility
changes apply to the selected array object.
Class Prefix When speaker parts are classed, creates a prefix for the class names so that they are
sorted together
Insert Speakers The first time the speaker array is created, click Insert Speakers after exiting the
Array Detail and Configuration dialog box, to add the speakers to the array
Text Options Opens the Text Options dialog box, to enable the display and format the text of
coverage zones and other labels; see Formatting Speaker Object Labels on
page 520
Default Text Position Restores text labels to their default positions
Update Updates the object when changes have been made to the Object Info palette
parameters. For example, you may need to refresh the display to update the
dispersion ranges and hatch after overriding the dispersion calculations.

Formatting Speaker Object Labels

A variety of speaker and speaker array labels can be included on the drawing. Different options are available for
speakers and speaker arrays. A speaker array, as well as the individual speakers that make up the array, can be labeled.
To select labels for display and format the text:
1. Select a speaker or speaker array object (bumper). From the Object Info palette, click Text Options.
The Text Options dialog box opens.
 Placing Stage Objects on the Light Plot | 521

Parameter Description
Optional Elements to Select items to add to the text label; different label elements are available for
Show speakers and speaker arrays
Show Element Labels Includes the name of the element along with the value; deselect this option to
display the parameter value only
Text Attributes
Keep Text Maintains the text in a horizontal position even when the object is rotated;
Horizontal deselect this option to rotate the label along with the object
Fill Text Adds a white background fill behind the text
Background
Text Formatting Specify the text size, color, and alignment
Options

2. Specify the text label elements and formatting, and then click OK.
Once the label has been added to the drawing, it can be moved by clicking and dragging the label control point. Click
Default Text Position from the Object Info palette of a selected speaker or array object to restore the text label(s) to the
original location.

Label control point

522 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Lighting Symbol Maintenance

Manage, edit, and update the symbols and data for all the lighting symbols in the file from a single location. Easily spot
inconsistencies and missing data, and fix the issues for all existing symbols or just for future symbol placement.
To maintain the data and symbols for all the lighting symbols in the file:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Lighting Symbol Maintenance.
The Lighting Symbol Maintenance dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Lighting symbol list Lists all symbols in the file with a Light Info (or Light Info M, for metric
measurements) record attached. The columns display the data contained in the
attached Light Info record. Sort the symbols in ascending or descending
alphabetical order by clicking in the first column header.
New Opens the Choose a Symbol dialog box, listing all the symbol definitions in the
file without the Light Info (or Light Info M) record attached. Select a symbol to
add the Light Info record to the symbol definition and add the symbol to the
maintenance list, where its data can then be edited.
 Lighting Symbol Maintenance | 523

Parameter Description
Edit Opens the Edit Instrument Data dialog box, displaying the record data for the
selected row(s) (alternatively, double-click on the row to edit).

Replace Opens the Choose a Symbol dialog box, listing all the symbol definitions in the
file that are not in the maintenance list. Select a symbol to replace the symbol
from the currently selected row of the maintenance list. The existing data from the
selected row remain unchanged; only the symbol is replaced.
Delete Deletes the Light Info (or Light Info M) record from the symbol in the currently
selected row of the maintenance list, and removes the row from the list. The
symbol is not removed from the file, but the symbol no longer appears in reports
about the lighting device.
Remove Unused Removes the Light Info (or Light Info M) record from all symbols in the
maintenance list which are currently not used in a lighting device. The items are
removed from the maintenance list, but the symbols are not removed from the file.
Copy All Types to Model For uniformity, copies the data from the Inst Type column to the Model Name
Names column. This eliminates inconsistencies and missing model name data.
Update all lighting devices When selected, the symbol definition edits that have been made affect all existing
and future symbol instances in the file, potentially changing existing lighting
devices in the drawing. Deselect the option to only affect future symbol
placement.

2. When finished with lighting symbol maintenance tasks, click OK.

3. If any lighting instrument data has changed, but Update all lighting devices was not selected, an alert message
displays.
Click Yes to update all existing and future symbol instances in the file. Select No to update only future symbol
instances.
524 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Lighting Inventory Setup

The current status of available lighting device inventory is specified with the Lighting Inventory Setup command.
The number of available devices can be included in instrument summaries.
To establish and maintain inventory counts:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Lighting Inventory Setup.
The Lighting Inventory Setup dialog box opens.

2. Select each device type row, and enter the number of available instruments in the Quantity.
The devices can be sorted by clicking in the Type column header.
3. Click OK.

Creating Instrument Summaries

Statistics on the instruments and accessories used in the light plot help with show organization. Instrument summaries
can be created for the all instruments (see Creating an Instrument Summary on page 525), and/or for specific lighting
positions (see Creating an Instrument Summary for a Lighting Position on page 531). The summary, which can be
custom formatted, can show the symbol thumbnail and name, the number of each kind of instrument and accessories in
use, display total counts, and add special elements like notes, column breaks, circuit summaries, typical label legend
layout, and other items. Counting can be subtotaled to count instrument bodies and lenses. Symbols which have the
same instrument type are counted together, allowing for alternate versions of a single type. The summary can compare
its information to the current inventory so that the designer can determine how many instruments remain in the
inventory, or whether more instruments have been specified than are currently present in the inventory.
 Creating Instrument Summaries | 525

Creating an Instrument Summary

Column Offset Text Width

Text Distance

Item Spacing

Total Bodies

Left Margin

To create an instrument summary:

1. Click the Instrument Summary tool from the Spotlight tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Instrument Summary Settings dialog box opens. Default parameter settings made here, both for global
instrument summaries and lighting position summaries, apply to instrument summaries placed later in the file.
These default sets are saved separately and are in effect depending on how the summary is inserted. Taking the
time to establish the defaults makes it much easier to insert summaries for lighting positions or for the entire
drawing with the desired defaults already specified.
526 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Summary Defaults for Select whether to specify the default settings for the summary when inserting
it with the Instrument Summary tool (select Instruments) or from a lighting
position (select Positions).
This option is not available from the Object Info palette after the summary
has been placed.
Build List Opens the Build Summary List dialog box, for specifying the components to
include in the summary
Width Sets the total width of the summary
Column Offset Sets the distance between columns
Instruments
Hide Unused Types When selected, excludes instrument symbols which are not currently used in
the drawing (these instruments use a blue font in the Build Summary List
dialog box), and only displays symbols which are used by a lighting device
Show Symbols Includes a thumbnail graphic of each lighting instrument symbol in the key
Auto Rotate Orients symbols automatically to minimize the amount of space required
Scale Scales symbols by the specified proportion; this allows the instrument
summary to be placed on a sheet layer without displaying the symbols at 1:1
scale
Show Wattages Appends "@ [wattage]" to the instrument type.
A blank wattage or a wattage of 0 does not display.
Show Weights Displays the unit's weight, as set in the default parameters of the symbol (in
the Light Info Record, or for metric drawings, Light Info Record M)
 Creating Instrument Summaries | 527

Parameter Description
Show Lamp Types Displays the lamp type (lamp specification or ANSI code), as set in the
default parameters of the symbol (in the Light Info Record)
Show Counts Displays a count value for each instrument type
Compare to Compares and displays the counts against the total number of units of each
Inventory type as calculated in the inventory (see Lighting Inventory Setup on
page 524)
Left Margin Sets the maximum distance to the left of the summary insertion point for the
symbols to display, in page units
Item Spacing Specifies the vertical distance between instrument graphics, in page units.
Additional distance is automatically added if the symbol is larger than the
spacing.
Text Distance Sets the distance between the summary insertion point and the text origin, in
page units
Text Width Sets the maximum width of text before it wraps, in page units
Headers
Section Align Aligns the list header to the left or center
Size/Style Specifies the text formatting for the header
Color Summary
Show Swatch When a color summary is included, adds a color swatch for each color used in
the drawing
Border
Style Select the style of border for the summary, or whether to omit the border
Separation For the double border style, sets the distance between the lines
Padding The distance, in page units, between the bounding box of the summary and
the border
Title
Show Title Displays a title for the instrument summary
Text Specify the title text to display
Position Select where to locate the summary title with respect to the border
Font/Size/Style Specifies the text formatting for the title

3. Click Build List to select the elements to be included in the summary.

The Build Summary List dialog box opens, to specify what is listed in the summary. You can add instrument
symbols in use, instrument symbols present in the file (but not currently in the drawing), and formatting elements
such as column headers, notes, and circuit summaries.
Click on each type of component and move the desired elements to the Component List. To change the order,
click in the first column and drag the item to the desired position in the list, or click Sort Symbols to sort them
alphabetically.
528 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Available Components Swaps the display of available components among used instruments, unused
instruments, and other summary items
Used Instrument Lists all symbols that are currently in use by a lighting device
Symbols
Unused Instrument Lists all the symbols in the file that are currently not in use by a lighting device (unused
Symbols symbols display in blue so they can be distinguished from the used symbols in the
Component List)
 Creating Instrument Summaries | 529

Parameter Description
Other Elements Lists summary and display elements which can be added to customize the summary;
certain items require the specification of additional customization options after adding
them to the Component List
Column break: Begins a new column in the summary
Column Headers: Adds a Symbol and Description header to each column
Begin subtotal: Indicates the start of a subtotal count section
End subtotal: Indicates the end of a subtotal count section; the subtotal value is
placed at this location.
If a subtotal cannot be calculated, nothing is displayed in the summary.
Header: Adds a section header
Divider: Places a horizontal separator across the column; separator does not extend
into the border padding area
Full divider: Places a horizontal separator across the column; separator extends to
the border
Note: Adds text that is aligned with the symbol text
Typical symbol: Places a selected symbol that is normally the reference symbol
used for label legends
Color summary: Adds a summary of all the gel colors used, with color, gel size, and
counts (select Show Swatch in the Instrument Summary Settings dialog box or
Object Info palette to include a color swatch)
Circuit summary: Adds a summary of the circuits in use (usually only included
with lighting position summaries)
Available Components Lists the items that can be added to the instrument summary; the available items
list depend on the selection in Available Components. Sort the symbols in ascending or
descending order by clicking in the first column header.
Display Components For symbols which consist of nested symbols, adds the nested symbols to the list
> Adds one or more selected item(s) from the Available Components list to the
Component List. The items are added to the row above the selected row, or to the end
of the list if nothing is selected.
Alternatively, double-click to add the item(s).
>> Adds all the items displayed in the Available Components list to the Component List.
< Removes one or more selected item(s) from the Component List
<< Removes all the items from the Component List
Component List Lists all the components, in order, to include in the instrument summary. Change the
order by clicking in the first column and dragging to the desired location; sort in
ascending or descending order by clicking in the first column header. The Circuits
column displays specified circuit counts for multi-circuit instruments. Click in the NR
column of a selected symbol to prevent the symbol from automatically rotating in the
summary thumbnail display.
530 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Parameter Description
Number of Circuits Select multi-circuit instruments in the Component List, and enter the number of
circuits used (these are displayed in the Circuits column). Rows without a specific
number of circuits assume that one circuit is used.
Sort Symbols Click to sort all the components, including other elements, in alphabetical order
Options For other elements, opens a dialog box with special formatting options

4. If you have included other elements that require formatting, select each one from the Component List and click
Options.
For headers and notes, enter the header or note text.
For typical symbol, select the symbol to indicate labels (usually a label legend symbol, located within the
Label Legend symbol folder)
For circuit summaries, the Circuit Summary Options dialog box opens to specify the circuit information to
include in a lighting position summary. Specify the types of devices to count and how to count them, and enter
the device amperage rating/voltage to obtain a report indicating the circuit type you will need for those devices.

Parameter Description
Header Enter the circuit summary header text
Count By Select whether to count the circuits by channel, dimmer, or circuit number
Twofer By Select the method for counting two-fered circuits as one circuit:
None: Count all circuits, including ganged circuits
Explicit: Count only two-fer circuits that were created by the Ganging tool
Anywhere: Counts any two-fered circuits, including those created by the Ganging
tool and any set of two or more lights that are on the same circuit
 Creating Instrument Summaries | 531

Parameter Description
Amperage Ratings Specify the amperage ratings for the lighting devices, separating multiple values with a
semi-colon (for example, 20;50 indicates 20A and 50A). Amperage rating is
determined by a combination of a devices wattage and voltage.
Some examples include:
With a voltage of 120V and an instrument with a 5000W rating, the instrument would
go into the 50A circuit
With a voltage of 120V and an instrument with a 500W rating, the instrument would
go into the 20A circuit
With a voltage of 120V and three 1000W instruments two-fered together, the
instruments would go into the 50A circuit with two 50A two-fers
Voltage Specify the circuit voltage
Device Types Select the types of devices to count in the circuit summary; typically two or more
summaries are included, combining selected device types and specific power
requirements so that you know the amperage required per circuit for various device
types

5. Click OK to return to the Build Summary List; continue specifying summary list options.
6. Click OK to close the Instrument Summary Settings dialog box and return to the Instrument Summary Settings
dialog box.
7. Click OK.
8. Click in the drawing to place the instrument summary. Click again to set the rotation.
The instrument summary parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette. However, the Summary Defaults
for option is not available since the summary already exists for instruments or lighting positions.
Filtering and refreshing are options that are available from the Object Info palette after an instrument summary has
been added to the drawing.

Parameter Description
Active Filters Displays the status of any summary filtering in effect
Filters Opens the Summary Filters dialog box, for specifying filtering of the
summary items by lighting position, layer, class, or custom criteria; see
Filtering Instrument Summary Contents on page 532
Refresh When instruments in the drawing, lighting positions, inventory counts, or
other factors have changed, updates the instrument summary with the latest
data

Creating an Instrument Summary for a Lighting Position

An instrument summary can be created for a lighting position rather than for the entire drawing.
To create an instrument summary for a selected lighting position:
1. Select the lighting position.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Insert Position Summary.
3. A position summary is added next to the lighting position.
532 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

If a summary build list has never been specified in the file, a placeholder labeled Build List is placed instead,
indicating that a build list has not yet been specified in the file and needs to be set.
The position summary uses the Summary Defaults for parameters for a position, as set up in the instrument
summary settings, and the summary is filtered for the current lighting position. As instruments are added to the
position, click Insert Position Summary to add the instruments to the end of the summary. To change specific
instrument summary parameters, select the instrument summary and edit the parameters in the Object Info palette
as described in Creating an Instrument Summary on page 525.
If you delete a lighting position, the associated instrument summary is also deleted.

Filtering Instrument Summary Contents

Instrument summaries can be filtered to limit the contents by lighting position, layer, class, or specified criteria.
To filter the instrument summary contents:
1. Select an instrument summary.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Filters.
The Summary Filters dialog box opens. Each tab includes filtering options to limit the summary contents
according to specified criteria. The selections made on each tab are additive.

Parameter Description
Position Click in the first column to select one or more lighting positions to use as a filter;
instruments from lighting positions with a check mark are included
Layers Click in the first column to select one or more layers to use as a filter; instruments from
layers with a check mark are included
Classes Click in the first column to select one or more classes to use as a filter; instruments from
classes with a check mark are included
Custom Specify custom filtering criteria by entering a criteria string, or by clicking Criteria and
specifying the exact filtering criteria in the Criteria dialog box (which automatically
creates the criteria string). For more information on specifying criteria, see Entering
Formulas in Worksheet Cells on page 828 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
 Generating Paperwork | 533

3. Click OK.
The summary list is filtered. The Active Filters in the Object Info palette displays the current filters and/or criteria
string.

Generating Paperwork
The information to be included in the various schedules and reports, as well as the format of the reports, is specified in
the Generate Paperwork dialog box.
The Choose Schedule command automatically creates certain reports as preformatted worksheets; see Creating
Schedules Automatically on page 37.
To set up the schedule and report information:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Generate Paperwork.
The Generate Paperwork dialog box opens.

2. Select the desired Schedules and Reports. Each schedule and report selected must be set up by clicking on its
Setup button. The setup procedure is described in the following sections.
3. Configure the rest of the paperwork setup by entering the Header Configuration, Show Information and the
Page Properties (see Header Configuration on page 538). Click OK to generate the desired paperwork with the
specified settings.

Schedule Setup
The information to be included in the various schedules, as well as the format of the schedules, is specified in the
Schedule Formatting dialog box.
To set up the schedule contents and formatting:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Generate Paperwork. The Generate Paperwork dialog box opens.
2. Click the Setup button under the Schedules list. The Schedule Formatting dialog box opens.
534 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Each schedule in the Schedule list is formatted in the same way. The formatting must be specified for each
schedule by first selecting the schedule from the list and then specifying the format.
When selecting Available fields and Column Order, press and hold the Shift key to select multiple, contiguous
items or press and hold the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) to select non-contiguous items.

Parameter/Button Description
Printed Name Suggests a title for the top of the report of the selected schedule. Change the
title, if desired, by typing in a new title for that schedule.
Available Fields Displays the items that can be included in the schedule
Schedule Columns Displays, in order, the columns that have been selected to appear in the
schedule
Move > Adds a selected available item to the list of schedule columns
Move < Removes a column from the Schedule Columns list
Move Up/Move Down The most recently added item displays at the bottom of the Schedule
Columns list, indicating that it is the last column in the report; to change the
column order, select a column and click on the Move Up and Move Down
buttons until it is in the desired order
Column Format For each column in the Schedule Columns list, select Wide, Medium, or
Narrow from the Width list. These selections represent the relative widths
of the columns in relation to the other columns. Since the schedule is
automatically fit to the page, specifying the actual widths is unnecessary.
The actual width of the column is dependent upon the number of columns as
well as the final printed schedule size.
 Generating Paperwork | 535

Parameter/Button Description
Page Formatting Specifies the formatting of the Column Headers and report Body text; select
the Font, Style, and Size for each. Click the Change button to open the
Format Text dialog box for editing text parameters (see Formatting Text
on page 348 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

3. After specifying the column information, order, and width, as well as the page formatting for each type of
schedule to be generated, click OK to return to the Generate Paperwork dialog box. The schedule formatting is
used when the paperwork is generated.
The Schedule formatting settings are saved in the files Schedule Formats worksheet. The worksheet, and all the
formatting, can be imported into another file through the Resource Browser.

Inventory Reports
To create an inventory of items currently placed in the light plot and items available, set up an Inventory Report.
This inventory list is separate from the one created in Lighting Inventory Setup on page 524.
To set up an inventory report:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Generate Paperwork, and then select Inventory in the Generate Paperwork dialog
box. To create an inventory report that will separate instrument information according to lighting position, select
Break Down By Position.

2. Click the Setup button next to Inventory. The Inventory Report dialog box opens.

3. The Inventory Items are listed on the left. These items are based on symbol definitions that are used in the file. If
an item that needs to be inventoried is not in the list, click Add Item.
The Add Item dialog box opens.
536 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

4. Browse through the symbol folders of the current file (listed at the top of the Add Item dialog box) and select the
desired folder. The symbols that are contained in the folder are listed at the bottom of the Add Item dialog box.
Select the item to be added to the inventory list, and click OK. The selected symbol is added to the Inventory
Items list in the Inventory Report dialog box.

This symbol
was added to
the inventory

5. Click on each item in the list, and enter its Number in Inventory value. The number of units used in the light plot,
as well as the number available for use, are displayed.
Use the Resource Browser to copy the inventory information from another file by importing the Inventory report
worksheet into the current files resources (see Importing Worksheets from Another Vectorworks File on
page 845 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
6. Click OK to close the Inventory Report dialog box and return to the Generate Paperwork dialog box.

Deleting Inventory Items

Items can be deleted from the inventory list.
To delete an item from the inventory:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Generate Paperwork, and then select Inventory and click Setup.
The Inventory Report dialog box opens.
2. Select the inventory item to delete, and then click Delete Item.
3. Click OK. The item is removed from the inventory report.
This action does not remove the item from the drawing. If the lighting device is still present in the file when the
Setup button is clicked, the item returns to the inventory list. However, the number of items in inventory must be
re-entered.
 Generating Paperwork | 537

Magic Sheets
Magic sheets are graphical representations of instruments on the plot; they can be broken down either by focus point or
color. Magic sheets are invaluable for cueing a show. They are simple to set up and generate in the Vectorworks
Spotlight product.
To create a magic sheet:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Generate Paperwork, and then select Magic Sheets in the Generate Paperwork
dialog box.

2. Click the Setup button next to Magic Sheets. The Magic Sheet Setup dialog box opens. Specify the magic sheet
setup parameters.

Action Description
Generates the magic sheets Click Color; each instrument of a particular color is shown in one view.
with lighting summarized by The general Theatre Style needs to be selected from the list to be used
color as a reference for the color summaries.
Generates the magic sheets Click Area. All instrumentation that has a specified focus point will be
with lighting summarized by included in the report. If desired, the magic sheet color number value
focus area can be displayed in an approximation of its gel color. Select Show
Color Name in color.

The Theatre Styles are editable symbols. Custom styles can be added into the files Theater Types folder using the
Resource Browser.
3. Click OK to close the Magic Sheet Setup dialog box and return to the Generate Paperwork dialog box.

Color Cut List

A color cut list shows all the colors required by the show, and calculates the number of each cut size required per color.
To create a color cut list:
1. Select Spotlight > Reports > Generate Paperwork and then select Color Cut List in the Generate Paperwork
dialog box.
2. If desired, select Break Down By Position to further break the color cut list down by lighting position.
538 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Header Configuration
In the Generate Paperwork dialog box, select the position of the header information specified in Show Information.
For the Left, Center, and Right header positions, select the information to be displayed from the list (Designer, Show
Name, and/or Date). If no header information is desired for the location, select None.

Show Information
In the Generate Paperwork dialog box, enter the name of the lighting Designer and the Show Name, if desired. Type
the date of the show or event. To use todays date, click Date.

Page Properties
In the Generate Paperwork dialog box, enter the Page Height and Page Width values in the default file units. These
values specify the print area (page width with printer margins). The width of the schedule columns is affected by this
value.

If desired, a different unit can be used by specifying the value and the unit. For example, even if the default file units
are centimeters, specify eight inches for the Page Properties by entering 8". Click OK to generate the selected
schedules and reports in the format specified.

Reviewing Generated Paperwork

Once the paperwork has been formatted and generated, it can be checked and printed.

Generated Magic Sheets

If Magic Sheets were generated, a new design layer is added to the file. Depending on the type of Magic Sheet
generated, the new design layer is called Magic Sheet-Area or Magic Sheet-Color. The magic sheets are placed on
this design layer, and formatted to the specified page size (select View > Zoom > Fit to Window if the Magic Sheet
items cannot be seen). If the light plot parameters are changed, the magic sheets must be regenerated to reflect the
updates.
 Creating Hanging Cards | 539

Paperwork Worksheets
The specified reports and schedules, once generated, display in the Resource Browser under the Worksheets heading of
the current file.
For more information on worksheets, see Worksheets on page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

The following points should be remembered when working with generated paperwork:
Edits to this type of worksheet do not update the light plot parameters.
If the light plot parameters are edited, this type of report or schedule must be regenerated to reflect the updates.

Creating Hanging Cards

Lighting position hanging cards can be created in the Vectorworks Spotlight product.
To create hanging cards:
1. Set the design layer visibility by selecting Window > Palettes > Navigation and clicking the Design Layers tab.
Set only the design layers with the desired lighting positions and instruments to visible.
2. Similarly, set class visibility by clicking the Classes tab and setting only the desired classes to visible.
3. Select View > Create Viewport.
The Create Viewport dialog box opens. For more information on viewports, see Presenting Drawings with Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 734 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. From the Create on Layer field, select the sheet layer for the viewport (or create a new sheet layer).
5. Select Display Planar Objects and Project Screen Objects, with Top/Plan view and Wireframe rendering. Click
OK.
6. The viewport is created and the sheet layer displays.

7. Select Modify > Edit Viewport.

The Edit Viewport dialog box opens. Select Crop and click OK.
540 | Chapter 12: Stage Objects and Paperwork

Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the viewport and select Edit Crop from the context
menu to crop the viewport.
8. In crop viewport mode, draw a 2D shape to crop the desired lighting position.

To hide the cropping shape, set its line thickness to zero in the Attributes palette. Click Exit Viewport Crop at the
top right of the drawing window to crop the viewport.
9. The cropped viewport displays on the sheet layer.

10. Several viewports can be created on the same sheet layer to display all the desired hanging cards. Changes to the
design layer(s) are automatically reflected in the viewport.
11. Add lighting position summaries to the sheet layer as described in Creating an Instrument Summary for a
Lighting Position on page 531; adjust the Scale of the displayed symbols so that they do not display at a 1:1
scale, but are sized appropriately for the sheet layer.
Visualizing the Lighting Design 13
Overview of Visualizing the Lighting Design
The Vectorworks Spotlight product contains gobo projection and scene visualization features which assist in
previewing the lighting design. The lighting levels for a particular scene can be saved and later recalled, and a
QuickTime movie of the scenes can simulate scene transitions. Design layer viewports of the geometry can be
automatically created, to use the same geometry in both plot and model views.
These features cannot be used to accurately render all the lighting instruments on the stage for every scene.
The Vectorworks Spotlight product also includes an event planning suite for creating an room layout complete with a
stage, steps, lectern, seating, and video screen objects. Automated features make it simple to plan and view the room
setup for an event. Three tools create different types of video screen objects.

Inserting Gobo Projections

A pattern, texture, or color can be placed on a lighting instrument and projected onto the stage. This special light source
and instrument combination is a gobo projection.
Lighting instruments with gobo projections cast a light beam that can be rendered by the Renderworks product. You
can then preview the effect of the gobo projection texture(s) on the stage.
The Renderworks product must be installed to render gobo projections. For more information on rendering, see
Rendering the Drawing on page 639 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Gobo Texture Libraries

The Vectorworks Spotlight product includes thousands of commercial gobo textures from Apollo, Lee, GAM,
GOBOLAND, High End Systems, and Rosco. Through the Resource Browser, import the texture into the current file
from one of the files located in the gobo textures folder of the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the
Vectorworks Spotlight product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). To use
the texture in a gobo projection, specify its name in the Object Info palette (see Creating Gobo Textures on
page 542).
When the Vectorworks Spotlight product is installed, gobo textures are also provided as default content (default content
is automatically imported into the file when selected while changing instrument properties, and displays in the
Resource Browser; see Editing Lighting Instruments on page 459, and Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.)

Inserting a Gobo Projector

A gobo projector is a lighting instrument with a light source and gobo projector specified.
1. Insert a lighting instrument as described in Inserting Instruments on page 458.
2. In the Object Info palette of the selected instrument, click Edit.
The Lighting Device dialog box opens. This provides a convenient way of specifying parameters (see Changing
Instrument Properties on page 462), although the parameters can also be entered directly in the Object Info
palette.
3. On the Instrument Properties tab, specify a focus point for the instrument.
4. For Gobo 1, enter the name of the gobo projection texture (if it has been imported into the file as a resource), or
click Get Resource to select a gobo texture from the default content. Specify the Gobo 1 Rotation angle, if any.
5. If there is a second gobo texture, specify its parameters in Gobo 2.
542 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

6. Click OK.
7. Turn on the embedded light source for the lighting instrument.
Either right-click on the light, and select Edit Light from the context menu to open the Properties dialog box (and
click On), or turn on the light from the Visualization palette.
To preview the effect of a color projection on the stage, indicate the Color name in the Object Info palette of a
selected instrument, without specifying a gobo texture. Render the gobo projection to project the light on the focus
point with the specified color. The colors can be selected from the color libraries installed with the Vectorworks
Spotlight product. The color code must be entered in a Manufacturer color value format (for example, R101). If
the color value cannot be found, the color defaults to white.

Creating Gobo Textures

In addition to the gobo images available in the pre-defined commercial gobo projection libraries, any square image can
be converted into a gobo projection texture.
The QuickTime and Renderworks products must be installed in order to create gobo textures.
Most image-based textures are automatically compressed when imported into a Vectorworks file. Imported JPEG files
retain the original JPEG data; all other image files are compressed using lossless PNG format.
To create a gobo texture:
1. Select Spotlight > Visualization > Create Gobo Texture.
The Create Gobo Texture dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Enter a name for this Specifies the gobo texture name
texture
Edit Texture Edits the gobo texture transparency settings at creation. Once an image
has been selected (as described in the following steps), the Edit Texture
dialog box opens for editing texture transparency settings.

For more information on editing textures, see Editing Textures and Shaders on page 603 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Click OK.
If a resource with an image is already present in the file, the Choose Image dialog box opens.
 Inserting Gobo Projections | 543

Parameter Description
Import an Image File Imports a new image. Click OK and proceed to Step 3.
Reuse an Image from Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains the
Another Resource image. Click OK and proceed to Step 4.

3. Select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog
box. Click Open.

4. If Edit Texture was selected in Step 1, the Edit Texture dialog box opens. Select the desired options and click OK.
Click OK again to close the Create Gobo Texture dialog box.
The texture resource is created and is listed in the Resource Browser.
5. Associate a defined texture with an instrument by entering the texture name in the Gobo 1 or Gobo 2 field of a
selected instruments Object Info palette, and specify the Gobo Rotation, if any.
A texture can be saved in the default content file located in gobo textures folder of the [Vectorworks]\Libraries
folder that is included with the Vectorworks Spotlight product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). Import the texture into the default file, or save a new default file within the folder.

Editing Gobo Texture Transparency Settings

A gobo texture is a transparent image resource listed in the Resource Browser. The transparency settings can be edited
after the gobo image has been specified, or at creation.
To edit a created gobo textures transparency:
1. Select the resource in the Resource Browser.
2. Select Edit from the Resources menu to open the Edit Texture dialog box. The Image Transparency settings can
be edited. For more information on editing textures, see Editing Textures and Shaders on page 603 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The texture Size must be 2 inches.
544 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Click to edit Transparency

settings

Size must be 2 inches

Showing Gobo Projections

The gobo textures and color of a selected light instrument can be projected in a rendered simulation. This rendered
image allows you to preview the effect of the gobo texture.

Gobo Projection Requirements

To be able to project a gobo texture, the lighting instrument must:
Have one or two gobo textures specified
Be aimed at an existing focus area specified in the Focus field of the Object Info palette
Have its associated light source turned on (either right-click on the light, and select Edit Light from the context
menu to open the Properties dialog box (and click On), or turn on the light from the Visualization palette)
Have Draw Beam deselected in the Object Info palette
The following Vectorworks software requirements must be met:
The design layer containing the instrument with gobo texture must also contain 3D geometry (any 3D object that
is capable of accepting a Renderworks light) to project the texture
The Renderworks product must be installed
Either Fast Renderworks or Custom Renderworks can be used
For Custom Renderworks, at a minimum, Shadows and Textures must be selected in the custom Renderworks
settings.
To select the custom settings, select View > Rendering > Custom Renderworks Options. For more information
on Custom Renderworks settings, see Custom Renderworks Options on page 673 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.

Projecting a Gobo Texture

To project a gobo texture:
1. Make all the settings and meet all the requirements described in the previous sections (see Inserting a Gobo
Projector on page 541, and Gobo Projection Requirements on page 544).
2. Select View > Rendering > Custom Renderworks.
 Managing Scenes | 545

Managing Scenes
The levels, colors, positions, and focusing of all the instrument objects can be saved as a lighting scene. The scenes can
then be used to create QuickTime movies of the scene transitions.
QuickTime must be installed to create scene transitions.

Saving Scenes
To save a scene:
1. After the lighting properties for all the instruments have been set correctly, select Spotlight > Visualization >
Manage Scenes. The Manage Scenes dialog box opens.

2. In the Scenes list, the list of saved scenes is displayed. The scenes are sorted by the order in which they are
entered. To save the current settings as a scene, click Save. The Save dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Scene Name Specifies the scene name
Scene Number Specifies the scene number
Up Time Enter the time allotted for the lights to increase in intensity, in seconds
Down Time Enter the time allotted for the lights to decrease in intensity, in seconds

3. Click Done to save the scene. It is added to the Scenes list.

546 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Editing Scenes
To edit a scene:
1. Select the scene from the list in the Manage Scenes dialog box and click Edit.
2. Make the desired change to the Scene Name or Number, or the Up/Down Time, then click Done to save the
change. Confirm the changes.

Removing Scenes
To remove a scene:
1. Select the scene from the list in the Manage Scenes dialog box and click Remove.
2. Confirm that you wish to remove the scene, then click Yes. The scene is removed from the Scenes list.

Restoring Scene Lighting Parameters

To restore lighting parameters from a scene:
1. Select the scene from the list in the Manage Scenes dialog box and click Go!.
2. Confirm that the parameters are to be restored. The current light parameters are replaced by those from the scene.
All current levels, colors, positions, and focus points for all the instruments will be replaced. Any information that
has not been saved will be lost.

Animating Scenes
A QuickTime movie of scene settings can be created to preview the cue transition between the scenes. The contents of
the active window, exactly as they display, are used to create the movie. Therefore, the images must be rendered before
animating the scenes to accurately preview the lighting effect.
QuickTime should have been installed during the Vectorworks Spotlight product installation. If not, it can be installed
from the Vectorworks software installer.
To animate the scenes:
1. Set the rendering option parameters described in Gobo Projection Requirements on page 544.
2. Save the scenes as described in Managing Scenes on page 545.
3. Select Spotlight > Visualization > Animate Scenes.
4. In the Choose Path dialog box, select a location and file name for the movie. Click Save to open the Scene
Animation dialog box.

5. Enter the parameters for the Start and End Scenes. Select the scene name from the list; its parameters display
underneath.
 Creating Plot and Model Views | 547

6. If desired, the scene can be edited by clicking the Edit Scene button. Change the Scene Name, Scene Number,
Up Time and Down Time, and then click OK to confirm the changes. The Up Time and Down Time used to
animate the scenes is taken from the End Scene.
7. To create the animation, enter the scene Hold For time in seconds for both the starting and ending scenes.
8. Edit the QuickTime movie settings by clicking the QuickTime Settings button. The Compression Settings dialog
box opens.

9. Enter the compression settings for the movie file.

See Animating Drawings with QuickTime on page 727 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Also,
see Apples QuickTime website for more information on QuickTime.
QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. Consult QuickTime
documentation before changing Compression Settings.
10. Click OK to exit the QuickTime settings.
11. When the scene animation settings are complete, click OK. The progress is displayed on the screen as the
QuickTime movie is created in the specified location, based on the settings that were entered.
12. To see the movie, locate the .mov file and double-click to play it in the QuickTime Player.

Creating Plot and Model Views

The Vectorworks Spotlight product includes the Create Plot and Model View command, which automatically creates
one or more design layer viewports of geometry to be viewed and rotated in a model layer. This allows users to create
both a 2D lighting plan and model views with unique rotation angles, from the same geometry (lighting positions,
trusses, lighting instruments, and associated geometry). This command represents a lighting design with non-horizontal
lighting positions in Top/Plan view and a properly represented model in the model layer.
Model views can be created in two ways. If the command is run when no objects are selected, special definition
layers are created for each instance of a lighting position, as well as the remaining non-architectural geometry, which
is placed in another definition layer. The associated design layer viewports on the model layer can be rotated
individually for that geometry, with great flexibility, or automatically set to a vertical orientation. Alternatively, run the
command with one or more Vectorworks Spotlight objects selected; a single design layer viewport is created on the
model layer, and its rotation can be automatically set to vertical if desired. This is useful, for example, when selected
trusses need to be viewed in the model with the same vertical orientation.
Architectural geometry, such as floors and walls, cannot be rotated in the model layer.
548 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Creating Model Views of the Entire Plot

To create model views from all valid Vectorworks Spotlight geometry in the plot layer:
1. From a plot layer that contains valid Vectorworks Spotlight objects (lighting positions, trusses, lighting
instruments, and non-architectural 2D or 3D geometry or hybrid symbols), ensure that no items are selected.
2. Select Spotlight > Visualization > Create Plot and Model View.
The Create Plot and Model View dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Name Specifies a name for the definition layer(s); Definition Layer is the default
name. Additional layers are based on the name set here, with an automatically
incremented and appended number (Definition Layer-1, Definition Layer-2,
and so on).
Model Layer Specifies where the model layer will be created; select a layer name from the
list, or create a new layer. If New Model Layer is selected, you will be
prompted to create a design layer after clicking OK.
Separate Creates a new definition layer for each valid lighting position and remaining
non-architectural geometry, allowing each design layer viewport to rotate
independently in the model view; deselect to create a single definition layer
with all valid objects in a single design layer viewport
Vertical Automatically sets all non-architectural geometry to a vertical orientation in
the model layer

3. Click OK.
A design layer viewport is created for each lighting position instance and non-architectural geometry, replacing
the original objects on the plot layer.
If Separate was deselected, a single definition layer contains all Vectorworks Spotlight geometry.
If Separate was selected, a definition layer exists for each instance of the Vectorworks Spotlight geometry.
Finally, a model layer contains design layer viewports for rotation and proper positioning.
4. In the model layer, use the Rotate tool to orient the design layer viewports. See Rotate Tool on page 272 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Creating Model Views of Selected Geometry

To create model views from selected valid Vectorworks Spotlight geometry in the plot layer:
1. From a plot layer that contains valid Vectorworks Spotlight objects (lighting positions, trusses, lighting
instruments, and non-architectural 2D or 3D geometry or hybrid symbols), select the items to be rotated in a model
view.
2. Select Spotlight > Visualization > Create Plot and Model View.
 Event Planning | 549

The Create Plot and Model View dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Name Specifies a name for the definition layer; Definition Layer is the default
name.
Model Layer Specifies where the model layer will be created; select a layer name from the
list, or create a new layer. If New Model Layer is selected, you will be
prompted to create a design layer after clicking OK.
Separate This option is disabled when drawing items are selected
Vertical Automatically sets the selected item(s) to a vertical orientation in the model
layer

3. Click OK.
A design layer viewport is created for the selected Vectorworks Spotlight geometry, replacing those objects on the
plot layer; if Vertical was selected, the model view displays the design layer viewport in a vertical orientation. A
single definition layer contains the original selected Vectorworks Spotlight geometry.
4. If Vertical was not selected, use the Rotate tool in the model layer to orient the design layer viewport. See Rotate
Tool on page 272 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Event Planning
The event planning suite contains automated tools to facilitate setting up a complete room layout for an event such as a
banquet, presentation, or training session. Automatically create the room for the event, including the floor, walls, stage,
steps, lectern, video screens, and seating. View the room setup in a rendered or plan view, and obtain a report on the
total number of tables and chairs required for the event.
The event planning suite uses Vectorworks software objects to quickly and automatically create the room plan with
only a few parameter settings required. However, due to the powerful nature of these objects, they can be specifically
tailored through the Object Info palette to customize their appearance if needed.

Creating the Room

The first step of event planning is usually creating the event room. Based on a simple 2D shape, the room and floor are
created automatically according to specified parameters.
To create the room:
1. Create a closed 2D object (such as a rectangle, polyline, or polygon) to represent the room. The dimensions of the
object should match the interior dimensions of the room to be created.
2. With the 2D object selected, select Event Planning > Create Room.
The Create Room dialog box opens. Specify the properties and attributes of the walls and floor.
550 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Walls Specify the wall attributes
Height Sets the wall height of the rooms walls
Class The wall attributes can be set by class, by choosing a class other than None. If
desired, select a class from the list of classes in the file, or create a new class
for the walls. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leave the walls in the None class to set the remaining attributes from the
dialog box.
Thickness Sets the wall thickness
Fill Hatch Sets a fill hatch for the walls from the files resources
Fill Color Sets the fill color for the walls
Pen Color Sets the pen color for the walls
Texture Specifies the overall wall texture from either the default content or the current
(Renderworks files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
required) Users Guide
Floor Specify the floor attributes
Class The floor attributes can be set by class, by choosing a class other than None.
If desired, select a class from the list of classes in the file, or create a new
class for the floor. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leave the floor in the None class to set the remaining attributes from the
dialog box.
Fill Color Sets the fill color for the floor
Pen Color Sets the pen color for the floor
Texture Specifies the floor texture from either the default content or the current files
(Renderworks content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
required) Guide

3. Click OK. The rooms walls and floor are automatically created.
 Event Planning | 551

Rendered 3D view for clarity

Wall and floor parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette; see Editing Walls on page 445 and Creating
Floors on page 429 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Creating the Stage

Many event rooms contain a stage for viewing presentations. Based on a simple 2D shape, a stage is automatically
created according to specified parameters.
To create the stage:
1. Create a closed 2D object (such as a rectangle, polyline, or polygon) to represent the stage. The dimensions of the
object should match the dimensions of the stage to be created.
2. With the 2D object selected, select Event Planning > Create Stage.
The Create Stage dialog box opens. Specify the stage properties and attributes.

Parameter Description
Height Sets the height of the stage
Class The stage attributes can be set by class, by choosing a class other than None.
If desired, select a class from the list of classes in the file, or create a new
class for the stage. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leave the stage in the None class to set the remaining attributes from the
dialog box.
Fill Color Sets the fill color for the stage
Pen Color Sets the pen color for the stage
552 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Top Texture Specifies the texture for the top of the stage from either the default content or
(Renderworks the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
required) Fundamentals Users Guide
Side Texture Specifies the texture for the side of the stage from either the default content or
(Renderworks the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
required) Fundamentals Users Guide

3. Click OK. The stage is automatically created.

Rendered 3D view for clarity

Stage parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette, where the stage height and texture can be changed. If more
than one stage object is selected for editing, the Texture Settings button appears dimmed; select a single stage object to
access the Create Stage dialog box for editing parameters.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the stage object and select Edit from the context menu. The Edit
Stage dialog box opens. Either edit the settings of the selected stage, or edit the shape of the object path with the
Reshape tool.
A stage can also be created by clicking the Stage tool from the Spotlight tool set. Draw a polygon with the tool and
complete the parameters in the Create Stage dialog box.

Creating Stage Stairs

Stairs or steps are usually required to provide access to the stage from the floor. The steps are automatically adjusted to
meet the top of the stage.
To add steps:
1. Select Event Planning > Create Stair.
The Create Stair dialog box opens.
 Event Planning | 553

Parameter Description
Width Specify the width of the staircase
Style Set the type of stair to create: masonry, open riser, standard, or indented
Class The stair attributes can be set by class, by choosing a class other than None. If
desired, select a class from the list of classes in the file, or create a new class
for the stair. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leave the stair in the None class to set the remaining attributes from the
dialog box.
Fill Color Sets the fill color for the stair
Pen Color Sets the pen color for the stair
Texture (Renderworks Specifies the stair texture from either the default content or the current files
required) content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide

2. Click OK.
3. Click once in the drawing to set the stair position. Click again to set the stair rotation.

Rendered 3D view for clarity

Stair parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette; see Inserting Stairs on page 225.

Creating a Lectern
After the stage and stairs have been added, a lectern can be quickly configured and placed. When placed on the stage,
the lectern height is automatically adjusted to the top of the stage.
To add a lectern:
1. Select Event Planning > Create Lectern.
The Create Lectern dialog box opens.
554 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Parameter Description
Choose Lectern Select one of the lecterns from the list; these are configured with default
attributes and can be inserted as is. Alternatively, select a lectern shape to use
as the basis for a new lectern symbol with customized attributes.
Custom Attributes Customizes the selected lecterns default attributes, creating a new hybrid
lectern symbol
New Symbol Name Provide a name for the new lectern symbol; the new symbol is added to the
files resources
Class The lectern attributes can be set by class, by choosing a class other than None.
If desired, select a class from the list of classes in the file, or create a new
class for the lectern. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leave the lectern in the None class to set the remaining attributes from the
dialog box.
Fill Color Set the fill color for the lectern
Pen Color Set the pen color for the lectern
Texture (Renderworks Specifies the lectern texture from either the default content or the current
required) files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide

2. Click once in the drawing to set the lectern position. Click again to set the lectern rotation.
 Event Planning | 555

Rendered 3D view for clarity

Creating a Video Screen

As part of the event planning setup, video screens are often necessary at events and can be quickly configured and
placed.
To add a video screen object:
1. Select Event Planning > Create Screen.
The Create Screen dialog box opens.

2. Select the type of video screen object to insert, and click OK.
3. Click once in the drawing to set the video object position. Click again to set the objects rotation.

Rendered 3D view for clarity

Screen parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette; see Inserting Video Screen Objects on page 494.
556 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

Creating Event Seating

Once the event room has been defined, one of the last steps is to add seating for the event. A variety of event seating
types can be automatically created. Seating can consist of chairs, tables, or tables and chairs. Seating fills a 2D shape in
a user-defined arrangement with a look-to location defined by a focal point. Along with the event seating, a Seating
Count worksheet is created.
To add seating:
1. Create the closed 2D shape (such as a polygon, rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, arc/circle, or polyline) defining
the boundary of the seating area. Objects with one or more holes can be selected; seating will not be placed where
a hole exists.
2. With the object(s) selected, select Event Planning > Create Event Seating.
The Create Event Seating dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Seating Arrangement Select the seating spacing and arrangement; any symbol can be selected for
the different arrangement types, but normally, banquet seating consists of
table and chair symbols, and classroom and theatre seating includes chair
symbols. Classroom and theatre seating include an option to arrange the seats
concentrically.
Banquet Typical seating arrangement for banquets, with offset tables spaced equally
by the distance set in Table Spacing
Classroom Typical classroom seating arrangement with aligned rows of chairs, spaced
according to the distances set in Seat Spacing and Row Spacing
Theatre Typical theatre seating arrangement with offset alternate rows of chairs,
spaced according to the distances set in Seat Spacing and Row Spacing
Table Spacing For banquet seating, indicates the distance between tables
Seat Spacing For classroom or theatre seating, sets the distance between seats in a row
Row Spacing For classroom or theatre seating, sets the distance between rows of seats
Concentric For classroom or theatre seating, specifies a circular layout for the rows
Seating Section Name Names the seating section for the seating layout worksheet
 Event Planning | 557

Parameter Description
Seating Symbol Select one of the seating symbols from the list; these are configured with
default attributes and can be inserted as is. Alternatively, select a symbol to
use as the basis for a new seating symbol with customized attributes.
Customize Symbol Customizes the selected seatings default attributes, creating a new hybrid
seating symbol

3. Click Customize Symbol to change the default appearance of the selected symbol if desired. This creates a new
symbol that is added to the files resources.
The Customize Symbol dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Chair/Table Attributes Sets the attributes for the chair and/or table symbol
Fill Color Sets the fill color for the chairs and/or tables
Pen Color Sets the pen color for the chairs and/or tables
Texture Specifies the chair and/or table texture from either the default content or the current
(Renderworks files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
required) Guide
Preview Displays a preview of the symbol the attributes applied
Render Mode Select whether to preview the symbol in wireframe or OpenGL rendering mode
New Symbol Name Provide a name for the new seating symbol; the new symbol is added to the files
resources. Names are automatically generated for nested table and chair symbols.
Class The seating attributes can be set by class, by choosing a class other than None. If
desired, select a class from the list of classes in the file, or create a new class for the
symbol. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Leave the seating in the None class to set the attributes from the dialog box.

4. Click OK to return to the Create Event Seating dialog box.

558 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design

5. Click OK to create the event seating. The Select the Focus Method dialog box opens.
6. Click Focus at Next Click to manually place the focal point for the seating, or click Automatically Focus to have
the focal point created automatically.
If Focus at Next Click was selected, click once to place the focal point.
All seats will face this point; table and chair symbols orient toward the point. For concentric seat layouts, the
distance of the seat focal point from the 2D boundary object determines the radius of the concentric layout. Click
close to the object for a smaller radius.

Rendered 3D view for clarity

The event seating and a Seating Count worksheet are created, with automatically calculated seat and table counts. The
Seating Count worksheet displays the number of seats and/or tables required for each seating section, as well as the
total number of seats/tables needed for all sections. Nested symbols are counted in the worksheet, so tables and chairs
are counted separately within a table and chair symbol. (If a symbol cannot be identified as a table or chair, it is counted
as a chair.)
Seating parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette and have the same parameters as the Create Seating
Layout command (see Editing the Seating Layout on page 693).

Creating Event Views

Once the desired elements of the event have been added to the room, it is often necessary to create views of the room to
show to the client. The Create Views command automatically creates two sheet layers of the event layout: a 2D plan
view and a rendered isometric view. The Plan View sheet layer displays the layout in a Top/Plan, Wireframe mode
viewport, and includes the seating count worksheet. The Rendered View sheet layer displays the layout in an isometric
viewport, rendered in OpenGL mode.
To create a 2D and 3D rendered view of the event layout:
1. Select Event Planning > Create Views.
2. The views are automatically created. The rendered viewport may require updating; with the viewport selected,
click Update from the Object Info palette.
 Event Planning | 559

Plan view with seating count worksheet Rendered 3D view

560 | Chapter 13: Visualizing the Lighting Design
Annotation and Detailing 14
Annotation and Detailing Overview
The Vectorworks Design Series products include several annotation tools, in addition to those found in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals product. There are also many tools for creating detail drawings.

Creating Sheet Borders

Sheet borders are pre-formatted borders for project viewports or views; they can be added to a file in various ways.

Product Sheet Border Creation Method Reference

Vectorworks Architect Document Setup or Create Document Setup on page 2 and Creating
and Landmark (using Standard Viewports command Standard Viewports on page 9
drawing standards)
Vectorworks Architect Sheet Border tool from Dims/ Adding a Sheet Border on page 366 in
and Landmark (not Notes tool set the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
using drawing Guide
standards)
Vectorworks Spotlight Sheet Border tool from Dims/ Adding a Sheet Border on page 366 in
Notes tool set the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide

The Vectorworks Design Series products use the Sheet Border tool that is part of the Vectorworks Fundamentals
product, but with expanded capabilities. Additional default content and parameters are available only in the
Vectorworks Design Series products.
Various types of sheet borders can be created, including ConDoc, GSA, AEC, ASME, and ISO formats and their
associated title blocks, revision blocks, tolerance blocks, projection blocks, and issue and revision data.
To work with the Issue Manager, special considerations apply when the title block fields are formatted. See Creating a
Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Design Series on page 972.

Sheet Border Properties

Whether placed by a drawing setup command or by the Sheet Border tool, sheet border properties are displayed in the
Object Info palette, where they can be edited.
Most of the sheet border properties are documented in Adding a Sheet Border on page 366 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the parameters that apply to Vectorworks Design Series products are described here.
562 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Title Block Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, for selecting a title block symbol to
insert (see Adding a Title Block on page 370 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). ASME title blocks are required to insert a
tolerance or projection block.

Additional default title blocks are available with the Vectorworks Design
Series products; for US Arch title blocks, information is linked to the Issue
Manager.
Use Revision Block Adds a revision history block to the sheet border
Rev. Block Position Specifies the revision block location relative to the sheet border
Rev. Block Height Specifies the height of the revision block
Rev. Block Width Specifies the width of the revision block
Show Revision Zone Adds a revision zone column to the revision block, for specifying the
location of the revision
Use Tolerance Block For ASME sheet borders, adds a tolerance specifications block to the title
block. The tolerance block creates a legend containing the drawing
tolerances, including both angular and linear accuracy.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DIM ARE IN INCHES
TOL ON ANGLE .25
2 PL .01 3 PL 005
INTERPRET DIM AND TOL PER

Tolerance block details are text objects, and do not affect the actual
dimensional tolerances.
Use Projection Block For ASME title blocks, adds a projection block area to the title block; specify
the First Angle or Third Angle projection
Add Parts List Adds a parts list to the title block (this is intended for ASME title blocks, but
can be added to any title block). Information from detail bubbles populates
the parts list; see Creating Detail Bubbles on page 849. If a parts list
worksheet does not yet exist, it is created.
 Creating Sheet Borders | 563

Parameter Description
Edit Title Block Opens the Edit Title Block dialog box, for specifying the title block
information. Depending on the selected title block, different fields and tabs
are available. ASME title blocks include a tolerance tab, for editing the
tolerance block information (see Editing a Tolerance Block on page 564).
US Arch title blocks include Project and Sheet tabs; information is entered
from the Issue Manager but can be edited manually (see The Issue
Manager on page 664). Any title block that contains a Project tab can have
the same Project tab information applied to all title blocks in the file by
selecting Apply these values to all title blocks.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document
preferences, the sheet layer is automatically updated if the Sht Title Line 1 is
changed. Similarly, if the Sheet Number value is changed, the sheet layer
and any annotation objects (drawing labels or section markers) on the sheet
layer that show this information are updated automatically.
Edit Revision Data Opens the Edit Revision Data dialog box, for specifying revision information
and format (see Editing Revision Block Data on page 563)
Edit Issue Data Opens the Edit Issue Data dialog box, for specifying issue data on US Arch
title blocks; see Editing Issue Data on page 565

Editing Revision Block Data

To add a revision block to the sheet border, select Use Revision Block from the Object Info palette of a selected sheet
border. The revision block parameters (such as height and width) are specified from the Object Info palette, but the
actual revisions are specified in a separate dialog box.
To add or edit revision block data:
1. From the Object Info palette of a selected sheet border with a revision block, click Edit Revision Data.
2. The Edit Revision Data dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Revisions list Lists the current revisions displayed in the revision block
Add Opens the Add New Revision dialog box, for adding a revision to the block
Edit Opens the Edit Existing Revision dialog box, for editing the currently selected revision
564 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Remove Deletes the currently selected revision
Use Select Letters or Numbers for the Rev# format
Show the Specifies how many revisions to display in the revision block, from recent to oldest

3. Click Add to create a revision entry.

The Add New Revision dialog box opens. Specify the revision data.

4. Click OK to return to the Edit Revision Data dialog box. Existing revisions can also be edited or deleted.
5. Click OK. The revision block is updated.

Editing a Tolerance Block

When an ASME title block is added to a sheet border, an area for tolerance specifications data is included. The
tolerance data is specified in a separate dialog box.
To edit the tolerance block data:
1. Select the sheet border from the drawing area.
2. In the Object Info palette, click Edit Title Block.
The Edit Title Block dialog box opens. Click the Tolerance tab.
 Creating Sheet Borders | 565

Specify the angular

accuracy

Enter the implied

dimensional accuracy

3. Enter the angular and dimensional tolerances to be displayed in the tolerance block.
Only the angular accuracy, two place, and three place parameters apply to the ASME tolerance block. The
remaining tolerances might apply to a custom title block.
4. Click OK.
The tolerance block is updated with the new information.

Editing Issue Data

When a US Arch title block is added to a sheet border, an area for issue data is included. The issue notes are specified
in a separate dialog box.
To add or edit issue data:
1. From the Object Info palette of a selected sheet border with a revision block, click Edit Issue Data.
2. The Edit Issue Data dialog box opens.
566 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Issue list Lists the current issues displayed in the title block
Add Opens the Add New Issue dialog box, for adding an issue note
Edit Opens the Edit Existing Issue dialog box, for editing the currently selected issue note
Remove Deletes the currently selected issue note
Use Select Letters or Numbers for the Issue# format
Show the Specifies how many issues to display in the title block, from recent to oldest

3. Click Add to create an issue entry.

The Add New Issue dialog box opens. Specify the issue note.

4. Click OK to return to the Edit Issue Data dialog box. Existing issue notes can also be edited or deleted.
5. Click OK. The issue data is updated.

Using the ID Label Tool

The ID Label tool labels drawing objects with an identifier so they can be properly referenced on an associated
schedule. These labels can be applied to specific objects with attached data records, such as doors, windows,
equipment, plumbing fixtures, electrical items, and irrigation objects. This tool also provides a convenient way to
specify or edit attached record data. The ID labels can be customized using special symbols (see Creating Custom ID
Label Symbols on page 967 for more information).
For doors and windows, the ID label bubble size is independent of text size. The ID bubble is drawn at the size
specified in the ID Label Size field of the Object Info palette, unless the text exceeds the ID bubble size; in this
case, the bubble automatically expands to fit the text. To restore the ID bubble to a fixed size, reduce the text size
to fit within the ID bubble.
 Using the ID Label Tool | 567

To place an ID label:

1. Click the ID Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.

2. Click to set the location of the ID label.

2nd click

1st click

3. Click on the object to associate with the ID label.

The ID/Specification Tool dialog box opens. Set the ID parameters.

Parameter Description
ID Type Select the record associated with the ID; this is automatically selected if the
object is associated with one of the available records
ID Style Select the graphical ID style to display
If a styled wall is being labeled, this is the only field available; data fields
must be added and edited via the Resource Browser, as described in
Editing ID Labels and Records for Wall Styles on page 570.
Duplicate Existing ID Click to associate an existing ID to this label; select the ID from the list
Create New ID Click to create a new ID label
Prefix Assigns alphanumeric information before the numerical label value; adding
prefix information is optional
Label Assigns a numerical value to the ID; this number increments automatically if
the auto-increment option is chosen in the Set ID Preferences dialog box
Suffix Assigns alphanumeric information after the label value if the auto-increment
option is chosen; adding suffix information is optional
568 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Select a field to Select a record field associated with the object to edit its value
specify
Selected field value Enter or edit a field value and then click Set to confirm the change
Options For windows or doors, opens the ID Settings dialog box; for other objects,
opens the Set ID Preferences dialog box

4. Click Options to set specific preferences for this ID.

If the object being labeled is a window or door, complete the fields in the ID Settings dialog box as described in
the ID Tag tab section of Window Settings ID Tag Pane on page 181 and Door Settings ID Tag Pane on
page 205. Select Auto-Increment ID Label in the ID Settings dialog box to automatically increment the
numerical ID value each time the label is placed. Continue with step 6. For all other objects, go to step 5.
5. If the object being labeled is something other than a window or door, complete the fields in the Set ID Preferences
dialog box.

Parameter Description
Auto-Increment ID Label Automatically increments the numerical ID value each time the label is
placed; not available for styled walls
Fix current record when Automatically overwrites the current record information when applying
matching IDs an existing ID label; not available for styled walls
Write ID fields of records Finds records with matching value in match field and writes ID value to
with matchfield match; not available for styled walls
Draw Leader from ID to Draws a leader from the ID label to the object
object
Rotate ID with Leader Rotates the ID symbol to the angle of the leader line
Length of leader shoulder Sets the length of the horizontal segment of the leader line
Arrow style Sets the style of arrow to use with the leader line
Marker scale factor Sets the size of the leaders arrow; a factor of less than one decreases the
size of the arrow while a factor of more than one increases its size

6. Click OK.
 Using the ID Label Tool | 569

The ID is drawn.

H-79-R

To bypass the ID Label dialog boxes and automatically place an existing ID label repeatedly, hold down the Alt
(Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key while applying additional labels.
To easily convert any object into a door or window, place an ID label on the object and select the Window Object
or Door Object ID Type in the ID/Specification Tool dialog box. A symbol is automatically created for the object
and displays in the Resource Browser, and is available to use as symbol geometry for subsequently placed
windows or doors. Select the window or door object and click Settings in the Object Info palette to open the
Window or Door Settings dialog box to attach record information to include in the window or door Schedule (see
Inserting Windows on page 175 and Inserting Doors on page 198).

Editing Existing ID Labels and Record Information

After placement, objects with record information and ID labels can be edited to change the record or ID data.
Worksheets, including schedules, and the ID Label tool can change the record information of multiple objects at once.

Editing Record Information with Worksheets

Global changes to symbol and plug-in object record information can be made using database rows in worksheets
created with the Vectorworks program. During a schedule review, it is often necessary to make changes to objects and
update them automatically on the drawing.
Only database rows are directly associated with drawing elements, and can update the drawing in this way. Fields
which result from a calculation, or from locked objects, workgroup-referenced items, or control points, cannot edit
drawing elements. For more information on worksheets, see Using Worksheets on page 814 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
To edit record information from a worksheet:
1. Open the worksheet that contains the record information to be edited, by selecting the worksheet in the Resource
Browser and selecting Edit from the Resources menu or the context menu. Alternatively, select the worksheet
from the Window > Worksheets menu.
For example, a Window Schedule worksheet contains record information for the windows in the drawing.
2. Select the database row cell to be edited.
Text and number fields can be edited directly, while popup fields allow a selection to be made, either from the edit
list at the top of the worksheet, or from the Pick Value from List context menu item.
To repeat the same value in several text or number fields of the same record, copy the desired value from one field,
select multiple rows, and paste. (Pasting cannot be performed for popup fields.)
3. The drawing records automatically update with the new information, and the drawing objects reflect the changes.
If record field from a summarized database row has been edited, all objects referenced by the row are edited.
570 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Editing ID or Record Information with the ID Label Tool

The ID Label tool can be used to change ID or record information after placing an ID. Labels and records for styled
walls are edited differently; see Editing ID Labels and Records for Wall Styles on page 570 for details.

To edit an existing ID label or record information:

1. Click the ID Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.

2. Double-click on the ID label to edit.
If the labeled object is a window or door, complete the fields as described in the Data tab section of Inserting
Windows on page 175 and Inserting Doors on page 198. If editing the object through the Object Info palette,
an additional parameter, ID Label Size, is available for controlling the size of the ID label bubble. Continue with
step 4. For all other objects, go to step 3.
3. If the labeled object is something other than a window or door, edit the fields in the ID/Specification Tool dialog
box, as described in Using the ID Label Tool on page 566.
4. Click OK.
The edits are applied to the ID label and record attached to the object.

Editing ID Labels and Records for Wall Styles

Data fields (including an ID label) are specified for each wall style, which means that each wall with a particular style
has the same label and record attached to it. Therefore, ID labels and records cannot be edited for individual styled
walls with the ID Label tool. (See Using Wall Styles on page 118 for more information about creating, editing, and
using wall styles.)
To edit ID label or record information for a wall style:
1. Select the wall style from the Resource Browser and click Edit from the Resources menu.
2. In the Edit Wall Style dialog box, click the Data Fields tab.
 Using the ID Label Tool | 571

3. Enter a label ID in the Mark field, and enter other data fields as necessary.
4. Click OK to close the Edit Wall Style dialog box, and click OK again to close the Wall Replacement dialog box.
From this point forward, walls that are created with this style have the specified data record attached; when an ID
label is added to a wall that has this style, the Mark entry displays in the label.

Vectorworks Architect and Landmark ID Symbols

The following ID symbols are provided with the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products, and require the
presence of the indicated record format in the drawing file. The ID Label tool creates the record format if it does not
already exist.
Architect Partition IDs Architect and Landmark Equipment IDs
(require Styled Wall record) (require Equipment record)

Wall ID 1 Equipt ID 1
(ID) (ID)
Wall ID 2 Equipt ID 2
(ID) - [fixed length line] (ID) - [no leader]
Wall ID 3 Equipt ID 3
(ID) - [note: NCS style] (ID)
Wall ID 4 Equipt ID 4
(ID) (ID)
The leader on these two
symbols is part of the
symbol and fixed in length
572 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Creating Detail Drawings

To create detail drawings for architectural or landscaping projects, first use the Create Standard Viewports command
to automatically create the necessary detail sheet layers. For a complete description of viewports, see Presenting
Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports on page 734 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
When using viewports:
The Create Standard Viewports command can automatically create the necessary detail sheet layers.
Because sheet layer viewports can be easily copied and pasted, duplicate the floorplan viewports, and then copy
them to the detail sheet layer. They can be rescaled and cropped to create plan detail drawings.
When annotating a sheet layer viewport, keep in mind that annotations refer to any 2D element, including 2D
detail objects.
Once the sheet layers and viewports have been defined, use the tools from the Detailing tool set to refine the detail
drawing with either 2D or 3D detail objects. These tools can significantly reduce the amount of time necessary to make
an accurate representation of an object. Detailing tool objects can be used in conjunction with other objects, such as
groups, symbols, rectangles, and polylines. The following illustration shows several examples of each, used in
conjunction to create a fully-developed detail form.
Detail cut
wood object

Polyline for emphasis Rectangle with

of cut plane pattern fill

Created with the

Break Line tool

Symbol made from

imported DWG file

Detail cut Batt insulation

wood objects object

Creating Linear Material Details

The Linear Material tool draws a standard representation of sheet building materials (such as plywood, gypsum
board, and stucco) along a path. To create linear material details, either use the Linear Material tool, or draw a
polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on
page 696).

To draw linear material details:

1. Click the Linear Material tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. If desired, set the linear material attributes in the Attributes palette (fill style, pen style, and line thickness). The
linear material attributes can also be specified after creation.
3. Click to begin drawing the linear material detail polyline. Click the mouse at the start point to complete a closed
polyline, or double-click the mouse to create an open polyline. For more information on polylines, see Polyline
Tool on page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. The linear material parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
 Creating Detail Drawings | 573

Parameter Description
Offset Sets the distance of the object baseline from the drawn path
Type Select the kind of linear material to draw; available parameters depend on the
type of linear material selected
Board (generic) Creates two polyline edges; the space between the edges can be specified with
a fill color from the Attributes palette

Gyp. Bd. (detail) Creates a board object with an additional offset line and fills the space with a
stipple pattern

Plaster/Stucco Draws an irregular top line for the object

Plaster/Stucco Draws an irregular top line for the object, and fills the space with a stipple
(detail) pattern

Plywood/OSB Creates a board object with evenly spaced parallel lines

Plywood/OSB Creates a plywood object with additional diagonal slashes

(detail)

Built-up Roof Draws a filled band over a coarse, oval-shaped stipple pattern

Corrugated Deck Draws a zig-zag deck pattern

574 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Corrugated Deck Creates a corrugated deck and fills the depth of the deck
w/fill

Corrugated Deck Creates a corrugated deck, fills the depth of the deck, and adds a stipple pattern
w/fill (detail)

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the linear material

Pitch For corrugated deck details, determines the corrugation spacing
Corrugation Depth For corrugated deck details, determines the corrugation height
Closure Specifies which sections of the linear material object should have a closed end
(does not apply to Built-up Roof details)
Density For details with stipple patterns, sets the stipple density
Vertex parameters Edits the linear detail path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on
page 252 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

Linear material details with stipple patterns may require a significant amount of time to draw.
Create a plug-in symbol from a linear material object (see Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide) with Convert to Plug-in selected. Activate the symbol in the Resource
Browser to draw the linear material detail with the saved symbol parameters.

Creating Repetitive Unit Details

The Repetitive Unit tool draws world-scale symbols along a path, creating repetitive elements such as masonry units,
shingles, and siding. To create repetitive unit details, either use the Repetitive Unit tool, or draw a polyline and then
select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To draw repetitive unit details:

1. Click the Repetitive Unit tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to select the detail symbol. The detail symbol can also be specified after
creation.
3. Click to begin drawing the detail polyline. Click the mouse at the start point to complete a closed polyline, or
double-click the mouse to create an open polyline. For more information on polylines, see Polyline Tool on
page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. Click Choose Symbol from the Object Info palette to select the unit to repeat.
 Creating Detail Drawings | 575

Pitch

Pitch point (the point that determines the symbol insertion point and rotation)
is always placed on the baseline at the Offset distance

Each unit is always drawn in its entirety; the last unit is not clipped, even if it exceeds the path drawn. The
repetitive unit offset path is drawn in the objects assigned pen style (the path always has a fill style of None).
The Repetitive Unit tool can create lines with custom symbols made from text and/or shapes. The Pitch
determines the spacing; set the pen attributes from the Attributes palette.

The repetitive unit parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Offset Sets the distance of the object baseline from the drawn path; the symbol is rotated
so that its first point (its pitch point) is always placed on the baseline at the offset
distance
Use Symbol Pitch Sets the pitch according to the symbol definition; deselect to scale the pitch
manually
Use Vertical Pitch Rotates the symbol 90 degrees counter-clockwise and sets the pitch vertically; this
is useful for symbols that are to be stacked vertically rather than arrayed vertically,
as they can be drawn in a more natural way
Pitch Sets the distance from the start of one unit to the start of the next unit
First Pitch Differs Allows a different pitch to be specified for the first unit
First Pitch Specifies the pitch for the first unit
Flip Vertically Flips the unit symbol vertically
Flip Horizontally Flips the unit symbol horizontally
Choose Symbol Opens the Choose Symbol dialog box. Select the unit Category, and then select the
unit symbol from either the default content or the current files content (see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); the
selected symbol is imported into the file and appears in the Resource Browser.
Vertex Parameters Edits the repetitive unit detail path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on
page 252 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
576 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Create a plug-in symbol from a repetitive unit object (see Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide) with Convert to Plug-in selected. Activate the symbol in the Resource
Browser to draw the repetitive unit with the saved symbol parameters.

Creating Holes
Drilled Holes
Both 2D and 3D drilled holes are available. The 3D drilled hole is a solid object that can be subtracted from any other
solid object to create accurate 3D models of molds, dies, and many other machine parts (see Converting to Generic
Solids on page 428 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

To insert a drilled hole:

Click the drilled hole point object from the Detailing tool set.

CSink Angle
CBore Diameter
CSink Diameter

CBore Depth

Total Depth Total Depth

Hole Diameter Hole Diameter

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Hole Diameter Enter the hole diameter
Total Depth Enter the depth of the hole
Hole Type Select one of the hole types

Through Blind
Hole Hole

Drill Point Angle For Blind Hole types, indicate the angle of the drill point at the bottom of the
hole
 Creating Detail Drawings | 577

Parameter Description
Hole Style Select the hole style

Plain Counterbored Countersunk

Hole Hole Hole

Diameter For counterbored or countersunk hole styles, enter the diameter of the
counterbore or countersink
Depth For counterbored hole styles, specify the depth of the counterbore
Angle (deg.) For countersunk hole styles, specify the angle of the countersink
View Select the 2D view

Front View Plain Hole Counterbore/ Plain Hole Counterbore/

Top View Countersunk Hole Bottom View Countersunk Hole
Top View Bottom View

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D drilled hole with center line(s)

Tapped Holes
Both 2D and 3D tapped holes are available. The 3D tapped hole is a solid object that can be subtracted from any other
solid object to create accurate 3D models of molds, dies, and many other machine parts (see Converting to Generic
Solids on page 428 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

To insert a tapped hole:

Click the tapped hole inch or metric point object from the Detailing tool set.
Diameter

Thread Depth Tap Drill Depth

2D 3D
578 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Screw Thread Select the screw thread size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or
diameter/thread pitch (metric)
Tap Drill Size Displays the tap drill size that corresponds to the selected screw thread
(Ref.)
Hole Type Select one of the hole types

Through Blind
Hole Hole

Thread Depth Specify the thread depth

Tap Drill Depth Enter the tap drill depth value
Drill Point Angle For Blind Hole types, enter the drill point angle
Use Custom Size Select to use custom diameter, thread pitch, and tap drill diameter values
Diameter When Use Custom Size is selected, specify the diameter value
Pitch When Use Custom Size is selected, specify the thread pitch value
Tap Drill Dia. When Use Custom Size is selected, specify the tap drill diameter value
Thread Style Select the 2D object thread style

Simplified Simplified Detailed

(ASME) (ISO)

Inch only

View Select the 2D object view

Front Top Bottom

 Creating Detail Drawings | 579

Parameter Description
Show Profile Only Select to show just the outline of the 2D object thread. Available when using
Detailed thread style only.

Detailed Show Profile

thread style Only

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D tapped hole object with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to draw the 3D tapped hole object with threads

Hole Pattern

To insert a hole pattern:

Click the hole pattern point object from the Detailing tool set.

Parameter Description
Pattern Select a hole pattern

Rectangular Bolt Circle

Number of For rectangular hole patterns, enter the number of rows

Rows
Vertical For rectangular hole patterns, enter the vertical spacing between the rows
Spacing
Number of For rectangular hole patterns, enter the number of columns
Columns
Horizontal For rectangular hole patterns, enter the horizontal spacing between the columns
Spacing
Number of For bolt circle patterns, enter the number of holes
Holes
Bolt Circle For bolt circle patterns, enter the diameter
Dia.
580 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Hole Type Select the type of holes

Round Slotted - Horiz Slotted - Vert Tapped Hole - ASME

Style

Tapped Hole - ISO Style

Hole Size For round and tapped hole types, enter the hole size
Slot Width For slotted hole types, enter the slot width
Slot Length For slotted hole types, enter the slot length
Counterbore/ Select to draw counterbore or countersunk holes
Countersunk

Diameter Indicates the diameter of the counterbore or countersunk holes

Show Select to display the centerlines on the pattern
Centerlines

centerlines

View Select the hole pattern view

Creating an Interior Elevation

An interior elevation can be created by a variety of methods.
Create a section viewport of the interior with a finite depth range (see Creating Section Views on page 740).
 Using the Parking Area Tools | 581

Create a viewport with hidden line rendering and annotate the elements with the inner or outer boundary mode of
the 2D Polygon tool of the 2D Polygon tool. See Creating Boundary Polygons in a Hidden Line Rendered
Viewport on page 236 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Create a group with the Convert Copy to Lines command as described below. (A group created from the Convert
Copy to Lines command can quickly provide a basis for interior elevations.) See Convert Copy to Lines on
page 278 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To create an interior elevation:
1. From the floor plan, select the wall for creating the elevation. If it has millwork or fixtures attached to or adjacent
to it, ensure that they are selected.
Fixtures inserted in (attached to) the wall are automatically selected.
2. Select the view from which to create the elevation. For example, to view the wall from the right side of the plan,
select View > Standard Views > Right.
3. Select Modify > Convert > Convert Copy to Lines and choose Hidden Line Rendering.

4. Select View > Rendering > Hidden Line. A hidden line group of the selection is created and selected. Select
Edit > Cut.
5. Select the detail sheet layer from the Layers menu and select Edit > Paste. Move the newly created interior
elevation to the desired location on the detail sheet layer and add graphics, notes, and dimensions as required.

Using the Parking Area Tools

Two parking tools, Parking Area and Parking Along Path, create parking spaces automatically within a defined area
or along a path. The parking tools allow for islands, accessible spaces, head-in (angled) parking, parallel parking, and
access lanes; a parking schedule counts the total number of parking spaces for each type of parking tool.
Alternatively, draw a polyline and then select the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from
Shapes on page 696).
Parking areas and parking along path objects can be sent to a site model surface with the Send to Surface
command, but they do not modify the site model.
A third parking tool, Parking Spaces, is a basic tool for creating simple parking space graphics.

Creating a Parking Area

To create a parking area:

1. Select the Parking Area tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click to begin drawing the parking polyline; click to set each polyline vertex. Click the mouse at the start point to
complete a closed polyline, or double-click the mouse to create an open polyline. For more information on
polylines, see Polyline Tool on page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
582 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

3. The parking spaces are automatically created within the area defined by the polyline.
2nd click 3rd click

1st click 4th click

5th click

Parking Area tool in Corner Vertex mode Control point

Once created, the parking area can be edited by several methods.

Adjust the parking space origin by dragging the parking area control point.
Reshape the parking area polyline with the Reshape tool.
Set a solid fill color for the parking area and a solid pen color for the space numbers through the Attributes palette.
Change the parking space numbering font, size, and style with the Text menu.
The parking area displays in a 3D view; if desired, assign a texture to the parking area with the Render tab of the
Object Info palette (Renderworks required).
Parking area parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Lane Width Specifies the width of the lane between rows of parking spaces
Row Angle Sets the angle for the parking header stripe
Space Width Indicates the width of each parking space
Space Length Indicates the length of each parking space
Space Angle Specifies the angle of each parking space
Show Header Stripe Toggles the display of the parking header stripe
Show Perimeter Toggles the display of the original polyline
Space Numbering Adds a parking space number to each parking space; spaces are
numbered from left to right and top to bottom
Start Num At Specifies the starting number to begin parking space numbering
Num Spaces Displays the number of parking spaces created
 Using the Parking Area Tools | 583

Aerial parking lot photo with parking area superimposed

Creating Parking Islands

Many parking areas include islands where trees are planted or parking spaces are otherwise separated. By using the
Clip Surface command, the parking area can be adjusted to account for parking islands, or for accessible parking. The
parking spaces automatically adjust for the presence of the parking islands.
To create parking islands within a parking area:
1. Draw the 2D clipping objects on the parking area.
2. Select the clipping objects and the parking area. See Clip Surface on page 331 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide for more information.
3. Select Modify > Clip Surface.
The parking area is clipped, removing the areas under the clipping objects.
4. Delete the clipping objects.
The parking area automatically adjusts for the removed spaces, renumbering the parking spaces.

Although the Parking Space tool offers several parameters for easily defining accessible parking spaces (see
Creating Parking Spaces on page 585), the Clip Surface technique can also be used to create accessible spaces.
Do not remove the clipping object after clipping; apply the same fill color and then apply an accessible parking
graphic image to the area. Accessible spaces created this way are not counted in parking space reports.
584 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Creating Parking Along a Path

To create parking along a path:

1. Select the Parking Along Path tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click to begin drawing the parking polyline path; click to set each polyline vertex. Double-click the mouse to
create an open path polyline, or click at the start point to complete a closed polyline. For more information on
polylines, see Polyline Tool on page 226 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
3. The parking spaces are automatically created along the polyline path.

1st click Double-click

2nd click

Parking Along Path tool in Bzier Vertex mode

Once created, the parking along path object can be edited by selecting the parking object; then select Modify > Edit
Parking Along Path and reshape the parking area polyline with the Reshape tool; click Exit Path to return to the
drawing.
Change the parking space numbering font, size, and style with the Text menu.
Parking along path parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Space Width Indicates the width of each parking space. Spaces along a curve may widen
along the length of the space; the space width is defined as the minimum
width between the two sides.
Space Length Indicates the length of each parking space
Space Numbering Adds a parking space number to each parking space; spaces are numbered
from left to right and top to bottom
Start Num At Specifies the starting number to begin parking space numbering
Num Spaces Displays the number of parking spaces created
Spaces on Left of Poly Includes spaces along the left side of the parking path
 Using the Parking Area Tools | 585

Parameter Description
Spaces on Right of Includes spaces along the right side of the parking path
Poly

Aerial parking lot photo with curved parking

along path superimposed

Creating Parking Spaces

To create basic parking spaces:

1. Select the Parking Spaces tool from the Site Planning tool set.
2. Click once to place the parking spaces object. Click again to set the object rotation.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
3. A basic parking spaces object is placed in the drawing.
Change the parking space numbering font, size, and style with the Text menu.
Parking space parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Space Style Select the type of parking space:
Single Bay: Draws spaces on one side of the header stripe
Double Bay: Draws spaces on both sides of the header stripe
Parallel: Creates parallel spaces (along a curb, for example) instead of
head-in parking
No. of Standard Specify the number of spaces to create
Spaces
Space Width Indicates the parking space width
Space Length Indicates the parking space length (for parallel spaces, this is the length along
the curb)
Space Angle For single and double bay parking, specifies the angle of each parking space
Header Style Select the header style:
Straight: The header stripe remains straight
Angled: The header stripe stays perpendicular to the space angle
586 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
No. of Handicap Specifies the number of spaces with a different width applied for accessibility
Spaces
Handicap Width Sets the space width for accessible spaces
Handicap Location Indicates whether the location of the accessible space(s) is at the beginning or
end of the parking row
Show Handicap Select to show an accessible parking symbol in each designated parking
Symbol space.
Vectorworks comes equipped with an international standard accessibility
symbol that can be edited by the user.

Add Handicap Aisle Select to add aisle spaces adjacent to accessible parking spaces
Spaces
Aisle Width Enter a value for the accessibility aisle width
Aisle Location Select an aisle location relative to the accessible parking spaces
Aisle Fill Click to open the Choose Fill dialog box, and select the aisle fill from options
present in the drawing (see Fill Attributes on page 505 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide)
Show Header Stripe Toggles the display of the parking header stripe
Show Start Stripe Toggles the display of the side of the first parking space
Show End Stripe Toggles the display of the side of the last parking space
Space Numbering Adds a parking space number to each parking space; spaces are numbered
from left to right and top to bottom
Start Numbering At Specifies the starting number to begin parking space numbering
Show Bumpers Toggles the display of the parking space bumpers (stops)
Show 3D Stripes Toggles the display of the parking spaces in a 3D view

The Parking Space tool is available for Vectorworks Fundamentals software but is not present in the Fundamentals
workspace. It can be added to the Fundamentals workspace (see Using the Workspace Editor on page 869 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Creating Parking Reports

Parking report worksheets can be created for each type of parking tool: parking areas, parking along path objects, and
parking spaces. If using a combination of parking types, a report may be needed for each type.
To create a parking report schedule:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Report.
2. Select the type of parking from the Listing objects with record list, and select the columns to include in the
worksheet.
See Creating Reports on page 811 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.
3. Click OK to create the report.
 Dimensioning Exterior Walls | 587

The worksheet calculates the total number of spaces for all parking objects of the same type.

Dimensioning Exterior Walls

The exterior walls of a building can be automatically dimensioned with the Dimension Exterior Walls command. The
exterior wall dimensioner can:
dimension exterior walls by outside edge or center line;
associate dimensions with walls;
dimension only visible wall components; and
dimension all windows and doors in the exterior walls by the center line or the edge of the openings.
For window objects, the rough opening is calculated as the unit size plus two times the shim gap. For door objects,
the rough opening is calculated as the leaf size plus two times the jamb width plus two times the shim gap.
The exterior wall dimensioner uses the dimension standard specified on the Dimensions tab of the document
preferences (File > Document Settings > Document Preferences) and the unit selection and precision settings in
File > Document Settings > Units.
To generate exterior wall dimensions:
1. In a file with exterior walls, determine whether you wish to dimension to the structural or non-structural
components of the wall. To dimension to the structural components, such as framing components, make the
classes of the non-structural components invisible.
The wall styles available in the Vectorworks Architect product contain pre-classed components, making it easy to
show and hide the desired portions of the wall.
2. Select the Dimension Exterior Walls command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Dimension Exterior Walls
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Dimension Exterior Walls
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Dimension Exterior Walls

The Dimension Exterior Walls dialog box opens.

588 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
Source Layer Specifies the location of the walls to be dimensioned
Options Specify the dimension methods
Dimension T-joins in Interior walls which intersect with the exterior walls are dimensioned
exterior walls
Make dimensions Associates dimensions with the wall or wall component; dimensions move and
associative update with the wall or wall component
Dimension to Wall Specifies whether to dimension to the wall extents or center lines
Dimension to Specifies whether to dimension to the edge of the openings or to the center of the
openings
Rough openings are automatically defined in door and window objects. To add
a rough opening to a symbol inserted in a wall, draw an invisible polygon (line
weight 0, no fill) with three vertices to the extents of the rough opening.
Text Options Specifies dimension text properties
Rotation Controls the orientation of the dimension text
Horiz/Vert places text horizontally for horizontal dimensions and vertically for
vertical dimensions
Horizontal keeps text always horizontal
Aligned places text according to the dimension angle
Location Specifies whether the text should be centered between the witness lines if space
permits, or always placed outside the witness lines
If forced outside, Indicates the offset for text forced outside the witness lines
distance
Above Dim Line Select to always place text above the dimension line
Offsets from Building Specifies the distance of the dimensions from the building, walls, doors and
windows
 Sheet List Indexing | 589

Parameter Description
Small Dimensions Specifies the limit for drawing small dimensions, which can help detect
inaccuracies in the drawing; dimensions less than the value specified will be
considered small. Select Draw in red to detect problems such as minute
misalignments in layout; to overlook any inaccuracies, select Do not draw.

3. Click OK.
The exterior wall dimensions are drawn automatically.

Sheet List Indexing

The Create Sheet List command compiles the current sheet border information for use as a sheet list index or
worksheet.
To create a sheet list index:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Sheet List.
The Create Sheet List dialog box opens.
590 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Parameter Description
US Arch Title Block Lists the current US Arch title blocks
Entries
Sheet No. Displays the contents of the current title block selection
Add Moves a selected item from the US Arch Title Block Entries list to the
Proposed Sheet list
Remove Removes a selected item from the Proposed Sheet list and displays it in the
US Arch Title Block Entries list
New Click to open the New List Entry dialog box and add the drawing and title
block information to the Proposed Sheet list
Move Up/Move Dn Moves the selected title up or down in the Proposed Sheet list
Format Click to open the Sheet List Index Preferences dialog box and specify
whether to create the sheet index as a text block or worksheet; also specify
formatting criteria
Proposed Sheet List Lists the proposed sheet borders to include in the sheet list
Sheet No./Title Displays the contents of the current selection for editing

2. Move the desired title block entries to the proposed sheet list to create the sheet list, and format the list by clicking
Format; select whether to create a text object or worksheet from the list.
3. Click OK.
4. If the sheet list index is formatted as a text block, click to select the top left and bottom right corners of the sheet
list area; the text wraps to fit within this width. If the sheet list index is formatted as a worksheet, click to add the
worksheet to the file.
The sheet list index worksheet can also be added to the drawing from the VA Create Schedule command or the
Resource Browser. From the Resource Browser, open the default architectural reports file from the
[Vectorworks]\Libraries folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect product (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the Sheet List worksheet to the drawing. The
 Using Notation Objects | 591

worksheet is populated with information from the objects in the current drawing.

Using Notation Objects

Several tools in the Dims/Notes tool set add information to a drawing with pre-formatted objects.
Other notation objects include a section-elevation marker (see Section Lines and Section-Elevation Markers on
page 755), drawing label (see Creating Drawing Labels on page 376 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide), and reference marker (see Creating Reference Markers on page 378 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide).

North Arrow
The North Arrow tool indicates the drawing orientation; several different styles can be selected. The deviation from
true magnetic north can be displayed on some of the configurations. If the design layer is georeferenced, the object is
rotated to point in the proper direction.

To place a north arrow object:

1. Click the North Arrow tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place a north arrow object.
3. Click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
North arrow objects maintain a constant size regardless of the drawing scale.

Parameter Description
2D Scale Factor Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker
Config Select the arrow style from the list

Config 1 Config 2 Config 3 Config 4 Config 5

Config 6 Config 7 Config 8 Config 9

Arrow Graphics Select an arrow style from the list; arrow styles include filled and unfilled
versions
Show MN Select to add the deviation from true magnetic north for some styles
Declination
Declin Deg Offset Specifies the degree of offset from true north

Revision Marker
The Revision Marker tool displays the drawing revision number.
592 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

To place a revision marker object:

1. Click the Revision Marker tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place a revision marker object.
3. Click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
Revision marker objects maintain a constant size regardless of the drawing scale.

Parameter Description
2D Scale Factor Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker
Revision Number Specifies the revision number

Elevation Benchmark
The Elevation Benchmark tool represents different levels in elevation drawings; two different elevation benchmark
styles are available.

To place an elevation benchmark object:

1. Click the Elevation Benchmark tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place an elevation benchmark linear object.
3. Click to set the length and rotation of the elevation benchmark.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.

Parameter Description
Title Specifies the benchmark title value
Elevation Display Select the method for calculating the benchmarks elevation value.
Custom: Allows you to manually input a Custom Elevation value
Z value relative to ground plane: Uses the Z value of the elevation benchmark
marker, plus the elevation of the objects layer, to determine the elevation value
Z value relative to reference elevation: Uses the Z value of the elevation
benchmark marker, plus the elevation of the objects layer, minus the Reference
Elevation value, to determine the elevation value
Y value relative to reference elevation: Uses the Y value of the elevation
benchmark marker, minus the Reference Elevation value, to determine the
elevation value
Distance from control point: Allows the elevation value to be referenced from a
control point displayed on the drawing, rather than from the drawings active
layer plane. If the control point is moved, the elevation value remains set by the
distance from the control point to the elevation benchmark object. This allows
you to set a control point at the ground floor of a house, for example, so that the
elevation benchmark value is set according to the height from the ground floor.
 Using Notation Objects | 593

Parameter Description
Custom Elevation If Elevation Display is set to Custom, specifies the benchmark elevation value
Reference If Elevation Display is set to Z Value Relative to Reference Elevation or Y Value
Elevation Relative to Reference Elevation, specifies the reference elevation value
Marker Select the marker orientation (left or right)
Orientation
Marker Graphics Select a marker style from the list; styles include filled and unfilled versions
Style Select the marker style

Floor level

ISO style US style

2D Scale Factor Specifies the elevation benchmark size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger
object
Crosshair Scale For US style, increases the size of the elevation benchmark crosshairs, extending
Factor them beyond the marker circle

Marker Size For ISO style, specifies the marker size; increase the size value to obtain a larger
marker
Extension Length Specifies the length of the object line (available only on the Object Info palette after
the elevation benchmark object is placed)

1st click
2nd click

Dimensioning the Slope of Surfaces

The Slope Dimension tool creates a rise over run indicator that displays the slope (rise/run) of any angle on any surface
in the drawing.
594 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

To create a slope indicator:

1. Click the Slope Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to mark the beginning of the slope. Click again to mark the end of the slope.
If this is the first time the tool is used in this session, the Slope Dimension Properties dialog box opens. Specify
the preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK. The preferences can be changed later in
the Object Info palette.
3. The rise / run indicator is drawn.
2nd click

1st click

Use the control point at the elbow of the slope indicator to move it; change the appearance of the rise / run
indicator by editing its parameters in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Draw Roof Surface Draws the defining line as a dashed line
Scale Factor Determines the size of the indicator
Base Specifies a numerical denominator to indicate the run portion of the rise/
run ratio

Inserting a Scale Bar

A scale bar can be placed on the drawing to define the scale of the drawing objects. To include a scale bar for a
viewport, select Modify > Edit Viewport, and edit the viewport annotations.

To add a scale bar to the drawing:

1. Click the Scale Bar tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing to insert the scale bar.
3. Click again to determine the rotation of the scale bar and to place it on the drawing.
4. Position the scale bar as desired. The scale bar properties can be edited later by selecting the scale bar and
changing the properties in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Printed Height Specify the printed height of the scale bar
Minor Length Specify the minor length
 Using Notation Objects | 595

Parameter Description
# of Min Divs Specify the number of minor divisions (the first division is split into minor
divisions; the remainder of the scale bar is in major divisions)
Major Length Specify the major length
# of Major Divs Specify the number of major divisions
Style Select the scale bar style: Zigzag, Box, Line, Checker, or Flip
Adjust Units Select to switch between units specified for the drawing file (File > Document
Settings > Units); for example, switch between feet and inches
Decimal Points Select to display units with up to four decimal places

Inserting a Design Series Leader Line

The Vectorworks Fundamentals product provides a basic leader line object. In a Vectorworks Design Series workspace,
the leader line includes additional parameters.

To insert a leader line symbol in the Vectorworks Design Series:

Click the Leader Line object from the Basic tool set.
If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Set the
default properties for the object and click OK. The properties can be edited after placement from the Object Info
palette.

Parameter Description
Shoulder Length Sets the length of the leader lines shoulder
Shoulder
Length

Arrows Sets whether to have an arrow on the leader line and if so, the side from
which it extends
Marker Style Select a marker style from the list
Marker Size/Marker Angle Sets the size of the marker and the angle of the leader line

Once the leader line has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
If there are several leader line objects, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command to improve readability (see
Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
596 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing

Creating Grid Bubbles

Grid bubble objects are dimensioned grid lines with bubble markers. This type of drawing notation can help locate
columns and other primary building features on construction documents.

Drawing a Grid Bubble Object

To draw a grid bubble object:

1. Click the Grid Bubble tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
Place a line of grid bubbles by drawing an open polygon with the tool. The first click starts the grid line; the
second click determines the angle of the grid line and sets a marker at that location. Each remaining click sets a
grid marker. Grid marker objects maintain a constant size regardless of the drawing scale.
2. Double-click to end the grid line. The first time the object is inserted in this session, the Preferences dialog box
opens. These parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info
palette.

Grid Bubble Properties

The grid bubble parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Starting Mark Indicates the starting number or letter for grid labeling; labels are
automatically incremented
Prefix Specifies a prefix, if any, to apply to the grid labels
Dim Text Size Specifies the point size of the dimension text
Item Text Size Specifies the point size of the bubble label text
Show Dimensions Select to display the dimensions on the grid
Flip Select to flip the bubble labels to the other side of the dimension string
Rotate Text Select to rotate the bubble label text with the grid
Draw First Grid Select to display the first bubble grid; deselect to hide it (useful when creating
nested grids)
Bubbles Both Ends Select to draw bubble labels at both ends of the grid line

Line Style Select the grid line style

Size Factor Scales the size of the bubbles
Bubble Offset Specifies the offset distance of the bubbles from the dimension string
 Using Notation Objects | 597

Parameter Description
Grid Length Indicates the grid length
Vertex parameters Edits the bubble grid line; while editing the bubble grid line in this way is
possible, it may be preferable to use the Reshape tool instead. See
Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.

By combining several bubble grids and adjusting labeling properties, hierarchical (nested) grids can be created.
598 | Chapter 14: Annotation and Detailing
Drawing Utilities 15
The Navigation Palette
The Navigation palette provides access to classes, design layers, sheet layers, viewports, and saved views, similar to the
Organization dialog box. However, unlike the Organization dialog box, the drawing area is accessible while the
Navigation palette is open.
To use the Navigation palette:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Navigation.
The Navigation palette opens.

tab b ab b
b ers rs ta tab s t s ta
a Lay aye rts w
s t Vi nce
e
sse sign eet L wpo ved fere
Cla De Sh Vie Sa Re

Options menu (classes and

design layers tabs only)
Navigation/
context menu
(varies by active
tab)

Active class/layer setting

(classes, design layers, and
sheet layers tabs only)
Story column available for
design layers
(Vectorworks Architect
required)
Visibility settings

Stacking order (design layers and

sheet layers tabs only)

Click the desired tab to set the active tab upon opening the Navigation palette. Select Window > Palettes > Save
Palette Positions to save the changes. To revert the active tab back to the setting established when a custom
workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences folder), click Reset Saved Settings from the Session tab
of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on page 20 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide).
2. Select the appropriate tab: Classes, Design Layers, Sheet Layers, Viewports, Saved Views, or References.
A list of items of that type in the current drawing displays.
3. Change the settings for classes, design layers, sheet layers, viewports, saved views, or references as needed.
Click a class or design layers Visibility column to set the visibility for objects in that layer. To set the same
visibility for all classes or design layers in the list, Option-click (Macintosh) or Alt-click (Windows) one of the
Visibility columns.
Use the navigation context menu options to toggle the display of classes in hierarchical order, or to expand or
collapse the class list for better manageability.
If classes are displayed in hierarchical order, click the Visibility column for a class group header and all of its
sublevels inherit that visibility setting.
600 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Double-click a class, design layer, or sheet layer to activate it. Or, click the column to the left of the items
name to activate it.
Double-click a saved view to switch to that view.
Double-click a viewport to switch the active layer to the sheet layer or design layer that contains the viewport,
and to select the viewport (if a viewport is in a class with settings that prevent the viewport from being
selected, a message displays to indicate that the active class changed to the viewport class).
Select a class or design layer and then select one of the Class Options or Layer Options.
Change the stacking order of a design layer or sheet layer by clicking the number in its # column and dragging
it up or down the list.
Double-click on a tab in the Navigation palette to open the equivalent tab in the Organization dialog box.
See the following sections in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for details:
List Box Functionality on page 13
Displaying Classes in Hierarchical Order on page 93
Changing the Design Layer Stacking Order on page 99
Setting the Active Design Layer on page 103
Changing the Sheet Layer Stacking Order on page 105
Creating Classes on page 107
Setting the Active Class on page 112
Managing Saved Views on page 115
Setting Visibilities on page 118
4. The Navigation menu provides creation and management functions. Select a list item and then select the desired
function from the Navigation menu to the right of the References tab.
Alternatively, Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) a list item and then select the desired function from
the navigation context menu.

Menu Command Function

Classes tab
New Select New to open the Class Options (Macintosh) or New Class (Windows) dialog
box. See Creating Classes on page 107 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
When a new class is created, it does not automatically become the active class.
Edit Select a class and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Class(es) dialog box. See
Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide. This option is not available when classes are displayed in hierarchical order
and a class group header is selected.
Duplicate Select a class and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the
duplicate is the same as the original class, with a number added (as in cabinets-2);
if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential number is used.
This option is not available when classes are displayed in hierarchical order and a
class group header is selected.
 The Navigation Palette | 601

Menu Command Function

Delete Select a class and then select Delete to open the Delete Class(es) dialog box.
Specify what to do with the objects currently assigned to the class(es) being deleted
(delete them, or reassign them to another selected class). Click OK to return to the
Navigation palette. The program moves all objects in the deleted class(es) to the
appropriate class, or deletes them, as specified. Shortcut keys for this command are
Delete (Windows) and Forward Delete (Macintosh). This option is not available
when classes are displayed in hierarchical order and a class group header is
selected.
The Dimension and None classes cannot be deleted. These are default classes
in every drawing.
Activate Select a class and then select Activate to make that class active for every design
layer, viewport, and saved view without class visibility saved. (Enter is a shortcut
key for this command.)
Details Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Classes tab in Details
view; double-clicking the Classes tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for this
command
Visibilities Select a class and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to the
Classes tab in Visibilities view (showing Viewport and Saved View visibilities for
the class)
Select All Choose Select All to select all classes
Hierarchical Toggles the hierarchical display of classes on or off
Display
Expand All When classes are displayed in hierarchical order, displays all classes in the file
Collapse All When classes are displayed in hierarchical order, collapses the list to display only
top-level classes (those with no dash in the name) and class group headers
Design Layers
tab
New Select New to open the New Design Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on
page 95 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
When a new layer is created, it becomes the active layer.
Edit Select a layer and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Design Layers dialog box.
See Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Duplicate Select a design layer and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of
the duplicate is the same as the original layer, with a number added (as in
floorplan-2); if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential
number is used.
Delete Select a design layer and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm
the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward
Delete (Macintosh).
When a design layer is removed from the drawing, all objects in that layer are
also removed.
602 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Menu Command Function

Activate Select a layer and then select Activate to switch to that design layer. (Enter is a
shortcut key for this command.)
Update (Layer import referencing method only) This option is available if a design layer
Reference has been imported into this file with workgroup referencing (the name of the
referenced layer displays in italics). Select a referenced layer and then select
Update Reference to update this file with layer information from the master file.
See Workgroup Referencing on page 121 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
Details Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Design Layers tab in
Details view; double-clicking the Design Layers tab in the Navigation palette is a
shortcut for this command
Visibilities Select a layer and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to the
Design Layers tab in Visibilities view (showing Viewport and Saved View
visibilities for the layer)
Select All Choose Select All to select all design layers
Sheet Layers tab
New Select New to open the New Sheet Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on
page 95 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
When a new layer is created, it becomes the active layer.
Edit Select a sheet layer and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Sheet Layers dialog
box. See Setting Sheet Layer Properties on page 104 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Duplicate Select a sheet layer and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The Sheet Title
of the duplicate is the same as the original layer. The Sheet Number of the
duplicate is the same as the original layer, with a number added (as in details-2); if
the original Sheet Number ends in a number, the next available sequential number
is used.
Delete Select a sheet layer and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm
the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward
Delete (Macintosh).
Activate Select a layer and then select Activate to switch to that sheet layer. (Enter is a
shortcut key for this command.)
Details Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Sheet Layers tab in
Details view; double-clicking the Sheet Layers tab in the Navigation palette is a
shortcut for this command
Select All Choose Select All to select all sheet layers
Viewports tab
New Select New to open the Create Viewport dialog box. For sheet layer viewports, see
Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer on page 735 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. For design layer viewports, see
Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 723 in this guide.
 The Navigation Palette | 603

Menu Command Function

Edit Select a viewport and then select Edit to edit it in the Properties dialog box. For
sheet layer viewports, see Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 738 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. For design layer viewports, see
Properties of Design Layer Viewports on page 730 in this guide.
Duplicate Select a viewport and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the
duplicate is the same as the original viewport, with a number added (as in
details-2); if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential
number is used.
The Drawing Title of the duplicate is the same as the original viewport. If the
original viewport has a drawing label, the Drawing Number of the label in the
duplicate viewport is the next available sequential number.
The duplicate viewport is placed directly on top of the original, in the original sheet
layer.
Delete Select a viewport and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the
deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward
Delete (Macintosh).
Activate Select a viewport and then select Activate to switch to that viewports sheet layer
and select that viewport (if a viewport is in a class with settings that prevent the
viewport from being selected, a message displays to indicate that the active class
changed to the viewport class). (Enter is a shortcut key for this command.)
Update Select one or more sheet layer viewports, and then select Update to render the
viewports with their foreground and background render settings. (Alternatively,
select View > Update Selected Viewports.) When a Renderworks render mode is
selected, the viewports render in the background once the geometry has been
processed (see Background Rendering on page 667 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). Icons in the Navigation palette indicate the render
status of the viewports.
Up to date, rendered
Rendering in progress
Queued for rendering
Out of date

Cancel Update When one or more selected sheet layer viewports are in the process of updating, or
in the render queue, Cancel Update cancels the current render and any pending
rendering. (Alternatively, select View > Cancel All Viewport Updates.)
Details Click Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Viewports tab in Details
view; double-clicking the Viewports tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for
this command
Visibilities Select a viewport and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box to
the Viewports tab in Visibilities view (showing Class and Design Layer visibilities
for the viewport)
Select All Choose Select All to select all viewports
604 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Menu Command Function

Saved Views tab
New Select New to open the Save View dialog box. See Creating Saved Views on
page 115 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Edit Select a saved view and then select Edit to edit it in the Edit Saved View dialog
box. See Editing Saved Views on page 116 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
Duplicate Select a saved view and then select Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of
the duplicate is the same as the original view, with a number added (as in
deckview-2); if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential
number is used.
Delete Select a saved view and then select Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm
the deletion. Shortcut keys for this command are Delete (Windows) and Forward
Delete (Macintosh).
Activate Select a saved view and then select Activate to switch to that view. (Enter is a
shortcut key for this command.)
Redefine Select a saved view and then select Redefine to open the Redefine Saved Views
dialog box. See Redefining Saved Views on page 605.
Details Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the Saved Views tab in
Details view; double-clicking the Saved Views tab in the Navigation palette is a
shortcut for this command
Visibilities Select a saved view and then select Visibilities to open the Organization dialog box
to the Saved Views tab in Visibilities view (showing Class and Design Layer
visibilities for the saved view). The active class/layer and class/layer options can
also be changed here.
Select All Choose Select All to select all saved views
References tab
New Click New to open the Open File dialog box. For layer import references, see
Adding and Editing Layer Import References on page 123 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide. For design layer viewport references, see Creating a
Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 726 in this guide.
Edit Select a referenced file and click Edit to open the Edit Reference dialog box. For
layer import references, see Adding and Editing Layer Import References on
page 123 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. For design layer
viewport references, see Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on
page 726 in this guide.
Delete Select a reference and click Delete. In the Delete Reference dialog box, specify
what to do with the items in the file that are currently referenced. See Deleting
References on page 130 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Update Select a referenced file and click Update to update this document with references
from the file. See Updating References on page 126 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Update All Click Update All to update all of the references in this document. See Updating
References on page 126 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
 The Navigation Palette | 605

Menu Command Function

Open Select a referenced file and click Open to open the referenced file. Referenced PDF
or image files are opened with the default application for the file type. This
command is not available when more than one referenced file is selected.
Details Select Details to open the Organization dialog box to the References tab in Details
view; double-clicking the References tab in the Navigation palette is a shortcut for
this command
Select All Choose Select All to select all references

Redefining Saved Views

To change the content of a saved view, use the Redefine command. This changes the saved view settings to match
those of the current drawing area view, including the current layer options and class options, the plan rotation, the
visibility of layers and classes that are inactive, and the active layer and class.
To redefine a saved view:
1. From the Navigation palette, select the Saved Views tab.
2. Select the view to be changed from the list.
3. From the Navigation palette menu or the view context menu, select Redefine.
The Redefine Saved View dialog box opens. Specify the view options and the visibility parameters.

Parameter Description
View Name Specify the view name
Restore Options
View Saves the general view parameters (current projection, 3D orientation, plan
Orientation rotation, and page origin settings) of the active layer
Zoom and Pan Saves the zoom and pan settings of the active layer
Page Location Saves the design layer page location with the view; if deselected, the current page
location setting is used when the view is displayed. The page location of sheet
layers cannot be saved.
Unified View Saves the current unified view status, whether on or off; if deselected, the current
unified view status is ignored and the status in effect when the view was created is
used
Render Mode Saves the current render mode and render options; if deselected, uses the render
and Options mode and options that were set when the view was created (if saved at that time)
606 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Parameter Description
Layer Saves the current layer visibilities; if deselected, uses the visibilities that were set
Visibility when the view was created (if saved at that time)
Class Visibility Saves the current class visibilities; if deselected, uses the visibilities that were set
when the view was created (if saved at that time)

4. Click OK to save the current drawing area view with the specified settings.

Setting Global and Default Attributes

In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the Attributes palette includes a utility menu for making changes to all the
attributes at one time. A set of default attributes can be saved and then restored, and attributes can quickly be set to be
By Class, or have all By Class settings removed.
To access the Attributes palette utility menu:
1. From the Attributes palette, click the Utility Menu button to open the utility menu.

Command Description
Use Default Attributes Restores the default Attributes palette settings
Set Default Attributes Saves all current parameter settings in the Attributes palette as the default set
Make All Attributes Sets all Attributes palette parameters to be determined by the objects class
By Class (see Setting Class Attributes on page 112 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide)
Remove By Class Removes any by class settings for all Attributes palette parameters
Settings

2. Select a utility command to set the default attributes or change the Attribute palette parameter settings.

Creating Custom Modification Scripts

Custom modification scripts can select multiple objects and modify their common properties and attributes in a single
operation. Objects can be selected regardless of layer, layer scale, class, or current selection or visibility status. Several
levels of selection criteria make it easy to target specific object sets for modification. No scripting knowledge is
necessary.
To create a custom modification script:
1. Select Tools > Custom Modification.
The Custom Modification dialog box opens.
 Creating Custom Modification Scripts | 607

Parameter Description
Execute Immediately Performs the specified selection operation immediately upon exiting the
Custom Modification dialog box; the operation criteria is not saved for future
use
Create VectorScript Saves the criteria and command options as a VectorScript that can be reused as
needed
Create Python Script Saves the criteria and command options as a Python script that can be reused as
needed
Selection Criteria Determines the objects to select and modify based on the selected criteria
Including components Applies the selection to objects that are grouped and/or included in viewport
of annotations
Objects that meet the Displays the number of drawing objects that will be affected
criteria
More Choices/Fewer Specify additional criteria by clicking More Choices. To remove the most
Choices recently added level of criteria, click Fewer Choices.

2. Choose the desired criteria options. The number of objects that meet the criteria displays.
When symbols are selected as the criteria and symbol folders are present in the file, click the button available near
the symbol type to open the Select Symbol dialog box. Select the specific symbol, and then click OK to return to
the Custom Modification dialog box.

3. Click OK.
608 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

If the Create Script option was chosen, when prompted, name the script containing the modification commands.
The script then displays in a script palette, and can be double-clicked to perform the operation. See Creating and
Editing Script Palettes and Scripts on page 849.
4. If the Execute Immediately option was chosen, the Properties dialog box opens.
The common properties of the selected objects are displayed and can be modified. Similar to a multiple selection,
if the parameter settings for the objects are different, they display as a blank list or as a check box of indeterminate
state. Parameter edits apply to all selected objects when in multiple edit mode.

Multiple selection mode

The blank Layer list indicates Edits the attributes of the
that the selected objects are selected objects
located on different layers

The indeterminate check box

means that some of the objects
have different settings

5. To edit the object attributes, click Attributes.

The Attributes dialog box opens. Edit the available attributes of the selected objects, and click OK. See The
Attributes Palette on page 501 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.

6. Click OK to return to the drawing.

Modifying Objects by Record Value

This command modifies the color, size, or height of objects in a drawing based on the numeric value of a particular
record field attached to the selected items. This can be useful for analyzing and comparing objects in a drawing.
To modify objects by record value:
1. Select Tools > Records > Modify by Record.
The Modify by Record Value dialog box opens.
 Modifying Objects by Record Value | 609

Parameter Description
Saved Settings
Options
Settings Select <Active Settings> to use the settings currently selected in the dialog box;
to use a set of saved settings, select them from the pull-down list
Save Opens a dialog box to name and save the currently selected settings so that they
can quickly be selected as a set
Manage Opens the Manage Saved Sets dialog box to rename or delete sets of saved
settings (see Managing Saved Settings on page 612)
Record Lists the record formats available for the applicable objects in the current
drawing (based on the settings in the Apply to and Include components of
fields). Select the record that contains the field you want to use.
Record Field Lists the fields available in the selected Record format; select the field to use to
modify the objects
Color Gradient Applies colors to the selected objects according to the numeric value in the
Record Field. Use the fields in the Options box to select a gradient and enter a
numeric range. The colors are automatically drawn from the gradient and
assigned at equal intervals in the given range.
Color Gradient
Options
Apply to Select the object attributes to which the specified colors will be applied: fill
background or foreground, or pen background or foreground
Lower bound/ Objects with a field value at or below the lower bound will be given the color at
Upper bound the start (left side) of the gradient. Objects with a value at or above the upper
bound will be given the color at the end (right side) of the gradient. Objects
with a value between the bounds will be given a color along the gradient.
Gradient Select the desired gradient from either the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide). The object colors will be taken from this gradient.
610 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Parameter Description
Color Ranges Applies colors to the selected objects according to the numeric value in the
Record Field. Use the fields in the Options box to define each numeric range
and the color to be used.
Color Range Options
Apply to Select the object attributes to which the specified colors will be applied: fill
background or foreground, or pen background or foreground
Ranges list Lists the numeric ranges and associated colors that will be used to modify
objects
Add/Edit To add a range, click Add. To edit a range, select a range from the list and click
Edit (or double-click a value). The Edit Color Range dialog box opens.

Select a color, and then specify the Lower Bound and Upper Bound of field
values to which the color will be applied. Click OK, and the range displays in
the Ranges list.
Delete Select a range from the list and click Delete to remove it from the list
Color Value Applies colors to the selected objects according to the numeric value in the
Record Field. Use the fields in the Options box to specify a color for each
numeric value found among the selected objects.
Color Value Options
Apply to Select the object attributes to which the specified colors will be applied: fill
background or foreground, or pen background or foreground
Values list Lists the numeric values of the selected field for the selected objects, and the
associated colors that will be used to modify the objects
 Modifying Objects by Record Value | 611

Parameter Description
Edit Select a record field value from the list and click Edit (or double-click a value)
to open the Edit Color Value dialog box.

To apply a color to objects with this value, select the Apply color option, and
then select a color from the pull-down list. Click OK, and the Values list is
updated.
To remove the color from objects with this value, access the Edit Color Value
dialog box and deselect the Apply color option, Alternatively, deselect the
Apply column on the Values list.
Resize Scales the selected objects by a specific amount; in the Options box, enter the
Multiplier to apply to the value in the Record Field
Extrude Extrudes the selected objects by a specific amount; in the Options box, enter a
Multiplier to apply to the value in the Record Field
Elevate 2D Polys Converts 2D polygons or polylines to 3D polygons, using the elevation value in
the record attached to each polygon/polyline to determine its equivalent 3D
polygon elevation. Normally, site model source data from external sources,
such as GIS, contain elevation data in attached records, so this is an automated
way of creating the 3D contours to use as the basis of a site model. If needed,
specify a Multiplier value other than 1; the elevation value in the attached
record is multiplied by the specified factor to determine the contour elevation.
Some GIS data is grouped. Ungroup the data, and select the option to
Attach group records to the resultant ungrouped objects, so that each
contour has individual data attached.
Apply to Select whether to apply the attributes to the entire drawing, or to the currently
selected objects only
Include components Optionally, select to apply the attributes to objects within groups and symbols,
of in addition to other objects. Groups and symbols are ignored if these
checkboxes are not selected.

2. Click OK.
3. The color, size, or height of the drawing objects are modified.
612 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

This map of buildings and roads was modified according to the area value in
each buildings record. The smallest areas have a yellow fill, medium-sized
areas have a red fill, and the largest area has a brown fill.

Managing Saved Settings

If you have saved settings to use with the Modify by Record command, use the Manage button on the Modify by
Record Value dialog box to rename or delete these saved settings when needed.
To manage saved settings for the Modify by Record command:
1. Select Tools > Records > Modify by Record.
The Modify by Record Value dialog box opens.
2. Click Manage.
The Manage Saved Sets dialog box opens. Select the set to change.

Parameter Description
Rename Select and enter a new name for the saved set.
Delete Select to delete the set. You are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the saved
set.

3. Click OK to close the Manage Saved Sets dialog box. Click OK again to close the Modify by Record Value dialog
box.
 Selecting Similar Objects | 613

Selecting Similar Objects

Use the Select Similar tool to select objects that have features in common with a specific object. This can be useful if
you need to move or modify a large number of similar objects, such as windows. It can also make it easier to locate
similar objects in a drawing that is very crowded.

Select any Object Settings menu

Current Selection Preferences

Mode Description
Select any Object Selects objects that are similar to the clicked object
Current Selection Selects objects that are similar to the clicked object, within a group of
preselected objects
Preferences Sets the default parameters to be used for the tool
Settings menu Sets the group of parameters to be used for the tooleither the currently
active settings, or a selection from the list of saved settings

Walls and objects within walls cannot be selected at the same time. Therefore, sometimes the objects selected by
this tool may not be as expected. For example, you cannot select a set of walls and then use Current Selection
mode to select all windows within those walls.

To select similar objects:

1. To select from a specific set of objects, select the objects first.

2. Click the Select Similar tool from the Basic tool palette.
3. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify the set of object attributes to match. The Select Similar Preferences
dialog box opens.
Alternatively, select a set of saved attributes from the Settings menu on the Tool bar.
614 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Parameter Description
Saved Settings Options
Settings Select <Active Settings> to use the attributes currently selected in the dialog
box; to use a set of saved attributes, select them from the pull-down list
Save Opens a dialog box to name and save the currently selected attributes so that
they can quickly be selected as a set
Manage Opens the Saved Settings dialog box to rename or delete sets of saved tool
attributes (see Managing Saved Settings on page 615)
All Checked box: All attributes in the group are selected; click to deselect all
attributes in the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the group are selected; click to select all
attributes in the group.
Box displays (Windows) or (Macintosh): One or more attributes
in the group are not selected; click to select all attributes in the group.
Fill Attributes Selects objects with matching fills, including foreground and background
colors, styles (pattern, hatch, gradient, or image fill), and textures
Text Attributes Selects text objects, dimensions, or plug-in objects with matching text
attributes, including font, size, font style, alignment, and spacing
Wall Attributes Selects walls and round walls with matching thicknesses and fill styles
Pen Attributes Selects objects with matching pen foreground and background colors, styles
(solid, pattern, or line type), and line weights
Other Selects objects with various other matching attributes
 Selecting Similar Objects | 615

Parameter Description
Line End Marker Selects line objects with matching end markers, including marker styles and
sizes

4. Select the similar attributes to use for the selection, and click OK.
5. Click the object that you want to find objects similar to.
An alert displays if the clicked object is not appropriate for the selected attributes (for example, if the Font
attribute is selected, but a plant object is clicked).
6. The similar objects are selected.

With the Select Similar tool set to select by similar object type, click on All window objects are selected (including those behind solid objects)
a window

Managing Saved Settings

If you have saved attributes to use with the Select Similar tool, use the Manage button on the Select Similar
Preferences dialog box to rename or delete these saved settings when needed.
To manage saved settings for the Select Similar tool:
1. Select the Select Similar tool from the Basic tool palette, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar. The Select
Similar Preferences dialog box opens.
2. Click Manage.
The Saved Settings dialog box opens. Select the set of saved attributes to change.

Parameter Description
Rename Select and enter a new name for the set of attributes. If the entered name is already
assigned to another set of attributes, you are prompted to confirm that you want to
replace the existing set with the set being saved.
616 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Parameter Description
Delete Select to delete the set of attributes. You are prompted to confirm that you want to
delete the saved settings.

3. Click OK to close the Saved Settings dialog box. Click OK again to close the Select Similar Preferences dialog
box.

Exporting Custom Resources

If you create custom resources and reuse them frequently, you may want to organize them into resource libraries. You
and other users can add the libraries to the Resource Browser favorites, or add them to the default content, and then
easily use resources from them as needed. (For more information about resources, see Using Vectorworks Resources
on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, use the export function of the Resource Browser to export one or more
resources from the current document to another file, without opening the file. If an older version of the resource is
already in the target document, it can be updated with the new version.
To export resources:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the resource(s) to export.
2. Select Export from the Resources menu. Alternatively, Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the
resource and select Export Resource from the context menu.
The Export Resource dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Destination list Displays Recent Export Files, Libraries, and Currently Open files. Either
select a file from the window and click OK, or click Browse to select a file
from another location
Browse Specifies a different location for the exported resource
Preserve folder During export, maintains the same folder structure the exported resource had
hierarchy in its source file
 Inserting Images in Worksheets | 617

3. Click OK.
If the target file already contains a resource with the same name, the Resource Name Conflict dialog box opens
with three options: replace the resource, rename the resource, or do not export that resource (any other selected
resources will be exported, if there are no further name conflicts). Select an option, and then click OK.
If there is a name conflict between two resources of different types (such as a symbol and an image), the option to
replace the resource in the target file is not available.

Inserting Images in Worksheets

If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, images can be added to worksheets to provide more detailed information
about the objects in a drawing. The images can be either thumbnail versions of objects, or samples of the 2D attributes
of objects. For example, you might create a window schedule that shows top and front thumbnail views of each type of
window in your drawing, in addition to data about each window.
Worksheets can have two types of rows: spreadsheet and database. The cells in a spreadsheet row contain constants
(text or numbers), or formulas. Database rows consist of a header row and sub-rows, and they show data that are
associated with specific drawing objects. Images can be inserted in either type of row.
To insert an image in a cell, use the image function, which works the same as other standard worksheet functions; see
Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells on page 828 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Like other functions, you can enter an image function manually on the Formula bar, or use commands and dialog boxes
to build a formula that uses the image function.
A cell can include either text or an image, but not both.
To manually enter an image formula:
1. Select the cell.
2. Enter the image function (=IMAGE). The entry automatically displays in the worksheet Formula bar. If the cell is
in a database header row, no further entry is required.
3. If the cell is in a spreadsheet row, enter the rest of the formula to specify which object to display. For example, to
display an image of the symbol called K-02221, enter this:
=IMAGE(S='K-02221')
4. When the formula is complete, click the green check mark to validate the entry. To cancel an entry, click the red X.
5. The formula executes, and the image(s) display (Auto-recalc must be selected in the worksheet preferences; see
Preferences on page 820 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
6. Customize the image display as described in Formatting Image Cells on page 618.
To enter a formula with the Insert Image Function and Paste Criteria commands:
1. Select the cell.
2. Select Insert Image Function from the Worksheet menu.
The image function is placed in the worksheet Formula bar and the cursor is placed between the parentheses,
awaiting an argument. If the cell is in a database header row, no further entry is required.
3. If the cell is in a spreadsheet row, enter criteria to specify which drawing object to display. Select Paste Criteria
from the Worksheet menu.
4. If an object is selected when the Paste Criteria command is selected, the Paste Attributes dialog box opens.
Otherwise, proceed to step 5.
618 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Do one of the following:

To use attributes of the selected object as the only selection criteria, select the attributes and click OK. Proceed
to step 5.
To specify other criteria, or to use attributes of other objects in the drawing, click Custom.
5. The Criteria dialog box opens. Set each of the three fields to the desired selection criteria. Click More Choices to
specify additional criteria. Click Fewer Choices to remove added criteria. Click OK to add the criteria to the
function argument.

For each list, click to browse

for criteria options

6. When the formula is complete, click the green check mark to validate the entry. To cancel the entry, click the red
X.
7. The formula executes, and the image(s) display (Auto-recalc must be selected in the worksheet preferences; see
Preferences on page 820 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
8. Customize the image display as described in Formatting Image Cells on page 618.

Formatting Image Cells

1. Select the cell that contains the image function, and then select Format Cells from the worksheet menu.
2. From the Format Cells dialog box, click the Images tab to specify the type, size, view, and margin for the image in
the selected cell.
 Inserting Images in Worksheets | 619

Parameter Description
Image Type Select Thumbnail to display a thumbnail image of the referenced object in the cell;
this is useful for 2D/3D symbols or plug-in objects. Use other settings to control the
scale, view, rotation, and render mode shown in the thumbnail.
Select 2D Attributes to display a rectangle with the same 2D attributes as the
referenced object. For a styled wall, slab, or space, the rectangle fill is a top/plan
cross-section view of the object.
Size
AutoSize Sizes the image automatically so that the entire image is always visible, even when
the cell size changes
Fixed Sizes the image according to the specified Height and Width; also specify the Units
for the dimensions (points, millimeters, or inches)
Layer Scale Sizes the image according to the scale of the layer on which the object appears
(thumbnails only)
Custom Select this option and then click Scale to select or enter a scale for the image
Scale (thumbnails only)
View
Standard Select from any of the standard Vectorworks views for the image (thumbnails only)
Views
Rotation If Top/Plan view is selected, enter the number of degrees to rotate the image
(thumbnails only)
Render For any view except Top/Plan, select the render mode for the image (Wireframe,
Mode OpenGL, or Hidden Line); Top/Plan view is always rendered in Wireframe mode.
Applies to thumbnails only.
Margin
Units Enter the units to use for the Size of the margin around the image (points, millimeters,
or inches)
Size Enter the size of the margin around the image, in the specified Units
620 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Worksheet that includes 2D attribute images of wall styles Worksheet that includes thumbnail images of plant symbols

GIS and Georeferencing

In the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products, there are several features for importing and exporting GIS
(geographic information system) data, and for georeferencing Vectorworks drawings.
For a small-scale architectural or landscape project, you might want to accurately import information related to the
project site, such as property boundaries or municipal utility resources.
For a larger scale map project, you might import multiple shapefiles and image files and arrange them into maps,
adding colors, symbols, and notes based on database information. You might then export files for use in other GIS
software.
Both the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products can store georeferencing information for design layers, as well
as import and export georeferencing information related to shapefiles and image files. The Vectorworks Landmark
product has additional features to make common GIS operations easier, including tools for adding graticule and great
circle objects to a drawing.

Entering Georeferencing Information for the Document

Georeferencing options are complex; what works for architectural workflows may not be suitable for GIS workflows.
Different regions of the Earth have different geographical requirements.
Since the earth is not a perfect sphere, it is not a straightforward process to project a map onto the earths surface, or
transfer an object onto the surface. Projections are mathematical formulas that translate the shape of the earth onto a 2D
page. Because the translation loses data, different projections represent the longitudinal and latitudinal coordinates of
the non-uniform sphere onto the page.
When georeferencing is enabled, each design layer stores information that describes the mapping of that layers
Cartesian coordinate system onto a geographic coordinate system of latitude and longitude. The origin offset
determines how the projection relates to the center of the drawing in the Vectorworks file; this offset can be turned off
at the document level or at the layer level for GIS workflows.
If all or most design layers will have the same georeferencing information, use the Georeferencing command to set the
parameters for the document. After the default document georeferencing is set, edit each design layer to enable
georeferencing, and to customize the settings for individual layers, if needed.
 GIS and Georeferencing | 621

Layers without georeferencing will be assumed to be in the Equirectangular projection, which maps latitude and
longitude directly onto the X-Y axis. The origin will represent 0, 0, and the scale will be equal to that of the Earths
scale of latitude and longitude at the Equator. Some georeferencing tools do not work properly on design layers that are
not georeferenced.
To set georeferencing for a document:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Georeferencing. The Document Georeferencing dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Adjust origin and orientation Offsets the location of the georeferenced data so that it matches the way that
of georeferenced data to match the projection relates to the drawing center. Normally, enable the option for
document coordinates architectural documents which center and orient around geographical
latitude/longitude coordinates; deselect the option when working with raw
GIS data (shape files), when no offset is needed, and the center of the data set
is also considered to be the center of the projection.
Latitude/Longitude Specifies the latitude and longitude at the document origin (0,0); enter
decimal degrees, or degrees/minutes/seconds (for example, 39.18, 39 10
32, or 39d 10m 32s) preceded by a minus (-) sign when appropriate
Angle to True North Specifies which direction is north from the document origin; use an azimuth
degree measurement (0 is along the Y axis, 90 is along the positive X axis)
Projection Select the appropriate projection type, based on the drawings scale and
purpose; additional parameters that are required to map to the selected
projection display in the area below this field. See Projection Options on
page 629 for details about projections.
Alternatively, select the WKT (Well Known Text) option and specify any
other projection or coordinate system that is supported by GDAL (Geospatial
Data Abstraction Library) in the WKT markup language.
For the Vectorworks Architect product, only the Lat/Lon Document
Units, Universal Transverse Mercator, and State Plane Coordinate
System (NAD83) options are available.
622 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Parameter Description
Ellipsoid Select the appropriate reference ellipsoid used to create the projection
(applies to all projections except State Plane Coordinate System NAD83 and
NAD27)
UTM Grid Zone/ For the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection, select the UTM
Hemisphere grid zone and UTM hemisphere that apply to this drawing
State/Zone For a State Plane Coordinate System (NAD83 or NAD27) projection, select
the state and zone that apply to this drawing
Center Latitude/Longitude Specify the latitude and longitude of the center of the selected projection
(applies to Equirectangular, Azimuthal Equidistant, Transverse Mercator,
Cassini-Soldner, Gnomonic, or Stereographic projections)
Scale For the Transverse Mercator projection, specify the scale factor along the
central longitude; for the Stereographic projection, specify the scale factor at
the central point
Standard Parallel 1/2 For the Lambert Conformal Conic projection, enter the two standard parallels
to use for the projection
Transformation mode Select the appropriate option for transforming the layer objects when the
layers projection type is changed:
Do not transform this layers geometry: Layer objects will not be
transformed when the layers projection is changed
Transform all geometry individually: Best for projecting geographic
data, such as municipal boundaries, roads, rivers, and locations on a map
Move and rotate all geometry as a group: Best for projecting
non-geographic drawing objects, such as architectural plans
Reset Discards any edits made and returns all fields to their former values

2. Click OK to save the georeferencing settings.

3. Enable georeferencing for each design layer that requires it, as described in Entering Georeferencing Information
for a Design Layer on page 622.

Entering Georeferencing Information for a Design Layer

Use the Edit Design Layers dialog box to enable georeferencing for the layers that will use it. Options set here can
override the georeferencing options set for the document. Once you have a georeferenced design layer, you can import
georeferenced files into it, as well as export images or shapefiles that include georeferencing information.
To enable georeferencing for a design layer:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box. From the Design Layers tab, select the layer(s)
to be changed, and click Edit.
2. From the Edit Design Layers dialog box, select Georeferenced. The current projection for the layer displays
below that field; the default is the current projection setting for the document.
 GIS and Georeferencing | 623

When Georeferenced is
selected, the current
design layer projection
displays

3. To edit the georeferencing information, click Edit Georeferencing.

The Georeferencing dialog box opens, from which you can choose either to use the same settings used for the
document overall, or to enter custom settings. If you choose to use custom settings for this design layer, enter the
remaining fields as described for the Document Georeferencing dialog box (see Entering Georeferencing
Information for the Document on page 620).
When your entries are complete, click OK to save the settings and return to the Edit Design Layers dialog box.

Parameter Description
This layer is
georeferenced
624 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Parameter Description
by the document Specifies that the georeferencing information for this design layer is the same
as the settings for the document. Click Edit Document Georeferencing to
view or change the current document settings on the Document
Georeferencing dialog box.
by custom settings Specifies that the georeferencing information for this design layer is different
from the settings for the document (or no document settings were entered). To
copy the georeferencing information from an existing layer, click Copy from
Layer to open the Copy Georeference from Layer dialog box; select a design
layer and click OK.
Settings fields and See Entering Georeferencing Information for the Document on page 620
Transformation mode
Reset Discards any edits made and returns all fields to their former values

4. Click OK to enable georeferencing for the design layer. The selected projection displays on the Organization
dialog box.

Replacing Objects with Symbols

The Replace with Symbol command converts a selected object into a specified symbol. The symbol can use the
records provided with the original object, the records associated with the replacement symbol, or both. If an imported
shapefile (Vectorworks Architect or Landmark required) contains data markers that indicate the location of certain
types of objects, you can convert the markers into a symbol that better suits your drawing.
To replace an object with a symbol:
1. Select the object(s) to be replaced.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Replace with Symbol.
3. The Choose a Symbol dialog box opens.

4. Select a symbol, and then select whether to use the original object records and the replacement symbol records.
5. Click OK, and then confirm that you want to replace all selected objects.
 GIS and Georeferencing | 625

Moving an Object to a Specific Location

In the Vectorworks Landmark product, you can move an object in a georeferenced file to a different geographic
location.
To move an object geographically:
1. Select the object(s) to be moved.
2. Select Modify > Move > Move Geographic.
The Move Geographic dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Move to location Select to move the selected object(s) to the specified Latitude and
Longitude
Latitude/Longitude Specifies the latitude and longitude to which the object will be moved; enter
decimal degrees, or degrees/minutes/seconds (for example, 39.18, 39 10
32, or 39d 10m 32s) preceded by a minus (-) sign when appropriate
Move relative Select to move the selected object(s) from the current location using the
specified Azimuth and Distance
Azimuth/Distance Specifies the direction in degrees (0 is the Y axis, 90 is the X axis), and the
distance the object will be moved, in document units

3. Click OK to move the object(s).

Creating a Graticule
In the Vectorworks Landmark product, use the Graticule tool to place a reference grid object over the drawing. Unlike
a grid that is based on X and Y coordinates, the graticule lines are based on longitude and latitude lines.
626 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Polyline creation options Fillet Radius

Preferences

Mode Description
Polyline creation Selects the method for drawing the polyline that will bound the graticule
options object; see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Fillet Radius If the Arc Vertex mode is selected, specifies the fillet radius to use
Preferences Sets the default parameters to be used for the tool

To create a graticule:

1. From the Site Planning tool set, select the Graticule tool.
2. From the Tool bar, click the Preferences button.
The Graticule Properties dialog box opens.
 GIS and Georeferencing | 627

Parameter Description
Settings Opens the Graticule Settings dialog box, to change the pen color and line
style of the major and minor lines, if desired (all of the other settings here are
also on the properties dialog box, as described below). Click OK to save your
entries and return to the Graticule Properties dialog box.

Latitude
Min/Max Sets the minimum and maximum latitude lines to include in the graticule;
enter decimal degrees, or degrees/minutes/seconds (for example, 39.18, 39
10 32, or 39d 10m 32s) preceded by a minus (-) sign when appropriate
Major Lines Interval Sets the distance (in degrees) between the major latitude lines
Minor Line Spacing Sets the number of minor lines to draw between the major latitude lines
Longitude
Min/Max Sets the minimum and maximum longitude lines to include in the graticule;
enter decimal degrees, or degrees/minutes/seconds (for example, 39.18, 39
10 32, or 39d 10m 32s) preceded by a minus (-) sign when appropriate
Major Lines Interval Sets the distance (in degrees) between the major longitude lines
Minor Line Spacing Sets the number of minor lines to draw between the major longitude lines
Label
Label Major Lines Places a label on each major latitude and longitude line
Label Minor Lines Places a label on each minor latitude and longitude line
Label Style Specifies whether the degrees on the labels are in decimal or degrees/minutes
format

3. Click OK to save the default graticule settings.

628 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

4. From the Tool bar, select the type of polyline to use as the boundary for the graticule.
5. Click on the drawing to create the polyline boundary in the approximate location of the latitude and longitude lines
you specified. Make the polyline larger than the graticule will be, so the graticule will not be cut by the polyline.
When you complete the polyline, a graticule object is created over the specified location.

Creating a Great Circle

In the Vectorworks Landmark product, use the Great Circle tool to place a great circle object over the drawing. This is
useful for showing the actual distance between points on a map. Unlike a dimension that shows the linear distance
between X and Y coordinates in 2D, a great circle is an arc that shows the shortest distance between two points on the
sphere-shaped Earth.
Unconstrained Line

Constrained Line Preferences

Mode Description
Constrained Line Constrains the line to be vertical, horizontal, and 30 or 45 from vertical or
horizontal in any direction
Unconstrained Line Draws the line at any angle
Press and hold the Shift key to snap the line to predetermined angles
Preferences Sets the default parameters to be used for the tool

To create a great circle:

1. From the Site Planning tool set, select the Great Circle tool.
2. From the Tool bar, click the Preferences button.
The Great Circle Properties dialog box opens.
 GIS and Georeferencing | 629

Parameter Description
Show Distance Places a distance measurement on the drawing
Distance Unit Select the unit to use for the distance measurement
Show Angle Places an angle measurement on the drawing
Angle Format Select whether to use an azimuth or bearing format for the angle display
Reverse Reverses the direction of the angle measurement

3. Click OK to save the default great circle settings.

4. From the Tool bar, select whether to use the Constrained Line or Unconstrained Line mode when drawing the
great circle.
5. Click on the drawing at the beginning point of the great circle, and click again at the ending point to create the
object.

Projection Options
For the Vectorworks Landmark product, there are several options for the type of geographic projection to use for
georeferenced design layers. The Vectorworks Architect product has fewer options, because projection is generally less
important for drawings on an architectural scale. For larger maps drawn with the Vectorworks Landmark product,
however, the proper projection can be very important.
On the Document Georeferencing and the Georeferencing dialog boxes, the projections at the top of the Projection list
are variations based upon the basic types, which display at the bottom of the list. For example, the Plate Carre option
is based upon the Equirectangular projection. The following table describes the basic projection types.
630 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Variations of basic
projections

Basic projection
options

Projection Type Description

Equirectangular Simplest projection, good for maps of the entire world. Latitude and longitude lines
are straight and equally spaced.
The Lat/Lon Document Units projection is Equirectangular, centered around the
equator and prime meridian, and scaled such that one document unit represents one
degree of latitude and longitude.
The Plate Carre projection is Equirectangular, centered around the equator and
prime meridian, and scaled in real-world units.
 GIS and Georeferencing | 631

Projection Type Description

Azimuthal Good for areas centered around a given point, roughly equal in height and width.
Equidistant Straight lines drawn from the center point represent the accurate geographic
distance.

Transverse Excellent for mapping narrow (north-south) areas around a chosen longitude. Very
Mercator great distortion farther east and west. Center longitude defines the chosen meridian;
center latitude should be close to the area being mapped. Scale should be 1 or close
to it (for example .9996).
The Universal Transverse Mercator projection is Transverse Mercator defined by 6
longitude zones.
In the US State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) projections, most US state zones
are either Transverse Mercator or Lambert Conformal Conic, depending on the
shape of the state and its zones. There are two systems, based on two different North
American Datums: NAD27 (now obsolete) and NAD83 (the current standard).

Cassini-Soldner Good for mapping narrow (north-south) areas around the central longitude. Distorts
shapes farther east and west.
632 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities

Projection Type Description

Gnomonic Good for navigational maps and small areas around a chosen point. All straight lines
represent great circles (shortest geographical distance).

Lambert Good for mapping wide (east-west) areas between chosen parallels. Distortion
Conformal increases farther from the chosen parallels.
Conic In the US State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) projections, most US state zones
are either Transverse Mercator or Lambert Conformal Conic, depending on the
shape of the state and its zones. There are two systems, based on two different North
American Datums: NAD27 (now obsolete) and NAD83 (the current standard).

Stereographic Good for mapping polar areas. Parameters define the center point, which is 90
latitude for the North Pole or -90 latitude for the South Pole. Other points can be
used. Scale should be 1 or very close to it (for example .9996).
GIS and Georeferencing | 633
634 | Chapter 15: Drawing Utilities
Managing Project Information 16
Error/Revision Management Using Redlines
The Redline tool and redline commands help control errors and revisions by providing the ability to annotate drawings
with redlines and sketches, and to keep track of redline objects and any changes, corrections, and revisions that occur in
a drawing.
The Redline tool and redline commands are compatible with redlines drawn in previous versions and will correctly
handle both types of redlines.

Redline Tool
Use the Redline tool to create redline objects, which are graphical time-stamped change requests on the drawing.
Several modes are available.
Rectangular Freehand Polygon

Oval Preferences

Regular Polygon

To redline an object or area:

1. Click the Redline tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select the desired drawing mode from the Tool bar.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify the Redline tool parameters for this session.
For information on drawing freehand, ovals, polygons, and rectangles, see Creating Objects on page 201 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Parameter Description
Redline Mode Creates a redline object using an oval, rectangle, polygon, or freehand
drawing

Example of oval redline mode

636 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Redline Style Select the style to apply to the redline object
Cloud - applies a cloud style
Radius - applies corner smoothing with a solid line style
Radius Dashed - applies corner smoothing with a dashed line style
Simple - applies a simple solid line with no smoothing
Simple Dashed - applies a simple dashed line with no smoothing

Example of simple dashed redline style

Authorized by Specifies the default name or initials of the person who authorized the
change; this name is used for the redlines created in this file
Assigned to Specifies the default name or initials of the person who has been assigned the
task; this name is used for the redlines created in this file

3. Click OK. Draw the redline around the area to be revised or corrected.
Based on the selected creation method, the appropriate tool creates the redline. This allows the use of SmartCursor
cues, object snapping, and boomerang mode when drawing redlines.
Draw redlines on the design layer where the error occurred or where the desired revision is to be performed.
1st click

2nd click

Rectangular mode depicted

4. The Place Redline dialog box opens. Enter the redline information and authorization.
 Error/Revision Management Using Redlines | 637

Parameter Description
Redline Notation Enter text describing the redline condition (and/or specifying the recommended
action)
Authorized By Specifies the name or initials of the person who authorized the change; this
originates from the redline preferences and is retained with the file
Assigned To Specifies the name or initials of the person who has been assigned the task; this
originates from the redline preferences and is retained with the file
Attach the current Attaches any current selected item(s) to the redline as a symbol to provide more
selection as a information about the redline (see Attaching a Sketch to a Redline on page 638
sketch for more information)

5. Click OK.
The redline object is drawn as specified, surrounding the drawing condition to be corrected. The date of the redline
is automatically provided. Position redline text by clicking on the tag control point and dragging the tag to the
desired location. If there are several redline objects, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command to improve
readability (see Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide).

Tag control point

638 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Attaching a Sketch to a Redline

In screen plane mode, one or more selected objects can be attached to a redline object to illustrate the redline
comments. The object to be attached as a sketch must be selected before drawing the redline; this process converts the
selected object to a sketch symbol and places it in a Redline Sketches symbol folder saved with the file.

To attach a selected object as a redline sketch:

1. Switch to the screen plane (see Planar Modes of 2D Objects: Screen Plane and Layer Plane on page 201 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
2. Select the object to be converted to a sketch.
3. Click the Redline tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and draw the redline as described in Redline Tool on
page 635.
The Place Redline dialog box opens.

4. Select Attach the current selection as a sketch and click OK.

5. The selection is converted to a symbol that is attached to and moves with the redline object.
The sketch can be hidden by deselecting Show Sketch in the Object Info palette.

Redline Parameters
The parameters of one or more selected redline objects can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Redline Style Select a redline style from the list (see Redline Tool on page 635 for a description
of the styles)
 Error/Revision Management Using Redlines | 639

Parameter Description
Tag Alignment Specifies the alignment of the redline tag:
Auto: Justifies the text away from the center of the redline object
Left: Places the text to the left of the tag control point and right-justifies the text
Right: Places the text to the right of the tag control point and left-justifies the text

Tag control point

Left alignment Right alignment

Picked Up Selecting Picked Up indicates that the redline has been resolved or picked up. The
redline color changes to yellow and the pick-up date is automatically assigned.
Deselect to indicate that a previously resolved redline has been restored.
Show Select to display the Authorized By information on the redline
Authorizer
Authorized By Displays the initials or name of the person authorizing the change; can be edited
Show Assignee Select to display the Assigned To information on the redline
Assigned To Displays the initials or name of the person assigned to correct the condition; can be
edited
Show Sketch Select to display the sketch attached to the redline (if any)
Creation Date Displays the redline creation date
Pick Up Date Displays the redline pick-up date
Notation Redline comment information is displayed and can be changed
Tag Length Controls the length of the line separating the redline comments from the redline
information, and changes the redline comment text wrapping

Show or Hide Redlines

Over the course of a project, most drawings receive a large number of redlines, which, if left visible, would clutter the
drawing. Select Text > Redlines > Show or Hide Redlines to toggle redline visibility.
All Redline objects are drawn in the Redlines class. If redlines are hidden when a new redline is drawn, the Redlines
class visibility is automatically turned on and all the redlines become visible. Use the Show or Hide Redlines
command to hide them again.

Pick up Redline
Once the change or correction indicated by the redline has been resolved, the redline needs to be picked up or
changed to a closed state.
To pick up a redline:
1. Select the redline object or objects.
2. Select Text > Redlines > Pick Up Redline.
640 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Right-click on the redline and select Pick Up Redline from the context menu.
This sets the status of all selected redline objects to closed. The redline color changes from red to yellow, and the
pick-up date is set.

Not picked up Picked up

Redlines can be picked up by selecting one or more redline objects and selecting Picked Up in the Object Info
palette.

Restore Redline
A selected closed redline object can be restored to an open status. A redline object may need to be restored when a
revision has not been performed satisfactorily.
To change the state of a closed redline back to open:
1. Select the redline object or objects.
2. Select Text > Redlines > Restore Redline.
Right-click on the redline and select Restore Redline from the context menu.
The selected redlines are returned to an open status and the redline color changes back to red. The original redline
creation date is displayed. Redlines can also be restored by selecting one or more redline objects and deselecting
Picked Up in the Object Info palette.

Redline Status Worksheet

The redline worksheet lists the status of all redlines in the current file. The Open Redlines section lists all redlines that
require resolution; the Closed Redlines section shows all resolved redlines. For each redline item, the design layer
location, date, and redline comment displays.
To create or open the redline status worksheet:
1. Select Text > Redlines > Create Redline Status WS.
2. The Redlines Status Report worksheet is created and opens automatically. It is added to the Window >
Worksheets menu and is listed in the Resource Browser.
 Notes Management | 641

Redlines, both open and closed, are listed in the report even if they are hidden in the current view of the file.

Notes Management
Vectorworks Design Series products provide a full set of features for managing and creating complete and
fully-referenced annotation of project files. These features can streamline the annotation process by providing a central
location for storing, selecting, and placing frequently-repeated notes. Notes can be reused across files, either within a
project, or across separate projects.
A callout is text with a leader line, displaying information about an item in the drawing. A keynote is a callout that
references a note contained in a keynote legend. Finally, general notes contain text not associated with a particular item
in the drawing.
A callout object is included with the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, but its capabilities are extended in the
Vectorworks Design Series products, allowing it to be used for keynotes in addition to ordinary notes. For more
information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 361 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Placing callouts as keynotes also creates a keynote legend object. The keynote legend automatically numbers the notes,
and ensures that multiple instances of the same note are assigned the same keynote number.
In addition to callouts, a general notes object places and automatically numbers general notes.
The callout, keynote legend, and general notes objects can be used with manually-entered text, or in conjunction with
external databases which store and retrieve text. When a database is used, text is entered only once into the database,
and then pulled from the database for notes in the drawing. After notes have been placed, if changes are made to the
database or to the notes, the differences can be reconciled with the Reconcile Notes command.

Notes Management without Databases

Keynotes and general notes can be placed on the drawing by manually entering the notes text; a database is not
mandatory.

Placing Keynotes
Keynotes are placed with the extended capabilities of the Callout tool. The keynote legend is automatically created.

To place a keynote:

1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette.

2. Click the Preferences button on the Tool bar.
642 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

The Callout Preferences dialog box opens. Most of the parameters in the Callout Preferences dialog box are
documented in Inserting Callouts on page 361 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Only the
parameters that apply to Vectorworks Design Series products are described here.

3. Select Place As Keynote. Specify the keynote prefix and suffix text, if desired.
Keynote legends are layer-specific; one legend is created per layer. However, a callout placed as a keynote can be
associated with a keynote legend on any layer. Select the legend for the callout from the Keynote Legend list in
the Callout Preferences dialog box or the Object Info palette of a selected keynote. The Default Legend is the
keynote legend located on the current layer.

4. Click OK.
5. Click in the drawing to place the callout object. Enter the keynote text in the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box.
6. The keynote is placed in the drawing; a keynote legend object is also created.
 Notes Management | 643

7. Continue placing any additional keynotes. Keynotes referencing the same text automatically use the same number;
different text causes the keynote to be numbered sequentially and added to the keynote legend.

Editing Keynotes and the Keynote Legend

Both the keynotes and keynote legend can be edited after placement. If only one keynote is to be edited, select it and
make the changes in the Object Info palette. If the text of several keynotes is to be edited, select the keynote legend and
make the edits from the Object Info palette.
Double-click a callout or keynote legend to edit it.
The keynotes bubble style can also display in the keynote legend; control the style with either the keynotes or the
legend.
Editing Keynotes
To edit individual keynotes:
1. To change the text of a selected keynote, select the callout and click Edit Note in the Object Info palette.
2. Other callout parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette, like an ordinary callout object. For more
information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 361 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
3. If there are several keynote objects, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command to improve readability (see
Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
4. After placement, a keynote can be converted into an ordinary callout object by deselecting Place As Keynote in
the Object Info palette. The keynote is removed from the keynote legend.
Deleting Keynotes
If you delete a keynote, the remaining keynotes are not renumbered. The keynote legend maintains a gap or
placeholder displaying the custom text specified in Unused Position Text. However, if Re-use Unused Positions is
selected and another keynote is placed in the drawing, the new keynote replaces the first gap keynote. Clicking
Remove Gaps in the Object Info palette of a selected keynote legend also removes gaps; another way to remove gaps
is to sort the keynotes in the Notes Manager: Keynote List dialog box.
Editing the Keynote Legend
To edit the keynote legend:
1. Edit the keynote legend parameters from the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Update Refreshes the keynote legend display
Keynote Display Select the display format for keynotes: numbers, letters, numbers or letters with
the prefix and/or suffix that was entered in the callout preferences, or the
description text from the notes database (click Sort in the Notes
Manager:Keynote List to sort the notes as they will appear in the keynote legend)
Because the note description can display in both the callouts and the keynote
legend, it is possible to create an alphanumerical designation within the note
description for each database entry, and display that number on the drawing.
A database of notes with numeric descriptions can be used directly in the
drawing, automatically sorted into the proper order.
Overall Width Sets the text width for the entire keynote legend
Note Text Indent Adjusts the hanging indent value for the legend body text
644 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Note Spacing Sets the width of the body of the keynote legend text
Line Spacing Sets the number of lines as space between the notes
# of Columns Select the number of columns for the keynote legend text
Gutter Width When more than one column is selected for keynote legend text, sets the distance
between the columns
Break Note Text Across When more than one column is selected for keynote legend text, allows text to
Columns break across columns; when deselected, text for each note does not break to the
next column
Bubble Display Sets the bubble display for keynote numbers/letters
None: No bubble displays for the keynote legend
per Callout: The bubble style used for the callout also displays in the legend
per Keynote Legend: The keynote legend controls the bubble style for callouts;
select the Bubble Style
Bubble Style When the Bubble Display is set to be controlled per Keynote Legend, specifies
the bubble style to apply to the keynote legend and the keynotes
RR Corner Radius For Round Rect bubble styles, sets the corner radius
Text Margin Sets the distance between the bubble and the text
Bubble Shadow Select to draw the bubble with a drop shadow (does not apply to None, Bracket,
or ISO styles)
Re-use Unused Positions When deselected, maintains a placeholder gap for deleted keynotes; new keynotes
are appended to the end of the legend.When selected, replaces unused keynote
positions, in order starting with the first one, as new keynotes are placed in the
drawing.
Unused Position Text Specifies the text to display in unused keynote positions
Remove Gaps Removes unused keynote positions, renumbering the remaining positions
Edit Notes Opens the Notes Manager:Keynote Legend dialog box, for editing the keynote
text, description, or order
A keynote object can be linked to a database by clicking Show Database
Controls in the Notes Manager:Keynotes List dialog box. See Notes
Management with Databases on page 650.
Format Title Text Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the legend title
Format Body Text Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the legend
body text

For information on formatting text, see Formatting Text on page 348 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide. Text styles cannot be applied to keynote legends.
2. The keynote legend contains control points for adjusting the hanging indent and text width directly from the
drawing.
 Notes Management | 645

Text Indent
Body text hanging indent Gutter Width
control point Keynote legend
Note Spacing text width control
point

Line Spacing

Overall Width

3. To change keynote numbering or edit the text of all keynotes at the same time, select the keynote legend object
and click Edit Notes in the Object Info palette.
The Notes Manager:Keynote List dialog box opens.
If the database controls are showing, click Hide Database Controls.

Parameter Description
Description Lists the keynotes (by description) in the keynote legend in numbering order
Edit Select a keynote description and click Edit to edit the note text or change the
keynote description
Move Up/Move Down Changes the order of the keynotes in the keynote legend; move the selected
keynote up or down in the list
646 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Sort Sorts the notes in the legend alphanumerically; this is useful when the
keynote legend Keynote Display is set to Note Description from Database,
and the Description is set to an alphanumeric code (such as C101 or
032000). If there are any unused keynote positions, they are removed by this
operation.
Note Text Select a keynote description and edit the text of the note
Show Database Displays the database-related portion of the dialog box; when working
Controls without a database, these controls are not necessary (see Placing Database
Callouts on page 650)
A keynote object can be linked to a database by clicking Show
Database Controls in the Notes Manager:Keynotes List dialog box.
See Notes Management with Databases on page 650.

4. The keynotes are listed by a description. The description normally consists of the first 42 characters of the
keynote, but this can be changed by selecting the description and clicking Edit.
The Edit Note dialog box opens. To enter a different note description, deselect Use the first 42 characters, and
change the Description. The note text can also be edited, if desired.

5. Click OK to close the Edit Note dialog box.

6. Click OK to close the Notes Manager:Keynote Legend dialog box and edit the keynote legend.

Placing General Notes

Notes management includes a General Notes tool, for placing and numbering general notes.

To place a general notes object:

1. Click the General Notes tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click the Preferences button on the Tool bar.
The General Notes Tool Settings dialog box opens. Specify the default settings for placing General Notes during
this session.
 Notes Management | 647

Parameter Description
Title Specifies the name for the general notes block, or use the default General
Notes title
Indent/Width/Spacing Indicates the default formatting for the notes
General Notes Display Select the display format for general notes: numbers, letters, or the
description text from the general notes database
Show Databases Deselect to place general notes without a database (see Placing Database
General Notes on page 658 for information on placing notes with a database)
Select Title Text/Body Specifies the default text formatting for the title and note text
Text Format

3. Click to place the general notes object in the drawing.

The Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box opens.
648 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Description Lists the general notes (by description) in numbering order
Add Opens the Add Note dialog box, for adding a general note and specifying its
description
Remove Deletes the selected general note(s)
Remove All Deletes all general notes
Edit Select a general note and click Edit to edit the note text or change the general
note description
Move Up/Move Down Changes the order of the general notes; move the selected general note up or
down in the list
Note Text Select a general note description and edit the text of the note
Show Database Displays the database-related portion of the dialog box; when working
Controls without a database, these controls are not necessary (see Placing Database
General Notes on page 658)
A general note object can be linked to a database by clicking Show
Database Controls in the Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box.
See Notes Management with Databases on page 650.

4. To add a new general note, click Add.

The Add Note dialog box opens.
 Notes Management | 649

5. Enter the new general note text. The general notes are listed by a description. The description normally consists of
the first 42 characters of the general note. To enter a different note description, deselect Use the first 42
characters, and change the Description.
6. Click OK to add the new general note.
7. The note text can be edited, if desired. Select the note description and edit the text in the Note Text area. The note
text and its description can be edited by clicking Edit. Delete selected notes by clicking Remove.
8. Order the general notes by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
9. Click OK to place the general notes object.

Editing General Notes

To edit a general notes object:
1. The general note parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Title Specifies the general notes title
Indent Adjusts the hanging indent value for the general notes body text
Width Sets the width of the general notes text
Spacing Sets the spacing between each note
General Notes Select the display format for general notes: numbers, letters, or the description text
Display from the general notes database
650 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Edit Notes Opens the Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box, for editing the general notes
text, description or order (see Placing General Notes on page 646)
A general note object can be linked to a database by clicking Show Database
Controls in the Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box. See Notes
Management with Databases on page 650.
Format Title Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the general notes
Text title
Format Body Opens the Format Text dialog box, for changing the text format of the general notes
Text body text

For information on formatting text, see Formatting Text on page 348 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide. You can also drag and drop a text style from the Resource Browser onto the general notes object.
2. The general notes object contains control points for adjusting the hanging indent and text width directly from the
drawing.
Body text hanging indent
control point

General notes
text width control
point

Notes Management with Databases

Instead of manually typing the text for every callout, keynote and general notes object, text that is used repeatedlyby
one or many usersacross projects and files can be stored in a tab-delimited text file (referred to as a database). The
use of a database for storing notes saves time and prevents errors, and standardizes compliant notes usage across files.
There are no limits to the number of databases that can be used for annotating a drawing. The databases can have an
unlimited number of notes of any length. After placement, notes can be easily updated if changes are made to a
database.

Placing Database Callouts

Callouts with database notes are placed with the extended capabilities of the Callout tool.

To place a database callout:

1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette.

2. Click the Preferences button on the Tool bar.
The Callout Preferences dialog box opens. For more information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on
page 361 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Placing Keynotes on page 641.
 Notes Management | 651

3. Select Get Text from Database; the current database file is displayed as a button.
4. To select a different database, click the database button.
The standard Open dialog box allows a different database file to be selected. Select the database file, and click
Open.
A sample database is located in [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\Common\Data\Notes\Callouts.txt
5. Click OK.
6. Click in the drawing to place the callout object.
Once the callout leader is drawn, the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box opens automatically, displaying the
information from the selected database.
The notes in a selected section are listed by a description. The description normally consists of the first 42
characters of the note.
652 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Active Database Displays the currently selected database file
New Creates a new, blank database
Choose Selects a different, existing database. A database from a previous version of
the Vectorworks program can be specified, but it must be converted to the
current version format as prompted.
Save As Saves the current database with a new name
Sections in Database Lists the note sections; the associated notes in a selected section are displayed
in Notes in Database
Add Adds a new note section; enter the section name in the Enter String dialog
box
Remove Deletes the currently selected section and its associated notes
Edit Renames the currently selected section; enter the new name in the Enter
String dialog box
Notes in Database Lists the notes associated with the current database section
Add Opens the Add Note dialog box, for adding a note to the database section
Remove Deletes the currently selected note
Edit Opens the Edit Note dialog box, for editing the selected note or its description
Note Text Displays the note text of the currently selected note; the note text can be
edited
 Notes Management | 653

Parameter Description
Database Filter Filters the database sections, descriptions, or notes with a search term, to
more easily locate a note
Edit Opens the Edit List: Callout Filters dialog box, to add or edit database filters
Prefs Sets the automatic save options for the database
Update > Moves the selected note to the Callout Text list for placement on the drawing
< Update Replaces the database with the text in the Callout Text list
< Add Adds the text in the Callout Text list to the database, placing it in the current
database section
< Locate If the selected text in the Callout Text list originated from a database, locates
the notes database, section, and description
Connect to Database Sets how to connect to the selected database; if an absolute path is selected,
with: the database is expected to be present at the specific location. If a relative
path is selected, the database is expected to be present at the indicated
location relative to the current file.
Hide Database Controls Hides the database portion of the callout dialog box; edits made with the
database hidden are not reflected in the database

7. To add a note to a selected section, click Add under Notes in Database.

The Add Note dialog box opens. Specify the section, description, and note text.

Parameter Description
Section Select the associated section for the note
Description By default, consists of the first 42 characters of the note text; deselect Use the
first 42 characters, and enter a different note description, if desired
Note Text Type the new note text
654 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Use the first 42 If the default description is not desired, deselect and enter a new Description
characters

8. Click OK to add the note to the specified section and return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box.
9. Change the note description by selecting the description and clicking Edit.
The Edit Note dialog box opens. To enter a different note description, deselect Use the first 42 characters, and
change the Description. The note text can also be edited, if desired, and the note can be associated with a different
section.

10. Click OK to edit the note description and return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box.
11. The text of a selected note can be edited in Note Text.
12. To search easily for a note, section, or description, use a filter. Only notes, sections, or descriptions with the
specified text are displayed. Select the desired filter from the Database Filter list in the Notes Manager:Callout
dialog box. To display all notes, sections, and descriptions, select All Notes. In addition, if no items match a
selected filter, all notes are displayed.
13. To edit the database search filters, click Edit under Database Filter.
The Edit Filter List dialog box opens. The filters are listed in order.
 Notes Management | 655

Parameter Description
Filter list Lists the search filters in the order they display in the database filter list
Add Adds a search filter to the list; enter the new term in the Enter String dialog
box
Remove Deletes the currently selected search filter(s)
Edit Renames the current search filter; enter the new name in the Enter String
dialog box
Move Up/Move Down Changes the filter list order; select the search filter and move it up or down in
the list

14. Click OK to change the search filters and return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box.
15. Changes and additions to the notes database are saved automatically according to the preferences specified. Click
Prefs to set these preferences.
The Database Preferences dialog box opens. Set the desired actions that automatically save database changes by
selecting the associated check box(es)). If no automatic saving is specified, you will be prompted frequently about
saving the database.

The Locate and Hide Database options are available when editing a General Notes or Keynote Legend with
database.
16. Click OK to return to the Notes Manager:Callout dialog box.
17. Once the desired note has been entered or located, select it and click Update > to move it to the Callout Text list.
18. Click OK. The selected note is used for the callout text.

Editing a Database Callout

The database callout can be edited after placement.
To edit a database callout:
1. To change the note text, select the callout and click Edit Note in the Object Info palette.
656 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

2. The Notes Manager:Callout dialog box opens. Select a different note as described in Placing Database Callouts
on page 650, and click OK.
3. Other callout parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette as for an ordinary callout object. For more
information on the Callout tool, see Inserting Callouts on page 361 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
4. If there are several callout objects, use the Align/Distribute Leader Lines command to improve readability (see
Aligning and Distributing Leader Lines on page 283 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
5. After placement, a database callout can be converted into an ordinary callout object by clicking Edit Note in the
Object Info palette, and then clicking Hide Database Controls. The callout text can then be edited, and the
database text is not affected.

Placing Database Keynote Legends

Keynote legends can take advantage of a notes database.

To place a database keynote legend:

1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette.

2. Click the Preferences button on the Tool bar.
The Callout Preferences dialog box opens. As described in Placing Keynotes on page 641, select Place As
Keynote and click OK.
3. Place the callouts in the drawing area.
4. Select the keynote legend. In the Object Info palette, click Edit Notes.
5. The Notes Manager:Keynote List dialog box opens.
6. If necessary, click Show Database Controls to access the keynote legend database parameters.
The dialog box is divided into two sections, with the database information on the left and the keynote legend
information on the right. The buttons in the center of the dialog box move information from the database to the
legend and vice-versa.
 Notes Management | 657

Parameter Description
Active Database, Sections in Edits the database sections, notes, note text, search filters, and saving
Database, Notes in Database, preferences as described in Placing Database Callouts on page 650
Note Text, Database Filter, and
Prefs
Notes in the Selected Keynote Edits the keynote legend notes and description as described in
Legend Object Placing Keynotes on page 641; the Relative Path column indicates
whether the associated database is referenced by a relative path (check
mark) or absolute path (no check mark)
Update > Overwrites the selected keynote legend note(s) with the selected
database note
< Update Overwrites the selected database note with the selected keynote
legend note
< Add Adds the selected keynote legend note(s) to the database, placing the
note(s) in the current database section
Auto-Locate Automatically locates the database, section, and description of a
selected keynote legend note, if the note originated from a database
< Locate If the selected keynote legend note originated from a database, locates
the notes database, section, and description
Hide Database Controls Hides the database portion of the keynote legend dialog box; edits
made with the database hidden are not reflected in the database

7. Click OK to change the keynote legend, replacing the notes with database notes.
658 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Placing Database General Notes

General notes can take advantage of a notes database.

To place a database general notes object:

1. Click the General Notes tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the general notes object in the drawing.
The Notes Manager:General Notes dialog box opens.
3. Click Show Database Controls to access the general notes database parameters.
The dialog box is divided into two sections, with the database information on the left and the general notes
information on the right. The buttons in the center of the dialog box move information from the database to the
general notes and vice-versa.

Parameter Description
Active Database, Sections in Edits the database sections, notes, note text, search filters, and
Database, Notes in Database, saving preferences as described in Placing Database Callouts on
Note Text, Database Filter, and page 650
Prefs
Notes in the Selected General Edits the general notes and description as described in Placing
Notes Object General Notes on page 646; the Relative Path column indicates
whether the associated database is referenced by a relative path
(check mark) or absolute path (no check mark)
Add > Adds one or more selected database notes to the general notes
Update > Overwrites the selected general note(s) with the selected database
note
 Notes Management | 659

Parameter Description
< Update Overwrites the selected database note with the selected general note
< Add Adds the selected general note(s) to the database, placing the note(s)
in the current database section
Auto-Locate Automatically locates the database, section, and description of a
selected general note, if the note originated from a database
< Locate If the selected general note originated from a database, locates the
notes database, section, and description
Hide Database Controls Hides the database portion of the general notes dialog box; edits
made with the database hidden are not reflected in the database

4. The note in the Notes in the Selected General Notes Object list will be placed as a general note. Click OK to
place the general note.

Adding Text to a Database

Text objects can be added from the drawing to a selected database. This is convenient for retrieving text from older,
converted files for use with the Notes Manager or when adding frequently-used text to a database for easy future
insertion as an annotation.
To add drawing text to a database:
1. Select Text > Add Text to Database.
The Add Text to Database dialog box opens. Specify which text objects to select and indicate in which databases
to search for duplicated text.

Parameter Description
Add Text Meeting These Specifies the criteria for selecting text objects to be added to a
Criteria database
Selected Text Only Adds only selected text to the database; when deselected, adds text
from all text objects in the file
Layers/Classes Adds only text from the specified layers and/or classes to the
database; when deselected, adds text from text objects in all layers or
classes in the file
660 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

Parameter Description
Exclude Text Already in One Lists the databases in which to search for duplicated text; the text
of These Databases search is case sensitive and the match must be exact. If duplicated
text is found, it is not added to the database.
Add Adds a database to the text search database list
Change Allows changes to a selected databases location
Remove Removes a database from the text search database list

2. Click OK. If any of the text was not found in the text search database(s), the Notes Manager:Add Text to Database
dialog box opens.

3. The text to be added is listed on the right. As described in Placing Database Keynote Legends on page 656, the
text can be added to the active database in the desired section. Click OK.

Reconciling Database and Drawing Notes

The Reconcile Notes command handles differences between the database and the notes in the drawing. For example, if
database callouts have been placed and the database is edited afterwards, differences must be reconciled.
To reconcile notes:
1. Select Text > Reconcile Notes.
The Reconcile Notes dialog box opens. Select the note objects to reconcile.
 Notes Management | 661

Parameter Description
Callouts obtained from database Selects database callouts
Callouts not obtained from database Selects ordinary callouts and keynote callouts that
are not linked to a database
Callouts that used to get their text from a Selects callouts that were once database callouts
database and obtained note text from a database
Callouts that never got their text from a Selects callouts that did not obtain note text from a
database database
General Notes objects Selects general notes
Layers / Classes Select the layers and classes with notes to include
for reconciliation

2. Click OK to reconcile the notes. If any of the notes reference databases, the Notes Manager attempts to locate
those databases. It searches first in the same folder as the current file; if not found, it searches in the same place
relative to the Vectorworks program executable. If the databases still cannot be found, the Notes Manager tries to
locate them with fully-qualified paths.
Place database files from another user in the same folder as the drawing file so that the Notes Manager can easily
locate the databases.
3. If a database referenced by notes cannot be located, the Cannot Locate Database(s) dialog box opens. For each
database that cannot be located, click Browse to specify the database location.

4. Click OK. Next, the Notes Manager searches the database(s) for the notes.
5. If one or more notes cannot be located in the database, an alert dialog box opens asking if you want Notes
Manager to search for these notes in a database search list.
662 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

If there are no additional database files to be specified, click No and proceed to step 8. If the notes could be
located in another database, click Yes to specify the database location.
6. The Specify Database Search List dialog box opens. Click Add to specify additional databases where the notes are
located. Click Remove to delete a selected database from the list. The number of notes which have been located is
displayed.

7. Click OK.
8. If some notes have still not been located, the Notes Manager:Reconcile Notes dialog box opens.
The dialog box is divided into two sections, with the database information on the left and the notes to be
reconciled on the right. The buttons in the center of the dialog box move information from the database to the
general notes and vice-versa.
By using the center buttons, reconcile each note manually. As a note is reconciled, it is removed from the list.
 Notes Management | 663

Parameter Description
Active Database, Sections in Edits the database sections, notes, note text, search filters, and saving
Database, Notes in Database, preferences as described in Placing Database Callouts on page 650
Note Text, Database Filter, and
Prefs
Notes That Need To Be Displays the note text, type of note, database name and location, layer
Reconciled and class name, and database reference type (relative or absolute) for
the notes that have not been reconciled
Update > Overwrites the selected note(s) to be reconciled with the selected
database note
< Update Overwrites the selected database note with the selected note to be
reconciled
< Add Adds the selected note(s) to be reconciled to the database, placing the
note(s) in the current database section
Auto-Locate Automatically tries to locate the database, section, and description of a
selected note to be reconciled, if the note originated from a database
< Locate If the selected note to be reconciled originated from a database, tries to
locate the notes database, section, and description

9. Click OK.
An alert message explains how the notes were reconciled.

Locating Databases on a Network

To use databases efficiently in a multiple-user environment, the database files should be placed on a network. There,
they can be accessed concurrently by several users who will then conform to office standards and will not need to
retype notes.
Windows users should choose databases by browsing from Network Neighborhood (My Network Places) rather
than from mapped drive letters. If databases are selected from mapped drives, the database references are then
dependent on drive mapping.
Database changes made by different users are merged automatically.
A conflict could arise if two different users edit the same note in the same database at the same time. If this occurs, the
Resolve Note Conflict dialog box opens when closing the Notes Manager dialog box.
664 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

On the left, your version of the note displays, and on the right, the other users version displays. Select which version of
the note to save by selecting Mine is better or The other note is better. Click OK to resolve the conflict.

Converting Notes from Previous Versions

Databases and notes created in Vectorworks software versions prior to version 11 can be converted for use in the
current version.
Databases created in previous versions of the Notes Manager are automatically converted to the current version when
they are selected by clicking Choose to select a database.
Callouts created in version 9 and above are automatically converted to the current format. They can be used as ordinary
callouts, keynotes, or database callouts.
Other notes objects, such as Text Notes, Keynotes, and General Notes created by previous Notes Manager versions, as
well as Vectorworks text objects, must be converted by command. Vectorworks text objects are converted to general
notes.
To convert old objects to the current format:
1. Select Text > Convert Old Notes to New.
2. The Convert Old Notes to New dialog box opens. Select the type of old notes to convert.

Parameter Description
All updatable objects Converts any note-related items in the drawing
All selected objects Converts any note-related items in the current selection
Just the following Select the type of objects to be converted (Text Notes, Keynotes,
objects General Notes from version 8.52 to 10, and text objects)
Layers/Classes Specifies the layers and classes to be searched for objects to
convert

3. Click OK to convert the objects to the current version Notes Manager format.
4. The Conversion Results dialog box displays a summary of the objects converted.

The Issue Manager

The Issue Manager accesses and displays information about drawing issue, dates, and history on a sheet-by-sheet basis.
It interacts with the sheet border object by allowing the user to control the sheet border title block data and issue
 The Issue Manager | 665

information. (Sheet borders can either be placed with the Sheet Border tool in the Dims/Notes tool setsee Creating
Sheet Borders on page 561or a sheet border can be created and placed by the Document Setup or Create Standard
Viewports commandssee Document Setup on page 2 and Creating Standard Viewports on page 9.)
To use the Issue Manager:
1. Ensure that at least one sheet border with a title block is present in the drawing.
2. Select File > Issue Manager.
The Issue Manager dialog box opens.
The tabs and fields displayed depend on the title block inserted in the sheet border. Custom title blocks may not
match the parameters or tabs shown here. The fields and tabs shown assume that an Arch-style title block is
inserted.
3. Click the Project Data tab to configure the project information.
Leave a blank field to create an empty line in the title block.

Parameter Description
Project ID Specifies the company project ID code
Project Title Indicates the project title, which can include name and address information
Design Firm Describes the name and address of the design firm
Project Provides the project managers name
Manager
Designed By Specifies the name of the lead designer
Total Sheets Indicates the total number of sheet layers (or design layers named sheet-) in the
project
CAD File Name Indicates the name of the file
666 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information

The information on the Project tab applies to all sheet borders or title blocks in the set.
4. Enter the project information. If the project was created with the Create Standard Viewports command, some of
the information has been automatically entered.
5. Click the Sheet Data tab to configure information about individual sheet layers in the set.

Parameter Description
Sheet Number Specifies the sheet number
Sht Title The drawing title can contain up to three lines
Sheet Scale Displays the scale of the major drawing on this sheet
Consultant Specifies the name and address of any consultants involved with this particular
sheet
Drawn By Provides the draftspersons initials
Reviewed By Specifies the reviewers initials
Submitted By Specifies the submitters initials
Checked By Specifies the checkers initials
Date Specifies the date of the issue
Include in Current Select to include this sheet in the current issue set
Issue
Prev / Next Click Prev and Next to switch to each sheet and enter the relevant data

6. Complete the information for each sheet in the drawing set to be issued. Toggle among other sheets in the drawing
with the Next > and < Prev buttons.
 The Issue Manager | 667

If the project was set up with the Create Standard Viewports command, some of the information has been
automatically entered. For each sheet, specify sheet-specific information and indicate whether to include the sheet
in the issue.
7. Click the Issue Data tab to specify information about the current issue.

Parameter Description
Record the issue of this Updates the title block issue data area
Drawing Set
Issue Number Specifies the number or letter of the current issue
Issue Date Indicates the date of the current issue
Issue Note Adds any comments or description of the issue
Record on checked sheets Updates only the issue data of sheets that were selected on the Sheet Data
only tab
Record on all sheets Updates the issue data for all sheets in the file

8. Click OK.
The sheet border title blocks are updated for the selected sheets. If specified, the issue information is included in
the title block.
Regardless of whether the title block contains fields for the issue data, the data is still written to a record attached
to the sheet border, becoming a permanent part of the sheet border. If the title block changes later, the data can be
displayed.
668 | Chapter 16: Managing Project Information
Drawing Enhancements 17
A variety of drawing enhancements, including special fills, sketch styles, and various objects can be added to a
drawing, both to provide information and improve its appearance.

Creating Stipple Objects

The Stipple tool creates a random pattern (different shapes, sizes, and, optionally, colors) within a defined boundary,
which resembles a hand-drawn shaded effect. To create a stipple object, either use the Stipple tool, or draw a polyline
and then run the Create Objects from Shapes command (see Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696).

To create a stipple object:

1. Click the Stipple tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.

2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to specify or change any default Stipple tool parameters.
The Define Stipple Pattern dialog box opens. Up to two different shapes can be specified to define the stipple
pattern.

Parameter Description
Shape 1/Shape 2 Click on the appropriate tab to define two different shapes, sizes, aspect
ratios, and shape percentages
670 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Shape type Select the stipple fill shape. For the polygon shape, specify the number of
sides.

Line Rectangle Oval

Triangle Polygon (with five sides)

Minimum/Maximum Enter the minimum/maximum size of the stipple pattern

Size
Max Aspect Ratio Enter the maximum aspect ratio of the stipple shapes (enter 1 to display
square aspects)
Mix Percent Enter the fill shape mixture percentage. The percentage defines the
contribution of each shape to the stipple pattern, up to 100% (e.g. enter 60%
for shape one and shape two automatically displays 40%). If shape one is
assigned 100%, then shape two cannot be defined.
Stipple Density
Low/High Adjust the density of the stipple fill shapes by dragging the slider along the
Stipple Density slider or by entering a numeric value between 1and 200 in
the box below the Stipple Density slider
Color Stipple Shapes Randomly fills the stipple shapes with colors in the specified color range
Color Range/to Click the color boxes to select the desired color ranges
Fade Stipple from Edge Creates a stipple that fades in from the edge of the stippled shape

Fade from edge No fade

Width of Stipple Enter the width of the faded area in page dimensions
Void Stipple Center Leaves the center of the stipple unshaded
 Creating Stipple Objects | 671

Parameter Description
Edge Treatment Determines how the stipple shapes are drawn at the edge of the stippled area

Overlap Omit Clip

Randomly Rotate Shapes Select to randomly rotate the stipple shapes. De-select to speed drawing
when using fill shapes that do not require rotation, such as ovals with an
aspect ratio of 1.
Use World Dimension Select to use real-world dimensions; otherwise, the entries are made in page
Units dimensions (the size the elements display when printed)

Both the Color Stipple Shapes and Fade Stipple from Edge options are processor-intensive actions and can
significantly increase stipple regeneration time.
3. Click OK.
4. Click on the appropriate mode in the Tool bar to select the boundary creation method of the stipple object.
For more information on the Polyline tool modes, see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
5. Click to set the stipple objects start point.
6. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next. Continue drawing segments in this manner until
the stipple object is complete.

Editing the Stipple Object Settings

The parameters can be edited for selected stipple objects through the Stipple Settings button on the Shape tab of the
Object Info palette (the parameters are described in Creating Stipple Objects on page 669). To modify default stipple
settings, click the Preferences button on the Tool bar.

Reshaping the Stipple Object

Double-click a stipple object to activate the Reshape tool. Select the object handles to reshape the stipple object
boundary. For more information, see Reshaping Objects on page 293 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.
672 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Saving the Stipple Object Settings

Once the stipple object is set to the desired appearance, the settings can be saved for future use or importing into other
files, by saving the stipple object. When inserted from the Resource Browser, all the stipple object settings are preset.
To save the selected stipple object:
1. Select a stipple object.
2. In the Object Info palette, click Save Stipple.
The Enter String dialog box opens.
3. Enter a unique name.
4. Click OK.
The stipple object is saved in the Stipples symbol folder in the Resource Browser.
5. To use a saved stipple pattern, double-click it in the Resource Browser and begin drawing in Polyline mode. For
more information, see Inserting Symbols on page 175 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Sketch Rendering
The Vectorworks Design Series products include a sketch rendering mode that applies a hand-drawn or sketch effect to
2D and 3D objects in any projection. The Renderworks product is not required. The vector-based sketch effects are
saved as editable resources, and are applied directly to the objects in a drawing. The sketch effects can also be applied
to hatches and sheet layer viewports, and can be used in hidden line rendering.
Unlike Artistic Renderworks, sketch rendering can be applied to 2D objects, and individual objects can have specific
sketch styles. Sketch effects cannot be applied to worksheets, text, loci, or lights.

Setting the Default Sketch Style

To quickly apply a sketch style to all objects in the current design or sheet layer, specify a default sketch style.
Specifying the sketch style in a design layer applies the default to all layers in the file (design and sheet). For sheet
layers, applying a default sketch style applies only to objects placed on the sheet layer, overriding the document default
sketch style; viewports also have individual sketch style settings (see Applying Sketch Styles to Viewports on
page 678).
Sketch styles are provided as default content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at the point
of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide). The following sketch styles are pre-defined, and can be selected as a default sketch style. Custom sketch styles
that have been added to the file also display in the Resource Browser and can be selected as a sketch style (see
Creating Custom Sketch Styles on page 676).
Unused sketch styles can be purged; see Purging Items from a File on page 260 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
Sketch resources do not display in the Resource Browser until a sketch-related option is selected for the first time.
 Sketch Rendering | 673

Default Sketch Style Description

No Sketch Does not apply a sketch style; useful for overriding an applied sketch style (see
Overriding Layer Sketch Styles on page 676)

Careful Uses many small wobble points and minor variations from the actual endpoints

Certain Uses many small wobble points and specifies more overstrike

Quick Uses few wobble points, with more distance between them

Rough Uses many wobble points

Tentative Uses many small wobble points and a high amount of understrike
674 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

To specify the default sketch style:

1. Select View > Rendering > Sketch Options.
The Sketch Options dialog box opens.
2. Select the default sketch style from the list.

Design layer Sheet layer

Parameter Description
Document Default Sketch Specifies the sketch style to apply when the Sketch command is
Style or Sheet Layer Default selected
Sketch Style
Edit Opens the Sketch Style Editor dialog box, for changing the selected
sketch style parameters (see Editing Sketch Styles on page 674)
Preview Temporarily applies the current sketch style to objects in the current
layer

3. Click OK to set the default sketch style.

Applying the Default Sketch Style

To apply the default sketch style to the current design or sheet layer:
Select View > Rendering > Sketch.

Rough sketch style depicted

Editing Sketch Styles

Sketch styles can be edited and renamed. The changes are saved as resources in the file.
Sketch resources do not display in the Resource Browser until a sketch-related option is selected the first time.
To edit a sketch style:
1. Select View > Rendering > Sketch Options.
The Sketch Options dialog box opens.
 Sketch Rendering | 675

2. Select the sketch style to edit from the sketch style list.
3. Click Edit.
4. The Sketch Style Editor dialog box opens. The sketch edge and end point settings can be edited, and the style can
be renamed. The preview graphic provides help with editing.

Parameter Description
Name Changes the default sketch style name, if desired
Edge Settings
Wobble Controls how much the sketched lines are offset from the true lines of an object; drag
the slider to the right to increase the wobble
Stroke Controls the length of the sketch drawing strokes; a longer stroke distance increases
the number of wobble points. Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of
wobble points.
Randomness Controls the amount of wobble and stroke variation
End Point
Settings
Overstrike Extends sketched lines past their endpoints; drag the slider to the right to increase the
overstrike
Understrike Shortens sketched lines before their endpoints; drag the slider to the right to increase
the understrike
Randomness Controls the amount of overstrike and understrike variation

5. Click Save.
676 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Alternatively, sketch styles can be edited by selecting the style in the Resource Browser and selecting Edit from
the context menu. Sketch styles can also be deleted with the Resource Browser. For more information on the
Resource Browser, see Using the Resource Browser on page 157 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.

Creating Custom Sketch Styles

The Vectorworks program includes several default sketch styles, but custom sketch styles can also be created
To create a custom sketch style:
1. In the Resource Browser, select New Resource from the Resources menu.
The New Resource menu opens. For more information on the Resource Browser, see Using the Resource
Browser on page 157 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Select Sketch Style.
The Sketch Style Editor dialog box opens. Specify the sketch style settings as described in Editing Sketch Styles
on page 674.

3. Click Save to create the sketch style. The new style is listed in the Resource Browser and is available in sketch
style lists.

Overriding Layer Sketch Styles

Each object can have its own sketch style, overriding the sketch style applied to the current layer. Apply the No
Sketch style to objects that should never be sketched.
To apply a sketch style to an object:
1. Select the object or objects.
Groups and symbols cannot have a sketch style applied directly; edit the group or symbol first.
2. On the Render tab of the Object Info palette, the Sketch list displays the current document default sketch style.
Select the desired sketch style for the object(s).
 Sketch Rendering | 677

Alternatively, select the desired sketch style resource from the Resource Browser and select Apply from the
resource context menu, or drag the sketch style from the Resource Browser to the object.
3. The selected objects sketch style overrides the default sketch style.

Window muntins are selected The No Sketch style is applied

only to the muntins

Objects which override the default design layer sketch style also override the default sketch style on a sheet layer.

Applying Sketch Styles to Hatches

There are several ways to create a unique look for drawing objects. In addition to the current layers default sketch style
and the object sketch style, each hatch can have a unique sketch style.
To specify a hatch sketch style:
1. Select Modify > Hatch.
The Hatches dialog box opens. For more information on hatches, see Defining Hatches on page 514 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
2. Select the desired hatch to edit or click New to create a new hatch.
The Edit hatch dialog box opens.

3. The document default sketch style is displayed in the Sketch Style list. Select the desired sketch style instead, or
select No Sketch to never apply a sketch style to the hatch.
678 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

When the document default sketch style is applied, the hatch sketch style changes when the document default
sketch style changes.
4. Click OK to exit the hatch editor.

Applying Sketch Styles to Viewports

Sheet layers can have a document default sketch style applied, which changes the appearance of objects on the sheet
layer, but does not sketch the viewports on the sheet layer. Each viewport can have its own sketch style, making it easy
to present designs with different sketched looks.
To apply a sketch style to a sheet layer viewport:
1. Select the viewport.
2. On the Shape tab of the Object Info palette, select Sketch from the Rendering list. Click Render Settings to
select the viewport default sketch style.
If creating a viewport, select Sketch from the Rendering list in the Create Viewport dialog box, and then click
Render Settings to select the viewport default sketch style.
The Sketch Render Settings dialog box opens. Select a sketch style for the viewport.

Parameter Description
Viewport Default Sketch Specifies the sketch style to apply to the viewport
Style
Edit Opens the Sketch Style Editor dialog box, for changing the selected
sketch style parameters (see Editing Sketch Styles on page 674)
Preview Temporarily applies the current sketch style to the viewport (disabled
when accessed through the Create Viewport dialog box)

3. Click OK.
The selected viewport sketch style overrides the document default sketch style for any objects within the viewport,
including the crop object, referenced design layers, and any annotations.
A sketch style cannot be directly applied to a viewport from the Render tab of the Object Info palette or by
dragging the sketch style from the Resource Browser.
A sketch style cannot be directly applied to a design layer viewport, but it can be applied to the layer of the design
layer viewport.

Sketching with Hidden Line Rendering

The default document sketch style can be applied to hidden line, dashed hidden line, and final shaded polygon
rendering modes.
 Sketch Rendering | 679

To apply a sketch style to hidden line rendering:

1. Select the default document sketch style as described in Setting the Default Sketch Style on page 672.
2. Select View > Rendering > Line Render Options.
The Line Render Options dialog box opens.

Select Sketch Hidden Line Results, and select the sketch style from the list. Click Edit to edit the sketch style
parameters. Then click OK to apply the sketch style to hidden line rendering.
3. To sketch a viewports hidden line rendering, select the viewport, and then choose a hidden line rendering mode
from the Rendering list in the Object Info palette. Click Render Settings to access the associated hidden line
render settings dialog box.
The Hidden Line Render Settings dialog box opens.

4. Select Sketch Hidden Line Results, and select the sketch style from the list. Preview or edit the sketch style if
desired.
5. The hidden line, dashed hidden line, or final shaded polygon rendering displays with the selected sketch style.
680 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object

The Heliodon tool places one or more special directional lights in a drawing for conducting sun studies, calculating
shadow angles, and creating solar animations. The tool demonstrates the location of sunlight and shadows cast on the
model as the suns position changes, for any day of the year and any location on earth. Accurate region/city information
is used for the calculations. Vertical and horizontal shadow angles can be automatically calculated for determining the
correct placement of shading devices, such as awnings. When combined with a physical sky background, the heliodon
can create natural lighting that responds to the sun position and time of day. Additionally, an area of a drawing, such as
a window or a portion of a large model, can be studied to determine when (or if) sunshine will affect it. Solar
animations can be generated on screen or by exporting to a movie file that can then be played with the QuickTime
movie viewer supplied with the Vectorworks program.
To create QuickTime movies, QuickTime must be installed. This is available with the Vectorworks software
installation.
To show shadows, the Renderworks product is required; to show soft shadows, a Renderworks render mode is
required.

Inserting a Heliodon Object

To insert a heliodon:

1. Click the Heliodon tool from the Visualization tool set.

If this is the first time a heliodon has been placed on the drawing, the Settings dialog box opens when placing the
object. Specify the preferences to use for this tool during this session. (Otherwise, click Preferences from the Tool
bar to specify or change the tool parameters.)
 Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object | 681

Parameter Description
Time Display Select the method of time display; Samples shows the time as it is currently
formatted
12/24 Hour Select whether to display the time in 12-hour or 24-hour time format; in
12-hour format, the date automatically displays as Month/Day, and in 24-hour
format, the date automatically displays as Day/Month
Colon/Dot Sets the time to display with a colon or dot between the hour and minute
2D Graphic Select a heliodon symbol from the from the default content; default content is
automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and displays in
the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide
Location Locations are derived from text files that can be found in the heliodon cities
file in the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder (seeLibraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Region text files with city, longitude, and latitude information can be added to
the current set of files, or the information can be edited from this dialog box.
Once a region has been selected, the corresponding text file is saved to the
user folder; see User Folders Preferences on page 27 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
Region Select the region from among the major regions of the world, or click Add
New Region from the bottom of the Region list, to create a new region
City Select a major city from within the specified region
Edit City If you have different information for the currently selected city, its
information can be edited; new cities can also be added to the current region.
Any edits are saved to the user folder.
City If updating the currently selected city, do not edit the city name; if adding a
city, enter the new city name
682 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Latitude/Longitude Specifies the citys global coordinates
North/South/East/ Sets the latitude (North/South) and longitude (East/West) hemispheres
West
Time Zone Select the citys time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Add Adds the new city to the selected region; the new city must have a unique
name
Update Updates the information of the selected city
Delete Deletes the city from the selected region

2. Click OK.
3. Click once in the drawing to set the objects position. Click again to set the objects rotation.
The heliodon graphic displays true North at the top of the heliodon. Normally, the drawing is oriented to page
North (true North, not magnetic North), and true North matches the top of the page, with no compensation
required for proper sun position. If the drawing was not created with this orientation, use the Object Info palette to
specify a Rotation in degrees from page North. North set here should match true North in the drawing.
The white arrows represent the sunlight direction at the current time of day and the designated location. The
gradient highlight shows the approximate position of the sun in the sky dome.
True North
Direction of suns rays
Approximate location of
sun in sky dome
Label control point

The properties of the heliodon can be edited in the Object Info palette

Parameter Description
Settings Opens the Settings dialog box, to specify the heliodon parameters
Heliodon data Displays the location, position, and time zone set for the heliodon
Show Solar Data Displays solar information for the heliodon in the Object Info palette; select a
Text Display option which includes Data to include the solar data in the
heliodon text label
Daylight Savings Select if Daylight Saving Time is in effect
Use Solar Time Overrides the local time zone and daylight savings settings, using apparent
solar time instead of mean solar time. When solar time is used, Daylight
Saving Time cannot also be in effect.
Time/Day/Month Specify the time of day, the day of the month, and the month, or select a
winter or summer solstice or spring or autumn equinox from the Month list.
The Time can also be specified as sunrise, dawn, midday, noon, dusk, sunset,
or midnight.
Sun Brightness Sets the brightness of the directional light representing the sun
Renderworks Only Renderworks is required for the four next parameters
 Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object | 683

Parameter Description
Soft Shadows Creates soft shadows when rendering shadows with a Renderworks mode
Physical Sun Creates a physical sun with color and brightness that is controlled by the
heliodon settings (when rendering with a Renderworks mode); deselect the
option to use a white directional light, set to 100% brightness
Physical Sky Allows the heliodon settings, such as date, time, and use of warm colors, to
control a physical sky Renderworks background, when one is applied (see
Creating Physical Sky Backgrounds on page 616). This creates more
realistic solar animations, because the sky reflects the time of day and month
of the year as the animation proceeds.

July 13, 6:00 am July 13, 3:00 pm July 13, 8:30 pm

Deselect this option to view the physical sky with bright, midday settings.
Warm Colors Adds a rosier, richer appearance to physical sun and sky colors

Warm Colors selected Warm Colors deselected

Show Shadow Angle Displays additional options for calculating shadow angles for selected walls;
Calculator see Calculating Shadow Angles on page 688
Object Display Select how to display the heliodon object in 2D and 3D views; the heliodon
symbol is a 2D graphic.
2D Graphic + 3D Light: Displays as a 2D graphic in Top/Plan view and
as a light in 3D views
2D Graphic Only: Displays as a planar graphic in all views
3D Light Only: Displays as a light object; does not use a 2D graphic.
Text Display Select the information to include in the heliodons text label; move the label
control point to adjust the label position.
None: Does not display a text label
Time + Location + Date: Displays the time, city, and date
Time + Location + Date + Data: Displays the time, city, date, and solar
data including solar time
Time + Date Only: Displays the time and date
Time + Date + Data: Displays the time, date, and solar data
Data Only: Displays the solar data
Solar Animation Opens the Solar Animation dialog box; see Creating Solar Animations on
page 684
684 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Once placed, a heliodon symbol is added to the drawing file and is listed in the Resource Browser in the Heliodon
Symbols folder. Edit the 2D component of the symbol as described in Editing Symbol Definitions on page 181 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide to change the appearance or the font style or size.
Heliodon objects display in, and can be controlled from, the Visualization palette. They can be identified by their
location and time data.
Place several heliodon objects in the drawing, set to different times of day, to conduct a solar study. Turn the
heliodon objects on and off in the Visualization palette to study the effects of the suns light and shadows cast at
different times of day.

Creating Solar Animations

A solar animation illustrates the way the sun moves over, or shadows are cast upon, a project as the suns position
changes. It studies how the sun affects a model or site at a particular time of day or year. The animation can be set to
rotate the sun about the model, or the model can rotate about the layer plane center or heliodon object.
Solar animations can be interactive, observing the effects in the drawing as changes are made. To interactively view
changes as you move the sliders, render in Wireframe or OpenGL render mode. The solar animation can also be
exported to a .mov file.
Depending on the view, render mode, presence of shadows, and heliodon view, various solar assessments can be
conducted. Generally, OpenGL rendering (with or without shadows; Renderworks required) will provide good results.

Settings Solar Animation Effect

Wireframe, Top/Plan view Observe the heliodon symbol while changing the time of year or
time of day. Animating shows the position of the suns rays and
approximate position of the sun in the sky dome. The date display
on the heliodon label changes to indicate the animations day of the
month.
OpenGL rendering (Use Observe the model as the suns rays move over it during the course
Shadows not selected), Top/Plan of the year or day. Different portions of the model are illuminated
or 3D view by sunlight.
OpenGL rendering with Observe the shadows cast by the model over the course of the day
shadows (Use Shadows or year, and observe the portions of the model that are illuminated
selected), Top/Plan view or 3D by sunlight.
view
Solar animation view set to Observe as the model rotates, as if the viewer was positioned on the
View (sun to layer plane sun. Any visible surface has sunlight falling on it, while anything
center) or View (sun to that cant be seen is in shadow (therefore, Use Shadows is not
Heliodon center) necessary). The model rotates about the layer plane center or about
the heliodon center. Rotating about the heliodon center can be
useful when the model is not centrally located, or when a particular
part of the model needs to be studied. For example, place the
heliodon adjacent to a shading device, zoom in, and then animate
using the heliodon center.

Creating Interactive Solar Animations

Interactive solar animations display the suns effects within the drawing; specify the view, day, month, and time for
interactive previews. Wireframe mode views as well as rendered views (with or without shadows) are useful to study
the suns movements.
 Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object | 685

Large or complex rendered models, high-quality render settings, and smooth shadows may affect the animation. To
interactively view changes as you move the sliders, render in Wireframe or OpenGL render mode. Low to medium
(Detail and Quality) OpenGL options are recommended.

To animate the sun interactively:

1. Insert at least one heliodon object as described in Inserting a Heliodon Object on page 680.
2. Select the desired view and render mode.
3. Select the heliodon, and click Solar Animation from the Object Info palette. Alternatively, double-click on a
heliodon object.
The Solar Animation dialog box opens. Click on the Interactive tab. Set the Animate view, and the day, month,
and time, or move the month and day sliders while observing the effects.

Parameter Description
Animate Sets whether to animate the sun about the model, or rotate the model about
the sun
Heliodon (Top/Plan Moves the sun over the model
view) or
Sun (using current
view)
View (sun to layer plane Navigates around the model as viewed from the sun, showing the part of
center) the model illuminated by the sun at that time; the model is assumed to be
at the layer plane center and rotates about this center
View (sun to Heliodon Navigates around the heliodon as viewed from the sun; parts of the model
center) that are visible are the areas receiving sunlight. This mode is helpful when
studying a portion of a larger model or when the model is offset from the
layer plane center. Place the heliodon in the area of interest.
686 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Interactive/Export Movie Select whether to view the animation interactively, within the drawing, or
export it to an animation file (see Exporting Solar Animations on
page 686)
Day/Month Enter the day of the month and the month, either by typing digits or using
the up and down arrows
Month slider Move the interactive slider to progress through the months of the year
Hour/Min Enter the time as hour and minute, either by typing digits or using the up
and down arrows. The increment for the minute arrows is set by the
Minute Interval.
AM/PM Toggles between AM and PM for a quick shortcut to setting morning or
(12 Hour time display afternoon
only)
Day slider Move the interactive slider to progress through the daylight hours
Minute Interval Sets the increment to advance or decrease the minutes with the up/down
arrows, making it easier to quickly step through the day if needed.
Local Time/Solar Time Displays the sunrise and sunset times for the location and time of year, as
well as the current local or solar time. The display of local or solar time
depends on whether Use Solar Time is selected in the Object Info palette.

4. When finished with the solar animation, click OK.

Exporting Solar Animations

The same type of solar animation effects that can be seen in the drawing in interactive mode can be exported to a
QuickTime movie.

To export a solar animation:

1. Insert at least one heliodon object as described in Inserting a Heliodon Object on page 680.
2. Select the desired view and render mode.
3. Select the heliodon, and click Solar Animation from the Object Info palette. Alternatively, double-click on a
heliodon object.
The Solar Animation dialog box opens.
4. Click on the Interactive tab, and set the date and time.
5. Click on the Export Movie tab. Set the Animate view and the export options. The solar animation occurs based
either on time or date settings.
 Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object | 687

Parameter Description
Animate Sets whether to animate the sun about the model, or rotate the model about
the sun
Heliodon (Top/Plan Moves the sun over the model
view) or
Sun (using current
view)
View (sun to layer Navigates around the model as viewed from the sun, showing the part of the
plane center) model illuminated by the sun at that time; the model is assumed to be at the
layer plane center and rotates about this center
View (sun to Navigates around the heliodon as viewed from the sun; parts of the model that
Heliodon center) are visible are the areas receiving sunlight. This mode is helpful when
studying a portion of a larger model or when the model is offset from the
layer plane center. Place the heliodon in the area of interest.
Interactive/Export Select whether to view the animation interactively (see Creating Interactive
Movie Solar Animations on page 684), or export it to an animation file
Animate Time Creates the solar animation over the course of a day; set the start/end time and
time interval
Animate Date Creates the solar animation over the course of a year; set the date start and
end and date interval
Start Time/Date Select the starting time or month
End Time/Date Select the ending time or month
Time/Date Interval Select the increment for the movie; a smaller increment creates a smoother
movie, but creates a longer movie
Show time of day Displays the time of day in the movie, at a location specified before export;
set the font size
688 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Show month and day Displays the day and month in the movie, at a location specified before
export; set the font size
Export summary Displays the length of the movie at 15 frames per second (fps) and the
number of frames to be created

6. Click OK to create the animation.

If showing the time of day or month and day, click in the drawing, when prompted, to set the text location.
The Set Movie Name and Destination dialog box opens.
7. Specify the location to save the movie file. By default, the file is named with the location and the date. Click Save.
The Compression Settings dialog box opens.
8. Enter the compression settings for the movie file.
See Animating Drawings with QuickTime on page 727 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Also,
see Apples QuickTime website for more information on QuickTime.
QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. The H.264 codec is
recommended; however, consult QuickTime documentation for more detail on compression settings.
9. Click OK. A message displays the progress of the export, and the movie is created.
Click to end the export early. The solar animation movie is created up to that point.
10. View the movie in an application such as the QuickTime Player to watch the solar animation.

Calculating Shadow Angles

Shadow angles can be calculated and displayed for up to four walls of a model. These calculations are useful for
designing or positioning shading devices, such as awnings and overhangs.
Shadow angles are always calculated relative to a wall and not to true North.

To calculate shadow angles:

1. Name the wall or walls that will participate in the calculations by selecting each wall, and then clicking on the
Data tab of the Object Info palette. Enter a Name for the wall to identify it.
2. Insert at least one heliodon object as described in Inserting a Heliodon Object on page 680.
3. Select the heliodon. In the Object Info palette, select Show Shadow Angle Calculator.
4. Specify the No. of Walls to display shadow angle calculation values. Up to four walls can be specified.
 Creating Chain Extrude Objects | 689

5. In Wall Face, specify which side of the walls, left or right, is the external side.
By default, the wall direction as it was drawn determines which side of the wall is considered the outside and
which is the inside. See Wall Direction on page 437 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
6. Enter the exact Name of each wall.
When the wall name is recognized, its Horizontal Shadow Angle (HSA) and Vertical Shadow Angle (VSA)
calculated values are displayed in the Object Info palette. If a wall is always in shadow, the text No sun on wall
displays in the Object Info palette.

Creating Chain Extrude Objects

The Chain Extrude tool automatically creates extruded objects with both continuous and repetitive elements.
Architectural features such as an awning contain a continuous element (the awning) and intermittently repetitive
elements (the supports). By specifying the polygon or polylines to be extruded, and then indicating the path of the
extrusion, the object(s) are automatically extruded along the path.
Cornice created with chain
extrude
Awning created with chain
extrude

Creating the Profile Objects

The profile objects determine the shape of the chain extrude object. The profile objects can consist of up to three
polygons/polylines or up to two polygons/polylines and one locus. For users of the Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark products, profile objects are contained in the wall fixtures and accessories file of the [Vectorworks]\Libraries
folder (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
To create the profile objects:
1. Create the continuous shape first. The Chain Extrude tool considers the first, or back, polygon/polyline to be the
continuous shape, and extrudes it along the path polygon.
2. Create the second shape; the front object is considered to be the repeating or intermittent object.
A second shape is not required.
690 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Repeating
shape
Continuous
shape

First shape Second shape

The reference location of the chain extrude relative to the path is the upper right or lower right corner of the
shapes bounding box. This location can be changed by including a locus in the profile group. The locus becomes
the reference point for the path polygon in the profile group. This is useful if the bounding box of the repeating
shape extends beyond the bounding box of the continuous shape.
3. Apply fill colors to the profile objects through the Attributes palette. The colors are applied to the continuous and
repeating shapes in 3D.

Creating the Chain Extrude Object

Once the continuous and, if any, repeating shapes have been defined, specify the path for the chain extrude with the
Chain Extrude tool.

To create the chain extrude object:

1. Select the continuous and, if any, repeating shapes.

2. Click the Chain Extrude tool from the Building Shell tool set.
3. Draw the chain extrude path polyline.
1st click

2nd click
3rd click

4th click
Double-click
to end

4. The chain extrude object is created based on the path drawn.

 Creating Chain Extrude Objects | 691

In 2D, the chain extrude object is displayed with dashed single lines

Chain Extrude Properties

The chain extrude object parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Draw 3D Select to display the chain extrude object in 3D view; deselect to display the object
only in 2D view
Flip Select to flip the orientation of the chain extrude object (for example, toward the
inside of a room for a crown molding, instead of the outside of a building for a
cornice)
Center Ribs Select to draw the repeating element centered along the edges of the path
Corner Ribs Select to draw the repeating element at the corners of the path
Vertical Datum Specifies the reference point for the chain extrude object
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the repeating elements of the object
Spacing Indicates the spacing distance between the repeating elements of the object
Vertex Edits the chain extrude path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on
parameters page 252 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

The placement of the repeating elements of the chain extrude object depends on the path created by the Chain Extrude
tool. In particular, special considerations apply to the miter zones at the corners of the path:
No repeating elements perpendicular to the building face will be drawn in miter zones
The miter zones are excluded from the length calculations of the sides (for spacing calculations, for example)
Repeating elements at corners, if drawn, bisect the angle of the corner and are elongated accordingly

Miter zone
Repeating element at corner is
elongated as necessary

The chain extrude path can be reshaped with the Reshape tool to add, subtract, and change vertices. The continuous
and repetitive elements are automatically adjusted to fit the new shape. The path polyline can be edited by selecting
692 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Modify > Edit Chain Extrude, and selecting Path, or by selecting Edit or Edit Path from the context menu (see
Object Editing Mode on page 16 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Creating a Seating Layout

The Create Seating Layout command creates a seating layout object from one or more selected polygons, rectangles,
rounded rectangles, ovals, arcs/circles, or polylines. Seating can consist of chairs, tables, or tables and chairs. Seating
fills the object(s) in a user-defined arrangement with a look-to location defined by a control point. Seating layout
objects can also be created by drawing a polyline and then selecting the Create Objects from Shapes command (see
Creating Objects from Shapes on page 696). Along with the seating layout, a Seating Count worksheet is created.
To create a seating layout object:
1. Create the shape defining the boundary of the seating area. Objects with one or more holes can be selected; seating
will not be placed where a hole exists.
2. With the object(s) selected, choose the appropriate command. Multiple shapes can be selected at one time (to
create several seating sections, for example).

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Seating Layout
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Create Seating
Layout

The Create Seating Layout dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Create a new seat symbol Creates a new seat symbol; provide the symbol name
called
Use an Existing Symbol Selects an existing seat symbol; specify the symbol from the list
Symbol Folders Specifies the location of seat symbols
Symbols Provides a graphical list of available seat symbols

3. A default symbol can be created to represent the seating; select Create a new seat symbol called and provide a
symbol name. Alternatively, select an appropriate seating symbol from either the default content or the current
files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. In addition to seat
symbols, table symbols and table and chair symbols can be used.
See Accessing Existing Resources on page 162 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for information
on importing symbols into the Resource Browser.
 Creating a Seating Layout | 693

4. When prompted, click on the focal point for the seating. All seats will face this point; table and chair symbols
orient towards the point.

For concentric seat layouts, the distance of the seat focal point from the object determines the radius of the
concentric layout. Click close to the object for a smaller radius.
The seating layout object and a Seating Count worksheet are created, with automatically calculated seat and table
counts.

The Seating Count worksheet displays the number of seats and/or tables required for each seating layout section, as
well as the total number of seats/tables needed for all sections. Nested symbols are counted in the worksheet, so tables
and chairs are counted separately within a table and chair symbol. (If a symbol cannot be identified as a table or chair,
it is counted as a chair.)
A seating layout can also be created by clicking the Seating Layout tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set. Draw a
polygon with the tool and complete the parameters which are identical to those described in Editing the Seating
Layout on page 693. Alternatively, Spotlight users can use the Create Event Seating command on the Event
Planning menu to create a seating layout (see Creating Event Seating on page 556).

Editing the Seating Layout

Seating layout parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Seat Spacing Specifies the distance between seats
Row Spacing Specifies the distance between rows of seats
Section Name Assigns a section name for use in the Seating Count worksheet
694 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Concentric Select to draw a concentric seating arrangement

Linear Concentric
Offset Alternate Offsets alternating rows (starting with the second row), so that the seats are
Rows staggered by a half seat width, or chairs and tables are spaced to prevent
overlapping
Offset 1st Row Specifies an offset distance for the first row of seats
Focal Pt X/Y Indicates the coordinates of the seating look-to point
Focus Front Click to snap the seating layouts focal point to the front.
Because flexible seating areas can have multiple potential fronts, repeated
clicks toggle the focal point around the seating area, to each possible front.
The focal point snaps to the midpoint of each path segment that defines the
seating area.
Draw Boundary Line Select to display the object used as the basis for the seating layout; deselect to
hide the object and show the seats only
Draw Layout Lines Select to display the seating locations without showing the actual seat symbols
Only
Base Z Height Specifies the initial elevation of the first row of seating
Rise per Row Specifies the elevation increase for each row of seating (seating layout slope)
Display Seating Displays the name of the seating section on the drawing, as set in Section Name
Section Name
Display Seating Displays the number of seats in the section on the drawing, separated by table
Count and chair counts
Show Seat Number Displays a seat number on each symbol; a table-and-chair symbol receives a
single number

Starting Number Displays and sets the starting number for the first seating symbol in the section
Increment Specifies the seating number increment value
Use an increment value of 2 to number a section with all even or odd seat
numbers.
 Creating a Seating Layout | 695

Parameter Description
Label Classes Assign the Section Name, Seating Count, and Seat Number labels to classes
to control their appearance in viewports. Select a class present in the drawing or
create a new class.
When a new class is created, it does not automatically become the active
class. Class graphic attributes will be applied to the labels when Use at
Creation is enabled for the class. (See Setting Class Properties on
page 109 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
Seating Count Select a method for limiting the number of seats permitted in a seating area, or
leave the option Unlimited. If a limitation method is chosen, specify maximum
values for the Seats per Row and Rows per Section.
Limit the Number of Seats creates no more than the maximum number of
seats per row and rows per section specified, fit within the seating area
boundaries.
Notify When Count is Exceeded creates seats to fill the seating area but
provides red warning text over the seating area when the seats per row and/or
rows per section maximum values are exceeded.
Specify the Number of Seats creates exactly the number of seats per row and
rows per section specified. All rows are of uniform length; the seating area
path is used only to determine an origin and rotation for the seating plan, not
to shape or limit the seating area.
Chair Symbol Displays the seating symbol name used to create the seating layout
Chair Count Displays the number of seats used in the layout
Table Symbol Displays the table symbol name used to create the seating layout
Table Count Displays the number of tables used in the layout
Select Symbol Opens the Choose a Symbol dialog box, to replace the current seating symbol.
Select the desired seating symbol from either the default content or the current
files content, and then click OK; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. When the Spotlight product is
installed, the default content for event planning seating is available.
Symbol Name Displays the chair or table and chair symbol used to create the seating layout
Vertex Parameters Edits the seating layout path vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on
page 252 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

The seating layout can be reshaped with the Reshape tool to add, subtract, and change vertices. The seats are
automatically adjusted to fit the new shape. More sophisticated editing operations, such as adding, clipping,
intersecting and combining into surfaces can be performed on the seating layout path object by selecting Modify >
Edit Seating Layout.
The seating section name and seating count text position can be adjusted by moving the control point. Adjust the text
font and size of the label and seat numbers with the commands from the Text menu.

Seat label
control point
696 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

If the seating orientation requires adjustment, the seat control point can be moved to readjust the seating focal point.
The control point is referenced relative to the center of the seating layout. If two imaginary axis lines were placed over
the seating layout as shown in the diagram, placing the control point in line with the center of the axes would orient the
seats directly toward the control point.
Seat focal
control point

Creating Objects from Shapes

The Create Objects from Shapes command uses an existing polyline or shape as the path for creating a variety of
objects, as listed in the following table.

Object Product
ceiling grids Architect
guardrails Architect, Landmark
handrails Architect, Landmark
hardscape objects Landmark
landscape areas Landmark
landscape walls Landmark
lighting pipe Spotlight
linear material details Architect, Landmark
massing models Architect, Landmark
parking area Landmark
parking along path Landmark
piping runs Architect
plants Landmark
property lines Architect, Landmark
repetitive unit details Architect, Landmark
revision clouds Architect, Landmark, Spotlight
roadways Architect, Landmark
roadways (NURBS) Architect, Landmark
seating layouts Architect, Spotlight
 Creating Objects from Shapes | 697

Object Product
site modifiers Architect, Landmark
slabs Architect
soft goods Spotlight
spaces Architect
stipple objects Architect, Landmark, Spotlight
walls Architect, Landmark, Spotlight
window walls Architect

In addition to these standard objects, the Create Objects from Shapes command supports custom path objects (custom
path plug-in objects with a .vso extension). For details, see Creating Custom Path Objects on page 981.
Walls created with the Create Objects from Shapes command use the current settings made active by the Wall
tool (Vectorworks Architect and Landmark only), and slabs use the current Slab tool settings (Architect).
The Create Walls from Polygon command is no longer available from a Vectorworks Design Series workspace
because the Create Objects from Shapes command can be used for creating walls, which contains more
functionality than the Create Walls from Polygon command. The Create Walls from Polygon command is still
available in the Vectorworks Fundamentals workspace and can be added to a Vectorworks Design Series
workspace if desired.
To create an object from a shape:
1. Draw a polyline or select an existing shape such as a line, rectangle, oval, polygon, arc/circle, rounded rectangle,
polyline, or 3D polygon representing the path for creating the object.
2. With the item selected, select the command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Objects from
Shapes
Vectorworks Landmark > Create Objects from
Landmark Shapes
Vectorworks Spotlight Modify > Create Objects from
Shapes

Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Create Objects from Shapes from the
context menu.
The Create Objects from Shapes dialog box opens.
3. Select the type of object and the creation parameters.
698 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Object Type Select the type of object to create based on the shape path; the parameters
available vary based on the object type selected
Offset For guardrails, handrails, landscape walls, roadways, walls, and window
walls, select whether to offset the object to the left, right, or centered on the
shape; select Custom to enter a custom offset distance
Custom Offset For guardrails, handrails, landscape walls, roadways, walls, and window
walls, specify the custom offset distance from the object, if any
Show Properties Dialog Select to display the Object Properties dialog box for the specified object
type prior to creating the object; this field is not applicable for plant objects
because the default place plant settings are used
Delete Source Shapes Select to delete the original path or shape after drawing the object
Preserve Records If Delete Source Shapes is selected, select this option to apply record data
(Vectorworks from the source shape to the object that will be created
Architect or
Landmark required)
Continuous Spacing Select to automatically maintain continuous spacing between
(Vectorworks Architect uprights from one object to the next based on the Upright Spacing value
or Landmark required) for guardrails or handrails; or
mullions from one object to the next based on the Mullion Spacing value
for window walls

4. Click OK. If Show Properties Dialog was selected, the object properties dialog box for the specified object type
opens. Enter the appropriate parameters, and then click OK.
If you are creating guardrails or handrails and Continuous Spacing was selected in the Create Objects from
Shapes dialog box, enter the distance between the first upright and the start of the shape in the 1st Upright
Spacing field of the object properties dialog box. If Continuous Spacing was not selected, this value is applied to
the first upright at the beginning of each segment of the shape. Also enter the spacing to maintain between
uprights in the Upright Spacing field of the object properties dialog box.
If you are creating window walls and Continuous Spacing was selected in the Create Objects from Shapes dialog
box, enter the distance between the first mullion and the start of the shape in the 1st Mullion Spacing field of the
object properties dialog box. If Continuous Spacing was not selected, this value is applied to the first mullion at
the beginning of each segment of the shape. Also enter the spacing to maintain between mullions in the Mullion
Spacing field of the object properties dialog box.
 Creating Similar Objects | 699

The object is created from the shape and its parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Rotated and rendered for clarity

Creating Similar Objects

The Create Similar Object command is an easy way of creating an object that matches an object that is already in a
drawing. The associated tool, tool mode, and object attributes and parameters are automatically set to create an object
that matches the source object.
To create an object similar to an existing object:
1. With the cursor over the source object, either right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Create
Similar Object from the context menu. The source object can be visible or grayed, and does not need to be in the
current layer.
Alternatively, press the Ctrl + Alt (Windows) or Cmd + Option (Macintosh) shortcut key combination while
clicking over the source object.

2. The tool required to create the object is automatically activated.

Any tool settings, as well as any global settings used by the tool, change to match the source object, as shown
here.

Source Object or Result

Attribute
Graphical attributes Updates the global Attributes palette settings to match those of the source
object, including by-class or class settings
Class Sets the active class to that of the source object
Layer Sets the active layer to that of the source object, if the Vectorworks preference
Change active layer for Similar Object Creation is enabled; see Session
Preferences on page 20 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Text, or object with Matches the global font settings of the source text or object text
text set by global font
settings
Object, such as a Matches rotated/non-rotated creation mode of source object
rectangle, with a
rotated creation mode
700 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Source Object or Result

Attribute
Symbols Makes the source symbol the active symbol, and activates the appropriate
symbol insertion tool
Plug-in object Sets the tool parameters to those of the source plug-in object
Wall Matches the wall style of the source wall

3. Create the similar object in the same way the source object was created.
Because the Attributes palette may have changed to match the source object, the Attributes palette utility menu
can quickly set or change attributes globally if needed (see Setting Global and Default Attributes on page 606).

Creating a Human Figure

A 3D human figure object can be inserted for a realistic addition to the drawing. Constructed of NURBS surfaces for a
high-quality model, the object contains a wide variety of parameters for full control over the figure type, position, and
appearance.

An entourage/figures object library also contains pre-configured human figure objects in a variety of poses and
figure types (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Several figures can increase the time required to render the model in 3D.

Inserting the Figure and Setting Parameters

To insert and configure a human figure:

1. Click the Human Figure tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Click to place the human figure in the drawing.
3. The human figure parameters can be modified from the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Height Specifies the figure height, in the current unit
Body Type Select the figure body type (Slight/Petite, Average, or Large)
Figure Type Select the type of human figure (Man, Woman, Boy, or Girl)
Posture Select the figure position; Custom is displayed when the figure posture has been
adjusted in the Figure Custom Position dialog box (see Specifying a Custom Figure
Position on page 702)
 Creating a Human Figure | 701

Parameter Description
Hand Height For the Standing (shaking hands) posture, specifies the height of the hands, in the
current unit
Attire (Top) Select the clothing for the top of the figure
Attire (Bottom) Select the clothing for the bottom of the figure
A dress overrides the selected top attire
Footwear Select the figures footwear, or select None if the figure is barefoot
Hair Select the figures hairstyle
Jacket Places a jacket on the figure
Stockings Places stockings on the figure
Tie Places a tie on the figure
Set Attributes Click to set the figure attributes more specifically (see Setting Figure Attributes on
page 701)
Custom Position Click to set a custom figure position (see Specifying a Custom Figure Position on
page 702)

Setting Figure Attributes

Figure attributes can be set precisely to control the figure appearance.
To set figure attributes:
1. Select the desired figure.
2. In the Object Info palette, make the initial selections for the figure.
3. Click Set Attributes from the Object Info palette.
The Human Figure Attributes dialog box opens, with the figure set to the current Object Info palette parameters.
Select each desired model part and then set its attributes.
702 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the figure in the specified posture, with a sample of the
selected texture and attributes
Rotate Left/Right Rotates the figure preview 90 degrees to the left or right
Render Select a rendering mode for the preview figure. If Automatically Render is not
selected, click Render after each attribute change to view a rendered preview.
Automatically Renders the preview figure automatically, according to the selected mode, after
Render an attribute change (depending on the selected rendering mode and the
inclusion of attributes such as textures, this can take some time)
Model parts Select each figure attribute to configure, and then set its parameters
Class Select a class to apply to the attribute from the list of classes in the file, or select
Container to apply the objects class to the selected attribute
Fill Style Select Class to use the class style for the selected attribute, choose None to
apply no fill, or choose Solid to apply a solid color and then click on the color
box to select the fill color
Texture Sets the texture parameters for the selected attribute from either the default
(Renderworks content or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the
required) Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Texture Select the texture to apply from either the default content or the textures in the
current file, or select Class to apply the class texture; select None to apply no
texture
Map Type Select the texture map type
Radius For sphere and cylinder maps, sets the texture radius; the default radius is the
same as the 3D object radius. Increasing this value reduces the size of the
texture on the object.
Repeat Repeats the texture in a horizontal and/or vertical direction
Horizontally/
Vertically
Scale Factor Determines the texture size when projected onto the object; either enter a scale
value or use the slider to change the scale
Horizontal/ Sets the start location of the texture horizontally and vertically
Vertical Offset
Rotation Sets the angle of texture rotation; either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360
degrees or use the slider to change the rotation angle

For more information on texture parameters and mapping, see Applying and Mapping Textures on page 616 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. Click OK to apply the attributes to the figure.

Specifying a Custom Figure Position

If the Posture selection is not sufficient to position the figure exactly as desired, a custom figure pose can individually
position the figures head, body, arms, and legs.
Use the Rotate tool to set the overall position of the figure.
 Creating a Human Figure | 703

To specify a custom figure pose:

1. Select the desired figure.
2. In the Object Info palette, make the initial parameter selections for the figure.
3. Click Custom Position from the Object Info palette.
The Figure Custom Position dialog box opens, with the figure set to the current Object Info palette parameters.
Select the body part tab to change, and then set the part parameters by dragging the slider for the desired settings.
Use slight slider adjustments for best results.

Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the figure with the specified figure pose
Rotate Left/ Rotates the figure preview 90 degrees to the left or right
Right
Render Select a rendering mode for the preview figure. If Automatically Render is not selected,
click Render after each position change to view a rendered preview.
Automatically Renders the preview figure automatically, according to the selected mode, after a position
Render change (depending on the selected rendering mode and the inclusion of attributes such as
textures, this can take some time)
Revert Returns the figure to its original position
Head Specifies the head parameters
Angle Indicates where the head is positioned along a vertical axis (looking up or down).
Move the slider left to move the head up, and move the slider right to look down.
Tilt Specifies how much the head tilts to the left or right; move the slider left to tilt over the
right shoulder, and move the slider right to tilt over the left shoulder
Turn Sets the amount that the head turns to the left or right; move the slider right to look over the
left shoulder, and move the slider left to look over the right shoulder
Body Specifies the body trunk parameters
Hip Bend Sets the bend of the lower torso and legs, by setting the angle between the hip and thigh.
Move the slider left to set the angle towards the back of the body, and move the slider right
to set the angle towards the front of the body
Waist Bend Indicates the bend of the upper torso; move the slider right to bend forwards, and left to
bend backwards
704 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Waist Tilt Indicates how much the upper torso tilts to the left or right; move the slider right to tilt
towards the left, and move the slider left to tilt towards the right
Waist Twist Specifies how much the upper torso twists to the left or right; move the slider right to rotate
towards the left, and move the slider left to rotate towards the right
Arms Specifies the arm parameters
Arm Selector For each parameter, select the arm for the position change, or select Both Arms to mirror
the position change on both sides of the body
Arm Rotation Specifies the arm position at the front or back of the body; move the slider right to move the
arm behind the body, and move the slider left to move the arm in front of the body
Arm Twist Specifies the arm position as it twists along the arm axis; move the slider right to rotate the
arm counter-clockwise, and move the slider left to rotate the arm clockwise
Arm Angle Sets the up and down position of the arm; move the slider left to move the arm away from
the body, and move the slider right to move the arm towards the body
Elbow Bend Specifies the amount that the elbow is bent; normally, move the slider left to bend the
elbow in a natural direction
Wrist Twist Sets the rotation of the wrist; move the slider left to twist the wrist clockwise and to the
right to twist the wrist counter-clockwise
Hand Twist Sets the flex of the hand; move the slider to the left to flex the hand towards the front of the
body, and move the slider to the right to flex the hand towards the back of the body
Legs Specifies the leg and foot parameters
Leg Selector For each parameter, select the leg for the position change, or select Both Legs to mirror the
position change on both sides of the body
Leg Rotation Specifies the leg position at the front or back of the body; move the slider right to move the
leg behind the body, and move the slider left to move the leg in front of the body
Leg Twist Specifies the leg position as it twists along the leg axis; move the slider right to rotate the
leg counter-clockwise, and move the slider left to rotate the leg clockwise
Leg Angle Sets the up and down position of the leg; move the slider left to move the leg away from the
body, and move the slider right to move the leg towards the body
Knee Bend Specifies the amount that the knee is bent; normally, move the slider left to bend the knee in
a natural direction
Foot Rotation Sets the rotation of the foot; move the slider left to twist the foot clockwise and to the right
to twist the foot counter-clockwise
Foot Flex Sets the flex of the foot; move the slider to the left to flex the foot towards the front of the
body, and move the slider to the right to flex the foot towards the back of the body

4. Click OK to apply the custom position to the figure.

Inserting Cabinets
All Vectorworks products include three types of cabinets for inserting in a drawing filebase, wall, and utility
cabinets. In the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, the cabinet objects are inserted through the Resource Browser. In
the Vectorworks Design Series products, the cabinet objects are inserted with the various cabinet tools. Cabinet door
and drawer handles are provided as default content (default content is automatically imported into the current file at the
 Inserting Cabinets | 705

point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide).

Inserting Base Cabinets

To insert a base cabinet:

1. Select the Base Cabinet tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set.
2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the cabinet, and click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time a base cabinet is placed in the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box opens.
3. Specify the default properties which apply to all base cabinets subsequently placed in this document. Cabinet
properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Flip When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to flip the cabinet orientation
Position When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to set the position of the cabinet; in
the Position Symbol in Wall dialog box, enter the distance from the symbols
insertion point to the selected corner of the wall
Style Select the cabinet style
End Finish Select the cabinet finish
Blind Specify the direction of the blind, or none
Length Enter the cabinet length
Uneven Length Select whether the cabinet has an uneven length corner, and if so, enter the left
Corner corner length
Height / Depth Enter the cabinet height and depth
Door mounting Select the cabinet door mounting style
Draw Drawer Select whether to draw the cabinet drawer(s)
Drawer Style Specify the drawer style
Number of Doors Select the number of cabinet doors
Door Style Select the cabinet door style
Panel Style Select the door panel style
Arch Height Factor Specify the proportion of the arch height in relation to the door width (a larger
value produces a taller arch)
Door Swing Specify the door swing direction
706 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Rail and Stile Select the rail and stile width
Width
Bevel Edge Select whether to bevel the outside door and drawer edges
Bevel Inside Select whether to bevel the inside door and drawer edges
Reveals Enter the Top, Mid, Bottom, Side, and Center reveal height or width
Number of Shelves Enter the number of shelves
Draw Kick Select whether to draw a kick
Kick Height / Specify the kick height and depth
Depth
Draw Counter Select whether to draw a counter
Back Splash Specify where to place the back splash, or none
Splash Height Enter the back splash height
Splash Thickness Enter the back splash thickness
Counter Thickness Enter the counter thickness
Overhang Enter the counter overhang length
Reveal Enter the thickness for the bottom portion of the counter
Show Detail Select whether to draw various cabinet details. Select the cabinet door, kick,
and/or counter class, or none
Door Handle Height Enter the door handle height
Door / Drawer Click Door Handles or Drawer Handles to select a handle from the default
Handles content (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide); select a symbol from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK (or
select the No Pull symbol to remove the door or drawer handles)

4. Click OK to set the cabinet parameters and close the Object Properties dialog box.
 Inserting Cabinets | 707

Inserting Utility Cabinets

To insert a utility cabinet:

1. Select the Utility Cabinet tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set.
2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the cabinet, and click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time a utility cabinet is placed in the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box opens.
3. Specify the default properties which apply to all utility cabinets subsequently placed in this document. Cabinet
properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Flip When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to flip the cabinet orientation
Position When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to set the position of the cabinet; in the
Position Symbol in Wall dialog box, enter the distance from the symbols
insertion point to the selected corner of the wall
Length Enter the cabinet length
Height / Depth Enter the cabinet height and depth
Door Mounting Select the cabinet door mounting style
Number of doors Select the number of cabinet doors
Door Swing Specify the door swing direction
Door Style Select the cabinet door style
Panel Style Select the door panel style
Mullion Style Select the cabinet mullion style, or none
Handle Height Enter the door handle height
Number of Shelves Enter the number of shelves
Upper Door Height Enter the upper cabinet door height
Upper Door Style Select the upper cabinet door style
Upper Panel Style Select the upper cabinet door panel style
Upper Mullion Style Select the upper cabinet mullion style, or none
Upper Handle Height Enter the upper cabinet door handle height
Upper Number of Enter the number of shelves in the upper cabinet
Shelves
708 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Arch Height Factor Specify the proportion of the arch height in relation to the door width (a larger
value produces a taller arch)
Rail and Stile Width Select the rail and stile width
Bevel Edge Select whether to bevel the outside door and drawer edges
Bevel Inside Select whether to bevel the inside door and drawer edges
Reveals Enter the Top, Mid, Bottom, and Side reveal measurement height or width
Draw Kick Select whether to draw a kick
Kick Height / Specify the kick height and depth
Depth
Show Detail Select whether to draw various cabinet details. Select the cabinet, door, kick,
and/or glazing class, or none
Handles Click Handles to select a handle from the default content (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); select a symbol
from the graphical list of Symbols and click OK (or select the No Pull symbol
to remove the handles)

4. Click OK to set the cabinet parameters and close the Object Properties dialog box.

Inserting Wall Cabinets

To insert a wall cabinet:

1. Select the Wall Cabinet tool from the Furn/Fixtures tool set.
2. Click in the drawing file or wall to set the insertion point of the cabinet, and click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time a wall cabinet is placed in the drawing, the Object Properties dialog box opens.
 Inserting Cabinets | 709

3. Specify the default properties which apply to all wall cabinets subsequently placed in this document. Cabinet
properties can be edited later in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Flip When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to flip the cabinet orientation
Position When inserting a cabinet in a wall, click to set the position of the cabinet; in the
Position Symbol in Wall dialog box, enter the distance from the symbols insertion
point to the selected corner of the wall
Style Select the cabinet style
End Finish Select the cabinet finish
Blind Specify the direction of the blind, or none
Length Enter the cabinet length
Uneven Length Select whether the cabinet has an uneven length corner, and if so, enter the Left
Corner Corner Length
Height / Depth Enter the cabinet height and depth
AFF Enter the cabinet height above the finished floor
Door Select the cabinet door mounting style
mounting
Number of Doors Select the number of cabinet doors
Door Swing Specify the door swing direction
Door Style Select the cabinet door style
Panel Style Select the door panel style
Mullion Style Select the cabinet mullion style, or none
Number of Enter the number of shelves
Shelves
Arch Height Specify the proportion of the arch high in relation to the door width (a larger value
Factor produces a taller arch)
Handle Height Enter the door handle height
Rail and Stile Select the rail and stile width
Width
Bevel Edge Select whether to bevel the outside door and drawer edges
Bevel Inside Select whether to bevel the inside door and drawer edges
Reveals Enter the Top, Bottom, Side, and Center reveal measurement height or width
Glazing Select the glazing class or none
Show Detail Select whether to draw various cabinet details. Select the cabinet and/or door class
or none
710 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Handles Click Handles to select a handle from the default content (see Libraries on
page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); select a symbol from
the graphical list of Symbols and click OK (or select the No Pull symbol to
remove the handles)

4. Click OK to set the cabinet parameters and close the Object Properties dialog box.

Unfolding Surfaces
The Unfold Surfaces command creates flattened, 2D representations of developable surfaces. A developable surface is
curved in one dimension only, so that it is able to be flattened into a plane with no distortion. For example, cones and
cylinders can be unfolded, but spheres cannot.
To unfold surfaces:
1. Select one or more developable NURBS surfaces or CSG objects that represent developable surfaces.
2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Unfold Surfaces.
A polyline in the shape of each unfolded surface is created and placed in the active layer. Each polyline has the
same class and attributes as the surface from which it was created.
The Unfold Surfaces command works on a single NURBS surface or a solid containing tangentially-connected
NURBS surfaces. If the item does not successfully unfold, use the Extract tool to extract a NURBS surface from
the item, and unfold that surface.

Creating a Surface Array

The Create Surface Array command duplicates 2D or 3D geometry onto a planar object or NURBS surface. This
allows you to easily create free-form surfaces with geometric patterns, curtain walls, open framework, and more.
 Creating a Surface Array | 711

The following base surface objects are allowed.

Arc Polyline
Circle Rectangle
Oval Rounded rectangle
Polygon NURBS surface

The following table describes the types of objects that can be used as array items, as well as the method used to project
the objects onto the base surface.

Array Item Projection Method

Solid Project by center of bounding cube
Sweep
Text
Symbol instance Project by symbol origin
2D/3D Locus Project by object definition points (the result is always a planar object)
Arc
Bitmap
Line
Oval
Polygon
Polyline
Rectangle
Rounded rectangle
Extrude/multi-extrude Project profile object by definition points
3D Poly Project by each vertex (the result may not be planar)
Extrude along path
Mesh
NURBS curve
NURBS surface
Group Project member objects as described above; all members of the group
must be legal array objects

To create a surface array:

1. Select a planar object or NURBS surface to be the base of the array object. Optionally, also select the 2D or 3D
geometry that will be duplicated on that surface (alternatively, edit the surface array object after creation to add the
array geometry).
712 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

2. Select Model > Create Surface Array.

The Create Surface Array dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Select a base surface object If multiple objects were selected, by default, the largest object is highlighted in
red, which indicates that it is selected to be used as the base surface. Click the
Next or Prev button to highlight a different object. The buttons are unavailable
if only one object was selected.
Origin X Factor Enter the X offset of the array patterns origin from the center of the base
surface. The value must be a number between -1 and 1. For example, to shift
each array item to the right by half of the items length along the X axis, enter
0.5.
Origin Y Factor Enter the Y offset of the array patterns origin from the center of the base
surface. The value must be a number between -1 and 1. For example, to shift
each array item down by a quarter of the items length along the Y axis, enter
-0.25.
Pattern Rotation Enter a rotation angle for the array pattern
X and Y Repetition For both the X and Y axes, specify how the array objects are to be repeated
Parameters
Repetition Mode X / Y Select whether to repeat array objects on the base surface based on a No. of
Repetitions, or a Fixed Distance per object
No. of Repetitions X / Y If Repetition Mode is set to Number of Repetitions, enter the number of times
the array object is to be repeated along the X or Y axis. The array objects are
resized as necessary to fit the base surface.
Fixed Distance X / Y If Repetition Mode is set to Fixed Distance, enter the length of each array
object along the X or Y axis. The number of array objects is adjusted as
necessary to fit the base surface.
 Creating a Surface Array | 713

Parameter Description
Offset X / Y Factor Enter a number to control the space between the array objects. The distance
from the center of one array item to the center of the next item (in the same
row or column) is the factor times the array items size. For example, if the
array item is 12 total, and the Offset X Factor is 1.25, the distance from the
center of one item to the next in the same row is 15 (12 x 1.25). If the offset
factor is 1, the array items in that row or column touch each other; if the factor
is negative, the array items overlap.
Shift X / Y Factor Enter a number to shift the position of the array objects from one row or
column to the next. The distance from the center of one array item to the center
of an array item in the next row or column is the factor times the array items
size. For example, if the array item is 12 total, and the Shift Y Factor is
0.25, the distance from the center of one item to the center of the item to the
right (in the next column) is 3 (12 x 0.25). If the shift factor is 0 (zero), the
array items are aligned.
Edge Conditions Specify how to handle array objects that extend beyond the boundary of the
base surface: allow the objects to Overlap the edge, Omit those objects from
the array, or Trim the objects at the boundary
Display Base Surface Select whether to display or hide the base surface
Scale Z Value When selected, the array objects are automatically scaled along the Z axis,
proportional to how much the objects are scaled along the X and Y axes (to fit
the base surface). When deselected, the array objects have the same Z value as
the original array item.

3. Click OK to create the surface array object.

The base surface is a yellow rectangle, and the Surface array with 5 repetitions along both the X and Y
array item is a blue extrude axes. Offset factors are set to 1, so there are no gaps
between the array items. Shift factors are set to 0, so the
array items are aligned.
714 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

No. of Repetitions set to X=7 and Y=4, and offset Shift X Factor set to 0.5, and Display
factor set to 1.5 for both X and Y axes Base Surface deselected

Origin Y Factor = 0; Origin Y Factor = 0.5; Origin Y Factor = 1;

the array is centered at the center of the array is the center of the array is
the base surface origin offset above the origin by offset above the origin
half the width of an array by the full width of an
item array item

Original array
item geometry

Scale Z Value deselected Scale Z Value selected

Editing a Surface Array

After a surface array has been created, you can edit its properties from the Object Info palette. All of the parameters
that are available during the array creation can be changed. You can also change which side of the base surface the
array is applied to (Switch Z Direction).
You cannot edit the surface array geometry directly; use the Edit Surface Array command to edit the base surface and
array components individually.
To edit a base surface or array item:
1. Select the surface array, and then select Modify > Edit Surface Array.
2. From the Choose component dialog box, select whether to edit the base surface or the array items.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the surface array and select Edit Base Surface
or Edit Array Items from the context menu.
 Creating Auto Hybrid Objects | 715

3. The Edit window displays the item to be edited. A colored border around the drawing window indicates the
editing mode is active.
4. Reshape the geometry, change the attributes, and move, add, or remove items as needed. Keep in mind that only
one item can be used as the base surface. Also, the base surface and array item(s) must be one of the allowed
objects types described previously.
5. Click the Exit button in the top right corner of the drawing window to return to regular drawing mode and update
the surface array.

Creating Auto Hybrid Objects

Converting 3D geometry into an auto hybrid object allows the object to appear as desired in 2D plan view, while
leaving the 3D appearance unchanged. This is particularly important for Building Information Model (BIM) workflows
and for those who model free-form 3D geometry, but need plan drawings as well. The auto hybrids settings provide
complete control over its 2D display attributes, with separate, classed parameters for the appearance of the cut plane
and extents below and above the cut plane.

Extents below Extents above

cut plane Cut plane cut plane

Auto hybrid object in Top/Plan view

To create an auto hybrid object:

1. Select the 3D geometry to convert to an auto hybrid object.
Valid objects include: extrudes, tapered extrudes, multiple extrudes, extrude along path objects, 3D polygons,
sweep objects, meshes, solids, NURBS surfaces, and 3D-only symbols and 3D plug-in objects.
2. If not in Top/Plan view, select View > Standard Views > Top Plan.
The auto hybrids 2D appearance settings are only visible in Top/Plan view
3. With the object selected, choose the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Auto Hybrid
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Create Auto
Hybrid
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Create Auto Hybrid

4. The object is converted into an auto hybrid.

5. To set the location of the cut plane and specify the appearance of the auto hybrid, click 2D Appearance from the
Object Info palette.
The 2D Appearance dialog box opens. Click on the Cut Plane tab.
716 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Elevation Sets the elevation of the cut plane; the cut plane is the intersection of an imaginary
XY plane and the object geometry. Specify whether the elevation is relative to the
layer, or to the story (Vectorworks Architect required). The cut plane is set to this
fixed elevation and does not move with the object; instead, if you move the objects
elevation, the cut plane displays in a different location along the object. If the cut
plane does not intersect the object, the cut plane does not display, but the object does.
Display Cut Plane Select to display the cut plane of the auto hybrid object
Class Select the class to use from the current list of classes, select New to create a new
class, or select <Contained Object Class(es)> to place the cut plane in the same
class(es) as the 3D contained object(s).
Fill
None Uses no fill for the cut plane
Use 2D Attributes Uses the fill attributes of the original converted object(s) for the cut plane
of Contained
Object(s)
Use Class 2D Uses the Class selection for the cut plane fill attributes
Attributes
Pen
Use 2D Attributes Uses the pen attributes of the original converted object(s) for the cut plane
of Contained
Object(s)
 Creating Auto Hybrid Objects | 717

Parameter Description
Use Class 2D Uses the Class selection for the cut plane pen attributes
Attributes
Show as Reflected When selected, displays all the auto hybrid geometry as if looking up, rather than
Ceiling Plan looking down; applies to all tabs
3D Conversion Sets the segmentation resolution used to display curved portions of the auto hybrid;
Resolution this setting is independent of the 3D conversion resolution Vectorworks preference
and applies to all tabs
Smoothing Angle When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane is selected on either the Below Cut
Plane or Above Cut Plane tab, set a value to reduce the number of facets displayed in
the geometry. For values greater than zero, facet lines are removed between any two
faces of an object that are within that degree angle of each other; applies to all tabs.

Original Top/Plan view of Office chair auto hybrid

office chair (comprising 90 object with Smoothing
meshes) Angle setting = 5

Generate Intersecting When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane is selected on either the Below Cut
Lines Plane or Above Cut Plane tab, select to generate lines between intersecting geometry
or deselect to omit intersecting lines; applies to all tabs.
This option may make generating an auto hybrid object slower.
Dash Style When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane and Dashed Hidden Line are
selected on either the Below Cut Plane or Above Cut Plane tab, select the dash style
for the hidden line display; applies to all tabs.
The default dash style is the same as the document default for hidden line
rendering.
Dash Shade When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane and Dashed Hidden Line are
selected on either the Below Cut Plane or Above Cut Plane tab, select the dash shade
for the hidden line display; applies to all tabs.
The default dash shade is the same as the document default for hidden line
rendering.
Save Current Settings Applies the current settings from all tabs as default parameters when creating auto
as Defaults hybrid objects

6. Click on the Below Cut Plane/Above Cut Plane tabs to set the appearance of the auto hybrid below/above the cut
plane.
718 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Parameter Description
Display Extents Select to display the extents of the object below/above the cut plane
Below/Above Cut
Plane
Range Choose how much of the object to display
Infinite Displays the entire object below the cut line
Finite Depth/Height Displays the object below the cut line up to the specified depth/above the cut line up
to the specified height
Class Select the class to use from the current list of classes, select New to create a new
class, or select <Contained Object Class(es)> to place the object below/above the cut
plane in the same class(es) as the 3D contained object(s)
Fill
None Uses no fill for the area below/above the cut plane
Use 2D Attributes Uses the fill attributes of the original converted object(s) for the area below/above the
of Contained cut plane
Object(s)
Use Class 2D Uses the Class selection for the fill attributes of the area below/above the cut plane
Attributes
Pen
Use 2D Attributes Uses the pen attributes of the original converted object(s) for the area below/above
of Contained the cut plane
Object(s)
 Creating Auto Hybrid Objects | 719

Parameter Description
Use Class 2D Uses the Class selection for the pen attributes of the area below/above the cut plane
Attributes
Dashed Hidden Select to display a dashed hidden line representation of the geometry below/above
Line the cut plane; it is possible to show dashed hidden lines only below or above the cut
plane or in both directions depending on the selections made

Mesh object in Top/Plan Top/Plan view of auto

view hybrid object with Dashed
Hidden Line selected

Show as Reflected When selected, displays all the auto hybrid geometry as if looking up, rather than
Ceiling Plan looking down; applies to all tabs
3D Conversion Sets the segmentation resolution used to display curved portions of the auto hybrid;
Resolution this setting is independent of the 3D conversion resolution Vectorworks preference
and applies to all tabs
Smoothing Angle When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane is selected, set a value to reduce the
number of facets displayed in the geometry. For values greater than zero, facet lines
are removed between any two faces of an object that are within that degree angle of
each other; applies to all tabs.
Generate Intersecting When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane is selected, select to generate lines
Lines between intersecting geometry or deselect to omit intersecting lines; applies to all
tabs.
This option may make generating an auto hybrid object slower.
Dash Style When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane and Dashed Hidden Line are
selected, select the dash style for the hidden line display; applies to all tabs.
The default dash style is the same as the document default for hidden line
rendering.
Dash Shade When Display Extents Below/Above Cut Plane and Dashed Hidden Line are
selected, select the dash shade for the hidden line display; applies to all tabs.
The default dash shade is the same as the document default for hidden line
rendering.
Save Current Settings Applies the current settings from all tabs as default parameters when creating auto
as Defaults hybrid objects

7. Click OK.
720 | Chapter 17: Drawing Enhancements

Modeled wall in 3D Original plan view of modeled wall Modeled wall converted to auto hybrid

Editing an Auto Hybrid Object

The properties and 2D appearance of an auto hybrid object can be edited from the Object Info palette. You cannot edit
the 3D geometry contained in the auto hybrid geometry directly; use the Edit Auto Hybrid command to edit the
geometry.
To edit an auto hybrid object:
1. Select the auto hybrid object, and then select Modify > Edit Auto Hybrid.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the auto hybrid and select Edit from the context
menu, or simply double-click on the auto hybrid object.
2. The Edit window displays the item to be edited. A colored border around the drawing window indicates the
editing mode is active.
3. Reshape the geometry, change the attributes, and perform any solid operations as needed.
4. Click the Exit Auto Hybrid button in the top right corner of the drawing window to return to regular drawing
mode and update the auto hybrid.
5. On the Object Info palette, the elevation of the cut plane can be easily changed, and the auto hybrid can be set to
display in 2D views only, or in both 2D and 3D views. Only auto hybrids with 3D geometry are exported to IFC.
Creating Drawing Views 18
Overview
As drawings are developed, they may contain viewports on both design layers and sheet layers, as well as section
viewports and detail viewports.

Rotating the Plan

In a design layer, the view may need to be rotated to match a drawing angle. When the plan is rotated, the view
switches to Rotated Top/Plan, and all existing layers are rotated together.
The View bar has a button for quick access to the Rotate Plan command. Double-click the button to disable the
rotation animation if desired. The animation can also be disabled by pressing the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command
key (Macintosh).
Rotate Plan button

To rotate the plan:

1. Select View > Rotate Plan, or click Rotate Plan from the View bar.
2. Click to indicate the center of plan rotation, and then click again to indicate the angle of plan rotation. The angle
snaps to existing objects.
The temporary reference line indicates the line that will become horizontal after the operation. The temporary
arrow within the arc indicates the direction of the rotation. The rotation is referenced to a horizontal line, unlike
the Rotate tool.
The angle of plan rotation can also be specified from the floating data bar, or entered directly in the View bar. The
drawing rotates around plan center (0, 0) when the angle is specified in the View bar.
3. All layers in the drawing rotate to match the specified angle. (If some layers were in a 3D view, they will lose this
view since all layers in the drawing are set to Rotated Top/Plan; confirm that this is the desired action.) Symbols
placed and objects drawn while in this view match the current rotation angle.
At the bottom left of the drawing window, the position of the X - Y axis indicator shows the drawing rotation
angle and direction.
The View bar indicates that the drawing has been rotated; the icon next to the layers in the Layers list changes, and
the Current View list displays Rotated Top/Plan. If you switch to another view and want to return to the rotated
top/plan view, select Rotated Top/Plan from the Current View list on the View bar.

In addition, in a Rotated Top/Plan view, the rulers display in a blue color, and the Object Info palette for objects in
rotated plan display both global world coordinates and rotated plan coordinates (depending on the Object Info
palette preference).

Global world coordinates

Rotated plan coordinates

722 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

The display of the Object Info palette coordinates in rotated plan view is controlled by a preference, accessed from the
coordinate/IFC menu at the top right corner of the Object Info palette:

Parameter Description
Show screen coordinates with Displays screen coordinates (rotated plan coordinates) with Screen X, Screen Y,
full labels and Screen Z labels in the Object Info palette
Show screen coordinates with Displays screen coordinates with abbreviated X, Y, and Z labels
abbreviated labels
Show world coordinates when in Displays world coordinates in addition to screen coordinates when in rotated
rotated plan plan view
Do not show world coordinates Hides world coordinates when in rotated plan view
when in rotated plan
IFC options (Vectorworks For information on IFC data, see Assigning IFC Data to Objects on page 782
Architect or Landmark required)

Once the drawing has been rotated, a different rotation angle can be specified with Rotate Plan in the View bar.

The green reference line indicates the unrotated, horizontal direction. If the Rotate Plan command is selected again,
match this reference line to un-rotate the view, returning to the world coordinate system. Alternatively, to un-rotate the
view, select View > Standard Views > Top/Plan, select Top/Plan from the View bar, or enter an angle of 0 for Rotate
Plan in the View bar.
In rotated plan view, a working plane is automatically present, with its origin at the rotated plan pivot point and its X
axis horizontal to the screen. Click on the X or Y axis to drag the working plane to a new location. The X and Y
coordinates adjust from this point and the local coordinates are reflected on the rulers.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 723

Click and drag to

move the working
plane handle

An elevation view can be easily set based on the working plane position. Click Working Plane Views from
the View bar, and then select a standard view such as Front. To return to the rotated 2D view, select Rotated Top/
Plan from the Current View list on the View bar.
The plan rotation can be saved as a view and restored later by selecting the view for display. Select Save View
Orientation in the Save View dialog box to save the plan rotation (see Creating Saved Views on page 115 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Saved views with rotation information display with a rotated icon in the View column of the Organization dialog box.
Sorting by the View column separates non-rotated views from the rotated views.

Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports

A sheet layer viewport displays a full or cropped view of one or more design layers, which you can change as needed
and not affect the original drawing. For example, change the viewports layer and class visibilities, use a different
render mode, or add annotations and dimensions. (See Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports on page 734
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
Design layer viewports provide different functionality, for more flexibility. Like a sheet layer viewport, a design layer
viewport can display design layers from the current file in a full or cropped view; unlike a sheet layer viewport, it can
include one or more design layers that are workgroup referenced from another file.
Like a sheet layer viewport, in a design layer viewport you can control layer and class visibility, and create layer and
class overrides. However, because it is an object on a design layer, a design layer viewport has the same view, scale,
724 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

and render mode as everything else on the layer. You can use 2D and 3D drawing tools to add objects to the design
layer, but you cannot add annotations to a design layer viewport.
Design layer viewports replace the layer link functionality present in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product. Current
layer links can be easily converted to a design layer viewport with the Modify > Convert > Convert to Viewport
command. (See Converting Layer Links on page 758 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
The Organization dialog box differentiates among the various types of viewports in the Viewports tab. In the following
example, the Type column indicates that Front Garden and Pool Area are design layer viewports, while the others
are sheet layer viewports. The Source column indicates that Pool Area contains design layers from an external file,
while Front Garden contains internal design layers. East, North, and South are section viewports.

Search criteria in worksheets and from the Plug-in Manager allow items from design layer viewports to be filtered
out, preventing unwanted duplicates when creating schedules.

Creating a Design Layer Viewport from an Internal Design Layer

To create a design layer viewport that displays a design layer in the same file:
1. Select View > Create Viewport. Alternatively, from either the Organization dialog box or the Navigation palette,
select the Viewports tab, and click New.
2. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. The scale, view, and render mode of the viewport are determined by the
design layer on which it is placed; they cannot be changed here. Set the other viewport parameters as desired.
After the viewport has been created, additional parameters become available; see Properties of Design Layer
Viewports on page 730.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 725

Parameter Description
Viewport Name Specifies the viewport name; this name must be unique in the document
Drawing Title Specifies a descriptive name for the viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63
characters.
Create on Layer Select the design layer in the current file where the viewport will be created, or select
New Design Layer to create a layer
Source Displays the name of the file that contains the design layers to display in the viewport. If
Current Document is not displayed here, click Select Source to open the Select Viewport
Source dialog box; select Current Document as the source, and click OK to return to
this dialog box.
See Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 726 for information about
referencing an external file.
Layers Specifies which design layers will be visible in the viewport; see Changing the Layer
Properties of Design Layer Viewports on page 735
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects, when the viewports view is other than Top/Plan
Project Screen Objects Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the viewports view is
other than Top/Plan
Classes Specifies which classes from the source file will be visible in the viewport; see
Changing the Class Properties of Design Layer Viewports on page 737
Remaining fields The remaining fields are not available for design layer viewports
726 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

3. Click OK.
The viewport is created on the designated design layer, and the design layer becomes active. The viewport can be
cropped, as described in Cropping Design Layer Viewports on page 734.

Creating a Design Layer Viewport by Cropping

These steps require that the viewport and the design layer that displays in it are in the same file.
To create a design layer viewport by cropping:
1. Access the design layer that will display in the viewport.
2. Create a 2D object such as a rectangle, circle, or polyline. The 2D object must define an area; for example, a 2D
line cannot be used. Crop objects are automatically placed in the screen plane (see Planar Modes of 2D Objects:
Screen Plane and Layer Plane on page 201 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Position the 2D
object on the design layer to delimit the area to be included in the new viewport. The fill of a viewport crop object
is always None; however, the pen style can be set from the Attributes palette.
3. Select the 2D crop object, and then select View > Create Viewport.
4. An alert dialog box asks whether the object should be used as the viewports crop. Select Yes (also select Always
do the selected action to always use a selected 2D object as a crop object when creating viewports).
5. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. Select the design layer on which to create the viewport. The Source must
be the current document. Specify the design layers and classes to display in the viewport. (See Changing the
Layer Properties of Design Layer Viewports on page 735 and Changing the Class Properties of Design Layer
Viewports on page 737.)
6. Click OK.
The viewport, cropped by the selected 2D object, is created on the specified design layer.
7. By default, the crop object is not visible. To change the visibility of the crop object, select the viewport and select
the Crop Visible setting in the Object Info palette.

1st Floor Powder Room 2nd Floor Master Bath 2nd Floor Hall Bath

Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport

There are two ways to reference design layers that are in other Vectorworks files:
The default method in the Vectorworks Design Series products is to create a design layer viewport and then
reference the desired design layers from the master file into the viewport, as described here.
In the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, design layers are imported into the target file when they are referenced.
For backward compatibility, the Vectorworks Design Series products support this method. See Adding and
Editing Layer Import References on page 123 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 727

To create a design layer viewport that references a design layer in another file:
1. If the current file uses layer import referencing, switch to design layer viewport referencing. (From the References
tab of the Organization dialog box, click Settings, and click the Design layer viewports option on the Reference
Settings dialog box. Any existing referenced layers are automatically converted into referenced design layer
viewports.)
2. Select View > Create Viewport. Alternatively, from either the Organization dialog box or the Navigation palette,
select the Viewports tab, and click New.
3. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. Enter a Viewport Name and Drawing Title, and then select the design
layer on which to create the viewport.
4. Click Select Source to open the Select Viewport Source dialog box.

Parameter Description
Current Document / Select External Document to indicate that the design layers that will display in this
External Document viewport are in a different file
Existing Reference If the master file is already a reference in this file, select this option, and then select the
reference from the list
New Reference Select this option if this is a new reference, and click Choose to open the Open
Current-Version Drawing dialog box; locate the master file and click Open to return to
this dialog box. The path to the selected file displays below the New Reference field.
Referenced files must be the same Vectorworks software version as the target file.
Circular references are not allowed; for example, if file A references file B, and file
B references file C, then file C cannot reference file A. The exception is if one of
the references uses the referencing in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product (layer
import).
728 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Save reference Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file to the
location as referenced file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced file with
respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path when the files
might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path between
the files remains the same, the reference can be found. Both files must be saved on the
save volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on the
selection.
Automatically update Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the reference
out of date reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the Organization
during file open dialog box
Save referenced Saves a copy of the referenced data with the target file. When this option is deselected, a
cache to disk copy of the referenced data is not saved, which means that the target file size is smaller;
the referenced data is refreshed when the target file is opened.

5. Click OK in the Select Viewport Source dialog box to return to the Create Viewport dialog box.
6. Specify the design layers and classes to display in the viewport (see Changing the Layer Properties of Design
Layer Viewports on page 735 and Changing the Class Properties of Design Layer Viewports on page 737).
7. Click OK.
The viewport is created on the designated design layer, and the design layer becomes active. The viewport can be
cropped, as described in Cropping Design Layer Viewports on page 734.

Adding or Editing References for Design Layer Viewports

Workgroup referencing allows you to use information from other Vectorworks files in your file, including design
layers, classes, and resources (such as hatches, worksheets, or symbols). Referencing in the Vectorworks Design Series
products is different from referencing in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product because it uses design layer viewports
to reference design layers in other files. One advantage to this method is that all of the layers, classes, and resources
from the master file are not automatically imported into the target file. In addition, DXF/DWG, DWF, image, and PDF
files can be referenced. The Vectorworks Design Series products use this type of referencing by default, but you can
choose to use the referencing in the Fundamentals product (layer import) for a particular file if necessary.
Use the References tab of the Organization dialog box to create references to other files, and to edit or update existing
references. A reference for a design layer viewport can be created when the viewport is created, or it can be created
ahead of time from the References tab.
For detailed information about other aspects of workgroup referencing in both the Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Design Series products, see Workgroup Referencing on page 121 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To add or edit references when design layer viewport referencing is enabled:
1. Access the target file, and select Tools > Organization.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Click the References tab.
Referenced files are listed in priority order, along with their current status, whether they are set to update
automatically when the target file is opened, and whether they are set to save copies of the referenced items with
the file.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 729

Parameter Description
New Opens the Open File dialog box to select a new reference file
Edit Opens the Edit Reference dialog box to change the parameters of a selected reference file
Delete Opens the Delete Reference dialog box to delete a file from the list of referenced files, and to
choose whether to keep the referenced layers and resources in the target file; see Deleting
References on page 130 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Update Manually updates the referenced items from the selected file(s)
Settings Opens the Reference Settings dialog box to set options for updates of referenced items; see
Setting the Referencing Options on page 122 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

3. To edit a current reference file, select the file and click Edit.
The Edit Reference dialog box opens. Proceed to step 5.
4. To add a new reference file, click New.
The Open File dialog box opens. Select the desired file, and then click Open to open the appropriate dialog box:
Vectorworks file: New Reference dialog box
DXF/DWG or DWF file: Import Options dialog box
Image file: Image Import Options dialog box
PDF file: Import PDF dialog box
Referenced Vectorworks files must be the same Vectorworks software version as the target file.
Circular references are not allowed; for example, if file A references file B, and file B references file C, then file C
cannot reference file A. The exception is if one of the references uses the Vectorworks Fundamentals product style
of referencing (layer import).
5. From the New Reference or Edit Reference dialog box, specify the parameters for the workgroup reference.
730 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Source File Displays the path and file name of the referenced master file; if the Edit option was
selected, click Browse to edit the file location
Save reference location as Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file to the
referenced file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced file with
respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path when the files
might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path between
the files remains the same, the reference can be found. Both files must be saved on the
save volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on the
selection.
Save referenced cache to Saves a copy of the referenced data with the target file. When this option is deselected,
disk a copy of the referenced data is not saved, which means that the target file size is
smaller; the referenced data is refreshed when the target file is opened.
Automatically update out Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the
of date reference during reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the
file open Organization dialog box
Update class definitions Updates class definitions along with the referenced symbols that use those classes;
for referenced symbols this field does not appear if the reference is for an image or PDF file

6. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box.

Properties of Design Layer Viewports

Design Layer Viewport Parameters
Once it has been created, edit the design layer viewport in the Object Info palette, or select Edit from the viewports
context menu to open the Properties dialog box.
A viewport is assigned to the None class when it is created, and its visibility is controlled by the class settings
when that class is not active.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 731

Parameter Description
Rotation Sets the viewport rotation; if the viewport was created from a rotated plan view, this
parameter can be used to reset the viewport to the world coordinate system
Lock Position Select to prevent the viewport from being moved accidentally
Crop Indicates whether the viewport has been cropped (see Cropping Design Layer Viewports
on page 734)
Crop Visible If the viewport has been cropped, select to display the crop object
Description Specifies a descriptive name for the viewport
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of
the layer properties in the viewport; see Changing the Layer Properties of Design Layer
Viewports on page 735
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects, when the viewports view is other than Top/Plan
Project Screen Objects Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the viewports view is
other than Top/Plan
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of the class
properties in the viewport, including changes to the properties for crop objects. Class
visibilities can be overridden for a selected viewport; see Changing the Class Properties
of Design Layer Viewports on page 737.
Advanced Properties Opens the Advanced Viewport Properties dialog box; see Advanced Design Layer
Viewport Properties on page 731
Source Indicates the source file that contains the original design layer(s) that display in the
viewport

Advanced Design Layer Viewport Properties

To access additional viewport parameters, click Advanced Properties from the Object Info palette of a selected
viewport.
The Advanced Viewport Properties dialog box opens. These settings affect the viewport display only; they do not affect
the original design layer(s).

Parameter Description
Show Wall Displays or hides wall components in Top/Plan view, regardless of the document
Components preferences detail display setting (see Display Preferences on page 30 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide)
732 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Black and white only Changes all colors in the viewport to black or white; this is useful for displaying two
viewport copies on the same design layer, with one in color and the other in black and
white. However, if the document preferences display setting is black and white, viewports
will also display as black and white.
Adjust Flipped Text Re-orients rotated and flipped text in the viewport so that it is always readable (regardless
of the Vectorworks flipped text preference; see Display Preferences on page 30 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Preview Displays the viewport with a preview of the advanced settings

Modifying Design Layer Viewports

There are several ways to modify design layer viewports; their appearance can be completely different from the
original design layers, for presentation purposes.
Modify the settings for the viewport in the Object Info palette.
Modify the viewport with various 2D and 3D tools and commands.
Edit the design layer(s) that display in the viewport.
Crop the viewport.
Change the properties of the viewports layers and classes.

Moving and Editing Design Layer Viewports

A design layer viewport can be edited like most 2D objects. For information on editing tools and commands, see
Editing Objects on page 247 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to copy or paste a viewport on its original design layer or another design
layer. Use the Selection tool to drag a viewport to a new position (or edit the X, Y, and Z axis positions in the
Object Info palette). Press the Delete key to delete a selected viewport.
Use the Move and Rotate commands and the Rotate and Mirror tools to move, rotate, or mirror a viewport.
Use the Modify > Lock and Modify > Unlock commands to lock and unlock viewports.
Use the Eyedropper tool to transfer viewport attributes from one viewport to another; see Transferring
Attributes on page 502 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a Design Layer Viewport

To edit a design layer that is displayed in a design layer viewport:
1. Select the viewport.
2. Select Modify > Edit Viewport. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport,
and select Edit from the context menu.
The Edit Viewport dialog box opens.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 733

Parameter Description
Crop Creates or edits a cropped viewport, and optionally displays the viewport outside of the crop
area when in Edit Crop mode; see Cropping Design Layer Viewports on page 734
Display Viewport Displays the viewport outside of the crop with wireframe rendering; objects outside of the
Outside Crop crop can be snapped to when creating or editing a crop shape
Gray Outside Crop If Display Viewport Outside Crop is selected, displays the area outside of the crop in gray
Design Layer Navigates to the selected design layer to edit the objects contained in the viewport
Display using Changes the files view parameters and layer and class visibilities to match those of the
Viewport viewport.
Attributes If the Navigate Back to Viewport option is also selected, the files layer and class
visibilities return to their original status when you return to the viewport; otherwise, the
files attributes remain the same as the viewports.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
Navigate Back to If the Design Layer edit mode was selected, temporarily adds a Return to Viewport button
Viewport to the design layer that returns you to the viewport when the edit to the design layer is
complete (similar to an Edit Group operation); this option is unavailable when the design
layer viewport is referenced.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
To exit to the design layer instead of exiting to the viewport, select Exit Viewport from the
context menu or press Shift + Esc while in design layer editing mode.
Display with Clip If you are editing a section viewport, and Navigate Back to Viewport is selected, this
Cube option displays the design layer with a clip cube whose dimensions match the length, depth,
and height ranges set for the viewport. Portions of the design layer outside the clip cube are
not visible during editing.
You can adjust the faces and orientation of the clip cube as needed, and then either create a
new section viewport, or update the current viewport. See Viewing a Model with the Clip
Cube on page 564 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
734 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Double Click Sets the future behavior when a viewport is double-clicked, eliminating the display of this
dialog box if desired (it can still be accessed by selecting Modify > Edit Viewport, or by
selecting Edit from a viewports context menu). If the Edits the Design Layer option is
selected, a double-click activates the design layer of the double-clicked object.

3. Click Design Layer and select the design layer to edit from the list.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Design Layer or
Edit Referenced Design Layer from the context menu to activate the design layer of the right-clicked object. (If
the right-clicked object does not belong to a design layer, the Edit Viewport dialog box opens.)
4. Select the editing options:
Select Display using Viewport Attributes to view the design layer with the viewport attributes (orientation,
projection, render mode, and layer and class visibilities). A rendered viewport displays the original design
layer with the viewports render mode; however, the design layers render mode options for that mode are used.
Select Add Reference Crop Object to view the crop object on the design layer during editing. However,
because the crop object is added to the design layer, it could become visible in other viewports that reference
that area of the design layer.
Select Navigate Back to Viewport to easily return to the viewport when you are finished with the design layer
edits. A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Return to
Viewport button is visible in the top right corner of the drawing window.
If this is a section viewport, select Display with Clip Cube to use a clip cube while editing the design layer.
5. Click OK to activate the selected design layer.
6. If you selected Navigate Back to Viewport, a colored border displays around the drawing window. Do one of the
following when your edits are complete:
Click Return to Viewport to return to the viewport. This saves changes to drawing objects, but it does not
save clip cube edits.
Press Shift + Esc to exit to the design layer instead of exiting to the viewport. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area, and select Exit Viewport from the context menu.
If the viewport has a clip cube, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the cube face where the section
line is located; select Update Section Viewport to save the clip cube edits. Then either click Return to
Viewport, or select Exit Viewport from the context menu to exit editing mode.
If the viewport has a clip cube, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) any vertical cube face other
than where the section line is located; select Create Section Viewport to create a new section viewport with its
section line located at that cube face.

Cropping Design Layer Viewports

A viewport can be cropped on its design layer, to display only a portion of the viewport.
To crop a viewport:
1. Select the viewport.
2. Select Modify > Edit Viewport. The Edit Viewport dialog box opens (see Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a
Design Layer Viewport on page 732 for a description of the dialog box parameters).
3. Click Crop.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 735

Choose whether to display the viewport outside of the crop area. Select Display Viewport Outside Crop to view
the rest of the viewport; select Gray Outside Crop to view the area outside of the crop in gray. These options
make drawing and editing easier, since objects outside the crop can be snapped to.
To view other design layer objects while in Edit Crop mode, select Show other objects while in editing modes
on the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 30 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide).
4. Click OK to enter Edit Crop mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Crop from the
context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Group
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Crop button is visible in the top right
corner of the drawing window.
5. Create a 2D object such as a rectangle, circle, or polyline. The 2D object must define an area; for example, a 2D
line cannot be used. Position the 2D object to delimit the new viewport display area. The fill of a viewport
cropping object is always None; however, the pen style can be set from the Attributes palette while in Edit Crop
mode.
Use the Flyover tool to adjust the view as necessary (see Flyover on page 553 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide).
The bounding box of the crop object is also the perspective clip rectangle, if the viewport is in Perspective
projection. Reshaping the crop object changes the perspective clip rectangle as well.
6. Click Exit Viewport Crop to return to the design layer.
7. The cropped viewport displays; in the Object Info palette, the Crop status changes to Yes.
8. To change, replace, or delete the crop object, select the viewport and then select Modify > Edit Viewport (or
select Edit from the context menu) to re-enter Edit Crop mode.
To change the visibility of the crop object, change the Crop Visible setting in the Object Info palette.

Changing the Layer Properties of Design Layer Viewports

The viewports layer visibility, opacity, stacking order, and colors can be changed to be different from the design layer
that contains the viewport. Other viewports, as well as the design layer properties, are not affected. The viewport
attributes can be tailored as desired for presentation; several copies of the same viewport can appear completely
different.
To change the layer properties of a viewport:
1. Select the viewport.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Layers.
The Viewport Layer Properties dialog box opens.
736 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Click here and drag up or

down to change the layer
stacking order in the
viewport

Click the visible, invisible, or

gray column to set the layer
visibility in the viewport After editing the colors in
the layer properties, click
Indicates whether the layer here to apply the override
definition has overrides in this to the viewport
viewport

Parameter Description
Layer list Lists the viewport layers and their visibility, edited status, layer color use status, and stacking
order. Click the triangle in the heading of an active column to toggle between ascending and
descending sort order based on that column parameter.
Visibility Click in a layer visibility column to change the layer visibility for this viewport.
Column 1: Visible (displays objects in this layer)
Column 2: Invisible (hides objects in this layer)
Column 3: Gray (displays objects in this layer as dimmed)
(Source) Column 4 indicates whether the layer definition is the same as the source layer, or the layer
definition has overrides in this viewport. When a layer is edited with the Edit button, the
override icon displays automatically. Click the Revert button to revert to the original settings.
The layer definition is from the Layer overrides exist in
viewports source layer this viewport

(Layer Colors) Click to apply the viewport layer colors set in the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box
(click Edit to set the colors, as described in the next step), overriding the design layer colors.
This setting is independent of the Use layer colors document preference.
# (Stacking Order) Displays the layer stacking order; drag a layer within the # column to change its stacking order
Edit Opens the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box, to override the selected layers properties
Revert Returns the settings in the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box to their default values and
removes the override icon in the Source column
Stacking Override Indicates whether the layer stacking order in the viewport is different from the design layer
stacking order. Click Revert Stacking Order to return to the original design layer stacking
order.
Preview Click to preview the layer property settings in the selected viewport

3. To override the layer properties (for viewport display), select one or more viewport layers and click Edit.
Alternatively, double-click on a viewport layer to edit it.
The Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box opens.
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 737

Displays when the Vectorworks

preference for Quartz imaging
(Macintosh) or GDI+ imaging
(Windows) is enabled

4. The same parameters apply when you create a design layer (see Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide); for viewport layers, only the stacking order, transfer mode or
opacity, and colors can be edited. These edits apply to the current viewport only, though they can be transferred to
other viewports with the Eyedropper tool.
The viewport layer colors can be controlled separately from the design layer colors, for flexible presentation
output. Click Colors to override the fill and pen colors for the selected viewport layer. To see the effects of the
color override, Use Layer Colors must be selected in the Viewport Layer Properties dialog box for the selected
viewport. This is similar to the way that Use Layer Colors must be selected in Document Properties to see the
layer color settings for a design layer, as described in Setting the Design Layer Color on page 102 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
5. Click OK to return to the Viewport Layer Properties dialog box.
Click Preview to evaluate the results of the property changes.
6. Click OK to return to the design layer.

Changing the Class Properties of Design Layer Viewports

The class visibilities and attributes of a selected viewport can be changed to be different from the design layer that
contains the viewport. This does not change the class properties or the class visibility for the original design layers or
for other viewports. The viewport attributes can be tailored as desired for presentation; several copies of the same
viewport can appear completely different.
To override viewport class properties:
1. Select the viewport.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Classes.
The Viewport Class Properties dialog box opens. The dialog box functionality is slightly different for referenced
and non-referenced (internal) viewports. Change class visibilities and/or make class attribute overrides for the
selected viewport.
738 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Indicates whether the class

definition will be updated
from the source file

Click the visible, invisible, or

gray column to set the class
visibility in the viewport

Indicates whether the

class definition is specific
to this viewport

Non-referenced Viewport Referenced Viewport

Parameter Description
Class List Lists the viewport classes and their visibility and edited status; click in a class visibility column
to change the class visibility for this viewport. Click the triangle in an active column to toggle
between ascending and descending sort order based on that column parameter.
Visibility Column 1: Visible (displays objects in this class)
Column 2: Invisible (hides objects in this class)
Column 3: Gray (displays objects in this class as dimmed)
 Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports | 739

Parameter Description
(Source) Column 4 indicates whether the class definition is the same as the source class, or the class
definition has overrides specific to this viewport.
The class definition is from The class definition is
the source class specific to this viewport

Non-referenced viewports: All classes use the document class definition by default ( ).
To change the appearance of a class in this viewport, click Edit and change the settings as
needed; the viewport-specific icon displays automatically. Click the Revert button to revert
to the original settings.
Referenced viewports: Because they come from an external file, all classes show as
viewport-specific by default ( ). If the same class exists in both the viewport and in the
current file, they remain completely separate. By default, the class definition in the viewport
will be updated from the source file when the reference is updated ( ).
To change the appearance of a class for this viewport, leave the Source set as
viewport-specific; then click Edit and change the class settings as needed. Also set the class
to not update from the source file ( ); otherwise, the edits will be removed the next time
the reference is updated.
To use the same class definition both in the current file and in the viewport, click the Source
icon to toggle the setting ( ). If the viewport class does not exist in the current file, it will
be imported. If the class is also set to update from the source file ( ), an alert message
prompts you to verify that you want to reference the class definition. If you answer Yes, the
class in the current file and in the viewport will be changed whenever the reference to the
viewport source file is updated. If you answer No, the Source reverts to the default setting.
(Update) Column 5 indicates whether the class definition will be updated from the source file when the
reference is updated. Click the icon to toggle the setting.
Update Do not update
(Referenced
viewports only)
Use current When enabled, the viewport uses the current documents class visibilities. The option is
documents class automatically enabled when layer links or referenced layers are converted into viewports; it is
visibilities disabled by default for new design layer viewports.
Edit Opens the Edit Class(es) dialog box, to make overrides to the selected class that only apply to
the current viewport (see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide); drawing objects class setting should be By class to take
advantage of class overrides
740 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Import Opens the Import Attributes dialog box, to import the class attribute settings from the file or
from another viewport. The attributes can be imported for the classes selected in the Viewport
Class Properties dialog box, from corresponding classes, or from a specified class in the file or
a specified viewport.

Click OK to import the class attributes into the selected viewport. (The Eyedropper tool can
also transfer class override attributes between viewports.)
Revert Sets the selected class back to its original attributes, undoing any viewport-specific class
(Non-referenced overrides; also removes the viewport-specific icon in the Source column
viewports only)
Preview Click to preview the class visibility and attribute settings in the selected viewport

3. Click OK to apply the changes to the selected viewport.

Creating Section Views

A section viewport creates a cross-section view of a model, but leaves the model intact. The section viewport can
display a 2D cross-section view of only the objects that intersect the section line, or, additionally, the 3D geometry that
remains on the indicated side of an infinite plane passing through the section line.
Create a live section view from one or more design layers, from a clip cube on a design layer, or from a viewport on a
sheet layer or design layer. By creating several section viewports, models can be analyzed and presented effectively.
The section views can be updated as the model changes, and their attributes and appearance can be easily changed.
A section viewport can be created on either a sheet layer or a design layer; the functionality and purpose of the two
types of section viewports are different.
Section viewports on sheet layers can include annotations and automatic drawing coordination of the sheet and drawing
numbers; also, if there are multiple viewports on a sheet layer, each can a have different view and scale. These types of
sections are always Top/Plan since they are on sheet layers, and are created for construction drawings. To get a 3D
look, switch to Perspective Projection.
Section viewports on design layers are useful when, for example, a detail section is needed in a Front rendered view. A
design layer section viewport allows comparison between a section and an elevation view. In a team environment, the
design layer section viewport can be referenced in other files.
 Creating Section Views | 741

For sheet layer section viewports, to automatically coordinate the sheet numbers and drawing numbers among the
sheet borders, drawing labels, and section markers in a file, select Use Automatic Drawing Coordination in the
Display tab of the Document Preferences. This feature keeps references up to date, even when drawings are edited
or moved to a different layer.

Creating a Section Viewport on a Sheet Layer

When you create a section viewport, you can place it on either a sheet layer or design layer. Section viewports on sheet
layers can have annotations and automatic drawing coordination of the sheet and drawing numbers; also, if there are
multiple viewports on a sheet layer, each can a have different view and scale.
If you need to draw a detailed section, or to reference the section viewport into other files, create the viewport on
a design layer instead. (See Creating a Section Viewport on a Design Layer on page 747.)
Create a section view from a design layer, from a clip cube, or from a viewport on a sheet layer. A section viewport that
was created from a design layer or clip cube can be updated when changes are made to the design layer. However, a
section viewport that was created from a viewport does not maintain a connection to the viewport that created it. It
updates when the design layers that are visible in the source viewport change.
To create a section viewport on a sheet layer:
1. Prepare to create the viewport as follows:
To create a section view from an active design layer, set the layer to Top/Plan view by selecting View >
Standard Views > Top/Plan.
To create a section view from an existing viewport, select a non-sectioned viewport object. The viewport
object must be in Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back view orientation.
To create a section view from an existing clip cube object, use the Selection tool to highlight the vertical face
of the clip cube where the section will begin. (See Viewing a Model with the Clip Cube on page 564 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.) Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) to open the
context menu.
2. Select View > Create Section Viewport (for a design layer or viewport), or select Create Section Viewport from
the context menu (for a clip cube).
3. Draw the section line to create the cutting plane on the design layer or viewport. For a clip cube, skip to step 4; the
section line is created automatically from the clip cube face that was used to create the section viewport.
Click in the drawing and drag the mouse to begin drawing the marker line. Click to mark the end of the line, and
then click to indicate the side of the line to look toward (keep), which is indicated by a black arrow. Double-click
to end the line.
742 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

To create a broken section line, click in the drawing and draw the first segment. Indicate which side of the drawing
to show in the viewport. Click and drag to draw additional segments; broken section line segments are always
parallel or perpendicular to each other. Double-click to end the broken line.

4. The Create Section Viewport dialog box opens, set to the parameters of the active design layer or non-section
viewport.

Parameter Description
Name Viewport as Dwg Select this option to automatically set the Viewport Name to be a combination of the
No./Sheet No. Drawing Number and the Sheet Number assigned to this viewport.
Deselect this option to enter a custom Viewport Name.
 Creating Section Views | 743

Parameter Description
Viewport Name If Name Viewport as Dwg No./Sheet No. is not selected, enter a descriptive name for
the viewport; this name must be unique in the document
Create on Layer Select the sheet layer where the viewport will be created, or select New Sheet Layer to
create a sheet layer. If there are no sheet layers present and a new one is not created now,
you will be prompted to create a sheet layer after clicking OK.
Create Drawing Label Select this option to create a drawing label in the annotation space of the section
viewport
Drawing Number The next sequential drawing number available on the selected Sheet Layer defaults
automatically. This number displays on the section marker associated with this viewport,
as well as on any drawing label in the viewports annotations. This number must be
unique on this sheet layer.
Drawing Title Specifies a descriptive title for the section viewport. This name displays as the drawing
title for any annotation objects (drawing labels, section markers, and sheet borders) that
are added to the viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63 characters.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is selected in document preferences, a change
to this field for the viewport automatically changes the field for the viewports drawing
label, and vice versa.
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport
Display Objects beyond When selected, shows objects beyond the section plane; visible planar objects are
Section Plane sectioned if positioned at the section line
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects; visible planar objects are sectioned if positioned at
the section line
Display Flattened This option is available for viewports on design layers only
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport
Scale Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale, or choose Custom and
enter a Custom Scale value
Custom Scale When a custom Scale is selected, enter the scale value
Rendering Specifies the render mode for the viewport.
After the viewport is created, foreground rendering can be added for a composite
rendering effect; see Properties of Sheet Layer Section Viewports on page 744.
Render Settings Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click this button to specify the
parameters. In the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide, see the following:
OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660
Custom Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Custom Renderworks
Options on page 673
Artistic Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Artistic Renderworks
Options on page 675
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 664
744 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
RW Background Select a Renderworks background from either the default content or the current files
(Renderworks required) content to use as a background for the viewport; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Projection Select the projection type for the viewport (see Projection on page 551 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Perspective Type For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and specify
the perspective distance
Perspective Dist For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance
Advanced Section Specifies advanced section viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of the
Properties section view; see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 750
Section Line Settings Specifies the graphic attributes of the section line object; see Section Lines and
Section-Elevation Markers on page 755

5. Click OK. A section line object is created in the design layer, or is added to the annotations of the existing
non-sectioned viewport. A section viewport is created on the selected sheet layer, and the drawing switches to that
sheet layer, displaying the new section viewport.

By default, the cross-section areas (along the plane where the section was cut) are displayed in red.

Editing a Design Layer in a Sheet Layer Section Viewport

Once a section viewport has been created, you can edit a design layer that is displayed in the viewport.
1. Select the viewport, and then select Modify > Edit Viewport.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport, and select Edit from the context
menu.
2. From the Edit Viewport dialog box, select the design layer to edit and the editing options you want, and click OK.
See Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a Sheet Layer Viewport on page 743 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.

Properties of Sheet Layer Section Viewports

Edit the section viewport in the Object Info palette, or select Properties from the viewports context menu to open the
Properties dialog box.
The properties for section viewports on design layers are different; see Properties of Design Layer Section
Viewports on page 749.
 Creating Section Views | 745

Parameter Description
Rotation Sets the viewport rotation; if the viewport was created from a rotated plan view, this
parameter can be used to reset the viewport to the world coordinate system
Crop Indicates whether the selected section viewport has been cropped; see Cropping Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 746 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Crop Visible If the viewport has been cropped, select to display the crop object
Update Click to update the section viewport to reflect any changes which have occurred since
the viewport was created or last updated; see Status of Section Viewports and Section
Lines on page 754
Drawing Title Enter a title for the section viewport. This name displays as the drawing title for any
annotation objects (drawing labels, section markers, and sheet borders) that are added
to the viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63 characters.
Drawing Number The next sequential drawing number available on the selected Sheet Layer defaults
automatically. This number displays on the section marker associated with this
viewport, as well as on any drawing label in the viewports annotations. This number
must be unique on this sheet layer.
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of
the layer properties in the viewport; see Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 751 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Display Objects Beyond Shows or hides objects beyond the view plane
View Plane
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects; visible planar objects are sectioned if positioned at
the section line
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of the
class properties in the viewport, including changes to the properties for crop and
annotation objects. Class visibilities can be overridden for a selected viewport; see
Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 751 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Scale Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale, or choose Custom and
enter a Custom Scale value
Custom Scale 1: When a custom Scale is selected, enter the scale value
Background / Foreground Specifies the render mode(s) for the viewport. Select a background mode and specify
Render the render settings, if any. For a composite effect, also select an optional foreground
mode and specify any settings needed (Hidden Line and Dashed Hidden Line are the
only render modes available for foreground rendering).
746 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Background / Foreground Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click the appropriate Render
Render Settings Settings button to specify them. In the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide, see
the following:
OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660
Custom Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Custom Renderworks
Options on page 673
Artistic Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Artistic Renderworks
Options on page 675
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 664
RW Background Select a Renderworks background from either the default content or the current files
(Renderworks required) content to use as a background for the viewport; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
If the Renderworks Background choices are not available, the background
selection is controlled by the Renderworks style in effect. Set the background in
the Renderworks style instead; see Renderworks Styles on page 669 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Projection Select the projection type for the viewport (see Projection on page 551 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
Perspective Type For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and
specify the perspective distance
Perspective Dist For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance
Lighting Options Click to change the ambient light parameters described in Setting Lighting Options
on page 641 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
By default, a section viewports ambient light is set according to the ambient light
settings of the first visible design layer in the section viewport. If there are no visible
layers, then the ambient light is set to on, with a color of white and a brightness of 35%
(similar to the default ambient lighting for a design layer).
If the lighting options are controlled by a Renderworks style that is currently in
effect (Renderworks required), the Edit Renderworks Style dialog box opens
instead; see Renderworks Styles on page 669 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
Advanced Properties Specifies advanced section viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of
the section view; see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 750
Reverse Direction Switches to view the other side of the section line
Section Line Instances Lists the section line instances present in sheet layer viewports or design layers (see
Section Line Instances on page 759)

Once it is created, you may need to add or remove items that display in the section view. To do so, first use the
Convert to Lines, Convert to Polygons, or Convert to Group command to convert the viewport to another
form. (This conversion results in a group of lines and other primitives; it is no longer a viewport and cant be
updated to reflect drawing changes.) The conversion will produce different results, depending on which command
is used and on how the viewport is rendered at the time of the conversion.
 Creating Section Views | 747

Creating a Section Viewport on a Design Layer

When you create a section viewport, you can place it on either a sheet layer or design layer. Section viewports on
design layers are useful when a detailed section is needed, or when the section viewport needs to be referenced into
other files.
If you want to use annotations and automatic drawing coordination of the sheet and drawing numbers, or if you
need multiple viewports on a sheet layer with different views and scales, create the viewport on a sheet layer
instead. (See Creating a Section Viewport on a Sheet Layer on page 741.)
Create a section view either from a design layer, from a clip cube, or from a viewport on a sheet layer. A section
viewport that was created from a design layer or clip cube can be updated when changes are made to the design layer.
However, a section viewport that was created from a viewport does not maintain a connection to the viewport that
created it. It updates when the design layers that are visible in the source viewport change.
To create a section viewport on a design layer:
1. Prepare to create the viewport as follows:
To create a section view from an active design layer, set the layer to Top/Plan view by selecting View >
Standard Views > Top/Plan.
To create a section view from an existing viewport, select a non-sectioned viewport object. The viewport
object must be in Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back view orientation.
To create a section view from an existing clip cube object, use the Selection tool to highlight the vertical face
of the clip cube where the section will begin. (See Viewing a Model with the Clip Cube on page 564 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.) Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) to open the
context menu.
2. Select View > Create Section Viewport (for a design layer or viewport), or select Create Section Viewport from
the context menu (for a clip cube).
3. Draw the section line to create the cutting plane on the design layer or viewport. For a clip cube, skip to step 4; the
section line is created automatically from the clip cube face that was used to create the section viewport.
Click in the drawing and drag the mouse to begin drawing the marker line. Click to mark the end of the line, and
then click to indicate the side of the line to look toward (keep), which is indicated by a black arrow. Double-click
to end the line.
To create a broken section line, click in the drawing and draw the first segment. Indicate which side of the drawing
to show in the viewport. Click and drag to draw additional segments; broken section line segments are always
parallel or perpendicular to each other. Double-click to end the broken line.
4. The Create Section Viewport dialog box opens. After you select the design layer on which to create the viewport,
several parameters that apply only to section viewports on sheet layers become unavailable; they are not included
in the following table.
The scale of a design layer section viewport is the same as the layer where it is placed. The rendering mode of the
current layer is also used to render the design layer section viewport.
748 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Viewport Name If Name Viewport as Dwg No./Sheet No. is not selected, enter a descriptive name
for the viewport; this name must be unique in the document
Create on Layer Select the design layer where the viewport will be created, or select New Design
Layer to create a design layer. If there are no design layers present and a new one is
not created now, you will be prompted to create a design layer after clicking OK.
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport
Display Objects beyond When selected, shows objects beyond the section plane, on the indicated side of the
Section Plane section; deselect to show only the objects that intersect the section line
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects; visible planar objects are sectioned if positioned
at the section line
Display Flattened This option becomes available after you select a design layer in the Create on Layer
field. When selected, the viewport always displays a flattened section view, similar
to a section viewport on a sheet layer; deselect this option to have the viewport
display the current view selected for the design layer.
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport
Advanced Section Properties Specifies advanced section viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of
the section view; see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 750
 Creating Section Views | 749

Parameter Description
Section Line Settings Specifies the graphic attributes of the section line object; also sets the default
attributes for the section lines for future section viewports you create (see Section
Lines and Section-Elevation Markers on page 755)

5. Click OK. A section line object is created in the design layer, or is added to the annotations of the existing
non-sectioned viewport. A section viewport is created on the selected design layer, and the drawing switches to
that design layer, displaying the new section viewport.
Initially, the view is set to Top/Plan, but this can be changed, and the section can be displayed in any view (the
Flyover tool can also be used to view the section). Additionally, there is an option to display a flattened version of
the section, which can be used to create section drawings or details.
A design layer section viewport can be cropped, but it does not contain an annotation space.

Editing a Design Layer in a Design Layer Section Viewport

Once a section viewport has been created, you can edit a design layer that is displayed in the viewport.
1. Select the viewport, and then select Modify > Edit Viewport.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport, and select Edit from the context
menu.
2. From the Edit Viewport dialog box, select the design layer to edit and the editing options you want, and click OK.
See Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a Design Layer Viewport on page 732 for details.

Properties of Design Layer Section Viewports

Edit the section viewport in the Object Info palette, or select Properties from the viewports context menu to open the
Properties dialog box.

Parameter Description
Rotation Sets the viewport rotation; if the viewport was created from a rotated plan view, this
parameter can be used to reset the viewport to the world coordinate system
Crop Indicates whether the selected section viewport has been cropped; see Cropping Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 746 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Crop Visible If the viewport has been cropped, select to display the crop object
Update Click to update the section viewport to reflect any changes that have occurred since the
viewport was created or last updated; see Status of Section Viewports and Section Lines
on page 754
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of
the layer properties in the viewport; see Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 751 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Display Objects Shows or hides objects beyond the view plane
Beyond View Plane
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects; visible planar objects are sectioned if positioned at the
section line
Display Flattened When selected, the viewport always displays a flattened section view, similar to a
section viewport on a sheet layer; deselect this option to have the viewport display the
current view selected for the design layer.
750 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of the class
properties in the viewport, including changes to the properties for crop and annotation
objects. Class visibilities can be overridden for a selected viewport; see Changing the
Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 751 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
Advanced Properties Specifies advanced section viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of the
section view; see Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 750.
Reverse Direction Switches to view the other side of the section line
Section Line Instances Lists the section line instances present in sheet layer viewports or design layers (see
Section Line Instances on page 759)

Once it is created, you may need to add or remove items that display in the section view. To do so, first use the
Convert to Lines, Convert to Polygons, or Convert to Group command to convert the viewport to another
form. (This conversion results in a group of lines and other primitives; it is no longer a viewport and cant be
updated to reflect drawing changes.) The conversion will produce different results, depending on which command
is used and on how the viewport is rendered at the time of the conversion.

Advanced Section Viewport Properties

Advanced properties define the extent and attributes of the sheet layer or design layer section viewport. Specify them
when the viewport is created, or after the viewport has been created; edit the properties from either the Object Info
palette or the Properties dialog box.
To specify the advanced properties of a section viewport:
1. From the Create Section Viewport dialog box, click Advanced Section Properties.
Alternatively, select the viewport, and then from the Object Info palette or the Properties dialog box, click
Advanced Properties.
The Advanced Section Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Extent tab to specify either an infinite section view, or the length, depth, and height of a finite section
viewport.
Finite sections are useful when you want to create interior elevations. For example, draw a section line across a
particular room of a building, and set the layer visibility only for the rooms floor to create an interior elevation of
only that room. For an even more precise interior elevation, use a clip cube to create the section viewport; the
extents are automatically set according to the clip cubes shape.
 Creating Section Views | 751

Parameter Description
Length Range Specifies the length range of the section viewport
Infinite Cuts the section by an infinite plane
Limited by Section Limits the section only to the length defined by the section line
Line Length
Depth Range Specifies the depth range of the section viewport
Infinite All objects on the indicated side of the section line are displayed
Finite Displays objects on the indicated side of the section line up to a specified depth (the
depth can be indicated graphically by dragging a dotted line on the design layer; see
Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 760)
Height Range Specifies the height range of the section viewport
Infinite Does not limit the section to a Z range
Finite Limits the display of the section viewport to a range defined by the Start and End
Height Z values

3. Click the Attributes tab to specify the appearance of objects on and beyond the section plane. Objects on the
section plane can maintain an individual profile, or can be divided into structural and non-structural groups to
display them differently according to class settings.
752 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Section Plane Objects on the section plane can be merged into a single profile, maintain individual
profiles, or be divided into groups of structural and non-structural elements (useful for
displaying cabinets and walls differently, for example)
Merged Cross Sections Merges the sectioned objects cross-section profiles into one profile
Create Structural and Merges the structural objects cross-section profiles into one group, and the
Nonstructural Groups non-structural objects cross section profile into another, allowing them to have a
different class setting
Separate Cross Sections Generates a separate cross-section for each sectioned object
Use Attributes of Each sectioned object is displayed with the attributes of its original object
Original Objects
Attribute Class / Specifies the line and fill class for the section profiles; by default, the Section Style class
Structural Class is applied to the cross sections, or you can select New to create a new class. If Create
Structural and Nonstructural Groups is selected, the class selected here applies only
to structural elements.
Nonstructural Class When Create Structural and Nonstructural Groups is selected, specifies the line and
fill class for non-structural elements, or you can select New to create a new class
Objects Beyond Specifies the fill and line style for objects beyond the section plane (for section
Section Plane viewports that display objects beyond the section plane)
Fill
Use Original Uses the fill style of the original objects for objects beyond the section plane
 Creating Section Views | 753

Parameter Description
Use Class Sets the fill style of the objects beyond the section plane by class. Select a class or select
New to create a new class.
Line Style Changes section viewport settings for line thickness and line type
Use Original Uses the line thickness and line type of the original objects for the objects beyond the
section plane
Use Class Sets the line thickness and line type of the objects beyond the section plane by class.
Select a class or select New to create a new class.
Scale Factors Changes section viewport display scale settings for lines and line styles
Line Weight Scale Enter a number larger than 1.0 to make the section line weight thicker. Enter a number
below 1.0 to make the line weight thinner. The scale value must be above zero.
Line Type Scale A line type could be used for a section viewport if the section is in a class with a line
type (in the Attribute Class/Structural Class parameter) or the objects beyond the
section plane have been set to a class with a line type (in the Use Class parameter). Enter
a number larger than 1.0 to make the line weight of the line type sections thicker. Enter a
number below 1.0 to make them thinner. The scale value must be above zero.

4. Click the Display tab to specify the section viewport display properties.
754 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Cast Shadows of Objects When rendering, includes shadows cast by objects that are not included in the
Removed by Section section viewport, for a more realistic effect (especially for interior elevations)
This parameter is not available for design layer section viewports.
Show Wall and Slab Displays the wall and slab components in 3D, regardless of the document
Components preferences detail display setting (see Display Preferences on page 18 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide), or component class visibility settings.
The top and bottom wall lines of components do not display in section viewports,
so that stacked walls display without a line break.
Merge Adjacent If adjacent wall and/or slab components have the same fill, merges the fills so that
Components with Same Fill they display as a single unit
Black and White Only Changes all colors in the section viewport to black or white; this is useful for
displaying two section viewport copies on the same sheet layer, with one in color
and the other in black and white. However, if the document preferences display
setting is black and white, viewports will also display as black and white.
Adjust Flipped Text Re-orients rotated and flipped text in the viewport so that it is always readable
(regardless of the flipped text Vectorworks preference; see Display Preferences
on page 30 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide)
3D Conversion Resolution Sets the segmentation resolution for curved surfaces in a live section, regardless of
the Vectorworks preferences resolution setting (see 3D Preferences on page 23
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide). Changing the resolution of an
existing section viewport causes the viewport to become out of date; the higher
resolution settings require longer update times.

5. Click OK.

Status of Section Viewports and Section Lines

The status of a section viewport or a section line is indicated visually.

Status Description
Normal A normal, up-to-date section viewport displays with orange highlighting when selected
 Creating Section Views | 755

Status Description
Out of date When the objects in a viewport have changed since the viewport was created or last updated, the
viewport becomes out of date. An out-of-date viewport is indicated by red text on the Update
button on the viewports Object Info palette. Optionally, an out-of-date viewport also displays with
a red and white striped border around the viewport (see Display Preferences on page 30 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Empty A section viewport is displayed as a red X when the referenced design layer contains no objects
or the objects are hidden, or when the referenced design layer is set to invisible

Unlinked An unlinked section line (disconnected from its associated section viewport, possibly because the
section line was pasted from a copy, duplicated, or mirrored) displays as a black and yellow line,
and Not Linked is displayed in the Object Info palette

Section Lines and Section-Elevation Markers

Section lines and section-elevation markers look very similar on a drawing, but they are created differently.
A section line is automatically created when a section viewport is created. The section line graphically indicates the
cutting plane of the section viewport and shows the orientation of the section view. Specify the graphic properties of the
section line (such as the marker style), when you create the section viewport. To access a section line from its section
viewport, click Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette (see Section Line Instances on page 759).
A section line that has been pasted from a copy, duplicated, or mirrored from a section line that was associated
with a section viewport becomes an unlinked section line. It displays with black and yellow stripes and the
Section Viewport field in the Object Info palette displays Not Linked.
A section-elevation marker is graphically similar to a section line, but it is not linked to any viewport. Use the
Section-Elevation Marker tool from the Dims/Notes tool set to insert a marker, as a reference line graphic for sections
756 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

and elevations, or as a cutting plane graphic. Select the Preferences option from the Tool bar to specify the graphic
properties of the object before you create it.
After creation, edit both section lines and section-elevation markers as follows:
Use the Object Info palette to edit the graphic properties (such as the marker style).
Use the Attributes palette to apply attributes (such as the fill or pen color).
Use options on the Text menu to control the text appearance (such as the font or size).
Use the Selection or Reshape tool to edit the objects (see Modifying Section Lines Graphically on page 760).

Creating Section-Elevation Markers

To insert a section-elevation marker:

1. Select the Section-Elevation Marker tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Select the Preferences option from the Tool bar, and set the default parameters for section-elevation markers.
3. Click to place one end of the section-elevation marker.
4. To insert a single-segment marker, drag to determine the marker length.
To insert a multi-segment marker, click to define each segment. Because a multi-segment marker is a polyline, the
methods of drawing and editing polylines apply (see Creating Polylines on page 226 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide).
5. Double-click to finish placing the section-elevation marker.

Properties of Section Lines and Section-Elevation Markers

The following parameters display on the Object Info palette for existing section lines and section-elevation markers.
Many of these parameters also display on the Section Line Settings dialog box, which you can access when you create
a section viewport.

Parameter Description
Section Viewport Displays the name of the viewport associated with the section line; a section
(Section Lines only) line that is not associated with a viewport is labeled Not Linked

Reverse Direction Reverses the side to display when objects beyond the section plane are visible
(Section Lines only)
Navigate to Section Viewport Navigates to the section viewport associated with the section line
(Section Lines only)
Rotation Sets the marker rotation; if the marker was created from a rotated plan view,
(Section-Elevation Markers only) this parameter can be used to reset the marker to the world coordinate system
 Creating Section Views | 757

Parameter Description
Configuration Select the section line configuration
Section: draws a section marker at both ends of a straight or broken section
line
Partial Section: draws a section marker at the beginning of a straight or
broken section line
Elevation: draws a section marker along a straight section line at a control
point, which can be dragged to a new location

Section Partial Section

Text control point

Elevation Marker control point

Flip Reverses the direction of the marker

(Section-Elevation Markers only)
Set Marker Style(s) Opens the Set Marker Style dialog box, to select the section marker type at
(for Section-Elevation Markers) each end of the section line; markers can be the same (Match Beginning) or
or different (Differentiate) at each end of the section line. Select from either the
default content or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 in the
Section Marker Style(s) Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
(for Section Lines)

Marker Size Specifies the size of the section marker(s), measured from the markers
insertion point to the top of its longest point. Changes to the marker size do not
affect the text size.
Use Gapped Line Displays the section line with a gapped line
(Section and Partial Section
configurations only)
Gap Line Length If Use Gapped Line is selected, specifies the length of the solid section line at
each end of the section line
Text Auto-Rotate When selected, the marker text always displays in the same orientation; when
deselected, the text is rotated according to the Text Rotation value

Text Both Ends Displays text at the end of the marker, as well as the beginning
(Section configuration only)
758 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Text Style Specifies the display style for the Drawing Number and Sheet Number text;
if Dwg. No.-Sheet No. or Sheet No.-Dwg. No. is selected, specify a Text
Separator to place between the text items
Text Rotation When Text Auto-Rotate is not selected, specifies the rotation of the marker
text
Text Sheet % Specifies the scale value for the Sheet Number portion of the marker text.
Enter a number larger than 100 to make the text larger. Enter a number below
100 to make it smaller. The scale value must be larger than 1.
Text Separator For the Dwg. No.-Sheet No. and Sheet No.-Dwg. No. text styles, specifies the
separator to place between the Drawing Number and Sheet Number text
Text Auto-Fill For section line objects associated with a section viewport, automatically
(Section Lines only) displays the Drawing Number of the referenced section viewport, and the
viewports Sheet Number. Deselect this option to enter the Drawing Number
and Sheet Number manually.
Drawing Number Enter the Drawing Number of the referenced section viewport; this value
defaults for section lines when Text Auto-Fill is selected
Sheet Number Enter the Sheet Number of the referenced section viewport; this value defaults
for section lines when Text Auto-Fill is selected

Modifying Section Viewports and Section Lines

Section viewports can be modified, cropped, annotated, and updated, the same as regular sheet layer viewports. See
Modifying Sheet Layer Viewports on page 742 and Updating Sheet Layer Viewports on page 753 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
The appearance of a section viewport can be completely customized, from the items it displays to the attributes of those
items. Copies of a section viewport on a sheet layer can look completely different. Changes to a section viewports
appearance can be made by several methods; after changes are made, update the section viewport by clicking Update
in the Object Info palette.

Modification Method Description

Change the section view Click Advanced Properties from the Object Advanced Section Viewport
Info palette of a selected section viewport, and Properties on page 750
modify the section view from the Extent tab
Change the view attributes Click Advanced Properties from the Object Advanced Section Viewport
Info palette of a selected section viewport, and Properties on page 750
modify the attributes of the view from the
Attributes tab
Change the view direction Click Reverse Direction from the Object Info Properties of Sheet Layer
of the section line palette of a selected section viewport Section Viewports on page 744,
or Properties of Design Layer
Section Viewports on page 749
 Creating Section Views | 759

Modification Method Description

Change the cross section The cross section appearance is set by the Setting Class Properties on
appearance for sectioned Section Style class. Edit the class to change the page 109 in the Vectorworks
items appearance of sectioned items. If the Section Fundamentals Users Guide
Style class is made invisible, the cross sections
are not displayed.
Override the layer settings Click Layers from the Object Info palette of a Changing the Layer Properties
from the design layer selected section viewport, and override the layer of Sheet Layer Viewports on
properties. page 749 in the Vectorworks
Unlike a regular sheet layer viewport, the Fundamentals Users Guide
design layer stacking order in the section
viewport cannot be changed.
Override the class settings Click Classes from the Object Info palette of a Changing the Class Properties of
from the design layer selected section viewport, and override the class Sheet Layer Viewports on
properties of by class objects page 751 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide
Change the location of the Change the location of the section line with the Modifying Section Lines
section line Selection tool, and update the section viewport Graphically on page 760
Create section viewports Select the unlinked section lines and then select Creating Section Viewports from
from unlinked section lines the Create Section Viewport command to Unlinked Section Lines on
create section viewports from the section lines page 761
Add additional section line Click Section Line Instances from the Object Section Line Instances on
instances to design layers or Info palette of a selected section viewport, and page 759
viewports specify the design layers or viewports where
section line instances should display
Change the section line Change the section line with the Selection tool Modifying Section Lines
length, position, or type or the Reshape tool, and update the section Graphically on page 760
viewport
Change the depth of a finite The depth can be changed graphically or by Modifying Section Lines
section modifying the Depth Range in the Advanced Graphically on page 760, or
Properties of the section viewport Advanced Section Viewport
Properties on page 750

Section Line Instances

Section line instances associated with a section view can be added to or deleted from design layers or viewport
annotations. In addition, the Section Line Instances dialog box provides an easy way to navigate from a section
viewport to its associated section lines.
To edit section line instances or navigate to a section line:
1. Select the section viewport whose section line you want to navigate to or edit.
2. Click Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette.
The Section Line Instances dialog box opens.
760 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Viewport Displays the name of the selected section viewport
Design Layers tab/ Displays the names of all design layers or viewports in the file; each design layer or viewport
Viewports tab that has a section line associated with the selected section viewport has a check mark to the
left of its name
Activate When a design layer or viewport with a check mark is selected, navigates to the section line
instance

3. To add another instance of the section line to a different design layer or to the annotation for a different viewport,
click in the column next to that design layer or viewport, and then click OK. Or, to remove a section line instance
from a layer or viewport, click the checked column (which removes the check mark), and then click OK.
Deleting all section line instances does not delete the section viewport, and new instances can be created at any
time. However, deleting a section viewport deletes all section line instances.
4. The section line instances can also be used as a navigation tool to access a particular section line. Select the
section line and click Activate to switch to the design layer or viewport; the section line is selected for any
modifications.
To return from a section line instance to the associated section viewport, click Navigate to Section Viewport from
the Object Info palette of a selected section line.

Modifying Section Lines Graphically

In addition to modifying section line parameters as described in Section Lines and Section-Elevation Markers on
page 755, the section line can be modified by changing its location, length, or shape.
 Creating Section Views | 761

To modify a section line:

1. Navigate to the section line by clicking Section Line Instances from the Object Info palette of a selected section
viewport.
2. The section line is automatically selected for modification.
Move the section line to a new location with the Selection tool
Shorten, lengthen, or rotate the line by dragging an end point with the Selection tool
Add vertices and change a straight section line to a broken section line with the Reshape tool
Reshape the section line with the Reshape tool

Changing the length Adding vertices Adjusting the position of vertices

3. A section view with a finite depth has a special control point on a dashed line. To adjust the depth, drag the control
point with the Selection tool.

4. Return to the section viewport by clicking Activate Section Viewport from the Object Info palette. Click Update
from the Object Info palette to reflect the section line changes in the section view.

Creating Section Viewports from Unlinked Section Lines

An unlinked (orphan) section line is disconnected from its associated section viewport, possibly because the section
line was pasted from a copy, duplicated, or mirrored. It displays as a black and yellow line, and Not Linked is
displayed in Section Viewport on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette.
Section viewports can be created from unlinked section lines located on a design layer, sheet layer, or while in edit
annotation mode.
To create a section viewport from an unlinked section line:
1. Select the unlinked section lines. If on a sheet layer, include the viewport to be sectioned in the selection set.
762 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Each selected section line creates a new section viewport.

2. Select View > Create Section Viewport.
The Create Section Viewport dialog box opens (see Creating Section Views on page 740). If multiple unlinked
section lines were selected, the parameters specified apply to all section viewports created.
3. Click OK to create a section viewport for each selected section line.

Creating and Sectioning Elevation Views

Section viewports are useful for creating images that show multiple design layers from a certain point of view.
For example, to show an exterior elevation of a building model, draw a section line outside of the model on one of the
design layers and make all of the necessary layers visible in the section viewport. To show an interior view of the same
model, do the same thing, but draw the section line through the model at the appropriate location.
Or, if you already have a (non-sectioned) sheet layer viewport that shows multiple design layers in an elevation view,
you can draw the section line through the viewport at the appropriate location.

In Top/Plan view on one of the design layers, draw a Make all of the design layers visible in the section
section line looking toward the model viewport to create an exterior elevation view

On a viewport that shows an elevation view, draw a section line to create an interior elevation view

Creating Detail Viewports

The Create Detail Viewport command creates a cropped sheet layer viewport that shows a detail view of any part of a
drawing, including design layers, other sheet layer viewports, and section viewports.
The crop object used to create the detail viewport becomes a callout object that is linked to the detail viewport for easy
navigation between layers. If the detail callout object is moved or reshaped, the detail viewport is updated accordingly.
Additionally, the detail callout is automatically labeled with the drawing number and sheet number of the detail
viewport. If the detail viewport is renumbered or moved to another layer, the callout marker is updated automatically.
To create a detail viewport:
1. Create a crop object on a design layer (in Top/Plan view), on a sheet layer viewport (sectioned or not), or inside a
viewport annotation group.
 Creating Detail Viewports | 763

2. Select the crop object and then select View > Create Detail Viewport.
The Create Detail Viewport dialog box opens. Different options are available, depending on where the viewport is
being created (design layer, viewport, or section viewport).

Detail viewport created from a Detail viewport created from a

design layer section viewport

Parameter Description
Name Viewport as Select this option to automatically set the Viewport Name to be a combination of the
Dwg No./Sheet No. Drawing Number and the sheet layer name.
Deselect this option to enter a custom Viewport Name.
Viewport Name If Name Viewport as Dwg No./Sheet No. is not selected, enter a descriptive name for the
viewport. This name displays for the viewport on the Navigation palette and Organization
dialog box. The name must be unique in the document.
Create on Layer Select the sheet layer where the viewport will be created, or select New Sheet Layer to
create a sheet layer. If there are no sheet layers present and a new one is not created now,
you will be prompted to create a sheet layer after clicking OK.
Create Drawing Label Select this option to create a drawing label in the annotation space of the detail viewport
Drawing Number The next sequential drawing number available on the selected sheet layer defaults
automatically. This number displays on the drawing label associated with this viewport,
as well as on the detail callout. The number must be unique on this sheet layer.
Drawing Title Specifies a descriptive title for the viewport; this name displays on the drawing label
associated with this viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63 characters.
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects
764 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Project Screen Objects Available if the detail viewport is being created from a design layer or a non-section
viewport; when selected, displays 2D objects associated with the screen plane
Display Objects Available if the detail viewport is being created from a section viewport; when selected,
Beyond Section Plane shows objects beyond the section plane
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport
Scale Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale, or choose Custom and
enter a Custom Scale value
Custom Scale 1: When a custom Scale is selected, enter the scale value
Rendering Available if the detail viewport is being created from a viewport; specifies the render
mode for the detail viewport
Render Settings Available if the detail viewport is being created from a viewport. Certain render modes
require parameters to be set; click the Render Settings button to specify them. In the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide, see the following:
OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660
Custom Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Custom Renderworks
Options on page 673
Artistic Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Artistic Renderworks
Options on page 675
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 664
RW Background Available if the detail viewport is being created from a viewport and one of the
(Renderworks Renderworks Rendering modes is selected. Select a Renderworks background from
required) either the default content or the current files content to use as a background for the
viewport; see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Detail Callout Settings Opens a dialog box to set options for the detail callout object; see Properties of Detail
Callouts on page 768

3. Click OK to close the Create Detail Viewport dialog box. The specified sheet layer is activated, and the detail
viewport is placed in the center of the sheet.
Additionally, the original crop object is converted into a detail callout object. If the detail viewport was created
from a design layer, the detail callout is created on the design layer. If the detail viewport was created from a
viewport, the detail callout is created in the annotation space of that viewport. The callout includes the drawing
number and sheet number of the detail viewport associated with it.
 Creating Detail Viewports | 765

Draw a crop object over a portion of

the viewport and select View >
Create Detail Viewport

A detail callout object is created in the A detail viewport is created on the specified
original viewports annotations sheet layer; the detail viewport and detail callout
are linked

4. To delete a detail viewport and its associated callout, delete the viewport.

Properties of Detail Viewports

Once it has been created, edit the detail viewport in the Object Info palette, or select Properties from the viewports
context menu to open the Properties dialog box.

Parameter Description
Rotation Sets the viewport rotation; if the viewport was created from a rotated plan view, this
parameter can be used to reset the viewport to the world coordinate system
Crop Indicates that the detail viewport has been cropped
Crop Visible Select to display the crop object
Update Click to update the detail viewport to reflect any changes that have occurred since the
viewport was created or last updated
Activate Detail Callout Accesses the detail callout object associated with this detail viewport:
If the detail viewport was created from a design layer, activates that design layer and
centers the detail callout object in the screen
If the detail viewport was created from a viewport, activates that sheet layer and
enters annotation editing mode for the viewport
Drawing Title Enter a title for the detail viewport; this name displays on the drawing label associated
with this viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63 characters.
766 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Parameter Description
Drawing Number The next sequential drawing number available on the selected sheet layer defaults
automatically. This number displays on the drawing label associated with this viewport,
as well as on the detail callout. The number must be unique on this sheet layer.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is selected in document preferences, a
change to this field for the viewport automatically changes the field for the viewports
drawing label, and vice versa. Additionally, if Text Auto-Fill is selected for the detail
callout, a change to this field for the viewport automatically changes the field for the
detail callout.
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of
the layer properties in the viewport; see Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 751 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects
Project Screen Objects Available if the detail viewport was created from a design layer or a non-section
viewport; when selected, displays 2D objects associated with the screen plane
Display Objects Beyond Available if the detail viewport was created from a section viewport; when selected,
View Plane shows objects beyond the section plane
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of the
class properties in the viewport, including changes to the properties for crop and
annotation objects. Class visibilities can be overridden for a selected viewport; see
Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 751 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Scale Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale, or choose Custom and
enter a Custom Scale value
Custom Scale 1: When a custom Scale is selected, enter the scale value
Background / If the detail viewport was created from a viewport, select a Background Render mode.
Foreground Render If the detail viewport was created from a design layer, the background render mode is
Wireframe and cannot be changed.
For a composite effect, also select a Foreground Render mode and specify any settings
needed (Wireframe, Sketch, Hidden Line, and Dashed Hidden Line are the only render
modes available for foreground rendering).
Background / Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click the appropriate Render
Foreground Render Settings button to specify them. In the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide, see the
Settings following:
Wireframe mode settings: Wireframe Options on page 662
OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660
Custom Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Custom Renderworks
Options on page 673
Artistic Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Artistic Renderworks
Options on page 675
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 664
 Creating Detail Viewports | 767

Parameter Description
RW Background Available if the detail viewport was created from a viewport and one of the
(Renderworks required) Renderworks Rendering modes is selected. Select a Renderworks background from
either the default content or the current files content to use as a background; see
Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Lighting Options Click to change the ambient light parameters described in Setting Lighting Options on
page 641 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
By default, a viewports ambient light is set according to the ambient light settings of the
first visible design layer in the section viewport. If there are no visible layers, then the
ambient light is set to on, with a color of white and a brightness of 35% (similar to the
default ambient lighting for a design layer).
Advanced Properties If the detail viewport was created from a design layer or a non-section viewport,
specifies advanced viewport parameters defining scaling and other display options; see
Advanced Sheet Layer Viewport Properties on page 740 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
If the detail viewport was created from a section viewport, specifies advanced section
viewport parameters defining the extent and attributes of the section view; see
Advanced Section Viewport Properties on page 750.

Editing Detail Viewport Drawing Labels

After creation, the detail viewport drawing label may be edited, either to change its appearance, or to change the
information that it displays. Edit the drawing label from within the detail viewports annotation space.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is selected in document preferences, a change to the Drawing
Number field for the detail viewport automatically changes the field for the viewports drawing label, and vice
versa. Additionally, if Text Auto-Fill is selected for the detail callout, a change to the Drawing Number field for
the viewport automatically changes the field for the detail callout.
There are several ways to change the appearance of a detail viewport drawing label.
Use the Attributes palette to change the labels line color or thickness
Use the Object Info palette to change the object properties
Use the Text menu to change the attributes of the label text (or apply a text style to it)
Use the Selection tool to adjust the label position
To edit a detail viewport drawing label:
1. Select the detail viewport and then select Modify > Edit Viewport. The Edit Viewport dialog box opens.
2. Click Annotations and then click OK to enter Edit Annotation mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Annotations from
the context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Viewport
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Annotation button is visible in the
top right corner of the drawing window.
3. Select the drawing label and edit it as needed. The parameters in the Object Info palette are described in Creating
Drawing Labels on page 376 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. Click Exit Viewport Annotation to exit Edit Annotation mode and return to the sheet layer.
768 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

Editing Detail Callout Objects

After creation, the detail callout may be edited, either to change the appearance of the callout itself, or to change the
view in the detail viewport that is linked to the detail callout. The edit method depends on where the detail callout was
created. If the callout object was created on a design layer, select the callout and edit it directly. If the callout object was
created within a viewports annotation space, select the viewport and edit its annotations (see Editing a Detail Callout
in a Viewport on page 768).
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is selected in document preferences, a change to the Drawing
Number field for the detail viewport automatically changes the field for the viewports drawing label, and vice
versa. Additionally, if Text Auto-Fill is selected for the detail callout, a change to the Drawing Number field for
the viewport automatically changes the field for the detail callout.
There are several ways to change the appearance of a detail callout object.
Use the Attributes palette to change the crop objects line color, thickness, or type
Use the Object Info palette to change the object properties (see Properties of Detail Callouts on page 768)
Use the Text menu to change the attributes of the marker text (or apply a text style to it)
Use the Selection tool to adjust the marker position
You can also adjust the shape or location of the callout object, which will change the contents of the detail viewport
associated with the callout.
Use the Selection tool to move the entire callout
Use the Reshape tool to reshape the callout object

Editing a Detail Callout in a Viewport

If the callout was created from a viewport, the callout object cannot be edited directly because it is in the viewports
annotation space.
To edit a detail callout object in a viewport:
1. Select the original viewport and then select Modify > Edit Viewport. The Edit Viewport dialog box opens.
2. Click Annotations and then click OK to enter Edit Annotation mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Annotations from
the context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Viewport
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Annotation button is visible in the
top right corner of the drawing window.
3. Select the detail callout and edit it as needed. The parameters in the Object Info palette are described in
Properties of Detail Callouts on page 768.
4. Click Exit Viewport Annotation to exit Edit Annotation mode and return to the sheet layer.

Properties of Detail Callouts

The following parameters display for existing detail callouts on the Object Info palette. Many of these parameters also
display on the Detail Callout Settings dialog box, which you can access when you create a detail viewport.

Parameter Description
Detail Viewport Displays the name of the viewport
Navigate to Viewport Accesses the detail viewport associated with this detail callout
 Creating Multiple Viewports Simultaneously | 769

Parameter Description
Detail Callout Opens a dialog box to set options for marker attached to the callout object. Select a Marker
Graphic Options Symbol from the list of those available. The Shoulder Length is the distance from the
shoulder point of the leader line to the center of the marker. Leader Line sets the style and
thickness of the leader line. Tag Position sets the position of the marker relative to the
callout bubble.

Marker Size Specifies the size of the callout marker, measured from the markers insertion point to the
top of its longest point. Changes to the marker size do not affect the text size.
Text Style Specifies the display style for the Drawing Number and Sheet Number text; if Dwg.
No.-Sheet No. or Sheet No.-Dwg. No. is selected, specify a Text Separator to place
between the text items
Text Rotation Specifies the rotation of the marker text
Text Sheet Specifies the scale value for the Sheet Number portion of the marker text. Enter a number
larger than 100 to make the text larger. Enter a number below 100 to make it smaller. The
scale value must be larger than 1.
Text Separator For the Dwg. No.-Sheet No. and Sheet No.-Dwg. No. text styles, specifies the separator to
place between the Drawing Number and Sheet Number text
Text Auto-Fill Automatically displays the Drawing Number of the referenced detail viewport, and the
detail viewports Sheet Number. Deselect this option to enter the Drawing Number and
Sheet Number manually.
Drawing Number Enter the Drawing Number of the referenced detail viewport; this value defaults when Text
Auto-Fill is selected
Sheet Number Enter the Sheet Number of the referenced detail viewport; this value defaults when Text
Auto-Fill is selected

Creating Multiple Viewports Simultaneously

The Create Multiple Viewports command generates 2D drawings from a 3D model and creates up to seven viewports
configured with several orthographic views and one isometric view of the model.
If the command is run while on a sheet layer, the viewports are added to that sheet layer. If the command is run while
on a design layer, the viewports are added to an automatically created sheet layer.
To create multiple viewports simultaneously:
1. Select View > Create Multiple Viewports.
The Create Multiple Viewports dialog box opens.
770 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views

2. Specify the desired viewport scale, views, and angle projection method, and then click OK.

Parameter Description
Viewport Scale Select the viewport scale relative to the page
Method
First Angle Projection Create views using the first angle projection method; by default, the front, top, and
left views are selected when the drawing units are metric

Bottom

Right Front Left Back

Top
Isometric

Third Angle Projection Create views using the third angle projection method; by default, the front, top, and
right views are selected when the drawing units are imperial

Isometric

Top

Left Front Right Back

Bottom
 Creating Multiple Viewports Simultaneously | 771

Parameter Description
Views
Front, Top, Right, Left, Select the view(s) to create in the drawing
Bottom, Back, Isometric

Viewports are created at the designated layer scale, using the current layer and class visibility and print area
settings, with the rendered style set to hidden line rendering. Viewports are aligned horizontally and vertically,
separated by a fixed distance, and centered on the sheet layer.
3. Optionally, configure the viewports layer and class settings (Active, Show, or Gray Others only), annotate the
viewport, or modify the rendering style or other viewport parameters.
For more information, see Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for Viewports and Saved Views on
page 120 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide, Creating Annotations for Sheet Layer Viewports on
page 747 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide, and Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 738
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
772 | Chapter 18: Creating Drawing Views
Importing and Exporting Files 19
Overview of Importing and Exporting
The Vectorworks program is interoperable with, and has the ability to import from and export to, a variety of programs
and file formats. PDF files and image files that are imported into Vectorworks Design Series files can be referenced, so
that they can be kept up to date.
The file formats supported in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product are described in Importing and Exporting Files
on page 761 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Depending on the Vectorworks Design Series products
installed, you can also import and export files in the following formats.
PDF (Portable Document Format, from Adobe Systems Incorporated, creates files viewable with Acrobat Reader
or other PDF viewers)
IFC (Industry Foundation Classes, model data standards to facilitate information sharing in the building industry)
SketchUp (3D model creation, viewing, modification, and presentation software from Google, Inc.). The
Vectorworks program can import .skp files that are version 4.0 and higher.
3ds Max (3D animation, modeling, and rendering software from Autodesk, Inc.). The Vectorworks program can
import and export .3ds files that are version 3.0 and higher.
KML (the markup language used by the Google Earth application; officially named the OpenGIS KML
Encoding Standard (OGC KML) and maintained by the Open Geospatial Consortium, Inc.)
Shapefile (spatial data file type developed by Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc.)
World files (georeferenced raster files exported from ArcGIS from Environmental Systems Research Institute,
Inc.)
gbXML (export of building information for energy analysis by software and services including Green Building
Studio, Autodesk Ecotect Analysis, Bentley Hevacomp and AECOsim, OpenFOAM, CADline Cymap, and many
others)
DOE-2 (Department of Energy analysis engine, to estimate the energy cost implications of design strategies)
ASCII Patch (USITT standard ASCII text patch file (Version 3.0, Ident 3.0))
Lightwright (file exchange from the Vectorworks Spotlight product to the Lightwright 4.0 product)
PartSpec (import from Thomas Register PartSpec files saved in DXF/DWG, IGES, or ACIS format)

Drag and Drop Importing

In the Vectorworks Design Series products, in addition to the import commands on the File menu, a drag and drop
import shortcut is available for most file formats. Click the file to import and drag it into a window where a
Vectorworks document is open.
Drag and drop importing is supported for the following file types:

3DS (.3ds) DXF/DWG (.dxf, .dwg) EPSF (.eps)

IFC (.ifc, .ifczip) IGES (.igs) Image files (various file extensions)
Metafile (.emf, Windows only) Parasolid (.x_t) PDF (.pdf)
PICT (.pct, .pict) SAT (.sat) Shapefile (.shp)
SketchUp (.skp)
774 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

The imported objects will be centered on the drop point, except for the following file types: DXF/DWG, IFC,
Shapefile, and SketchUp.

PDF Interoperability
The Vectorworks program can import and export files that are interoperable with the Portable Document Format (PDF).
An imported PDF is useful for displaying company logos, contractor drawings, and other graphics. PDF export creates
high-quality files for printing, and takes advantage of PDF layers for creating an interactive representation of a model.

Importing PDF Files

The Import PDF command allows a PDF file to be imported into a Vectorworks file, where each PDF page becomes
an independent PDF Page object. Create a reference to the original PDF file, if the original file may change, and you
want to keep the imported pages up to date.
To import a PDF file:
1. Select File > Import > Import PDF.
Alternatively, click the file to import and drag it into a window where a Vectorworks document is open.
2. Select the PDF file to be imported, and click Open.
The Import PDF dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Import Range Specifies which portion of the PDF file to import
Pages Imports the specified range of pages from the PDF file
All Pages Imports all pages in the PDF file
Reference References the original PDF file (master file), so that the imported PDF pages can be
updated when the master file changes. See Workgroup Referencing on page 121 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.
Absolute path Stores the absolute file path of the master file. Select this option when the location of the
master file will not change in the future, or if the master file is on another volume.
Path relative to Stores the file path of the master file relative to the target Vectorworks file; this option is
current document available only if the master file is on the same volume as the Vectorworks file. Select this
option if the target file and the master file may be moved to another volume in the future.
Save referenced Saves copies of the referenced PDF pages in the target Vectorworks file; if deselected, the
cache to disk target file is smaller, and the PDF pages are automatically updated when the target file is
opened
 PDF Interoperability | 775

Parameter Description
Automatically Updates the PDF pages from the master file each time this target file is opened, if the PDF
update reference pages are out of date
during file open

3. Click Import. Each PDF file page becomes a separate referenced PDF page in the Vectorworks file.
The referenced PDF page can be resized, moved, or rotated with the Modify > Rotate > Rotate command or the
Rotate tool, scaled with the Modify > Scale Objects command, printed, and exported.
A referenced PDF file can be opened with the default application associated with this file type. To open a
referenced PDF file, use one of the following methods:
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the referenced PDF page in the drawing area, and then select
Open
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the referenced PDF file in the Navigation palette, and then
select Open
Select the referenced PDF file in the Navigation palette, and then select Open from the Navigation menu

Snapping to Imported PDF Files

Content files from a variety of manufacturers can be imported into a Vectorworks file in PDF format and then, because
the Vectorworks program can snap to the vector graphics within the PDF Page object, the PDF object can be moved
and snapped into a desired position. Lines drawn in the Vectorworks file snap to the 2D items in the PDF object, so the
PDF can be incorporated into your own designs.
The Scale Objects command scales an imported PDF object so it matches the current drawing scale.
Snapping to a PDF file is only possible when the PDF originated from an application that creates vector graphics.
Snapping cannot occur if the PDF file is encrypted.
To use an imported PDF file effectively:
1. Import the PDF file as described in Importing PDF Files on page 774.
A PDF Page object is created. In this example, the PDF object imported at an incorrect scale for the current
drawing.

2. To change the scale of the imported PDF, select Modify > Scale Objects.
The Scale Objects dialog box opens. The Scale Objects command is described in Scaling Objects on page 311.
Select Symmetric by Distance, and click the button to specify the current distance on the drawing. Click to
indicate a segment of known distance in the PDF, and click again to finish the segment (note that snapping is
possible within the PDF).
776 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

1st click Endpoint

3. In the Scale Objects dialog box, enter the New Distance for the segment.

4. Click OK.
The PDF object scale matches the drawing.

The imported PDF could be made into a viewport and cropped for use in the drawing. In this example, walls could
be drawn in the Vectorworks file using the PDF object as a basis for the walls.

Exporting PDF Files

Vectorworks drawing files can be exported to PDF for use as an interactive representation of a model, or for final
quality printing purposes. Export settings are designed for maximum usability and the smallest possible file size. Pages
in the Vectorworks file become PDF pages when exported. Fonts are always embedded in the PDF, for portability.
Layer transfer modes other than Paint become transparency in the PDF. The Vectorworks program can export the
currently visible design layer(s) or sheet layer, or create a batch export list of saved views and sheet layers.
 PDF Interoperability | 777

The layers and classes in the Vectorworks file can be exported as PDF layers, to create an interactive model
representation (PDF layers require PDF rev. 1.5 minimum).
As an alternative to the Export PDF command on the Macintosh, when Quartz Imaging is enabled in the Display
tab of Vectorworks preferences, a single PDF file can also be sent to PDF with the Export PDF (Quartz Only)
command. The parameters are then controlled by the systems PDF writer. See Exporting Files on page 764 in
the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information.
You can export a single PDF file, or select the Publish command to export several files as a batch.

Single PDF File Export

The Export PDF command creates a PDF file from the current sheet layer or visible design layer(s).
To export the current sheet layer or design layer(s) to PDF:
1. Set the view for the export. The current sheet layer or currently viewed design layer(s) are exported.
Set the visibility of layers and classes as desired. All visible and grayed layers are exported; invisible layers and
classes are not exported. For viewports on sheet layers, set the layer and class visibility of each viewport.
2. Select File > Export > Export PDF.
The Export PDF dialog box opens. Specify the settings for exporting to PDF.

Parameter Description
PDF Conversion
Export Design Layers as PDF When exporting design layers, creates a PDF layer from each visible design
Layers layer
Export Classes as PDF Layers When exporting design layers, creates a PDF layer from each visible class
Make grayed PDF Layers initially When creating PDF layers, grayed layers or classes appear invisible when first
invisible opening the resulting PDF
778 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
but appear with normal When creating PDF layers, grayed layers or classes do not display grayed, but
attributes when made visible with their assigned attributes once made visible in the PDF
Resolution Sets the export resolution of pictures, rendered images, and patterns (unless
Export patterns at on-screen resolution is selected). A larger value results in
higher quality images, but also a larger PDF file. Range: 722500 dpi.
Export patterns at on-screen Exports the pattern size as viewed on-screen; when deselected, patterns are
resolution exported according to the specified Resolution
Downsample higher resolution Reduces the resolution of raster images to the specified value, resulting in a
raster images to smaller PDF file size
Rasterize text Exports text in bitmapped format to ensure that it matches the on-screen
appearance; use this option when the font is not displaying correctly in a bold
or italic style. This option may result in a larger PDF file and can cause the font
to appear pixellated at high PDF zoom levels.
Use Opacity of Sets the transparency of layers in the PDF file (replaces Layer Transfer modes
in the Vectorworks program). Not necessary when the Quartz (Macintosh) or
GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference is enabled.
Gray level for grayed Layers and Adjusts the level of gray when exporting with grayed layers and/or classes
Classes
Open PDF in the default viewer After export, opens the PDF automatically in the systems specified PDF
viewer
Export Range
Export the whole printable area as When the printable area consists of more than one page, exports the entire area
one page as a single PDF page
All Pages Exports all pages, creating a PDF page for each Vectorworks page
Pages Exports the specified pages only
Current View Exports the current view to a PDF page
Update visible out of date Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before exporting
viewports prior to exporting
Reset all plug-in objects that Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such as data
require a reset prior to exporting stamps) before exporting
Recalculate worksheets prior to Automatically recalculates worksheets before exporting
exporting

3. Click Export to create the PDF file based on the settings. If Open PDF in the default viewer was selected, the
PDF viewer opens automatically.
If layers or classes were exported as PDF layers and the viewer supports PDF layers, the layers are listed and their
visibility can be controlled through the viewer.
 IFC Format Interoperability | 779

Batch PDF File Export

Use the Publish command to export a series of sheet layers and/or saved views from the current drawing and
externally-referenced files to PDF. See Batch Publishing on page 806 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.

IFC Format Interoperability

The Vectorworks program supports Building Information Model (BIM) interoperability using the Industry Foundation
Classes (IFC) file format.
IFC is an international standard for building data that permits information to be shared and maintained throughout the
life cycle of the construction project: design, analysis, specification, fabrication, construction, and occupancy.
The capabilities and usage for IFC data standards are still evolving. However, objects and models containing IFC data
have been proven to be a useful part of the design process. Some examples of the use of IFC data include:
Collaborative engineering, where an architect exports an architectural model to a structural engineer for analysis
and design, and then re-imports the structural model for coordination purposes
Energy analysis of a building envelope
Automated analysis of code compliance
Space planning and space inventory analysis
Central to the concept of IFC is the idea of semantic objects. Like Vectorworks plug-in objects, IFC objects are more
than just collections of geometry; they have a meaning within the building fabric itself, be it as a door, a wall, a
window, or a handrail. The following Vectorworks plug-in objects and objects are automatically converted into their
corresponding IFC objects upon export.

Base Cabinet Bath-Shower

Ceiling Grid Clothes Rod
Column Comm Device
Compartment Sink Counter Top
Desk Door
Drilled Footing Simple Elevator
Escalator Fireplace
Floor (as IFC slab) Framing Member
780 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Grab Bars Guardrail (Curved & Straight)

Handrail (Curved & Straight) HVAC Damper
HVAC Diffuser HVAC Elbow Duct
HVAC Flex Duct HVAC Outlet
HVAC Splitter HVAC Straight Duct
HVAC Transition HVAC Vertical Duct
HVAC Vertical Elbow Incandescent Fixture
Mullion Parking Spaces
Pilaster Pillar
Ramp Receptacle
Roadway (all types) Roof
Roof Face Seating Layout
Shelving Unit Slab
Space Stair (and Custom Stair)
Switch Table
Tables and Chairs Utility Cabinet
Wall Cabinet Round Wall
Wall (and Wall Projection/Recess) Window
Window Wall-Round Window Wall (Straight & Curved)
Workstation Counter Workstation Overhead
Workstation Panel Workstation Pedestal

Additionally, as of Vectorworks software version 2010, all symbols in the following symbol libraries automatically
have appropriate IFC object types pre-attached, so that symbols used from these libraries properly export to IFC:

Architect Sampler.vwx Equip-Office Equipment.vwx

Equip-Residential Appliances AGA Ranges.vwx Equip-Residential Appliances SubZero USA.vwx
Equip-Residential Appliances Wolf USA.vwx Equip-Residential Appliances-Audio Video.vwx
Equip-Residential Appliances-Imp.vwx Equip-Residential Appliances-Metric.vwx
Equip-Restaurant Equipment-Imp.vwx Fixtures-Imp.vwx
Furniture-Furnishings and Scenic Elements.vwx Furniture-HMI-Modern Classics.vwx
Furniture-Knoll.vwx Furniture-Misc-Imperial.vwx
Furniture-Misc-Metric.vwx Furniture-Office.vwx
Furniture-Residential.vwx Furniture-Systems HMI-Typicals.vwx
Furniture-Systems-Imp.vwx Furniture-Systems-Metric.vwx
Openings-Windows Velux Skylights.vwx Electrical-Lighting Fixtures Int & Ext.vwx
 IFC Format Interoperability | 781

Electrical-Lighting-Imp.vwx Electrical-Panels-Imp.vwx
Electrical-Panels-Metric.vwx Electrical-Power Devices-Metric.vwx
HVAC-Equipment-Imp.vwx Sanitary-Fixtures.vwx
Sanitary-Kohler Baths.vwx Sanitary-Kohler Bidets.vwx
Sanitary-Kohler Faucets Bathtub & Shower.vwx Sanitary-Kohler Faucets Kitchen.vwx
Sanitary-Kohler Faucets Lavatory & Bidet.vwx Sanitary-Kohler Lavatory Sinks 01.vwx
Sanitary-Kohler Lavatory Sinks 02.vwx Sanitary-Kohler Showers.vwx
Sanitary-Kohler Sinks.vwx Sanitary-Kohler Toilets.vwx
Sanitary-Kohler Whirlpools.vwx

With the IFC Data command, users can assign object types and properties to arbitrary collections of geometry (such as
groups or symbols), so that other applications that use these IFC files can identify these objects.
When an IFC file is imported into a Vectorworks file, space objects are translated into the corresponding Vectorworks
object. Since the properties of other objects cannot be matched to the corresponding Vectorworks object properties, the
object is imported into the Vectorworks file as a particular and flexible kind of plug-in object: an IFC Entity. Like a
group, an IFC Entity can contain an arbitrary collection of geometry, but like a plug-in object, it can be inserted into
walls and has sets of data and properties attached. With this generalized import capability, the Vectorworks program
can import any kind of object supported by the IFC data standard, regardless of whether it has a corresponding
parametric plug-in object.

IFC Workflows
Generally, the Vectorworks program expects users to export their files as entire projects (sites with buildings consisting
of stories), to be exchanged or analyzed with other IFC-compatible applications. When you use the Export IFC
Project command, you assign design layers to building stories for meaningful export (Vectorworks Architect required).
The first time a project with stories is exported, the Vectorworks stories are automatically mapped to IFC stories; you
can control any subsequent changes. The Import IFC command automatically assigns IFC building stories to their
own design layers.
To make Vectorworks building models easy to export to IFC, the following guidelines may be useful:
Set up the project with stories as described in Setting Up the Building Structure with Stories on page 4
(Vectorworks Architect required).
Design layers for the building model should correspond to building stories (Vectorworks Architect required), not
categories of information. (Use classes for categorization.)
Take care to set up the elevation values of layers correctly, and verify that all the objects in the drawing are aligned
correctly vertically. Examining the project in Unified View mode makes this much easier.
Use standard Vectorworks plug-in objects listed in IFC Format Interoperability on page 779 wherever possible.
Use the IFC Data command to attach IFC data to custom user-defined symbols or custom 3D elements, so that
they will be recognized at IFC export.
Use the VA Create Schedule command (Vectorworks Architect required) to generate default IFC schedules, or
create your own schedules to verify and correct the IFC data attached to objects. See Records and Schedules on
page 26.
Test the quality of the IFC export file by verifying it in an IFC model browsing utility. Almost all IFC browsers
can traverse the IFC tree structure to view and validate the model. Some examples of IFC browsers available at
this time include:
782 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Solibri Model Viewer (Macintosh or Windows)

FZKViewer (Windows)
DDS-CAD Viewer (Windows only)
Tekla BIMsight (Windows only)
Constructivity Model Viewer (Windows only)
RDF IFC Viewer (Windows only, Macintosh and Linux versions planned)
For more information about additional available IFC viewers and other IFC-compatible applications, visit the
buildingSMART IFC-Compatible Implementations Database website.

Assigning IFC Data to Objects

When a building project is exported to IFC, Vectorworks plug-in objects and pre-assigned symbols are automatically
assigned to IFC entities. Simple hybrid or 3D geometric objects, unless they receive IFC assignments, are not exported.
To be exported, these object associations must be made prior to export with the IFC Data command. Assigning IFC
data to an object does not alter it in any visible way. The object can still be edited with standard Vectorworks tools and
commands. An example of this would be to use a floor slab to model a flat ceiling (Vectorworks Architect required).
Select the floor slab in the model, and then select AEC > IFC Data (Vectorworks Architect workspace) or
Landmark >Architectural > IFC Data (Landmark workspace). From the list in the Select IFC Entity dialog box,
select IfcCovering, the assignment for a ceiling. Then, in the IFC Data dialog box, select CEILING from the
PredefinedType list in the Properties for the selected Data Set lists.
The IFC Zones command attaches IFC data to space zones. See Assigning IFC Data to Space Zones on
page 784.
An object can also be wrapped in a container so that it is identified in the Vectorworks file as an IFC entity. Editing
an IFC Entity is less direct than editing simple Vectorworks objects with IFC data attached. For this reason, an IFC
Entity can be useful for model elements that need to be secured from casual changes.
To assign IFC data:
1. Select the object, group, symbol definition, or symbol instance for assignment of IFC data. More than one item
can be selected at one time.
IFC data applied to symbol instances affect only the selected instances, not all instances. To attach IFC data to
symbol definitions, select the symbol definition in the Resource Browser. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on the symbol and select IFC Data from the context menu. This attaches the IFC data to future
symbol placements, and to any current instances that do not have IFC data already attached to them.
2. Select AEC > IFC Data (Vectorworks Architect workspace) or Landmark >Architectural > IFC Data
(Landmark workspace).
Alternatively, select Show IFC Data from the Coordinate/IFC menu on the Object Info palette to enable
IFC-related information display on the palette, and then click IFC Data from the Object Info palette.

Object Info palette

Coordinate/IFC menu

IFC Data button

The Select IFC Entity dialog box opens, listing available IFC object types.
 IFC Format Interoperability | 783

Parameter Description
Simple List/Full List Choose the list view. The simple list is an adjusted view of primary IFC objects, while the
view full list displays all available IFC concepts
Filter List Enter text or keywords to filter the objects list; only entries which contain the text are listed
IFC object types Lists available IFC object types; click the object type to select it

3. Select the object type and click OK.

The IFC Data dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Entity Displays the selected type of IFC entity
Select Opens the Select IFC Entity dialog box, to select a different entity type
784 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
GUID Displays the Global Unique Identifier assigned to the entity; this ID follows the entity
throughout the IFC workflow to distinguish it from other IFC objects
Create IFC Entity Leave deselected to retain the Vectorworks object properties in the Object Info
palette (the IFC Data remains attached); select to display the object as an IFC Entity
in the Object Info palette.
IFC Entities are container objects. They display the type IFC Entity on the Object
Info palette.
Data Sets for this object Displays the property sets associated with the IFC object; select whether to use each
IFC pSet by clicking in the Use column
Manage Custom Property Opens the Manage Custom Property Sets dialog box, to include record formats from
Sets the file as custom property sets; see Using Custom IFC Property Sets on page 786.
This allows you to include data from your model even if the data are not defined as
part of the IFC specifications.
Properties for the selected Displays the available properties and values for the selected pSet
Data Set
Value for selected property Specifies a string or number value for the selected pSet property
Select IFC Instance For some pSet properties with complex values, an IFC Instance is specified. Select
from the list of instances, or click New to open the IFC Instance Edit dialog box.
Specify the values of the complex properties and click OK to return to the IFC Data
dialog box. (To delete an IFC instance, select it from the list and click Delete.)

4. Click OK to assign the IFC data to the object, or create the IFC entity. The Object Info palette displays the
selected IFC object or entity information (IFC value type and the object name, if any) when Show IFC Data is
enabled on the palette. Objects like walls and slabs, with default IFC data assigned, display with <Default> to
indicate that the default IFC data have not been modified.
The geometry of IFC entities can be edited with the Modify > Edit IFC Entity command; alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the IFC entity and select Edit from the context menu.

Assigning IFC Data to Space Zones

The IFC Zones command attaches IFC data to the specified IFC zones from the current file.
Zones are assigned to space objects from the Occupancy pane of the Space Settings dialog box (see Space
Settings Occupancy Pane on page 48).
To attach IFC data to zones in use in the file:
1. Select AEC > IFC Zones (Vectorworks Architect workspace) or Landmark > Architectural > IFC Zones
(Vectorworks Landmark workspace).
The IFC Zones dialog box opens.
 IFC Format Interoperability | 785

2. Zones in use in the file are listed above the divider line; available IFC zones are listed below the divider. Select a
zone and click OK. Only one zone can be selected at a time.
3. The IFC Data dialog box opens. The object type is automatically set to ifcZone, and the property Name value set
to the zone name. See Assigning IFC Data to Objects on page 782.
4. Click OK to attach the IFC data to the zone.
At IFC export, the IFC zone data is automatically applied to all space objects with a matching zone definition.

Viewing and Editing IFC Data

The data attached to custom Vectorworks objects or IFC entities, whether created in the Vectorworks program or
imported from an IFC file, can be viewed and edited with the IFC Data command or from the Object Info palette. In
addition, the IFC object that corresponds to a Vectorworks plug-in object, such as a Space object, window, or wall, can
be viewed.
To access IFC data:
1. Select the IFC entity or Vectorworks plug-in object. Multiple items can be selected.
2. Select AEC > IFC Data (Vectorworks Architect workspace) or Landmark >Architectural > IFC Data
(Landmark workspace).
Alternatively, click IFC Data from the Object Info palette (Show IFC Data must be enabled from the Coordinate/
IFC menu on the Object Info palette to enable IFC-related information display on the palette).
When multiple items have been selected, edits apply to all eligible objects in the selection.
If you have selected a group that contains objects with multiple IfcObjectTypes, the Choose IFC Type dialog box
opens.

Edits apply to the group, and optionally remove the IFC data from the contained objects.
3. When the items to be edited have been specified if necessary, the IFC Data dialog box opens. View or edit the IFC
data as described in Assigning IFC Data to Objects on page 782 and click OK.
786 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

If an IFC entity was selected, the IFC Data dialog box displays the data attached to the entity as described in
Assigning IFC Data to Objects on page 782; the data can be edited. If a Vectorworks plug-in object was
selected, the IFC Data dialog box displays the corresponding IFC Object type. At export, the object will be
converted to that type of entity.

Using Custom IFC Property Sets

Property sets (Pset_XxxxXxxx) are used to assign groups of individual data fields, or properties, to IFC entities.
Property sets can be very specific to an IFC entity, such as Pset_WallCommon to IfcWall, or more generally applied to
any IFC entity, such as Pset_ManufacturerTypeInformation. Some property sets and their values are explicitly
predefined and listed in the IFC specification; the naming convention Pset_Xxx applies to these officially specified
property sets.
Due to the extensible nature of IFC, any user-defined data, even when not explicitly identified in the IFC specification,
can still be captured and exchanged using custom property sets. Custom property sets must follow technical encoding
conventions. They must have unique and allowable names; the names cannot duplicate specified property set names or
begin with Pset_.
Record formats allow custom property sets to be saved and exchanged. See Record Formats on page 188 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information on record formats.
Creating IFC-Compatible Record Formats
To use a custom property set, first create the record format to define the data to be captured and exchanged in IFC
format. The record format name defines the name of the custom property set. Record formats designated for IFC export
should be named with a VwPset_ or ePset_ prefix, or use a name that is defined by a specific Model View Definition
(MVD) or documented model Exchange Requirement (ER). Record format names are case sensitive, and should not
contain blank spaces (use an underscore if needed). In the following example, the record format is named
ePset_MyDataExchange.
The record format can consist of any number of fields, designated by a Field Name and a Field Type; see Creating
Record Formats on page 188 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. To be compatible with IFC standards,
each field name must be paired with a second field name that identifies an IFC value (IfcValue) type. Each pair must
have the same field type.
For example, the Field Name Reference, with a Text Type, is followed by the Field Name IfcIdentifier, also with
a Text Type. The IfcIdentifier field indicates the kind of value type being used; in this case, it is a simple text ID
string (IfcSimpleValue:Ifcdentifier).
 IFC Format Interoperability | 787

When creating record format fields, a default value can be specified. The default values are optional, except for number
fields, which require at least a zero value to be entered. However, the default values for the IFC field names are ignored
when converted to custom property sets.
Deciding which IFC value type and record format field type to use depends on the kind of information being captured
by the field, such as a simple number, a TRUE/FALSE choice, a text string or simple label, or a measurement. In the
Vectorworks program, allowable types include Integer, Boolean, Text, or Number. The Field Name identifying an IFC
value type should be based on the IFC specification for the different defined types of values (IfcValue), as shown in the
following list.

IFC Value Types Vectorworks Record Format Field Type and Description
IfcSimpleValue These are the most common and cover most user cases
IfcInteger Integer: a simple whole number ranging from -32,7568 to 32,767
IfcReal Number: General or Decimal
IfcBoolean Boolean: also known as TRUE or FALSE
IfcLogical Boolean: similar to Boolean, but can include a value of
UNKNOWN
IfcIdentifier Text: a simple text ID string, usually a mix of alphanumeric
characters and symbols
IfcLabel Text: a simple text name string, usually a mix of alphanumeric
characters
IfcText Text: a descriptive text field string of up to 255 characters
IfcMeasureValue A complete list can be found in the IFC2x3 TC1 specification
IfcAreaMeasure Number: Dimension Area
IfcLengthMeasure Number: Dimension
IfcMassMeasure Number: General or Decimal
IfcThermodynamicTemperatureMeasure Number: General or Decimal
IfcTimeMeasure Integer or Number: General
IfcVolumeMeasure Number: Dimension Volume
IfcDerivedMeasureValue A complete list can be found in the IFC2x3 TC1 specification
IfcEnergyMeasure Number: General or Decimal
IfcIlluminanceMeasure Number: General or Decimal
IfcPowerMeasure Number: General or Decimal
IfcThermalTransmittanceMeasure Number: General or Decimal
IfcTimeStamp Integer or Number: General
IfcLuminousIntensityDistributionMeasure Number: General or Decimal

When all field data pairs have been completed, click OK to create the record format.
788 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

The record format appears in the Resource Browser, under the Record Format category. Like any resource, it can be
shared between files using the export or import functionality of the Resource Browser.
Converting a Record Format to an IFC Custom Property Set
Once the custom record format has been created, it is converted to an IFC Property Set and attached to an object, group,
symbol definition, or symbol instance.
To assign the custom IFC data:
1. Select the object, group, or symbol for assignment of IFC data.
2. Select the IFC object type as described in Assigning IFC Data to Objects on page 782.
3. Click OK.
The IFC Data dialog box opens.
4. Click Manage Custom Property Sets.
The Manage Custom Property Sets dialog box opens.

5. Click in the Use column to include a record format. Selected record formats display with a check mark.
6. Click OK to return to the IFC Data dialog box.
 IFC Format Interoperability | 789

The selected custom record formats are listed as data sets in the IFC Entities/Psets list.
If there are any errors in the naming or formatting of any fields in the record format, the custom property set does
not appear in the IFC Entities/Pset list. Internal checks ensure the integrity of the data and automatically reject
any errors. Correct the errors by editing the record format from the Resource Browser, and try again.
7. Select the custom Pset and click in the Use column. A check mark indicates that the Pset is enabled and attached
to the object.
8. Select the custom Pset properties and assign values to the selected properties.
9. Click OK to assign the IFC data to the object.
The IFC data can be reviewed or edited by clicking IFC Data from the Object Info palette of a selected IFC object
or entity, or by selecting the object or entity and selecting AEC > IFC Data (Vectorworks Architect workspace) or
Landmark >Architectural > IFC Data (Landmark workspace); see Viewing and Editing IFC Data on
page 785.
The custom property set is saved in the current file. To use a custom property set in another file or project, export the
record format to another file and repeat the manage custom property sets process.

Creating IFC Schedules

Before you export an IFC project, check that objects have appropriate IFC data associated with them. The following
schedules with IFC data can be added to the drawing with the VA Create Schedule command, or you can create your
own schedules (see Records and Schedules on page 26).
Objects with IFC Entity gives a count of IFC objects for each entity type on each layer. The object class, name,
and type also display, if available.
Objects with IFC Entity - Specific lists each IFC object, broken down by entity type (walls, slabs, roofs, doors,
windows, stairs, and columns). The object layer, class, name, and description also display, if available.
Objects without IFC Entity lists each non-IFC object. The object layer, class, type, and type name also display, if
available.
790 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Alternatively, from the Resource Browser, open the default architectural reports file from the [Vectorworks]\Libraries
folder that is included with the Vectorworks Architect product (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide). Drag the appropriate IFC worksheet to the drawing.
To edit the worksheets after they have been created, see Using Worksheets on page 814 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.

Importing IFC Files

An IFC project, including one which contains multiple buildings or large information sets, can be imported into a
Vectorworks file. The units of the imported file are determined by the Vectorworks file. The presentation layers or
CAD layers from an imported IFC file are assigned to corresponding Vectorworks classes.
To import an IFC file:
1. Select File > Import > Import IFC.
Alternatively, click the file to import and drag it into a window where a Vectorworks document is open.
2. Select the .ifc, .ifczip, or .ifcxml file to open, and click Open.
The IFC file is imported.

Exporting IFC Projects

Vectorworks project files can be exported to .ifc, zipped ifc, and .ifcxml formats.
Export to IFC Versions 2x2 or 2x3 is supported. The export of a project to an IFC file is based on specifying the
geometry and associated data needed for the use of the exported file. This specification is called a Model View
Definition (MVD), a subset of all the geometry and data in a building model, depending on the workflow, or use of the
geometry and data in another application, like coordination/collision detection, structural analysis, or element quantity
analysis. MVDs can be created by international, national, or local groups that work to standardize information
exchanges for such purposes. Vectorworks software supports the use of MVDs to automate the export, or allows the
user to manually define a custom set of geometry and data to be exported.
To export a Vectorworks file to IFC:
1. Select File > Export > Export IFC Project.
The Export IFC Project dialog box opens. Specify the overall project export options, site information, and author
data for each pane of the Data tab. Many of the fields are required by the IFC specification; they are automatically
mapped to their IFC equivalent for inclusion in the IFC file header information.
 IFC Format Interoperability | 791

Parameter Description
Export Options Sets export parameters for the file
File Format Select whether to export an .ifc file, zipped .ifc file, or .ifcxml file
IFC Version Select the IFC version
Model View Select the MVD that specifies the geometry and data required for export.
The CV 2.0 Architecture view is an official buildingSMART International
MVD for exporting architectural models for coordination with structural
and building services models.
The extended Vectorworks model view is not an official MVD; it allows
you to customize the geometry and data to be exported by selecting the
Export Options such as object and design layer visibilities.
The model view and any add-on views are included as information in the IFC file
header.
Add-on Views Select optional information to be added to the model view at export
Export Visible Objects Only Exports objects within visible classes only (the selection of layers for export is
handled by the Layer Mapping options). When deselected, exports any objects
required by the Model View selection.
Export Site Model For drawings with a site model, this option exports the site model geometry and
enables site model layers to be mapped on the Layer Mapping tab
Export Custom Property Sets Exports custom Psets that were specified in the Manage Custom Property Sets
dialog box for objects IFC data, for models not explicitly defined in the Model
View definition, or when using the extended Vectorworks model view
Export Solids Operations as Depending on the receiving application and data exchange requirements, solids
BREPs operations may need a boundary representation (BREP) based on surface
elements to display correctly and be properly identified
792 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Export Text in Unicode The Unicode format is more reliable for double-byte characters, but it must also
Format be supported by the receiving application
Project Data
Name Type the project name
Phase Enter the construction phase information
Project Type Specify the type of project
Building Permit ID Enter the building permit information
Gross Area (Planned) Enter the total planned area for the entire project
Author Data Enter the information for the primary author of the file and select the authors
professional role. A custom role can be specified; select USERDEFINED and
enter the role title.
Author Addresses Enter pertinent information related to the physical location of the authors place
of business
Organization Data Enter pertinent information related to the professional organization in charge of
the project
Organization Addresses Enter pertinent information related to the physical location of the organizations
place of business. If the author address data and the organization address data are
identical, click Copy Author Addresses to complete the telecom and postal
information automatically. Subsequent edits made to either pane remain unique
to the pane.
Site Data Specify site information for the project location, regardless of whether site model
data is selected for export
Site Address Enter address information for the project site
Building Data Specifies the IFC properties associated with the building
ID/Name/Description Enter the buildings ID, name, and description
Gross Planned Area Specifies the total planned area for the building, used for programming purposes
Reference Elevation/Site Enter the elevation above sea level for the building and the building site
Reference Elevation
Occupancy Type Specifies the occupancy classification, defined according to the presiding
national building code
Primary Construction Type Specifies the main fire use for the building, assigned from the fire use
classification table as given by the relevant national building code
Secondary Construction Type Enter any ancillary fire use for the building, assigned from the fire use
classification table as given by the relevant national building code
Sprinkler Protection Indicates whether the building has sprinkler protection, and if so, whether it is
automatic (the selection is reflected on the Layer Mapping tab, where it can be
overridden for an individual story)
Year of Construction Enter the year when the building was built
Landmark Status Indicates a building with special historical landmark designation
 IFC Format Interoperability | 793

Parameter Description
Building Address Enter address information for the building; if the site address and building
address are identical, click Copy Site Address to complete the postal
information automatically. Subsequent edits made to either pane remain unique
to the pane.

2. Click the Layer Mapping tab to specify which layers to export, and the Story Name to assign to them at export. If
specified, this includes the site model. For a project set up with stories, mapping is done automatically so that the
layers assigned to the building stories are automatically included in the Mapped Layers list and are mapped to an
appropriately named story (Vectorworks Architect required). Mapping can also be controlled manually.
Specify the associated building or site data for each of the mapped layers.

Story/Site Selection list

Mapped layer data

Parameter Description
Vectorworks Story Specify the mapping options for each story, and for the site model, if it was selected for export
Name on the Data tab. As each story is selected, its associated layers display for mapping. Files set up
with a story structure automatically map the story layers for export.
IFC Story Name Displays the name assigned to the currently mapped layers for export; change the story name if
necessary
Available Layers Lists Vectorworks layers available for mapping; lists the layers associated with the number of
stories and the story selected in the Story/Site Selection list
Number of Stories Displays the number of stories in the file, which determines the number of stories available in
the Story/Site Selection list. If the number of stories entered here is different from the number
of stories set up for the file, additional layers display for possible mapping for the current story.
This allows greater export flexibility, to override the story structure in the file and assign
certain layers to different stories at export.
Mapped Layers Lists layers that have been selected for export; they are associated with the Story Name entry
Add Adds available Vectorworks layers to the Mapped Layers list for export
794 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Remove Removes mapped layers from the export list, returning them to the Available Layers list
Mapped layer data Specifies IFC properties for selected mapped story layers
Above Grade Indicates whether the story is fully above ground
Entrance Level Indicates whether the story includes an entrance for the building
Sprinkler Specifies whether the story includes sprinkler fire protection, and if so, whether the sprinklers
Protection are automatic; initial settings match the sprinkler protection setting on the Data tab
Planned Areas, Indicates optional gross and net planned areas, used for design and programming purposes
Gross/Net

3. Click OK to export the project.

Indicate the file name and location in the Save As dialog box.

Importing in SketchUp Format

The Import SketchUp command allows architectural drawings created in SketchUp (versions 4 and above) to be
imported into a Vectorworks file. SketchUp component instances are imported as 3D symbols, and geometry can be
designated as walls, roof faces, and floors. After importing, refine the design using Vectorworks editing tools, or
replace imported 3D symbols with Vectorworks 3D symbols.
Flexible import options allow either automatic conversion of architectural elements based on their orientation, or allow
geometry conversion to be mapped to specific SketchUp materials or layers.
SketchUp import is intended for architectural geometry. Use the Import DXF/DWG command rather than the
Import SketchUp command to import polygonal geometry.
Consider the following points when importing a SketchUp file into a Vectorworks file.
Hidden SketchUp geometry is placed on the SketchUpHidden layer in the Vectorworks file, and the layer is set to
invisible by default.
A component which creates an opening is imported as a Vectorworks window or door, if attached to an object
imported as a Vectorworks wall. If the component touches the baseline of the wall it is considered to be a door; if
it does not touch the baseline of the wall, it is considered to be a window.
Groups and components are always imported as plain polygons in a symbol and do not generate any architectural
elements such as walls or floors.
Walls are unjoined upon import, and may need to be rejoined.
To import a SketchUp file:
1. Select File > Import > Import SketchUp.
Alternatively, click the file to import and drag it into a window where a Vectorworks document is open.
The Import Settings dialog box opens, for specifying mapping parameters to use during import. Set the default
thickness of imported geometry using the parameters on the Default Styles tab.
 Importing in SketchUp Format | 795

Parameter Description
Wall Thickness Enter the thickness to assign to wall geometry during import; this value must be greater
than zero
Floor Thickness Enter the thickness to assign to floors during import
Roof Face Thickness Enter the thickness to assign to roof faces during import

2. Click the Geometry Mapping tab to specify the type of Vectorworks geometry to create for each imported
SketchUp element. Specify None when mapping is unnecessary, as for non-architectural SketchUp drawings.

Parameter Description
None Does not map SketchUp geometry to Vectorworks geometry; all geometry becomes 3D
polygons in the Vectorworks file
Automatic Maps SketchUp geometry to Vectorworks geometry based on the geometric orientation; the
Vectorworks program converts vertical faces to walls, horizontal faces to floors, and
non-horizontal or non-vertical geometry to roof faces
Material Maps SketchUp geometry to Vectorworks geometry based on the material assigned to the
geometry
Layer Maps SketchUp geometry to Vectorworks geometry based on the geometry layer; geometry
from imported layers is retained on the correct layers after import
796 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

3. If no mapping or the plain geometry method is selected, click OK to select the file and begin the import (skip to
Step 9).
4. If material or layer geometry mapping is selected, the Geometry Mapping tab displays mapping import criteria.
The mapping options are identical for both material and layers, except for the column heading indicating the type
of element being mapped.

5. Click Import from to open the Import SketchUp Model dialog box. Select the SketchUp file from which to derive
the mapping criteria for the material or layer list, and click Open. The list of available materials or layers displays
in the Import Settings dialog box.

6. For each material or layer, specify how to convert to the Vectorworks equivalent. (For example, convert all
geometry with a shingle material to a roof face, or all geometry on a roof layer to roof faces.)
Double-click a material or layer from the list to open the Select Geometry dialog box.
7. In the Select Geometry dialog box, select whether to import the material or layer as geometry based on its
orientation (this is the same as if the plain geometry method was selected in the top portion of the dialog box), a
floor, roof face, or wall. Alternatively, select Ignore to leave the item in the list, but not import elements of that
particular material or residing on that layer. Click OK to close the Select Geometry dialog box and update the
mapping list.
The mapping list is saved after import, so that several files with the same mapping criteria can be imported
sequentially. To remove a material or layer from the list prior to importing, select it and click Remove. To clear all
items from the list, click Remove All. Selecting Remove All is a quick way to clear the list prior to specifying
new mapping criteria.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all desired materials or layers are mapped to a geometry type.
9. Click OK; the Import SketchUp Model dialog box opens. Select the file to import, and click Open.
 Importing and Exporting in 3ds Format | 797

10. SketchUp geometry and components are imported as specified, and are automatically selected. The Resource
Browser is populated with the converted 3D symbols.
Items are imported at a 1:1 scale. It may be helpful to click Fit to Objects on the View bar to zoom to fit the
objects in the drawing. It may also be helpful to adjust the layer scale at this time.

Importing and Exporting in 3ds Format

The Vectorworks Design Series products can both import from and export to the .3ds file format used by Autodesk
3ds Max software.

Importing in 3ds Format

When importing a 3ds file, specify how the drawing components will be represented in the Vectorworks file.
To import a 3ds file and select conversion options:
1. Select File > Import > Import 3DS (3D only), and then select the 3ds file to import.
Alternatively, click the file to import and drag it into a window where a Vectorworks document is open.
2. The Import 3DS Options dialog box opens; the options available depend on the contents of the file being
imported. Specify the file import options.

Parameter Description
Import Materials Converts each material definition in the 3ds file to a Renderworks texture in the
Resource Browser (Renderworks required)
Import Textured Materials If Import Materials is selected, select this option to import each texture from the
3ds file as a Renderworks texture in the Resource Browser. The Renderworks
texture can then be edited (using the Edit Texture dialog box).
Import Mesh Objects Imports each mesh object defined in the 3ds file as either a mesh object or a group
of 3D polygons
Import as Vectorworks Converts 3ds mesh objects to Vectorworks mesh objects
Mesh Object
Import as Groups of 3D Converts each 3ds mesh object to a group of triangles in the Vectorworks file
Polygons
798 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Use Texture Materials to If Import Textured Materials and Import as Groups of 3D Polygons are both
Texture selected, select this option to apply the imported textures to the appropriate portions
of the 3D polygons during conversion
Scale Opens the Import 3DS Scale dialog box, for specifying a scale to apply to all
imported objects; see Scaling 3ds Objects on page 800
Import Light Objects Imports light objects from the 3ds file
Import Spot Light Select this option to import spot lights from the 3ds file as Vectorworks spot lights
Import Omni Light Select this option to import omni lights from the 3ds file as Vectorworks point lights
Import Camera Objects Imports camera objects from the 3ds file
Import Active Camera Imports only the active camera from the 3ds file, and sets the current view to the
Only camera view
Create Saved Views for Imports all camera objects from the 3ds file, and creates a saved view in the
Each Camera Vectorworks file for each

3. Click OK to import the file with the selected options. The Object Info palette displays the image information.

Exporting in 3ds Format

Different portions of the drawing can be selected for export to a 3ds file.
To export a 3ds file:
1. If 3D objects from only one layer should be exported, make that layer active. If only selected objects should be
exported, select the objects.
2. Select File > Export > Export 3DS (3D only).
3. The Export 3DS Options dialog box opens; the options available on the lower part of the dialog box depend on
which group of items were selected for export.

Parameter Description
Export
 Importing and Exporting in 3ds Format | 799

Parameter Description
Selected Objects on Exports only selected 3D objects from the active layer; if no objects are selected, all
Active Layer 3D objects from the active layer are exported
All Visible Objects on Exports all visible 3D objects from the active layer (including objects in design layer
Active Layer viewports). Exclude or include specific types of objects using the dialog check boxes;
for example, export walls but not lights.
All Visible Objects on Exports all visible 3D objects from all layers in the Vectorworks file (including objects
All Layers in design layer viewports). Exclude or include specific types of objects using the
dialog check boxes; for example, export walls but not lights.
Export Quality (Number Controls the conversion quality of 3D objects that have rounded sides. Move the slider
of Polygons) bar left to convert rounded objects using fewer large polygons (thus lower quality).
Move the bar right to create rounded objects of higher quality.
Exporting more polygons slows down the export and increases the size of the
output file.
Export Objects Exports all kinds of Vectorworks 3D objects except walls, 3D loci, symbols, lights,
and plug-in objects
Export 3D Locuses Exports each 3D locus as a one-vertex 3ds mesh
Export Walls Exports walls
Export 3D Symbols Exports each 3D symbol as a group of 3D meshes
Export Plug-in Objects Exports each plug-in object as a group of 3D meshes
Export Lights Exports Vectorworks light objects as 3ds light objects. Vectorworks point lights are
exported as 3ds omni lights, and Vectorworks directional and spot lights are exported
as 3ds spot lights.
Export Current View as If the current view was set with one of the Perspective commands (Narrow, Normal,
Camera Wide, or a custom perspective), this option exports the view as a 3ds camera object
Scale Opens the Export 3DS Scale dialog box, for specifying a scale to apply to all exported
objects; see Scaling 3ds Objects on page 800
Export Materials Exports colors that are attached to the exported objects as 3ds materials; this includes
colors both from the Attributes palette and from Renderworks textures
Export Textures as If Export Materials is selected, this option exports each Renderworks texture to a
texture image file (Renderworks required). Select the export file format from the list.
Exported image files are automatically named with sequential numbers starting at
zero. For example, a Vectorworks file with two textures would export two image files
named Textr0.jpg and Textr1.jpg.
When exporting multiple drawings with textures, be sure to save them to different
foldersotherwise, new textures will overwrite existing exported textures.

4. Select the types of objects to export, and then click OK.

5. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save.
The Vectorworks program exports to a new file, leaving the original file intact.
800 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Scaling 3ds Objects

The scale of 3ds objects can be changed during both import and export. The scaling is applied to all imported/exported
objects.
To scale 3ds objects during import or export:
1. From the import or export dialog box, click Scale.
2. The Import/Export 3DS Scale dialog box opens. Choose whether to scale the object(s) by custom dimensions or
by scale factor.

Parameter Description
(3DS) Model Width/Height/ Displays the original dimensions of the object(s) selected for import or export; if
Depth there are multiple objects, the scaling center is the center of the selection bounding
box
Custom Allows entry of custom dimensions for imported or exported objects in the Desired
Width, Desired Height, and Desired Depth fields. Select Maintain Proportions to
have the Vectorworks program automatically adjust the proportions when a custom
width, height, or depth is entered.
Scale Allows entry of a scaling factor to be applied to imported or exported objects. Either
select a Scale from the list, or select Custom from the top of the list and enter a
Custom Scale value. When the scale factor changes, the dimension values also
change to show the exact size of the selection bounding box for the given scale.

3. Click OK to save the scaling information.

Exporting in KML Format

The Export KML command exports 3D drawing components to KML, the markup language used by the Google Earth
application. The resulting file can then be opened in Google Earth, in order to provide a visualization of how a building
fits into its intended environment, for example. KML models can also be uploaded and shared through the Trimble
3D Warehouse.
To export a KML file:
1. Select File > Export > Export KML (3D only).
2. The KML Export Options dialog box opens.
 Exporting in KML Format | 801

Parameter Description
Mapping A 2D reference point on the object is mapped to specific Google Earth coordinates
during export. If the file is georeferenced, the following mapping fields are filled in
automatically and disabled.
Set Reference Point to To specify the reference point manually, select Set Reference Point to Next Mouse
Next Mouse Click/Set Click. Or, to specify X and Y coordinates for the reference point, select Set Reference
Reference Point to Point to and enter the appropriate values.
Latitude Enter the latitude where the model will be positioned in Google Earth, using DMS
notation (for example, 39d 12m 34s N)
Longitude Enter the longitude where the model will be positioned in Google Earth, using DMS
notation (for example, 76d 51m 44s W)
Page North Enter the angle between the drawings Y axis and true north in DMS notation; positive
angles proceed clockwise
Z Height Offset Enter the difference between the Vectorworks active layer plane and the Google Earth
ground plane
Objects To Export Select the specific object types to be exported; leaving out unnecessary objects can
reduce the KML files size
802 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Layer(s) to export from Select the design layers to export 3D objects fromeither the active layer only, or all
visible layers.
To export all design layers, first set the layer options to show all layers. If multiple
layers are exported, in Google Earth, the Vectorworks layers are listed in the Places
panel on the left side of the application window, and their visibilities can be controlled
individually.
To export some (but not all) layers, create a new design layer from which to export. On
the new layer, create a design layer viewport (or create layer links) that shows only the
layers to export. Then export that layer only. With this method, only one layer displays
in Google Earth.

3. Select the export parameters, and then click OK.

4. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save.
An export file is created, and the original file remains intact.

Importing in Shapefile Format

The Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products can import files in shapefile (.shp) format. Each geometric feature
stored in the shapefile is converted to a Vectorworks object. In turn, each of these objects has a corresponding data
record, which is converted from the shapefiles database file.
To import a shapefile and select conversion options:
1. Select File > Import > Import Shapefile, and then select the shapefile to import.
Alternatively, click the file to import and drag it into a window where a Vectorworks document is open.
2. The Vectorworks program determines the appropriate units for the imported objects from the projection (.prj) file,
if one is available. If no projection file is found, the current documents units are used.
3. The Import Shapefile dialog box opens. Specify the file import options.

Parameter Description
Import to layer Select the design layer to import themes from the shapefile into; by default, objects will be
imported to a new layer named after the shapefile
If a projection file (.prj) is included with the shapefile, the layer is automatically set to be
georeferenced based on the projection file (but it can be changed if necessary)
Edit Layer Opens the Edit Design Layers dialog box, to edit the selected design layers
georeferencing settings as needed
Georeference message If the selected layer is georeferenced, a message displays the current projection setting;
otherwise, a message indicates that the layer is not georeferenced
 Exporting in Shapefile Format | 803

Parameter Description
Assign to class Select an existing class to assign to the themes imported from the shapefile, or select New
to create a new class

4. Click OK to import the file with the selected options. The Object Info palette displays the imported shapefile
information.

Exporting in Shapefile Format

The Export Shapefile command exports drawing components to the shapefile format. Each shapefile (.shp) exported is
accompanied by an index file (.shx) and a database file (.dbf) with the same name.
Shapefile export options allow the export of drawing components using multiple criteria. For an object to be exported,
it must satisfy all selected criteria. For example, if you select both Objects with classes and Objects in layers export
options, only objects that belong to both one of the selected classes and one of the selected layers will be exported.
The following objects cannot be exported: text, dimensions, worksheets, bitmaps, lights, layer links, walls, round walls,
and some 3D objects (including extrudes, sweeps, meshes, roofs, floors, columns, and NURBS curves). Other objects
are exported as follows:
Lines, rectangles, circles, ovals, arcs, polygons, rounded rectangles, polylines, and path plug-in objects are
exported as shapefile polygons or polylines.
Symbols, 2D and 3D loci, and point plug-in objects are exported as shapefile points or 3D points.
3D polygons are exported as shapefile 3D polyline or 3D polygon shape types.
Shapefiles can contain only one shape type. If multiple shape types are being exported, they will go into separate
files.
Groups that contain exportable object types are exported as individual polygons, polylines, and loci, as
appropriate.
If the Vectorworks file contains projection data, the file can either be deprojected, or exported with projection and
(optionally) a projection (.prj) file.
Object data that are not part of the record can be included in the export.
To export a shapefile:
1. Select File > Export > Export Shapefile.
2. The Export Shapefile dialog box opens.
804 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Objects with record Select which objects that share a specific data record will be exported
Objects with classes Select this option to export objects in specified classes
Objects in layers Select this option to export objects in specified design layers
Selected objects Select this option to export objects that are currently selected
Deproject / Keep projection Select Deproject to create a shapefile with latitude and longitude coordinates only;
select Keep Projection to create a shapefile with the currently projected coordinates
(in document units)
Write projection files If Keep projection is selected, select this option to create a projection file (.prj), in
addition to the .shp file
Additional Object Data Select this option to export additional object data that belong to the object(s) being
exported, but are not part of the record

3. Select the export parameters.

If Objects with classes or Objects in layers is selected, click Select Classes/Select Layers to open the relevant
dialog box. Place a check mark in the column beside all classes and layers from which to export objects, and click
OK.
If Additional Object Data is selected, the Additional Object Data dialog box opens automatically. Place a check
mark in the column beside additional data to be exported. If desired, rename data in the Export Name field;
names can be no more than ten characters long. Click OK. The customizations in the list are remembered across
Vectorworks sessions.
Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save. The default shapefile file name is the record format
name.
The Vectorworks program creates a set of export files, leaving the original file intact.

World File Support

Georeferenced raster images with associated world files, both normal and referenced, are supported in the Vectorworks
Landmark product. World files associated with the raster file must have the same name as the raster file and an
extension of .bpw, .jgw, .pgw, .tfw, .gfw, or .wld.
To import a georeferenced raster image:
1. Select File > Import > Import Image File.
The Open dialog box opens. Select the raster file for import.
2. If a world file is associated with the raster file, the image is automatically imported, translated, and scaled. The
current view changes to Fit to Objects, so the imported image is visible.
To import an image without its associated world file scaling and translation, either rename the associated world
file, or move it to a different folder.
GeoTiff image files can be imported, but no georeferencing information within the file is used.
If the current design layer is georeferenced, there is an option to export a worldfile along with an image file of the
Vectorworks drawing.
 Exporting in gbXML Format | 805

To export a georeferenced raster image and worldfile:

1. Select File > Export > Export Image File.
2. The Export Image File dialog box opens. Select the export options, including Export Georeferencing File.
3. Click Save, and then name and save the image file. Along with the image file, the Vectorworks program exports a
worldfile that describes the exported images location, scale, and rotation in the geographic coordinate system. If
multiple georeferenced layers are visible, the worldfile will be written according to the topmost layer. See
Exporting an Image File on page 767 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Exporting in gbXML Format

The gbXML file format transmits building information for energy analysis.
Valid Vectorworks Architect objects that are included in gbXML export are spaces, walls, slabs, windows, doors,
straight window walls, columns, and roofs. Geo-referenced site location, if any, is included. The model must have a
structure with stories, even if the model is very simple with only one design layer per story. Columns to be included in
the export must be along the periphery of a space; columns totally within or outside of a space are not considered. All
space objects must be fully enclosed by walls, slabs, and/or roof elements, and there should be a full-floor boundary for
each story in the building. The Place Spaces command makes this simple; it places the required spaces automatically
and ensures that they properly touch their bounding objects.
The model can include shading surfaces (overhangs, awnings, or other surfaces, including walls roofs, and slabs, that
do not bound a space and lie outside the bounds of the model).
For best results, before exporting, simplify the model so that only objects that affect energy consumption are visible.
Eliminate, or make invisible, items that do not contribute to the energy profile of the building, such as unnecessary
geometric detail, furniture, and fixtures. (Note that spaces in invisible classes are ignored.)

Automatically Creating Spaces

For export, the model must contain space objects, which represent the essential organizational elements for gbXML
exchange. Spaces must be contained by walls, slabs, and roofs. If the model does not contain space objects for each
enclosed area and the full floor of each story, the Place Spaces command creates the necessary spaces for export, with
full boundaries on all sides so that the exporter can properly determine the space volume.
To create spaces optimized for gbXML export:
1. Select AEC > gbXML > Place Spaces.
The Place Spaces dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Place Room Spaces in Class Creates spaces automatically for the enclosed room areas of the model; select a class
for the spaces, or select New to create a new class
806 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Place Full-floor Spaces in Creates a full-floor space automatically within the boundary of the exterior walls on
Class each story of the model; select a class for the spaces, or select New to create a new
class
Place Spaces for Current Places spaces only for the story of the current layer; only this story will be
Story Only considered for gbXML export
Ignore Small Enclosed Areas When selected, spaces are not created for small enclosed areas, such as small gaps
between walls. This results in more exact export results, but the additional analysis
can take some time.

2. Click OK to place the spaces automatically.

Exporting to gbXML Format

To export a gbXML-compliant model:
1. Select AEC > gbXML >Export gbXML.
The Export gbXML dialog box opens.

2. Enter the average ground level for the project, and then click OK.
3. The gbXML Save File dialog box opens. Type a file name, select a location to save the file, and then click Save.
If the file did not meet the requirements for successful gbXML export, you are notified by alert dialog boxes.

Exporting for DOE-2 Requirements

With rising energy costs and stricter regulations on energy usage in commercial buildings, it is becoming increasingly
important to be able to estimate the energy cost implications of design strategies, especially during the schematic
design phase. Energy usage programs develop these estimates. The Vectorworks Architect product can export the
building geometry to a file in the format read by the DOE energy analysis engine.
To create a DOE-2 export file:
1. The initial building space planning should be complete, with layers for all the building levels and spaces on those
layers. Exterior walls are also required; create these automatically with the Create Walls from Spaces command,
or manually.
Windows and doors should also be inserted into the walls where appropriate.
2. Select AEC > Space Planning > Export DOE-2.
The Export DOE-2 dialog box opens.
 Exporting for DOE-2 Requirements | 807

Parameter Description
File Name Enter the path and file name for the DOE-2 file, or click Browse to specify the location and file
name
Confirm Layer Displays the floor elevation and ceiling heights as specified in the Layers Setup dialog box; these
Heights values can be edited
Up/Down Scroll up and down through the list of layers (available when there are more than five layers)

3. Click OK to create the DOE-2 text file. Send the file to your DOE consultant for analysis.
The relationship between Vectorworks entities and their corresponding BDL language entities is shown in the
following table.

Vectorworks DOE
Distance from layer Z to next highest layer Z Floor height
Layer delta-Z Space height
Description field in wall record Construction type
Wall record R-value Construction type U-Factor
Window vs. door record Window vs. door

Generating an INP File from a DXF File

If .INP files need to be generated from DXF files for analysis with the DOE-2 engine, several steps are required to
properly import and format the file in the Vectorworks Architect product prior to exporting it.

X-REFs and Layers

AutoCAD building plans are often broken up into several files, which are then cross-referenced (x-ref) to a master file.
Prior to importing into a Vectorworks file, all of these files must be pulled into the master file. Essentially, all of the
information about a building must be present in one file for the export to recognize the relationships among adjacent
building levels and spaces on each of those floors. See DXF/DWG and DWF File Import on page 779 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
Vectorworks classes are roughly equivalent to AutoCAD layers. When importing the DXF file, the layers should be
imported as Vectorworks classes. The Vectorworks program allows the specification of the base elevation (Z value) of
layers; therefore, Vectorworks layers are typically used to separate the different building levels in the drawing. Once
these layers have been established with the appropriate Z values, it is much easier to draw on the layers without having
to specify base heights of each object.
808 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

The Export DOE-2 command uses the layer Z values to determine the Z value of each floor in the INP file. After
importing a DXF file, first create a layer for every building level, and then assign a Z value to that layer. In addition,
assign a delta Z value. In a normal drawing created with the Vectorworks Architect product, the delta Z controls the
default height (at object creation time) of all walls on that layer. The Export DOE-2 command uses the delta Z as the
space-height.
To create a layer for a building level, select Tools > Organization. On the Design Layers tab, create and set properties
for the building level layer. See Creating Layers on page 95 and Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Defining Spaces
Once the layers have been defined, define the spaces. Polygons may already exist for all the spaces; if so, convert the
polygons to spaces with the Create Spaces from Polys command (see Space Properties on page 44).

Walls
The Vectorworks program has a dedicated object type for walls. A Vectorworks wall is a complex object type which is
a combination of lines, arcs (in the case of rounded walls), polygons/polylines, and fill patterns. The Vectorworks
Architect product adds more functionality to wall objects by attaching a record with a description field.
The Export DOE-2 command checks for wall objects along the perimeter of the spaces in the drawing. If walls are
found, it checks for a wall record. If this is found, the description field is exported as the construction type for that
segment. If no wall record is present, the command exports the walls class name as the construction type. If it does not
find a wall object on any particular space vertex, a default construction type for the wall on that vertex is assigned. The
default construction types are Default Exterior Wall construction and Default Interior Wall construction.
If the walls in the original DWG file were drawn with multi-lines, importing the multi-lines as Vectorworks walls is
recommended. If the original draftsperson did not use multi-lines, then the walls must be manually drawn. The walls
must be on the same layer as their respective space objects. In other words, first floor walls must be on the same layer
as the space objects for the first floor.

Windows and Doors

The Export DOE-2 command determines the difference between windows and doors on the basis of the attached
record. If the symbol has a door record attached, the symbol is exported as a door. If it has a window record attached to
it, or no record at all, it is exported as a window.
To export windows and doors, walls are required. Inserting windows and doors into Vectorworks walls is much easier
than creating them mathematically within the DOE-2 interface. Vectorworks walls normally contain the windows
and doors, essentially as nested objects. The associativity of windows and doors with their parent walls allows the
Export DOE-2 command to recognize which windows/doors are associated with which walls, and export them to the
appropriate place in the INP file. Ensure that when inserting the windows and doors into the walls, they create a wall
break. Otherwise, they are not considered associated with the wall.
AutoCAD blocks can be used, which convert to Vectorworks symbols during the DXF import. The length of the
window/door, parallel to the wall, is exported as the width. For windows, the elevation of the lowest part of the window
is exported as the Y value.

Vectorworks Spotlight Export and Import

The Vectorworks Spotlight product provides the ability to import and export lighting design data. The Vectorworks
program is compatible with Lightwright 5, and includes extra functionality to automatically data transfer to and from
Lightwright.
 Vectorworks Spotlight Export and Import | 809

Exporting Instrument Data

Vectorworks Spotlight instrument data (including accessory, power, and position information) can be exported to an
external file. The resulting file can then be opened by a spreadsheet or database program, and is compatible with
Lightwright.
All instrument and accessory data from the current light plot are exported. Individual instruments cannot be
selected for export.
To export instrument data:
1. Select File > Export > Export Instrument Data.
The Export Instrument Data dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Instrument Fields Selects the instrument data to be exported. Double-click (Macintosh) or click (Windows)
an item to select it; a plus sign (+) next to the field indicates that it will be exported. To
deselect a field, double-click it.
All Selects all instrument data fields for export
Lightwright Selects only the instrument data fields supported by Lightwright. All
Lightwright-compatible fields will be exported; these fields are displayed with a plus
sign. Verify the selections to ensure that these are the fields desired for export.
User Restores the last saved or loaded set of instrument data fields
None Deselects all instrument data fields
Save Saves the current set of selections; enter a name for the selection set file
Load Loads a selection set file
Export field names as Retains headers for the field information during export; this option is recommended, as it
first record helps to organize the data in the database or spreadsheet program
Export in Lightwright 4 Exports all static accessories attached to an instrument as a list separated by a + sign, to
format the Accessories field associated with the instrument

The Unique ID field (UID) is not in the list, but is automatically exported. This field is required to re-import data.
2. Click Export and enter a file name and export location for the file.
810 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

3. Click Save and the selected instrument data is exported to the file in tab-delimited format. Import the file as
tab-delimited into the other program.

Exporting Patch Information

The Export ASCII Patch command exports the dimmer and channel information from the drawing to a USITT
standard ASCII text patch file (Version 3.0, Ident 3.0).
To export dimmer and channel information to a patch file:
1. Select File > Export > Export ASCII Patch.
2. Select whether to clear existing console patch information when importing the patch data into the lighting console.
Click Yes to delete all existing patch data in the console before importing the new patch. Click No to preserve the
current console patch data; the new patch information may overwrite existing data.
3. The Export ASCII Patch File dialog box opens. Specify the location and file name of the patch text file.
Fixtures with multiple channels are patched sequentially. For example, setting the Channel to 6, the Dimmer to
20, and the Num Channel to 4 generates the following patch information:

Channel Dimmer
6 20
7 21
8 22
9 23

Importing Instrument Data

Instrument data from an external file can be imported into a Vectorworks Spotlight file. Import settings can be saved.
To import instrument data:
1. Select File > Import > Import Instrument Data.
The Instrument Data Import dialog box opens.

2. Click Browse to search for the file to be imported.

 Vectorworks Spotlight Export and Import | 811

The imported file must consist of tab-delimited text, with the instrument information in the rows and the field
information in the columns.
3. Once the file has been selected, choose the Unique ID Field from the list of available fields.
This field will be used as the key field to match imported data to the data in the plot. Normally, select UID (Unique
ID) or EID (External ID).
4. After the Unique ID Field has been selected, the list of incoming data fields is displayed in the Incoming Data
list on the left, and all available instrument fields are shown in the Record Fields list on the right.
5. To map the incoming data to an instrument field, select a data item from the Incoming Data list, and then select
the destination record field on the right. Click Link to link the fields. The linked field moves to the Record Fields
list. (To unlink two linked fields, select the field from the Record Fields list and then click Unlink.)
6. Continue mapping fields individually until the desired links have been made. To save time, click AutoLink; this
automatically matches fields based on the similarity of their names. Verify that the links were made as intended.
7. To import the data without saving the links, click Import.
Saving the mapping information allows you to skip the process of mapping individual fields when importing
similar external files. Once the fields have been mapped appropriately, save the mapping links by clicking Save.
Specify the name of the links file, which can then be restored with the Load button.
8. During import, the Vectorworks Spotlight product attempts to match all incoming data to an appropriate
instrument. However, if items exist which cannot be matched, these display as orphan instruments at the bottom
left of the drawing, outside the page boundary.
The first row of the imported file should contain the field labels. However, if the file to import contains instrument
data in the first row, select Import First Record.
To load saved mapping files:
1. Click Browse and select the file to be imported.
2. Click on the Load button, and select either a pre-defined mapping file or a saved mapping file. Click Import to
open the mapping file and automatically map the fields based on the saved links.

Automated Import and Export to Lightwright

The lighting instruments and parameters specified in the Vectorworks Spotlight product can be automatically sent to
Lightwright 5 to perform paperwork processing. Any changes to the data in Lightwright automatically update the light
plot. Once configured (and once the Vectorworks file has been saved), these updates occur seamlessly in both
applications.
For versions of Lightwright earlier than 5, see Exchanging Data with Older Versions of Lightwright on
page 993.
To specify automatic data transfer between the Vectorworks Spotlight product and Lightwright:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Spotlight Preferences.
The Spotlight Preferences dialog box opens. Click the Lightwright tab.
812 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Use automatic Lightwright Enables the automatic exchange of data between the Vectorworks Spotlight product
Data Exchange and Lightwright; deselect to suspend or stop the data exchange
Perform a complete export Exports the Spotlight data, replacing all the data in Lightwright the next time
on exit Lightwright is used. This should occur whenever field export changes have occurred;
therefore, when changes have been made, the field appears dimmed and cannot be
deselected.
File Path Specifies the location of the exchange file. The file is in .xml format, and it is named
according to the Vectorworks file.
Same location as the file Saves the exchange file with the Vectorworks file
A custom location Saves the exchange file in a specific location; click Choose to set the location
Available Fields Lists field names from the Vectorworks file that are available to export to
Lightwright, but have not been selected for export
Move > Moves the selected Vectorworks file field to the Export Fields list for export to
Lightwright
< Move Removes field names from the Export Fields list, returning them to the Available
Fields list, where they are not included for export
Export Fields Lists field names that will be exported to Lightwright
Reset Defaults Restores the fields to the lists specified as a default when Save as default was last
clicked
Save as default Saves the current lists as the default mapping to be restored by Reset Defaults; the
default settings saved include those on the Lighting Device and Universe tab

2. Click Use automatic Lightwright Data Exchange to enable automatic data transfer between the Vectorworks
Spotlight product and Lightwright, and indicate the location for saving the transfer file.
 Importing in PartSpec Format | 813

3. Move fields to be exported from the Available Fields list to the Export Fields list. All parameters in the Export
Fields list are exported to Lightwright.
Click Save as default to save the current status of the lists for new Vectorworks files. When enabling data
exchange, click Reset Defaults to use the default lists.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and export the instrument and accessory information from the Vectorworks file
to the exchange file.
As instruments are added, deleted, and changed in the Vectorworks Spotlight product, the edits appear in Lightwright.
Similarly, edits made in Lightwright apply automatically to the Vectorworks file. Instrument data are updated when the
file focus switches from the Vectorworks file to Lightwright, or Lightwright to the Vectorworks file.
Lights added in Lightwright are placed between existing lights on a lighting position upon import, based on the unit
number of the new light. If no adjacent lights can be determined, the light is placed at the center of the lighting position.
In the Vectorworks file, an import worksheet is automatically created, listing instruments that have been added from
Lightwright as well as instruments that did not have a Lightwright equivalent and should possibly be deleted from the
Vectorworks file.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a database row of the import worksheet, and choose Select
Item to select and display the associated instrument.

Importing in PartSpec Format

The Import PartSpec command imports Thomas Register PartSpec files saved in either DWG/DXF (2D objects) or
IGES or ACIS (3D objects) format. It places all parts in a single class on the active design layer and deletes any
extraneous layers. The Import PartSpec command does not differentiate between a file created in the Thomas
Register and other programs.
To import PartSpec files:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Import PartSpec
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Import PartSpec
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Import PartSpec

2. A message indicates that the undo cache will be cleared, and that this action cannot be undone; click OK to
proceed.
The Import Thomas Register PartSpec dialog box opens.
814 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter Description
Import 2D Part (DWG/DXF) Select to import a 2D part from a DWG or DXF file
Import as symbol named Select to import the part as a symbol; enter the name of the symbol in the symbol
name field
Import as group Select to import the part as a group
Attach part information to Select to attach the manufacturers part information to the symbol or group. The
the group or symbol information is attached through the Part Information record format which is created
if not already existing in the file.
Put objects into class Select the class to apply to all objects being imported
Import 3D Part Select to import a 3D part
ACIS Select to import the part from an ACIS file
IGES Select to import the part from an IGES file

3. Select the desired import options and click OK.

Import Description
2D part from either a In the Import DXF/DWG Files dialog box, select the file to import, and then click Open.
DWG or DXF file The DXF DWG Import Options dialog box opens. (See DXF/DWG and DWF File
Import on page 779 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.)
The only setting that may need to be edited in the DXF DWG Import Options dialog
is Units Setting In File under the Primary Settings tab. This setting refers to the units
in the PartSpec DXF or DWG file, not the units of the current Vectorworks file. Do
not edit the Import DXF Layers As Classes field under the Graphics Attributes tab
or the Group Record Fields under the Objects tab. Changing these options will
prevent objects from importing correctly. Depending on the imported part, the Map
Colors to Line Weights dialog box and/or the Font Mapping dialog box may open.
Make any necessary changes and then click OK. The part is imported into the file
based on the specified settings.
3D part from an ACIS If this is an IGES file, the Import IGES File dialog box opens. Select the file to import, and
or IGES file then click Open. If this is an ACIS file, the Import SAT File dialog box opens. Select the
file to import, and then click Open. The part is imported into the current class and design
layer, and is available for editing and/or converting into a symbol.
 Referencing Imported Images | 815

Referencing Imported Images

Image files can be imported into the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, but they cannot be referenced. The
Vectorworks Design Series products allow you to create a reference to the original image file, if the original image may
change, and you want to keep the imported image up to date.
To reference an image file:
1. Select File > Import > Import Image File, and then select the image file to import.
2. The Image Import Options dialog box opens.
3. Specify the Compression Method options for the imported image as described in Importing an Image File on
page 762 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. Specify the reference options for the imported image as described in the following table.

Parameter Description
Reference References the original image file (master file), so that the imported image can be updated
when the master file changes. See Workgroup Referencing on page 121 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide for more information about referencing.
Absolute path Stores the absolute file path of the master file. Select this option when the location of the
master file will not change in the future, or if the master file is on another volume.
Path relative to Stores the file path of the master file relative to the target Vectorworks file; this option is
current document available only if the master file is on the same volume as the target file. Select this option if
the target file and the master file may be moved to another volume in the future.
Save referenced Saves a copy of the referenced image in the target Vectorworks file; if deselected, the target
cache to disk file is smaller, and the image is automatically updated when the target file is opened
Automatically Updates the image from the master file each time this file is opened, if the image is out of
update reference date
during file open

5. Click OK to import the image. The Object Info palette displays the image information.
6. If necessary, select Modify > Edit Crop to crop the image. See Cropping Imported Images on page 763 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
816 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files

If you use the Delete Outside Crop button on the Object Info palette to modify the imported image, the reference
will be broken.
A referenced image file can be opened with the default application associated with this file type. To open a referenced
image file, use one of the following methods:
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the referenced image in the drawing area, and then select Open
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the referenced image file in the Navigation palette, and then
select Open
Select the referenced image file in the Navigation palette, and then select Open from the Navigation menu
Design and Drafting Utilities 20
A variety of tools, calculators, and utilities are available in the Vectorworks Design Series products for the drafting and
design process.

Creating 3D Objects from 2D Objects

The Create 3D Object from 2D command places a 3D version of a 2D object in a drawing. The command applies to
the following 2D objects with 3D counterparts.

Acorn nut (Inch) Lock washer (Inch, Metric, DIN, ISO) Spur gear *
Angle (AISC Inch and Metric, Needle bearing Spur gear rack
BSI, JIS, ANZ, DIN)
Ball bearing Nut (Inch, Metric, DIN, ISO) Square tubing (AISC Inch and
Metric, BSI, JIS, ANZ, DIN)
Bearing lock nut Parallel pin (DIN) Swing bolt
Bevel gears Pillow block bearing Swing eye bolt
Bulb flat (BSI, JIS, DIN) Plain washer (Inch, Metric, DIN, ISO) Taper pin (Inch, DIN)
Carriage bolt (Inch, Metric) Pulley * Tapered roller bearing
Channel (AISC Inch and Rectangular tubing (AISC Inch and T-bolt
Metric, JIS, ANZ, DIN) Metric, BSI, JIS, ANZ, DIN)
Clevis pin (Inch, Metric, Retaining ring (Inch, DIN) Tee (AISC Inch and Metric,
DIN, ISO BSI, JIS, DIN)
Compression spring - 1 and 2 Retaining washer (DIN) Thrust bearing
Conical compression spring Rivet - large (Inch) Thumb screw (Inch)
Cotter pin (Inch) Rivet - small (Inch) Torsion spring - Front, End
Die spring Rivet (DIN) Tubular rivet (DIN)
Dowel pin (Inch) Roller bearing U-bolt
Extension spring - Front, End Roller chain - circular Wide flange (AISC Inch and
Metric, BSI, JIS, ANZ, DIN)
Eye bolt Roller chain - linear Wing nut (DIN)
Flanged bearing - 2 and 4 hole Roller chain - offset link Wing nut type A, B, C, D
(Inch)
Hole - drilled Round tubing (AISC Inch and Metric, Woodruff key
BSI, JIS, ANZ, DIN)
Hole - tapped (Inch, Metric) Screw and nut (Inch, Metric, DIN, Wood screw
ISO)
I-Beam (AISC Inch and Metric, Set screw (Inch, Metric, DIN, ISO) Worm
BSI, JIS, ANZ, DIN)
J-Bolt (Inch, Metric) Shaft Worm gear *
Key Sheet metal screw (Inch, Metric) Z-Section
818 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Knurled thumb nut (Inch, DIN) Shoulder screw (Inch, Metric, DIN,
ISO)
Lag screw (Inch, Metric) Sprocket *

* The spur gear, worm gear, sprocket, and pulley convert to a 3D object and 3D hub object.
This command creates the 3D equivalent of a selected 2D object. If a 2D object with no 3D equivalent is selected,
a beep sounds, a notice indicates that the object cannot be converted, and the object is deselected.
To create a 3D object from a 2D object:
1. Select the 2D object. Several 2D objects can be selected at one time.
2. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Create 3D Object from 2D
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Create 3D Object from
2D
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Create 3D Object from
2D

The 3D object is created with the same parameters as the 2D object.

2D Conical 3D Conical
Compression Compression
Spring Spring

Spring Calculator
The Spring Calculator command solves for spring rates and unit stresses based on compression spring parameters.
To calculate a spring rate:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Spring Calculator
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Spring Calculator
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Spring Calculator

The Spring Calculator dialog box opens.

 Spring Calculator | 819

2. Edit the compression spring parameters. To add to the list of available parameter values, see Adding
User-defined Information to Commands on page 1000.

Parameter Description
Units Sets the spring dimension units to Inches, cm, or mm
Method Select the method; as data is entered, the other dimensions are automatically
calculated
Dimensions The fields available depend upon the Method and the Type of Ends selected
Outside Diameter Enter the outside diameter
Mean Diameter Enter the mean diameter
Wire Diameter Enter the wire diameter
Solid Height Enter the solid height
No. of Active Coils Enter the number of active coils
Type of Ends Select Closed and Ground, Open and Ground, Closed, or Open to set the
type of ends on the spring
Properties The properties of the spring can be selected from the list or manually entered
Material Select the material to be used for the spring or select <Other> to set the
Modulus of Elasticity manually
Mod. of Elasticity Automatically entered based on the material selected; displayed in pounds per
square inch, newtons per square centimeter, or newtons per square millimeter,
depending on selected units. If <Other> was selected, enter the Modulus of
Elasticity manually.
Spring Rate Automatically calculated based on the spring parameters; displayed in the
selected units
820 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Unit Stress Automatically calculated based on the spring parameters; displayed in the
selected units
Place 2D spring on Select to draw a 2D spring according to the above parameters; if both check
drawing boxes are selected, the 2D and 3D springs are automatically aligned in the
drawing
Place 3D spring on Select to draw a 3D spring according to the above parameters; if both check
drawing boxes are selected, the 2D and 3D springs are automatically aligned in the
drawing

3. Click Close to exit the calculator.

Belt Length Calculator

The Belt Length calculator solves for either belt length or center distance between two pulleys.
To calculate belt length or center distance:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Belt Length Calculator
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Belt Length
Calculator
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Belt Length
Calculator

The Belt Length Calculator dialog box opens.

 Chain Length Calculator | 821

Parameter Description
Find Select whether to calculate the Belt Length or the Center Distance between
pulleys
(1) Diameter Enter the first pitch diameter
(2) Diameter Enter the second pitch diameter
(3) Center Distance If calculating the belt length, enter the Center Distance
Belt Length If calculating the center distance, enter the Belt Length
Place data on drawing Select to insert the calculated data on the drawing

2. Enter the known values, and then click Solve.

The belt length or center distance value displays.
If the center distance value is unknown, leave the field blank, and then click Solve. The minimum distance is
displayed. Click Solve again to solve for the belt length based on the minimum center distance.
3. Click Close to exit the calculator.

Chain Length Calculator

The Chain Length calculator solves for either the length of a chain or center distance between two sprockets.
To calculate chain length or center distance:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Chain Length
Calculator
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Chain Length
Calculator
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Chain Length
Calculator

The Chain Length Calculator dialog box opens.

822 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Chain and Sprocket Data
Find Select whether to calculate the Chain Length or the Center Distance
between sprockets
Std.Chain No. (Pitch) Select the pitch of the chain
(1) Number of Teeth, Enter the number of teeth of sprocket #1
Sprocket #1
(2) Number of Teeth, Enter the number of teeth of sprocket #2
Sprocket #2
(3) Center Distance or If calculating the chain length, enter the Center Distance; if
Chain Length calculating the center distance, enter the Chain Length
Chain Length or Center Depending on the Find selected, the chain length or center distance
Distance calculation is displayed
Placement Options
Place chain on drawing Inserts the continuous chain onto the drawing, based on the specified
and calculated values
 Control Values for Keys | 823

Parameter Description
Place sprockets on drawing Inserts the two sprockets onto the drawing based on the specified and
calculated value

Sprocket #1 (N1) Sprocket #2 (N2)

Group the objects Select to group the objects when inserted onto the drawing; if
deselected, the objects are ungrouped when inserted onto the drawing
and are editable in the Object Info palette
Place data on drawing When selected, inserts the calculated data onto the drawing

The Chain Length value can be entered based on the number of pitches multiplied by the pitch value.
2. Enter the known values, and then click Solve.
The chain length or center distance value displays.
If the center distance value is unknown, leave the field blank, and then click Solve. The minimum distance is
displayed. Click Solve again to solve for the chain length based on the minimum center distance.
3. Select the desired placement options.
4. Click OK.
5. If placement options were selected, the cursor changes to a bulls eye. Click in the drawing to insert the chain and/
or sprockets. If Place data on the drawing was selected, click again to insert the calculated data.
6. Click OK to close the calculator.

Control Values for Keys

The Control Values for Keys calculator solves for the key depths of a given shaft and the key size.
To calculate the control values:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Control Values for Keys
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Control Values for
Keys
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Control Values for
Keys

The Depth Control Values for Keys dialog box opens.

2. Select Recommended Key Size to use the recommended key size according to the ASME or ISO standard;
otherwise, select Custom Key Size to enter custom key sizes.
824 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Nom. Shaft Diameter (D) Enter the size of the shaft
Recommended Key Size Select to use the recommended key size according to the ASME or ISO
standard
Square Select to use the recommended square key
Rectangular Select to use the recommended rectangular key
Key Width (W)/Height Displays the dimensions of the recommended key
(H)
Custom Key Size Select to use custom key sizes
Key Width (W) Enter the width of the key
Key Height (H) Enter the height of the key
Solution
Depth to Bottom of Key Displays the dimension from the bottom of the shaft to the bottom of the
(S) key
Depth to Top of Key (T) Displays the dimension from the bottom of the shaft to the top of the key
Place data on drawing Select to insert the calculated data on the drawing

3. Click Solve.
The key depth values for the given shaft diameter and key size are displayed.
 Shaft Analysis | 825

4. Click Close to exit the calculator.

Shaft Analysis
The Shaft Analysis utility analyzes the results of a twisting moment being applied to a round solid or hollow shaft.
To perform the analysis:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Shaft Analysis
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Shaft Analysis
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Shaft Analysis

The Shaft Analysis dialog box opens.

2. Enter the shaft properties and the known value in the Solutions section. To add to the list of available units, see
Adding User-defined Information to Commands on page 1000.

Parameter Description
Shaft Analysis Enter the shaft properties; the analysis results are based on the properties
provided
(1) Outside Diameter Enter the outside diameter of the shaft; select the desired units from the menu
Inside Diameter Enter the inside diameter of the shaft; enter zero for a solid shaft
Polar Moment of Automatically calculated from the outside and inside diameters
Inertia
(2) Length Enter the length of the shaft
Shear Modulus Enter the value of the shear modulus; select the desired units from the menu
Solutions Select and enter the known value
826 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
(3) Twisting Moment Enter the twisting moment; select the desired units from the menu
Maximum Shear Enter the maximum shear stress; the units are set by the Shear Modulus value
Stress
(4) Angle of Twist Enter the angle of twist in degrees

3. Click Solve.
The unknown values in the Solutions section are solved based on the information given.
4. Click Close to exit the shaft analysis calculator.

Centroid
The Centroid utility calculates the centroid, or center of gravity, of a 2D shape. The utility shows the location of the
centroid and can place a locus at that point. For more information, see Obtaining Engineering Properties on page 335
in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
To place a centroid locus point on an object:
1. Select the object.
2. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Centroid
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Centroid
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Centroid

The Centroid dialog box opens.

3. The location of the centroid is displayed. Select Place locus at centroid to place a locus marker at the centroid of
the object.
4. Click OK.
If the object is moved, the locus point does not remain centroidal unless the object and locus point are grouped and
then moved.

Conversion Factors
The Conversion Factors utility provides the conversion factor between units.
 Solution of Triangles | 827

To perform a conversion factor calculation:

1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Conversion Factors
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Conversion
Factors
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Conversion Factors

The Conversion Factors dialog box opens.

2. In the Multiply field, enter the number of units to convert. Select the original unit of measure from the Multiply
list.
3. Select the target unit of measure from the To Obtain list. The conversion results display in the To Obtain field
and the conversion factor displays in the By field.
4. Click OK to exit the utility.

Solution of Triangles
The Solution of Triangles utility solves for unknown values of a triangle.
To solve for the unknown values of a triangle:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Solution of Triangles
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Solution of
Triangles
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Solution of
Triangles

The Solution of Triangles dialog box opens.

2. Select the format of the known values, and then enter them in the fields below.
3. Click Solve. The calculated values display in the Solution fields.
828 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

4. Click Close to exit the utility.

3D Properties
The 3D Properties utility calculates a 3D objects center of mass, radii of gyration, and mass properties based on
density or specific gravity, surface area, and volume. This can be used for 3D objects such as a sweep, extrude, or solid.
To display the 3D properties of an applicable object:
1. Select the 3D object.
2. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > 3D Properties
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > 3D Properties
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > 3D Properties

The 3D Properties dialog box displays the object surface area, volume, radii of gyration, and center of mass.
 3D Properties | 829

Parameter Description
Units Select the unit for displaying values
Places locus at centroid Select to place a locus point at the 3D center of the object
Place properties on Select to place a grouped text block containing the 3D property values on
drawing the drawing at the next mouse click
Write properties to a file Select to create a text file containing the 3D property values

3. Click Calculate Mass Properties.

The Mass Properties dialog box displays the weight, mass, and mass moments of inertia of the object.
4. Specify the system of units to use when calculating the mass properties.
The mass properties calculations display.
830 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Input
System of Units Select the units to use for the calculation
Property to Use Select whether to display properties based on the density or specific gravity
Value Enter the material density or gravity value

5. Click OK to return to the 3D properties dialog box.

Simple Beam
The Vectorworks Design Series products include a design template containing the components needed to analyze a
simple beam with one or two supports.
The Simple Beam command creates a diagram which shows reactions, stresses and deflection of a simple beam. This
information is also available in two worksheets included in the template.

Simple Beam Template File

To open the simple beam template:
1. Select File > New.
The Create Document dialog box opens.
2. Select Use document template, and choose the Simple Beam (Imperial).sta or Simple Beam (Metric).sta
template.
3. Click OK.
The new file opens with a blank simple beam diagram.

Configure Simple Beam Properties

To analyze a simple beam and create the diagrams:
1. Select the appropriate command.
 Simple Beam | 831

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Simple Beam
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Simple Beam
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Simple Beam

The Simple Beam dialog box opens.

2. Click Configure Beam.

The Configure Beam dialog box opens.

3. Specify the beam properties, and then click OK to close the Configure Beam dialog box. The simple beam graphic
is automatically updated.
To add to the list of available units choices, see Adding User-defined Information to Commands on page 1000.

Parameter Description
Support Configuration Select the support configuration
Beam Dimensions
832 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Beam Length Enter the beams length and select the units
Left Support Distance Enter the distance of the left support from the left side of the beam
Distance Between Enter the distance between the supports
Supports
Calculation Interval Enter the value at which to calculate and display stresses and other
information
Deflection Units Set the units for calculating the deflection
Beam Properties
Modulus of Elasticity Enter the value of the modulus of elasticity and units for the beam
Moment of Inertia Enter the moment of inertia and units for the beam
Section Modulus Enter the section modulus value and units for the beam
Select Structural Shape Opens the Select Structural Shape and Material dialog box for selection of a
and Material structural shape, series, size, and material for the beam and axis about
which the properties are needed (see Structural Shapes and Details on
page 473 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide or see Creating
Structural Shapes in Vectorworks Design Series on page 135). Click OK
to return to the Configure Beam dialog box; the beam properties section is
updated with these values for the selected structural shape, and the fields
can be manually adjusted as needed.

4. Click Define Loads on the Simple Beam dialog box.

The Add/Remove/Change Loads dialog box opens.

5. Select the Load Units.

The Length Units value defaults from the Beam Properties dialog box. The Distributed Load Units and
Moment Load Units values default from both the Load Units field and Beam Properties dialog box.
 Simple Beam | 833

6. Select the check box next to Load # 1. Select the load Type from the list. Enter a value for each of the available
fields for this load.
7. Enter the necessary values for each additional load, and then click OK.
The simple beam graphic is automatically updated.
8. In the Simple Beam dialog box, click Calculate Reactions, and then click Calculate Stresses and Deflection.
Click Done.
Shear, Bending Moment, Slope, and Deflection diagrams are created based on the information provided. The
maximum values of vertical shear, bending moment, flexural stress, and deflection are calculated and displayed.
Click any of the buttons on the Simple Beam dialog box to enter new drawing parameters. The simple beam
diagram is automatically updated for analysis.

Load #2
Load #1

Displayed after
clicking Calculate
Reactions

Displayed after clicking

Calculate Stresses and
Deflection

Simple Beam Worksheets

Two worksheets are supplied with the Simple Beam (Imperial).sta and Simple Beam (Metric) templates:

Worksheet Description
Beam & Load Data This worksheet contains the information from the Beam Properties and
Add/Remove/Change Loads dialog boxes, as well as the reactions that were
calculated when Calculate Reactions was clicked. This information is used
to calculate the shear, bending moment, deflection, and stresses, and should
not be manually edited.
Results This worksheet contains the calculated values for shear, bending moment,
stresses, slope, and deflection at the Calculation Interval specified in the
Beam Properties dialog box.
834 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

The worksheets are accessed by selecting them from the Window > Worksheets menu. They automatically update to
show the current calculations each time the Simple Beam command is run.

Simple Beam Analysis

The Simple Beam Analysis command opens a message box displaying the calculated values that correspond to the
cursor position.
To analyze a simple beam:
1. Create the beam and diagrams as described in Simple Beam on page 830.
2. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Simple Beam Analysis
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Simple Beam
Analysis
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Simple Beam
Analysis

A message dialog box opens at the bottom of the screen, displaying x (location on the beam), vx (shear), mx
(bending moment), sx (shearing stress), and y (deflection) values.
 Simple Beam Calculator | 835

The values displayed depend on the location of the cursor along the beam and the Calculation Interval specified
in the Beam Properties dialog box.
3. Click on a blank area of the drawing to stop the analysis. Close the message dialog box.
To lock the values in the message dialog box, click on a point along the beam. The values at this point can then be
studied or written down for future analysis. Select the Simple Beam Analysis command again to continue
checking values along the beam.

Simple Beam Calculator

The Simple Beam Calculator command provides a quick way to analyze a simply-supported beam with a single load.
To use the Simple Beam Calculator:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Framing > Simple Beam Calculator
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Simple Beam
Calculator
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Simple Beam
Calculator

The Simple Beam Calculator dialog box opens.

836 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

2. Select the desired configuration, and then enter the values to be calculated.

Parameter Description
Configuration Select the simple beam configuration to analyze; the preview window
updates to correspond to the selected configuration
Input
Units Select Imperial or Metric (SI) as the displayed unit value
Beam and Load Data Select Imperial or Metric (SI) as the displayed unit value
Beam Length (L) Enter the length of the beam
Concentrated Load (P) Enter the value of a concentrated load or loads
Dist. from end of Enter the distance from the end of the beam to the load
beam (a)
Distributed Load (w) Enter the value per unit length of a distributed load
Beam Properties
Modulus of Elasticity Enter the modulus of elasticity of the beam
Moment of Inertia Enter the moment of inertia of the beam
Section Modulus Enter the section modulus of the beam
 Cam Design | 837

Parameter Description
Select Structural Opens the Select Structural Shape and Material dialog box for selection of a
Shape and Materials structural shape, series, size, and material for the beam and axis about
which the properties are needed (see Structural Shapes and Details on
page 473 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide or see Creating
Structural Shapes in Vectorworks Design Series on page 135). Click OK
to return to the Simple Beam Calculator dialog box; the beam properties
section is updated with these values for the selected structural shape, and
the fields can be manually adjusted as needed.
Solution
Reaction at Left End Displays the reaction at the left support
(rL)
Reaction at Right End Displays the reaction at the right support
(rR)
Moment at Left End Displays the bending moment at the left support
(mL)
Moment at Right End Displays the bending moment at the right support
(mR)
Max. Shear (vMax) Displays the maximum vertical shear
Max. Bending Displays the maximum bending moment
Moment (mMax)
Max. Shear Stress Displays the maximum shear stress
Max. Deflection Displays the maximum deflection
at x (from left end) Displays the point from the left end of the beam at which the maximum
deflection occurs

Certain input fields may appear dimmed depending on the configuration selected.
3. Click Solve.
The results are displayed in Solution.
4. Click Close to exit the Simple Beam Calculator dialog box.

Cam Design
The cam design tool can be animated and generates cam data worksheets and diagrams.

Cam Template
To use the cam design tool, open a new file and select the Cam (Imperial).sta or Cam (Metric).sta template.
To open the cam template:
1. Select File > New.
The Create Document dialog box opens.
2. Select Use document template, and choose the Cam (Imperial).sta or Cam (Metric).sta template.
3. Click OK. The new file opens, with a cam inserted by default. The file contains Cam and Diagrams layers.
838 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

The recommended procedure to include a cam in a Vectorworks drawing is to copy and paste it into the drawing,
and convert it to a group by selecting it and selecting Modify > Convert > Convert to Group.

Cam Properties
The cam object is a point object located in the Cam (Imperial).sta and Cam (Metric).sta templates. Cam properties can
be edited in the Object Info palette.
Follower Offset

Offset Circle Prime Circle

Follower Diameter

Parameter Description
Prime Circle Radius Specify the prime circle radius
Cam Type Select plate or groove
Outside Dia. Enabled if Groove is selected in Cam Type. Enter the outside diameter for
groove cam types.
Cam Drawing Incr. Enter the cam drawing increment, in degrees; this parameter affects how the
(Deg.) cam is drawn. The larger the value, the less smoothly the cam is drawn.
Cam Speed (rpm) Specify the cam rotation in revolutions per minute (rpm); this value is used
to calculate the velocity and acceleration of the cam follower
 Cam Design | 839

Parameter Description
Follower Type Select one of the follower types

Radial Translating Offset Translating Pivot Offset Pivot

Follower Dia. Enter the follower diameter

Follower Offset Enabled if Offset Translating Roller or Offset Pivot Roller is selected in
Follower Type. Indicate the distance between the center of the cam and the
follower center for the offset follower types.
Pivot X/Y (from cam Enabled if Pivot Roller is selected in Follower Type. Specify the x and y
center) distance from the cam center to the pivot arm for pivot roller follower types.
Pivot X

Pivot Y

Draw Followers Select to display the followers

Follower Incr. (Deg.) Determine at what angles to display followers by entering the follower
increment in degrees (to show only the actual follower, enter 360). If a
segment of the cam ends on an angle that does not correspond to the
follower increment, the additional follower is also displayed.
Draw Prime and Offset Select to display both the prime and offset circles
Circles

Prime circle

Offset circle (offset

follower types only)
840 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Draw Follower Path Select to display the follower path

Follower path

Draw Radii Select to draw a radius from each follower to the center mark

Follower radius

Draw Center Mark Select to draw a center mark

Center mark

Data Incr. (Deg.) Specify the increment at which the displacement, velocity, and acceleration
of the cam follower are calculated for the worksheet and text file
Define Cam Profile Click to specify the profile of each cam segment; for more information, see
Defining the Cam Profile on page 840
Write Data to Click to write the results (displacement, velocity, and acceleration) to the
Worksheet worksheet named Cam Data, using the increment specified by Data Incr.
Write Data to Text File Click to write the results (displacement, velocity, and acceleration) to a text
file using the increment specified by Data Incr.
Animate Click to animate the cam; for more information, see Animating Cam
Movement on page 841
Reset Cam to 0 Click to position the cam back to zero degrees; for more information, see
Resetting the Cam to Zero Degrees on page 842

Defining the Cam Profile

Specify the profile of each cam segment in the Define Cam Profile dialog box.
To define the cam profile:
1. Select the cam, and click Define Cam Profile on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette.
The Enter Value dialog box opens.
 Cam Design | 841

2. Enter the number of cam segments and click OK.

The Define Cam Profile dialog box opens for specifying the parameters for each segment. Click OK to update
cam diagram.

Parameter Description
Type of Motion Select the type of motion for each segment
End Angle Specify the end angle for the segment
Displacement Specify the displacement at the end point of the
segment

Animating Cam Movement

The effect of parameter changes to the cam design can be evaluated by animating the cam.
To animate the cam:
1. Select the cam, and in the Object Info palette, click Animate.
The Rotate Cam dialog box opens.

2. Adjust the relative speed by moving the slider along the Speed bar.
3. Click Rotate.
The cam rotates at the relative speed specified and the follower moves accordingly.
Since the animation is for illustrative purposes only, the Cam Speed parameter does not affect the animation.
However, the animation is affected by the selected speed in the Rotate Cam dialog box; the larger the increment,
the faster the cam appears to rotate. In addition, the computer processor speed also affects the apparent animation
speed.
4. To stop the cam rotation, press any key or click anywhere on the screen.
842 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Resetting the Cam to Zero Degrees

Once the cam rotation stops, the position of the cam remains where it was when it was stopped. To reset the cam to zero
degrees (original position), click Reset Cam to 0 on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette.

Cam Data Worksheets

Two worksheets are defined in the Cam (Imperial).sta and Cam (Metric).sta templates:
Cam Data lists cam data, such as rotation angle, follower displacement, velocity, and acceleration
Cam Properties lists the cam parameters from the Object Info palette
The worksheets are accessed by selecting them from the Window > Worksheets menu or from the Resource Browser.
The Cam Properties worksheet updates when the Define Cam Profile dialog box is exited (see Defining the Cam
Profile on page 840). The Cam Data worksheet updates when the cam properties are changed. The worksheets can be
placed on the drawing as graphic objects, if desired (see Worksheets as Graphic Objects on page 846 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
To prevent slower performance, when changing cam properties, keep the Cam Data worksheet closed.

Cam Diagrams
Diagrams of the cam follower displacement, velocity and acceleration are created automatically from the current cam
properties.

The diagrams exist on the Diagrams layer.

To display or update the diagrams:
1. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Draw Cam Diagrams
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Draw Cam
Diagrams
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Draw Cam
Diagrams
 Geneva Mechanism | 843

2. The cam diagrams are displayed. To return to the cam, select Cam from the Layers list on the View bar.

Geneva Mechanism
The Geneva mechanism device produces intermittent rotational motion of the driven part (index plate) while the driver
rotates at a constant speed.

Geneva Mechanism Template

The Geneva mechanism is available in the Geneva Mechanism (Imperial).sta and Geneva Mechanism (Metric).sta
template files.
To open the Geneva mechanism template:
1. Select File > New.
The Create Document dialog box opens.
2. Select Use document template, and choose the Geneva Mechanism (Imperial).sta or Geneva Mechanism
(Metric).sta template.
3. Click OK.
The new file opens with a Geneva mechanism inserted by default.
The recommended procedure to include a Geneva mechanism in a Vectorworks drawing is to copy and paste it
into the drawing and convert it to a group by selecting it and selecting Modify > Convert > Convert to Group.

Geneva Mechanism Properties

The Geneva mechanisms properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Center Distance
Follower
Dist.
Number of Points = 6
Cam Clearance
Driver
Lighting Hole Center
Distance

Cam Dia.
Index Plate Dia.
Driver Dia.

Cam Lighting Hole Dia.

Cutout R
Index Plate
Follower Dia.

Parameter Description
Number of Points Enter the number of points on the index plate
Center Distance Enter the distance between the center of the index plate and the driver
Follower Dia. Enter the follower diameter
844 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Cam Clearance Enter the cam clearance
Cam Dia. Enter the cam diameter
Driver Dia. Enter the driver diameter
Index Plate Dia. (Ref.) Displays the diameter of the index plate
Follower Dist. (Ref.) Displays the follower distance
Cam Cutout Radius Displays the cam cutout radius
(Ref.)
Lighting Holes Select to place lighting holes on the driver
Number Enter the number of lighting holes
Diameter Enter the diameter of the lighting holes
Center Distance Enter the distance between the center of the lighting holes about the
driver
Show Center Marks Select to place center mark symbols on the index plate and cam/driver
Show Center Lines Select to draw the index plate and cam/driver with center lines

Animating Geneva Mechanism Movement

The effect of parameter changes to the Geneva mechanism design can be evaluated by animating the Geneva
mechanism.
To animate the Geneva mechanism:
1. Select the Geneva mechanism, and in the Object Info palette, click Animate.
The Rotate Geneva Mechanism dialog box opens.

2. Adjust the relative speed by moving the slider along the Speed bar.
3. Click Rotate.
The Geneva mechanism rotates at the relative speed specified.
4. To stop the Geneva mechanism rotation, press any key or click anywhere on the screen.

Resetting the Geneva Mechanism to Zero Degrees

Once the mechanism rotation stops, the position of the mechanism remains where it was when it was stopped. To reset
the mechanism to zero degrees (original position), click Reset Mechanism to 0 on the Shape tab of the Object Info
palette.
 Keyways | 845

Keyways
To insert a keyway:

1. Click the Keyway tool from the Detailing tool set.

2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Key Width Key Width

Key Height / 2
Key Height / 2

Diameter Diameter

Parameter Description
Shaft/Bore Diameter Enter the diameter of the shaft or bore
Type of Keyway Select one of the keyway types

Bore Keyway Shaft Keyway

Key Size Standard Select inch or metric for the key size standard
Type of Key Select a square, rectangular, or woodruff key shape
Use Recommended Key Size Select to use the recommended ASME/ISO size based on the
diameter and key type; deselect to specify custom width and
height values
Key Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the width and height values
Show Center Line Select to draw the keyway with center lines

Screw Threads
To insert a screw thread:

1. Click the Screw Threads tool from the Detailing tool set.
846 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Diameter

Overall
Length
Thread
Length

Parameter Description
Diameter Enter the thread diameter
Overall Length Specify the overall length of the screw thread
Thread Length Specify the length of the threads only
Thread Pitch Indicate the thread pitch
Fillet Radius Specify the fillet radius
Thread Style Select one of the thread display styles. For Style 1, the shoulder diameter is equal
to the thread diameter; for Style 2, the shoulder diameter is equal to the pitch
diameter.

Simple - 1 Simple - 2 Schematic - 1 Schematic - 2 Detailed - 1 Detailed - 2

with Thread with Thread
Runout Runout
Thread Bottom Select flat or chamfered
Show Threads As For Simple thread styles, select dashed lines or solid lines

Dashed Solid
Lines Lines

Show Thread For Simple-1 and Schematic-1 styles, select to display the thread runout
Runout
Show Center Line Select to draw the screw threads with center line(s)
 Shaft Break 2 | 847

Shaft Break 2
The workspaces of the Vectorworks Design Series products contain the Shaft Break 2 object. All workspaces contain
the Shaft Break object (see Shaft Break on page 484 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

To insert a shaft break 2 object.

1. Click the Shaft Break 2 tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to define the start point, click again to define the end point and rotation, and drag the cursor and click to set
the width. If this is the first time the object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequently created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object
Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

For Shaft Break 2, click and drag the control point, and then
click in a different location to create a double shaft break (this
control point does not display for Shaft Break)

Diameter

Thickness

Width

Parameter Description
Shaft Diameter Specify the diameter of the shaft break object
Width of Break Specify the width of the shaft break object
Configuration Select Solid or Hollow

Solid Hollow

Wall Thickness For hollow shaft break configurations, indicate the thickness of the shaft
wall

Section Note
The Section Note object annotates the drawing or detail with section letters, and, if desired, a scale. The text attributes
are editable by the Format Text command.
848 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

To insert a section note:

1. Click the Section Point tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Parameter Description
Section Specifies the section note
% of Title Specifies the size of the section letters or numbers in relation to the section
name. Enter a percentage between 50 to 200.
Scale (opt) Displays the scale information below the section information, if desired

% of Title Specifies the size of the scale name and number in relation to the section
name. Enter a percentage between 50 to 200.
All Caps Select to display the section and scale names in capital letters
Underline Select the underline style, if desired

None 1 line 2 lines

Material Note
The Material Note object annotates the drawing or detail with material composition, and, if desired, scale. The text
attributes are editable by the Format Text command.

To insert a material note:

1. Click the Material Note tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Parameter Description
Material Specifies the material note
% of Title Specifies the size of the material letters or numbers in relation to the
material name. Enter a percentage between 50-200.
Scale (opt) Displays the scale information below the material information, if desired
 Center Line Marker | 849

Parameter Description
% of Title Specifies the size of the scale name and number in relation to the material
name. Enter a percentage between 50 to 200.
All Caps Select to display the material name in capital letters
Underline Select the underline style

None 1 line 2 lines

Center Line Marker

The Center Line Marker object denotes the center line on drawings.

To insert a center line marker object:

1. Click the Center Line Marker tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Parameter Description
Size (on paper) Specifies the size of the object
Style Select the center line marker style

1 2 3 4

Creating Detail Bubbles

A detail bubble assigns a detail number to the parts of an assembly drawing.
850 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

The information associated with the detail bubble can be used to create both parts lists and bill of materials lists.

Adding Detail Bubbles

To add a detail bubble:

1. Click the Detail Bubble tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing to place the bubble portion of the object. Click again to place the marker.
If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. If the
Attributes palette has not been set to use end markers, select the marker style, size, and angle from the Object
Properties dialog box.
If no Part Info record exists, one is created automatically the first time a detail bubble is placed in the drawing.

2nd click

1st click

The detail bubble number automatically increments as the bubbles are placed. Change the auto-incrementing
number by editing the Item Number field in the Object Info palette. When detail bubble placement resumes, the
last number entered becomes the starting number.

Detail Bubble Record Format

The Part Info record format stores the information for the detail bubble. This record format can be edited to add new
fields or to delete existing fields. To edit the record format, right-click on the record format in the Resource Browser
and select Edit. For more information on record formats, see Record Formats on page 188 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
If new fields are created, the existing Bill of Materials and Parts List worksheets need to be modified to reflect the
changes. Alternatively, create new worksheets to accommodate the new fields. For more information on using
worksheets, see Using Worksheets on page 814 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Editing Detail Bubbles

Detail Bubble Properties
Edit the detail bubble properties in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Min. Bubble Size Enter the minimum bubble size
Shape Select one of the bubble shapes

Round Triangle Square Diamond Hexagon

 Creating a Bill of Materials | 851

Parameter Description
Item Number Specify the number to display in the detail bubble; the item number is used for
bill of materials and parts list worksheets
Change Bubble Click to edit the bubble detail; for more information, see Editing Detail Bubble
Info Record Information on page 851

Once the detail bubble has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes
on page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Editing Detail Bubble Record Information

To edit the record information associated with a detail bubble:
1. Select the bubble, and then click Change Bubble Info on the Object Info palette.
The Edit Detail Bubble dialog box opens.

2. Enter the information associated with the detail bubble. The information can be used to complete the parts list and
bill of materials worksheets.
3. Click OK to return to the Object Info palette. If the Item # was changed, the change is automatically made to the
Object Info palette and the object.

Creating a Bill of Materials

The information associated with the detail bubbles can be included in a worksheet which automatically generates a bill
of materials list.

To create a bill of materials:

1. Once the detail bubble record information has been completed, select the appropriate command.
852 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Create Bill of Materials
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Create Bill of
Materials
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Create Bill of
Materials

2. With the bulls-eye cursor, click in the drawing to place the worksheet.
Alternatively, access the Bill of Materials worksheet object with the Resource Browser from the title blocks file in
the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Double-click the Bill of Materials worksheet object in the Resource Browser to place the worksheet graphic
object.
3. Double-click on the worksheet, or select Window > Worksheets > Bill of Materials, to open the worksheet.
From the worksheet menu, select Recalculate. The record information from the detail bubbles automatically fills
the worksheet, and all calculations are performed. For more information on worksheets, see Using Worksheets
on page 814 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. Close the worksheet. The worksheet graphic object on the drawing reflects the changes.
5. Reopen the worksheet and select Recalculate from the worksheet menu to update the worksheet when any
changes are made to the record information.
A parts list can be added to an ASME title block; see Sheet Border Properties on page 561.

Creating a Parts List

The information associated with the detail bubbles can be included in a worksheet which automatically generates a
parts list.

To create a parts list:

1. Once the detail bubble record information has been completed, select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Create Parts List
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Create Parts List
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Create Parts List
 Dimensioning and Tolerancing | 853

2. With the bulls-eye cursor, click in the drawing to place a Parts List worksheet.
Alternatively, select the appropriate parts list worksheet object with the Resource Browser from the title blocks
file in the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder (see Libraries on page 155 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide). Double-click the appropriate parts list worksheet object in the Resource Browser to place the worksheet
graphic object.
The Parts List-1 worksheet object is formatted to fit the ASME title blocks for ASME A, B, and C and ISO A2,
A3, A4, and A5 drawing sizes. The Parts List-2 worksheet object is formatted to fit the ASME title blocks for
ASME D, E, and F, and ISO A0 and A1 drawing sizes.
3. Double-click on the worksheet, or select Window > Worksheets > Parts List to open the worksheet. From the
worksheet menu, select Recalculate. The record information from the detail bubbles automatically fills the
worksheet, and all calculations are performed. For more information on worksheets, see Using Worksheets on
page 814 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
4. Close the worksheet. The worksheet graphic object on the drawing reflects the changes.
5. Reopen the worksheet and select Recalculate from the worksheet menu to update the worksheet when any
changes are made to the record information.

Dimensioning and Tolerancing

The Vectorworks Design Series products provide the tools required for dimensioning a drawing according to ISO and
ANSI/ASME geometric dimensioning and tolerancing standards.

The Feature Control Frame, Datum Feature Symbol, and Datum Target Symbol are inserted into the Dimension class
by default; control the appearance of these markers globally by editing the parameters of this class. The text
characteristics (font size and style) can be controlled with the Text menu.
For more information on editing class attributes and formatting text, see Setting Class Properties on page 109 in the
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Formatting Text on page 348 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.

Feature Control Frame

A feature control frame consists of a geometric characteristic symbol, up to two tolerance areas, and up to three datum
reference areas.
854 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Geometric Characteristic Material Condition

(w/Composite box) Projected Tolerance Zone
Tolerance Tolerance Area #2 Marker

Statistical Primary Datum

Tolerance Reference
Control points
Diameter Max. Projected Secondary and Tertiary
symbol Height Datum Reference

To insert a feature control frame:

1. Click the Feature Control Frame tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing to insert the feature control frame. Click again to set the rotation of the object.
If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. If the
Attributes palette has not been set to use end markers, select the marker style, size, and angle from the Object
Properties dialog box.
3. Set the feature control frame parameters in the Object Info palette.
If the leader is not immediately visible, drag it from the frame using the leader control points.

Parameter Description
Geometric Select the geometric characteristic symbol, if any
Characteristic

Angularity Circularity Concentricity Cylindricity Flatness

Parallelism Perpendicularity Position ProfileLine ProfileSurface

Simple Runout Total Runout Straightness Symmetry

Composite Box Select to increase the size of the geometric characteristic box; this is used
when placing a second feature control frame

Tolerance Area #1/ Select to include Tolerance Area #1 and/or Tolerance Area #2
#2
Tolerance Enter the tolerance value
Show Diameter Select to display a diameter symbol along with the tolerance value
Symbol
 Dimensioning and Tolerancing | 855

Parameter Description
Material Condition Choose the material condition, if any

Free LMC (Least Material MMC (Maximum Tangent

State Condition) Material Condition) Plane
Statistical Tolerance Select to display a statistical tolerance symbol

Projected Tolerance Select to display a projected tolerance zone symbol

Zone
Zone Height Enter the maximum projected tolerance zone height when a projected
tolerance zone symbol is displayed
Place the PTZ Select to place the projected tolerance zone symbol outside and to the
symbol outside the bottom of the feature control frame
FCF

Primary/Secondary/ Select to include the primary, secondary, and/or tertiary datum reference
Tertiary Datum
Reference
Reference Enter the desired reference letter
Material Select a material condition, if any
Condition

LMC (Least Material MMC (Maximum

Condition) Material Condition)
Leader Position Select left or right

Once the feature control frame has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker
Attributes on page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Datum Feature Symbol

A datum feature symbol consists of a marker, leader, and datum reference letter.
Marker
Leader

Datum Reference Control Points

letter

To insert a datum feature symbol:

1. Click the Datum Feature Symbol tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing to insert the datum feature symbol. Click again to set the rotation of the object.
856 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. If the
Attributes palette has not been set to use end markers, select the marker style, size, and angle from the Object
Properties dialog box.
3. Enter the datum reference letter (which corresponds to the Feature Control Frame reference letter).
Once the datum feature symbol has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker
Attributes on page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).

Datum Target Symbol

A datum target symbol consists of a marker, leader, and target with datum target letter and target area size.
Leader Marker

Target Area
Size
Control Points
Datum Target

To insert a datum target symbol:

1. Click the Datum Target Symbol tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing to insert the datum target symbol. Click again to set the rotation of the object.
If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. If the
Attributes palette has not been set to use end markers, select the marker style, size, and angle from the Object
Properties dialog box.
3. Set the leader and marker position by dragging the symbol control points with the mouse. Specify the remaining
datum target parameters in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Datum Target Specify the datum target letter/number combination
Target Area Size Enter the size of the target area
Show Diameter Symbol Select to display the diameter symbol with the target area size

Place target size outside When necessary, the target size can be displayed outside the symbol;
of symbol specify right or left Placement

Once the datum target symbol has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker
Attributes on page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
 Dimensioning and Tolerancing | 857

Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing Note

The Geom Dim and Tol Note tool is used to insert a notation symbol and text specifying the dimension of round,
square, counterbore, and/or countersink holes, and unit ratio for conical and/or flat tapers. Alternatively, a depth
symbol and associated text can be inserted.

To insert a geometric dimensioning and tolerancing note:

1. Click the Geom Dim and Tol Note tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click in the drawing to insert the note. Click again to set the rotation of the object.
If this is the first time the object has been inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. If the
Attributes palette has not been set to use end markers, select the marker style, size, and angle from the Object
Properties dialog box.
3. Specify the geometric dimensioning and tolerancing note parameters in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Precision Select the decimal place rounding value for the hole size and depth
Note Type Select the style of the note marker

Round Hole (and Depth) Square Hole (and Depth) Counterbore (and Depth)

Countersink Conical Taper Flat Taper Depth

Hole Size/ Enter the diameter for round, square, counterbore, and countersink holes; enter the
Taper unit ratio for conical and flat tapers
Tolerance Sets whether the hole size/taper has a single, double, limited, or no tolerance

None Single Double

Limit (1) Limit (2)

Top/Bottom Enter the value that is added to or subtracted from the base dimension to determine
the upper/lower limit of the dimension
Depth/Angle Enter the depth for round, square, and counterbore holes (if the depth is zero or less,
it is not displayed); enter the angle for countersink holes
858 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Tolerance Sets whether the depth/angle has a single, double, limited, or no tolerance

None Single Double

Limit (1) Limit (2)

Top/Bottom Enter the value that is added to or subtracted from the base dimension to determine
the upper/lower limit of the dimension
Leader Enter text to display before the dimension
Trailer Enter text to display after the dimension
Leader Line Select to place the dimension leader line to the right or left side of the object
Position
Shoulder Specifies the length of the leader lines shoulder
Length

Once the geometric dimensioning and tolerancing note has been placed, its marker can be selected from the
Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
4. If desired, create and set a leader line using the Selection tool. Click the symbol control point. Crosshairs display
to indicate the leader endpoint position. Click at the desired endpoint location; the leader line is drawn with the
marker style, size, angle, and the shoulder length specified in the object preferences.
Second click
First click

Welding and Surface Texture Symbols

Vectorworks Design Series products contain a comprehensive collection of welding symbols and also include a surface
texture symbol. All symbols are placed as point objects. Text attributes are controlled by changing the settings through
the Text menu commands.
 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 859

5.50

2.50 .50 4.00

32
.50 .38
.5

.5 x 45 CHAMFER
4.50
1/4 (3/8)
60
M
.64
.63

G
1/4
1/4
G

Fillet Welding Symbol

To insert a fillet welding symbol:

1. Click the Welding Sym-Fillet tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
4. Once the object has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Other Side Other Side
Length of Number Length of
Weld of Welds Weld
1/4 1-3 a25 10 x 30 (25)
1/4 1-3 a25 10 x 30 (25)
Weld Weld
Size Size
Pitch/ Pitch/
Spacing Arrow Side Spacing Arrow Side
Welding Symbol - Fillet (AWS) Welding Symbol - Fillet (ISO)

Parameter Description
Symmetrical (both sides Select to reflect the same information on both the arrow side and the other
the same as Arrow Side) side
(AWS Only)
860 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Configuration (ISO Select the data display configuration; if symmetrical is selected, the data
Only) on the other side is identical to the arrow side
a25 10 x 30 (25) a25 5 x 30 (50) a25 10 x 30 (25)
a25 10 x 30 (25) a25 10 x 30 (25) a25 5 x 30 (50)

Symmetrical (both Arrow Side Bottom/ Arrow Side Top/

sides the same as Other Side Top Other Side Bottom
Arrow Side)

Arrow Side/Other Side Select to display data on the arrow side, other side or both; if symmetrical
is selected, the displayed data applies to both sides
Weld Size Displays the size of the weld
Number of Welds Displays the number of welds
(ISO Only)
Length of Weld Displays the length of the weld
Pitch/Spacing Displays the pitch or spacing of the weld
Finish Contour Select the finish contour type

1/4 1-3 1/4 1-3

None Flush or Flat

1/4 1-3 1/4 1-3

Convex Concave

Finish Method Select the finish method type. A finish contour must be selected in order
to display a finish method.
1/4 1-3 1/4
C 1-3
Unspecified Chipping

1/4 1-3 1/4 1-3

G H
Grinding Hammering

1/4 1-3 1/4 1-3

M R
Machining Rolling

Finish methods are shown with the flat or flush contour

Stagger Select to indicate staggered welds

1/4 1-3 a25 10 x 30 (25)

1/4 1-3 a25 10 x 30 (25)

Staggered (AWS) Staggered (ISO)

Arrow Sets whether to have an arrow on the leader line

 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 861

Parameter Description
Position Select the side from which the arrow on the leader line extends (left or
right)
Reference Specify whether to include a reference note
Position Select the position of the reference note; by default, Left is selected if the
arrow is on the right, or Right is selected if the arrow is on the left
Ref. Line 1 If desired, enter the data to Typ 2 Sides
display in the first reference line See Section A-A
Ref. Line 2 If desired, enter the data to
display in the second reference
line
Ref. Line 3 If desired, enter the data to
display in the third reference line
Weld All Around Select to place a weld all around the marker
Field Weld Select to place a field weld flag
Position Sets the position of the field weld flag. Select Top |> to have the flag on
top facing right, Top <| to have the flag on top facing left, Bottom |> to
have the flag on bottom facing right, Bottom <| to have the flag on
bottom facing left.

Top |> Top <| Bottom <| Bottom |>

Groove Welding Symbol

To insert a groove welding symbol:

1. Click the Welding Sym-Groove tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
4. Once the object has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
862 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Groove
Groove Angle 60 Angle
60 3
1/8 Root
6 (10) Opening
1/4 (3/8) Root Opening
1/4 (3/8) 6 (10)
3
1/8 Depth of Bevel 60
Depth of 60
Bevel Weld Size

Weld Size
Welding Symbol - Groove (AWS) Welding Symbol - Groove (ISO)

Parameter Description
Symmetrical (both sides the Select to reflect the same information on both the arrow side and the
same as Arrow Side) (AWS other side
Only)
Configuration (ISO Only) Select the data display configuration; if symmetrical is selected, the
information on the other side is identical to the arrow side

60 45 60
3 3
3
6 (10) 5 (20) 6 (10)
6 (10) 6 (10) 5 (20)
3 3 3
60 60 45
Symmetrical (both Arrow Side Bottom/ Arrow Side Top/
sides the same as Other Side Top Other Side Bottom
Arrow Side)

Arrow Side/Other Side Select to display data on the arrow side, other side or both; if
symmetrical is selected, the displayed data applies to both sides
Weld Symbol Select the type of groove weld symbol to be displayed

<None> Bevel Flare - Bevel Flare - V

Scarf Square J U

V Back or Backing Melt Through Backing

Weld

Backing Consumable
(Remove) Insert
Weld Size Displays the size of the weld
Depth of Bevel Displays the depth of the bevel
 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 863

Parameter Description
Root Opening Displays the root opening
Groove Angle Displays the groove angle
Finish Contour Select the finish contour type

1/4 (3/8) 1/4 (3/8)

1/8 1/8
60 60

None Flush or Flat

1/4 (3/8) 1/4 (3/8)

1/8 1/8
60 60

Convex Concave

Finish Method Select the finish method type

1/4 (3/8) 1/4 (3/8) 1/4 (3/8)

1/8 1/8 1/8
60 60 60
C G
<Unspecified> Chipping Grinding

1/4 (3/8) 1/4 (3/8) 1/4 (3/8)

1/8 1/8 1/8
60 60 60
H M R
Hammering Machining Rolling

Finish methods are shown with the flat or flush contour

Arrow Sets whether to have an arrow on the leader line

Position Select the side from which the arrow on the leader line extends (left or
right)
Reference Specify whether to include a reference note
Position Select the position of the reference note; by default, Left is selected if
the arrow is on the right, or Right is selected if the arrow is on the left
Ref. Line 1 If needed, enter the data to
Typ 2 Sides
display in the first reference line See Section A-A
Ref. Line 2 If needed, enter the data to
display in the second reference
line
Ref. Line 3 If needed, enter the data to
display in the third reference line
Weld All Around Select to place a weld all around the marker
Field Weld Select to place a field weld flag
864 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Position Sets the position of the field weld flag. Select Top |> to have the flag on
top facing right, Top <| to have the flag on top facing left, Bottom |> to
have the flag on bottom facing right, Bottom <| to have the flag on
bottom facing left.

Top |> Top <| Bottom <| Bottom |>

Flange Welding Symbol

To insert a flange welding symbol:

1. Click the Welding Sym-Flange tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
4. Once the object has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Other Side Other Side
Flange Size Flange Size

3/32 + 1/16
1/8 2.5 + 2
1/64 4
Radius of Radius of 1
Flange Flange
Weld Size
Weld Size
Root Opening
Root Opening Arrow Side
Arrow Side

Welding Symbol - Flange (AWS) Welding Symbol - Flange (ISO)

Parameter Description
Type of Weld Sets the weld type

Edge-Flange Corner-Flange
Weld Weld
 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 865

Parameter Description
Configuration (ISO Only) Select the data display configuration

2.5 + 2 1
4
2.5 + 2
4 1

Arrow Side Bottom/ Arrow Side Top/

Other Side Top Other Side Bottom

Significance Select to display data on the arrow side or the other side
Weld Size Displays the size of the weld
Flange Size Displays the size of the flange
Radius of Flange Displays the radius of the flange
Root Opening Displays the size of the root opening
Complete Joint Penetration Select to display a complete joint penetration marker
Complete Joint Penetration Marker

3/32 + 1/16
1/8
1/64

Arrow Sets whether to have an arrow on the leader line

Position Select the side from which the arrow on the leader line extends (left or
right)
Reference Specify whether to include a reference note
Position Select the position of the reference note; by default, Left is selected if
the arrow is on the right, or Right is selected if the arrow is on the left
Ref. Line 1 If needed, enter the data to display
Typ 2 Sides
in the first reference line See Section A-A
Ref. Line 2 If needed, enter the data to display
in the second reference line
Ref. Line 3 If needed, enter the data to display
in the third reference line

Miscellaneous Welding Symbols

To insert a miscellaneous welding symbol:

1. Click the Welding Sym-Misc tool from the Dims/Notes tool set to insert a spot, seam, stud, or surfacing welding
symbol.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
866 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

4. Once the object has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Spacing or Pitch Number of Welds

Weld Size 3/8 2

(6) Weld Size 8 6 (50)

Number of Welds Spacing or Pitch

Welding Symbol - Miscellaneous (AWS) Welding Symbol - Miscellaneous (ISO) Spot

Spot Weld Weld

Parameter Description
Type of Weld Select the weld symbol type
3/8 2 3/8 1/2 - 2
(6) (6)
Spot Seam

3/8 2 3/8
(6)
Stud Surfacing

Configuration (ISO Only) Select the data display configuration

8 6 (50)
8 6 (50)

Arrow Side Bottom/ Arrow Side Top/

Other Side Top Other Side Bottom

Significance Sets where data displays about the leader line

8 6 (50) 8 6 (50)
8 6 (50)

Arrow Side Other Side None

Weld Size Displays the size of the weld. Applies to all weld types.
Length Displays the length of the weld. Applies to the seam weld only.
Spacing or Pitch Displays the desired spacing or pitch. Applies to spot, seam, and stud
welds only.
Number of Welds Displays the number of welds. Applies to spot, seam, and stud welds
only.
Finish Contour Select the finish contour type

8 6 (50) 8 6 (50)
None Flush or Flat

8 6 (50) 8 6 (50)

Convex Concave
 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 867

Parameter Description
Finish Method Select the finish method type

8 6 (50) 8 6 (50)
C
Unspecified Chipping

8 6 (50) 8 6 (50)
G H
Grinding Hammering

8 6 (50) 8 6 (50)
M R
Machining Rolling

Arrow Sets whether to have an arrow on the leader line

Position Select the side from which the arrow on the leader line extends (left or
right)
Reference Specify whether to include a reference note
Position Select the position of the reference note; by default, Left is selected if
the arrow is on the right, or Right is selected if the arrow is on the left
Ref. Line 1 If needed, enter the data to display
Typ 2 Sides
in the first reference line See Section A-A
Ref. Line 2 If needed, enter the data to display
in the second reference line
Ref. Line 3 If needed, enter the data to display
in the third reference line
Weld All Around Select to place a weld all around the marker
Field Weld Select to place a field weld flag
Position Sets the position of the field weld flag. Select Top |> to have the flag
on top facing right, Top <| to have the flag on top facing left, Bottom
|> to have the flag on bottom facing right, Bottom <| to have the flag
on bottom facing left.

Top |> Top <| Bottom <| Bottom |>

Slot-Plug Welding Symbol

To insert a slot-plug welding symbol:

1. Click the Welding Sym-Slot-Plug tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
868 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

4. Once the object has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide).
Other Side Other Side
Angle of Countersink
Depth of (6) Angle of Countersink Depth of Countersink
Filling 60 Spacing Filling 60 Spacing
3/8 1/4 1 1/2 - 2 1/2 8 10 6 (65)
3/8 1/4 1 1/2 - 2 1/2 8 10 6 (65)
Slot Width 60 Weld Size 60
(6) Slot
Length Number of
Number of Welds
Welds Arrow Side Arrow Side
Welding Symbol Slot-Plug (AWS) Welding Symbol Slot-Plug (ISO)
Slot Weld Plug Weld

Parameter Description
Type of Weld Select the weld type
3/8 1/4 2 1/2 3/8 1/4 1 1/2 - 2 1/2
60 60
(6) (6)
Plug Weld Slot Weld

Symmetrical (both sides the same Select to reflect the same information on both the arrow side and
as Arrow Side) (AWS Only) the other side
Configuration (ISO Only) Select the data display configuration; if symmetrical is selected,
the information on the other side is identical to the arrow side
60 45 60
8 10 6 (65) 8 10 6 (65) 8 10 6 (65)
8 10 6 (65) 8 10 6 (65) 8 10 6 (65)
60 60 45
Symmetrical (both Arrow Side Bottom/ Arrow Side Top/
sides the same as Other Side Top Other Side Bottom
Arrow Side)
Arrow Side/Other Side Select to display data on the arrow side, other side or both; if
symmetrical is selected, the displayed data applies to both sides
Weld Size (Plug Weld Only) Displays the weld size
Slot Width (Slot Weld Only) Displays the width of the slot
Slot Length (Slot Weld Only) Displays the length of the slot
Angle of Countersink Displays the angle of the countersink
Depth of Filling Displays the depth of the filling
Spacing Displays the spacing
Number of Welds Displays the number of welds
 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 869

Parameter Description
Finish Contour Select the finish contour type
3/8 1/4 2 1/2 3/8 1/4 2 1/2
60 60
(6) (6)
None Flush or Flat

3/8 1/4 2 1/2 3/8 1/4 2 1/2

60 60
(6) (6)
Convex Concave

Finish Method Select the finish method type

3/8 1/4 2 1/2 3/8 1/4 2 1/2
60 60
(6) (6)
C
Unspecified Chipping

3/8 1/4 2 1/2 3/8 1/4 2 1/2

60 60
(6) (6)
G H
Grinding Hammering
3/8 1/4 2 1/2 3/8 1/4 2 1/2
60 60
(6) (6)
M R
Machining Rolling

Arrow Sets whether to have an arrow on the leader line

Position Select the side from which the arrow on the leader line extends
(left or right)
Reference Specify whether to include a reference note
Position Select the position of the reference note; by default, Left is
selected if the arrow is on the right, or Right is selected if the
arrow is on the left
Ref. Line 1 If needed, enter the data to
display in the first reference
line Typ 2 Sides
See Section A-A
Ref. Line 2 If needed, enter the data to
display in the second
reference line
Ref. Line 3 If needed, enter the data to
display in the third
reference line
Weld All Around Select to place a weld all around the marker
Field Weld Select to place a field weld flag
870 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities

Parameter Description
Position Set the position of the field weld flag. Select Top |> to have the
flag on top facing right, Top <| to have the flag on top facing left,
Bottom |> to have the flag on bottom facing right, Bottom <| to
have the flag on bottom facing left.

Top |> Top <| Bottom <| Bottom |>

Surface Texture Symbol

To insert a surface texture symbol:

1. Click the Surface Texture Symbol tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Production Method
Roughness Value 1 (Max)
b
a1
Roughness Value 1 (Min) a2 c / f1 Roughness Value 2 (Max)
(e) = f2
Machining Allowance Roughness Value 2 (Min)
Surface Pattern

Parameter Description
Roughness Value 1 (Max) Displays the primary maximum roughness value
Roughness Value 1 (Min) Displays the primary minimum roughness value
Waviness Height Displays the waviness height
Roughness Value 2 (Max) Displays the secondary maximum roughness value
Roughness Value 2 (Min) Displays the secondary minimum roughness value
Surface Pattern Select the surface pattern type

=
None Parallel Perpendicular

X C
Crossed Multi- Approximately
Directional Circular

R P
Approximately Particulate or
Radial Non-Directional

Machining Allowance Displays the machining allowance

 Welding and Surface Texture Symbols | 871

Parameter Description
Production Method Displays the production method
Special Conditions Select the special condition

None Removal of Removal of

material material is not
required permitted

Same Condition on All Select to add a Same Condition on All Surfaces marker
Surfaces

Rotate Text with Symbol Select to rotate the text with the symbol
Clear All Fields Select to delete the current information from all fields

Editing the Arrow Segment

The arrow segment of each welding symbol has two control points for adjusting the segment position.
Leader shoulder

1/4 1-3

Leader end

To move the control points of an arrow segment:

1. Select the welding symbol to edit.
2. Click and hold the leader end control point.
3. Drag the leader end control point to the new location and click to set.

1/4 1-3
1/4 1-3

4. Click and hold the leader shoulder control point.

5. Drag the leader shoulder control point to the new location and click to set.

1/4 1-3
1/4 1-3
872 | Chapter 20: Design and Drafting Utilities
Fasteners 21
Vectorworks Design Series products include a variety of fastener objects that comply with ASME (inch and metric)
standards as well as ISO and DIN standards.

Inserting Fastener Objects Using the Fastener Tool

Several types of fastener objects can be inserted by clicking the Fastener tool from the Fasteners tool set and
specifying object parameters from the Tool bar.
The following modes are available.

Parameter Description
Screw or Screw/ Inserts a screw and nut object which can be comprised of a variety of screw,
Washer/Nut washer, and/or nut components; hex bolts, square bolts, hex screws, cap
Combination screws, and machine screws can all be inserted using this tool mode
Nut Inserts a nut object, including hex, hex jam, slotted hex, and square nuts
Plain Washer Inserts a plain washer object
Lock Washer Inserts a lock washer object
Shoulder Screw Inserts a shoulder screw object
Set Screw Inserts a set screw object
2D Front View Inserts the selected item as a 2D object in front view
2D Side View Inserts the selected item as a 2D object in side view
2D Top View Inserts the selected item as a 2D object in top view
2D Bottom View Inserts the selected item as a 2D object in bottom view
3D Object Inserts the selected item as a 3D object
ASME Inch Inserts the selected object using ASME inch standards
ASME Metric Inserts the selected object using ASME metric standards
ISO Inserts the selected object using ISO standards
DIN Inserts the selected object using DIN standards
Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box for specification of additional object
parameters

To insert a fastener object using the Tool bar:

1. Click the desired fastener object button in the Tool bar.

2. Click the Tool bar button to insert either a 2D object in a specific view or a 3D object.
For objects that do not have bottom view (because it is the same as the top view), the top view is drawn when
either the 2D Top View or 2D Bottom View mode is selected. The same applies to the front and side view.
3. Click the Tool bar button to insert the object using ASME (inch or metric), ISO, or DIN standards.
874 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

4. Click Preferences on the Tool bar to specify additional object parameters before placing the object in the drawing.
Parameters vary based on the object selected for insertion, and show the available variations for a specified object
size. Additional parameters display in the Object Info palette. Refer to the following table for detailed object
parameter information.
5. If inserting a linear object (such as a bolt, screw, or screw and nut object), click in the drawing area to set the start
point, drag to set the objects length, and click again to set the objects end point. For all other objects (such as
washers and nuts), click in the drawing area to place the selected point object.
After placement, fastener objects can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter Description
Screw or Screw/
Washer/Nut
Combination
Bearing
Bearing Length (Flat
Length Head)
Screw
Length Screw
Length
(Flat Head)

Size Size

2D 3D

View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Size Select the screw size (ASME inch), or the diameter/thread pitch (ASME metric,
DIN, and ISO)
Configuration Opens the Configuration dialog box to select size, screw/bolt, washer, and nut
type. See the following pages for illustrations of the available lock washers,
washers, and nuts. The list of screw/bolt, washer, and nut types varies
depending on the selected size. Not all types are available for all sizes.
Screw / Bolt Type Specify the screw/bolt type
Cap screw
ASME inch and
metric

Socket Flat Head Button Slotted Flat Slotted Round Slotted Fillister
Head Socket Head Head Head Head
Socket
ASME inch only
 Inserting Fastener Objects Using the Fastener Tool | 875

Parameter Description
Cap screw DIN ISO only
and ISO

Socket Flat Head Button Head

Head Socket Socket

Hex bolt/screw
ASME inch and
metric

Hex Bolt Heavy Finished Heavy Hex Heavy Hex Square

Hex Bolt Hex Bolt Screw Structural Bolt Bolt
(Hex Cap
Screw) ASME inch only

Hex bolt/screw ISO only

DIN and ISO

Hex Flange Hex Flange Heavy Hex Hex Flange Flange

Head Screw Head Screw Hex Bolt Bolt Screw Head Head Bolt
(Reduced Bolt (reduced
Shank) shank)
DIN only
Machine screw
ASME inch

Flat Countersunk Oval Truss Pan Fillister Round

Head (82 deg) Countersunk Head Head Head Head
Head

Machine screw
ASME metric

Hex Hex Flange

Head Head
876 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Machine screw DIN only
DIN and ISO

Flat
Countersunk
Head
Head Style For cap screws (ASME metric, ISO, and DIN), specify the head style
(ASME metric,
ISO, and DIN
only)

Chamfered Rounded

Top/Bottom Lock Select to draw a top and/or bottom lock washer; several lock washer types are
Washer available
Top/Bottom Select to draw a top and/or bottom washer; several washer types are available
Washer
Nut Select to draw a nut. For Hex, Style 1 and Hex, Style 2 nut ISO types, specify
either a regular or washer-face Nut Form; several nut types are available
Bearing Length Specify the bearing length or click and drag the bottom bearing length control
point to define the bearing length graphically
Bottom control point

Top control point

Screw Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Increments and
enter the length under the screw head; alternatively, click and drag the screw
length control point to define the length graphically

Screw length control point

.

Thread Pitch For ASME inch sizes, specify Unified National Coarse or Unified National Fine
(ASME inch only) threads

Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
Use Standard Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment based on size,
Length Increments per ASME, ISO, or DIN standards; deselect to enter a custom length
Adjust Screw Select to automatically adjust the screw length to keep the screw threads within
Length a nut or to prevent the bearing length from exceeding the screw length
Automatically
 Inserting Fastener Objects Using the Fastener Tool | 877

Parameter Description
Show Threads Select to create the 3D screw/bolt with threads

Draw Underhead Select to draw a fillet under the head of the 2D hex bolt/hex screw
Fillet
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D screw and nut with center line(s)
Nut

2D 3D
Size Select the nut size
Type Specify the nut type
ASME inch Hex nuts

Regular Heavy Thick Flat Heavy Flat Machine

Screw

Hex jam nuts

Regular Heavy Flat Heavy Flat

Slotted hex nuts

Regular Heavy Thick

Square nuts

Regular Heavy Flat Heavy Flat Machine

Screw

ASME metric

Hex, Hex, Hex Jam Heavy Hex Slotted Flanged

Type 1 Type 2

ISO

Hex, Hex, Thin, Thin, Slotted Flanged

Style 1 Style 2 chamfered unchamfered
878 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Form For Hex, Style 1 and Hex, Style 2 nut (ISO) objects, specify either a regular or
washer-face form

Regular Washer Face

DIN
Hex Hex Jam Square Square Thin Slotted Thin Slotted
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D nut with center line(s)
Show Hole Select to create the 3D nut with a center hole

Show Threads Select to create the 3D nut with threads

Plain Washer

2D 3D

Type/Series Specify the plain washer type

ASME inch

Type A Type A Type A

Narrow Regular Wide

Type B Type B Type B

Narrow Regular Wide
 Inserting Fastener Objects Using the Fastener Tool | 879

Parameter Description
ASME metric

Narrow Regular Wide

ISO

Small Normal Large

DIN Type is not applicable for DIN objects

Size Select the plain washer size

View Select the 2D view

Front Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D plain washer with center line(s)
Lock Washer

2D 3D

Series Specify the lock washer series (not applicable for DIN objects)
(ASME inch and
metric and ISO
only)
Regular Heavy Extra Duty Hi-Collar
ASME inch only

Size Select the lock washer size

View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D lock washer with center line(s)
880 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Shoulder Screw

Length

Size
2D 3D

Size Select the shoulder screw size

Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Increments and
enter the length under the screw head
Head Style (ISO Select the head style
only)

Plain Chamfered Rounded

Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882

View Select the 2D view

Front Top

Draw Underhead Select to draw a fillet under the head of the shoulder screw
Fillet (ASME
inch, ASME
metric, and DIN
only)
Use Standard Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment based on size,
Length Increments per ASME, ISO, or DIN standards; deselect to enter a custom length
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D shoulder screw with center line(s)
 Inserting Fastener Objects Using the Fastener Tool | 881

Parameter Description
Show Threads Select to create the 3D shoulder screw with threads

Set Screw

Length

Size
2D 3D
Head Type Specify the set screw head type
ASME inch and ASME inch only
metric

Hex Spline Slotted Square

Socket Socket

DIN and ISO

Hex Slotted
Socket
Point Type Specify the set screw point type
ASME inch and ASME inch only
metric

Cup/Flat Full Dog Half Dog Oval Cone

DIN and ISO ISO only DIN only

Dog Flat Cup Cone Half Dog

Size Select the set screw size

Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Increments and
enter the length under the screw head
882 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Thread Pitch For ASME inch sizes, specify Unified National Coarse or Unified National Fine
(ASME inch only) threads

Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Use Standard Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment based on size,
Length Increments per ASME, ISO, or DIN standards; deselect to enter a custom length
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D set screw with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the 3D set screw with threads

Fastener Object Thread Styles

There are several thread types common to multiple fastener tools. The available thread types vary by the drawing
standard being used.

DIN and ISO

ASME inch and ASME metric

Simplified Simplified Schematic Detailed Simplified

(ASME) (ISO)

Bolts
The following objects allow the creation and application of user-defined sizes:

bolts and nuts carriage bolts

eye bolts J-bolts
swing bolts swing eye bolts
T-bolts U-bolts

See Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects on page 998 for instructions on establishing custom object sizes.
 Bolts | 883

Bolts and Nuts

To insert a bolt and nut (mm or inch):

Click the bolt and nut point object from the Detailing tool set.

Bearing Length Bearing Length

(Square Bolt)
Bolt Length Bolt Length
(Square Bolt)

Bolt Size Bolt Size

2D (mm) 2D (inch)

Parameter Description
Bolt Type (inch only) Select the bolt type

Hex Bolt Square Bolt

Nut Type (inch only) Select the nut type

Hex Nut Square Nut

884 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Washer Type Select a washer type

Narrow Regular Wide

Bolt Size Select the bolt size
Bearing Length Specify the bearing length or click and drag the bottom bearing length
control point to define the bearing length graphically
Bottom control point

Top control point

Bolt Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Lengths and enter the
length under the bearing length; alternatively, click and drag the bolt
length control point to define the length graphically
Bolt length
control point

Thread Style Select the bolt thread style

Simplified Schematic Detailed

Add Top Washer, Top Select to draw the bolt with top and/or bottom washers and top and/or
Lock Washer, Bottom bottom lock washers
Washer, Bottom Lock
Washer
 Bolts | 885

Parameter Description
Add Nut Select to draw the bolt with a nut
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Use Standard Lengths Select to automatically adjust the bolt length to the nearest increment
based on size; deselect to enter a custom length
Adjust Bolt Length Select to automatically adjust the bolt length based on the bearing length
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D bolt and nut with center line(s)

Carriage Bolts
To insert a carriage bolt (round head/round head square neck bolt):

Click the carriage bolt point object from the Detailing tool set.

Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Series Select inch or metric to display the appropriate nominal sizes
886 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Bolt Type Select the carriage bolt type
Metric
Inch

Round Round Head Short Round Head Round Head

Head Square Neck Square Neck Square Neck with
Large Head
Size Select the carriage bolt size
Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Increments
and enter the length under the bolt head
Thread Style Select the thread style

Simplified ASME Simplified ISO Schematic Detailed

Use Standard Length Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment based
Increments on size, per ASME standards; deselect to enter a custom length
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D carriage bolt with center line(s)

Eye Bolts
To place an eye bolt:

Click the eye bolt point object from the Fasteners tool set.
Eye Inside
Diameter

Length
Thread Length

2D 3D
 Bolts | 887

Parameter Description
Size Specify the eye bolt size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or diameter/
thread pitch (metric)
Type Specify the eye bolt type

Plain Shoulder Bent

Eye Inside Dia Specify the eye bolts inside diameter
Length Specify the length under the bolt head
Thread Length Specify the thread length
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D eye bolt with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the 3D eye bolt with threads

Place Locus at Select to draw the eye bolt with a center locus
Center
Center locus
888 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

J-bolts
To insert a J-bolt:

Click the J-bolt point object from the Fasteners tool set.

Thread
Length
Length Bearing
Length
Bend Radius

Anchor
Length
2D 3D

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Size Specify the J-bolt size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or diameter/
thread pitch (metric)
Length Specify the bolt length
Thread Length Specify the thread length
Bend Radius Specify the radius of the bend
Anchor Length Specify the anchor length
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
Add Nut Select to draw the J-bolt with a hex or square nut; click and drag the control
point to adjust the nut placement graphically

nut and washer

control point

Add Lock Washer / Select to draw the J-bolt with a washer and/or lock washer; click and drag the
Washer control point to adjust the washer or lock washer placement graphically
Add Washer Select to draw the J-bolt with a narrow, regular, or wide washer
 Bolts | 889

Parameter Description
Bearing Length Specify the bearing length; if a nut or washer is added or removed, the
bearing length remains constant and the position of the existing objects is
adjusted accordingly (if the nut or washer is moved, the bearing length is not
automatically adjusted)
Anchor to the right Select to draw the 2D J-bolt with an anchor to the right or deselect to draw the
anchor to the left

Right anchor Left anchor

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D J-bolt with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the 3D J-bolt with threads

Swing Bolts
To insert a swing bolt:

Click the swing bolt point object from the Fasteners tool set.

Head Head
Width Thickness
Shoulder Length

Length
Thread Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Specify the swing bolt size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or
diameter/thread pitch (metric)
Head Width Specify the swing bolt head width
Shoulder Length Specify the swing bolt shoulder length
Head Thickness Specify the swing bolt head thickness
Length Specify the length under the bolt head
Thread Length Specify the thread length
890 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D swing bolt with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the 3D swing bolt with threads

Place Locus at Select to draw the swing bolt with a center locus
Center
Center locus

Swing Eye Bolts

To insert a swing eye bolt:

Click the swing eye bolt point object from the Fasteners tool set.
Eye Inside
Outside Diameter
Diameter

Length
Thread Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Specify the swing eye bolt size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or
diameter/thread pitch (metric)
Eye Inside Dia Specify the inside diameter of the eye
 Bolts | 891

Parameter Description
Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter
Length Specify the length under the bolt head
Thread Length Specify the thread length
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D swing eye bolt with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the 3D swing eye bolt with threads

Place Locus at Select to draw the swing eye bolt with a center locus
Center
Center locus

T-bolts
To insert a T-bolt:

Click the T-bolt point object from the Fasteners tool set.
892 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Head Size
Head Thickness

Length
Thread Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Specify the T-bolt size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or diameter/
thread pitch (metric)
Head Size Specify the T-bolt head size
Head Thickness Specify the T-bolt head thickness
Length Specify the length under the bolt head
Thread Length Specify the thread length
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Top Bottom

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D T-bolt with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the 3D T-bolt with threads

U-bolts
To insert a U-bolt:

Click the U-bolt point object from the Fasteners tool set.
 Nuts | 893

Length
Thread
Length

Inside
Distance

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Specify the U-bolt size in diameter/threads per inch (imperial) or diameter/
thread pitch (metric)
Inside Distance Specify the inside distance between the ends of the U-bolt
Length Specify the length from the inner portion of the U to the end of the legs
Thread Length Specify the thread length
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D U-bolt with center line(s)
Place Locus at Select to draw the U-bolt with a center locus
Center

Center locus

Show Threads Select to create the 3D U-bolt with threads

Nuts

Acorn Nuts
To insert an acorn nut:

Click the acorn nut point object from the Fasteners tool set.
894 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select the acorn nut size
Style Specify the acorn nut style

Low Crown High Crown

View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D acorn nut with center line(s)
Show Hole Select to create the 3D acorn nut with a center hole

Hex Cap Nuts

To insert a hex cap nut:

Click the hex cap nut point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select the hex cap nut size
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D hex cap nut with center line(s)
 Nuts | 895

Parameter Description
Show Center Hole Select to create the 3D hex cap nut with a center hole

Knurled Thumb Nuts

To insert a knurled thumb nut:

Click the knurled thumb nut point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size For knurled thumb nut (ASME inch), specify the size/threads per inch and
style. For knurled thumb nut (DIN) specify the size/thread pitch.
View Select the 2D view

Front Top
Show Detail Indicate whether to display a detailed view of the 2D knurled thumb nut

Detailed view Plain view

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D knurled thumb nut with center line(s)

Wing Nuts
To insert a wing nut:

Click the wing nut (DIN) point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D
896 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Size Select the wing nut size
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D wing nut with center line(s)
Show Hole Select to create the 3D wing nut with a center hole

Wing Nuts - Type A

To insert a type A wing nut:

Click the wing nut - type A point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select the wing nut size
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D wing nut with center line(s)
Show Hole Select to create the 3D wing nut with a center hole

Wing Nuts - Type B

To insert a type B wing nut:

Click the wing nut - type B point object from the Fasteners tool set.
 Nuts | 897

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Style Select the wing nut style

Style 1 Style 2

Size Select the wing nut size

View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D wing nut with center line(s)
Show Hole Select to create the 3D wing nut with a center hole

Wing Nuts - Type C

To insert a type C wing nut:

Click the wing nut - type C point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Style Select the wing nut style

Style 1 Style 2 Style 3

Size Select the wing nut size
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D wing nut with center line(s)
898 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Show Hole Select to create the 3D wing nut with a center hole

Wing Nuts - Type D

To insert a type D wing nut:

Click the wing nut - type D point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Style Select the wing nut style

Style 1 Style 2 Style 3

Size Select the wing nut size
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D wing nut with center line(s)
Show Hole Select to create the 3D wing nut with a center hole

Screws

Lag Screws
To insert a lag screw:

Click the lag screw point object from the Detailing tool set.

Length

2D 3D
 Screws | 899

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Series Select inch or metric to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Head Type Select the lag screw head type
Inch only

Hex Square

Nominal Size Select an inch or metric nominal size

Length Enter the length under the screw head
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D lag screw with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the lag screw with threads

Sheet Metal Screws

To insert a sheet metal screw (self-tapping screw):

Click the sheet metal screw point object from the Detailing tool set.

Length (Flat Length

head)

2D 3D
900 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Series Select inch or metric to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Head Type Select the sheet metal screw head type

Flat Oval Truss Pan Hex Hex

Washer
Slot Type Specify the slot type

Regular Cross Square

Point Type Select the sheet metal screw point type

Inch only

A AB B

Nominal Size Select an inch or metric nominal size

Length Enter the length under the screw head (or overall length for flat head screws)
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D sheet metal screw with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to create the sheet metal screw with threads

Thumb Screws
To insert a thumb screw:

Click the thumb screw point object from the Fasteners tool set.
 Screws | 901

Length

Size
2D 3D

Parameter Description
Screw Type Specify the thumb screw type

Type A, Type A, Type B, Type B,

Regular Heavy Regular Heavy

Point Type Select the thumb screw point type

Plain Cup/Flat Dog Oval Cone

Size Select the thumb screw size
Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Increments and
enter the length under the screw head
Thread Style Select the 2D thread style; see Fastener Object Thread Styles on page 882
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top

Use Standard Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment based on
Length Increments size, per ASME standards; deselect to enter a custom length
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D thumb screw with center line(s)
902 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Show Threads Select to create the 3D thumb screw with threads

Wood Screws
To insert a wood screw:

Click the wood screw point object from the Detailing tool set.

Length (Flat Length

head)

2D 3D

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Side Top Bottom

Series Select inch or metric to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Head Type Select the wood screw head type

Flat Oval Pan Round

Countersunk Countersunk
Nominal Size Select an inch or metric nominal size
 Clevis Pins | 903

Parameter Description
Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length
Increments and enter the length under the screw head (or overall
length for flat head screws)
Slot Type Specify the slot type

Regular Cross Square

Use Standard Length Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment
Increments based on size; deselect to enter a custom length
Show Threads Select to create the wood screw with threads
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D wood screw with center line(s)

Clevis Pins
To insert a clevis pin:

Click the clevis pin point object from the Fasteners tool set.

Length

Size

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select the clevis pin size
Use Standard Length (inch only) Select to automatically adjust the length to the recommended
standard length per ASME standards; deselect to enter a custom
length value
Pin Type (metric and DIN only) Specify the pin type for metric and DIN clevis pins

Type B (with Type A Form A Form B

holes) (no holes) (no holes) (with holes)
Metric DIN
Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length (inch)
or Use Standard Length Increments (DIN) and enter the desired
length
904 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Head Style Select the head style

Chamfered Rounded Headless

Metric and DIN only

View Select the 2D view

Top Side Head End Body End

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D clevis pin with center line(s)
Use Standard Length Increments Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment
(DIN only) based on standard sizes; deselect to enter a custom length

Cotter Pins
To insert a cotter pin:

Click the cotter pin point object from the Fasteners tool set.

Grip Nominal Size

Length

Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Cotter Pin Type Select square cut or hammer lock

Square Cut Hammer Lock

Bend Top Bend Bottom

Nominal Size Select the nominal size in inches

Grip Length Enter the grip length
Length Enter the pin length
Bend Angle (Top)/ Enter a bend angle in degrees for the top and/or bottom section of the
(Bottom) cotter pin
 Dowel Pins | 905

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Left Right Top Bottom

Side Side

Dowel Pins
To insert a dowel pin:

Click the dowel pin point object from the Fasteners tool set.

Length

Size

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Dowel Pin Type Select the type of ANSI dowel pin

ANSI Hardened ANSI Hardened ANSI Unhardened

Ground Machine Ground Production Ground

Nominal Size Select a nominal size in inches

Length Enter the pin length
View Select the 2D view

Side Left End Right End

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D dowel pin with center line(s)

Parallel Pins
To insert a parallel pin:

Click the parallel pin point object from the Fasteners tool set.
906 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Length

Size

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select the parallel pin size
Pin Type Select the pin type

Form A Form B
(phase and head) (phase only)

Length For a custom length, deselect Use Standard Length

Increments and enter the length value
View Select the 2D view

Top View End View

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D parallel pin with center line(s)
Use Standard Length Increments Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest
increment based on DIN standard sizes; deselect to enter a
custom length

Taper Pins
To insert a taper pin:

Click the taper pin point object from the Fasteners tool set.
Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select a taper pin size
Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Range (inch)
or Use Standard Length Increments (DIN) and enter the desired length
 Retaining Rings and Washers | 907

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Side Left End Right End

Inch

Side View End View

DIN

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D taper pin with center line(s)
Use Standard Length Select to automatically constrain the length to the standard range per
Range ASME specifications; deselect to enter a length value outside of the range
(inch only)
Use Standard Length Select to automatically constrain the length to the standard range per DIN
Range and Increments specifications; deselect to enter a length value outside of the range
(DIN only)

Retaining Rings and Washers

Retaining Rings
To insert a retaining ring:

Click the retaining ring point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Type Select the retaining ring type
ASME

Basic Internal Basic External Heavy Duty Basic Reinforced C-Ring

Ring Ring External E-Ring E-Ring
908 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
DIN

Bores, Regular Bores, Heavy Shafts, Regular Shafts, Heavy

Size (mm) Select the retaining ring size in millimeters

View Select the 2D view

Front Side-Section Side-Solid

Place Locus at Center Select to add a locus at the center of the retaining ring

Locus

Retaining Washers
To insert a retaining washer:

Click the retaining washer point object from the Fasteners tool set.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Groove Size (mm) Select the retaining washer groove size in millimeters
View Select the view

Front Side Side

Section Solid

Place Locus at Center Select to add a locus at the center of the retaining washer

Locus
 Rivets | 909

Rivets

Large Rivets
To insert a large rivet:

Click the large rivet point object from the Fasteners tool set.

Length
Length (Countersunk
Head)

Diameter

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Diameter Select a diameter in inches
Length Enter the length under the rivet head (or overall length for countersunk rivets)
Head Type #1 Select a head type for one end of the rivet

Flat Oval
Button High Button Cone Pan Countersunk Countersunk
Head Head Head Head Head Head

Head Type #2 Select a head type, if any, for the other end of the rivet
View Select the 2D view

Front Top
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D rivet with center line(s)

Small Rivets
To insert a small rivet:

Click the small rivet point object from the Fasteners tool set.
910 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Length
Length (Countersunk
Head)

Diameter

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Diameter Select a diameter in inches
Length Enter the length under the rivet head (or overall length for the countersunk
rivet)
Head Type #1 Select a head type for one end of the rivet

Flat
Button Flat Pan Truss Countersunk
Head Head Head Head Head

Head Type #2 Select a head type, if any, for the other end of the rivet
View Select the 2D view

Front Top
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D rivet with center line(s)

Rivets (DIN)
To insert a rivet (DIN):

Click the rivet point object from the Fasteners tool set.
 Rivets | 911

Length
Length (Countersunk
Head)

Diameter

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Diameter Select a diameter in millimeters
Length Enter the length under the rivet head (or overall length for the
countersunk rivet)
Head Type #1 Select a head type for one end of the rivet

Round Flat Round Mushroom Flat

Head Head Head Countersunk
Head

Head Type #2 Select a head type, if any, for the other end of the rivet
View Select the 2D view

Front Top

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D rivet with center line(s)

Tubular Rivets
To insert a tubular rivet:

Click the tubular rivet point object from the Fasteners tool set.
Length

Size

Uncompressed
Length
2D 3D
912 | Chapter 21: Fasteners

Parameter Description
Size Select a size in millimeters
Length For a custom length value, deselect Use Standard Length Increments
and enter the length
Form Select one of the rivet types

Form A Form B

View Select the 2D view

Side Top
Show Uncompressed Select to display the uncompressed 2D rivet length
Length
Use Standard Length Select to automatically adjust the length to the nearest increment based on
Increments DIN standard sizes; deselect to enter a custom length value
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D rivet with center line(s)
Machine Components 22
Vectorworks Design Series products include a wide variety of machine component objects.

Gears

Spur Gears
To insert a spur gear:

1. Click the Spur Gear tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Number of Hub Projection
Keyway Height Teeth = 48
Face Width
Recess Dia.
Recess Corner
Radius
Keyway Recess Fillet
Width Radius Pitch Outside
Hub Dia. Dia.
Bore Dia. Dia.

Hub Corner Root

Center Dia.
Distance Radius
Hub Fillet
Hole Dia. Number of Radius
Holes = 6

Spur Gear - 2D

Spur Gear - 3D
Hub - 3D

Parameter Description
Pitch Diameter Specify the pitch diameter
Number of Teeth Enter the number of teeth
914 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Pressure Angle Enter the pressure angle
Pitch Circle
Pressure
Angle

Diametrical Pitch Displays the diametrical pitch (for reference only)

(Ref.)
Module (mm) (Ref.) Displays the module (for reference only)
Outside Dia. (Ref.) Displays the outside diameter (for reference only)
Root Dia. (Ref.) Displays the root diameter (for reference only)
Tooth Profile Select the type of tooth profile

Detailed - Detailed - Simplified - Simplified -

Straight Involute ASME ISO

Face Width Enter the width of the gear face

Draw Recess To draw a recessed web, select Draw Recess and specify the 2D parameters
Web Thickness Enter the web thickness
Recess Diameter Enter the recess diameter
Recess Corner Specify the recess corner radius
Radius
Recess Fillet Indicate the recess fillet radius
Radius
Draw Hub Select to include a hub and then specify the 2D parameters
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Projection Specify the amount of projection for the hub on both the left and the right; a
(Left / Right) negative value indicates that the hub face is recessed
Hub Corner Enter the hub corner radius
Radius
Hub Fillet Radius Enter the hub fillet radius
Draw Bore Select to draw a bore and then specify the 2D parameters
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter
Keyway If a keyway is present, select the square, rectangular, or custom size;
otherwise, select None; the square and rectangular selections apply the
ASME-recommended size based on the bore diameter
Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the width and height values of the keyway
 Gears | 915

Parameter Description
Web Configuration Select the web configuration and then specify the 2D parameters, if any.
When Holes are selected, their size can be specified as a percentage or
diameter value.

Plain Holes Spokes

Number Indicate the number of holes or spokes for the gear (does not apply to Plain
web configurations)
Size (10 - 100%) For Holes (Percent) and Spokes web configurations, enter the percentage of
the recess opening occupied by the holes or spokes
Center Distance When Holes is selected for the web configuration, specify the distance
between the hole centers
Hole Diameter When Holes is selected for the web configuration, indicate the size of the
holes
View Select the 2D view

Front Side - Side - Side - Solid with Back

Section Solid Hidden Lines

Draw Center Lines Select to draw the 2D gear with center lines
Helix Angle Indicate the 3D spur gear helix angle
Hole Diameter Indicate the hole diameter for the 3D spur gear; when including a hub 3D
object in the drawing, adjust the spur gear hole diameter and hub outside
diameter to fit together

Spur Gear Racks

To insert a spur gear rack:

1. Click the Spur Gear Rack tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
916 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Circular Pitch = / Diametral Pitch

Circular Pitch = x Module
Pressure Angle Face
Width

Thickness

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Method Select whether to insert the spur gear rack using either a diametral pitch (for
imperial sizes) or module (for metric sizes)
Diametral Pitch or Specify either the diametral pitch or module, for the selected insertion
Module (mm) method
Pressure Angle Select the pressure angle
Number of Teeth Enter the number of teeth
Thickness Enter the base thickness
Face Width Enter the width of the spur gear rack face
View Select the 2D view

Front Top Side

Show All Teeth Select to draw the all teeth or just the end teeth
Draw Fillet Select to draw filleted spur gear rack teeth
Show Pitch Line Select to draw the 2D spur gear rack with a pitch line

Bevel Gears
A bevel gear set consists of a gear and pinion.

To insert a bevel gear:

1. Click the Bevel Gears tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Gears | 917

Key Width
Key Height

Bore Size

2D 3D

Pitch apex
Mounting distance

Face width

Hub diameter

Recess Pinion
Mounting distance

Shaft angle
Hub diameter
Fillet radii

2D

Parameter Description
Value to Use Select either Diametral Pitch or Module, and then enter the relevant
parameter
Diametral Pitch Enter the diametral pitch
Module (mm) Enter the module
Shaft Angle (deg.) Enter the shaft angle in degrees
Face Width Enter the face width
Configuration Select to use the gear parameter values for only the gear, only the pinion, or
for both the gear and the pinion; this can also be used to create miter gears
Gear Properties Specify the parameters to draw the gear
No. of Teeth Enter the number of teeth
Pitch Dia. (Ref.) Displays the pitch diameter based on the diametral pitch and number of teeth
Mounting Distance Enter the distance from the back of the gear to the pitch apex
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Projection Enter the hub projection, for styles with a projected hub
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter
Key Type If the gear includes a keyway, select keyway shape (with
ASME-recommended sizes), or select Custom size
Kwy Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the keyway width and height
918 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Recess If the gear has a recess, enter the recess value
Fillet Radius Enter the fillet radius of the hub
Pinion Properties For pinion only or gear and pinion configurations, specify the pinion
parameters
No. of Teeth Enter the number of teeth
Pitch Dia. (Ref.) Displays the pitch diameter based on the diametral pitch and number of teeth
Mounting Distance Enter the distance from the back of the pinion to the pitch apex
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Projection Enter the hub projection, for styles with a projected hub
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter
Key Type If the pinion includes a keyway, select keyway shape (with
ASME-recommended sizes), or select Custom size
Kwy Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the keyway width and height
Recess If the pinion has a recess, enter the recess value
Fillet Radius Enter the fillet radius of the hub
View Select the 2D view

Top Side Front-Section Front-Solid

Show Pinion at Left Select to display the pinion on the left side of the 2D bevel gear
Draw Center Lines Select to draw the 2D bevel gear with center lines
Show Teeth Select to draw the 3D bevel gear with teeth

Spiral Angle (Deg.) To draw a 3D spiral bevel gear, specify the spiral angle degrees for the teeth

Worm Gear Sets

Worm gear sets consist of a worm and worm gear. Create a worm gear set by following the instructions for creating
both a worm and worm gear.
 Gears | 919

2D 3D

Worm Gears

To insert a worm gear:

1. Click the Worm Gear tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Number of Bore Dia.

Holes = 6
Hub Fillet Radius
Hub Corner Radius
Keyway Width Pitch
Dia.
Hub Dia.
Recess
Dia. Recess Fillet Radius
Recess Corner Radius
Hole Dia.

Center Dist.
Hub Proj. (Left)
Keyway Height
Face Width
2D

3D
920 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Circular Pitch Enter the circular pitch
Number of Teeth Enter the number of teeth
Pitch Diameter (Ref.) Displays the pitch diameter of the gear, based on the pitch and
number of teeth
Pressure Angle (deg.) Select the pressure angle in degrees
Number of Starts (Worm) Select the number of starts of the worm
Pitch Dia (Worm) Specify the worm pitch diameter
Tooth Profile Select the type of tooth profile

Detailed Schematic

Face Width Enter the width of the gear face

Draw Recess Select Draw Recess to draw a recessed web, and specify the 2D
parameters
Web Thickness Enter the web thickness
Recess Diameter Enter the recess diameter
Recess Corner Radius Specify the recess corner radius
Recess Fillet Radius Indicate the recess fillet radius
Draw Hub Select to include a hub and then specify the 2D parameters
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Projection Specify the amount of projection for the hub on both the left and the
(Left / Right) right; a negative value indicates that the hub face is recessed
Hub Corner Radius Enter the hub corner radius
Hub Fillet Radius Enter the hub fillet radius
Draw Bore Select to draw a bore and then specify the 2D parameters
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter (2D and 3D)
Keyway If a keyway is present, select the square, rectangular, or custom size;
otherwise, select None. The square and rectangular selections apply
the ASME-recommended size based on the bore diameter.
Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the width and height values of the
keyway
 Gears | 921

Parameter Description
Web Configuration Select the gear configuration and then specify the 2D parameters, if
any. When Holes are selected, their size can be specified as a
percentage or diameter value.

Plain Holes Spokes

Number Indicate the number of holes or spokes for the gear (does not apply to
Plain web configurations)
Size (10 - 100%) For Holes (Percent) and Spokes web configurations, enter the
percentage of the recess opening occupied by the holes or spokes
Center Distance When Holes is selected for the web configuration, specify the
distance between the hole centers
Hole Diameter When Holes is selected for the web configuration, indicate the size of
the holes
View Select the 2D view

Front Side - Side - Side - Solid with Back

Section Solid Hidden Lines

Show Center Lines Select to draw the 2D gear with center lines

Worms

To insert a worm:

1. Click the Worm tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
922 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Face Width

Axial Pitch Keyway Width

Hub Proj. (Left)

Keyway Height

Pitch Dia.
Hub Dia.
Bore Dia.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Pitch Diameter Enter the pitch diameter
Axial Pitch Enter the axial pitch
Pressure Angle Select the pressure angle in degrees
(deg.)
Number of Starts Select the number of starts

Single Double Triple Quad

Tooth Profile Select the type of tooth profile

Detailed Schematic
Face Width Enter the width of the worm face
Draw Hub Select to include a hub and then specify the parameters
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Specify the amount of projection for the hub on both the left and the right; a
Projection negative value indicates that the hub face is recessed
(Left/Right)
Draw Bore Select to draw a bore and then specify the parameters
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter
Keyway If a keyway is present, select the square, rectangular, or custom size;
otherwise, select None. The square and rectangular selections apply the
ASME-recommended size based on the bore diameter.
Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the width and height values of the keyway
 Pulleys | 923

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Right Side Left Side Side - Section Front - Section

Show Center Select to draw the 2D worm with center lines
Lines

Pulleys
The pulley object accommodates both round belts and V-belts, and up to ten grooves.

To insert a pulley:

Click the Pulley tool from the Machine Components tool set.
4. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
5. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Face Width
Dist. To First Groove
Distance Between Grooves
Groove Width
Groove Angle Groove Depth
Groove
Radius
Recess
Dia.
Bore Hub Outside
Dia. Dia. Dia.

Web Thickness
Hub Projection

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Outside Diameter Enter the outside diameter
Groove Depth Enter the groove depth
Groove Width Enter the groove width
Groove Angle (deg.) Enter the groove angle
Groove Radius Enter the groove radius
924 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Number of Grooves Select the number of grooves (up to ten)
Dist. to First Groove Enter the distance from the left edge of the pulley to the center of
the groove (the first groove for multiple-groove pulleys)
Distance Between Grooves For multiple-groove pulleys, enter the distance between grooves
Face Width For multiple-groove pulleys, this value is automatically
calculated; for single-groove pulleys, enter the face width
Draw Recess Select Draw Recess to draw a recessed web, and specify the 2D
parameters
Web Thickness Enter the web thickness
Recess Diameter Enter the recess diameter
Recess Corner Radius Specify the recess corner radius
Recess Fillet Radius Specify the recess fillet radius
Draw Hub Select to include a hub and then specify the 2D parameters
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Projection Specify the amount of projection for the hub on both the left and
(Left / Right) the right; a negative value indicates that the hub face is recessed
Hub Corner Radius Enter the hub corner radius
Hub Fillet Radius Enter the hub fillet radius
Draw Bore Select to draw a bore and then specify the 2D parameters
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter
Keyway If a keyway is present, select the square, rectangular, or custom
size; otherwise, select None. The square and rectangular
selections apply the ASME-recommended size based on the bore
diameter.
Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the width and height values of the
keyway
Web Configuration Select the web configuration and then specify the 2D parameters,
if any. When Holes are selected, their size can be specified as a
percentage or diameter value.

Plain Holes Spokes

Number Indicate the number of holes or spokes for the sprocket (does not
apply to Plain web configurations)
Size (10 - 100%) For Holes (Percent) and Spokes web configurations, enter the
percentage of the recess opening occupied by the holes or spokes
 Sprockets | 925

Parameter Description
Center Distance For Holes web configuration, specify the distance between the
hole centers
Hole Diameter For Holes web configuration, indicate the size of the holes (2D
and 3D)
View Select the 2D view

Front Side - Side - Side - Back

Section Solid Solid with
Hidden Lines

Show Center Lines Select to draw the 2D pulley with center lines
Show Root Diameter Select to draw the 2D pulley with a root diameter

Sprockets
To insert a sprocket:

1. Click the Sprocket tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
926 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Number of Spacing
Holes = 6 Number of Rows = 3
Face Width
Keyway Height
Hub Fillet Radius
Hub Corner Radius
Keyway Recess
Width Dia.
Hub
Dia.
Pitch
Dia.
Recess Fillet Radius
Recess Corner Radius
Hole Diameter
Bore Diameter Hub Proj. (Left)
Center Distance 2D

3D

Parameter Description
Std. Chain No. (Pitch) Select the standard ANSI or ISO roller chain number; the pitch is
given as reference
Number of Teeth Enter the number of teeth
Pitch Diameter (Ref.) Displays the pitch diameter based on the pitch and number of teeth
Number of Rows Enter the number of rows of teeth
Tooth Profile Select the type of tooth profile

Simplified Teeth Curved Teeth Schematic Representation

Use Standard Width and Select to use standard Face Width and Spacing values based on
Spacing the selected Pitch; deselect to specify custom values and enter the
values
Face Width Enter the face width value
Spacing Enter the spacing between rows of teeth
Draw Recess Select Draw Recess to draw a recessed web, and specify the 2D
parameters
 Sprockets | 927

Parameter Description
Web Thickness Enter the web thickness
Recess Diameter Enter the recess diameter
Recess Corner Radius Specify the recess corner radius
Recess Fillet Radius Specify the recess fillet radius
Draw Hub Select to include a hub and then specify the 2D parameters
Hub Diameter Enter the hub diameter
Hub Projection Specify the amount of projection for the hub on both the left and
(Left / Right) the right; a negative value indicates that the hub face is recessed
Hub Corner Radius Enter the hub corner radius
Hub Fillet Radius Enter the hub fillet radius
Draw Bore Select to draw a bore and then specify the 2D parameters
Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter
Keyway If a keyway is present, select the square, rectangular, or custom
size; otherwise, select None. The square and rectangular
selections apply the ASME-recommended size based on the bore
diameter.
Width/Height For custom keyway sizes, enter the width and height values of the
keyway
Web Configuration Select the web configuration and then specify the 2D parameters,
if any. When Holes are selected, their size can be specified as a
percentage or diameter value.

Plain Holes Spokes

Number Indicate the number of holes or spokes for the sprocket (does not
apply to Plain web configurations)
Size (10 - 100%) For Holes (Percent) and Spokes web configurations, enter the
percentage of the recess opening occupied by the holes or spokes
Center Distance When Holes is selected for the web configuration, specify the
distance between the hole centers
Hole Diameter When Holes is selected for the web configuration, indicate the
size of the holes (2D and 3D)
928 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Side - Side - Side - Back

Section Solid Solid with
Hidden Lines

Draw Center Lines Select to draw the 2D sprocket with center lines

Roller Chains
To create a complete roller chain, it is usually necessary to combine linear and circular sections. Offset links may be
required to connect chain sections.
Linear Roller Chain

Linear Roller Chain

Circular
Roller Chain

Offset Link
Circular Roller Chain

2D 3D

Linear Roller Chains

The 2D linear roller chain is a linear object, while the 3D linear roller chain is a point object.

To insert a linear roller chain:

1. Click the Roller Chain - Linear tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Roller Chains | 929

Length
Pin links shown

Control
Point
Pitch
2D 3D

Parameter Description
Std. Chain No. (Pitch) Select the standard ANSI or ISO roller chain number; the pitch is given
as a reference
Length Specify the length of the 2D roller chain by entering a value here or by
clicking and dragging one of the chain control points; as the length
increases, the number of links increases (depending on the selected pitch)
No. of Links Enter the number of links; the length automatically adjusts
Start with Pin Link Select to begin the chain section with a pin link; otherwise, the section
begins with a roller link
Show Pins Select to show the 3D pins

Circular Roller Chains

To insert a circular roller chain:

1. Click the Roller Chain - Circular tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Pitch

Pin links shown

Number of
Links = 5

Start Angle

2D 3D
930 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Standard Chain No, (Pitch) Select the standard ANSI or ISO roller chain number; the pitch is
given as a reference
No. of Teeth (Sprocket) Enter the number of teeth on the associated sprocket
Pitch Diameter (Ref.) Displays the pitch diameter, based on the pitch value and the
number of teeth
Start Angle Specify the angle where the chain starts
Number of Links Enter the number of links in the chain; these will be added or
subtracted from the end of the chain
Direction Select Clockwise or Counterclockwise

Counter-Clockwise Clockwise
Start with Pin Link

Start with Pin Link Select to begin the chain section with a pin link; otherwise, the
section begins with a roller link
Show Pins Select to show the 3D pins
Place Locus at Center Select to draw the roller chain with a center locus

Center locus

Offset Links
The offset link connects a roller link and a pin link.

To insert an offset link:

1. Click the Roller Chain - Offset Link tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Pitch
 Shafts | 931

Shafts
The Shaft tool allows the creation of a shaft consisting of multiple straight, tapered, and threaded shaft segments.

To insert a shaft segment:

1. Click the Shaft tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
4. Click the Configuration button in the Object Info palette to add, delete, or modify shaft component segments (see
Shaft Segment Properties on page 931).
Dist. From
Left End
Segment
Length Thread Pitch
Width
Length
Dist. From Dist. From
Left End Center Drill on
Left End Included Angle Right End
Length

Width Outside Dia.

Diameter Across Dia. of Right End
Flats

Center Drill Right End: Fillet

on Left End Depth Dia. of Left End
Left End: Plain
Threaded Shaft Tapered Shaft
Straight Shaft Segment Segment with Right
Left End: Chamfer with Round Groove Segment Right End: Radius
Hand Acme Threads
Straight Shaft Segment
with Standard Straight Shaft Segment with
Rectangular Keyway Double Wrench Flats

2D shaft with five segments

3D shaft with five segments

Shaft Segment Properties

To add, delete, or modify component segments to construct the desired shaft object:

1. Select a shaft in the drawing file and click the Configuration button in the Object Info palette.
2. While the currently selected segment is highlighted, specify the shaft segment parameters on each tab to define the
shaft. Click the Update button to dynamically change the preview when changes are made.
932 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

3. Click the Dimensions tab to specify the configuration of the shaft segment.

Center Drill
on Left End Segment Length

Diameter

Left End: Chamfer Right End: Fillet

Straight Shaft Segment with

Standard Rectangular Keyway
 Shafts | 933

Segment
Length

Thread Pitch
Included
Angle

Outside
Diameter

Both Ends: Plain

Threaded Shaft Segment with
Right Hand Acme Threads
934 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Segment Length
Center Drill on
Right End

Diameter of
Left End Diameter of Right End

Right End: Radius

Left End:
Plain
Tapered Shaft Segment

Parameter Description
< Add / Add > Click < Add to add a shaft segment to the left of the current segment or
click
Add > to add a shaft segment to the right of the current segment
Delete Deletes the current shaft segment
< Previous / Next > Click < Previous to select the shaft segment to the left of the current
segment or click Next > to select the shaft segment to the right of the
current segment
Update Updates the preview image for the current segment
Segment Type Select a straight, tapered, or threaded shaft segment type

Straight Tapered Threaded

Segment Length Specify the shaft segment length

Diameter For straight or tapered segments, enter the diameter of the ends
Style For straight or tapered segments, select the end style
Chamfer Length For straight or tapered segments, specify the length for chamfer/flare
ends styles
Chamfer Angle For straight or tapered segments, specify the angle value for chamfer/
flare ends styles
Fillet Radius For straight or tapered segments, specify the radius value for fillet/radius
end styles
 Shafts | 935

Parameter Description
Thread Type For threaded segments, select the standard inch or metric thread series, or
select special threads to specify custom, Acme, or bearing locknut thread
parameters; the selection in this field enables the associated thread size
parameter or Special Threads button
Inch Sizes For standard inch series, select the thread size and threads per inch
Metric Sizes For standard metric series, select the thread size and pitch
Thread Spiral For threaded segments, select whether to draw left hand or right hand
threads
Thread Taper For tapered pipe threads, select whether the taper points to the left or
right
Special Threads For threaded segments, click Special Threads to specify custom, acme,
or bearing locknut thread parameters.
For custom threads, enter the outside diameter of threads, the thread
pitch, the included angle of the threads, the flatness at both the top (at
the outside diameter) and bottom (at the root diameter) of the threads,
and the number of starts.
For Acme threads, enter the outside diameter of threads, the thread
pitch, and select the included angle of the threads.
For bearing locknut threads, select the bearing locknut number, the
thread relief position (if any), and select to add a keyway, if desired.
Click OK to return to the Shaft Configuration dialog box.
Left End / Right End For threaded segments, select plain or chamfered for the left and right
ends
Chamfer Length For threaded segments, specify the length for chamfer end styles
Chamfer Angle For threaded segments, specify the angle value for chamfer end styles

4. Click the Keyway tab to specify the configuration of the shaft segment keyway (straight Segment Type only).
936 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Dist. From Length

Left End

Straight Shaft Segment with

Rectangular Keyway

Parameter Description
Add Keyway For straight segments, select Add Keyway to add a keyway to the current
segment
Measure From Select to measure the position of the keyway from the left or right end
Distance Enter the distance from the end of the segment to the keyway
Key Standard Select to insert either an imperial or metric keyway
Position Select to position the keyway in the front, top, bottom, or back of the
segment
Parallel Keyway/ Select to add a rectangular or parallel keyway; specify either a standard
Rectangular Keyway square or rectangular keyway, and enter the keyway length
Woodruff Keyway Select to add a woodruff keyway and select the nominal size

5. Click the Groove tab to specify the configuration of the shaft segment groove (straight Segment Type only).
 Shafts | 937

Dist. From Width

Left End Depth

Straight Shaft Segment with

Round Groove

Parameter Description
Add Groove For straight segments, select Add Groove to add a groove to the current
segment
Measure From Select to measure the position of the groove from the left or right end
Distance Enter the distance from the end of the segment to the groove
Type Select to add a round, rectangular, or V-groove
Width Enter the groove width
Depth Enter the groove depth

6. Click the Wrench Flats tab to specify the configuration of the shaft segment wrench flats (straight Segment Type
only).
938 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Dist. From Length

Left End

Width
Across Flats

Straight Shaft Segment with

Double Wrench Flats

Parameter Description
Add Wrench Flats For straight segments, select Add Wrench Flats to add wrench flats to
the current segment
Measure From Select to measure the position of the wrench flats from the left or right
end
Distance Enter the distance from the end of the segment to the groove
Type Select to add single or double wrench flats
Length Enter the wrench flats length
Width Across Flats Enter the width across flats of the wrench flats

7. Click OK to set the shaft parameters and close the Shaft dialog box.
8. To edit parameters, click Configuration in the Object Info palette, double-click the shaft, or select Edit from the
context menu to open the Shaft dialog box. The following additional parameters can be modified directly in the
Object info palette.

Parameter Description
Configuration Click Configuration to open the Shaft Configuration dialog box
Add Center Drill Select to draw the shaft with a center drill. Select either a plain or bell
configuration for the center drill, select the size, and whether a center
drill is drawn on the left, right, or both ends of the shaft.
 Keys | 939

Parameter Description
Show Threads As Select how to draw the 2D threaded shaft threads

Simplified (ASME) Simplified (ISO) Schematic Detailed

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D shaft with center line(s)
Show Threads Select to draw the 3D shaft with threads
Create Solid Select to create a generic solid from the individual 3D segments. For
large, complex shafts, this will greatly reduce file size. Deselect this
option when editing the shaft to speed the editing process.

Keys
To insert a key:

1. Click the Key tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Length

Width

Height

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Standard Select Imperial or Metric
Nom. Size (in) or Select one of the standard key sizes
(mm)
Length Enter the key length
View Select the 2D view

Top Front Side

940 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Woodruff Keys
To insert a woodruff key:

1. Click the Woodruff Key tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Standard Select Imperial or Metric
Nom. Size (in) or (mm) Select one of the standard key sizes
Key Type Select the key type

Full Radius Flat Bottom

Depth of Keyseat Displays the depth of the keyseat shaft and hub, determined
(shaft)/Depth of by the standard size selected
Keyseat (hub)
View Select the 2D view

Front Top Side

Ball Bearings
To insert a ball bearing:

1. Click the Ball Bearing tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Ball Bearings | 941

Width

Inside Diameter Outside Diameter

2D 3D
(Section with rollers
highlighted in black)

Parameter Description
Bearing Type Select from a variety of single ball or double ball radial and angular
bearings
Single Row, Radial

Non-Filling Non-Separable Separable Four Point

Slot (BC) (BH) (BM)

Single Row, Angular

Non-Separable Separable Separable

(BN) Outer Ring Inner Ring
(BNS) (BAS)

Double Row, Radial

Non-Filling Non-Separable
(BK) (BHA)

Double Row,
Angular

Non-Filling, Non-Filling, Non-Separable Separable

Slot Slot (BAA) (BVV)
Vert Out (BG) Vert In (BJ)

Inside Diameter Specify the inside diameter of the bearing

Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the bearing
Width Enter the width of the bearing
942 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Section Assembly Rear

Show Detail Indicate whether to display a detailed 2D view of the bearing

Detailed Plain view

view

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines
Section Select to display a section of the 3D bearing
Highlight Rollers Select to highlight the rollers within the 3D bearing in black

Roller Bearings
To insert a roller bearing:

1. Click the Roller Bearing tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Width

Inside Outside
Diameter Diameter

2D 3D
(Section with rollers
highlighted in black)

Parameter Parameter
Bearing Type Select from a variety of bearing types
 Roller Bearings | 943

Parameter Parameter
Single Row, Separable

Double Ribs - Inner Double Ribs - Inner

Double Ribs - Outer, Double Ribs - Outer,
Outer Ring Separable Inner Ring Separable

Single Row

Double Ribs - Inner/ No Ribs - Inner/ Double Ribs - Inner/ One Rib - Inner/
No Ribs - Outer Double Ribs - Outer One Rib - Outer Double Rib - Outer

Single Row, Self

Aligning

Self-Aligning, Self-Aligning,
Outer Ring Inner Ring

Double Row

Double Ribs - Inner/ Double Ribs - Inner/ No Ribs - Inner/

Double Ribs - Outer No Ribs - Outer Double Ribs - Outer

Double Row,
Self-Aligning

Self-Aligning, Self-Aligning,
Outer Ring Inner Ring

Inside Diameter Specify the inside diameter of the bearing

944 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Parameter
Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the bearing
Width Enter the width of the bearing
View Select the 2D view

Front Section Assembly Rear

Show Detail Indicate whether to display a detailed 2D view of the bearing

Detailed
view Plain view

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines
Section Select to display a section of the 3D bearing
Highlight Rollers Select to highlight the rollers within the 3D bearing in black

Tapered Roller Bearings

To insert a tapered roller bearing:

1. Click the Tapered Roller Bearing tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Roller Bearings | 945

Outer Ring
Width
Outer Ring Inner Ring
Inner Ring Width Inner Ring Width Inner Ring
Width Projection Projection

Outside Inside
Outside Diameter Diameter
Inside
Diameter Diameter

Space Between Rows

Single Row (2D) Two row, double cone, single cups (2D)

Outer Ring
Width
Inner Ring
Width Inner Ring
Projection

Outside Inside
Diameter Diameter

Space Between Rows

Two row, double cup, single cone (2D) Section with rollers highlighted in black,
and a retainer (3D)

Parameter Description
Bearing Type Select from a variety of bearing types

Single Row Two Row, Double Cone Two Row, Double Cup Two Row, Double Cup
Single Cup Single Cone, Adjustable Single Cone,
Non-Adjustable

Inside Diameter Specify the inside diameter of the bearing

Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the bearing
Width of Inner Enter the width of the inner ring
Ring
Width of Outer Enter the width of the outer ring
Ring
Space Between Enter the space between rows
Rows
Inner Ring Specify the projection distance of the inner ring
Projection
946 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Front Section Assembly Rear

Show Retainers Select to display the bearing with retainers; Show Detail must also be selected in
order to view the retainers in 2D bearings
Show Detail Indicate whether to display a detailed 2D view of the bearing (including balls
and/or retainers)

Detailed view with Plain view

retainers

Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines
Section Select to display a section of the 3D bearing
Highlight Rollers Select to highlight the rollers within the 3D bearing in black

Needle Bearings
To insert a needle bearing:

1. Click the Needle Bearing tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Width

Inside Outside
Diameter Diameter

Number of
Rows = 1
2D 3D (Section with rollers highlighted in black)
 Thrust Bearings | 947

Parameter Description
Bearing Type Select one of the bearing types

No Ribs- Double Ribs-

Inner/Double Inner/No
Ribs - Outer Ribs - Outer

Inside Diameter Specify the inside diameter of the bearing

Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the bearing
Width Enter the width of the outer ring
Number of Rows Enter the number of bearing rows
View Select the 2D view

Front Section Assembly Rear

Show Inner Ring Select to display the bearing inner ring

Show Detail Indicate whether to display a detailed 2D view of the bearing
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines
Section Select to display a section of the 3D bearing
Highlight Rollers Select to highlight the rollers within the 3D bearing in black

Thrust Bearings
To insert a thrust bearing:

1. Click the Thrust Bearing tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
948 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Outside Diameter

Inside Diameter

Thickness

2D 3D (Section with rollers highlighted in black)

Parameter Description
Bearing Type Select one of the bearing
types Single Ball Double Ball Cylindrical Roller
Grooved Flat Flat
Raceway Style Choose either grooved or
flat
Tapered Roller Spherical Roller
Grooved Grooved

Inside Diameter Specify the inside diameter of the bearing

Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the bearing
Thickness Enter the width of the outer ring
View Select the 2D view

Top Section Assembly

Show Retainer(s) Select to display the bearing retainer(s); Show Detail must also be selected to
view the retainer(s) in 2D bearings
Show Detail Indicate whether to display a detailed view of the 2D bearing (including balls)
Show Center Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines
Line
Section Select to display a section of the 3D bearing
Highlight Rollers Select to highlight the rollers within the 3D bearing in black

Flanged Bearings
Click the flanged bearing point object from the Machine Components tool set to insert a flanged bearing.

Flanged Bearings 2 Hole

To insert a flanged bearing - 2 hole:

1. Click the Flanged Bearing - 2 Hole tool from the Machine Components tool set.
 Flanged Bearings | 949

2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Base Width Overall Thickness
Housing Thickness
Collar Diameter
Base Thickness
Bore Size

Base Hole Housing

Length Centers Diameter

Hole Size

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Nominal Size Select one of the common flanged bearing sizes; the associated
parameters are displayed in the Object Info palette
Use Custom Select to apply custom parameter modifications
Dimensions
Bore Size Indicate the bore diameter
Collar Diameter Specify the diameter of the bearing collar
Housing Diameter Indicate the diameter of the housing
Base Width Specify the width of the base
Base Length Specify the length of the base
Hole Centers Indicate the distance between the hole centers
Hole Size Indicate the diameter of the mounting holes
Base Thickness Specify the width of the bearing base
Housing Thickness Enter the housing thickness
Overall Thickness Specify the width of the bearing from the top of the collar to the bottom of
the base
Set Screw Size Indicate the size of the locking set screws
950 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Top Side Front

Show Set Screws Select to display the set screws

Set screws

Show Grease Fitting Select to display the grease fitting

Grease fitting

Show Center Lines and Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines and hidden lines
Hidden Lines

Center lines Hidden lines

Flanged Bearings 4 Hole

To insert a flanged bearing - 4 hole:

1. Click the Flanged Bearing - 4 Hole tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Flanged Bearings | 951

Collar Diameter Housing Thickness

Bore Size Base Thickness
Base
Size
(Sq)
Hole
Center Housing
(Sq) Diameter

Hole Size

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Nominal Size Select one of the common flanged bearing sizes; the associated
parameters are displayed in the Object Info palette
Use Custom Dimensions Select to apply custom parameter modifications
Bore Size Indicate the bore diameter
Collar Diameter Specify the diameter of the bearing collar
Housing Diameter Indicate the diameter of the housing
Base Size (Sq.) Specify the dimensions of the bearing base
Hole Centers (Sq.) Indicate the distance between the mounting hole centers
Hole Size Indicate the diameter of the mounting holes
Base Thickness Specify the width of the bearing base
Housing Thickness Enter the housing thickness
Overall Thickness Specify the width of the bearing from the top of the collar to the bottom
of the base
Set Screw Size Indicate the size of the locking set screws
View Select the 2D view

Top Side
952 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Show Set Screws Select to display the set screws

Set screws

Show Grease Fitting Select to display the grease fitting

Grease fitting

Show Center Lines and Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines and hidden lines
Hidden Lines

Center lines Hidden lines

Pillow Block Bearings

To insert a pillow block bearing:

1. Click the Pillow Block tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Pillow Block Bearings | 953

Hole Center

Base
Collar Slot Width Width
Width

Collar
Diameter Slot Length

Housing Width
Bore
Size

Center Distance

Base Base Thickness

Length

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select one of the common pillow block bearing sizes; the
associated parameter values are displayed in the Object Info palette
Use Custom Dimensions Select to change any parameter values
Bore Size Indicate the bore diameter
Center Distance Indicate the length from the center of the bore to the bottom of the
base
Housing Width Enter the width of the housing
Base Length Specify the length of the base
Base Thickness Specify the thickness of the base
Hole Centers Specify the distance between the hole centers
Slot Width Indicate the width of the slots
Slot Length Indicate the length of the slots
Base Width Specify the width of the block base
Collar Width Enter the width of the collar
Collar Diameter Enter the diameter of the collar
Set Screw Size Indicate the size of the locking set screws
View Select the 2D view

Top Side Front

954 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Show Set Screws Select to display the set screws

Set screws

Show Grease Fitting Select to display the grease fitting

Grease fitting

Show Center Lines and Select to draw the 2D bearing with center lines and hidden lines
Hidden Lines

Center lines

Hidden lines

Bearing Lock Nut

To insert a bearing lock nut:

1. Click the Bearing Lock Nut tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Size Select the bearing lock nut size
 Belleville Springs | 955

Parameter Description
View Select the 2D view

Section Assembly Side Front Rear

Show Washer Select to display a washer with the bearing lock nut. By default, the washer is
displayed. The side view does not display a washer.
Show Center Line Select to draw the 2D bearing lock nut with center lines

Center lines

Belleville Springs
To insert a belleville spring:

1. Click the Belleville Spring tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Outside Dia.

Inside Dia.

Outside Height

Thickness

Inside Height
2D 3D

Parameter Description
Inside Diameter Specify the inside diameter of the Belleville spring
956 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the Belleville spring
Thickness Enter the wire thickness
Height Enter the height of each spring section
Height is Indicate whether the Height value applies to the Inside or Outside of the
spring
Number of Springs Specify the number of springs
Configuration Select the spring configuration

Same Direction Alternate Down and Up

Number Down / For Alternate Down and Up spring configurations, enter the number of
Number Up (Alternate springs which are oriented up and the number of springs which are
only) oriented down
Draw First Spring Up For Alternate Down and Up spring configurations, select to draw the first
(Alternate only) spring section oriented up
View Select the 2D view

Top - Spring Down Top - Spring Up Top - Simple

Side Section Side Solid Side Simple

Draw Center Line Select to draw the 2D spring with center line(s)

Compression Springs

Compression Springs 1 and 2

To insert a compression spring 1:
To insert a compression spring 2:

1. Click the Compression Spring 1 or Compression Spring 2 tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
 Compression Springs | 957

Wire Dia.
Outside Dia. Wire Dia. Mean Dia.

Number of
Working Active
Length Coils = 7 Working
Length
Solid
Height

Compression Spring 1 parameters (2D) 3D Compression Spring 2 parameters (2D) 3D

Parameter Description
Type of Ends Specify the spring end style

Closed and Open and Closed Open

Ground Ground

Outside Diameter For Compression Spring 1, enter the outside diameter

Mean Diameter For Compression Spring 2, enter the mean diameter
Wire Diameter Enter the wire diameter
Solid Height For Compression Spring 1, enter the solid height (compressed height)
Number of Active For Compression Spring 2, specify the number of active coils
Coils
Working Length Either specify the spring working length value, or click and drag a spring
control point to define the length graphically

Control point

Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Right Hand spiral direction

Display Select a display mode for 2D springs

Solid Section Solid - Front Solid - Rear Simple

Coils Only Coils Only

Draw Center Line Select to draw the 2D spring with center line(s)

A utility calculates spring rates for compression springs (see Spring Calculator on page 818).
To simulate the appearance of a spring wound around an object (such as a shaft or screw), use two springs. Set the front
springs display parameter to Solid - Front Coils Only. The spring behind the object is set to Solid - Rear Coils Only.
958 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Adjust the objects relative position with the Modify > Send > Send to Front and Modify > Send > Send to Rear
commands until the object displays correctly.

Conical Compression Springs

To insert a conical compression spring:

1. Click the Conical Compression Spring tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. Conical compression springs
have ends of unequal diameter. When drawing a conical compression spring, the first click defines the large end of
the spring, and the second click defines the small end.
If this is the first time the object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters
apply to subsequently created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Wire
Dia. O D - Small End

Working
Length

O D - Large
End
2D 3D

Parameter Description
OD - Small End Specify the outer diameter of the small end of the spring
OD - Large End Specify the outer diameter of the large end of the spring
Wire Diameter Enter the wire diameter (thickness)
No of Active Coils Specify the number of active coils in the spring
 Die Springs | 959

Parameter Description
Working Length Either specify the spring working length value, or click and drag a spring
control point to define the length graphically

Control point

Display Select a display mode for 2D springs

Solid Section Front Coils Rear Coils Simple

Only Only
Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Right Hand spiral direction
Draw Center Line Select to draw the 2D spring with center line(s)

Die Springs
Die springs are made of rectangular wire.

To insert a die spring:

1. Click the Die Spring tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Wire Width
Wire Height

Working
Length

Fits over Shaft

Fits into Hole
2D 3D
960 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Fits into Hole The spring will be able to fit into a hole of this diameter
Fits over Shaft The spring will be able to fit over a shaft of this diameter
Wire Width Specify the width of the wire
Wire Height Enter the height of the wire
Solid Height Enter the height of the spring at maximum compression
Working Either specify the spring working length value, or click and drag a spring control
Length point to define the length graphically

Control point

Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Right Hand spiral direction

Display Select a display mode for 2D springs

Solid Section Front Coils Rear Coils Simple

Only Only

Draw Center Select to draw the 2D spring with center line(s)

Line

Extension Springs
In front view, extension springs are inserted as linear objects; side view springs are inserted as point objects.

Extension Springs Front View and 3D

In front view and 3D, two modes are available.
Constrained Line Unconstrained Line

Mode Description
Constrained Line Lines are drawn at 30, 45, and 90 angles, and their complements are drawn
in increments of 30 and 45
Unconstrained Line Lines can be drawn at any angle; press the Shift key to temporarily constrain
a line during drawing
 Extension Springs | 961

To insert an extension spring - front view:

1. Click the Extension Spring - Front View or the Extension Spring - 3D tool from the Machine Components tool
set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Hook
Wire Diameter Length
Outside
Diameter

Working Length

Free Length = 4

Free Length = 4
Working Length = 5

Free Length = 5
Working Length = 5

2D 3D

Parameter Description
Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the coiled section of the spring
Wire Diameter Enter the wire diameter
Free Length Length of spring when not extended (no force is applied)
Working Length Either specify the spring working length value, or click and drag a spring control
point to define the length graphically

Control point

End Style Select a style for the ends of the

spring Full Loop Full Round Hook
Hook Length Enter the length of the hook Hooks at Right Angles Front View of Hooks
from the spring end to the top of
the hook Machine Loop Machine Hook
Edge View of Hooks Front View of Hooks
Hooks at Right Select the create the 3D hooks at
Angles a right angle to each other
Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Raised Hook Rectangular Hook
Front View of Hooks Front View of Hooks
Right Hand spiral direction
View Select the 2D hooks view
V Hook 3D Long Round
Front View of Hooks Hooks at Right Angles
962 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Display Select a display mode for the 2D spring

Solid Section Back Coils Front Coils Simple

Only Only

Set Free Length to Select to force the 2D springs Free Length value to equal the Working Length
Working Length value; this shows the coils tightly wound at any working length
Show All Coils Select to draw all of the 2D springs coils
Draw Center Line Select to draw the 2D spring with center line(s)

Extension Springs End View

To insert an extension spring - end view:

1. Click the Extension Spring - End View tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Outside
Diameter

Wire
Diameter

Parameter Description
Wire Diameter Enter the wire diameter
Outside Specify the outside diameter of the coiled section of the spring
Diameter
Ends at Right Indicate whether the spring ends are displayed at right angles to each other
Angles

Ends not at right Ends at right

angles angles

Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Right Hand spiral direction

 Torsion Springs | 963

Parameter Description
Draw Center Select to draw the spring with center lines
Lines

Torsion Springs

Torsion Springs Front View

To insert a torsion spring - front view:

1. Click the Torsion Spring - Front View tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.

Number of
Active Coils = 8
Length of
Left End

Outside Dia.

Length of
Right End

Wire Dia.

In the Object Info palette, set the torsion spring properties (Outside Diameter, Wire Diameter, Number of Active
Coils, and Spiral), and then set the properties for each end of the spring.

Parameter Description
Outside Diameter Specify the outside diameter of the coiled section of the torsion spring
Wire Diameter Enter the wire diameter
Number of Active Specify the number of active coils in the spring
Coils
Left/Right End Select to enter the dimensions for left and/or right end
Length For each end, specify the length between the coil center and the end
964 | Chapter 22: Machine Components

Parameter Description
Direction Indicate whether each end Up-Facing Up-Facing
Up-Normal Forward Rearward
is facing up or down
Orientation Select forward, rearward,
or normal for each end

Down-Normal Down-Facing Down-Facing

Forward Rearward

Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Right Hand spiral direction

Torsion Springs End View and 3D

To insert a torsion spring - end view:

1. Click the Torsion Spring - End View tool from the Machine Components tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the object properties and click OK.
Be
nd
Len
gth
Length End #1 Deflection
= 30

End #2
Deflection = 270
Outside Dia. Bend Length
Wire Dia.
Length
2D 3D

In the Object Info palette, set the torsion spring properties (Wire Diameter, Outside Diameter, and Spiral), and then
set the properties for each end of the spring.

Parameter Description
Wire Enter the wire diameter
Diameter
Outside Specify the outside diameter of the coiled section of the torsion spring
Diameter
Number of Specify the number of active coils in the coiled section of the 3D torsion spring
Active Coils
End # 1/2 Select to enter the dimensions for End #1 and/or End #2
 Torsion Springs | 965

Parameter Description
Length For each end, specify the length between the coil center and the bend
Deflection Enter the deflection angle for each end
End Style Select a style for each end (specify a clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW)
direction)

Plain 1/4 Bend 1/2 Bend 3/4 Bend Full Loop

Bend Radius For each end, specify the radius value of the bend (does not apply to Plain End
Styles)
Bend Length For each end, specify the length between the bend and the wire end (does not
apply to Plain or Full Loop End Styles)
Spiral Select either a Left Hand or Right Hand spiral direction
966 | Chapter 22: Machine Components
Advanced Topics A
This appendix contains advanced procedures for customizing items in a drawing file.

Creating Custom ID Label Symbols

Understanding ID Labels
The Vectorworks Architect and Landmark ID labels are created as plug-in objects that draw an ID symbol and an
optional leader line. The symbols can automatically be kept horizontal, or can be rotated to the leader line angle.
It is possible to create ID symbols based on custom markers. ID symbols have certain requirements that must be met.

ID Symbol Requirements
The ID Label tool (see Using the ID Label Tool on page 566) detects the presence of any existing record information
for the object being labeled in the drawing; if the tool cannot detect record information, you are prompted to select the
appropriate record from a list. The ID symbols defined to work with that record type display for selection.
The ID Label tool determines whether the ID symbol requested in the dialog box is present in the drawing. If not, it
copies it in from the ID_Symbols.vwx file, and scales it to the current drawing layer scale. Once an appropriate scaled
symbol is created, it is used without further reference to external documents.
ID symbols must meet the following requirements:
They are stored in the library file [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\Common\Data\ID_Symbols.vwx;
They are created at a 1:1 scale, using certain graphic primitives;
They use linked text to display ID and attribute information; and,
They have a TagSchema record attached.

The TagSchema Record

The TagSchema record determines the behavior of the ID symbol text. This record is present in the ID_Symbols.vwx
file.

Data record format ID symbol is linked to; must match

record name exactly

Current settings for these fields in the file, as set by the ID

Label tool
Up to seven definitions of linked text fields (can be
combinations of data record fields); see Defining ID
Symbol Custom Fields for more details
Advanced feature option settings for this symbol type; fields hold
current defaults for these ID settings and may be modified by the ID
Label tool in the ID/Specification Tool dialog box

Graphics options for drawing ID symbol

Up to seven fields linked to text within ID symbol

The AutoIncrement, FixCurrRecord, WriteMatchIDs, DrawLeader, and KeepHoriz fields are Boolean (true/false)
values; ShoulderLength and MkrScaleFactor are numerical values. All other fields are text values.
968 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

ID Symbol Leader Options

Four TagSchema record fields determine whether the ID symbol is drawn with a leader, and, if so, determine the
leaders appearance.

Parameter Description
DrawLeader If DrawLeader is false, no leader is drawn with the ID Leader object; otherwise, a
leader is drawn between the ID symbol and the object to which the ID is referring.
This field sets the default for the draw leader parameter in the ID Leader object,
which can be changed later.

DrawLeader True DrawLeader False

KeepHoriz If KeepHoriz is false, the ID symbol is drawn rotated to the leader angle; otherwise,
the symbol is rotated horizontally, with a small shoulder line segment which is
controlled using the value in the ShoulderLength field. These fields set the defaults
for the KeepHoriz value and the ShoulderLength value of the ID Leader object,
respectively. IDs with no leader should normally set KeepHoriz to true.

KeepHoriz True KeepHoriz False

ArrowStyle This field, along with MkrScaleFactor, controls the appearance of the marker at the
end of the leader (if any)
0 - None
1 - Thin Solid Arrow
2 - Wide Solid Arrow
3 - Thin Hollow Arrow
4 - Wide Hollow Arrow
5 - Dot
6 - Circle
7 - Cross
8 - Slash
9 - Lasso

MkrScaleFactor This field, along with ArrowStyle, controls the appearance of the marker at the end of
the leader (if any); this setting is a multiplier on a marker size of approximately 1/4.
For example, a MkrScaleFactor setting of 0.5 results in a marker of 1/8 standard
size.
 Creating Custom ID Label Symbols | 969

ID Symbol Record Writing Options

There are three ID record writing options controlled by four fields in the TagSchema record:

Parameter Description
AutoIncrement The value in this field controls the default setting for whether the ID number is
automatically incremented between placements
FixCurrRecord The value in this field controls whether the contents of the current record are
rewritten to match earlier IDs with the same ID entry
WriteMatchIDs The value in this field controls the writing of matching ID fields to records with
identical contents in the MatchField text field
MatchField Provides a record field for writing the ID for matching

Defining ID Symbol Custom Fields

The ID symbol can have up to seven fields containing virtually any text, combined with the contents of the data record
the ID uses.
For example, the ID Label tool reads the contents of the Fld1Spec field and writes the results to the Fld1Text field.
The Spec field follows the format FieldName& string constant where the field names are fields in the data record
named in the TagType field; the & indicates a concatenation, and the string constants are surrounded by double quotes.
For example, a field in the data record is called Count. This is a number field representing the total number of
something. You want the first field in the ID to read: TOTAL: 12 when Count is 12. Enter the following formula in
the Tag1Spec field: TOTAL: &Count. There are no spaces between the ampersand and the field name, or between
the string constant (in quotes) and the ampersand.
You can concatenate any number of fields and constants. For example, you could add the word Item(s) to the tag field
definition by using the following formula: TOTAL: &Count& Item(s).
There are a variety of pre-defined fields in the ID symbols that come with the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark
products. Use these as a guideline in understanding this special formula language. This same formula convention is
also used to define HVAC object tags.

Error Messages in ID Fields

If the ID Label tool cannot find the data record specified in the TagType field of the TagSchema record, the error
message #RECORDNAME?# displays when the ID is placed. If any of the fields in the formula are misnamed, the
message #FIELDNAME?# displays in the affected ID field. Verify the spelling of record and field names and ensure
the data record is defined as described in The Data Record on page 969.

The Data Record

The data record named in the TagType field of the ID symbol should be part of the standard records created using the
VA Records and Schedules command and should be present in the current preference set. This enables the ID Label
tool to create the record automatically if it is not defined at the time the ID Label tool is used.
The TagType Styled Wall is reserved for use when an ID is placed on a styled wall.

Creating Custom ID Symbols

Keeping in mind the information described in Understanding ID Labels on page 967, it is possible to create a custom
ID symbol to be used by the ID Label tool.
An ID symbol can consist of any 2D object supported in the Vectorworks program except circles, arcs, grouped objects,
or other symbols. These guidelines are necessary for the scaling algorithm currently used by the ID Label tool, to scale
970 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

the symbol to the correct scale for the file. To achieve the look of an arc in the symbol, use an arc-smoothed vertex of a
polyline; use an oval instead of a circle.
To create a custom ID symbol:
1. Open the ID Symbols.vwx file, located in the [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\Common\Data folder.
The TagSchema record, as well as the ID symbols currently used by the ID Label tool, are present in this file.
2. At a 1:1 scale, draw the object representing the ID symbol.
3. Select Modify > Create Symbol to create a symbol from the object (see Creating New Symbols on page 172
for more information on creating symbols).
4. Select the new symbol in the Resource Browser and select Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Symbol dialog box opens.
5. Select the 2D Component and click Edit to open the Edit Symbol window.
6. Deselect all items by clicking in an empty area.
On the Data tab of the Object Info palette, *SYMBOL DEFAULTS* is displayed.
7. Attach the Tag Schema record by selecting it from the Data tab.
8. An X displays in the check box.
9. Select the TagType field and replace the field name with the exact name of your custom record.
10. Create and format text to be used to display the ID symbol text.
For more information, see Linking Text to Record Formats on page 195 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals
Users Guide.
11. With the text selected, select Tools > Records > Link Text to Record.
The Choose Field dialog box opens.

12. In the Tag Schema record format, select the Label field and click OK.
13. The symbol text is linked to display the contents of the Label record field.
To check the text link, enter text in the Label field on the Data tab of the Object Info palette. Data entered now
would be overwritten later, in any case, by the ID Label tool.
 Creating Custom ID Label Symbols | 971

14. Click Exit Symbol at the top right corner of the window to return to the drawing.
15. In the Pally script palette, double-click the Output ID Prefs script to run it.
16. Save the ID_Symbols.vwx file.
17. In the drawing file where the custom ID symbol is to be used by the ID Label tool, ensure that a record format
exists which exactly matches the record name entered previously in the TagType field.
18. Select the ID Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
The ID/Specification Tool dialog box opens.
972 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

19. The custom record is one of the selections for ID Type. Select it to use the associated custom ID symbol.

Creating a Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Design Series

For information on creating a custom title block, see Creating a Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Fundamentals on
page 371 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. Creating a custom title block in the Vectorworks Design
Series products requires additional steps, if the custom title block is to be used with the Issue Manager (see The Issue
Manager on page 664), or contain issue fields or revision fields. Only the procedures which apply to the Vectorworks
Design Series products are described here.
When creating the record format to attach to the custom title block, fields linked to the Issue Manager require special
prefixes or suffixes. If creating issue or revision fields, special text strings are added to the title block design. These
record fields do not require linking, as they are automatically recognized by the Vectorworks program.

Title Block Prefix Required

Area
Issue Manager If you are creating a US Arch-style title block with issue data linked to the Issue
Manager:
Project fields (which contain the same value in all drawing set title blocks) must
be prefaced with P_ (example: P_Project Title)
Sheet fields (which contain different values in different drawing set title blocks)
must be prefaced with S_ (example: S_Sheet Scale)
Multi-line text fields (which contain multiple lines of text) must be appended
with a # (pound sign) (example: P_Drawing Title#)
 Notes Manager Database Format | 973

Title Block Prefix Required

Area
Issue Data To add issue fields, such as issue number, date, note, and/or approvals to a sheet
border which can be populated by the Issue Manager and edited manually, create
text fields with special text strings to represent the issue fields and place these
fields in the title block. The special text strings are (including colon):
Issue note :iNote
Issue number :iNo
Issue date :iDate
Issue approval :iAppr
The text fields can have any justification, and should have word wrap on. The
vertical alignment must be set to Top for the issue text to flow down, and to
Bottom for the issue text to flow up.
To enter or edit issue text, click Edit Issue Data from the Object Info palette of a
selected sheet border (see Editing Issue Data on page 565), or use the Issue
Manager. The issue history is a property of the sheet border, not the title block, so
a title block is not required to enter issue data.
Revision Data To add revision fields, such as revision number, date, zone, and/or approvals to a
sheet border, create text fields with special text strings to represent the revisions
and place these fields in the title block. The special text strings are (including
colon):
Revision note :rNote
Revision number :rNo
Revision date :rDate
Revision zone :rZone
Revision approval :rAppr
The text fields can have any justification, and should have word wrap on. The
vertical alignment must be set to Top for the revision text to flow down, and to
Bottom for the revision text to flow up.
To add revision text to a sheet border, select Use Revision Block from the Object
Info palette of a selected sheet border. To enter or edit the revision text, click Edit
Revision Data (see Editing Revision Block Data on page 563). The revision
history is a property of the sheet border, not the title block, so a title block is not
required to enter revision data.

Notes Manager Database Format

The Notes Manager, in version 11 and later, can use a database from an outside source, provided that it has been
formatted appropriately. Data files must be in one of two formats: a version 11 or later format, or the format used by the
Notes Manager in versions of Vectorworks software previous to version 11. The format used by previous versions may
be somewhat simpler to use, and is automatically converted to the current format by the Notes Manager.

Formatting by Previous Version

The database format must adhere to the following requirements to be recognized as a database from versions of the
Notes Manager prior to 11.
The first line must contain only a numeric value
The rest of the file must contain notes with the following data separated by tabs:
974 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

a numeric value
a dash
the section name
the description
the note text
Additional tabs or carriage returns are not allowed within each field
There can be no blank lines before the end of the file
This format is illustrated by the following example.

3
00 - Section 1 Description 1 This is keynote 1.
00 - Section 1 Description 2 This is keynote 2.
00 - Section 1 Description 3 This is keynote 3.

Formatting by Current Version

The database format must adhere to the following requirements to be recognized as a database from version 11 and
later Notes Manager.
The first line must contain the word NotesManager11DataFile
The second line must contain the database ID (unique for all databases used)
The rest of the file must contain notes with the following data separated by tabs:
a note ID (unique for all notes in the file)
the section name
the description
the note text
After the notes, an optional section can identify which description was last selected in each section
Additional tabs or carriage returns are not allowed within each field
There can be no blank lines before the end of the file
The database and note IDs are in the format of ID_#, where # represents any numeric value with not more than 14
digits and no decimal point. Notes Manager does not change these IDs after creation, but when new notes are added, it
uses IDs similar to those shown in the following example.

Notes Manager11DataFile
ID_04030110200020 General Project Notes Scope of Work Project located at
ADDRESS,CITY,STATE, county of
COUNTY.
ID_04030110200021 General Project Notes Accessibility Project complies with accessibility
Compliance standards.
ID_04030110200022 General Project Notes Involved Parties Owner refers to OWNER ID or its
authorized representatives.
0 End of Notes
General Project Notes Scope of Work
 Migrating from Previous Versions | 975

Migrating from Previous Versions

Migrating Site Models from Previous Versions
As of version 12, files containing site model symbols from previous versions can be easily converted.
When you update a site model from a previous version, you are prompted to convert to the new site model. If the file
contains more than one site model symbol, an alert dialog box prompts for the selection of one of the symbols to be
converted to the primary site model object. The remaining symbols become snapshots of the primary site model.
Site model classes that were necessary for previous versions remain in the file, although they are no longer used.

Resetting Plug-in Objects from Previous Versions

When you migrate plug-in objects from previous versions, some Object Info palette parameters display when they
should be hidden. Select the Reset All Plug-ins command to update the Object Info palette parameter display.
To reset plug-in objects:
1. Open an older drawing containing plug-in objects.
2. Select Tools > Utilities > Reset All Plug-ins.
The Reset All Plug-ins dialog box opens.
3. Click Yes to reset plug-in objects.
A message displays the update status. When complete, the Object Info palette displays only the pertinent
parameters.

Importing Manual Sketches

Scanning and importing sketches, and then tracing them, is a useful technique that can serve as a bridge between
manual drawing and CAD. To be useful, sketches for tracing should be drawn to scale and scanned at a relatively high
resolution (300 dpi or above).
To import sketches to be traced:
1. After scanning the sketch, save the file in one of the image import formats supported in the Vectorworks program
(GIF, JPG, TIF, BMP).
2. Determine the scale of the original sketch.
3. In the Vectorworks program, open the file into which the sketch will be imported.
4. Select or create a design layer for importing the sketch. Set the layer to the scale of the sketch. Make this layer the
active layer.
See Creating Layers on page 95 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Setting Design Layer
Properties on page 97 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
5. Select File > Import > Import Image File to import the sketch.
See Importing Files on page 761 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
6. Set the layer back to the desired drawing scale.
7. Move the image to locate it properly. The image can be rotated; however, the best results are obtained when the
image is scanned as straight as possible. Consider locking the image once it is in the desired orientation.
Any manual reshaping or scaling of the image distorts its scale.
976 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

The following image shows a scanned sketch used as the basis for a guidelines layout. Draw guidelines in the Guides
class. Prior to printing, turn this class off with the Modify > Guides > Hide Guides command. See Guides on
page 79 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols

The Vectorworks Architect product includes many pre-defined electrical and communication objects in its object
library files. However, there is no need to be restricted to these objects; creating custom panel and circuiting symbols is
also possible.

Creating Custom Panels

Electrical, communication, and disconnect panel symbols can be created specifically to fulfill a custom requirement.
To create a panel symbol:
1. Draw the object to represent the panel.
2. Convert the object into a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol. Provide a name for the panel. See
Creating New Resources on page 161 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

3. The panel symbol requires both a panel and circuiting record. If the file does not contain panel and circuiting
records, create the records according to the following formats.
 Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols | 977

Panel Record

Field Type Contents

Name Text Must be unique
Type Text Must be Electrical, Communication, or Disconnect
Phase Integer 1
Volts Text 117
Amps Integer 100
# of Spaces Integer 20
Panel Header Line 1 Text Text placed on Panel Schedule
Panel Header Line 2 Text Text placed on Panel Schedule

Circuiting Record

Field Type Contents

Name Text None
Circuit # Integer 0
Wire Size Text 0
Trip Integer 0
Conduit Size Text 1/2
V.A./Watts Integer 0
Remarks Text Panel
Phase/Pole Integer 2
Voltage Text 0
Circuit Type Integer 1 for electrical device, 2 for communication device
UID Text 0
ID Text 0

4. Select the symbol from the Resource Browser, and then click Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Symbol dialog box opens.
5. Click 2D Component, and then click Edit.
6. In the Edit Symbol window, deselect all symbol components.
7. Attach the panel record to the symbol by selecting it from the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Enter the panel
information by selecting a record field and entering its record information; the circuiting tools will use this
information.
978 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

Parameter Description
Name The Name field changes for each symbol later, when it is placed on the
drawing
Type Specifies Electrical, Communication, or Disconnect
Other Panel Parameters Enter specific information about the panel
Panel Header Line 1/2 Text specified here is placed on the panel schedule

8. Attach the circuiting record to the symbol and enter the circuiting information by selecting a record field and
entering its record information; the circuiting tools will use this information.

Parameters Description
Name Leave this field blank
 Creating Custom Electrical and Communication Symbols | 979

Parameters Description
Circuit # Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter
Other Circuit Parameters Enter specific information about the circuit
Circuit Type Set to 1 for an electrical symbol, and to 2 for a communication symbol
UID Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter

9. Click Exit Symbol at the top right of the drawing window.

Creating Custom Circuit Symbols

Electrical and communication circuit symbols can be created specifically to fulfill a custom requirement.
To create a circuit symbol:
1. Draw the object to represent the circuitable symbol.
2. Convert the object into a symbol by selecting Modify > Create Symbol. Provide a name for the circuitable item.
See Creating New Resources on page 161 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

3. If the file does not contain a circuiting record, create the record according to the following format.

Field Type Contents

Name Text None
Circuit # Integer 0
Wire Size Text 0
Trip Integer 0
Conduit Size Text 1/2
V.A./Watts Integer 0
Remarks Text Panel
Phase/Pole Integer 2
980 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

Field Type Contents

Voltage Text 0
Circuit Type Integer 1 for electrical device, 2 for communication device
UID Text 0
ID Text 0

4. Select the symbol from the Resource Browser, and then click Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Symbol dialog box opens.
5. Click 2D Component, and then click Edit.
6. In the Edit Symbol window, deselect all symbol components.
7. Attach the circuiting record to the symbol by selecting it from the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Fill out the
circuiting information by selecting a record field and entering its record information; this information is displayed
and edited by the circuiting tools.

Parameters Description
Name Leave this field blank
Circuit # Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter
Other Circuit Parameters Enter specific information about the circuit
Circuit Type Set to 1 for an electrical symbol, and to 2 for a communication
symbol
UID Enter 0 (zero) for this parameter

8. If the symbol requires more than one circuit, create and attach a second identical record named Circuiting
Record-1.
9. Click the Exit Symbol button located at the top right of the drawing window.
 Creating Custom Path Objects | 981

Creating Custom Path Objects

The Create Objects from Shapes command supports custom path objects (custom path plug-in objects with a .vso
extension).
For information on creating custom path objects, see Scripted Plug-ins on page 856 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.
To add a custom path object to the Create Objects from Shapes command:
1. Ensure that the custom path object file is located in the Vectorworks\Plug-Ins folder.
2. Select Tools > Plug-ins > Plug-in Manager.
The Plug-in Manager dialog box opens. Click on the Built-in Plug-ins tab.

3. In the list of VectorScript plug-in objects, select Objects from Polyline.

Press the letter O key to quickly access Objects from Polyline in the list.
4. Click Customize.
The Customize Plug-in dialog box opens. Click on the Strings tab.
982 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

5. Select Resource ID 6000, User Defined Path Objects, and click Edit.
The Edit Strings dialog box opens.

6. Select ID 6001, and click Edit.

The Edit String dialog box opens. Enter the number of custom path objects that will be added, and click OK. (If
adding one path object, enter 1.)
 Plant ID Codes | 983

7. Click OK.
8. In the Edit Strings dialog box, click Add.
9. Enter the name of the path object that should be used in the command list, and then the actual name of the plug-in
object file (without the .vso extension), separated by a colon.

10. Click OK to return to the Edit Strings dialog box.

The custom path object ID and string are listed.

11. Repeat steps 8-10 for each custom path plug-in object to add.
12. Click OK twice, and then Close, to exit the Plug-in Manager.
13. The custom path object is included in the list of path objects created by the Create Objects from Shapes
command.

Plant ID Codes
The meaning of commonly-used plant ID code categories is provided.

Plant ID Code Meaning

A-# Annual #
CTD Conifer Tree Display
CTG Conifer Tree Generic
ETD Evergreen Tree Display
ETG Evergreen Tree Generic
G-# Grasses #
984 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

Plant ID Code Meaning

OT-M Ornamental Tree Massed
OTD Ornamental Tree Display
OTF Ornamental Tree Flowering
OTG Ornamental Tree Generic
OTM Ornamental Tree Multi-Stem
OTP Ornamental Tree Patio
P-1 P-9 Perennials
P1 P4 Palms
SD-# Shrub Display #
SD# Shrub Deciduous #
SDM Shrub Display Massed
SG# Shrub Evergreen #
SG Shrub Generic
SN# Shrub Needle #
STG Shade Tree Generic
STL Shade Tree Large
STM Shade Tree Massed
STP Shade Tree Patio
STS Shade Tree Street

Plant Database Field Mapping

When plant data is imported into the Plant Database with the File > Import Records > File database command, field
mapping is required (see Importing Plant Database Information on page 402). Certain fields must be used during
mapping for the plant list to function properly when exported for use with the Vectorworks Landmark product. All
significant Vectorworks fields have a VW prefix.

Target Field Name Notes or Example Values Target Field Name Notes or Example Values
VW Autumn Color VW Height
VW Bloom Time Also referred to as VW Landscape Use Border, Hedge, Shade
Season Tree...
VW Category Shrubs, Herbs, Trees... VW Latin Name Also known as the plant
botanical name
VW Climate Zone Arid, Semi Arid, Dry... VW Light Range Deep Shade, Shade,
Sun, Full Sun
VW Code VW Other Tolerance
VW Comments 1 VW Other Use
 Instrument and Accessory Specifications | 985

Target Field Name Notes or Example Values Target Field Name Notes or Example Values
VW Comments 2 VW Persistence Deciduous,
Semi-Evergreen,
Evergreen...
VW Comments 3 VW pH Range Acidic, Adaptable
VW Common Name VW Price
VW Favorites VW Region
VW Flower Double, Erect, Fragrant, VW Region Notes
Characteristics Horizontal...
VW Flower Color VW Season Notes
VW Foliage Aromatic, Broad-leaf, VW Size Notes
Characteristics Evergreen, Fronds,
Small leaves...
VW Foliage Color VW Soil Range Bark, Sand, Sandy loam,
Potting soil...
VW Fruit Acorns, Berry, Catkins, VW Spread
Characteristics Cones
VW Fruit Color VW Tolerances Cold Frost, Drought,
Heat...
VW Growth Habit Arching, Broad-domed, VW Used in Project
Columnar, Climber...
VW Hardy Zone 1 11 (from USDA zone VW User notes
mapping)

Instrument and Accessory Specifications

In the Vectorworks Spotlight product, custom symbols can be created and used in addition to the pre-defined standard
symbol sets. Create an instrument, accessory, or lighting position out of a currently selected symbol by converting it
with the commands in the Spotlight menu.
Certain rules apply when creating lighting and accessory symbols.
In addition, the colors used for indicating photometric threshold values can be customized.

Lighting Instrument Specifications

Special rules apply when creating a symbol to be converted to a lighting instrument.

Symbol Characteristics
Symbols should be hybrid (2D/3D) so that they display properly in both 2D and 3D views. At a minimum, the symbol
must contain a 2D component, which must be a screen plane representation and not a 2D planar object.
2D Characteristics
Create the 2D view of the symbol using as few polygons and lines as possible. If possible, use a single polyline rather
than individual line segments. All instruments should be drawn with the front of the instrument (the end which emits
light) oriented towards the top of the drawing. The symbol below was created from these few constituent parts:
986 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

The line weight of the symbol is also a consideration; the instruments need to stand out when printed. The outer
perimeter of the symbol should have a line weight of at least 1/2 point (7 mils). Interior details should use a lighter line
weight.
The 2D representation should have a solid fill so that it obscures information under the symbol. The size of the
instrument should be accurate based on the real instrument it represents. While drawing the instrument, keep the level
of detail as minimal as possible. The goal is to be able to distinguish instruments from one another, not to create a
detailed plan view of each instrument.
For instruments with multiple configurations, it is acceptable to use simple graphical differences to distinguish among
the models. For example, use the following variations to separate the different versions of a symbol:

Altman 6x9 6 x 12 6 x 16 6 x 22

3D Characteristics
The 3D portion of the instrument should be drawn as if it is hung straight down (along the Z-axis) with the yoke
oriented along the Y-axis. The top of the instrument should be oriented towards the top of the drawing. An easy way to
generate a reasonable 3D instrument body is to sweep the 2D portion of the symbol. The segment angle of the sweep
should be between 20 and 40. See Sweeping Objects on page 292 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
for more information.
360 sweep

Keep the 3D symbol simple. It should be solid. The model should be accurately sized, but without minute details like
handles, grommets, fins, louvers, cords, and knobs. These items can add significantly to the rendering time required,
and are not necessary to distinguish among instruments.
The 3D model should consist of three parts: the body, a yoke, and a clamp or base. Any subparts should be made into a
single object or group for each of these pieces. The body represents the part of the instrument where light is emitted;
the yoke connects the body to the base, and the base consists of either a base motor unit for moving lights or a clamp or
other hanging device for other lights. The clamp can be imported from the symbol library provided with the Spotlight
program. Place a 3D locus within the body of the instrument.
All the parts should be aligned as shown; the yoke rotates about the Z-axis, and the body rotates at the height of the
locus point.
 Instrument and Accessory Specifications | 987

Clamp

Yoke 3D Locus

Body

Insertion Point
Align the 2D and 3D views so that the hanging points of both versions line up.
The insertion point of the 2D/3D hybrid symbol in Top/Plan view should represent the hanging location of the
instrument. The 3D insertion point should be the hanging point (center of the clamp or base).
Create the symbol as described in Creating New Symbols on page 172 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide.

Attaching the Parts Record

Attach the Parts record to each of the three pieces of the 3D instrument model: body, yoke, and base or clamp.
To attach the Parts record:
1. In the Resource Browser, import the Parts record from one of the instrument library files included with the
Spotlight program.
Locate the record and select Import from the Resources menu to bring the record into the current file.
2. Select the new symbol, and select Modify > Edit Symbol.
3. In the Edit Symbol window, select the body, yoke, or base/clamp.
4. Click on the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Attach the Parts record to the part by selecting the check box.

5. Edit the record by selecting the appropriate record field and changing its value to True. For example, select the
yoke, attach the Parts record, and change the Yoke record field to True.
6. Repeat steps 3 5 for each of the three parts of the instrument model.
7. Click Exit Symbol at the upper right corner of the window to return to the drawing.
988 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

Attaching the Light Info Record and Light Info Record M

Attach the Light Info record to the lighting instrument symbol, with field names that match the names of the fields in
the instrument object. Not all the fields are required, but the desired fields for the instrument object to read should be
included. Filling the instrument type field with the manufacturers name and model name for the particular instrument
is recommended.
The Light Info M record provides metric measurements of the weight and frame size of the instrument object. This is
needed for instruments that could be used in either imperial and metric drawings.
To attach the light info record:
1. In the Resource Browser, import the Light Info Record and Light Info Record M from one of the instrument
library files included with the Spotlight program.
Locate the records and select Import from the Resources menu to bring the records into the current file.
2. Select the new symbol, and select Modify > Edit Symbol.
3. In the Edit Symbol window, click on an empty location so that nothing is selected.
4. Click on the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Attach the Light Info Record and Light Info Record M to the
symbol defaults by selecting the check boxes. Then edit the records by selecting the record field and entering its
record information.

The Candlepower, Beam Angle, and Field Angle parameters affect the photometric grid and photometer object
calculations. The Beam Angle and Field Angle parameters affect the Draw Beam feature.
Normally, do not include text labels with the instrument, as these are handled by the instrument object. An
exception can be made to distinguish different models or lamps of an instrument. For example, create three
versions of a single PAR64 symbol by adding MFL, WFL, and NSP text blocks.
Symbols should be named with the model name of the lighting instrument.
5. Turning the lighting instruments light on in the Visualization palette includes a spot light as part of the lighting
instrument. While editing the symbol, the spot light can be added, and accurate lighting information specified with
the parameters in Use Emitter. See Adding Light Sources on page 645 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users
Guide for information on adding a spot light and setting accurate lighting parameters.
6. Click Exit Symbol at the upper right corner of the window to return to the drawing.
 Instrument and Accessory Specifications | 989

As an alternative to the process of manually editing the symbol definition to attach the Light Info (and/or Light
Info M) record, use the Lighting Symbol Maintenance command as described in Lighting Symbol
Maintenance on page 522. Add the symbol by clicking New, and the Light Info record is automatically attached
to it. Once in the maintenance list, the record data can be easily edited.

Multi-circuit Instrument Specifications

Multi-circuit instruments represent a special case of the instrument object. Each symbol drawn should represent a
single element of the multi-circuit instrument. An instrument that is at the end of the multi-circuit strip should look
different from the instruments that are in the center. Place the number of symbols required to create the multi-circuit
instrument. For example, place four symbols (two ends and two middle) to create a four-circuit cyc unit.

1. Convert symbols to instruments 2. Convert instruments to multi-circ instrument

The multi-circuit symbol must consist only of other symbols to be properly inserted as a multi-circuit instrument.
Otherwise, the Inst Insertion tool treats it as a single circuit instrument.
Attach the light info record to the individual instruments within the multi-circuit unit by the same method as for an
individual lighting instrument.
The multi-circuit lighting device focuses in 3D in the same way as individual lighting devices (see Lighting
Instrument Specifications on page 985). The yoke is created from portions of the individual instrument symbols. The
3D locus, placed within the container multi-circuit symbol, is used as a common rotation axis for the entire
multi-circuit unit.

Base Yoke

Common rotation Lighting devices

axes

Accessory Specifications
The accessory symbol should be a 2D/3D hybrid object. At a minimum, the symbol must contain a 2D screen
representation. Keep the accessory representation as simple as possible to reduce rendering time.
The 3D portion of the accessory should be drawn as if it is hung straight down (along the Z-axis). The top of the
accessory should be oriented towards the top of the drawing. 3D geometry should be drawn below the Z-axis to
properly align with the front of the lighting instrument.
The Object Info palette for accessories and lighting instruments looks identical, but the Device Type differs (Light,
Accessory, or Static Accessory).
Accessories should have a record attached for storing the default accessory values. The record should not contain fields
that vary from instance to instance of an accessory. For example, do not add a Color Scroller channel field value unless
that channel is used by all the color scrollers in the file.
The attached record should consist of the following fields:
990 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

Field Description
Instrument Accessory name; this can be a specific manufacturers model name or number, or a generic name for
type the accessory, such as 6 Top Hat
Accessory Generic accessory category; in some cases, this can be similar, or identical to the instrument type
type (example accessory types include Top Hat, Barn Door, Color Scroller, Gobo Rotator, and Color
Frame)
Wattage Amount of power consumed by the accessory
Weight Accessory weight
Other Add fields as desired; these fields are read into the Lighting Device object if the field name in the
accessory record matches the field name of the Lighting Device object

A Parts record is not required for an accessory.

Seating Layout Specifications

The Seating Layout command, as well as the event planning suite in the Vectorworks Spotlight product, make use of
table and chair symbols that are available from the default content. Its also possible to make your own table, chair, and
nested table and chair symbols for use with these features.

Symbol Characteristics
Symbols should be hybrid (2D/3D) so that they display properly in both 2D and 3D views. At a minimum, the symbol
must contain a 2D representation.
Create the 2D view of the symbol using as few polygons and lines as possible. If possible, use a single polyline rather
than individual line segments. The line weight of the symbol is also a consideration; the symbols need to stand out
when printed. The outer perimeter of the symbol should have a line weight of at least 1/2 point (7 mils). Interior details
should use a lighter line weight. The 2D representation should have a solid fill so that it obscures information under the
symbol.
Keep the 3D symbol simple. It should be solid. The model should be accurately sized, but without minute details.
These items can add significantly to the rendering time required, and are not necessary to distinguish among
instruments.
To create a table and chair symbol, create the chair and table symbols separately, and then create a symbol from the
table and chair symbols, so that the table and chair symbols are nested symbols.

Attaching the Event Planning Record to Seating Symbols

Attach the Event Planning Record to the symbol, with the Type field indicating whether the symbol is a table or chair.
This allows the Seating Count worksheet to accurately count tables and chairs.
To attach the event planning record:
1. In the Resource Browser, import the Event Planning Record from the Seating.vwx default event planning library
file.
Locate the Event Planning Record and select Import from the Resources menu to bring the record into the current
file.
2. Select the new seating symbol, and select Modify > Edit Symbol.
 Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors | 991

If attaching the record to nested table and chair symbols, select the table or chair, and select Modify > Edit
Symbol again to edit the individual table or chair. After attaching the event planning record to one of the nested
symbols, repeat the procedure to attach the record to the other symbol.
3. In the Edit Symbol window, click on a blank area so that nothing is selected.
4. Click the Data tab in the Object Info palette. Attach the Event Planning Record to the symbol defaults by selecting
the check box. Then edit the record by selecting the record field and entering its record information. The Type
field for tables should contain Table for tables and Chair for chairs, for proper object identification and
inclusion in worksheets.

5. Click Exit Symbol at the upper right corner of the window to return to the drawing.

Customizing Photometric Threshold Colors

Both the photometer and photometric grid use colors that correspond to the specified threshold ranges (see Obtaining
Photometric Data on page 480). These colors can be changed if desired.
To edit the photometric threshold color values:
1. Select Tools > Plug-ins > Plug-in Manager.
The Plug-in Manager opens. Click on the Built-in Plug-ins tab and select either PhotoGrid or Photometer.
992 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

2. Click Customize.
The Customize Plug-in dialog box opens. Click on the Strings tab.

3. Select Resource ID 4000: Threshold Color Indices. Click Edit.

4. The Edit Strings dialog box opens. Select one of the indices and click Edit to specify a new color value for the
threshold index.
 Exchanging Data with Older Versions of Lightwright | 993

ID Corresponding Threshold Index

4000 Zero level
4001 Levels below the Lower Threshold value
4002 Levels between the Lower and Upper Threshold values
4003 Levels above the Upper Threshold value

The values correspond to index values of the color palette. For more information on color palette selector values,
see the Miscellaneous Selectors section of the developer-oriented documentation located at http://
developer.vectorworks.net
5. When the desired threshold index color selector values have been edited, click OK to accept the changes, and then
continue to click OK until you can close the Plug-In Manager dialog box.

Exchanging Data with Older Versions of Lightwright

The Vectorworks Spotlight product automatically exchanges data with Lightwright version 5 and later (see Automated
Import and Export to Lightwright on page 811). However, instrument data can also be transferred between the
Vectorworks Spotlight product and versions of Lightwright earlier than 5. Once lighting instruments and parameters
have been specified in the Vectorworks file, their information can be sent to Lightwright to perform paperwork
processing. When the paperwork in Lightwright is complete, the data can be imported back into the Vectorworks file to
update the light plot.
The Vectorworks Spotlight product includes Lightwright automated action files, which, when selected at installation,
are located in the Extras folder. These files have the correct settings required for exchanging data with the Vectorworks
Spotlight product, and need to be placed into Lightwrights Automated Actions folder. Consult the Lightwright
documentation for information on using these files.

Exporting the Vectorworks Data for Editing

To export instrument data from the Vectorworks file to Lightwright:
1. When the Vectorworks file contains instrument data that is ready to export, select File > Export > Export
Instrument Data.
The Export Instrument Data dialog box opens.
994 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

2. Select the appropriate Lightwright items for export by clicking the Lightwright button. (See Exporting
Instrument Data on page 809 for more information.) Select Export field names as first record. If exporting to
version 4 of Lightwright, select Export in Lightwright 4 format.

3. Click Export to export the lighting instrument information as a tab-delimited file. Specify the location for the
exported file, and click Save.

Importing the Vectorworks Data into Lightwright

The data exported from the Vectorworks program now needs to be imported into Lightwright so that it can be edited.
1. Prior to import, select Setup > Vocabulary in Lightwright.
The Show Setup dialog box opens.

2. Ensure that the Separate accessories from instrument types with field contains a + sign.
To import Vectorworks data into Lightwright:
1. In Lightwright, select File > Import Data. Specify the location of the file that was just created, and click Open.
2. The Importing dialog box opens. Click Suggest Matches.
 Exchanging Data with Older Versions of Lightwright | 995

Ensure that UID is

matched to
External ID

Lightwright attempts to match the imported data fields to Lightwright fields. Verify that the information has been
matched correctly.
3. Select Do not import first record and Ignore fields with only. Enter a - (dash) so that Vectorworks Spotlight
fields with a - are ignored.
4. Click OK to begin the import. Lightwright reports the number of instruments that were imported; this may differ
from the number of instruments exported from the Vectorworks program due to Static Accessories.
5. Select whether to save the import action in Lightwright.
Saving the action speeds up the import process, because the matching selections and other options will not need to
be specified again.
Provide a name for the automated action, which can be selected later from File > Automated Actions.

6. The instrument information is now available for editing in Lightwright.

996 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

7. Save the Lightwright file.

Exporting the Edited Data from Lightwright

Once the lighting instrument data has been edited in Lightwright, export the data so that it can be used to update the
light plot in the Vectorworks file.
If lighting instruments have been deleted in Lightwright, they will not automatically be deleted in the Vectorworks
file. A warning message opens if this is the case, and the affected instruments are automatically selected for
further action.
To export the edited data from Lightwright:
1. In Lightwright, select File > Export > Data. The Export Options dialog box opens.
 Exchanging Data with Older Versions of Lightwright | 997

2. Select the fields for export; selected fields display a check mark. Ensure that the External ID and Accessory
fields are selected for export, and that Tab Separated is selected as the Export File Type. In addition, select
Export field labels as first record, Strip Channel Parentheses, For lights with attributes and Fill blank fields
with. For the blank fields, enter a - (dash), so that a - is inserted in any blank fields. Click OK.
3. Select a file name and location for the exported file.
4. The option to save the export action for future automation is presented.
5. Click Yes to save the action.

Importing the Edited Lightwright Data into Vectorworks

Import the edited Lightwright data into the Vectorworks file to update the lighting instrument information.
To import Lightwright data back into the Vectorworks file:
1. In the Vectorworks program, select File > Import > Import Instrument Data.
The Instrument Data Import dialog box opens.
998 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

2. With the Browse button, specify the file exported from Lightwright. If the file to import has External ID or UID as
a field name, it will automatically be selected as the UID. Do not select Import First Record.
Click AutoLink to correctly match important fields. If not all fields are automatically mapped, map the incoming
data to an instrument field as described in Importing Instrument Data on page 810.
Accessories should be mapped to Accessories, and Instrument Type Symbol to Symbol Name.
3. Click Import. The Lightwright data is imported into the Vectorworks file, automatically updating the instrument
data in the light plot.
If the instruments are not updated, verify that the External ID field was exported, and the Export Field Labels as
First Record option was selected in Lightwright.
If the data needs to be sent back to Lightwright after this initial export, select the Merge command in Lightwright
rather than Import. Lightwright uses the Lightwright ID number to match the data to existing instruments rather
than creating new instruments.

Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects

User-defined sizes can be created for eye bolts, J-bolts, swing bolts, swing eye bolts, T-bolts, U-bolts, and tapped holes.
Use the following procedures to add or remove sizes for use with these plug-in objects. Sizes are then assigned through
the Object Info dialog box for the applicable object.
To add or remove plug-in object sizes:
1. Select Tools > Plug-ins > Plug-in Manager.
The Plug-in Manager dialog box opens. Click on the Built-in Plug-ins tab.
 Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in Objects | 999

2. Select the plug-in object to be edited, and then click Customize.

The Customize Plug-in dialog box opens. Click on the Parameters tab.

3. Select the size parameter and click Edit.

The Edit Parameter dialog box opens.
4. Click Choices.
The Edit Choices dialog box opens.
1000 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

5. To remove a size, highlight it and press the Backspace key. To add a new size, insert the cursor in the desired
location in the list of sizes. Enter the new parameters. To edit a size, simply type over the existing parameters. Use
the following guidelines to add or edit a size:

Size Description
Inch Enter the size as a fraction or decimal. Enter a dash as a separator (with optional spaces
before and after). Enter the threads per inch. Example: 1/2 - 20
Metric Enter either an upper or lowercase m. Enter the nominal size in millimeters. Enter either
an upper or lowercase x as a separator (with optional spaces before and after). Enter the
thread pitch. Example: M8 x 1.25

Do not leave blank lines in the list of sizes. Also, if sizes are added to a 2D plug-in object that has a 3D
counterpart, the same sizes must be added to the 3D plug-in object in order for the Create 3D Object from 2D
command to work properly.
6. Click OK to accept the changes, and then continue to click OK until you can close the Plug-In Manager dialog
box.

Adding User-defined Information to Commands

Certain commands permit adding to the list of available values for certain parameters (for example, the Material list
for the Spring Calculator or the Units list for the Simple Beam command).

Parameters Allowing Addition of User-defined Values in the GetUserData.vss File

Group Plug-in Object Parameter Dialog Box
1 Spring Units (inches, mm and cm only) Spring Calculator
Calculator
Shaft Analysis Outside Diameter Shaft Analysis
Simple Beam Beam Length Simple Beam: Set Beam
Properties
Simple Beam Deflection Units Simple Beam: Set Beam
Properties
 Adding User-defined Information to Commands | 1001

2 Simple Beam These items are the singular form of the Not applicable
names in Group 1 and are used when
writing the values to a worksheet and a
text block on the drawing
3 Simple Beam Load Units Simple Beam: Add/Remove/
Change Loads
4 Simple Beam These items are the singular form of the Not applicable
names in Group 3 and are used when
writing the values to a worksheet and a
text block on the drawing
5 Simple Beam Section Modulus Units Simple Beam: Set Beam
Properties
6 Simple Beam Moment of Inertia Units Simple Beam: Set Beam
Properties
7 Shaft Analysis Shear Modulus Units Shaft Analysis
Simple Beam Modulus of Elasticity Units Simple Beam: Set Beam
Properties
8 Spring Material Spring Calculator
Calculator
9 Shaft Analysis Twisting Moment Units Shaft Analysis

Adding User-defined Spring Calculator Materials

The following example shows how to add to the list of materials available to the Spring Calculator.
To add to the list of Spring Calculator materials:
1. Make a backup copy of the GetUserData.vss file, located in Plug-Ins\VW_Mech\Includes. Keep the backup copy
in case there is a need to restore the GetUserData.vss file to its original state.
2. Open the GetUserData.vss file in any word processor and locate group 8 in the getUserString function.
3. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Material to the end of the list (in this example,
Beryllium Copper). Enclose the name in single quotes and put a semi-colon at the end of the line. The new line
should read:
16: getUserString := Beryllium Copper;

4. Locate group 8 in the getUserData function.

1002 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

5. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Mod. of Elasticity value (in this example, pounds per
square inch). The sequential number added here must correspond to the number added in the getUserString
function. Put a semi-colon at the end of the line; do not use single quotes or commas in the value. The new line
should read:
16: getUserData := 7000000;
6. Change the value of item 0 to the new group number, which indicates the number of available values (in this
example, 16).

7. Save the file. The next time the Spring Calculator is run, the new item is available in the Material list, and when
selected, the new value is available in the Mod. of Elasticity field. When executed, the Spring Calculator
automatically recalculates the value to the user-specified units. (For beryllium copper, the value is 7,000,000 lb/
in2.)
If the Spring Calculator was used during the current session, the Vectorworks program needs to be restarted for the
changes to take place.

Adding User-defined Simple Beam Units

The following example shows how to add to the list of available units for the Simple Beam command.
To add to the list of units for the Simple Beam command:
1. Make a backup copy of the GetUserData.vss file located in Plug-Ins\VW_Mech\Includes. Keep the backup copy
in case there is a need to restore the GetUserData.vss file to its original state.
2. Open the GetUserData.vss file in any word processor and locate group 1 in the getUserString function.
3. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Units to the end of the list (in this example, Yards).
Enclose the name in single quotes and put a semi-colon at the end of the line. The new line should read:
6: getUserString := Yards;
4. Locate group 2 in the getUserString function.
5. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Units to the end of the list. (In this example, type yard in
the singular form; this value is used in certain output for the Simple Beam command and must have an entry
corresponding to the same item in group 1).
Enclose the name in single quotes and put a semi-colon at the end of the line. The new line should read:
6: getUserString := Yard;
 Simple Beam and Spring Calculator Examples | 1003

6. Locate group 1 in the getUserData function.

7. Using the next available sequential number, add the new Units to the end of the list (in this example, units per inch
of a yard: 1/36). The sequential number added here must correspond to the number added in the getUserString
function. Put a semi-colon at the end of the line; do not enclose the name in single quotes. The new line should
read:
6: getUserData := 1/36;
8. Change the value of item 0 to the new group number, which indicates the number of available values (in this
example, 6).

9. Save the file. The next time the Simple Beam command is used, the new item is available in the Beam Properties
dialog box.
This change also affects the Shaft properties of the Shaft Analysis command. These values are also used by the
Spring Calculator Units, but only items 1, 3, and 4 are applicable, so the new units (Yards) will not show up in this
field.

Simple Beam and Spring Calculator Examples

This section provides examples of using the Spring Calculator and Simple Beam commands to accomplish specific
tasks.

Spring Calculator
The spring calculator can determine spring rates and unit stresses of round wire helical coil compression springs with
known parameters. It can also be used to design a spring knowing the working values. This example is based on the
following compression spring with closed and ground ends of music wire.
1004 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

1.063 Max. Solid Height

1.25 Deflection at a load = 36 pounds

Outside Diameter = .812

Free Length = 2.5

To calculate spring rate and unit stress:

1. Determine the required spring rate based on the deflection at a load divided by the difference in the working length
and the free length. For this example, the desired spring rate equals 28.8 lb/in (36 lb/1.25 in = 28.8 lb/in).
2. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Spring Calculator
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Spring Calculator
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Spring Calculator

The Spring Calculator dialog box opens.

 Simple Beam and Spring Calculator Examples | 1005

3. As shown in the above dialog box, select 1 - Outside Dia., Wire Dia., Solid Height from the Method list. After
entering the known values, calculate a spring rate close to the desired value by trying several standard wire
diameter values. Adjust the material in the Material list to fit the wire diameter used. Here, a wire diameter
of .090 gives a spring rate of 8.94 lb/in.
4. In the Method list, select 2 - Mean Dia., Wire Dia., No. of Active Coils.

5. As shown in this dialog box, vary the wire diameter and number of active coils to get a spring rate close to the
required spring rate. A wire diameter of .095 and 11 active coils gives a spring rate of 16.3 lb/in, but the solid
height is 1.24, which is too high. A wire diameter of .090 and 9 active coils, however, gives a spring rate of 16.1
lb/in, and a solid height of .990, which is within acceptable limits.
6. Finally, check the stresses applied to the spring to verify that they are within acceptable limits. With a unit stress of
3074 (lb/sq in)/lb, multiply by 36 to obtain 110,663 lb/sq in. With a solid height of .990, the stress will be:
(2.500-0.900)in x 16.1 lb/in x 3074 (lb/sq in)/lb = 79,200 lb/sq in
7. This value is below the safe working stress of 111,000 lb/sq in for this material and wire size.

Simple Beam
This example shows how the Simple Beam commands can be used to find the stresses on the horizontal elements of a
certain machine part.
1006 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics

4 x 4 X .5 Steel Tubing

Data:
Length = 48
Distance between supports = 36
Distributed load = 600lb/in
Concentrated load = 2000lb
Tubing = 4 x 4 x 1/2 Steel
Section Modulus = 6.12in^3
Moment of Inertia = 12.26in^4
Modulus of Elasticity = 29E+6lbsq in

To calculate the stresses:

1. Select File > New.
The Create Document dialog box opens.
2. Select Use document template, and choose the Simple Beam (Imperial) or Simple Beam (Metric).sta template.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the appropriate command.

Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Machine Design > Simple Beam
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Machine Design > Simple Beam
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Machine Design > Simple Beam

The Simple Beam dialog box opens.

5. Click Configure Beam.

The Configure Beam dialog box opens.
6. Specify the beam properties. In this example, enter the following values:
 Simple Beam and Spring Calculator Examples | 1007

Configuration: Fixed - Pivot

Length: 48
Units: Inches
Distance Between Supports: 36
Section Modulus: 6.12 in^3
Moment of Inertia: 12.26 in^4
Modulus of Elasticity: 29E+6 lb/sq in
Calculation Interval: 0.5
Deflection Units: Inches

To obtain the section modulus and moment of inertia of the tubing, select a tubing shape from the Resource
Browser and place an instance of it on the drawing. Convert the tubing to a group and then use the Engineering
Properties command to obtain the properties. For more information on the Engineering Properties command,
see Obtaining Engineering Properties on page 335 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.
7. Click OK to close the Beam Properties dialog box.
8. Click Define Loads on the Simple Beam dialog box.
The Define Loads dialog box opens.
9. Specify the load properties. In this example, use the following values:

Load Units: Pounds

Load #1
Type: Uniformly Distributed
Distance from Left End: 0
Load Value 1: 600
Width: 36
Load #2
Type: Concentrated Load
Distance from the Left End: 48
Load Value 1: 2000

10. Click OK close the Define Loads dialog box.

11. In the Simple Beam dialog box, click Calculate Reactions, and then click Calculate Stresses and Deflection,
and then click OK.
A simple beam diagram is created based on the information provided. See Simple Beam on page 1005 for more
information on what is depicted in the diagram.
1008 | Appendix A: Advanced Topics
Standards B
The Vectorworks Design Series products include many standards designed to facilitate project setup and use, including
standards, preference sets, and automatically classing objects.

Layer, Class, and Viewport Standards

The standards for the Vectorworks Architect and Landmark products are centered around the concept of viewports on
sheet layers. A project file contains a number of viewports; each viewport consists of a particular combination of
visible layers and classes.
This section provides information about the viewport, layer, and class standards in Vectorworks Architect and
Landmark products. Modifying these standards is not recommended, as it requires a large effort to manage and
coordinate standards information.

Using the Layermap Worksheet

The creation of layers, classes, and viewports or views by the setup commands (Create Standard Viewports and
Standard Naming) is controlled through the use of the worksheet LayerMap.G, in the VA Setup Data-Imperial.vwx
or VA Setup Data-Metric.vwx file ([Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\Common\Data). This worksheet contains the predefined
class, layer, attribute, and visibility information needed to generate a completely ready-to-use project file at any scale
or level of complexity.
The LayerMap.G worksheet applies to viewports on sheet layers created with the Create Standard Viewports
command, or views created with the Create Corresponding View for Each Viewport option in the Create Standard
Viewports dialog box.
The settings in the LayerMap.G worksheet are automatically applied when a new file is opened and one of the Setup
commands is selected. If the LayerMap.G worksheet contained in the VA Setup Data-Imperial.vwx or VA Setup
Data-Metric.vwx file is edited, all sheets created on that machine will use the new standards. However, a copy of the
LayerMap.G worksheet can be included in a file (by importing it) and edited there. These custom settings will
supersede any automated settings for that file only. This is a convenient way of sharing standards between offices and
users, without modifying the default standards on an individual machine.
If a Vectorworks file contains a LayerMap.G worksheet, when the Create Standard Viewports command is selected,
the Import LayerMap.G dialog box opens. Specify which worksheet to use.

Parameter Description
Use the existing LayerMap.G Uses the LayerMap.G worksheet present in the file rather than the standard
worksheet
Import and use the standard Uses the standard LayerMap.G worksheet (from the VA Setup Data.vwx
LayerMap.G file) rather than the imported (custom) worksheet
1010 | Appendix B: Standards

Parameter Description
Delete the LayerMap.G worksheet Deletes the imported LayerMap.G worksheet from the file; this is
when finished recommended when using the standard worksheet

The Layermap Worksheet

The Layermap worksheet, located in the VA Setup Data-Imperial.vwx or VA Setup Data-Metric.vwx file, begins
with a listing of project types in the first six rows (before the LayerMap.G row). These project types are used by the
legacy command Create Standard Views, and are not used by the Create Standard Viewports command. As such,
they are no longer supported.
Following the legacy project types are the names of the viewports or views used by the Create Standard Viewports
command. Below the name is the viewport/view type, which controls under which drawing type the viewport/view
appears in the Create Standard Viewports dialog box.
After the project types section is the layers section. This section of the Layermap worksheet controls the initialization
and setup of layers in a specific viewport/view. Based on the information in this section, the Create Standard
Viewports command generates a complete array of layers with the proper settings to correctly display a viewport or
view.
Viewport/view names (the full name
can be viewed in the formula bar)

Layers
section

Layer visibility
settings

The final section in the Layermap worksheet is the classes section. This section controls class setup and initialization
for each viewport/view. As with the layer section, the Setup commands use the information to generate a full class
setup configuration for each viewport/view in a project file.

Class visibility settings Class attribute settings

 Layer, Class, and Viewport Standards | 1011

Viewport/View Types
Viewport/view types are found directly under the viewport/view names in the Layermap worksheet. The identifier
directly beneath the viewport/view name indicates its drawing type. Viewport/view types control how the viewport/
view is generated, and are used by the Create Standard Viewports command to properly configure the project
document. The viewport/view type identifier may take on one of the following values:

Identifier Drawing Type

1 Project plan view/viewport (one viewport/view only)
L Auxiliary viewport/view (create a user-specified number of viewports/views)
M Floor plan viewport/view (create one viewport/view for each floor in the project)
N Notation viewport/view (create a user-specified number of viewports/views)
S Site plan viewport/view (create one viewport/view)

The cover sheet is a notation

viewport/view

Standard Layer Visibility in Viewports/Views

In the layers section of Layermap worksheet, layer names are listed down the left side of the worksheet in the first
column. This listing represents the available layers that can be included in a viewport/view. Layer names that are used
when generating multiple layers (for example, for the floor viewports/views of a multi-floor building) are indicated by
a pound sign (#) suffix.
The visibility status of a specific layer is indicated by an alphabetic identifier located in the worksheet cell which
cross-references the layer and the viewport/view in which it will be a component. The identifier can take on one of the
following values:

Identifier Meaning
A Active layer
V Visible
G Grayed
I Invisible
<no value> Not created for viewport/view; set to invisible if existing
1012 | Appendix B: Standards

The Mod-Site-Arch layer is the active layer in

the Site Plan (General) viewport/view

Design Layer Types in the Standards

The Layermap worksheet contains a specialized set of identifiers which control how model design layers are
configured for a project file. These identifiers, which are located on the extreme right of the Layermap worksheet
opposite the model layers, are used by the Setup commands to correctly configure a set of model layers for the project
file.
Model layer type identifiers can take on one of the following values:

Identifier Meaning
C Layer w/ ceiling referenced information (one per floor)
F Foundation layer (one per project)
R Roof layer (one per project)
S Slab layer (one per floor)
W Layer w/ floor referenced information (one per floor)
<no value> Supplemental model layer

The Mod-Floor-# layers will be

referenced to finish floor level

Class Visibility in the Standards

In the class section of the Layermap worksheet, class names available for inclusion in the viewports/views are listed
down the left side of the worksheet in the first column. The visibility of a specific class is indicated by an alphabetic
identifier, which is located in the worksheet cell which cross-references the layer and the viewport/view.
The identifier can take on one of the following values:

Identifier Meaning
V Visible
 Auto-classing Objects | 1013

Identifier Meaning
G Grayed
I Invisible
<no value> Not created for viewport/view; set to invisible if existing

An explanation of the specific uses of and applications for classes, including AIA layer name equivalents, is provided
in PDF format (VA Sheet-Layer-Class stds.pdf) included with the Vectorworks Architect product and available in
[Vectorworks]\Extras.
Default class attributes, such as line style and pen color, are no longer controlled from the Layermap worksheet.

Auto-classing Objects
Certain plug-in objects and symbols have specific default classes, which coordinate with the Layermap worksheet class
name standards. The plug-in objects listed here are automatically classed when they are inserted into a file that is set up
to use auto-classing (when Enable Auto-classing is selected in the Standard Naming dialog box). If auto-classing is
not enabled, these objects are set to a default class when they are inserted into a file.

Object Default Class Vectorworks Product

Base Cabinet Millwork-Main Architect
Bath-Shower Plumbing-Fixtures Architect
Column Structural-Columns Architect, Landmark
Comm Device DataComm-Devices Architect
Compartment Sink Plumbing-Fixtures Architect
Counter Top Millwork-Main Architect
Desk Furniture-Main Architect
Door (2D) - overhead door path Ceiling-Overhead Architect, Landmark
Door (2D) - lintel Ceiling-Main Architect, Landmark
Door (2D) - loci NonPlot Architect, Landmark
Door (2D) - threshold, sidelight sashes Sills Architect, Landmark
and glazing, swing, and leaf
Door - kick plates Door-Main Architect, Landmark
Door (2D) - other components Door-Main Architect, Landmark
Door in Wall Ceiling-Main Architect, Landmark
Drilled Footing Structural-Footings Architect
Drip Emitter Irrigation-SprayPat Landmark
Escalator Vert Trans-Main Architect
Fireplace Fixtures-Main Architect
Grab Bars Fixtures-Main Architect
Guardrail (Curved) Site-Improvements Architect, Landmark
Guardrail (Straight) Site-Improvements Architect, Landmark
1014 | Appendix B: Standards

Object Default Class Vectorworks Product

Handrail (Curved) Fixtures-Main Architect, Landmark
Handrail (Straight) Fixtures-Main Architect, Landmark
Hardscape (tag) Hardscape-Component-Tag Landmark
Hardscape (border) Hardscape-Component-Border Joint Landmark
Hardscape (main area) Hardscape-Component-Main Joint Landmark
HVAC Damper HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Diffuser HVAC-Diffusers Architect
HVAC Elbow Duct HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Flex Duct HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Outlet HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Splitter HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Straight Duct HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Transition HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Vertical Duct HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
HVAC Vertical Elbow HVAC-Duct/Equipment Architect
Irrigation Head Irrigation-SprayPat Landmark
Joist Structural-Framing Architect
Mullion Wall-Ext-Glazed Architect
North Arrow Notes-Sheet Architect, Landmark
Parking Spaces Site-Paving-Marking Architect, Landmark
Pilaster Structural-Columns Architect
Rafter Structural-Framing Architect
Ramp Vert Trans-Main Architect, Landmark
Receptacle Electrical-Devices Architect
Reference Marker Notes-Sheet Architect, Landmark
Revision Marker Notes-Sheet Architect, Landmark
Roadway (Bzier) Site-Paving Architect, Landmark
Roadway (Curved) Site-Paving Architect, Landmark
Roadway (Straight) Site-Paving Architect, Landmark
Roadway (Tee) Site-Paving Architect, Landmark
Shelving Unit Furniture-Main Architect
Simple Elevator Vert Trans-Main Architect
Site Modifiers with Grade Limits Site-DTM-Modifier Architect, Landmark
configuration
Site Modifiers with Pad configuration Site-DTM-Modifier Landmark
 Class Standards | 1015

Object Default Class Vectorworks Product

Site Modifiers with Texture Bed Site-DTM-Modifier Landmark
configuration
Space (2D) - boundary Space-Main Architect
Space (2D) - label Space-Spec Architect
Space (2D) - leader line Space-Spec Architect
Space (3D) - attributes Space-Patterns Architect
Stair Vert Trans-Main Architect, Landmark
Switch Electrical-Devices Architect
Table and Chairs Furniture-Main Architect, Landmark
Toilet Stall Fixtures-Main Architect
Utility Cabinet Millwork-Main Architect
Wall Cabinet Millwork-Main Architect
Window (2D) - lintel Ceiling-Main Architect, Landmark
Window (2D) - loci NonPlot Architect, Landmark
Window (2D) - sills, sashes, and glazing Sills Architect, Landmark
Window (2D) - other components Window-Main Architect, Landmark
Window in Wall Ceiling-Main Architect, Landmark
WindowWall (Curved) Wall-Exterior Architect
WindowWall (Straight) Wall-Exterior Architect
Workstation Counter Furniture-Main Architect
Workstation Overhead Furniture-Main Architect
Workstation Panel Furniture-Main Architect
Workstation Pedestal Furniture-Main Architect

Class Standards
The Machine Design_Classes.sta file, located in the Standards folder, contains a number of pre-defined class standards.
To use the pre-defined classes in a drawing:
1. Select Tools > Organization.
The Organization dialog box opens. Click the Classes tab.
1016 | Appendix B: Standards

2. Click New.
The New Class dialog box displays.

3. Click Import Classes and choose Machine Design_Classes.sta from the list.
4. Select the desired classes and click OK.
5. Click OK in the Organization dialog box to return to the drawing.
Click the classes list on the Data bar to list the classes that are available for use in the drawing.
 Project Preference Sets | 1017

Project Preference Sets

The following table lists the files contained in a preference set folder, and the menu commands/tools/objects which use
those preference files. A description of the information stored in each preference file is also provided.

Preference File Used By Information Stored

Door Hardware Door tool, Door Hardware Library Door hardware set name and
Library.txt record values
Equipment Record.txt VA Create Record Format and default values of
record
Equipment VA Create Schedule, VA Records and Format of schedule
Schedule.txt Schedules
Plumbing Fixt VA Create Schedule Format and default values of
Record.txt record
Plumbing VA Create Schedule, VA Records and Format of schedule
Schedule.txt Schedules
Room Finish Space tool, Room Finish Library Room finish names and
Library.txt descriptions
VA2 Records and VA Records and Schedules Format of records and schedules,
Schedules.txt and default values of records
VA_Project_Set.txt Utility file for VA to ensure that the
folder has not been moved

Taken together, these files constitute a preference set; they must all be present in the folder of the current preference
set.
The Vectorworks Architect product ships with six predefined preference sets.

Name Location
VA Defaults [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_Def
Prefs_01 [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_01
Prefs_02 [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_02
Prefs_03 [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_03
Prefs_04 [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_04
Prefs_05 [Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\VW_Arch\Data\Prefs_05
1018 | Appendix B: Standards

Making no changes to the preferences in the Defaults folder is strongly recommended. System administrators
should make this folder read-only (Windows) or locked (Macintosh) to prevent users from making changes.
The remaining preference set folders (01 05) can be customized.
Unused folders can be removed, leaving only the one that will be used; new folders can be created. To create a new
folder, simply copy one of the existing folders to a new location. Select Tools > Options > VA Set Project Prefs to
specify the location of the new folder. The folder location is not restricted. In a workgroup environment, locating the
folder on the network makes the same project preference set available to everyone.

Reserved Names
There are a number of words that are reserved for specific use within the Vectorworks Landmark product. These words
should not be used to name objects or symbols.

2D Contours to 3D Polys BADSHEET678 Cut N Fill DTM

DTM Mod Record Data Drawing Border
Elev Analysis Fit To Objects Guides
ID Label Irrigation Head Landscape-Plant
LineLength Mod-Guidelines Mod-Site-Civil
None Plant Plant Record
Polyline ID Project Plant List Project Symlst
Raise/Lower Record Roadway (Curved) Roadway (Straight)
Saved Sheets Setup Record Sheet Border
Sheet-Common Site-DTM-Modifier Site-Improvement-Spec
Slope Analysis Stake # Stake Object
Stake Record Station Worksheet Survey Data
Symbol List Symbol List Sym Symbol to Group
VW_Land-Invisible Vegetation line ZVI Analysis
Database Connectivity C
The Vectorworks Design Series products include the ability to communicate with external databases according to Open
Database Connectivity (ODBC) standard. Using ODBC, a set of data can be used to automatically update the records
attached to objects. Similarly, Vectorworks objects can send object data to a database, updating it.

ODBC Workflow
To successfully use ODBC in Vectorworks Design Series products, a database management system is required, and
steps need to be followed to set up the connection and manage the data flow.
1. Configure and set up data in the database program of your choice. Database connectivity in Vectorworks software
is supported for the following database systems:
Microsoft Excel
FileMaker Pro
Microsoft Access
MySQL
SQLite*
Any database that supports ODBC and has either Macintosh or Windows drivers
Database and/or operating systems typically include a separate ODBC Administrator or Manager application,
which defines drivers and data sources. Database drivers may need to be installed. See ODBC Driver
Information on page 1037.
The installation, setup, and usage of database systems is beyond the scope of this help system and is not described
here. Please consult the documentation related to your operating system or database software for information.
* SQLite database files do not require an ODBC manager or server. For information on SQLite, visit http://
www.sqlite.org
2. Set up the connection between Vectorworks software and the database system. A key column with unique
values is designated, to establish and maintain the communication between the database system and Vectorworks
record formats.
3. Identify the object instances of each type of object to be connected, and define the link between the database and
the record formats of the object types.
4. When connections have been established, determine the settings to update the Vectorworks record formats from
the database, and to update the database from the Vectorworks object records. The two-way communication
process can be automated.

Database-Vectorworks Communication
The values in a database link to the record fields of an object instance through a series of connections made between the
database software and the Vectorworks software.
1020 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Vectorworks

Record Instance Record Field Record Format

Database
Database Table Key Column
Database Column

Database Row

One or more columns of the database table must have unique values. These Key columns are used by the Vectorworks
program to uniquely identify the database rows.
Database setup consists of identifying the key column(s) and setting up each type of connection, and then specifying
update settings for the flow of data.

Database Setup
On the Windows or Macintosh system, open the ODBC Data Source Administrator (Windows) or ODBC Manager
(Macintosh). The standard drivers may already be installed for the major database providers; verify this on the Drivers
tab. More information on drivers is available in ODBC Driver Information on page 1037. Add the database file,
providing a name for it. This makes the database available through the ODBC administrator.
SQLite database files do not require an ODBC manager, so setting up the database drivers is not necessary.

Database Connection
In the Vectorworks file, connect the database to the file, and then select a Key identifier for each data source.
 Database Connection | 1021

To establish the connection between the database and the Vectorworks file:
1. Open the Vectorworks drawing. Database connection information is saved in the Vectorworks file.
2. Select Tools > Database > Manage Databases.
The Manage Databases dialog box opens. Through this dialog box, manage available databases and connect the
desired database or databases to the current file.

3. Since the connection has not yet been made, the Available Databases list is empty. Click Connect.
The Database Connection dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Use Data Source Connect to a database source that was previously added to the ODBC
Name manager or ODBC administrator; click Refresh to update the choices
Use Connection String On Windows, this option allows temporary creation of data sources from
files, or can select the known data source name similarly to the Use Data
Source Name option. Click Build and select the database from the Machine
Data Source tab. The connection string cannot be built from a specified
source on the Macintosh.
1022 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Parameter Description
Use SQLite File Click Browse to select and connect to an SQLite database file; this type of
database connection is indicated as [sqlite] in database-related dialog boxes.
If no SQLite file exists, enter a file name to automatically create an
empty SQLite database file.
User Name/Password If a database connection requires a user name/password, enter the information

4. Either select the SQLite file, or the named database added to the ODBC manager/administrator earlier, enter a
User Name and Password if required, and click OK.
5. The selected database is added to the list of available databases in the Manage Databases dialog box. The tables
associated with the Layout database are listed on the left, with the database table columns listed on the right.

6. Select one of the available database tables; its rows display on the right. Select one of the rows to serve as the Key
identifier by clicking in the Use as Key column for that row. The Key column uniquely identifies the data rows in
the table. By default, this is one of the columns with unique data, used as a row identifier.
The ability to select the Key depends on the database driver. If needed, click Show Table to display the tables
contents and help select an appropriate Key.
7. Select the Key identifier for any other database tables. Each table must have at least one column selected as Use as
Key.
8. Click Connect if there are other databases to connect, and identify the Key for each additional table.
9. Once the database tables have been selected and connected, and the Key identifier(s) set for each table, click OK.
The data sources have now been properly connected and identified for the file.
If the connection to the database becomes out of date, select the database and click Renew Connection to
re-establish the database connection. Table and column information data is updated.
If there are problems connecting to the database, an error message provides troubleshooting information. Click
Details to open a log file in the default text editor application. The log file provides further information to help
diagnose connection errors.
 Record Format Database Connection | 1023

Record Format Database Connection

Each field of the record format needs to be mapped to the appropriate database table column. The record connections
can be saved in an xml file and imported into another file.
Record formats can be automatically created and linked to the database table; see Automatically Creating Record
Formats from a Database Table on page 1031.
To connect the desired record format to the database table:
1. Select Tools > Database > Record Format Connection. Alternatively, select a record format in the Data tab of
the Object Info palette for a selected object with the desired record attached, and then click Record Format
Database Connection.
The Record Format Database Connection dialog box opens, showing available record formats and parametric
objects in the file. Each record format can be linked to a data source that has already been connected to the file.

Parameter Description
Record Formats in the Lists the record formats available in the Vectorworks file, as well as the
Document databases and database tables to which they are connected
New Creates a new record format as described in Creating Record Formats on
page 188 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Edit Opens the Edit Record Format dialog box, to link the record format to the
specified database and table
Delete Deletes the selected record format from the file
Export as Database Automatically creates database table rows from the selected record format;
Table see Automatically Creating a Database Table from a Record Format on
page 1033
Manage Databases Opens the Manage Databases dialog box, to connect to available databases;
see Database Connection on page 1020
1024 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Parameter Description
Import Connections Imports the connection settings from an external .xml file, overriding any
existing database connections. This allows the connections specified from
another file to be used in this file.
Export Connections Exports the current connection settings to an .xml file

2. Select the record format and click Edit.

The Edit Record Format dialog box opens, with additional database controls available due to the presence of the
database connection.

3. Select Database Connection to link the record format fields to the selected database and table. This area only
displays for record formats when a database is connected in the file.
If needed, verify or change the connected database by clicking Manage Databases, or check the table selected in
Table Name to view the table contents.
4. Click Connection Options to specify database connection update options.
The Connection Options dialog box opens. Select the actions to occur in the database table when the connected
record format, or object with the record attached, is edited. (These changes occur at the time of database update set
in Specifying Update Settings on page 1035; alerts inform you of any changes to the database.)

Parameter Description
Add new rows in Database Table When a new record format is created, automatically adds a
when creating Records of this database table row to the connected database
Format
 Record Format Database Connection | 1025

Parameter Description
Delete the row in the Database When a record format is disconnected from an object, or an object
Table when removing Records of with a connected record format is deleted, automatically deletes
this Format the row that was connected to the object in the database table

5. Click OK to return to the Edit Record Format dialog box.

6. For each record field, assign a database table from the selected database. Select a record field and click Edit.
The Edit Field dialog box opens.

7. Select the associated table row from the database in DB Table Column, and select the method of database
communication in DB Link Type:
Read/Write: Allows data to move in both directions between the database and the Vectorworks file
Read Only: Allows database information to be read into the Vectorworks file, but does not allow record data to
modify the database
Write Only: Allows the Vectorworks file data to modify the database, but does not allow the database
information to modify the Vectorworks record field
8. Click OK to return to the Edit Record Format dialog box. The dialog box updates to display the associated table
data and link type.
Click in a DB Read/Write column to easily change the link type for the selected row.
1026 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

9. Once the data has been linked for each record field, click OK. The fields in the record format have now been
linked to the table data in the specified database, and the link type has been defined. On the Data tab of the Object
Info palette, connected record formats display with the name of the connected database and its table.

Object Database Connection

The final step in setting up a database connection is to connect object instances to the database. Once connected, the
connection can be edited. The connection can also be removed.

Single Object Connection

To connect a database to an object:
1. Select an object.
2. On the Data tab of the Object Info palette, click the box for the selected format to attach the record format to the
object instance. (See Attaching Record Formats to Symbols and Objects on page 189 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.)
The Record Fields display with default values from the record format.
3. Select Tools > Database > Object Connection. Alternatively, click Object Database Connection from the Data
tab of the Object Info palette.
The Object Database Connection dialog box opens. If a row was previously selected for the object, it appears
highlighted and bolded.
 Object Database Connection | 1027

Parameter Description
Available Records Lists the record formats available for the selected object
Database Connection Opens the Record Formats Database Connection dialog box, to connect a
record format to a database table
Add New Database Inserts a new row in the database table, and associates it with the object
Table Row
Use Selected Database Allows the database table row from the linked database table list to be
Table Row selected, associating an existing row with the object
Database Table Rows Selects a table row to associate with the object; this row provides data for the
selected object or receives data from the selected object

4. Click Use Selected Database Table Row, and then select the appropriate row for the selected object.
5. Click OK.
6. The record fields are populated from the database table for the record instance attached to the object.

Multiple Object Connection

When there are multiple similar objects that should be identically connected to database tables through attached record
formats, it would be tedious to connect each one. The connection for multiple objects can be made at one time.
To connect a database to multiple objects:
1. Select several objects of the same type; for example, select several space objects.
2. Select Tools > Database > Object Connection. Alternatively, click Object Database Connection from the Data
tab of the Object Info palette.
The Multiple Objects Database Connection dialog box opens. By selecting a format field and selecting search
filter criteria, the table rows associated can be searched.
1028 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Parameter Description
Available Records Lists the record formats available for the selected objects (only record
formats that are common to the selected objects display)
Database Connection Opens the Record Formats Database Connection dialog box, to
connect a record format to a database table
Add New Database Table Inserts a new row in the database table for each selected object, and
Rows associates each row with each object
Find Row by Value (exclude Only the format fields connected to a database are listed. Selects a
objects with existing object format field, and uses the value from the selected objects that are not
connection) already connected to a database, to search the database table for a
particular row. (Once the row is found, the Key identifier is used to
link the table row to the record fields.)
Find Row by Value (for all Only the format fields connected to a database are listed. Selects a
objects) format field, and uses the value from the selected objects to search the
database table for a particular row. (Once the row is found, the Key
identifier is used to link the table row to the record fields.)
Show Database Table Opens the Database Table dialog box, to view the database table
associated with the record format and help determine which column
to use for the search criteria
When this dialog is dismissed Determines the selection status of resolved objects, or of unresolved
objects that may require further attention to connect them. Select do
not change selection to make no change to the number of selected
objects.

3. Select a Format Field, and then click in the Find by Value column to select the field as a search filter.
 Object Database Connection | 1029

4. On the right, the status of resolved objects indicates how many of the selected objects had data found in the
database tables based on this search. When objects are resolved, their record field data is properly connected to the
database table.
5. Click OK. For each resolved object, the record fields are populated from the database table for the record instance
attached to the objects.
Resolved objects are connected to the corresponding rows using the Key identifier, and then each row is
associated with the corresponding object.

Editing Object Connections

The read/write queries of an object connection can be viewed and edited for one or several selected objects.
To edit object connections:
1. Select one or more objects. The objects should already be connected to a database.
2. Select Tools > Database > Edit Object Connection.
The Edit Object Connection dialog box opens. The reading and writing SQL queries for the selected object(s)
display and can be edited, either individually for each selected object, or for all the objects at once.

Parameter Description
Available Records Lists the record formats available for the selected objects (when multiple
objects are selected, only record formats that are common to the selected
objects display)
Modify selected Edits the reading and writing SQL queries of each selected object
objects individually individually, by scrolling through each one
Modify selected Edits the reading and writing SQL queries of all the selected objects at one
objects in bulk time using record name identifiers; scrolling through the selected objects is
not necessary
Reading Query Shows the reading SQL query for the selected object(s)
1030 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Parameter Description
Protocol Reading SQL queries consist of the following rows:
SELECT: indicates the column names, in brackets separated by commas
Example: [id],[room name],[area]
FROM: indicates the name of the database and table, in brackets separated
by periods
Example: [SpaceInfo].[dbo].[Spaces]
WHERE: indicates the name and value of the record format, with the
record format name in brackets and the value (or identifier in angle
brackets) separated by an equal sign
Example: [area]=30 or [area]=<area>
When editing a single query that applies to multiple selected objects (Modify
selected objects in bulk is selected), use an identifier within angle brackets
for the WHERE record field name, instead of the actual value. Using an
identifier in angle brackets allows the query to proceed for all selected objects
regardless of each objects actual value.
Test Query Tests the current reading SQL query to see if it is valid; this is useful for
verifying queries before committing to the changes. An alert indicates
whether the test query was successful or invalid
Reset If the reading SQL query has been modified, returns the query to its original
settings
Writing Query Shows the writing SQL query for the selected object(s)
Protocol Writing SQL queries consist of the following rows:
UPDATE: indicates the name of the database and table, in brackets
separated by periods
Example: [SpaceInfo].[dbo].[Spaces]
SET: indicates the name and value of the table column, with the column
name in brackets and the value (or record format field name in angle
brackets) separated by an equal sign
Example: [Room Name]=Kitchen or [Room Name]=<name>
WHERE: indicates the name and value of a search condition, such as
column name and value, with the search item name in brackets and the
value (or record format field name in angle brackets) separated by an equal
sign
Example: [id]=1 or [id]=<identifier>
When editing a single query that applies to multiple selected objects (Modify
selected objects in bulk is selected), use a record format field name within
angle brackets for the SET and/or WHERE value, instead of the actual value.
Using a record format field name in angle brackets allows the query to
proceed for all selected objects regardless of each objects actual value.
Test Query Tests the current writing SQL query to see if it is valid; this is useful for
verifying queries before committing to the changes. An alert indicates
whether the test query was successful or invalid.
 Automating Database Connection Workflows | 1031

Parameter Description
Reset If the writing SQL query has been modified, returns the query to its original
settings
< or > When multiple objects are selected with the Modify selected objects
individually option enabled, scrolls among the objects to display each
objects queries for editing
Show Object Displays the current object in the drawing window for identification

3. View or edit the object connection information, and then click OK.
If there are validation problems, an error message provides information. The cursor is automatically placed in the
field where the problem exists to help identify the problem.

Removing Object Connections

The connection between an object and a database can be removed.
To remove object connections:
1. Select one or more objects. The objects should already be connected to a database.
2. Select Tools > Database > Remove Object Connection.
The database is disconnected from the object(s).

Automating Database Connection Workflows

The functionality for connecting to a database and then establishing object/record format database linking contains
built-in automation features to make the job easier. While it is still necessary to know how to accomplish the steps
manually, dynamic updating between the Vectorworks file and the connected database allows record formats to be
automatically created from a database table, and database tables to be automatically created from record formats.
Connections are automatically established, and remain up to date.

Automatically Creating Record Formats from a Database Table

Record formats can be created from database tables. The imported tables are automatically linked to the new record
formats.
To create record formats from a table in a connected database:
1. Select Tools > Database > Manage Databases.
The Manage Databases dialog box opens.
1032 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

2. Select the database on the left, and then click Import Table.
The Import Table dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Database Table Displays the name of the selected database
Name
New Record Format Specifies the name of the new record format to create; the suggested name is
Name based on the database table name, but it can be changed
 Automating Database Connection Workflows | 1033

Parameter Description
New Record Format Lists the database columns and the corresponding record field and type;
Fields connection database fields with a check mark in the left column become record fields in the
Vectorworks file
Selection Specifies the parameters and link type for the selected record field to be created;
the Record Field Name, Record Field Type, and Database Link Type are
suggested based on the column information, but they can be changed

3. Select the columns from the database that will become record fields in the new record format by placing a check
mark in the left column. For each selected column, specify the record field name, type, and connection type. For
more information on connection types, see Record Format Database Connection on page 1023.
4. Click OK.
Each selected table column in the database table becomes a record field in the new record format. The record
fields are automatically connected to the database according to the connection type specified.

Automatically Creating a Database Table from a Record Format

Database tables can be created from record formats. The new tables are automatically linked to the record formats.
To create a database table from a record format:
1. Select Tools > Database > Record Format Connection.
The Record Format Database Connection dialog box opens, listing the record formats available in the current file.

2. Select the record format, and then click Export as Database Table.
The Export as Database Table dialog box opens.
1034 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Parameter Description
Record Name Displays the name of the selected record format
Database Lists the databases connected to the current file; select the database to receive
the new table
New Database Table Specifies the name of the new data table to create; the suggested name is
Name based on the record format name, but it can be changed
New Database Table Lists the columns, based on the record format fields, that will become
Columns connection to database table columns; the table column names are based on the record
Record Format Fields fields, but they can be changed in Selection
Add Adds table columns; select each added column and specify its properties in
Selection.
This action does not affect the existing record format in the file.
Remove Removes selected table column row(s), when one or more record formats
does not need to be used as the basis for a database table column.
This action does not affect the existing record format in the file.
 Specifying Update Settings | 1035

Parameter Description
Selection Specifies the parameters for the selected table column to be created; the
Database Table Column Name, Database Table Column Type, and
Record Format Field Name are suggested based on the record format
information, but they can be changed.
A column can be created in the database table, but not be connected to a
record format field, by selecting <not connected> in the Record Format
Field Name list.
Show Table Preview Displays a preview of the database columns that will be created

3. Specify the parameters of the database table columns to be created. The columns will be created in the order listed;
to change the order of a database table column, click and drag within the # column.
4. To preview the appearance of the database columns, click Show Table Preview.
The Database Table dialog box opens. The columns to be created are displayed, along with any corresponding
record field default values.

5. Click Close to return to the Export as Database Table dialog box and make any further necessary table column
adjustments.
6. Click OK.
Each record field in the becomes a column in the new database table. The record fields are automatically
connected to the database.

Specifying Update Settings

Setting Update Frequency

Database or Vectorworks file updates can be executed automatically or manually. The update settings control the
frequency of automatic updates, or only permit manual updates.
If there are problems connecting to the database, an error message provides troubleshooting information. Click Details
to open a log file in the default text editor application. The log file provides further information to help diagnose
connection errors.
1036 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

To specify update settings:

1. Select Tools > Database > Update Settings.
The Update Database Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter Description
Update database Sets the frequency of updates from the Vectorworks file to the database
Manually The database is only updated by selecting the Update External Database
command
Every record Updates the database each time a record field value changes in Record Info
change
Every __ minutes Updates the database after a set number of minutes
Update Vectorworks Sets the frequency of updates of the Vectorworks file from the database
document
Manually The Vectorworks file is only updated by selecting the Update Vectorworks
Document command
Every __ minutes Updates the file after a set number of minutes

2. Click OK.

Manually Updating the Database

If the record fields have been changed for objects with linked fields to a database table, and the link type for the field is
set to Read/Write or Write Only, the drawing data can update the database table data.
Select Tools > Database > Update External Database.

Manually Updating the Vectorworks File

If database information has changed, and the link type for connected record fields is Read/Write or Read Only, the
information can be automatically sent to the Vectorworks file, updating the record fields of all object instances
connected to the database.
Select Tools > Database > Update Vectorworks Document.
 ODBC Driver Information | 1037

ODBC Driver Information

When setting up a database program for ODBC functionality, related drivers may not be installed. This list describes
drivers available for each platform, where to obtain them, and current problems that may exist.
SQLite database files do not require an ODBC manager.

Windows
On Windows, the ODBC manager is integrated into the operating system (OS).

Driver Name Driver Driver Update Update database Add new

Connection Vectorworks with Vectorworks database table
records by record data rows through
reading data object
from database connection
Microsoft Integrated* in the Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,
Access OS working working working working
Microsoft Integrated* in the Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,
Excel OS working working working working
Microsoft If not integrated in Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,
SQL Server the OS, ask vendor working working working working
Microsoft Integrated* in the Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,
Text Driver OS working working working working
MySQL Available at: Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,
www.mysql.com working working working working

FileMaker Pro Available at: Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,

** www.filemaker.com working working working working

* On Windows 7 64-bit systems, you need to run the 32-bit ODBC manager (odbcad32.exe) to see the built-in drivers,
which are currently 32-bit only.
** FileMaker Pro includes the driver needed to share your database as a data source. To use your FileMaker database
file locally, FileMaker Pro must be running, and the database file opened and shared. To share your FileMaker database
file as a data source over a network, use FileMaker Server Advanced.

Macintosh
On the Macintosh, there is no integrated ODBC manager. Suggestions include:
ODBC Manager (http://www.odbcmanager.net)
iODBC Manager (http://www.iodbc.org)
ODBC Administrator Tool (http://support.apple.com/downloads/ODBC_Administrator_Tool_for_Mac_OS_X)
1038 | Appendix C: Database Connectivity

Driver Name Driver Driver Update Update database Add new

Connection Vectorworks with Vectorworks database table
records by record data rows through
reading data object
from database connection
Actual SQL Available at: Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,
www.actualtech.com working working working working
Problem Problem
reported: data reported: data
length restriction length restriction
when writing to when writing to
database database
Actual Available at: Supported, Not supported Not supported Not supported
Access www.actualtech.com working

MySQL Available at: Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,

www.mysql.com working working working working

FileMaker Available at: Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,

Pro * www.filemaker.com working working working working

* FileMaker Pro includes the driver needed to share your database as a data source. To use your FileMaker database file
locally, FileMaker Pro must be running, and the database file opened and shared. To share your FileMaker database file
as a data source over a network, use FileMaker Server Advanced.
Index
Numerics Base Cabinet tool 705
2D Polys to 3D Contours command 291 Batter slope, creating with a fence 314
3D loci Beams
converting 3D polygons into 292 See Simple beams
creating from 2D polygons 291 Beams, in roof framing 154
creating from grade object 367 Bearings
3D models, and plan appearance 715 2-hole flanged 948
3D object, from 2D 817 4-hole flanged 950
3D Polys to 3D Loci command 292 ball 940
3D Properties command 828 lock nut 954
3ds format needle 946
exporting to 798 pillow block 952
importing from 797 roller 942
scaling objects during import or export 800 tapered roller 944
thrust 947
A Belt Length Calculator command 820
Bill of materials, creating 851
Accessories, lighting
converting symbols into 476 Blended Screen tool 503
finding and modifying 472 Bolts
bolt and nut 883
inserting 476
properties of 477 carriage 885
eye 886
specifications for 989
hex 873
static 475
Accessories, roof 146 J-bolts 888
round head 885
Accessory Insertion tool 476
round head square neck 885
Add Surface command 131
Add Text to Database command 659 square 873
swing 889
Adjacency matrices
swing eye 890
changing the order of spaces 94
creating from existing spaces 93 T-bolts 891
U-bolts 892
creating worksheets for 91
with nuts 873
importing from a spreadsheet 92
properties of 94 Borders, of curtains 485
Bubble diagrams 94
Adjacency Matrix tool 93
Bubble notation objects
Adjacency Score tool 95
detail bubbles 849
Align and Distribute Items tool 471
grid bubbles 596
Align Stakes Vertically command 326
Building Information Model (BIM)
Angles, showing rise over run for 593
GSA spatial program requirements 82
Animate Scenes command 546
importing and exporting IFC data 779
Animations, solar 684
Architect, new features of i Building shell, creating with Massing Model tool 319
Areas, landscape 428 Bulb Flat tool 136
Assign Legend to Insts command 470
Attributes C
changing "by class" settings 606 Cabinets
setting and restoring defaults 606 base 705
Attributes palette, utility menu 606 utility 707
Audio tools 510 wall 708
Auto hybrid Calculators
creating 715 belt length 820
editing 720 chain length 821
Auto Number Positions command 467 conductor sizing 281
Auto-classing objects 15, 1013 conduit sizing 283
Autolinking imported instrument data fields 811 simple beam 835
Automatic drawing coordination 741 Callout tool 641, 650
Awnings, creating with Chain Extrude tool 689 Cam Design command 837
Cams
B animating movement of 841
creating diagrams 842
Barn doors (lighting accessories) 475
defining the profile 840
1040 | Index

properties of 838 Components

resetting to original position 842 joining wall components with capped join mode 127
template file 837 joining wall components with L join mode 126
worksheets for 842 joining wall components with T join mode 126
Ceiling Grid tool 172 of slabs 109
Center Line Marker tool 849 preference for hiding details in walls 127
Center of mass, calculating 828 Conductor Sizing Calc command 282
Centroid command 826 Conduit Sizing Calc command 283
Chain Extrude tool 690 Container symbols
Chain Length Calculator command 821 creating custom 454
Chains, roller for two-fer 475
circular 929 label legend 453
linear 928 Contour labels, editing 304
offset links 930 Control Values for Keys command 823
Change Plant Grouping command 398 Conventions used in this guide xi
Choose Schedule command 37 Conversion Factors command 827
Choose VW Plants command 401 Convert Old Notes to New command 664
Circuiting tool 277 Convert to Accessory command 476
Circuits Convert to Boundary command 347
adding 278 Convert to Instrument command 458
creating 277 Convert to Light Position command 450
creating custom symbols 979 Convert to MultiCircuit command 473
editing 279 Convert to Pathway command 347
Class and Layer Mapping command 16 Convert VW Plants command 402
Classes Corner window 183
auto-classing 15, 1013 Counting Spotlight objects 473
changing for Spotlight objects 473 Create 3D Loci at Grade Points command 368
created automatically 15, 439 Create 3D Object from 2D command 817
for label legends 452 Create Auto Hybrid command 715
hierarchical order display 599 Create Bill of Materials command 852
mapping 16 Create Detail Viewport command 763
merging 17 Create Event Seating command 556
overriding design layer viewport properties of 737 Create Gobo Texture command 542
using standard naming for 12 Create Grade Limits from Pad command 314
visibility codes in Layermap worksheet 1012 Create Joists from Poly command 163
Clip Surface command 132 Create Label Legend from Lighting Device command 457
Collapse All command 601 Create Lectern command 553
Collars, in roof framing 154 Create Multiple Viewports command 769
Color Create New Plant command 384
custom photometric threshold 991 Create Objects from Shapes command 696
cut list 537 Create Pad from Grade Limits command 315
frames (lighting accessory) 475 Create Panel Riser Diag command 287
lighting instrument 466 Create Panel Schedule command 285
magic sheets 537 Create Parts List command 852
of lighting instrument label legends 456 Create Piping Runs command 284
photometric grid 481 Create Plot and Model View command 548
Column tool (Vectorworks Architect) 139 Create Redline Status WS command 640
Columns Create Retaining Wall Site Modifier command 333
creating in Architect 139 Create Rm Finish Legend command 34
exporting to IFC format 146 Create Road from Stakes command 326
Comm Device tool 280 Create Room command 549
Communication objects Create Screen command 555
adding to a circuit 278 Create Seating Layout command 692
communications devices 280 Create Section Viewport command 740
creating a circuit 277 Create Sheet List command 589
creating custom circuit symbols 979 Create Similar Object command 699
creating custom panels 976 Create Site Model command 295
editing a circuit 279 Create Site Volume List command 354
naming panels for circuiting 276 Create Spaces from Polys command 86
Component Join tool 125 Create Spaces from Walls command 85
 Index | 1041

Create Stage command 551 See Sheet borders

Create Stair command 552 Drawing Setup command 25
Create Standard Viewports command 9 Drip Emitter tool 435
Create Stepped Wall command 331 DTM
Create Surface Array command 710 See Site models
Create Viewport command (Design Series) 724, 727 DXF/DWG
Create Views command 558 converting DXF for DOE-2 analysis 807
Create Wall Projection command 131 mapping classes and layers when importing 16
Create Wall Recess command 132
Create Walls from Polygon command 697 E
Create Walls from Spaces command 83 Edit Array Items command (for surface arrays) 714
Curtains, inserting 485 Edit Auto Hybrid command 720
Curve data, for road polylines 324 Edit Base Surface command (for surface arrays) 714
Curved Truss tool 448 Edit Circuiting tool 279
Custom Modification command 606 Edit Crop command 735
Custom Renderworks command 544 Edit Design Layer command (for design layer viewports) 734
Custom Renderworks Options command 544 Edit Massing Model command 322
Custom Stair tool 257 Edit Object Connection command 1029
See also Stair tool Edit Space command 89
Cut and fill calculations 302 Edit Viewport command 732, 734
Cutting plane, showing with a section line 755 Electrical objects
adding a circuit 278
D creating a circuit 277
Database commands (ODBC) 1019 creating custom circuit symbols 979
Datum Feature Symbol tool 855 creating custom panels 976
Datum Target Symbol tool 856 editing circuits 279
Default content ID labels for 566
customizing and sharing files 39 naming panels for circuiting 276
customizing space settings 80 Elevation
Designer, new features of i marker 275
Detail Bubble tool 850 of point 368
Detail drawings stake 326
creating an interior elevation 580 Elevation Benchmark tool 592
creating linear material details 572 Elevation views
creating repetitive unit details 574 creating standard viewports for 10
general description of 572 creating with section viewports 750, 762
Dimension class 853 methods of creating 580
Dimension Exterior Walls command 587 Energy analysis, and gbXML 805
Dimensioning (tolerancing) Escalator tool 270
controlling markers and text 853 Event planning
inserting datum feature symbols 855 adding draperies 488
inserting feature control frames 853 creating a lectern 553
inserting notes 857 creating a room 549
Distribution file, and lighting instruments 466 creating a stage 551
Document Setup command 2 creating a video screen 555
Door tool 198 creating seating 556
Doors creating stairs 552
converting objects into 569 creating views 558
creating glass doors 209 overview of 549
creating symbols 222 Existing site model 289
DOE-2 export 808 Existing Tree tool 414
hardware legend 32 Existing trees
hardware sets 220 2D appearance of 419
ID labels for 205, 566 3D appearance of 422
inserting 198 autonumbering 425
properties of 199 custom 427
schedule 222 ID tags 425
Drainage analysis 297 overview 413
Draw Cam Diagrams command 842 placing 414
Drawing borders plant database list 411
1042 | Index

properties of 414 worm gear sets 918

schedule of 37 General Notes tool 646, 658
species 417 Generate Paperwork command 533
transplanting 417 Geneva Mechanism command 843
workflow 413 Geneva mechanisms
Exit Viewport command 734 animating movement of 844
Expand All command 601 properties of 843
Export 3DS command 798 resetting to original position 844
Export ASCII Patch command 810 template file 843
Export DOE-2 command 806 Geom Dim and Tol Note tool 857
Export gbXML command 806 Georeferencing
Export IFC Project command 790 creating a graticule 625
Export Instrument Data command 809 creating a great circle 628
Export KML command 800 exporting shapefiles 803
Export PDF command 777 for a design layer 622
Export Shapefile command 803 for the document 620
Exporting files importing and exporting georeferenced images 804
3ds format 798 importing shapefiles 802
3ds format, with scaling 800 moving an object to a specific location 625
dimmer and channel 810 overview of 620
gbXML format 805 projection options 629
KML format 800 replacing objects with symbols 624
lighting instrument data 809 using a stake object as a marker 370
PDF file 776 Georeferencing command 621
shapefile format 803 Getting Started Guides xiv
to Lightwright 811 Gobo projections
Exporting resources to another file 616 definition of 541
inserting projectors 541
F showing 544
Fastener tool 873 Gobo textures
Feature Control Frame tool 854 creating 542
Find and Modify command 472 editing transparency settings 543
Fit Walls to Objects command 128 libraries 541
Floorplans, creating from models 87 projecting 544
Floors, framing 163 Grade
Flow arrows, on site models 297 analysis of 366
Focus area, and magic sheets 537 creating loci from 367
Focus Instruments at Next Click command 478 displaying 361
Focus Instruments command 479 editing elevation of 365
Focus Point tool 477 global object preferences 361
Focus points inserting objects 363
creating 477 networks 365
hiding 478 updating objects 361
specifying for lighting instrument 462 Grade limits
stage object as 485 creating automatically from a pad 314
Framing creating manually 313
floors 163 for landscape walls 337
roofs 150 when creating roads 327
walls 169 Grade tool 361
worksheets for 170 Graticule tool 625
Framing Member tool 160 Great Circle tool 628
Grid Bubble tool 596
G Grid Method Entry command 292
Grid, for entering topographical data 292
Ganging tool 474 GSA data (space object) 81
gbXML, exporting to 805
Gears
bevel 916 H
Hub 3D 915 Handrail tool (curved) 273
spur 913 Handrail tool (straight) 273
spur gear rack 915 Hanging cards 539
 Index | 1043

Hardscape Import 3DS command 797

classing subcomponents 344 Import Adjacency Matrix command 92
converting to pathway or boundary 347 Import IFC command 790
creating 339 Import Image File command 815
editing 345 Import Instrument Data command 810
saving settings 348 Import PartSpec command 813
tags, appearance 348 Import PDF command 774
Hardscape tool 340 Import Shapefile command 802
Hardware, door 220 Import SketchUp command 794
Hatches, applying a sketch style to 677 Import Survey File command 289
Header, paperwork 538 Importing
Heliodon adjacency matrix 91
inserting 680 inventory report 536
properties of 682 label legends 457
shadow angles 688 manual sketches 975
solar animations 684 schedule format 535
Heliodon tool 680 Importing files
Help system xii 3ds format 797
Hierarchical Display command 601 3ds format, with scaling 800
Holes drag and drop method 773
drilled 576 DXF format 16, 807
hole patterns 579 from Lightwright 811
tapped 577 lighting instrument data 810
Home run marker 278 PartSpec files 813
Human Figure tool 700 PDF file 774
HVAC shapefile format 802
objects 275 SketchUp format 794
reports 275 world files 804
Insert Image Function command 617
I Inst Insertion tool 459
ID Label tool 37, 566 Instrument summary
ID labels filtering contents 532
applying 566 of drawing 525
creating custom symbols 969 of lighting position 531
defining custom fields 969 Instrument Summary tool 525
editing 570 Inventory (Spotlight)
error messages in custom fields 969 adding items 535
for doors 205 creating reports 535
for wall styles 570 deleting items 536
for windows 181 importing from file 536
leader options 968 setup 524
overview of 967 Irrigation
preferences for 568 adding 435
symbols 571 spray pattern 438
IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) Irrigation Head tool 436
assigning IFC data to objects 782 Irrigation Line tool 437
assigning IFC data to zones 784 Issue data, editing 565
creating IFC schedules 789 Issue Manager command 665
exporting columns and pilasters 146
exporting projects in IFC format 790 J
importing IFC files 790 Joists, creating when framing floors 163
model view definition 790
overview of 779 K
using custom pSets 786 Key to instrumentation 524
IFC Data command 782, 785 Keynote legend
Illumination, measuring 480 editing without database 643
Images placing with database 656
in worksheets 617 placing without database 641
referencing 729 Keynotes
setting for video objects 508 deleting 643
1044 | Index

editing without database 643 auto-numbering 451, 467

placing without database 641 changing labels 470
Keys 939 classing 18
Keyways 845 colors 18
Knowledgebase xiv converting symbols into accessories 476
counting 473
L creating 457
Label Legend Manager command 452 creating summaries of 524
Label legends (for lighting instruments) device type 460
activating 452 displaying light beam 461
assigning new 473 exchanging data with Lightwright 811
changing reference symbols 455 exporting data 809
classes for 452 finding and modifying 472
color of labels 456 focusing 477
container types 453 ganging 474
creating 452 importing data 810
creating from existing 457 inserting 458
deleting 452 inserting accessories 476
editing 454 inserting as a plug-in object 458
formatting 455 label legends 451
importing 457 layers and classes 439
inserting instruments 459 light beam 479
modifying for instruments 470 maintenance, of data 522
non-rotating labels 454 multi-circuit 473
refreshing labels 461 numbering 473
renaming 455 numbering manually 468
repositioning labels 456 parameter display 21
right-reading labels 453 properties, changing 462
stacking order 456 properties, entering 459
Landmark, new features of i properties, entering advanced 466
Landscape Area tool 428 refreshing data 471
Landscape Wall Arc tool 338 replacing 469, 473
Landscape Wall Bzier tool 338 replacing with active symbol 461
Landscape Wall tool 337 setup 18
Layers, design shutter cuts 464
description of 1 solid light beam 480
for magic sheets 538 specifications for custom symbols 985
from Landmark standards 2 specifying distribution file 466
mapping 16 turning on 466
merging 17 two-fers 474
standard naming 12 Lighting Inventory Setup command 524
visibility codes in Layermap worksheet 1011 Lighting Pipe Ladder tool 443
Layers, sheet Lighting Pipe tool 441
description of 1 Lighting positions
standard naming 12 auto-numbering 451
Leader Line tool 595 converting to 450
LED screen tool 496 curved truss 447
Legend, door hardware 32 finding and modifying 472
Light beams hanging cards 539
drawing representation of 479 inserting 450
from gobo projections 541 lighting pipe 441
Light info record 988 lighting pipe ladder 443
Light plots 439 properties of 451
Light Position Obj tool 450 refreshing data 471
Lighting instruments straight truss 446
2D characteristics 985 workflow 440
3D characteristics 986 z-value 451
aligning and distributing 471 Lighting Symbol Maintenance command 522
assigning a focus point 478 Lightwright
auto-increment fields 468 data exchange, with Spotlight 811
 Index | 1045

data transfer, for older versions 993 reconciling notes 660

Unique ID field 809 saving preferences 655
Linear Material tool 572 with database 650
Lines with repeating symbols, creating 575 without database 641
Live sections 740 Notes, general
Locate Label Legend in Resource Browser command 454 adding 648
Loci adding to database 653
converting 3D polygons into 292 editing 649
creating from 2D polygons 291 editing database 654
marking centroids of objects with 826 editing without database 649
placing with database 658
M placing without database 646
Magic sheets search filter 654
automatic design layer for 538 Number Instruments command 468
color 537 Numbering, of lighting instruments
focus area 537 automatic 467
generating 538 multi-circuit instruments 468
Manage Databases command 1021 NURBS roadway 329
Manage Scenes command 545 NURBS surfaces, creating arrays on 711
Mapping NURBS surfaces, unfolding 710
classes and layers 16 Nuts
imported instrument data (Spotlight) 811 acorn 893
naming standards 11 hex 873, 877
Maps, as site model source data 293 hex cap 894
Massing Model tool 319 hex jam 873, 877
Massing model, creating custom roof for 322 knurled thumb 895
Material Note tool 848 slotted hex 873, 877
Model to Floorplan command 87 square 873, 877
Modifiers, site model wing - type A 896
See Site model modifiers wing - type B 896
Modify by Record command 608 wing - type C 897
Move Geographic command 625 wing - type D 898
Multi-circuit instruments wing (ISO/DIN) 895
converting instruments into 474 with screws or bolts 873
creating symbols for 989
inserting 473 O
numbering automatically 451 Object Connection command 1026
numbering manually 468 Objects
auto-classing 15, 1013
N changing attributes based on a record value 608
Names counting in Spotlight 473
creating standard names (layers, classes, viewports) 11 creating 3D from 2D 817
reserved by Landmark 1018 creating custom path plug-in 981
Navigation palette 599 creating from shapes 696
New features creating similar 699
in the Design Series i customizing plug-in sizes 998
North Arrow tool 591 deleting with Find and Modify command 473
Notes Manager deselecting with Find and Modify command 473
adding text to a database 659 modifying selected 606
converting from previous versions 664 selecting with Find and Modify command 473
database format 973 selecting with Select Similar tool 613
editing database callout 655 sending to the site model surface 306
general notes with database 658 ODBC
general notes without database 646 connecting objects to the database 1026
keynote legend without database 641 connecting record formats to the database 1023
keynotes without database 641 connecting to the database 1020
networked database 663 connection options 1024
overview of 641 creating a database table from records 1033
placing database callouts 650 creating records from the database 1031
placing database keynote legend 656 editing object connections to the database 1029
1046 | Index

overview of 1019 Pilasters

removing object connections from the database 1031 creating in Architect 139
setting up the database 1020 exporting to IFC format 146
specifying key identifier 1022 Pinions 916
updating automatically 1035 Pins
updating manually 1035 clevis 903
using setup in another file 1023 cotter 904
workflow 1019 dowel 905
Offset links (for roller chains) 930 parallel 905
OmniClass codes 118 taper 906
Overrides Pipe-and-drape assemblies 488
for class properties in design layer viewports 737 Piping runs 284
for layer properties in design layer viewports 735 Place Spaces command 805
Plant clusters
P changing the boundary display 390
Pad, creating 309 editing the polygon shape 397
Page properties 538 Plant database
Palettes adding to 408
Navigation 599 additional plant data 403
Panels (electrical or communication) creating plant lists 410
creating a custom symbol 976 editing 407
creating a schedule of 285 importing 402
creating riser diagrams of 287 metric or imperial units 407
inserting and naming 276 opening 400
Paperwork (Spotlight) overview of 400
configuring headers 538 regional plant data 403
creating color cut lists 537 removing entry 408
creating magic sheets 537 searching for plants 404
entering page properties 538 status area 403
entering show information 538 viewing records 403
reviewing generated paperwork 538 web view 408
setting up inventory reports 535 Plant Line command 432
setting up schedules 533 Plant tags
Parking Along Path tool 584 appearance of 396
Parking Area tool 581 creating custom 394
Parking Spaces tool 585 Plant tool 385
Partition ID labels 571 Plants
Parts list, creating 852 attaching database information 411
PartSpec files, importing 813 converting clusters to single plants 398
Patch information for lighting console, exporting 810 converting to a cluster 399
PDF creating definitions 375
batch publishing 779 creating geometry 383
export 776 definitions, and workgroup referencing 377
import 774 editing 395
referencing PDF files 729 editing attributes 396
snapping to imported PDF 775 exporting definitions 377
People, adding to drawings 700 massing 382
PhotoGrid tool 480 obtaining Internet information 408
Photometer placing 385
custom threshold colors 991 properties of 395
inserting 482 replacing 397
properties of 483 showing or hiding styles 435
Photometer tool 482 Plates (roof framing) 155
Photometric grid Plug-in objects
custom threshold colors 991 creating custom path objects 981
inserting 480 customizing size settings 998
properties of 481 resetting parameters from a previous version 975
threshold colors 481 Plumbing
Pick up Redline command 639 ID labels for 566
Pilaster tool 139 objects 275
 Index | 1047

Polygons for walls 117

converting to loci 292 modifying objects by record value 608
removing extra vertices (site models) 294 TagSchema (for custom ID symbols) 967
Polylines Redline tool 635
creating road centerlines with 323 Redlines
creating spaces from 86 attaching a sketch to 638
Preference sets picking up 639
See Project preference sets properties of 638
Print area 538 restoring 640
Printing showing or hiding 639
label legends 452 status report for 640
refreshing data before 471 Refresh Instruments command 471
scale bar 594 Remove Object Connection command 1031
units 538 Rendering
Programming studies 90 gobo projections 544
Project preference sets lighting scenes 546
adding a set to the available list 36 Rendering time 446, 700
creating new 36 Renderworks
list of files in 1017 creating solar animations with shadows 680
selecting a different set 35 rendering gobo projections 541
VA Defaults set 35 Repetitive Unit tool 574
Projection options (georeferencing) 629 Replace Instrument command 469
Property Line tool 350 Replace with Symbol command 624
Property lines Reports, inventory 535
creating 350 Reset All Plug-ins command 975
creation methods 350 Resolution, setting for a landscape wall 339
editing 353 Resources
Property sets, custom 786 exporting to another file 616
Proposed site model 289 Restore Redline command 640
Publish command 779 Retaining rings 907
Pulleys 923 Retaining walls 333
Purlins 155 Retaining washers 908
Revision management 635
Q Revision Marker tool 591
QuickTime movies Ridges (roof framing) 157
animating scenes for 546 Rise over run 593
creating a solar animation 680 Rivets
saving lighting scenes for 545 DIN 910
large 909
R small 909
tubular 911
Radii of gyration, calculating 828 Roads
Rafters changing sections into site modifiers 327
common 153
creating a centerline 323
hip and valley 158 creating from stakes 326
Ramp tool 272
grade limits for 327
Ramps 272
NURBS roadways 329
Recalculating placing station points 324
bill of materials 852 properties of 327
parts list 853
setting stake elevations 326
Reconcile Notes command 660 Roadway (NURBS) tool 329
Record Format Connection command 1023
Roof Framer command 150
Records
Roofs
creating custom (Architect) 32
adding accessories 146
defining custom (Architect) 27 customizing for a massing model 322
editing for wall styles 570
framing 150
editing with ID label tool 566, 570
Room finishes
editing with worksheets 569 applying to a space object 79
for lighting accessories 989
creating and editing 76
for panel symbols 277, 977
legend 34
for slabs 105
1048 | Index

schedule 62, 80 Section Note tool 847

Room Name Simple tool 41 Section views
Rotate Plan command 721 advanced properties of 750
converting 746, 750
S creating and sectioning elevation views 762
Sash openings, custom 194 creating from unlinked section lines 761
Save Palette Positions command 599 creating on design layer 747
Scale bar tool 594 creating on sheet layer 741
Scanned sketches, importing 975 creating standard viewports for 10
Scenes, lighting modifying 758
animating 546 overview of 740
creating movies of scene transitions 546 viewport parameters, design layer 749
editing 546 viewport parameters, sheet layer 744
removing 546 viewport status display 754
restoring 546 Section-Elevation Marker tool 756
saving 545 Select Similar tool 613
Schedules Send to Surface command 306
defining custom (Architect) 29 Set Default Symbol Class command 16
for doors 222 Shadow angles, calculating 688
for electrical panels 285 Shaft analysis
for IFC data 789 adding user-defined information to 1000
for room finishes 62, 80 properties of 825
for seating count 558, 693 Shaft Analysis command 825
for windows 196 Shaft Break 2 tool 847
format 286 Shaft Break tool 847
generating (Architect) 32 Shaft tool 931
ID label tool 566 Shapefiles, importing 802
setting up (Spotlight) 533 Sheet borders
Screw threads 845 adding a custom title block (Design Series) 972
Screws at setup 3
cap 873 creating a sheet list from 589
hex 873 editing issue data 565
lag 898 editing tolerance block 564
machine 873 inserting with drawing setup 26
self-tapping 899 pre-formatted 561
set 873 properties of 561
sheet metal 899 revision block data 563
shoulder 873 Sheet list index 589
thumb 900 Show or Hide Plant Styles command 435
with nuts 873 Show or Hide Redlines command 639
wood 902 Show or Hide Site Modifiers command 349
Scrim Show or Hide Spray Pattern command 438
creating 491 Shutter cuts 464
inserting 485 Simple Beam Analysis command 834
Scripts Simple Beam Calculator command 835
creating custom modification scripts 606 Simple Beam command 830
Seating layouts Simple beams
creating 692 adding user-defined information to 1000
creating custom symbols for 990 analyzing 834
editing 693 calculator for 835
Seating Count schedule 556, 692 configuring properties of 830
Section lines creating diagrams 830
adding to other layers 759 customizing 1002
drawing 740 example of using 1005
instances 759 template file 830
modifying 758 worksheets for 833
navigating to 759 Simplify 3D Polygons command 294
properties of 755 Site border, editing 303
reshaping 760 Site model modifiers
unlinked, creating section viewport from 761 custom 319
 Index | 1049

grade limits 313 purging unused 672

grade object 365 setting the default 672
hardscapes 339 using hidden line rendering 678
landscape walls 331 Sketches, importing 975
massing models 319 SketchUp file, importing 794
NURBS roadways 329 Slab styles
pad with retaining edge 311 applying 107
pads 309 creating 101
roads 323 editing 106
showing and hiding 349 replacing 108
spoil pile 316 using 101
stakes 368 Slab tool 97
texture beds 317 Slabs
Site Model Section command 358 clipping 112
Site models converting styled to unstyled 108
analyzing grades 366 converting to and from auto-boundary mode 100
applying texture to 301 creating components for 109
break line 365 creating from existing walls 99
correcting errors 350 designating a datum component 102
creating a grading area 316 drawing manually 98
creating a snapshot of 305 editing 112
creating from source data 295 overview of 97
creating sectional views 358 setting attributes by class 103
cropping 303 Slope Dimension tool 593
determining elevation with stake object 368 Slope, calculating 361
displaying area of 302 Soft goods
displaying cut and fill volume 302 display options 491
displaying grade 361 inserting curtains/borders 485
editing contour labels 304 inserting pipe-and-drape assemblies 488
importing source data 289 setting labels 493
mapping images on 319 Soft Goods tool 485
migrating from previous versions 975 Solar animations
overview of 289 creating 684
properties of 301 exporting 686
reporting volume 354 overview of 684
reshaping 304 Solar studies 680
sending objects to surface 306 Source data (site models)
setting graphic properties 298 converting 3D polygons to 3D loci 292
showing drainage 297 creating 289
simplifying 3D polygons 294 creating from 2D polygons 291
updating 302 creating site models from 295
using a map as source data 293 entering map data on a grid 292
validating source data 293 importing from a file 289
zone of visual influence 357 validating 293
Site Modifiers tool 309, 316 Space Link tool 94
Sizing Space planning 41
calculating for conductors 281 Space tool 41
calculating for conduits 283 Spaces
Sketch command 674 anchor control point 88
Sketch Options command 674 assigning room finishes 79
Sketch rendering 672 column, pillar, and shaft guidelines 82
Sketch styles converting symbols into space labels 75
applying the default 674 creating 41
applying to an object 676 creating custom lists and labels 80
applying to hatches 677 creating custom space labels 72
applying to sheet layer viewports 678 creating from polylines 86
applying to specific objects 676 creating from walls 85
creating custom 676 creating walls from 83
deleting 676 editing boundaries of 88
editing 674 editing existing space labels 71
1050 | Index

entering GSA data 81 importing from an external file 290

label control point 88 placing along a road polyline 324
linking 94 properties of 369
manual and autoboundary 89 setting elevation 326
properties of 44 using as geographic markers 370
sharing custom files with a workgroup 80 Standard Naming command 11
sharing space labels with a workgroup 71 Standards
standard naming for 68 custom 13
template for custom space labels 57, 71 structuring the file with 1
Speaker Array tool 514 Station on Polyline command 324
Speaker tool 511 Station point, placing along a road polyline 324
Speakers Stepped walls 331
arrays, inserting 514 Stipple settings, saving 672
creating and using libraries of 511 Stipple tool 669
formatting speaker labels 520 Stories
inserting 511 changing elevation 8
overview of 510 creating 6
Spoil pile area 316 default layers 4
Spotlight Preferences command 18, 23, 811 managing 6
Spotlight, new features of i overview of 4
Spray patterns, showing and hiding (irrigation) 438 Straight Truss tool 446
Spring calculator Structural shapes 145, 162, 167
adding user-defined information to 1000 Summaries, of Spotlight lighting instruments 524
customizing materials list 1001 Sun studies 684
example of using 1003 Surface area, calculating 828
properties of 818 Surface arrays 710
Spring Calculator command 818 Surfaces, unfolding 710
Springs Symbols
around object 957 attaching light info records to 988
Belleville 955 converting into lighting accessories 476, 989
compression 956 converting into lighting instruments 457, 985
conical compression 958 converting into multi-circuit instruments 989
die 959 creating lines with repeating symbols 575
extension 960 for ID labels 571
torsion 963 replacing selected objects with 624
Sprockets 925 reserved names 1018
Stacking Diagram tool 96
Stair tool 226 T
See also Custom Stair tool TagSchema record 967
Stairs Tapped holes 577
correcting geometry errors 234 Television tool 494
disabling min/max values 228 Templates
editing custom 268 cam 837
inserting 225 Geneva mechanism 843
inserting custom 257 lighting positions 440
inserting escalators 270 simple beam 830
managing stair styles 251 Text, adding to database 659
overview of 225 Texture beds 317
properties of 226 Thomas Register, importing 813
properties of custom 268 Thread styles, for fastener tools 882
saving as symbol 252 Title blocks
setting min/max geometry ranges 254 at setup 3
setting properties from the Object Info palette 255 controlling with the Issue Manager 664
setting total rise by layer elevation 233 customizing for Design Series 972
transferring attributes 255 Tolerance blocks
Stake tool 368 adding to sheet border 562
Stakes editing 564
converting 3D loci into 371 Tolerancing
creating a road from 326 controlling markers and text 853
determining a points elevation with 368 feature control frames 853
 Index | 1051

inserting notes 857 Viewports, section

Top hats (lighting accessories) 475 See Section views
Trees, existing Viewports, sheet layer
See Existing Trees applying sketch styles to 678
Triangle, solution 827 creating detail drawings with 572
Triangulated Irregular Network 289 creating detail viewports 762
Trimmers (roof framing) 157 creating multiple viewports with 769
Trusses creating standard 9
configuration requirements for 449 setting up standard naming for 12
curved 447 Views
rotating curved 449 creating automatically at setup 11
straight 446 of Spotlight plot and model 547
Two-fers 474 redefining saved views 605
rotating 721
U standard naming 12
Unfold Surfaces command 710 Visibility
Units, specifying when printing 538 of irrigation spray patterns 438
Universe, assigning automatically 23 of site modifiers 349
Update External Database command 1036 Volume, calculating 828
Update Settings command 1036 VW Plants Database command 401
Update Space Boundaries command 89 VWArch standards 1009
Update Vectorworks Document command 1036
User folders (Vectorworks preference) 38 W
Utility Cabinet tool 707 Wall Cabinet tool 708
Wall features
V creating wall projections 130
VA Create Record command 32 creating wall recesses 132
VA Create Schedule command 32 editing 134
VA Records and Schedules command 27 properties of 134
VA Set Project Prefs command 35 Wall Framer command 169
VA Setup Data file 1009 Wall styles
Validate 3D Data command 293 applying 120
Vectorworks Cloud Services xiv codes for 118
Vectorworks Service Select xiii creating 119
Vegetation Line command 433 editing 119
Video objects editing ID labels and records 570
formatting labels for 509 replacing 121
inserting an LED array 496 Walls
inserting blended screens 503 converting styled to unstyled 121
inserting screens and projectors 499 creating from spaces 83
inserting televisions 494 creating projections on 130
overview of 494 creating recesses in 132
setting the image for 508 creating retaining walls 333
Video Screen tool 499 creating spaces from 85
Viewports, design layer creating stepped walls 331
changing layer properties 735 creating, in Architect 114
creating by cropping 726 DOE-2 export 808
creating from a design layer 724 exterior dimensions 587
creating referenced 726 framing 169
cropping 734 hiding components 127
editing an associated design layer 732 inserting corner windows 183
editing references 728 joining components 125
moving and editing 732 moving connected 122
overriding class properties 737 preferences for 115
properties of 730 virtual wall style 83
transferring attributes between 732 Washers
Viewports, detail lock 873
creating 762 plain 873
properties of 765 retaining 908
properties of detail callouts 768 Welding symbols
1052 | Index

editing arrow segments 871 importing schedule format 535

fillet 859 irrigation 37
flange 864 layermap 1010
groove 861 parts list 852
seam 865 plant list 37
slot-plug 867 redline 640
spot 865 roof face area 150
stud 865 seating layout 558, 693
surface texture 870 simple beam 833
surfacing 865 station 325
Window tool 175 wall areas 119
Window Wall (Curved) tool 197 wall framer 170
Window Wall (Straight) tool 197 wall styles 119
Windows World files, support for 804
converting objects into 569
creating a custom sash opening 194 Z
creating a schedule 196 Zone of Visual Influence command 357
creating corner windows 183 Z-section tool 137
creating symbols 222 Z-value, and lighting positions 451
DOE-2 Export 808
editing multiple 196
ID labels for 181, 566
inserting 175
properties of 175
window walls, inserting 197
Wood screws 902
Woodruff keys 940
Workflows
detail drawings 572
documenting existing trees 413
IFC 781
lighting design 439
lighting design accessories and paperwork 485
lighting positions 440
NURBS roadway 329
ODBC 1019
planting 375
site modeling 289
Workgroup folders (Vectorworks preference) 37
Workgroup references
creating a referenced design layer viewport 726
specifying content folders 38
to image files 815
to PDF files 774
to project preference sets 1018
Worksheets
adjacency matrix 91
beam and load data 833
beam calculation results 833
bill of materials 851
cam data 842
creating a sheet list 589
diffuser report 276
editing record information 569
editing standard naming 14
existing tree 37
formatting schedules (Architect) 29
generating schedules (Architect) 32
HVAC 275
images in 617